Deeper Insights Into the Illuminati Formula

Mirrored from http://www.whale.to/b/springmeier_deeper.html. Please note, this version of Fritz Springmeiers book lacks images, and probably has some bits missing. To get the original source please go to Fritz’s website http://pentracks.com/ and purchase yourself a copy!

–

DEEPER INSIGHTS INTO THE ILLUMINATI FORMULA

by Fritz Springmeier & Cisco Wheeler

Important Explanation of Contents

A successful treasure hunter of the sea said, “You have to convinceothers of what you are looking for, and be incredibly persistent in looking forit.” I, Fritz, could really identify with what he was saying. I havesearched for truth like a treasure hunter, I have sifted the dusty pages ofdocuments, like a patient miner panning for gold. How far & deep are youwilling to search for truth? Cisco and I feel we are accountable to tell you thewhole truth as far as we know it, what you do with that is up to you. This bookwill explain many occult ideas and beliefs, many of them never before publiclyrevealed. There is an important reason why these occult ideas and beliefs areintroduced, we need to study our enemy and know how he thinks. The U.S. Armyused indian scouts to track the indians. Gen. MacArthur learned everything hecould about the Japanese so that he could defeat them. Christ was extremelysavvy as to Satan’s tricks. The Apostle said, “We are not ignorant ofSatan’s devices.” Time and time again, this author has seen powerfulMasonic clergyman do their handshakes, their codewords, etc. in front of thecommon people and the Christians do not catch on. On the one hand the Christianswant proof of what is happening, but on the other hand, they are not willing tolearn how to identify what the opposition is doing. Such doublemindedness hascontributed to the churches becoming, sad-to-say, fronts for the Illuminati. Ihave included the Illuminati’s understanding of things and other occultbeliefs, because I have witnessed that knowing these things can be helpful indefeating the mind-control. If I were trying to help a refugee who was trying toescape the Yakuza, I would study the tactics of the Yakuza. If I were trying tofree a witch of JuJuism, then I would learn about JuJuism. I strongly recommendthat readers always stand on the foundation of the Word of God, and that theyuse the Word of God as a refreshing bath to cleanse their minds. This author hasfound tapes with scriptures to be an encouragement.

Some Christians have criticized this author for the content of the books,because it doesn’t portray the lighter side of Christianity (whatever thatis). It seems some people only want enough of God to to make them cozy, but notso much that their sleep would be disturbed. Some have even gone so far as toclaim this author is not a Christian because the content of the books is soheavy. It is sad that many Christians do not know their own Scriptures nor wherehope comes from. True hope is given by the Spirit of God, because hope is thevantage point that the Spirit of God has for the situation. A therapist may beoptimistic about a victim of mind-control, but the therapist’s optimism onlyturns to sincere hope when they become involved personally with the tragedies ofthe victim through caring and prayer. The Biblical hope is not a warm fuzzy thathas its head in the sand pretending that everything is “rosy andpeachy”. Quite to the contrary, if we look at the following portion ofscripture, we will see the Word of God portraying trauma after trauma with alight still at the end of the tunnel! Such is the power of our hope, that wehave hope in spite of how fierce evil manifests.

Lamentations chapter 1

1 I am the man that hath seen affliction by the rod of his wrath.

2 He hath led me, and brought me into darkness, but not into light.

3 Surely against me is he turned; he turneth his hand against me all the day.

4 My flesh and my skin hath he made old; he hath broken my bones.

5 He hath builded against me, and compassed me with gall and travail.

6 He hath set me in dark places, as they that be dead of old.

7 He hath hedged me about, that I cannot get out: he hath made my chain heavy.

8 Also when I cry and shout, he shutteth out my prayer.

9 He hath inclosed my ways with hewn stone, he hath made my paths crooked.

10 He was unto me as a bear lying in wait, and as a lion in secret places.

11 He hath turned aside my ways, and pulled me in pieces: he hath made me desolate.

12 He hath bent his bow, and set me as a mark for the arrow.

13 He hath caused the arrows of his quiver to enter into my reins.

14 I was a derision to all my people; and their song all the day.

15 He hath filled me with bitterness, he hath made me drunken with wormwood.

16 He hath also broken my teeth with gravel stones, he hath covered me with ashes.

17 And thou hast removed my soul far off from peace: I forgat prosperity.

18 And I said, My strength and my hope is perished from the LORD:

19 Remembering mine affliction and my misery, the wormwood and the gall.

20 My soul hath them still in remembrance, and is bowed down within me.

21 This I recall to my mind, therefore have I hope.

22 (It is of) Jehovah’s Iovingkindnesss that we are not consumed, becausehis compassions fail not.

23 They are new every morning; great is thy faithfulness.

24 The LORD is my portion, saith my soul; therefore will I hope in Him.

25 The LORD is good unto them that wait for Him, to the soul that seekethhim.

26 It is good that a man should both hope and quietly wait for the salvation of the LORD.
We are in a battle for our minds, are we willing to seize the hope that is before us, or will we resign and say “all is lost”? Discouragement is not of faith. Do you think Almighty God is a discouraged person? He is calling people to serve others, because God knows that you will never find happiness in selfishness. God is calling people to bind up the broken shattered multiples and to let their deeper parts know that they are loved and worthwhile. To adopt an attitude of defeat before freedom loving men and women have exhausted all potential remedies for this mind-control is inexcusable.

DEDICATION

This book is dedicated to the two million Americans and counting who havebeen programmed with Monarch-type trauma-based mind control. This book iswritten to destroy trauma-based mind control before it destroys the human race.It’s time for this horrendous secret to end. It is also written as part of God’send time work to propel people of faith to the high calling that is propheciedof the Body, but cannot be attained without men of faith understanding thesethings. Humanity’s great prophet said he came to heal those whose hearts hadbeen broken–literally split and crushed, and to free those who are captive.That work needs to go forward. Blood, sweat and tears are associated with thisbook. The blood of the innocent victims of this mind-control cries out in asingle unison, along with the pungent sweat of those who have tried to ministerhelp to the shattered humanity left by the sadistic programmers, and the poolsof tears shed as this book was written, “How long, O Lord, holy and true,do you not judge and avenge our blood on earth?”

HOPE

…. Thou shalt know that I am Lord: For they shall not be ashamed that waiton Me. Shall the prey be taken from the mighty, or the lawful captive delivered?But thus saith Yahweh, even the captives of the mighty shall be taken away, andthe prey of the terrible shall be delivered: for I will contend with him thatcontendeth with thee, and I will save thy children. Isaiah 49:23b-25

WARNING, READ THIS FIRST BEFORE READING THE BOOK

IF THERE IS ANY CHANCE you the reader have had mind-control done to you, youmust consider the following book to be DANGEROUS. If you are consulting atherapist for DID (also known as MPD), it is recommended that you consult yourtherapist before reading this book. The complications that could result forthose under mind control learning the truth–could be fatal. The co-authors takeno responsibility for those who read or misuse this information. The reader’smind is like a garden. It may not be time to plant the truth in your mind.Perhaps you need some weeding or ground preparation, before the garden of yourmind is ready. Perhaps the weather is too stormy to plant the truth. Pray to theLord of the Harvest. The blessings that flow from planting the information ofthis book in your mind, will require the presence of living waters of love. Ifyou do not have love in your heart, this book is not for you. The informationcontained in this book is the biggest news-story of the 20th century, and stillthe biggest secret. It will challenge you, shock you, horrify you and hopefullymotivate you to redouble your efforts to humble yourself and seek strength fromGod Almighty.

The programming procedures which are described in this book are based onresearch and consultation with deprogrammers, ex-programmers, therapists,counselors and pertinent literature. To the best of our knowledge the statementsmade in this book are factual, although they may not reflect the latest orcurrently accepted methodology among each and every faction of the New WorldOrder which carries out Monarch-type programming. This book tends to devote moreemphasis to Illuminati programming, which is the highest level of programming.For individual application in understanding a survivor of Monarch programming,therapists are admonished to use this material with consideration for theMonarch victim’s personal case and situation. The authors disclaim anyresponsibility for therapeutic work based upon this material.

Fritz Springmeier and Cisco Wheeler have co-authored They Know Not What TheyDo, An Illustrated Guidebook To Monarch Mind Control. Both Fritz and Cisco bringyears of experience in dealing with Monarch programming to bear on the writingof this book. Fritz has researched the Illuminati, while he has worked withvictims of its programming. He has authored The Top 13 Illuminati Families, andseveral other books.

INTRODUCTION by Fritz

There are many dangers to the human race, some real and some imagined. Ibelieve that the trauma-based mind control which this book exposes is thegreatest danger to the human race. It gives evil men the power to carry out anyevil deed totally undetected. By the time the astute reader finishes this book,they will be as familiar with how to carry out trauma-based mind-control as someof the programmers. Ancient and more recent secrets will no longer be secrets.Over the years, I have spent thousands of hours studying the Illuminati, theIntelligence agencies of the world, and the occult world in general. Thecenterpiece of these organizations is the trauma-based mind control that theycarry out. Without the ability to carry out this sophisticated type ofmind-control using MPD, drugs, hypnosis and electronics and other controlmethodologies, these organizations would fail to keep their dark evil deedssecret. When one of the mind-control programmers of the Church of Scientology,who has left Scientology, was asked about MPD, he said, “It’s the name ofthe game of mind control.” Research into this subject will never becomplete. This book has tried to give a comprehensive view of how theprogramming is done. The basic techniques were developed in German, Scottish,Italian, and English Illuminati families and have been done for centuries. Somereport that some of the techniques go back to ancient Egypt and ancient Babylonto the ancient mystery religions. The Nazis are known to have studied ancientEgyptian texts in their mind control research. The records and secrets of thegenerational Illuminati bloodlines are very-well guarded secrets.

Even when I’ve learned about the location of secret depositories of some ofthe Illuminati’s secrets in Europe, America, and Asia, their records andsecrets are too well-guarded to be examined. The intelligence agencies, such asMI-6 began investigating these mind-control techniques early this century, buttheir records have been routinely destroyed and tampered with. There are somesurvivors and professionals who know that the British used programmedtrauma-based MPD (DID) agents in W.W. I. In Jan., 1987, Richard Kluft submittedan article to the American Journal of Clinical Hypnosis about 8 MPD patients whowere between 60 and 72 years of age. Traugott Konstantin Oesterreich(1880-1949), who was professor of philosophy at Tubingen University, Germanystudied MPD and demonic possession and wrote a classic study of it in 1921entitled Possession Demonical & Other, which was translated into english in1930. His classic work on this subject provides documented cases which revealthat the basic trauma-based mind-control was going on in Germany, France &Belgium long before the 20th century. Although he is unable to put together allthe pieces and the clues for what they are, the reader of this book might enjoyreading the 1930 English translation of his classic work after they finish thisbook. Oesterreich’s research in early 1900s was the type of research that theNazi mind-control programmers were very aware of. In 1921, the Germans such asOesterreich would describe personality switches, by the term “somnambuliform[hypnotic states] possession” or “demonical somnambulism” or whatmight be called “Besessenheit von Hypnotismus und bösen Geistern.”

The ability to study both the spiritual & psychological aspects ofmind-control phenomena, is often lacking today. There are exceptions such as Dr.Loreda Fox’s book The Spiritual Dimensions of MPD. In the 1920s, the Germansalso were aware that the human mind has a variety of ego-psycho-psysiologicalstates rather than one unified mind, which they termed “Sub jecklosePsychologie” or the psychology of having correlated psychological statesrather than the concept of a single ego. The Germans and Italians under the Naziand Fascist governments began to do serious scientific research intotrauma-based mind control. Under the auspices of the Kaiser Wilhelm MedicalInstitute in Berlin, Joseph Mengele conducted mind-control research on thousandsof twins, and thousands of other hapless victims. Himmler supervised geneticresearch. The Nazi research records were confiscated by the Allies and are stillclassified. A trip can be made from downtown Washington D.C. on agray-government van which serves as a shuttle to the Suitland Annex where thegovernment’s secrets are buried including research papers captured from theNazi Mind-Control research. Most of Mengele’s concentration camp research isstill classified. Much of it dealt with mind control. A researcher can visit thetop floor, but underground below the top floor are the real secrets. The realsecrets are lying in millions of sheets of classified documents hidden behindblast proof doors. There they have vault after vault, and row after row oftop-secret files that only a few privileged persons with security clearancesabove COSMIC–such as with a “C3” or “MJ” security clearancecan visit. Everyone with these high security clearances which I have identifiedis connected to the Illuminati. Each underground area at Suitland Annex has itsown subset of secret access words, known only to the initiated. Most of the OSSrecords have been destroyed, a few have been left, the important ones have beenmisfiled or remade. (This is according to a reliable British intelligent agent.)Also according to reliable inside sources the CIA is working night and day toremake old records, to expunge all the real dirty secrets from their records.The basement of CIA HQ is known as “the Pit,” In the Pit documents arebeing shredded and burned on a round the clock basis. The large remains of thesesecrets are sold for landfill. The Illuminati have developed secrecy to a fineart. They train their people in the art of secrecy from the time they are born.Most everything they do, is done orally. They are trained not to write ritualsand other things down. There is very little paper trail left by the Illuminati.

The creation of slaves with photographic memories facilitates this secrecy.But this book is not about how they have managed to keep their trauma-basedMonarch Mind-Control a secret. They have managed only to keep it a secret to thegeneral public. They have not been able to completely cover-up the millions ofwasted lives that their programming has ruined. For many years, they were ableto shut-up and quietly discard their programmed multiples by labelling themParanoid Schizophrenics. But therapists are now correctly identifying thesepeople as programmed multiples and are not only diagnosing them better butgiving them better treatment. After Candy Jones’s husband deprogrammed herenough that she could participate in writing a book exposing some of what hadbeen done to her, the secret was out. (See The Control of Candy Jones Hypnotismand the CIA by Donald Bain.) Ever since then, the intelligence agencies and theIlluminati have been carrying out damage control. Their biggest damage controlcampaign has enlisted the power of Hollywood and the controlled Media. Thiscampaign is known as the False Memory Syndrome campaign, or as those of us whoknow the facts like to call it “”the false memory spin-drome.”The headquarters of the False Memory Spin-drom Foundation is located at 3401Market St., Suite 130, Philadelphia, PA 19104. Some of the original founderswere doctors of the University of Pennslyvannia. The inside story about theseearly FMS doctors of the University of Pennslyvannia is that they practicedSatanic Rituals during their work days. What is unusual about this–is thatgenerally satanic rituals are performed at night, but these doctors did theircoven work during the day. I know about these men. Now you can see why these menstarted the FMS! They started it to cover their own sins, because many of themwere abusers themselves. In other words many of the EMS people are abusers oftrauma-based mind-controlled slaves, or the victims of abuse who are in denialabout their own abuse from trauma-based mind-control. Martin T. Orn (the personcredited with founding the FMS) had ties to the CIA. Two members of the EMSadvisory board, Ralph Underwager, Ph.D. and theologian, along with HollidaWakefield, M.A. let the cat out of the bag when they publicly supportedpedophilia (that is adults having sex with children). Their support ofpedophilia came in an interview with a Dutch magazine Paidika, The Journal ofPaedophilia (Winter, 1993).

Although the False Memory Syndrome Foundation gets upset at any mention thatthere might be a conspiracy by the perpetrators of mind-control, becauseconspiracies supposedly don’t and can’t happen, they want us to believe thatall therapists are conspiring together to implant false memories of abuse intotheir clients, which could not be further from the truth. Monarch slavestypically run into a great deal of denial by their therapists that anything likethis could be happening. The bottom line is that Multiple Personality Disorder(now refered to as Dissociative Identity Disorder) is a recognized bona fidediagnosis. False Memory Syndrome is not a recognized medical or psychologicaldiagnosis and does not appear in the American Psychiatric Association’sDiagnostic and Statistical Manual III-R nor the recently released DSM-IV. Thosewho followed Fritz’s writings have learned about the close workingrelationship between the Mondavi’s and the Rothschilds (see his article aboutthe Mondavi/Rothschild Napa Valley winery). Guess who got the court precedencewhich gives the EMS some legal ground to attack therapists? The precidence wassupposedly a wife who went to a doctor who told her she had syphilis. The wifeassumes she got it from her husband and divorces him. Then she learns she doesn’thave syphilis. The husband then sues the doctor. Upon this bizarre case reststhe legal precedence for a third party to sue a person who gives advice, such asfamily members suing a therapist.

Upon this weak precidence, an abusive father who worked for Monday in awinery in California successfully destroyed a legitimate therapist who wastrying to save his daughter who was a programmed Monarch victim. Supposedly thetherapist had implanted false memories of rape in his daughter, when the recordshows that the daughter’s mother told the therapist the girl had been raped bythe father. When a valid case of SRA and repressed memories went to trial inWashington state involving a police officer whose family was MPD, Dr. RichardOfshe of the False Memory Spindrom showed up to cause mischief. And mischief hedid work. The case involved the children of a “”Christian””police officer named Ingram who had satanically ritually abused his family foryears. The daughter won in court, but Ofshe of the EMS was not above writing abook full of lies and distortions about the case. Lynn Crook, who was the abuseddaughter in the case wrote up a paper exposing what EMS person Richard Ofshe didto her, The controlled media is giving full license and great coverage to theEMS people. Rather than fighting the government for scraps of declassifieddocuments which have had their secrets marked out, and which may even be fakedocuments manufactured by the CIA, I have decided that there is a much betterapproach to expose the Monarch Mind Control to the world. If a person couldnever go to Nepal, he can see pictures of it and believe it exists. If a personcan not get into the top secret records of the CIA and Office of NavalIntelligence and MI6, they can be given the exact RECIPE for creating a Monarchslave. I believe that by giving the step by step recipe, people will see that A.all the ingredients are available, B. it is possible to combine the ingredients,C. all it takes is the motive to do it, and that motive is self-evident. We’lleven provide some of the names and places as we go along. This book will providethe step-by-step recipe for making a Monarch Mind-Controlled slave, It is atrauma-based mind control which programs multiple personalities using everyknown technique of mind-control. Every type of mind-control technique has beencombined into a group package which makes the total package almost impossible tobreak. It is this ability to synthesize all these methods into a group packagewhich is so powerful.

Edward Hunter, author of Brainwashing In Red China, testified in 1958 beforea U.S. Congressional House Committee on Un-American Activities: “Since manbegan, he has tried to influence other men or women to his way of thinking.There have always been these forms of pressure to change attitudes. Wediscovered in the past thirty years, a technique to influence, by clinical,hospital procedures, the thinking processes of human beings. Brainwashing isformed out of a set of different elements … hunger, fatigue, tenseness,threats, violence, and in more intense cases…drugs and hypnotism. No one ofthese elements alone can be regarded as brain washing, any more than an applecan be called apple pie. Other ingredients have to be added, and a cookingprocess gone through. So it is with brainwashing…” Hunter saidbrainwashing was a Red Chinese threat. He said that the chinese were the onesusing these tactics. In reality, this mind control was being done in the U.S.and Hunter was a pawn to help justify the criminal activities of the programmersshould they ever be found out behind their cover of “Nationalsecurity.” The handlers of mind-controlled slaves carry around a black orgrey 3 ring notebook or a lap top computer with the access codes and triggers.Some of the programmers and handlers have this all memorized. The deepest parts,core/gems/executive committee, false trinity etc. are charted in esotericlanguage such as Enochian, Hebrew (which is considered magical), and Druidsymbols. I have never gotten the opportunity to look at one of these, although anumber of the slaves who I’ve talked with have while they were beingprogrammed. These notebooks have color-coded graphs showing the arrangement ofalters, the structure of the system, the training of the alters, the history ofthe alters and other details. All the primary tortures carried out on a slaveare coded using dates/no.s so that the memories can be pulled up by theprogrammers. There is a standard set of hand signals, gestures, and codes thatallow a handler to work with someone else’s slave, but the accepted code amongthe handlers is to leave another man’s slave alone. As one leadingpsychiatrist put it, “Different ideologies use the same methodologies ofmind control.”

The Illuminati have secretly put in base programming that allows themultimate control over many of the other groups’ slaves. This will be describedwithin this book.

For both the ease of reading and the ease of writing, I have dispensed withmost footnotes. To provide my sources would double the size of the book, andmany of them are confidential. (In the past, when I have attempted creditinginformation, some people have gotten bruised feelings for having been passedover or for being named. When information comes in from several sources, itbecomes difficult to pass out credit.) I have made conservative judgement callsabout what material I could use. Most of this information has been verified byseveral reliable sources. Confidential eyewitnesses are often the only source,when there is such a powerful conspiracy to keep this vast NWO mind controlsecret. Paper trails were not left or are not available. Programmed slaves whohave worked for the military as mind-controlled slaves have witnessed theirfiles expunged and sanitized. The New World Order in 1981 made training filmsfor their novice programmers. Monarch slave Cathy O’Brien was used to makeboth the film “How to Divide a Personality” and “How To Create aSex Slave.” Two Huntsville porn photographers were used to help NASA andthe NWO create these training films. Undoubtedly, other porn training filmsexist too. In others words, there is film evidence of the Monarch TotalMind-control but these porn films are kept in very secure sites. During the lastfew years, I have visited with ex-programmers, I have visited with hundreds ofvictims of the Monarch type programming. I have gone to programming sites, Ihave visited with therapists who work with the victims of this mind-control, andI have met several of the programmers of the CIA/Illuminati face to face in theadventures of trying to save people from their programming.

I hope that God gives me the strength and the opportunity to get theinformation I have learned out to the world in general. When this informationgets out, hopefully it will help lift some of the secrecy of the MonarchProgramming. The Monarch Programming is a foundation rock of the New World Orderthat when pulled up, will reveal the most evil two-legged bugs and slimycritters. When their rock is lifted, they will have to scurry to hide. Becausethe authors know what the programmers do, they must honestly record severalareas of programming that will be controversial. The programmers are very muchinto demonology. Before therapists close their minds to this subject, theauthors would like to point out, that they personally know of cases whereMonarch slaves whose Christian personalities & other alters didn’t believein demonology were talked into participating in real deliverance, and the slavesdiscovered much to their surprise that work they had unsuccessfully tried to dofor years with their therapist was accomplished in a day or two.

Someprestigious researchers have decided the subconscious doesn’t exist becausethey can’t find it–its mysterious. To the man in the street the concept”subconscious” is as mysterious as the concept “demon”. Bothhave been the objects of intense research by U.S./Brit./Ger. Intelligencegroups. In fact, many of the concepts in this book have been purposely obscurredby the Illuminati’s control over the media and universities. These obscurredconcepts include M.P.D. (DID), recovered memories, hypnosis, demonic possession,aliens, mind-control, the subconscious, a conspiracy to bring in a NWO, truth,etc. The smokescreens of controversy will continue; but those who love thetruth, if they seek it, will realize the importance of this book. It’s onpublic record that MK ULTRA, the mind control research which CIA directorAdmiral Stansfield Turner admitted to in 1977 spent millions of dollars studingVoodoo, witchcraft, and psychics. On August 3, 1977, at a Senate hearing thethen CIA director Admiral Stansfield Turner disclosed that the CIA had beenconducting mind control on countless numbers of unsuspecting victims for years,without their knowledge or consent. These CIA mind-control operations werecarried out with the participation of a least 185 scientists and at least 80American institutions, including prisons, pharmaceutical companies, hospitals,and 44 medical colleges & universities. Many of America’s most prestigiousinstitutes of medical research, had cooperated with the CIA. as well as numerousbig name corporations. Casey admitted that day that the CIA did mind-controlconsisting of drugs, hypnosis & electro-shock. A few of the victims of theMonarch Project were even awarded financial compensation for their misery. Butwhat was admitted was admitted in the spirit of covering up the extent of thefull truth. The compensation was actually hush money, because victims were given”gag orders” by judges not to talk about what had happened to them. It’sbeen a disaster for Monarch victims that so many ministers have ignored thosewords of their Scripture, “For we are not ignorant of the devil’sdevices.” 2 COR 2:11 This book is a must for those ministers who seriouslybelieve “Having therefore these promises, dearly beloved, let us cleanseourselves from all filthiness of the flesh and spirit, perfecting holiness inthe fear of God.” 2 COR 7:1. In 2 TIM 2: 19-21, believers who “nameththe name of Christ” are asked to purge themselves of their uncleanliness (unclean spirits). There are many top notch Christians in the churches today whoare under mind-control, incl. many of the Christian leadership. I would like toremind Christian ministers that Isaiah the great prophet said, “The LordGOD hath given me the tongue of the learned that I should know how to speak aword in season to him that is weary: he wakeneth morning by morning; he wakenethmine ear to hear as the learned.” Ignorance is not godliness. Isaiahlearned to speak with the great learned men of his day, just as Paul the greatapostle could speak to the learned men of his time. One of the character traitsof God is that He is all-knowing. WHO says it is godly to be ignorant? Theprophet Daniel said Yahweh God “reveals the deep and secret things.”(Dan. 2:22a) God’s instruments will do this revealing. Jesus’ advice to hisdisciples was in effect to “Be wise as serpents, and gentle as alamb”. This advice certainly applies in helping the victims of trauma-basedmind-control. Paul in his letter to the Thessalonians (1 Thes 5:14) says that ineffect that different people need different counseling, but they all need to betreated with patience. The first step in suggesting a cure is to find out whathappened. That is what this book is about. This book is about how the OccultNetwork creates the problem that therapists and a few ministers try to dealwith. But the keys to open doors to healthy solutions for the victims oftrauma-based total mind control will reveal themselves in this book for thereader as this book reveals the nitty-gritty of how the total mind-controlhappens. Christ came to free the captives (Isaiah 61:1). Satanic ritual abusehas a history that is almost as old as history itself. Good King Hezekiah was avictim as a child of SRA. (2 Chr. 29) who got free. Moses confronted the satanicmagic of Pharoah’s magicians who could create live snakes from sticks. TheApostle Paul had to deal with Simon Magus, a leader of what is now known asSatanism. Solomon, one of the greatest men of faith, backslide and became one ofthe greatest satanists of all history. We have “no fellowship withunfruitful works of darkness, but rather reprove them” (as per EPH 5:11).While we have no fellowship with evil, the mind-control programmers are countingon us being so ignorant of their devices that they can hide their controldevices behind perversion & filth that many people shy away from. We must bestrong enough to face evil and not shy away from it. The victims of mind-controlmust look evil in the face & not look away to gain their freedom. We, whowant to help them, must be courageous & strong enough to do this too. Thisbook is written for that divine goal “till we all come in the unity of thefaith, and of the knowledge of the Son of God, unto a perfect man, unto themeasure of the stature of the fulness of Christ.” Eph. 4:13 If the body ofChrist is to attain fullness, we need this book to weed out the hidden terriblecancer that is consuming the body from within. This book is written forministers, secular and Christian therapists, and truth lovers of all kinds. Ifyou love the truth this book is for you. If you see something good in the humanrace so that our species should be preserved as well as the spotted owl and thesand flea, then this book is for you. IF YOU LOVE THE TRUTH, this BOOK is forYOU.

GLOSSARY OF HOW BASIC TERMS ARE USED IN THIS BOOK

For those readers who are not familiar with these basic terms let us introduce you to the definitions under which this book uses them.

Alter-Our usage is trying to follow the programmers usage of this word. Adissociated part of the mind which has a seperate identity and is given cuecodes by the mind-control programmers to trigger that dissociated part of themind to come to the front of the mind. The alter’s identity may be a gem,rock, a tape recorder, a poodle, a white kitten, a dove, a horse, or even thinkof itself as a person or a demon. It all depends on its programming. An alter isdifferent from an alter fragment in that the alter fragment is a dissociatedpart of the mind which serves only a single purpose. The programmers will givean alter a history, and insure that shadow alters will provide a full range ofaccessible emotions. Sometimes the distinctions between alters and alterfragments is vague, but examples from the two ends of the spectrum are easy totell apart. We use the word alter in this book to conform to what theprogrammers’ charts are encoding as alters. A typical main Mengele-createdgrid would be a grid of 13×13 principal A-coded alters, which is 169 principlealter personalities. In Illuminati systems, ceremonial “alters will consistof 3 alters placed on a spinning pedistal together into triad goddesses or gods.That means that an A-coded alter on some levels is actually 3 alters spinningtogether, which must be locked in place to communicate with, and then rotated tocommunicate to the other two.

Beta–This is the second Greek letter, and it represents the sexual modelsand sexual alters that the Programmers are creating. The primitive part of thebrain is involved in this type of programming. An early sexual abuse event willbe used to anchor this programming. These sexual slaves will develop sexualabilities that are far beyond what the public is aware is even possible. Theyalso receive the worst kind of abuse far beyond what most people’s imaginationcan picture. Beta alters generally see themselves as cats.

Councils (llluminati)–The Illuminati has frequent meetings. Some of thesemeetings are organized to appear “acephalous” and “accidential”in their meetings, when in reality they are structured and planned. One group,MJ-12 has gone by the following names: the Group, the Special Study Group, theWise Men, the Operations Coordinating Board (OCB), 5412 Committee, 303Committee, 40 Committee, PI-40 Committee, and Policy Planning Group (PCG). Someof the formal policy and ritual groups have names that all Illuminati memberswho have gotten high enough to learn, will recognize:

The Council of 3, Council of 5, Council of 7, Council of 9, The Grand Druid Council, The Committee of 300, and the Committee of 500 (known as Fortune 500). Many of the meetings are conclaves without formal names. The Grand Druid Council is not something fictional, but an actual body of people who formally meet and whose membership, we have been trying to keep track of. The groups which make decisions to control this planet are networked together. Each decision has its own origin and route that it takes.

Delta–This is a Greek letter shaped like a triangle which symbolizes change in calculus. It has become a favorite word to use in naming things for the occult elite. Delta teams are 4 person assassination teams which usually are secret teams. Delta Forces is an elite unit that operates under the Joint chiefs of staff that is made up of highly trained total mind-controlled slaves. Delta models are slaves whose sole purpose is assassination. Delta alters are alters within an Illuminati alter system which are programmed to be assassins. These alters are often some of the deepest in a system and in a Genie bottle or with Umbrella programming.

Deliverance ministry-(This book is about HOW the mind-control is done, it isnot a textbook on solutions.) The use of the term deliverance ministry in thisbook connotates any person(s) who via faith in God is able to pray for divinehelp in a fashion that a victim is helped from demonic activity. A deliveranceministry is a natural outgrowth of a life in harmony and fellowship with YahwehGod. However, this is not to be confused with Exorcism of the traditionalCatholic or witchcraft nature in which certain spells and incantations are usedin a prescribed method. “Deliverance” connotates divinely inspiredfaith, exorcism involves ritual. A deliverance ministry might perhaps teach aperson about forgiveness, or how they can renounce an oath, or how to applyJesus Christ’s atoning blood to their life. In this fashion, the person findsdeliverance through biblical spiritual principles rather than the efficacy ofsome ritual or hocus pocus spell. This book is in no way meant as a blanketendorsement of every spiritual warfare tactic. If anything, this book suggeststhat ministers learn more about mind-control, as well as grow stronger in theirwalk with Almighty God.

Illuminati–The Illuminati are 13 elite bloodlines which have manueveredthemselves into control over this planet. They lead double lives, one forsociety and a hidden one which is based on a gnostic luciferian philosophy whichconsists of lots of blood rituals.

Monarch Programming–This was a specific Project carried out by secretelements of the U.S. government and intelligence groups. There were, accordingto someone a few years ago who had access to the computer(s) which contains allthe names of active monitored human slaves, 40,000 actively monitored Monarchslaves. However, this book uses the term generically to include all victims whohave suffered this type of trauma-based mind-control. In the same way, that abrand name like “Hyster” is used to describe all lifts–when we usethe term we use it in its broadest sense. This is the only way it can be usedand technically correct, because as of this date, the authors have not seen whois on the active Monarch Program list of slaves.

System– This term is used in several ways. It is frequently used to refer toa victim of total mind control because the victim consists of alters,programming, implant(s), internal computers, and numerous dissociative stateswhich function together as a system. The word is also used in this book to referto the body’s functional physiological units, such as the respiratory system.The word is also infrequently used to denote the establishedsocial-economic-political system controlling the world, also known insiders asthe Network. Other standard meaning may also occasionally be used for the word.

Multiple Personality (DID)–Multiple personalities or MPDor Dissociative Identity Disorder is the situation where different dissociativeparts of a single brain view themselves as separate persons. The DSM-IIIRdefinition of MPD is the guideline for determining MPD for this book.

New World Order– The New World Order is the global design for a One-World-Government One-World-Dictator and its constituents. Insiders call themselves the “network” and “the neighborhood”.

Satanic Ritual Abuse (SRA)–This is used to represent all categories ofritual abuse which would be inspired by the desire to rob, kill, or destroysomething worthwhile in a person, especially their freedom of thought. Manygroups carrying out SRA do not mention Satan by that name. They may make Pactsto Baphomet, and call upon Rex Mundi, or Belair, or Lucifer, or the Father ofLight, God, or Kali or even “Jesus” or “Jesus Christ” (thereare demons which call themselves “Jesus”, who are not to be confusedwith Yeshua or Yehoshua ben Joseph who is known as Jesus Christ of Nazareth.)SRA is not a value judgement by the authors against some group, the victimsthemselves on some level know that he or she is being abused.

Switching–This is when one part (fragment) of the mind takes over fromanother, or in simple terms, this is when one alter personality (or alterfragment) takes the body from the alter which is holding the body. Switching canoccur via the Programmers’ codes for calling up alters, or by external orinternal stimuli that trigger an alter to come out. Switching will usually causeat least a flicker of the eyes, and for outside observers, who know thedifferent personalities, they will observe another personality take the body.
<input height=”797″ name=”I18″ src=”http://www.whale.to/b/sp/deepera/p_cranial2.jpg” type=”image” width=”600″ />

Pic p_cranial2.jpg

pic p_basic-structure1.jpg
<input height=”586″ name=”I19″ src=”http://www.whale.to/b/sp/deepera/p_basic-structure1.jpg” type=”image” width=”400″ />

Pic p_records2.jpg
<input height=”570″ name=”I20″ src=”http://www.whale.to/b/sp/deepera/p_records2.jpg” type=”image” width=”538″ />

INTRODUCTION

In Jan. ’96, I bound the first copies of The Illuminati Formula Used toCreate Undetectable Total Mind-Controlled Slave. Hundreds of people in theUnited States and other countries were reading this book, and were expressingtheir appreciation and praise for the work. Some also contributed more detailsabout the Illuminati’s mind-control. It was also gratifying that theillustrated Guidebook to Monarch Mind-control, which contains my co-author’sart work done under programming, was translated and sold this year (’96) as apaperback in Japan. The word is getting out, and people with ears to hear aregrateful. The original goal was to write the Vol. 2 book to be about 300 pageslong, but it spilled into 500 pages. At 500 pages, it was brought to a grindinghalt. In this DEEPER INSIGHTS book, I bring you more profounder mysteries of theIlluminati’s mind-control abilities. These deeper insights were some itemsleft out of the Vol. 2 due to space, as well as some things that have been foundout since the Vol.2 book was written. Those who were intrigued by the Vol. 2,and cut their teeth on the subject of mind-control via my writings over the past5 years, will enjoy this further expose of the deeper secrets of Illuminatimind-control. For instance, scattered in several sections including Chapter 3 isa great deal about the base programs which are laid in using controlled LSDtrips in sensory deprivation tanks. Another exciting set of new revelations areCisco’s information on the core, and her revelations giving the chronology oflayering in the mind-control programming. I have also done a great deal ofresearch into Cranial manipulation (see Chapter 8), which has been an extremelywell-hidden mind-control secret known only to a few select people worldwide.Another area of intense research has been to expose the role Disney played inmind-control. Although other writers have superficially touched on implants,nanobots, thought-transfer, soul entrapment and other secret technologies, Idecided to provide many details to expose these new technologies that are beingused in conjunction with the dissociative programmed multiplicity. Besidelearning countless programming secrets, the reader will take another quantumleap into understanding what has been going on in this mixed-up world. If lifeis a riddle, then this book contains many answers to the riddle of life. Duringthe summer of 1996, I had the privilege to speak on mind-control to audiences in12 major American cities, as well talk on over 50 radio stations. The responsewas encouraging. People are beginning to wake up, and are hungry to learn thetruth about how the movers and shakers of this world have developedsophisticated methods to make children into undetectable Illuminati robots (fromthe cradle to the satanic throne), as well as their extensive abilities tocontrol the common person’s thinking from the cradle to the grave. When Christasked the question, will I find faith when I return? it was a serious question.We no longer live in a situation where we can depend upon our mind and ourthoughts actually being our own. Our minds are under a constant assault andmanipulation by those who control things. No one is exempt. Fortunately, thereare still some rational thinking humans, who can challenge and expose theirplans for total control over the minds of the entire human race. I, as aminister & researcher, along with the victims represented by Cisco Wheelerand others, can’t expose this mind control on our own. We need the help ofothers. Will you help us get the message out about the New World Order’s/theIlluminati’s mind control? Cisco has consulted with me, and we decided to maketwo continuations. The continuation of the Illustratedguidebook would be authored by her, and the continuation of the Vol. 2 bookwould be carried out by yours truly, Fritz Springmeier. We have combined thesetwo continuations into this book called for short DEEPER INSIGHTS into theIlluminati Mind Control Formula. This volume is meant to be an extension of theprevious volumes. IF YOU HAVE NOT READ the previous book entitled Vol. 2 TheIlluminati Formula used to create an Undetectable Total Mind Controlled Slave,THEN you are not really prepared to understand this material. In my previousbooks, I have shown how the intelligence agencies are simply prostitutes andfronts of the Illuminati. The Illuminati always “sterilize” theiractivities, so their actions can’t be identified in the flurry of secretintelligence activities. Recently, at one conference on mind-control, victims ofgovernment mind-control were told that their stories were not welcome becausethe conference was on “cult” mind-control. Dear reader, theintelligence agencies are cults, and not only that, but they have a dark satanicside to them, which not only brands them as cults, but “occult cults.”Witchcraft and Freemasonry refer to themselves as “the Craft”; howappropriate it was for Allen Dulles, DCI-head of the CIA, to entitle his book”The Craft of Intelligence”. How appropriate it was that people withinthe CIA referred to their top management as the Knights Templars. As the Vol. 2Formula book indicated, the intelligence agencies which work for the Illuminatihave kept only the minimum of records, and the records they do keep are out ofreach of people like you and I. But that doesn’t mean that the researcher likemyself can’t work backwards. One of the side effects of the traumas thatcreate multiple-personalities (DID) is that sadistic or criminal alters areoften formed, and with careful research the historical record of criminals withmultiple personalities can be traced back into history. The Illuminati havecreated trained-multiples for centuries, but insiders say that programmed DID (MPD)was developed in the Nazi concentration camps. The worldwide Illuminati plannedthe camps with the goal to determine what programs would work on children, andused the cover story of Nazi racial hatred to hide the real purpose of thecamps–mind-control experiments which used large numbers of children traumatizedby their separation from their parents.

With today’s sophisticated programming and structuring of MPD worlds, theseevil alters can be controlled better than in the past, and yet we still haveserial killers like Wayne Cox, and serial rapists like William Stanley Milligan,who were programmed multiples stalking our streets. Kenneth Biani, the LAHillside strangler who killed 9 people was diagnosed as a multiple, but claimedhe had faked the disorder. Thomas W. Piper in Boston in the 1870s, and PaulMiskamen, one hundred years later in California, are examples of multiples whohad an alter capable of murder and another alter who was a good Christian. Oneof the best disinformation campaigns of the Illuminati, is to make people thinkprogrammed-multiples are just for espionage, prostitution and assassination.They have taken over our pulpits, like the Illuminati programmed multiple JimmySwaggart, and they have taken over our political offices, like Al Gore, and ouruniversities. Even with the elite’s secrecy intact via their control oflibraries, publishing houses, and newspapers, the record still shows the tracesof the Illuminati’s history of creating controlled multiple personalities. Thehistorical record of criminals with multiple personalities includes theIlluminati coke multimillionaire Harry K. Thaw. He was one of the elite ofsociety, who had charming sophisticated front alters, and sadistic deeperalters. His position prevented him from being convicted of a murder he committedin public on June 25, 1906. However, another multiple Henry Spencer, who didn’thave such clout was hanged after killing Allison Rexroat in 1914. Anothermultiple William Heirens, who murdered two women in the ’40’s, had one ofhis front alters write in the mirror after a murder, “For heaven’s sake,catch me before I kill more, I cannot control myself.” He had an alterGeorge who was doing the murders. The story doesn’t stop with evidence ofphysical murders, but includes the vast numbers of spiritual deaths that haveresulted from the spiritual manipulation of the masses via programmed multiples.Programmed multiples have been great for carrying out religious deceptions. Manyof the great spiritist mediums were multiples. In the 1920’s, Patience Worthwas a famous name of an author. Patience was an alter of Mrs. John Curran. As achild Mrs. Curran had played the piano in her uncle’s Missouri Ozark churchwhen young and then she later grew up to be a famous medium and writer. A Dr.Charles E. Cory investigated her multiple-personality disorder. He discoveredthat her author alter was much more intelligent than the front alter who did thehousekeeping & normally held the body. The occult world has manipulated MPDto manufacture validation for their theories of reincarnation, spiritism etc.Where once the Word of God was accepted as truth by society as a whole, nowsociety questions whether there is such a thing as truth. When it has come tofinding out about mind control from the first level of perpetrators, thegovernment, there have been a number of manufactured (bogus), sanitized andoriginal CIA documents released to the public under the nearly worthless Freedomof Information act. The Freedom of Information Act has been manipulated to leadpeople to think that the public has access to secrets.

A letter of inquiry in 1995 requesting declassified documents on MindControl, Monarch, MK Ultra, Artichoke and Blue Bird got the following responsefrom the CIA, “…as you might expect, we have already conductedbroad-ranging and exhaustive searches and reviews on every conceivable aspect ofhuman behavior, including mind control and brainwashing, and have located andreleased 11, 336 pages of material on the general subject of human behaviorstudies under MKULTRA. Most of the 11,336 pages of this previously releasedmaterial are very limited in scope and consist primarily of financialrecords.” (quote from a CIA letter of response in answer to a request fordeclassified mind-control information.) Yes, and long-story-short even those11,336 pages only got released due to a mistake.

In one CIA document pertaining to mind control released under the Freedom ofInformation act, which is a memorandum dated 20 Oct. 1975 to the Director ofCentral Intelligence from the Inspector General Donald F. Chamberlain, theInspector General states, “From his investigation of the project [MKNAOMI],Dr. Stevens has concluded that gaps in the files are the result of a consciouspolicy on the part of those involved to keep very little paper on the projectfrom its inception in 1952 to its demise in 1970. People formerly connected withthe project interviewed by Dr. Stevens asserted that the practice of keepinglittle or no record of the activity was standard MKNAOMI procedure.” PhilipAgee, who wrote an expose of the CIA entitled Inside The Company: CIA Diary(Toronto, Can.: Bantam Books, 1975), said that as an employee of the CIA”You get so used to lying that after a while it’s hard to remember whatthe truth is.” Philip Agee writes, “The life of a CIA operationsofficer … There is not much time to think about the results of your actionsand, if you try to do it well, the job of operations officer calls fordedication to the point of obsession. But it’s a schizophrenic sort ofsituation. You have too many secrets, you can’t relax with outsiders.Sometimes an operative uses several identities at once. If somebody asks you asimple question, “What did you do over the weekend?” your mind goesClick! Who does he think I am? What would the guy he thinks I am be doing overthe weekend? You get so used to lying that after a while it’s hard to rememberwhat the truth is. When I [Philip] joined the CIA I signed the secrecyagreement… [now] I may have violated that agreement. I believe it is worse tostay silent, that the [security] agreement itself was immoral.” [bold addedto quote] On Nov. 15, 1996, DCI Deutsch of the CIA paraded himself and somepoliticians before a public meeting in south L.A. (broadcast on C-Span) and toldthe people the CIA would investigate allegations that the CIA had run drugs. Oneman asked CIA Director Deutsch, “Everyone knows that the CIA was runningdrugs in Vietnam from the Golden Triangle, and that they have continued doing itto today, and you want to come here to south L.A. and pretend to us that thishasn’t happened when everyone knows it did. Are you crazy?” Deutschcouldn’t help but show a revealing smile. (The above quoted question was takenfrom C-Span’s broadcast & is a closely paraphrased version.) One of myquestions to Deutsch would be, “When a drug addict’s life gets out ofcontrol, he’ll go into denial, and he’ll steal from everyone in his life,including his own mother, and live a life of lies, and when an intelligenceagency gets out of control, they are like an addicted person, they stay in totaldenial and keep secretly hurting everyone in sight, WHAT can and should thepeople do to get an out-of-control intelligence agency to stop its poweraddiction? Unfortunately, the problem with power addiction, addiction to lying& deception, and drug addiction began centuries before the CIA within theIlluminati families that started the CIA. The CIA is simply reflecting theproblems of its parent. Their addiction to lying keeps the common gullible manin public ignorant. Their total mind-controlled slaves are used extensively fordisinformation campaigns, and are helpful to disseminate WHITE, GREY, &BLACK propaganda for the New World Order’s Network. To coordinate their liesrequires a special intelligence group that keeps meticulous records of thedisinformation that has been disseminated, so that they don’t get mixed up intheir lies. It is extremely rare to get the truth out of the perpetrators, themind-control programmers. Recently, on television a movie portrayed a victim oftrauma-based mind control trying to get one of her programmers, who she’dtaken prisoner, to confess to what he’d done. He defied her, and did all hecould to make her think her memory was her imagination. It was an excellentportrayal of how hard it is to get the truth out of the perpetrators. Thesadistic programmers have exercised their power for decades in secrecy. Theyhave understood the implications of their power for decades. However, theimplications of this undetectable mind-control are staggering, actuallyoverwhelming and beyond the man in the street’s ability to comprehend. Itmeans every organization can be infiltrated (“penetrated” as theysay), and used as a front or controlled. It means nothing is as it appears. Itmeans that Russia can hate America on the surface, and be working hand in gloveon the secret level. It means every one of the millions of new immigrants fromRussia, China and Eastern Europe into the U.S. is a potential time bomb. Itmeans much of what has been blamed on Christians has had its origin in Satan.Satanic programming has seriously damaged the reputation of Christians. Theprogrammers are major players in how the world’s events unfold, while theyreceive absolutely no attention. These men are illegitimate rulers of the world.They have never gained from the common man the right to rule. Therefore theyrule through puppets who owe their total allegiance to their mind-controlmasters. They are rapidly trying to establish legitimacy for themselves, andplan to culminate their plans to gain legitimacy with the rule of the AntiChrist,who will rule based on mass-produced myths and fantasies that the Illuminatiwill articulate to the imaginations of millions of slaves worldwide. They havealready begun to market the AntiChrist and his reign to the world. The campaignfor the acceptance of homosexuality is just one part of this marketing effort.They are also skillfully justifying their AntiChrist’s rule, by creatingproblems that only his superior management abilities and leadership skills willbe able to deal with. The strength of New World Order and the AntiChrist’srule is the total and undetectable mind-control that is being carried out on amass scale to little children and people who fit specific profiles. According toa reliable deprogrammed source: Adults, who have the following profile aresubjected to mind-control. This profile is:

• Alone without a support system of family or friends.

• An I.Q. above 120.

• Good hypnotic candidate

• Has other attributes worthwhile to exploit

More about this will be discussed in chapter 1, where an entire overview ofhow the intelligence agencies take adults and program them will be given. Adultswho are used by the intelligence agencies for WET OPS or one-time one waymissions are programmed in stages. These stages are designated levels 1-5. Level4 is where these slaves begin to resemble the total mind-controlled slaves ofthe Illuminati who have been subjected to mind-control since they weredefenseless babies. The men involved in the programming of little defenselesschildren are skilled. They have been earned their jobs on the basis of adog-eat-dog environment. They are ruthless. They operate out a hidden zone,which I will call the twilight zone of believability. Anyone who tries to exposewhat they are doing, must write about things that are outside of that box ofthings commonly believed in. It is as they intentionally gauge what isbelievable and then step outside of that zone in which to operate. Theseruthless programmers have egos which think they are god-men. Somewhere deep intheir minds, they inwardly know they are worms. There is a part of themselvesdeep down that knows the truth, but Satan has buried that so deep, that theycannot face the reality of who they are. They seek eternal life by stealing thelife force of innocent victims. They know that their father is Satan. They arevictims of Satan. Where does one draw the line between who is a victim and whois an abuser? There is no line. The word of God indicates that God has turnedmany of these men over to Satan due to their wicked minds. It’s sad to thinkthat some of these men are dependant on Satan for spiritual life. Many of theslaves still have a spark of reality and a spirit that cries for freedom. Theyhave ears to hear the truth, should it come their way. This book is written forthose who love the truth and love the liberty that Almighty God has given us toseek and to love the truth for ourselves. Although only a minority of the peopletoday have Total Mind-Control, the Illuminati are attempting to confuse andmanipulate everyone. One of their favorite tactics to scare people with is theambiguous bogeyman of national security. They constantly use their spin-doctorsto whip up fear, so that the public will gladly surrender their freedom toprotect “national security”. Unfortunately, or ironically, the veryconcept of “national security” is being used as a cover for theIlluminati to steal every last vestige of freedom left to the American people.American tax-dollars support secret conferences such as the classifiedconference sponsored by Los Alamos on Nov. 16-17, 1993 where the Applied PhysicsLab of John Hopkins University taught our military about “non-lethal”weapons. The satanist/ ex-Green Beret Dr. John Alexander, now head of the LosAlamos National Lab, gave one of the opening talks on 11/16/93. The next day,the military men gave talks on the technology involved in controlling people’sminds electronically via both implants and energy beamed at them. Dr. DaveMorgan, of Lockhead Sanders also gave a specific talk on their “syntel–syntheticvoices they place in the heads of victims with telemetry to auditory implants.You will read more on their implants in chapter 5. The battle for the freedom ofthe human mind must be fought now. The battle gets increasingly difficult, butwe must fight it whether we win or lose, for the human spirit and the human mindwas not created by God for slavery to Satan and his AntiChrist. Over and over,the truth of Jesus’ words still shine forth, “And you shall know thetruth and the truth shall set you free.” Let us realize that the man whosaid those eternally powerful words also said, “I am the way, the truth,and the life.” For His light shone in darkness, “and the darkness hasnot overcome it.” If those of us who still have free minds must die–thenlet us die for the TRUTH, that the Truth in Christ Jesus shall live.

The hidden World Order government that increasingly controls our livesoperates through many clandestine operations and groups. What you see is notwhat you get. In order to maintain total secrecy of such a vast scale ofoperations, they use millions of mind-controlled slaves world-wide as well asnumerous willing servants who out of raw terror will not buck the system. On thesurface, EPIC is just another secret military unit. The patch below belongs tothe EPIC unit, a clandestine unit which is doing the real banking for part ofMexico, much of the U.S. and part of Canada. This agency (El Paso IntelligenceCenter–EPIC) is obviously not a U.S. jurisdictional agency, but operates underFINCEN (Financial Crimes Enforcement Network- as in crimes against Big Brother).This unit is stationed at Ft. Bliss, which contains Army & Air Force units.American elections are rigged, and there is no longer a government of thepeople, for the people and by the people (if there ever was one). The Americanpeople are kept in place because they think they elected the government thatrules them. Mind-control is pervasive and is being used not just to createsexual slaves, or banking employees, but to control society at all levels. Willwe continue to allow a shadow government to rule us? Will we continue to letthem tell us that these things have to be secret in the interest of”national security”, when in reality they are only in the interest ofNATIONAL SLAVERY?

EPIC is also involved with the NAFTA machinations, many of which were donewith the help of mind-controlled slaves. Within the NAFTA agreement was theU.S./Mexico Border XXI Framework Document, (based on the La Paz Agreement signedin ‘83) which in effect ends American & Mexican sovereignity over all landwithin 52.5 miles of the border. Special international agencies have beencreated to regulate the various environmental and legal needs of the Border XXIregion, as the border is dissolved into a border region. The U.S./Mex. BorderXXI document created the Border Cooperation Project & the North AmericanDevelopment Bank. The World Bank will also provide financing, and some fundswill come from Mexico. EPIC is well situated in the approx. geographic center ofthis border region.

CHAPTER 1.SCIENCE NO. 1 – SELECTION & PREPARATION OF THE VICTIM

The average person who has been spoon-fed what he knows from the controlledestablishment (the establishment’s news, churches, and schools) is overwhelmedand in denial that mind-control can be happening. Who would want to carry outmind-control? One category are those groups who use the Cabala. Hasidic Judaism,Freemasonry, and Witchcraft are all based on the Cabala. Llewellyn’s magazineNew Worlds of Mind and Spirit (a prominent witchcraft magazine) in theirJune/July ’94 issue state on page 56, “The golem of Prague is perhaps themost famous example of ‘practical cabala’- the use of cabala for magicalcabala.” Golem are mind-controlled beings. There are several cabalistic andwitchcraft written references that point out that the creation ofmind-controlled zombies (golem) was the highest goal of the cabala. Albert Pike,perhaps the most important Freemason of all times, clearly stated as the head ofFreemasons worldwide that Freemasonry is based on the Cabala. A cabalisticpsychiatrist in Psychoanalysis Review, ’44, issue 31, p. 180 wrote,”Victory over the world would be secured by any man who possessed theShem…[We shall control the world (words to this effect)]…when we shallattain the consciousness of the Shem within us and will control the power of theGolem to regenerate the world.” [The Golem are energized by the magicTetragrammaton, which the Jehovah’s W.s emphasize so much.] In The WorldwideWeekly, Defense News of 3/20-26/95, the Defense News an official military paperindicated that the navy was attempting to produce an “Army ofZombies”. The Defense News stated:

“The research, called Hippocampal Neuron Patterning, grows live neuronson computer chips, William Tolles, the recently retired associate director ofresearch at the Naval Research Lab, said March 15. This technology that altersneurons could potentially be used on people to create zombie armies, LawrenceKorb, a senior fellow at the Brookings Institution, said March 16 …. Theresearch has captured the attention of the U.S. Intelligence community.”

I have taken the space to give you the reader a paper trail that shows thatYES INDEED, there are groups of people that desire human zombies. So where dothey select their candidates for their zombie creating programs? That’s whatthis chapter will deal with. You’ll have to go to some of my other books tolearn how these mind-control groups all interconnect.

The previous book by this author The Top 13 Illuminati Bloodlines wasintended to help people begin to understand the major role bloodlines playwithin the Illuminati. When this author was on speaking circuit, he ran into anumber of researchers who had researched the New World Order and the Illuminatifor years and not realized the significance of the bloodlines. In tracking thebloodlines, it became apparent that the European Illuminati bloodlines weretrying to integrate some of the American Indian bloodlines into their ownbloodlines. Why? They wanted the occult power that these bloodlines contributed.And it seems that not only do generational spirits help in many ways, but thereare reasons to believe that the Aborigines of Australia, the Bushmen of theKalahari, and some of the American Indian tribes such as the Cherokee have highparanormal abilities in addition to their demonic spiritual abilities. Somebelieve that the psi-gene was valuable for the survival of primitive huntertribes, while tribes who went into agriculture lost some of the power of theprimary and secondary psi-genes since natural selection would not haveencouraged psi-genes in agricultural based societies. The primary psi-genes arethought by some to be some genetic coding which enhances proteins to be betterbiophysical batteries, storage units, and other roles. The secondary genetic psi-codingare thought to be codes for creating richer and higher-functioning neuralpathways, and neural capabilities. Whether this was true, if the Illuminatibelieved it was true, it could account for their penchant for mixing in AmericanIndian blood with their elite “blue blood.”

BREEDING GOOD SUBJECTS for HYPNOSIS-hypnosis as it relates to selection & preparation of the victim

Hypnosis and programming work well in the alpha state of the mind. This is why the child is traumatized even in the womb, so that it will naturally be in that alpha state even before birth. The man in the street may think that the hypnotist looks for weak-willed subjects, however the mind-control programmers and professional stage hypnotists say that a “fighter”, “a determined forceful personality” are the types they search for to have a successful hypnotic session. Weak-willed persons are usually incapable of seriously concentrating for the successful pursuance of any idea, and usually are the worst subjects. Intelligence is often helpful, and (as stated in the first volume) the ability to be creative is extremely important to the programmers. An extremely important factor for the subject of mind-control to have is the “emotional drive to pursue to its successful completion a given objective.” (McGill, Ormond. Professional Stage Hypnotism. pp. 87-88.) One reason the programmers like to work with children who were preemies is that they are fighters. Another reason the programmers like to work with intelligent children, and not waste time trying to program lower-than-average intelligent children, is that they are easier to hypnotize.

This does not mean that only people who appear intelligent are programmed.During the programming process, many of the victims are programmed to appearstupid to others and to themselves. Only the master (and those who work withhim) are to use the full potential of the victim. The victims’ talents arestolen from them. An intelligent child, who comes from an intelligent family,and who is programmed with total mind-control may grow up into adulthoodthinking he or she is of average or below average intelligence.

GENETICS

Pres. Theodore Roosevelt, who was blood related to both President Martin VanBuren and to Franklin Delano Roosevelt, is on record, “Some day we willrealize that the prime duty, the inescapable duty of the good citizens of theright type is to leave his or her blood behind him in the world; and that wehave no business to permit the perpetuation of citizens of the wrong type ….The problem cannot be met unless we give full consideration to the immenseinfluence of heredity …. I wish very much that the wrong people could beprevented entirely from breeding; and when the evil nature of these people issufficiently flagrant, this should be done …. The emphasis should be laid ongetting desirable people to breed.” Many of the people within theIlluminati bloodlines have made statements like this, and have done all theycould to leave many secret offspring behind, because these elite bloodlines havefelt they were the chosen to lead humanity. Your ancient aristocratic familiessuch as the Cabots, Lodges & Delanos have been in favor of placing the blameon society’s problems on the “bad blood” of the common man. Theyforget all the evils that have been perpetrated on these common people by theblue blooded aristocratic families that think they are so superior. Forinstance, Illuminati kingpin Harriman’s wife purchased land at Cold Springs,NY to promote a eugenics program. She said that being raised around good racehorses helped her appreciate good breeding in man. Eugenics is the philosophythat some humans are genetically superior to others, & that inferior geneticraces/individuals should be destroyed. The first eugenics program started in theUnited States was by John Humphrey Noyes, the cult leader of communist Oneidacommunities. John Humphrey Noyes’ father was a Vermont Congressman, and hismother was a relative of Rutherford B. Hayes, the 19th U.S. President. Hisfamily was from the burned out district, from Putney, Vermont. In 1833, Yalegranted him a license to preach. Noyes began creating his communist communitiesaround 1836, and he dictated all their major decisions, including their groupsex and eugenics policies. In 1869, John H. Noyes selected 53 women and 38 mento be the only ones in his communities allowed to produce children. The goal wasto perfect the genetics of the community by only allowing well bred children.This is believed to be the first eugenics program. All members of the communitywere encouraged to have sex with everyone else & not to form emotionalattachments around it. However, they were not to have procreative sex. TheOneida group can clearly be tied in with European occult groups that tie in withthe illuminati. The Oneida group used central committees and social controlthrough mutual criticism to keep their members in line. Their social controlmethods were extremely effective. Years later, Chinese communism began usingthese innovations of Noyes’. Charles Guiteau, who assassinated Pres. Garfield,was a member of Noyes’ Oneida community. He became a member because hisfather, a disciple of Noyes, took him there as a boy. Charles stated that at theNoyes’ community, he came under the influence of Noyes and “I was unableto get away from that influence … A man was just as isolated from the world asif he were confined in state’s prison or lunatic asylum. I suffered greatly inmind and body and spirits during incarceration in that community.” Heclaimed he had never gotten free of the control that began when he entered theOneida community. In 1880, he began hanging around the Republican Party’s NYHQ. This was a very strange thing, because Charles Guiteau had never had anyinterest in politics his entire life. He bought a pistol from a”gentleman”, and then shot President Garfield. Knowing that Illuminatimind-control was already taking place at this time, certainly makes thisassassination an area for further study. John Noyes had his groups conductingseances and carrying out initiation rites. He personally sexually initiated thegirl children of his communities at these rites. In June, 1879, when theauthorities came to arrest him for mass rape of little girls, he fled to BritishCanada, where the British government gave him asylum. After Noyes skipped thecountry, the community was incorporated as a joint-stock corporation calledOneida Ltd., which later burned a large amount of the personal records and thediaries of the members to keep their sexual activities forever secret. It’sinteresting to note, that long before 1879, in June, 1847, Noyes’ had treateda woman Harriet Hall for tuberculosis & dropsy by holding a seance ritualand sexually sealing the spiritual cure with intercourse with the woman. Afterthe woman’s husband reported this, a grand jury indicted Noyes. He skippedbail and an almost sure conviction by fleeing to New York. People have wonderedhow he managed to practice his odd sexual behaviors for years and never get intotrouble with authorities.

Margaret Sanger, an early feminist, was also an advocate of eugenics. Intheir zeal to make her a hero, modern feminists have neglected to notice thisside of her. Sanger advocated sterilization of the feeble-minded by hegovernment. This all sounded good at the turn of the century before legitimateresearch showed that genetics played only a partial role in how people turnedout, and that environment and choices by individuals also played just as big ofa role in how people turned out. Many of the people who were sterilized undereugenic laws were realized to have been victims of pseudo-science and hysteria.The Great Depression leveled many proud and haughty people down to the samelevel as the common people they had sneered down upon. Rich and poor foundthemselves in bread lines. The financial elite and the academic elite werehumbled and the eugenics racial theories in the U.S. largely disappeared.Finally, H.J. Muller, a famous and respected geneticist, gave an outstanding andcourageous speech to the Eugenics Society in NY in 1932 where he lambasted theeugenicists for using false better-breeding theories to rationalize the criminalbehavior of the elite. The Illuminati had suffered a temporary setback inlegitimizing their criminal rule over humanity. In recent years, the Illuminati’sevil ideas about superior and inferior blood lines are being given more credenceagain. The National Institute of Health funded a $1.7 million study at theUniversity of Hawaii’s Behavioral Biology Lab to get solid information on howgenetics relates to intelligence so that “informed decisions” aboutpopulation control can be made in the future. Almost every state has now adoptedgenetic screening of new-born babies in the U.S. While the Illuminati may not beable to fully implement their superior blood theories in society in general,they have been secretly working feverishly in labs and in secret rituals aroundthe world to redesign mankind to their preferences. Many Illum. members are theend result of carefully monitored genetic engineering. They want to manufacturethe future via control over human genetics. Many years ago, the first step inthe Illuminati genetic program was the creation of specifications. When thesespecs, these criteria, were set as goals, they then worked to realize them. Theyhave been working at them, and refining the results as they continue to worktoward specific goals. They have sought the perfect assassin. They have soughtthe perfect slave. They have sought the perfect baseball player and golf player.They have sought the perfect soldier. The borders between these manufacturedIlluminati total mind-control slaves and an industrial robot are fast becomingblurred. The end of the human race as we know it, and civilization as we knowit, is rapidly approaching. Via molecular biology and genetics, humanoids thatare vastly different from normal humans have been created in secret undergroundinstallations. They have been modifying humans to design para-humans, and thenapplying mind-control to them. The Illuminati is not only controlling humanity,but under their control redesigning it. Lest anyone forget, the descendants ofJohn Noyes’ Oneida Colony, and the genetic model wonder children born in NaziGermany are still around. According to one source, the Nazi’s producednumerous offspring of Hitler which were secretly taken to many countries andthen later reassembled in certain special towns. These children receivedmind-control as well as being specially endowed with as many special traits asthe Nazi’s could give them. If this is true, it could have some significancein the future. Illuminati kingpins are also able to store their semen viacryogenics for all kinds of scenarios. Frozen sperm can be used to create a sonafter the father had died. Should an Illuminati kingpin want to impregnate hisgrand-daughter 10 years after his death, it would be possible. On the flip side,single women can choose semen from sperm banks. Another twist that theIlluminati have taken advantage of is taking the fertilized egg of one set ofparents and implanting it into a brooder slave to raise the child as a surrogatemother.

It should also be mentioned that ex-Illuminati members have explained howplanned births are coincided to have the child be born on particular specialoccult dates. (The Illuminati have a intense lifestyle of secrecy, so most oftheir members do not carry the last name of the bloodline they belong to. Somemembers are given significant occult names for their legal name, and others uselegal names which have no significance. Having a legal occult-significant nameis not essential, because the alter system will receive a secret Illuminatioccult name.)

The bottom line is that bloodlines, genetics and geneticengineering is playing a role in the selection process of who is programmed acertain way. Also the Illuminati has particular research goals that have beenstructured into their 20 year, 30 year and 50 year plans. Case histories showthat a child will receive education and programming in order to participate insecret research projects years down the road. Some of today’s marked childrenare invariably being quietly educated to help with future research goals. Asmight be suspected the inbreeding within the secret Illuminati bloodlines andtheir secret satanic lifestyles take their genetic toll..

How do the Illuminatiget rid of their leftovers, the children their bloodlines have that aren’tgoing to amount to a great deal? In terms of mind-control, the male childrenthat are the programming leftovers, the ones that are not really fit to makeinto politicians, doctors and lawyers, will be made into stalkers, according toan ex-Illuminati programmer, who worked in this area of programming, the ratioof men to women that are programmed for stalking is about 90% to 10%. Whydiscuss how the Illuminati makes stalkers? First, many people doubt that thereis a controlled conspiracy by the Illuminati to control the world, because intheir limited understanding they think that there are too many uncontrollablepeople around for the world to be controlled. They don’t realize that a largeshare of those crazy people were intentionally created by the Illuminati. TheIlluminati programmers and handlers during the 40’s through the 60’s,according to insiders, had specific quotas on how many people to have go crazyso that the mental institutions (which were used for programming) could maintaintheir government financing.

Readers, who have followed this author’s lectures,have heard him explain how a. the Illuminati make a decision to”solve” a problem they have created, then b. get the government andprivate groups to study the problem for years so that eventually it looks liketheir (secretly preplanned) decision is the best course of action for thecountry, and then c. their lackey’s in the political process implement thedecision supposedly for the “good of the people”. After 30 years ofgood financing for the mental institutions so they could do their assigned taskof programming hundreds of thousands of people with tasks for the NWO, theIlluminati then set things up so that the mental institutions dumped theirpopulations out onto the streets, where they can carry out the missions they hadbeen programmed to carry out.

They next step was to privatize the prisons, whichare being used for mind-control (not to mention hard-core porn of women victimsin prisons). The Illuminati’s long range plans for mind-control included thatthey would turn over the prisons to people like the Illuminati’s Order of theSkull & Bone’s Wackenhut Services, Inc., Coral Gables, FL, (ph. no.305-666-5656), and the Illuminati’s GE Government Operations, Cherry Hill, NJunder James Becker at 609-486-5042. In the 18 page Heritage Foundation’s studyof prison needs entitled “A Guide To Prison Privatization” (done onMay 28, 1988, Wash. D.C.), the Heritage Foundations gives all the correctIlluminati answers to the question of privatization of prisons, includinglisting the following “corporations that provide prison services …Behavioral Systems SW, Inc.,… Eckerd Family Youth Alternatives, Inc., … GEGovernment Operations, Cherry Hill, NJ.. .Wackenhut.” All groups that thisauthor’s research indicates are Illuminati and involved with mind-control. Anexample of several studies that this author has obtained that were done to showus that privatization of prisons is the best answer to our problems is TheDevelopment, Present Status, and Future Potential of Correctional Privatizationin America by Charles W. Thomas, Prof. of Criminology & Dir, of PrivateCorrections Project; Charles H. Logan, Prof. of Sociology, Univ. of Conn., &Visiting Fellow, Fed. Bureau of Prisons. This paper was done May 1991. Ourgovernment also got into the act and the GAO wrote up a govt. report in Feb.1991 stating that the government could save money by privatizing prisons. TheIlluminati need their people seeded at all levels of society, at the gutterlevel as well as in palaces. This is where the stalkers, their leftover childrenused for programming are handy. Many of these stalkers had secret Illuminatilineages that are hidden via adoption. As one ex-Illuminati member said,”They are the weak links.” The Illuminati must have dependable peopleeverywhere, even in the gutter and prisons.

Why create stalkers? There are along list of reasons. It is somewhat difficult to explain unless readers arealready familiar with the bigger picture. People, who have sat in on Illuminatimeetings where their 20, 30, and 50 year plans were discussed, will explain howthe Illuminati wanted to break down the family structures and bring violenceinto the schools. This is Ordo ab chaos. However, the schools had rules toprotect themselves from dangerous violent activity done by children, so they hadto create violence in the streets, to get violence into the schools by thebackdoor. Stalkers were part of the program to create violence. Another purposestalkers serve for the Illuminati is that they make excellent spies if they getattached to someone. They will find out everything they can about that person.Their minds will creatively invent all kinds of ways to get information abouttheir fixation.

How does the Illuminati program a child to become a stalker?They have the programming techniques to create a stalker down to a fine science.In short, it consists of 1. they bond the child extremely close to its mother ora woman as it grows up. This creates a side-effect of homosexuality. The mentalmechanics of this side-effect are that the male has an unmet need for men. TheIlluminati will manipulate this latent homosexuality but not allow itsexpression. They want to continue to strengthen the apron strings that attachthe child to the mother image. Meanwhile they utterly destroy all self-respectand self-image of the child. It is totally disgraced so that its only identityis its identity with its mother figure. The child can not stand on its own twofeet without the support of the mother-figure. When the boy approaches puberty,they are watched very closely by the Illuminati, be that in a military school ortightly controlled cult family setting, etc. They do not want the apron stringsto ever be cut. They want them to remain dependent when they would naturallybecome independent. They want to insure that the young boy doesn’t develop asense of who they are. The victim of stalker programming will never emotionallygrow out of that age of about 11-13 when boys would sever the ties to theirmother. They stop growing emotionally at about age 12. This is all carefullycrafted by the Illuminati. These young men never understand themselves or theirprogramming. They don’t understand the impulses and uncontrollable drives thathit them. They can’t get off their programming merry-go-round, because it isrooted in the first brain, their maternal instincts, the “reptilianbrain” which has no conscience. Their stalking of their mother figure is asurvival instinct that they don’t understand. They make good spies. They willpersist in tracking and stalking a victim, until they break down the victim’swalls of privacy by their sheer tenacity, persistence, and force of will.

This is because it is a survival instinct that has been harnessed by theIlluminati programmer. Because this programming is laid in at the reptilianfirst brain level, these stalkers can be violent without a higher brainconscience, and their minds will manufacture some justification to protect thissurvival need to stalk. The mind protects itself, so they have a strong denialsystem. Every time someone “rejects” them, it triggers theirprogramming. Because they are driven by their reptilian first brain (the variousbrains are explained later in this book) they only think in the here-and-now,long-term projects bore them, they don’t have the stick-to-itiveness neededfor many jobs, except their eternal quest for an identity with the mother-figurethey stalk.

TRAINING THE UNBORN CHILD

The Illuminati in its typical schizophrenic way, has not neglected theopportunities to begin the programming process in the womb. The scientificresearch in this area has been kept quiet, but from an ex-Illuminati programmerit is clear that they are aware of much more about the unborn child in the womband its thinking processes than the public knows about. I was privileged to readthe excellent book The Secret Life of the Unborn Child by Thomas Veiny, M.D.with John Kelly. This book is written from a loving Christian viewpoint andincorporates scientific research about the thinking of unborn children.Interestingly, Veiny studied research into the mind of the fetus fromresearchers at the Max Plank Institute, Munich, Germany, from the EsalenInstitute, Big Sur, CA., from the Center for Research on Birth and HumanDevelopment, Berkeley, CA which are all institutions involved in mind-controland mind-control research. Just one example of the learning abilities of theunborn child, an autistic child remembered the english her French speakingmother was around during work while the child was in the womb. Veiny writes,”The fetus can see, hear, experience, taste and, on a primitive level, evenlearn in utero (that is, in the uterus–before birth). Most importantly, he canfeel–not with an adult’s sophistication, but feel nonetheless.” (p. 12)Research has clearly showed that the fetus can think and is shaping its (his orher) personality while in the womb. Maternal thoughts, feelings, actions, andfears all reach the child in the womb and affect the child. The maternal bondingwith the child while in the womb is also critical.

Researchers have been unable to pinpoint when a baby in the womb begins tothink, and have a consciousness, but some theorize that it goes back clear tothe beginning of conception. One study taught fetus babies to kick on the cue ofa vibration. The researchers have determined that the unborn child hears what isbeing said around it, and is beginning to associate its language skills aroundthe voices it hears. The unborn child hears and reacts differently to differentmusic played. Soothing words and soothing music will calm a fetus. One conductorremembered into his adult years, the cello music that had only been played whilehe was an unborn child. According to excellent research, the start of awarenessis clearly evidenced between the 28th and 32nd week. At that point, the brain’sneural circuits are just as advanced as a newborns. This is why the Illuminatican get away with causing so many preemie births to enhance dissociativeabilities. From the 32nd week on the child shows that it carries out REM sleep.It is also interesting the children, teenagers and adults have widely divergentsleep patterns but the time spent in REM sleep stays constant. Researchers havebeen able to trace memories going back to the sixth month of pregnancy. In otherwords, from the sixth month of pregnancy onward, some of what the unborn childlearns will be remembered. (See pg. 23 of Varny’s The Secret Life of theUnborn Child.) This is why the Illuminati has made a point of having the unbornchild hear the voices of people who will play a role in the trauma andprogramming of the child. The child may already know the hypnotic voice of oneof its cult programmers at birth. Researchers found that by playing a tape of amother’s heartbeat to new-born babies that the babies felt dramatically moresecure, and were much healthier and did much better. A child who has beentrained to its father’s soothing voice in the womb, has been proven toremember it and hear it after birth and to respond to it in a positive way. Infact, the emotionally healthiest children have been found by researchers to havehad their father’s voice in their life prior to birth. Unborn children do notlike to be poked at. In the eighth week of life, the unborn child is alreadyusing his physical abilities to show that he dislikes intensely to be poked. Oneof the early fetus traumas, that the Illuminati like to carry out is to poke thefetus with a sharp object to make it dissociative in the womb. By the fourthmonth, the unborn baby is making facial expressions. Four to eight weeks laterthey are sensitive to touch, and don’t like to be tickled while in the womb.Sometimes children are tickled during medical exams. If cold water is injectedinto the mother’s stomach, the baby intensely dislikes it. The child can beoverwhelmed while in the womb with horrible sounds, bad tastes caused by whatthe mother eats, being touched in ways that it dislikes, etc. Rock music drivesunborn children crazy. Programming drugs that cause particular thinking in thefetus can also be administered. Can one see that the traumatization to cause MPDcan easily start in the womb? In fact, with many Illuminati babies, they docreate womb splits, and have even started trying to teach Christ to the childwhile in the womb, to speed up the process of when they will purposefully makethe child feel rejected by God and to experience the black communion with Satan.The foundation of trauma-based total mind-control is fear. A deep spirit of fearcripples a person spiritually & emotionally. The foundation of fear canbegin to be layered in while the child is still unborn. The unborn child hasnear-sighted seeing. He can detect light shined on his mother’s stomach. Infact, the fetus’s eyes, which are living in a dark world, will hurt when lightis shined onto the mom’s stomach. A long-term unresolved personal stress onthe mother will be one of the worst stresses her unborn child has to deal with.Short term stresses don’t seem to have the long term side effects that longterm stress has. Short term stresses are soon forgotten by the child. Somehow,the love that the mother has for the child is transmitted to the child, andforms a protective shield so to speak for the child to resist traumas andstresses. When the mother is ambivalent (even though outwardly happy) or cool intheir emotions, the babies have been proven by researchers to consistently havemore physical and emotional problems.

If the Illuminati want to create an effeminate gay man, they can administer progesterone and estrogen to the mother during her pregnancy, and this will influence the development of male children to be effeminate. Certain researchers have been warning about the hormones that are in our daily food because modern techniques of raising cattle and producing milk include giving hormones to the animals.

It is also known that the child’s concept of “I” the self startsin the womb. Those children who have had a secure womb feeling have been shownto be more confident with their sexual lives later on in life. While those whowere terrified in the womb had a tendency to have sexual problems. The traumasthat are induced into some of the babies for programming purposes may have adestabilizing effect on the sexual stability later on in life, and it may bethat the programmers take advantage of the unsure destabilized feelings that area consequence of terror in the womb. Children born from induced labor have astatistically high relationship to sexual sadism, and males typically havemasochistic personalities. (See pg. 19 of The Secret Life of the Unborn Child).Since certain Illuminati children have their birth’s induced to match certaindates of the year, this is one contributing factor as to why Illuminati males,born into bloodlines that have for centuries considered certain birthdatesimportant, have such a high incidence of sadistic tendencies. Verny believesthat C-section babies, due to what happens to babies during the birthing processin contrast to a normal birth, have certain emotional needs that later as adultsare expressed as promiscuous lives. Women due to their C-section birth, developa deep seated desire to be held, and intercourse later becomes the price theyhave to pay to satisfy this deepseated need.

COMMON ILLUMINATI WORK WITH TWINS

The Illuminati mask the removal of babies from pregnant mothers with “alien abduction of fetus” cover stories. When twins are in the uterus, it is common for the Illuminati to skillfully take one of them. This is part of why the disappearance rate for a twin baby is 75%. It is so prevalent that it has been given the name “the Vanishing Twin Phenomenon”. The Vanishing Twin Phenomenon is well established by statistics. Establishment doctors generally claim that one twin has absorbed the other twin. Some researchers claim that this can not be the real explanation for any part of the birthing process. Elizabeth Noble in her book Having Twins, (Houghton Mifflin, 1990) states, “With increasing use of ultrasound, it has been observed that more multiples are lost in the uterus than previously thought–some studies say as high as 80 percent of twin pregnancies. Considering that there are still 2 in 75 people born as twins, what a great number of twins would be born if the disappearance rate were not so high. There are many cases of two heartbeats being detected only hours before the delivery, and yet only one baby being born. Many mothers have been suspicious, but the doctors tell them that the second heartbeat “was only a mistake.” The explanations that doctors give for disappearing babies who are never born often do not seem satisfactory. There are different kinds of twins:

a. There are dizygotic, also called fraternal twins. Two variations of thisis when eggs from two consecutive ovarian cycles are separately fertilized, or asingle egg divides and each of its halves gets fertilized.

b. There are monozygotic, which are identical, or clones so to speak of eachother. Identical twins are always of the same sex. They share the same genes,the same fingerprints, dental characteristics, etc.

c. There are monozygotic mirror twins, which have identical characteristicson opposite sides of their body.

When one twin disappears, the surviving twin will often develop psychologicalproblems around the disappearance, even if the child is never told that they hada twin disappear. The Illuminati believe that the soul of a dead twin goes intothe live twin. They consider twins which have two souls very powerfulindividuals. One doctor, William Baldwin, has written in his book SpiritReleasement Therapy: A Technique Manual that he believes that the dead twinastrally attaches its soul to the surviving twin. Dr. Alice Rose believes thatsome eating disorders are the result of a twin dying in the womb due tocompetition for food.

To further complicate things, the Illuminati program their slaves to believethat they have a twin somewhere. Elvis Presley, a Monarch mind-controlled slave,believed he had a twin that communicated with him spiritually. In the AngelTimes magazine, (Oct. issue), a childhood friend of Elvis states that Elviscommunicated with beings as a child. These being had showed Elvis a vision ofdancing, and of people “dressed in white with colors all around.”While it is popular to dismiss the vanishing twin phenomena with superficialmedical explanations, or with alien theories, at least of some of the phenomenais the result of the Illuminati’ s massive system of abuse, where they needbabies for sacrifice, experiments and programming.

SELECTION OF ADULT CANDIDATES FOR MIND-CONTROL

There is an ongoing operation within the intelligence agencies to identify adults who would make good candidates for mind-control. For this reason, the CIA set up many years ago chains of weight-loss centers (as well as stop-smoking centers and stop-drinking centers) that help people with weight loss, & breaking drinking & smoking addictions. At these centers, people trained to identify clients with high levels of suggestibility have been identifying for the intelligence agencies, (esp. the CIA) potential mind-control victims. Intelligence assets are located around the country and even outside of the United States. The perpetrators try to look for individuals that come through immigration, who come into county clinics and hospitals, government hospitals, etc. who have the following initial attributes:

a. they are over 120 I.Q.

b. they are alone without a support team of family and friends

c. they do well on their first session where hypnosis is clandestinely perpetrated on the individual

d. they have other attributes that can be exploited to the advantage of the intelligence groups.

If a person is identified at a weight-reduction center (which is a CIA front)as having a weight problem that needs to receive hospital treatment AND they arealso highly suggestible, they will be subjected to mind-control whilehospitalized. According to one source, IF the individual, who has been a.spotted, b. singled out and c. placed under hypnosis without their consent, d.looks likes a useful candidate for mind-control to the psychologists andintelligence field officers, THEN a file will be started and they will be placedin a CALL FILE. The initial hypnotic session may be in a dirty doctor’soffice, or in some cases in emergency rooms. Dirty doctors working in emergencyroom settings are careful to work undetected by clean hospital workers. Thehypnotic suggestion is implanted that the victim return at a particular date toa location where more detailed work can be done.

U.S. GOVT. MIND-CONTROL LEVEL 1

A proper candidate, that is one with an I.Q. above 120 and proper hypnoticabilities, will be given a code cue, that is an alpha-numeric code, or a numberor a word code that identifies them. This is embedded hypnotically. If theperson has no relatives that are important, they will be instructed and secretlyhelped to move to a location chosen by the intelligence agencies. Theprogrammers will cover their tracks so that what has happened at this level isdeeply embedded in the subconscious mind & can’t be retrieved.

U.S. GOVT. MIND-CONTROL LEVEL 2

At this level the person is used operationally at very easy and unimportant tasks. He is also assigned someone. The hypnotist programmer is beginning to soften the victim up and make them more pliable to suggestions. If he successfully performs these small jobs that have been hypnotically written into the mind, then he will be given a RECALL SERVICE NOTICE by the person who is in contact with the victim. Now the person moves on to level 3, which is a fully operational level.

U.S. GOVT. MIND-CONTROL LEVEL 3

When the victim is instructed to come in, they do not realize what is in store for them. Now their own personality will be re-written according to what script the programmers want it to have. The person will be set to carry out his instructions as needed. The slave will now be given specific trigger codes to carry out assignments. All field agents of the intelligence agencies get level 3 control.

GOVT. MIND-CONTROL LEVEL 4

This level is reserved for candidates who are very intelligent and very loyalto hypnotic commands. Victims of this level of mind-control will follow out anycommand they are given, whether it be suicidal or harmful. Because these victimsof mind-control are now under total mind-control, just as many members of theIlluminati grow up under, the intelligence agencies want to protect their level4 slaves. They will be given a new life along with a total new identity. All thecredentials and paperwork that the new identity needs will be created. The slavehas now received a totally new life, and whatever SCRIPT (agenda) theintelligence agencies want. The programming that was placed in up to level 3 iserased in a sense and an entire new life script is placed in. This is done withthe use of drugs, deception, and other sophisticated mind-control techniquesdescribed in Vol. 2 and this book. Complete areas of memory are erased at thisstage and then a new history is written into the pre-puberty area of memory.This takes some time, and is accomplished using a number of techniques our bookshave described. The old memory is erased and OVERWRIITEN with the new historyand script. The brain assimilates this new knowledge as if it’s always beenthere, because it feels comfortable putting something into a void spot. Theprogrammers prefer to find a period in the original person’s life when nothinghappened. It is easy to erase a memory block when nothing significant is inoriginal memory, i.e. it is basically blank anyway. As a sleeper the level 5slave may marry and lead a relatively normal life. One clue that the person isgoing to be used on a mission is if he suddenly leaves his wife & goessomewhere. This may be a clue that the handlers are positioning the person for amission. They may also have nullified the slave’s external life, so there isn’tthe purpose of life to prevent a suicide mission.

U.S. GOVT. MIND-CONTROL LEVEL 5

This level is reserved for people with an I.Q. of at least 130. This levelwill require taking the slave to a special programming center, where they aretaken down to the comatose level of subconscious awareness to place theprogramming in at the deepest levels of the mind. The victim may be comatose fordays or months, and this requires a catheter in the neck, urinary and digestivetracts to keep the body properly functioning. Because the person will behospitalized for quite a while, a popular cover story is that they had anautomobile accident. Remember, in Vol. 2, it was discussed how Roseanne Barr(now an actress with MPD/DID) had as a teenager an “automobileaccident” during which she received significant programming. Many of theselevel 5 slaves are placed as sleepers into organizations of all kinds, wherethey lead “normal lives.” The level 5 triggers activate programsdeeply embedded and NESTED into the memory of a person. A team of programmerswork on level 5 slaves. They must make sure that the victim has a support systemso that they do not self-destruct. They may have psychologists in normal lifeset up to serve as a support person for the slave. It was interesting to seethat AFTER learning from people in the know about how memory is erased and a newidentity given, that the show “No Where Man” portrayed this happeningto a black man. Whoever wrote the scripts for No Where Man had an excellentunderstanding of what is going on in mind-control.

TESTING YOUNG CHILDREN TO PLAN THE PROGRAMMING

In Vol. 2, chap.] it was explained how the programmers can test the preverbalchild to determine & plan how they will program them. EEG’s &Gittinger’s Tests were discussed. Here is more information. Researchers havebeen able to study the personalities of unborn children and to watch how thesepersonality traits stay with the children through their lives. In the Vol. 2book it was explained how the Illuminati has used EEGs to determine thepersonalities of pre-verbal children so that they know what type of programmingis best suited for that personality. Interestingly, on Mon., April 12, ’96, 11p.m. after the Vol. 2 book was out on the market, 20/20 did a show where theyshowed researchers using EEG electrodes to monitor childrens’ brainwaves fortheir happiness potential. It is known that brain potentials associated withvoluntary movements have been identified, thereby giving big brother thepotential to predict when a person is going to make a particular movement. Thebrain is dynamically looking at patterns and continously generating hypnothesesabout its environment which are then validated or invalidated by informationpicked up by the senses. The P300 wave (known as the P3 wave for short) allowsneuroscientists to track decision making in a brain’s cortex. The P300 waveshows when the mind’s thought processes have been internally surprised. Inthis way, detection of the P300 gives a method of lie-detection superior to thepolygraph. When surprised the brain creates P300 wave by internal brainfunctions–such as what chapt. 4 will call “cognitive demonprocesses”. Initially, EEGs are taken of child victims, with an analysis ofthe different wave forms. Next, will come tests of VERs (visually evokedresponses). This is valuable for instance, because bright children will showasymmetric (high amplitude) responses during VERs from the right hemisphere.Children with low I.Q. show the same evoked response from both hemispheres. Thisis just one window on the mind that the Illuminati programmers have of thepreverbal children. There are other evoked-potential tests that are being usedto determine personality traits too. Evoked-responses can also be used to showwhether the person is conscious, or how deep they are in a coma. The earlycomponents of the evoked-response, which occur 10-20 milliseconds after astimulus, are believed to come from the brain stem and can be used to determinea level of a coma. Evoked-responses are also used to determine particularlearning disabilities within a child. Right-handed children will show even priorto birth, an anatomical specialization that favors language acquisition in theleft hemisphere. So they can even determine what handed-ness the child has veryearly on.

Image2.gif
<input height=”380″ name=”I21″ src=”http://www.whale.to/b/sp/deepera/Image2.gif” type=”image” width=”432″ />

Baron Guy de Rothschild, of France, has been the leading light of hisbloodline. The Baron is an Illuminati Kingpin and slave programmer. For thosewho have bought the cover story that the Catholic Church is not part of theIlluminati’s NWO, I would point out that the Baron has worked with the Pope inprogramming slaves. This photo was picked for the trauma chapter because theBaron has a droopy left eye. Many of the deeper Illuminati alters show droopyleft eyes due to the trauma they have received. The authors are not aware ofwhat the official explanation for his droopy left eye would be.

CHAPTER 2. SCIENCE NO. 2–THE TRAUMATIZATION& TORTURE OF THE VICTIM

The basis for the success of the Monarch mind-control programming is that different personalities or personality parts called alters can be created who do not know each other, but who can take the body at different times. Let’s review some important points that were mentioned in the Vol.2 book, ‘The amnesia walls that are built by traumas, form a protective shield of secrecy that protects the abusers from being found out, and prevents the front personalities who hold the body much of the time to know how their System of alters is being used. The shield of secrecy allows cult members to live and work around other people and remain totally undetected. The front alters can be wonderful Christians, and the deeper alters can be the worst type of Satanic monster imaginable–a Dr. Jekyll/Mr. Hyde effect.”

A great deal is at stake in maintaining the secrecy of the intelligence agency or the occult group which is controlling the slave. The success rate of this type of programming is high but when it fails, the failures are discarded through death.” Each trauma and torture serves a purpose.” To create alters (dissociative parts of the mind) the worse the trauma, the better the amnesia walls, so programmers have been spending years trying to outdo each other in creating the world’s worst traumas that humans can survive, so they can program people. Readers may at first wonder why cover this gruesome part of the programming? There are a number of reasons. People who pretend to be helpful people–such as some ministers, and some professional therapists–are unwilling to look at the facts of what have been done to the victims they claim to want to help. How can the victim ever come out of denial and face the issues around their dissociation–IF the people helping them who didn’t experience these traumas first hand can’t even face the existence and nature of these traumas? Many therapists encourage the victim to maintain their amnesia walls, “let the past be the past”. They say, “You can’t change the past.” No matter how appealing this advice sounds, this advice for victims of trauma-based mind-control this is defective, idiotic simple advice. This type of advice only continues the mind-control and the abuse of the victim. No wonder Christian ministers who are under their mind-control are used to spout off this type of defective advice. It is important to cover programming traumas because it validates the memories of recovering victims, and because there are standard types of trauma that are used for certain types of programming. For instance, traumas that desensitize a person to killing–i.e. traumas where the victim is forced to kill innocent people–are used to program assassination alters. The base of the programming is FEAR layered via trauma. Hopefully, the readers will be inspired and motivated like this author to try to stop this horrendous mind-control.

DAILY ABUSE WORKS BEST FOR PROGRAMMING

To insure that the programming and abuse stays hidden from even the slave, the slave is given daily traumas as a child to keep them dissociative. The Illuminati’s programmers get the cooperation of a vast network of abusers who traumatize the children who are being programmed. One of the Illuminati’s fronts is the Catholic church, which the Jesuits manage for the Illuminati. Under the cover of religious retreats and their religious image, many Catholic clergymen have been participants in the vast trauma network actively creating trauma-based mind controlled slaves. The problem in exposing this is that first the people who are being traumatized have trust in the clergymen who are doing the traumas. Second, if the victims or parents of the victims suspect anything, they usually go to church officials rather than the police in order to clear up the problem, yet protect the church. Additionally, in most cases both the corrupt religious system, working behind the corrupt police and judicial system manoeuver to protect the abuser and to further victimize the mind-control victim and anyone coming to the person’s rescue. The following are but a few examples of a widespread network of secret abuse, that will not be uncovered because the system to catch abusers has long ago been corrupted and infiltrated and controlled by mind-controlled slaves, as well as by blackmailed or bribed dirty persons of authority.

Roger Trott, a Catholic Priest in Delmont, PA convicted of molesting 12 boys, got a suspended sentence by the judge. Can you believe such unbelievable leniency?
Father John Engbers (b. 1922, in Holland), catholic pastor at Leroy outside of Lafayette, LA. He baby-sat for a family, in which he sexually molested their children, their five daughters. He was treated as a member of this family and the mother, who was of Amer. Indian descent, was very close ("worshipped"-according to one daughter) to Father John. She spent long hours alone with him. He would tell his victims that they were his "puppet, like Pinocchio." He molested some of the girls almost every day, and had them under his control enough that they returned even when they were living at a distance from him. He had what appeared to be a hypnotic type spell over them. Father John Engbers molested many children during his years as a Louisiana priest, until he fled in 1985. He had lots of money to spend. The Catholic church had known he was molesting children clear back in 1952, when some parents complained. The Catholic hierarchy helped him escape back to Holland in mid-1985, when reports and law suits over how he sexually molested children came out. The case of Father John Engbers has all the earmarks of a participant in the daily Monarch mind-control abuse given to children.

Dennis Dellamalva, a Pennslyvannia Catholic Priest, who molested boys, and the judicial system protected him from prosecution. The judge, a catholic order the records of this paedophilia priest sealed, and the catholic church which knew of his deviant behavior continued to give him a position of authority.

Michael Peterson, a child molesting priest, who was a drug addict and a homosexual, was one of the catholic hierarchy’s main men involved with investigations of pedophilia, who died of AIDS, and his rich sidekick Stephen B.C. Johnson II, who administered a catholic facility near Boston, Mass. Michael Peterson lived a rich lifestyle in Marsalin, and later Suitland, next to St. Luke and told people that he was not worried about anyone, because he had the goods on them to force them to comply. Michael Peterson’s St. Lukes was used by the Catholic church to receive many priests that were caught doing paedophilia. In the first six years, St. Lukes claimed to have cured 55 child molesting priests.

Monsignor William A. Kraft, (b. Rochester, NY), Knight of the Holy Sepulcher, was pastor of St. Therese during the ‘60’s, and by 1978 the rich pastor of St. Charles Borromeo, San Diego. His father was a chief executive with Eastman Kodak. Kraft’s sexual molestations of children have all the earmarks of being a Monarch mind-control abuser. He was protected by the Catholic hierarchy and the system from prosecution for molestation of children. When children are being tortured and traumatized by persons who are respected in society, and when these children see the police and judges protect these people, do you see why this further traumatizes them, and convinces them that there is no hope? Once they lose hope of outside help, their minds are further propelled to obey the commands of (continue with the picture below. The text continues under the girl in the left upper corner. Editor’s note)

p_little_girl2
<input height=”662″ name=”I22″ src=”http://www.whale.to/b/sp/deepera/p_little_girl2.jpg” type=”image” width=”500″ />

ANGER-MANAGEMENT-PROGRAMMING TRAUMAS

The first type of abuse is prenatal. The second series of abuses occurs from 2 to 4. The third round of programming abuse, is given to the child around 5 to 6 years of age. One of the specific programming abuses is teaching the child slave to redirect their anger away from Papa or Daddy the slave owner. The Papa Bear, Daddy figure in the slave’s young life will intentionally provoke the child with teasing to aggravate the child into rage. Exactly what is done to provoke rage within the child will vary, but the result is the same, the child feels rage. The question is then asked, “Are you angry with daddy?” “Yes!” at that point electroshock is applied to the head, toes, tips of fingers, nipples & inside the vagina, or penis by electrodes attached to the child. The child will be brought to the level of rage, and then allowed to cool down for 30 minutes. The child’s alters are then via behavior modification & hypnosis taught to redirect their anger toward themselves. “WHEN YOU ARE ANGRY WITH YOUR FATHER, YOU WILL HURT YOURSELF. DO YOU UNDERSTAND? The message will be played over & over & the question “Do you understand?” will be played over & over. The child is shocked until they are compliant. The suicide programming will be layered in. Part of layering in the suicide programming, is to create pain in the right ear via a needle to the ear, with the creation of horrible disorienting sounds, while pulsing lights drive the brain into its alpha programming state. At a certain brainwave state the programming begins with repetitious self-destruct messages. These messages debase the value of the person to reinforce the suicidal destruct messages. After the child has learned that they are to hurt themselves, then they will learn specifically to cut themselves if they get angry at Papa or anyone in the Illuminati family they belong to. After this training, the child will attach subconsciously a fear of pain to the concept of anger toward its Illuminati controllers.

SILENCE PROGRAMMING TRAUMAS to TEACH SILENCE

One way to teach silence is to repeatedly kill persons of all ages in front of the person being programmed while telling the mind-control victim that the people who are being sadistically killed because they talked. However, the “no-talk” lesson will be repeated and embedded in many different fashions for Illuminati mind-controlled slaves. Perhaps a favorite Illuminati method is to expose the victim to watching dental tortures. The viewing can be reinforced by subjecting the victim to some dental tortures themselves. A common dental torture would be to extract the tongue of a live and conscious victim. Then dental tortures are done to the victim, and the intense jaw pain of the torture is linked to tripping the no-talk programming. If the person talks–their jaw hurts and they may pull up the dissociated feelings of seeing a person lose their tongue. This then will be further backed up by training an alter to carry out Russian Roulette if the system talks, and training numerous other alters other types of suicide if the system talks. In other words many back up programs mutually support each other in overkill. Considering that dental torture is used for no-talk programming, it was with dismay that this author discovered that Virtual I-O Co. is now making virtual reality eye glasses for dental work. Seashells and other images are linked to the concept of “no-talk” via programming laid in using methods described elsewhere.

Another “no-talk” program is the “Don’t tel me” telephone no talk programming.

TORTURE FOR NO-WRITE

The victim has their right hand bound behind their back and then is made to walk on their knees like a dog.

PAY ATTENTION TORTURE

There are a host of these, one example is a needle inserted up the nostril behind the eyeball.

A COMPLIANCE TORTURE — The Black Slave Chair

The Black Slave was invented by a Syrian doctor who helped supervise torture, hence its arabic name al-Abd as-Aswad. The victim is strapped to this metal chair. What is unique about this chair is its design & its hole so that a hot skewer can be shoved up the anus. Another device for programming is a harness used as a suspension device. Yet another is an electrofied water bed for turning one in an electric eel.” Compliance is also taught by taking an eyeball out of the victim (later replaced), and by dislocating an arm at the shoulder. After this the victim can be wrapped as if in a cacoon within bandages. The supposed treatment for the dislocation, places the victim in sensory deprivation, another trauma.

A TRAUMA TO DEVELOP ANIMAL ALTERS

Helpless humans will be displayed to child victim of mind-control. These helpless humans will be visciously killed by some animal, a lion, a tiger, a snake, a wild dog or whatever. The programming lie emphasized at this point is that it is better to be that particular type of animal than it is to be human. Then the animal is sacrificed and its spirit is ritually joined to the child’s alters. Other programming is added to insure the dehuminization process to make certain child alters into particular animals. When finished, the child will contain viscious protector animal alters within their system. The prior example of a programming trauma actually pertains to structuring. The mind-control science of structuring MPD (DID) is discussed in chapter 7. It may be of significance to stress to the reader that traumas come in many shapes. The traumas are not done without some thought. Specific traumas are given for specific desired outcomes. The power and horror of a trauma is hard to gauage. It often results in a type of subconscious adrenlin-rush addiction. The traumas involving sensory deprivation and betrayals of trust can be just as devastating as painful tortures. Sad to say, sometimes for programming purposes all three types may be skillfully combined into one horrendous experience that overwhelms the mind.

TRAUMA TO ISOLATE THE VICTIM

A birthday party will be given for the victim. The birthday cake will contain a bean somewhere. It is announced that whoever gets the bean will get a surprise. When someone gets the bean, the mind-control victim finds out that the surprise is that they must take the life of the child who has found the bean. This programming trauma is part of a series of traumas designed to make deeper alters afraid of accepting any gifts from outsiders. The deeper alters are programmed that gifts always come with a sacrifice. Gifts always cost something. Nothing comes free. “SEVER ALL TIES, HAVE NO FRIENDS” are the programming messages. In reality, what Satan is doing with this trauma on a spiritual level is what the British Empire did with small countries. The British would warn small countries, “you are in danger, we will protect you. (The Spirit of Fear says, gifts are dangerous, let me the Spirit of Fear protect you.) When the British moved into small countries like this, they called them protectorates, & then they took over. (The Spirit of Fear, pretending to protect the victim, takes over and the victim develops a deep-seated free-floating phobias towards gifts from anyone. What pretends to protect, actually ends up controlling & enslaving.) As the reader treks through this book, he or she will encounter places where other traumas are discussed, such as tortures via implants, & traumas via rides in amusement parks, & spinning traumas during the structuring for creating alter families from an alter. Finally, the waves of fear created by repeated traumas layer in Spirits of Fear, which form a dark spiritual foundation.
<input height=”534″ name=”I23″ src=”http://www.whale.to/b/sp/deepera/p_clothing2.jpg” type=”image” width=”670″ />

p_clothing2.jpg

p_adrenalchrome2<input height=”439″ name=”I24″ src=”http://www.whale.to/b/sp/deepera/p_adrenalchrome2.jpg” type=”image” width=”199″ />

CHAPTER 3. SCIENCE NO. 3 The USE OF DRUGS

IN REVIEW

The science of Pharmacology (drugs) has given the Programmers a vast array of mind-altering and body-altering drugs. Some of the drugs are not used to directly alter the mind, but to change the body (make the skin burn), or make the person vomit, or some other reaction that can be harnessed to further their nefarious programming goals.

DRUG RESEARCH

One of the sites which has done research/programming into MPD and drug action on the brain has been Bethesda, MD where Dr. Irwin J. Kopin was Chief of the Laboratory of Clinical Science, at the National Institute of Mental Health. He was active in research into how drugs can affect the mind.

CLASSIFYING MIND-DRUGS

When this author studied differential equations, and higher mathematical it became clear that everything can be reduced to a mathematical explanation. Sometimes a mathematical notation is easier and clearer, than other explanations. This author suggests that drugs that affect the mind could be classified on three scales:

Scale X: the wakefulness or arousal scale, which runs from a coma, to asleep, to alert, to hyperalert

Scale Y: the attitude, or affect scale, that is one’s manner of feelings, responses etc., running on a scale from suicidal and depressed to euphoric, blissful and elated.

Scale Z: the integration of reality scale, which runs from confusion, delusions, and psychotic thoughts to integrated, clear, lucid thinking.

Many (if not all) of the drugs that were listed in Vol. 2 and this chaptercan be plotted along one of these scales, and sometimes 2 or 3 of these scales,which means an x,y, z axis configuration can be used to compare such drugs. Interms of naturally occurring brain substances which are manufacturedsynthetically and injected according to the programmers’ needs, it could bestated that the original purpose of the substance can be malevolently tamperedwith.

p_mind-drugs.jpg
<input height=”340″ name=”I25″ src=”http://www.whale.to/b/sp/deepera/p_mind-drugs.jpg” type=”image” width=”505″ />

ADMINISTRATION OF DRUGS FOR PROGRAMMING

The distribution into the brain of a drug is dependent upon many factors.Under microscopic-level inspection, one discovers a person’s brain isphysically constructed to allow certain molecules to enter into the brain incertain complex ways. Just because a substance is put into the blood doesn’tmean it gets into brain tissue. Researchers have discovered such drug propertiessuch as lipid solubility, the ionization, its tissue-protein bonding abilities,and its molecular size all play a role in how well drugs get into the brain.Further, the Cerebrospinal Fluid (CSF) which will be discussed indepth inChapter 8 can play a role in drug absorption. Several studies during the 1960’sshowed that the removal of drugs or substances from the CSF, can reduce theeffective concentration of a drug in the extracellular spaces which make upperhaps 12% of the brain’s volume. These physical factors are not the onlyfactors involved.

Researchers have repeatedly discovered that different people respond tomind-changing drugs in many different ways–including two different peoplehaving opposite responses to the same drug. There have been a number of studiesabout this phenomena, including: (SarwerFoner, 1957), (Henninger, et. al.,1965), (Rickels & Downing, 1966), (McNair et al., 1966). Over the years, ithas been discovered that a person’s mental abilities, expectations, prior drugexperience, age, sex, race, personality traits, and personality types can allpotentially influence how a mind-altering drug will effect a person. Forinstance, a sedative drug administered to an extroverted confident athletecaused the athlete to feel anxiety and disorientation. In contrast, anintroverted nervous intellectual felt calmness when the same drug wasadministered. Particle size of the drug and the rate of dissolution will helpdetermine the rate at which a drug is absorbed (and eliminated) into the body.For instance, when colloidal silver has been produced by a process that yieldssmall particles, it will cleanse the body, while larger particles of colloidalsilver will kill a person. Different companies and different preparations of thesame drug may have different outcomes upon the body. The persistence of a drugin the body is calculated by programmers using half-lives of a drug. This meansthat at one half-life, one half of a drug is left in the body. At two halflives, one-half of one-half is left or (1/4). At three half-lives there will be1/8 left of original drug. In other words, the rate of elimination decreaseswith time. When heroin is processed into morphine, its characteristics change.The heroin takes affect quicker, but doesn’t last as long as morphine. This isbecause of enzyme mechanisms in the liver and how they react to the morphine incontrast to the heroin. Different drugs react differently with the complexenzyme mechanisms of the liver. Phenobarbital amazingly increases the enzymecontent of the endoplasmic reticulum with habitual use of the drug.Phenobarbital will then enhance a particular type of toxicity. Low doses do nothurt the body, but there is a threshold where damage from phenobarbital willbegin occurring to the liver and kidneys. This is a sampling of why it isimportant that the Illuminati use extremely skilled medical personnel in theapplication of programming drugs. The programmers are far more skilled than mostlegitimate therapists in understanding how much of what drug to give to whichalter personality. The mental makeup of an alter will influence how that alterwill respond to drugs. Some deeper alters can resist drug influence due totraining. Some deeper alters are so fine-tuned that they only need small doses.With their superior knowledge of how a System of Multiple Personalities has beencreated within a victim’s mind, the programmers have a distinct edge overdeprogrammers in how to administer drugs. On top of that the programmers, placein all types of programming to prevent anyone but the programmers (or approvedpeople) from administering drugs. An example of how strong the mind can be overdrugs–is when the programmers “SET THE STAGE”, “PRESENT THESCRIPT’ and then use Seconal to obtain deeply embedded programming commands.Setting the stage is a programming term for talking to the victim in such a waythat the mind is receptive for what the programmer wants the victim’s mind todo. Presenting the script is the actual set of commands that the programmergives to the victim. For instance, the programmer functioning as a hypnotisttells the victim that a powerful sedative will be given but that part of themind will be strong enough to overcome the sedative effect of seconal. Thevictim is instructed “WHEN YOU HEAR THE WORD [[[trigger]] power code word, forinstance: ZEBRA COME FORTH]…YOU WILL RESPOND TO WHAT I AM SAYING.” Theseconal is given and the person is placed in an isolation chamber. A goodprogrammer skilled in hypnotism can actually get a victim’s mind to respondunder the influence of seconal in an isolation chamber. Then the programmer willlay in deeply embedded commands while the person is in a sleep deeper than atwilight sleep. When the human body receives several different kinds of drugs,sometimes drugs compete with each other during the excretion/elimination phase.This may create a buildup or a retention of one of the drugs. As discussed inVol. 2, the programmers don’t like to use combinations of several drugsbecause it complicates things. There is still a great deal of unknownsconcerning adverse drug reactions. Some people do not show an allergic responseto a drug until it is administered several times. Because of the potential forallergic reactions or side effects, the Programmers are helped because theprogramming centers, according to ex-programmers are extremely well stocked withdifferent drugs, & the Programmer can if need be shift to an alternativeprogramming drug. Most slaves are programmed to stay away from the use of drugs,except those drugs that the programmer/handler approves. By reducing the use ofdrugs of all kinds, the problem of adverse drug reactions, and othercomplications is reduced for the programmers. Some people who are health freakswho stay away from drugs are actually carrying out a front program for theirprogrammers.

MORE PROGRAMMING DRUGS (these were not listed in the Vol.2 Formula book)

Acetophenzine aka Tindal–(this anti-psychotic has been used on multiples, it mutes anxiety, suspiciousness and delusions. it would fall more into the control category of uses rather than for actual programming.)

Amines–(this is a general term for many types of the brain’s own chemicalsused to produce moods, and feelings)

Damiana–(aka Mex. Witching Herb, the extract is used w/ other herbs duringprogamming for a relaxed pleasure state.) »An example is Damiana-Biack KavaKava-Valerian-Skullcap-Wild Lettuce Opium, which makes a “it’s-nothing-but-a-dream”state.

Chloral hydrate–(which is a hypnotic put in pill form such as chioral betaine, Beta-Chlor, and given with something like a glass of milk. About 500 mg. of Chloral hydrate are given for a hypnotic for an adult.)

Cyciohexamide–(produces retroactive amnesia)

Cylert–a type of speed

Datura aka Jimsonweed, or thorn apple–(sometimes used to help a child conjure up their personal spirit.)

Iminodibenzyis– (used for sedation)

Lettuce Opium–(tradition Hopi shaman trance drug)

Mandrake–(from the Mandragora plant, an ancient occult drug, a traditionai witchcraft drug for causing people to sleep)

Methaqualone–(a rapid hypnotic drug that produces a dissociative high, it can be used to put someone into a coma)

Pemoline-magnesium hydroxide (aka PMH, helps enhance conditioned avoidance training by acting as a stimulant, is helpful for repetitive learning situations by a general alerting effect on the mind)

Phenothiazines–(used to raise the threshold of electrical stimulation tolerance, to tranquilize or induce sleep)

Rowan–traditional sleeping/death herb of witches; May Day is also called Rowan Tree Witch Day.

Seconal, aka Seconal Sodium or Secobarbital Sodium–(a popular programming drug to stabilize programming, to set in deep programming into the base of the mind such as dates and codes, and to block out memory of missions by slaves, see various paragraphs below for more explanations. Used in 10, 20, 30, 50, 100 mg. increments. A tubal pregnancy/birth can be hid in a woman by 300-400 mg., while surgery on an adult man may require 500 mg.)

Tetradoxyn (made from the Puffer Blowfish, used by Voudoun, & others to create a zombie state)

In our discussion of drugs used in programming, this chapter will expand upon the previous book by discussing the application of drugs to:

a. to stabilize the programming after torture b. hiding the codes

c. building in deeply embedded structures and beliefs, and the creation of false identities

b. to influence the memory by drugs c. to stimulate instinctual behaviors

d. to create moods and attitudes by synthetically manufacturing and injectingthe brain’s own natural amines.

STABILIZING THE PROGRAMMING

The total mind-control of the Illuminati is called “trauma-basedmind-control” because repeated traumas are inflicted upon the victim is avery systematic calculated inhumane way. The tortures and stress are all partsof a programming package. After a particular harsh session of programming thevictim’s mind will be in a high state of terror, shock, dissociativeness andsplintering. The victim’s mind can’t take much more, and the potential ofhaving uncontrolled splintering of the victim’s mind and thereby having thedestruction of the mind and programming threatens the programmers’ control.The programmer wants the mind and body to rest so that the programming can setin, without destabilizing events occurring. For instance, after severe watertorture (drowning) the programmer will want the programming (hypnotic script) toset in, and he will give seconal (aka seconal sodium or secobarbital sodium) toinduce a deep sleep. Sleep occurs within 10 to 15 minutes. Sometimes a victim’sheart has been pushed to its limits during a trauma and they must shut the bodydown to let the victim rest. Seconal is a drug of choice for this. Seconal isadministered in hospitals or programming sites where trained personnel know howto give the drug. Dirty psychiatrists, who understand the relationship betweendrugs and human behavior and who are either programmers themselves or assistantsto programmers often are the ones who give the victims drugs like seconal.

EXTENSIVE RESEARCH DONE TO INFLUENCE HUMAN MEMORY BY DRUGS

The complete list of researchers who have studied the effect drugs have on memory would require a massive book. However, we will just mention a few that pertain to this book briefly. One of the places the effect of drugs on memory was researched was at the Univ. of California at Irvine, CA. Another was at institutions in the Boston, Mass. area such as the Massachusetts General Hosp., in Boston. Dr. Talland in Boston tested the effects of PMH on human memory. He discovered PMH could help people relearn material that had been partially forgotten. The Illuminati programmer Cameron (aka Dr. White) also tried out various approaches including the administration of RNA and RNA- synthesis stimulants. John C. Lilly, who admits being a member of an Esoteric Mystery School, was a government researcher on the use of LSD to program people. He did part of his work on LSD programming at the Maryland Psychiatric Research Center under admitted government financing. His book Programming and Metaprogramming in the Human Biocomputer (NY: Julian Press, 1967, & revised format 1972) is an excellent paper trail of how the Illuminati has used LSD to program total mind-controlled slaves. Originally, the book was given out only to a few select people. The book attempts to hide what it talks about behind a long intro, long sentences, big words and arcane psychological terms, but it does spell out how they do the mind-control programming with LSD. A section later in this chapter will lay out for the reader how they do this.

ONE TYPE OF EXPERIENCE OF VICTIM HYPNOTIC DRUG A MIND-CONTROL

The drugged victim feels like he is looking through a keyhole and the hypnotic voice of the programmer is the key hole. The world may be very shadowy and drawn in on itself. The mind has its attention on the hypnotist/programmer.

The BASIC PHASES of MEMORY

The human memory process can be basically broken down into 3 phases, theregistration phase, the retention phase and the retrieval phase. Great amount ofresearch has gone into how to use drugs to manipulate each of those phases.Great amount of research also went into how to measure people’s abilities toa. learn, b. remember, c. and to do non-learned behavior such as arm-handsteadiness and visual time reaction.

WHAT the MIND-CONTROL PROGRAMMERS USE to MANIPULATE memory

Scopolamine was found to impair short-term memory. It was discovered that retrograde amnesia could be created by electroshock several hours after the brain had learned something. This lesson caused the Illuminati and those working in mind control with them to use cattle prods and stun guns.

If a person performed something they were to forget they can be stunned orgiven scopolamine to deaden their memory. A quick anesthetic applied immediatelyafter something has been done might also impair the retention of what hadhappened. Yet another way is seconal, which will be discussed soon. Low doses ofanaleptic drugs given about 10 to 20 min. before training were found to helplearning. Analeptic drugs include bemegride, diazadamantanol, pentylenete-trazol,picotoxin, and strychnine. It was discovered that strychnine helps enhanceclassical conditioning. It can be administered either before or after thelearning has taken place. It is believed that memory storage is enhanced bystrychnine and strychnine sulfate. Strychnine was also found to help protect themind’s memory against the effect of electroshock. Abusers out on the streethave been turning to GHB and Rohypnol to decrease inhibitions and to causememory loss in their victims. Rohypnol (which sells for up to $10 a tablet) isdependable but more expensive than the GHB. A number of women who have beenraped by adding these drugs to their alcoholic drinks at the Club Boca, PalmBeach, FL made the paper after they were drugged and raped after partying at theclub. (The Palm Beach Post, Mar., 1996 pp. 1B, 10B.) GHB (Gamma HydroxyButyrate) is a compound essential to the body. It acts similar to aneurotransmitter. It helps release the Human Growth Hormone and removesinhibitions around intimacy, as well as some other beneficial effects. GHBcrosses the blood-brain barrier and metabolizes into GABA. GHB’s high degreeof safety was proved over 25 years of research, and was basically an establishedfact before the FDA and the media demonized GHB. Several sources seem toindicate that the FDA banned GHB –not because it has dangerous side effects,which it doesn’t have inspite of the established media’s disinformationcampaign with half truths–but because it is not patented by the drug companiesand would cut into their profits.

GHB also has a great aphrodisia effect. It reduces inhibitions to have sex,but because the woman clitoris is more sensitive it interferes with femaleorgasms. However, when the women do achieve it, it is longer and more intense,according to GHB researchers. (This author got much information on GHB from theCenturion Aging Research Lab.) GHB is described here because it is a drug thatis known by the type of people who use sexual slaves and other people, and itsuse and misuse pertain to mind control. Like so many things involved withmind-control, GHB and many other items could be put to positive uses if used inthe proper way. Sometimes the programmers use drugs rather than ECS (Electroconvulsiveshock) to destroy the memory in slaves after they have done some mission for theIlluminati, the Syndicates, or Cult they belong to. The decision to use drugsrather than ECS is largely personal tastes. The very sadistic programmers enjoyusing ECS, while the less sadistic ones often use the drugs, which in someinstances actually perform better, but are not as violent to the victim of mindcontrol. Retroactive amnesia can be caused by an intracerebral or a subcutaneous(under the skin) shot of Acetoxycycloheximide, cyclohexamide, or puromyxcin. Amore sophisticated technique incorporates the drug seconal (aka Seconal sodium),the victim’s dissociativeness (the MPD), and hypnosis. Seconal is a strongsedative that puts people into sleep. The programmers have considered it”wonderful”. The victim’s mind is conditioned hypnotically to beable to remember the drugged-seconal state. Then the hypnotic command is giventhat if anything about a particular mission is remembered, the person willimmediately trigger (pull-up to the front of the mind) the seconal memory. Thisis why many therapists discover their clients getting sleepy when they get closeto certain thoughts, or when they try to do therapeutic work.

HIDING THE CODES

Chapter 4 provides some of the programming codes, some of which are standardand some of which are unique to a particular slave. Seconal was the standarddrug used during the 1950’s and 1960’s to hide the programming codes in themind’s memory. The procedure is to give a small child under 50 lbs. perhaps 10mg. of seconal. The programmer has already “SET THE STAGE” andpresented the script. After the child goes into its deep sleep, the programmerpulls the child’s mind awake hypnotically (actually to be technically correct,the programmer pulls up those alters/parts of the mind that the programmer wantsto work with). The child may awake on an satanic altar or other programmingsetting. The child is then programmed. After the programming, which may includesatanic rituals, the child slave is given 20 mg. more of seconal and allowed togo into a sleep again. A cover program (a cover story–that is a false code willbe planted hypnotically in front of the real code. “IF YOU SHOULD REMEMBERTHIS…” If a slave starts to remember any code, in spite of the hypnoticcommands not to, and all the threats and alters trained to protect the codes,etc. then the programming to sleep kicks in. Also remember that the codes areplaced in when the victim is groggy, so to pull up the memory will cause theslave to abreact the drugged-state. Not all the alters are drugged. In settingthe stage, the programmer orders some alters to back off from feeling orassociating the experience. They are hypnotically commanded not to experiencethe drug’s effects, or to only experience it in a partial manner. This can bedone with small amounts of seconal. Larger amounts of seconal will override themind’s ability to block the drug’s effects. The programming experience wherethe codes are put in, will likely be remembered by the slave as somethingsimilar to the following, a sleepy blurry picture of a nurse, then a doctor anda table, and then an IV, then the memory fades, and the slave gets sleepythinking about it.

It should be pointed out that the mind has strong natural abilities todissociate painful memories. Not only must the victim try to retrieve memoriesby fighting the mind’s natural dissociative abilities, the victim must fightthe hypnotic suggestions, the irrationality of conflicting ideas due to thefalse cover memories laid in, the DRUG memories attached to induce sleep if thevictim remembers, the memory shattering from the shock of the stun guns, and thefear of countless other threats internal and external if the memory isrecovered. It is no surprise that most victims of this horrendously abusivemind-control have front alters who are totally unaware of the mind-control andabuse.

PROGRAMMING WITH LSD-25 (Lysergic AcidDiethylamide)

The Programmers use controlled and manipulated LSD trips for mind-controlpurposes when layering in the programming for the Illuminati slaves. The victim’smind is trained and mentally prepared before actually being subjected to thedrug. The programmers understand how the mind unleashes its fears, including itsfear of LSD itself, while under the drug, so that small doses are given at firstand then increased. This is so the victim of mind-control can learn to face andmanage the effects of the drug.

When the Illuminati want to set the foundations for a system, they will useLSD in a sensory deprivation tank on a child to program in such things as: thehell-pit (a dungeon in a castle), the images of evil guardians, worlds &stars & galaxies which contain alters, the outer space in a system, and theprotective program where the mind spreads out like molecules and loses theability to think. The sensory deprivation tank will be set at 92.0 to 95.0 F.isothermal skin, saltwater suspension, zero light, near zero-sound levels. Thevictim will be naked without contact with the side of the tank and in remoteisolation for several hours. Electrodes can be hooked up to shock the victim ifthey move to prevent the victim from wanting to move. Victims usually areconditioned to like the sensory deprivation tank before they are programmedinside it with LSD. After having listened to two ex-programmers describe LSDsensory deprivation programming, this author was amazed to discover that the LSDprogrammer John Lilly had actually written a book about how to do theprogramming! (John Lilly was also into witchcraft & aliens.) The governmentwasn’t quite as thrilled with his book as I was, they withdrew research fundsfrom him in 1968 when only a few copies of his book came out. And now finallyalmost twenty years later, the human LSD programming that John Lilly describedis finally being put into its larger context–that of trauma-based totalmind-control. On page 126-127, Lilly explains that implanted programs in thechild can be placed in below the level of the mind’s awareness, but which willaffect their entire outlook on life, and which will control their thinking andbehavior far into adulthood. The programs can even be done to control the mostbasic functions of life. Lilly says that the programming possible with the useof LSD is “…not achievable outside the use of LSD-25. This amount ofcontrol can be said to resemble other ways of achieving control and visualprojection but in actual intensity I know of no other way to achieve it.Hypnosis is a possible exception.” (Programming and Metaprogramming in theHuman Biocomputer, p. 20) On page 19, Lilly states that LSD can be used tochange an experience to have a negative or a positive charge on it. Sometimespeople who work with the mind refer to negative experiences as “negativecharges on an experience”, and good experiences as “experiences with apositive charge”. Apparently, according to Lilly, the brain can switchchemical charges on an experience and shift its attitude from viewing as eitherpositive or negative. In fact, this very thing is done during Illuminatiprogramming. For instance, it may be done if a memory surfaces that theprogrammer doesn’t want the alter being programmed to understand. This lastparagraph is interesting when one realizes that under LSD the subconscious mindis allowed to release its thinking into the conscious. If a person has beentraumatized, the subconscious mind under LSD will release the trauma memoriesand flood the person with horrible thoughts. So before one can get to thetranscendental wonderful creative thoughts, a person has to deal with thisgarbage. The sub-conscious erupts like molten magma. Before the child is giventhe LSD, the child is going to have to be mentally prepped. Just as Seconalcould only be used after the hypnotist programmer had SET THE STAGE, so alsowith the LSD. The LSD programmer if he is experienced will have an idea how thevictim will react to the drug. Each person reacts in his or her own way, butthere are patterns of reaction. The programmer will hypnotically warn thevictim, YOU’RE NOT TO FEAR such and such thought. They may tell the victimthat it is just their imagination, when it is repressed memories of traumasurfacing. The programmer will let one alter carry the true feelings (such asfear) of the surfacing traumas, and another to carry the story line beingprogrammed in with LSD. The programmer may have to calm the victim down whilethey are in the tank. The Illuminati use hypnosis in conjunction with the LSDprogramming trips. They also use some other mind-control items too. Further, LSDis not the only programming hallucinogenic that they have used for some of thistype of programming, they have tried Peyote, but LSD seems to be the drug ofchoice. On page 20, Lilly describes the use of mirrors along with LSD to createvisually projected images. The Illuminati programmer will play a movie, a scriptover and over so that it is constantly in the forefront of the victim’s mind.Then the stage is set and the script (such as TAKE WHAT YOU SEE INTO THE MIRROR)is hypnotically given. The victim goes under LSD and in about 15 minutes reachestheir LSD high. Most people can be talked to by the programmer during theprogramming, and the programmer can get some feedback from what is happening inthe victim’s mind. The victim will be placed in front of a mirror. Then thevictim will project the image that was repeatedly shown him or her (say forinstance, Alice In Wonderland, or Tinkerbell, or Mickey Mouse) onto their ownimage in the mirror. A special state of consciousness is induced where theperson’s perception is altered and they see the projected image as their ownreflection. While watching the projected image on the mirror, the mind under LDwill also project its own feelings and facial features into the mirror. If thevictim is angry, happy, in pain, admiring themselves, etc. then projected image(for instance, Mickey Mouse) will also been seen this way. Using this type ofprogramming, the programmers can create twinning parts. That is if two peopleare to be twinned, parts that see themselves as the other person are createdusing the LSD mirror programming. Ceremonies and demons will also be added tostrengthen the twinning, and this may be done to a 13 year old teenager withinthe Illuminati. These projections can be maintained and worked with for about30-40 min. during the drug’s high. After this length of time fatigue sets inand the person must rest before being brought to another high. A clean slatealter can be prepared by the script and then will actually believe that it sawitself as the projected image. By the time, the session is through the cleanslate alter believes it is Alice in Wonderland or whatever character theprogrammer(s) wants it to be. During the trauma of an LSD programming trip, themind may see flickering images, melting, mosaics and other things. Thesedistortions can form a cover memory if the programmers wants them too. Duringthe sensory deprivation tank experience under LSD, the victim can be asked toopen their eyes, or close them. If asked to form a mental screen, the victimunder LSD will see a blank screen differently if their eyes are open as comparedto closed. If the victim is allowed to look while in a dark tank out into thedarkness under LSD, they will visualize themselves as merging with the infiniteuniverse and not even having a body. This memory is used to build in the outerspace of a system. On page 32, Lilly describes the type of programming used tocreate an Infinity, a Rubicon, or Outer Space within a system. He says,”The self is still centered at one place but its boundaries havedisappeared and it moves out in all directions and extends to fill the limits ofthe universe as far as one knows them. A person taking LSD may experience,whether being programmed or not, that they are in touch with all the stars ofthe universe.

LSD distortions in reality can also be used to protect the programming. Ifthe mind gets too close to remembering something, then the mind triggersautomatically a memory of its molecules expanding into the universe and losingtheir ability to think. This is simply a controlled LSD memory. When externalstimuli is ceased, the brain takes over the spaces that were formerly occupiedin the thinking process by external reality, and replaces it with feelings andthoughts from the internal mind. Lilly states on pg. 24 that when programmingpeople under LSD, “The blank screen is the most difficult one to work withbut is the least ‘driving’ of the group. The blank screen interferes leastwith one’s creative efforts;…” In other words, if the victim is closedoff to external stimuli, the mind can focus all its energy into free associativecreativity. Once the victim is in isolation, religious music can cause the brainto free associate religious visions, cartoon voices can cause the brain to freeassociate the cartoon figures, etc. The Illuminati/Intelligence agencies mustwait 3 to 6 months between LSD programming sessions. If they do it more often,they run the risk of hooking the person’s mind on the drug state. Then theperson will lose interest in reality, and simply try to escape reality into theLSD world as a drug addict. From recollections from ex-programmers and victims,its clear that as the child victim is traumatized during the [SD sensorydeprivation (including being shocked) experiences it goes through a sequence orchronology of changes which are noted in detail by the programmers. Certainsplits occur at certain points in time which will be used for special tasks. Forinstance, at a particular extreme moment the victim may go into a”nothingness state” which is between life and death, where the mindquits perceiving that it has a body. This is not an out-of-body experience, itis a nothingness experience due to an extreme near-death experience. This cleanslate can be used for the Cabalistic programming of the Ain Soph Aur. The AinSoph Aur is the cosmic egg from which the universe supposedly began, ain =vacuum, soph limitless, and aur = limitless light. For Satanists they interpretthis to the light at the top of the pyramid, Lucifer. Alters created in such afashion may be placed in a succession of realms. If true Caballism is followedthis will consist of 4 realms (worlds) of 10 clean slates. These four worlds areAtziluth = boundless world of divine names, Briah the Archangelic World ofCreations Yetzirah

the Hierarchal World of Formations Assiah the ElementalWorld of Substances

The child victim in the sensory deprivation tank is not allowed to movewithout being shocked. Gradually the will of the victim is broken by the totalcontrol the programmer maintains over the child in the tank. But the will of thechild continues to be broken until the will of the child to live is broken. Atthis point, when the mind has given up the will to live, the programmer (orassistant programmer) will tell the child in the tank, “If you create suchand such types of persons and such and such no. of them (perhaps 10 or 20 areasked for) then you can come out and we’ll stop hurting you. Give me a signalthat you’ve done your job and I’ll stop hurting you when the job is done.Move a finger or blink your eyes three times if you’ve done your job.”

Blinking three times generally feels the safest for the child, and is generallythe limit of what the mind and body can muster to save themselves. The alters,which are made when the mind & body have lost the will to live, are thedissociated parts that will be made into suicide alters. Their breathing is veryshallow, they are in pain in the tank. When these parts take the body, theystill function in that state. Years later, if the adult body has these suicidealters take the body, there is a good chance they will commit suicide, if notsimply die from the shallow breathing. Lilly states on page 31, “Oneexperiences [under LSD programming] an immediate internal reality which ispostulated by the self. It is apparent to me that one’s own assumptions aboutthis experience generates the whole experience. The experienced affects, theapparent appearance of other persons, the appearance of other beings not human,one’s own past phantasies, one’s own self-analysis, each can be programmedto happen in interaction with those parts of one’s self beyond one’sconscious awareness.”

While the victim is in the sensory deprivation tank, the programmer can ask the victim to create guard alters within the castle images they create. These are equivalent to the imagery that is done in witchcraft. These image alters are not the same as a trauma-created dissociative alter. The following are the type of beliefs that can be programmed into a person in the sensory deprivation tank under LSD no matter what their prior beliefs (this is substantiated by Lilly, pages 4 1-49 and ex-programmers).

a. The person could successfully park the body and leave the body somewhere, astral project and explore new universes. The victim can be brought during an LSD trip to this thinking and experience the astral projection from around 20 mm. to 2 hours.

b. The victim can be made to feel as if they are a tiny mote, a tiny dot, asingle microflash of energy in their own view of time, a mere particle. Time canbecome infinity and the victim a mere microflash. The victim during thisexperience seeks a god who is a great being to control him. This is used in theIlluminati alien programming to program in the evil and good aliens, or evil orgood gods. The gods or the aliens on such a programming trip will not be sostrange that the victim as a mote can’t understand their purposes andactivities. In other words, the aliens on programming trips like this turn outhumanoid. The victim experiences being nurtured by these beings or the god(s)that he sees. The victim may perceive these aliens on the trip experimentingwith us. One UFO researcher and author about the aliens has used his LSD tripsto research aliens. Sad to report, this researcher is a programmed multiple. Itis easy to see how the mind could think that it was learning about aliens,because this is a common easy-to-create LSD programming script. Again insummary, this second set of beliefs is that the person is a mere mote, a smallflash in infinite time. When an alter of a slave thinks or goes internally whereit shouldn’t, this programming is attached to the mind so that the victimloses sight of who they are and feels very insignificant and only a dot.

c. The next program that LSD naturally lends itself to, is that the victim is only part of a vast computer, only part of a vast mind. For some reason, the LSD is able to hit a part of the mind that regulates the perception of free-will. In this type of programming, the victim under LSD is convinced that he or she has no free will and must participate each second with some larger mind or computer.

d. Personalities that have been seen externally by the victim will beincorporated within the person’s internal world.

e. LSD changes the victim’s perception of time, and can be used to go backor forward in time in the mind. Under guidance, the programmer can manipulatethis ability to build into the mind false memories and images.

f. If “white noise”, that is random background noise is placed into an isolation tank trauma, the programmers have found that under LSD the brain tries to make sense of the random sounds and projects the voice of God into the random noise as a method to turn chaos into something comprehendible. With the right dose, and under the right conditions, the programmers can get the voice of “God” to say about anything they want. Because the sense of hearing in the sensory deprivation tank is not feeding the mind anything, the human brain under LSD can easily substitute in the voice of God.

g. For girls, who have been determined to have personalities with low sexual appetites, the sexual desires of certain alter personalities can be manipulated during an LSD trip by having these alters hold the body and the body go through exaggerated pelvic movements and other experiences. This is an example of the type of training that Gittinger (see Vol. 2) discovered was necessary in order to change thinking patterns within a person–in this case with the MPD (DID), some alters can be radically changed from the original personality.

The overall effect of such LSD programming on anyone, whether child or adult, is that the mind at a deep level begins to doubt its ability to grasp the real from the imaginary. Therapists sometimes wonder why alters are not more anxious to determine reality. Part of this may be the side-effect at a profound level of the brain beginning to doubt its abilities to separate reality from fiction. If the LSD trips were not controlled by the programmers, insanity could result for the victim. Further, the LSD trips pose a danger that they could clutter the internal world of the victim and splinter their mind uncontrollably. This is why the trips must be carefully guided, controlled and monitored.

CHEMICALLY TRIGGERING NATURAL INSTINCTUAL DRIVES

The brain when a child is born is like a computer which is ready to go, andjust needs the software loaded on. In other words, the brain is already afunctioning complicated programmed piece of hardware, it is not a blank sheet.The mind is preprogrammed to carry out important instinctual functions, such asdrinking water, eating food and sleeping. Likewise, the adult motherinstinctively has maternal instincts. Selectively applied chemical or electricalstimulations to the brain will elicit the instinctual behaviors that arepre-programmed into the brain. A microinjection of a soluble sex steroid intothe anteromedial hypothalamus would likely trigger the maternal instinct in aperson. The various instinctual behaviors that are triggered by microchemicalinjections or small select electrical shocks will last for up to an hour. (A.E.Fisher was one of the principal researchers in this line of research during the50’s and 60’s.) For instance, A.E. Fisher and E. Vaughan, discovered thatthe male instinct for sex could be stimulated by a small shock to a specificpart of the brain. (See “Male sexual behavior induced by intracranialelectrical stimulation”, Science magazine, 1962, 137, pp. 758-760.)Steroids are one of the chemicals that are used as well as selective minuteelectrical shocks to trigger instinctual behaviors. Reliable responses can beobtained from a victim, if the correct chemical is placed at a place in thebrain where the chemical will cause the brain to send an electrical signal totrigger an instinctual behavior. A searching reaction can be created so that aperson or animal searches for something in his surroundings by electricalstimulation of the hippocampus. Eating can be reliably induced electronically orby drugs. Perfusate taken from ventricles or neural tissue of a person who wasstarved before death, and placed into the lateral hypothalamic area will causethe person to eat whether they are hungry or full.

SEXUAL STIMULATION-PROGRAMMING

The users of slaves need some of the parts to be nymphomaniacs. In order to program this type of behavior, the programmers not only use the reversal effect when pain becomes pleasure (see Vol. 2), but they also use hormones and drugs to make certain parts nymphomaniacs. If they were not artificially stimulated they could not endure the over-use they are subjected to at times.

THEIR ABILITY TO MANUFACTURE (SYNTHESIZE) BRAIN CHEMICALS TO MAKE MIND-CONTROL DRUGS

Part of the ability to do mind-control has to do with their ability tosynthesize the actual specific chemicals that the brain produces to alteritself. When the brain wants to relax, or excite itself it uses certaincompounds. A large number of the brain’s chemicals have been cataloged and canbe reproduced in the lab. The messages the brain sends have to jump from oneneuron to another via transmitters. The rate that the brain releases thesetransmitters can be both directly and indirectly changed by drugs. In otherwords, one can tailor make moods and emotions in the brain chemically.

Page 36 …

The term “Amines” (which are compounds that have a nitrogen atom that can accept a proton) came to have a specific meaning for brain researchers. The transmitters between neurons in the brain are Amines such as dopamine, epinephrine, histamine, norepinephrine, octopamine, serotonin, and tyramine. The principle method to synthesize these transmitter amines is “decarboxylation of the parent amino acid.” In other words, the chemist takes Tyrosine and applies Tyrosine Hydroxylase (an enzyme) and produces Dopa another similar compound; and then the enzyme Dopa Decarboxylase is applied and from that the similar Dopamine amine is created. Then Dopamine-Beta-oxidase (another enzyme) is applied in the final step of the three enzyme steps to create Norepinephrine. Both Dopamine and Norepinephrine are neural transmitters. If norepinephrine is diminished in the brain, sedation occurs. Alpha-methyl-p-tyrosine (as well as other compounds) was found to be one of the things that would prevent the brain from creating (synthesizing for itself) norepinephrine. Serotonin (5-hydroxytryptamine) is created in a fashion similar to dopamine, in that tryptophan is taken and acted upon by the enzyme Tryptophan hydroxylase to get 5-hydroxytryptophan, and then a decarboxylase converts this compound to serotonin. To reverse things, and prevent the brain from having serotonin, they can prevent selective parts of the brain from creating it with p-chlorphenylalanine.

ADRENALCHROME (Adrenal Chromaffin)

This naturally occurring yellowish brown drug was not mentioned in the Vol. 2book, although it was mentioned in this author’s newsletters in ’93 and May’95 The drug is obtained by sacrificing a terrified person, perhaps byplunging the athame into them, and then taking a hypodermic needle andextracting the adrenalchrome from the base of the neck in the pineal gland. Asacrificed person only yields about 10 c.c. so the drug is not only very secreton the black market but very expensive. A Scientific American article byCarmichael and Winkler is the best thing that I have discovered on theadrenalchrome. The Max Planck Institute in Germany did research intoAdrenalchrome. Dirty law-enforcement officials and others have worked to keepthe existence of adrenalchrome a secret. It is not known if Adrenalchrome hasever been used for programming, but it is a popular secret drug of the eliteIlluminati kingpins. For many years, they were not able to synthetically producethe drug, and had to rely on human sacrifices as their source. It is possiblethat in the last year or so, that some method to synthesize the drug may havebeen found. Chromaffin cells secrete adrenaline, noradrenaline and othersubstances into the bloodstream which exert a great deal of control over tissue,and organs.

HERBS

Another place that programmed DID Satanic Ritual Survivors may encounter herbs is the use of herbal charms to enhance magic spells.

OILS

The Illuminati have also used oils for their powerful properties. Recently, a doctor who was trained by the Freemasons has been helping people discover the powerful properties of these oils. Christians also have been rediscovering the powerful healing powers in pure Fennel, Frankincense, Juniper, Lavender, Peppermint, Pane and other cold pressed Oils and combinations of oils.

Summary of Major Point.

The guided LSD trips in the sensory deprivation tanks are crucial for laying in the foundational programming. Readers will learn more about guided LSD trips & programming drugs throughout this book.

Page 37 …

CHAPTER 4. SCIENCE NO. 4 – HYPNOSIS & the OCCULT

From the Egyptian Sleep Temples to ancient shamans, the occult world has beenputting hypnosis (including self-hypnosis) to work for centuries, evenmillennia. During the 18th and 19th century, the Masonic lodges put hypnotism touse. In 1882 Jean-Martin Charcot, considered the world’s greatest neurologistat the time, gave hypnotism respectability by publishing his own studies, whichincluded recovering A. trauma memories blocked by amnesia, and B. memoriespresumed permanently lost by organic amnesia. At that time, a group of frenchmedical doctors located at Nancy just a 100 kilometers southeast of theMothers-of-Darkness castle, had a school of hypnosis that influenced doctors allover the world including Freud. These french doctors had caught on to the powerof suggestion to the subconscious.

In the 1780’s, Marquis de Puysegur was putting people into deep hypnotictrances and then commanding them to forget the hypnotic session. James Esdailein his book Mesmerism in India & its Practical Application in Surgery andMedicine. (pub. Longman, Brown, Green, Longmans, 1846) pp. xxiii-xxiv, describesand lists hundreds of surgeries (some quite serious) which he did in India usinghypnosis as his anesthesia. He found his patients could heal quickly andexperienced no pain under hypnosis.

In modern medical history, every type ofsurgery has been successfully carried out without drugs and “withoutpain” by using hypnosis. In the VoL 2 book, it was brought out thatperceptive researchers have figured out that the pain under hypnosis is placedby the mind into a dissociated piece of the mind, which is essentially what MPD(DID) is all about. Tests have shown that hypnosis to reduce pain does not workby the brain releasing endorphins (see Hilgard, 1975 & Spiegel and Leonard,1986). The mind simply diverts the pain into a “mental floppy disk”that it doesn’t look at. In the early 1880’s, occult researcher EdmundGurney found he could give post-hypnotic commands that would be successfullycarried out in the future.

What amazed him was that subjects would fulfillcommands exactly as commanded at a particular time on a particular day withouteven looking at the clock. Various European doctors, too numerous to mention,discovered in the 1880’s that they could cure various diseases via hypnosis.The cure rate was not 100%, but significant enough to make hypnosis an option insome treatments.

This author (Fritz) has reported that programmed multiples are able toincrease the temperature of one body part, or one side of their body. Cisco, theco-author of this book, when she hits certain programs, turns ice-cold on theright of her body and burns on the left side. It was with great interest thenwhen this author located the 1920 work of hypnotist J.A. Hadfield who publishedhis work in Lancet, 2: pp. 68-69, under the title “The influence of suggestion on bodytemperature.

“Using hypnosis, Hadfield could get a subject to drop histemperature in one hand to 68.0 while the other hand stayed at 94º. Here is thepaper trail to what they have been doing to programmed multiples for half acentury. Today, the occult world uses sophisticated hypnotic techniques as oneof their programming tools to create mind-controlled slaves. The slave’s mindis structured into a robotic-computer controlled by a master. Parts (alters) ofthe slave will learn how to trance (self-hypnosis) on cue. The betterconditioned a subject is to hypnosis, the easier they fall into trance. Thevictims of mind-control are all very conditioned for hypnosis, even though their programmers then hide that under post-hypnoticsuggestions that no-one else is to be allowed to hypnotize the slave. Theancient saying is that a picture is worth a thousand words. In conveyingsuggestions to the subconscious mind, the occult world of black magic and theprogrammers are very aware of the power that picture images convey. The goodprogrammer will be able to utilize images to give him tremendous leverage inhypnotic techniques. An alter which needs to create something in the mind can beprepped with images, and can be asked to borrow images, such as borrow such andsuch quality from this person or animal. The child alter who becomes a Lionafter eating a dead lion’s parts can imagine the qualities (speed, agility,fierceness) of the lion easily. The image of the lion is worth a thousand wordsto the hypnotic programmer. If the programmer wants an alter that is trained inkarate to be agile, quick and fierce, they don’t mind dehumanizing that alterto become a lion or tiger. One element of why this is done is the power of theimage for hypnotic commands. The deeper Illuminati alters will be highly skilledin self-hypnosis & the ability to change at will into various states ofconsciousness. This is part of their witchcraft training in order to practicewitchcraft.

UNDERSTANDING THE BASICS ABOUT HYPNOSIS

The Programmer is attempting to produce suggestions that the unconscious mindwill accept. If the subconscious mind accepts the programmer’s suggestionsthen the suggestion becomes reality to the victim, just as if the victim hadexperienced it as reality over a period of time. The programmer, if he is good,will be able to get the subjects imagination involved. He will also buildrapport with his victim. For instance, the master might hypnotically stroke theforehead of kitten sexual alters before giving them their code to go back intothe mind. The good handler/programmer is not simply working off of fear, but hewants to have the trust and cooperation of the victim. This is similar to howHitler was both feared and trusted by the German masses. In fact, hypnosis wasan element in Hitler’s control of the masses. Nazi propaganda films showingHitler and other Nazi leaders giving directives always have the Hitler Youth’sactions slightly speeded up so that subconsciously the viewer is taughtobedience to their commands.

The programmer will not tell the slave something is hypnotically happeninguntil it has already happened. He will use the art of timing his words at thecorrect time, of using repetition, of combining several mutually supportingsuggestions, and of having total confidence in his words to add strength to hishypnotic commands. Muscular rigidity and deep breathing are one way to increasesuggestibility within the victim being programmed via hypnosis. The programmerwill also use other hypnotic tricks, such using his own body language to suggestsomething, and to use what is called a “voice roll”. When theprogrammer moves his voice into a monotonous patterned style he is using theroll voice. Words are delivered at the rate of 45 to 60 beats a minute. Toempower the suggestions, the programming hypnotist uses the victim’s fivesenses. The victim visualizes something using his five senses, such as theimagery of the holy spirit (done in mockery of God) and then breathes thisimagery in. For instance, the victim breathes in the message of the programmingand roots it deep deep down into the oak tree. (In VoL 2, it was explained thatthe oak tree is the structure that the programs are attached to.)

THE POWER OF HYPNOSIS

During the hypnotic trance, the human mind is at the pinnacle of its abilityto quickly learn. What might take years to learn and weighing the evidence, will be accepted quickly by the victim’ssubconscious. The mind strings together a series of “cognitive mentaldemons?? that is a series of mental processes–similar to how a computerprogrammer writes a program. These strings have been called K-lines. Much ofwhat the mind does is simply activations of various K-lines (a habitual ways ofdoing things), so that the mind can focus its limited conscious thinking. Themind also takes micronemes (such things as a particular aroma, or a particularintonation for which it has no word, but for which it has a series of sensoryclues) and builds these into K-lines too. Once a K-line works, the mind in orderto prevent itself from making reckless changes, gives priority to those K-lines.Under hypnosis, the mind willingly allows the hypnotist to change K-lineswithout the normal unconscious conservative restraints. Under behaviormodification techniques, abnormal K-lines (that is K-lines that wouldn’tnormally develop) can be forced into the mind.

A hypnotic suggestion given to normal subjects lasts about a week, soreinforcement is helpful. The programming suggestions are layered in usingmethods far more powerful than mere hypnosis, and are locked up in dissociatedsubconscious states, so that these programming scripts which are layered in arealmost impossible for the victim to be aware of to challenge them. The emotionsof women have been found to slightly detract from the hypnotic trance, whilemale victims take the hypnotic words in an unemotional matter-of-fact way. Themale victims will simply accept the programming and directly comply. That is onereason why the suicide programs that are layered into the men are so deadly. Thefemale victims of programming may emotionally play the suicide out and survive;the male slaves when they trigger suicide programs, comply with the programmingin an unemotional direct way.

How deep is the slave’s trance? There are testsfor trance depths, but from what this author can ascertain, sometimes it can bedifficult to determine exactly where the mind is at. If a memory is laid in at aparticular trance level, the slave may be able to avoid an abreaction later onby going above or below the memory’s trance level. A deep level, where forinstance, the person can’t move a body part due to hypnotic suggestion, wouldbe called the “cataleptic stage” or level.

UNDERSTANDING THE DEEPER MECHANICS of HYPNOSIS

Let us suppose for the sake of discussion that as you are reading this, it issupper time. You are hungry. You’ve starved yourself all day, and even thoughyou are on a strict diet, you are trying to think of a good restaurant to go to.Now let’s see, as your mind scans the different possibilities, it thinks ofsome that are close, some that are quick. some that have lots of easy parkingand others that have good looking waitresses. Mechanically, your thoughtprocesses went like this:

a. Particular sensations and chemicals cause the mind to feel what itmentally describes as a pang of hunger. This is perceived as an important need.

b. The mind has a process that we can call an Intention System that createsspecific intention messages that are sent throughout the brain. It stores theseIntentions temporarily. If an intention is not freshly created and restacked atthe top of the clutter of intentions in the intention store, then it gets buriedunderneath the “mind cluttered desk of things to do” and forgotten. Inour example, the mind is searching its memory banks for options on how tosatisfy its hunger.

c. The mind must decide upon one particular course of action. The mind quitsfocusing on other matters, and concentrates upon deciding which course of actionto take. The mind has now activated all kinds of what some researchers call”demons”. Because we are not talking about spiritual demons, butrather we are referring to units of cognitive processes–which are very similar to UNIX computer demons–we will refer to these demonsby the name “cognitive demonprocesses.” Some of these cognitive demonprocesses are action demons and some are word demons, and some are recognitiondemons.

Recognition Cognitive Demon Processes go running through the mind,”shouting” the wishes of the Intention store. A number of lower levelcognitive demon processes wake up and make themselves known if they identifywith what the recognition demon is shouting about. Many may think they match therequest, but other demon processes check them out to see how close they match.Now the checkers come up with a list of cognitive demon processes who areconcerned with eating at restaurants, who have woken up and are all scramblingfor attention. Cognitive demon processes establish themselves in families, anddevelop relationships that are automatic. (Cognitive Demons do not die, but somego to sleep and others can get somewhat rusty in their relationships.) The”demons” that respond to the shouting of our recognition demon gothrough a series of “interviews” with a hierarchy of other demonprocesses, and soon the messenger demon can rush back to the Intention Storewith the name of the choices available.

All this happens extremely quick. If themind did not set up a series of automatic cognitive demon processes that becomehabits, (called K-lines) it would find itself involved in the consciousrelearning of trivial matters that would make it impossible to get muchaccomplished. Every skill would have to be constantly relearned. A person mighteasily end up spending all day dressing. As long as the mind remains in a staticenvironment, where habits work, it’s great. But life is such a changingenvironment, that our entrenched habits can cause the mind to pull up acognitive demonic process out of habit, when it is neither wanted norappropriate.

Emotions and needs (which are tied to our emotions) will triggerthe mind to search out cognitive demon processes. For instance, if our emotionalneed for someone we are looking for is great, let’s say a wife waiting for along expected war-husband, it may send a need down the brain for the cognitivedemons that are attached to the identification of the long-awaited person, andthe mind triggers itself to see his face in the crowd at the busy railwaystation before its owner arrives.

Cognitive Demon Processes live in closeproximity to other demons, and when one gets excited, others in the area do too,although their excitement may be much less. If a cognitive demon is being used agreat deal, it will be on its toes, but little used demons can go to sleep, andsomehow need to be hollowed at very loud to wake up.

The Intention System aftera while will set itself on autopilot for certain mental functions, which freesthe conscious mind for other problems. The conscious mind can only focus on asmall amount of material–it is like a computer which has limited memory. It isconstantly in a state of redeployment, and the Intentions system has only asmall sway over how the Attention part of the mind decides to focus. TheAttention part constantly asks itself, which tasks can be relegated to habit.Then when the Intention system sends out cognitive search demons, they do nothave to involve the conscious mind, because everything that is habitual is setup like a script, with families of “cognitive demon processes” alreadyknowing the roles/relationships they are to play. (Again, Behavior modificationis used to strengthen the relationships of demonic processes, and to make somewell used and awake, so that certain behaviors become habits.) When our mindsmeditate or go into a hypnotic trance, what is occurring is that our consciousmind is delegating its limited computing memory for the focus of its attentionupon one object. What happens to the cognitive demon processes that wouldnormally take instructions from the conscious mind?

During meditation the untrained cognitive demon processes bubble up to the top of the consciousmind. However, the opposite happens during hypnosis. During hypnosis, the mindhas made the decision (for whatever reasons) to accept control statements fromthe hypnotist. The mind has surrendered or at least temporarily or partiallyabdicated his or her position as the master of his or her Intention System. Someof this power is given away. The hypnotist now has access and control over manyor all the cognitive demonic processes, including some that the person would notnormally activate. Cognitive demon processes that are asleep or deeply buriedcan be accessed by the hypnotist, in a much quicker direct way than theIntention System would. By suggesting that the subject has a cat on his lap, thehypnotist is actually causing the recognition cognitive demon processes to wakeup and act out their jobs to such an extent that the subject sees a cat. Bysuggesting that the subject’s body stiffen, the hypnotist has gained controlover those cognitive action demons that cause the body to stiffen.Age-regression brings up demons that are associated with the subject’schildhood.

Although it is unpopular to admit publicly that the hypnotist haspower over the subject, a close look at the process of how hypnosis works at theneuronal “cognitive demon process” level shows that the hypnotist hasindeed been given power. In fact, the hypnotist has been given power to activatecognitive units of demon processes that the mind itself would allow to remaininactive or asleep. The mind would not normally use its ability to activatethem. Today, it is politically incorrect to admit that the hypnotist has powerto make an individual do what they wouldn’t normally want to do, butunfortunately hypnosis does give this power.

PROGRAMMING AIDS

Because the programmers control the slave’s life to such a high degree theycan add other elements that move the brain into programmable states.

Fastingalong with a high sugar intake will make the brain more suggestive. (Themilitary also used this in basic training. This was done to this author at WestPoint during Beast Barracks, where during the first two weeks he ate all-totalenough food for one regular meal; however, New Cadets were allowed to go tochapel and eat all the brownies, cookies and kool-aid they wanted.)

Physicaldiscomforts and the chanting of rituals in witchcraft ceremonies are also waysto move the mind into programming states.

Lights, sounds (for instancerepetitive beats such as with any rock music), and smells are all used toencourage the brain to go into a programmable state.

In the chapter onelectronics, it discusses how the functions of the mind-body such as breathingand the heartbeat can be regulated by external stimuli —that is lights andsounds which are electronically produced. If the repetitive beat is rangedbetween 45 to 72 beats per minute, many people will go into a programmable statewith their eyes open. This is because this beat is close to the beat of theheart in a relaxed state.

Some secret Illum. programming centers have areas thatare constructed for the greatest hypnotic sound and lighting effect. The child/or adult victim is cut off from the world at these programming centers. Thevictims’ freedom to walk outside into normal life depends upon theircooperation with the programmer(s).

Lullaby music is used as a cue for somealters of slaves to induce trance when their systems are older because the childalters still respond to the cue. Anything can be a cue, but it appears theprogrammers often pick cues that are naturally reinforced by the mind. Thelullaby or carousel music is a good cue, because the lullaby is taking advantageof the natural desire of the brain to retreat from reality to the nostalgia ofchildhood fun. The retreat of the mind to childhood naturally evokes thehelplessness and dependence that a child feels.

The programmers are powerful enough to place in cues that don’t need natural reinforcement, but fromobservation it is apparent that they will often skillfully strengthen thehypnotic power by the choice of a cue which carries its own naturalreinforcement. One supporting element in programming is that the programmer setshimself up as “god the creator” of the victim, or an alien of afar-advanced race.

In hypnotism, this fulfills the need that all hypnoticsubjects must have faith and trust in their hypnotist. Hypnosis is subjective innature. If the programmer is the creator of the alter being programmed, and thealter is additionally under a hypnotic drug that makes it willing to obey, it iseasy to see how the victim lets go of all inhibitions, because “god”or this “superior alien” knows what is best. The better and strongerthe relationship between the victim and his master programmer, the better thehypnotic commands work. If the slave sees the master as a religious guru prophet(or a great doctor) it enhances his willingness to accept hypnotic commands.Bear in mind that the slave is conditioned to love their master withoutreservation. Yes, the benevolent dictator has historically received the devotionof the masses, (and many of the Illuminati programmers are actually simplyegotistical sadists).

USING HOLOGRAMS as an ACCESS AID

The Illuminati is now even resorting to creating talking hologram images toaccess their slaves with their hypnotic cues.

KEEPING THE MIND IN ALPHA STATE

The entire alter system of a Monarch slave has their sleep patternscontrolled. Many alters are programmed not to get real sleep. They actuallysleep in a hypnotic alpha-state sleep, or what may be called trance sleep.

Hypnotists (and brain researchers) will tell you that true sleep and a hypnoticsleep are not the same thing for the brain. Some alters (but not many) must stayawake 24 hours a day internally and carefully watch all that happens in thesystem of alters. Someone has to take the body and sleep–but whichever altersare set up to do it, they are hypnotically commanded to only sleep about threehours to insure that the mind stays in an alpha state easy to program. Becausealters which do not hold the body “rest” mentally in a sense–whenthey take the body they are fresh. The mind dissociates when it is givenunpleasant things to hear which it doesn’t want to hear.

The electronicimplants that send voices to victims are used to create dissociation within theslaves, plus certain implants and devices send specific electro-magnetic wavepatterns to the mind to put the slave’s mind into the alpha state. See chaptersix for more on the mind-control implants.

PREPARING THE BRAIN

The programmer places the victim in an acute state of anxiety and guilt. Thetension reduces the power of the judgement part of the mind. One of the torturesfor slaves is to keep them from going to the bathroom and relieving themselves.This is part of the hypnotic programming package. The anxiety that this createsincreases the power of the programming in the brain, because the anxiety causesslight malfunctions with the brain’s judgment abilities. Mental and physicalfatigue are also sought in the victim. For instance, water deprivation iscommon. (This was also done to the author at West Point, where one of thisauthor’s classmates was hospitalized for dehydration during Beast Barracks.)Offensive language also helps drive the mind into tension and encourages it intoan alpha state.

EARLY TRAINING FOR SLAVES

The children who are being programmed are taught 4 IMPORTANT HYPNOTICABILITIES. These four abilities are a. relaxation, b. visualization, c.concentration, and d. projection, which work in handling the slave along withthe alpha state.

Relaxation and visualization go hand in hand each enhancing each other. Whengiven a good pleasant image to visualize, the victim relaxes, which leads to thehypnotic concentration, which then produces good projection. Initially, thechild victim is given drugs that induce euphoria and deep relaxation. They arethen taught to work toward that drug euphoria by going to it mentally. Theydevelop the ability to go into that euphoria mentally as a trained behavior.Many of the children will have their training in visualization and concentrationreinforced when they go to public schools, many of which are now involved in theprogramming process. To teach the child concentration and visualization, thechild is given an apple and trained to visualize it. The first time, the childwill be given drugs which will enhance the experience and perception greatly toaround 100 times the perception without the drugs. There is no pain involved inthis early programming at around the age of 3 or 4. After the child has gonethrough the visualization of the apple in the drugged state he or she will worktoward the mental ability to visualize it intensely without the drugs. Thevisualization script used with the apple (in both the drugged and undruggedexercises) will vary slightly from programmer to programmer, yet will be closeto the following:

“VISUALIZE AN APPLE. HOLD IT IN YOUR HANDS; TURN IT AROUND; FEEL IT.FEEL THE SHAPE, THE SIZE, THE WEIGHT, THE TEXTURE. NOTICE THE COLOR, THEREFLECTION OF LIGHT ON ITS SKIN. BRING IT TO YOUR NOSE AND SMELL IT. BITE INTOIT, TASTE IT; HEAR THE CRUNCH AS YOUR TEETH SINK IN. EAT THE APPLE; FEEL ITSLIDE DOWN YOUR THROAT. SEE IT GROW SMALLER. WHEN YOU HAVE EATEN IT DOWN TO THECORE, LET IT DISAPPEAR.”

By the way, an apple training incident very similar to this (which is givenby the Illuminati to child slaves from the ages 2 to 4), strangely turned upoccurring in a setting that the author, who never was a slave nor never in theoccult, found himself in when this author was a 4-H counselor at a 4-H camp as a16 year old. The first thing all the counselors were given was an apple exerciseso that we could appreciate each camper for what he or she was. The person wholed the exercise was a psychologist. Where had he learned it? The applevisualization must be done to a standard of excellence by the child victim. Thevictim’s life depends upon learning to visualize vividly, so that the internalstructures (internal mental images) it builds within the mind will stay strongand firm.

The programmers want the child to have good visualization so they willwork with the child to have the most successful experience. For instance, thechild will be offered a variety of apples to look at, yellow, green, red etc.The child can choose the apple that it likes so that its visualization exerciseswill be the most successful. The entire imagery of an internal system will bebuilt upon the foundation of the child’s ability to visualize an apple. Thechild will be taken through a succession of exercises where the child learns tovisualize the apple in greater and greater detail using all the senses.Eventually, the child is able to visualize his or her apple to the point thatthe child can dissect or chop the apple up in any way and reconstruct itmentally. The internal seeds of the apple can be seen brilliantly by the child.Upon this ability to visualize, the programmer will then teach the child thatthe apple can become anything the child wants, a river, a couch, a book etc. Thefive seeds of the apple will be turned into 5 castles. This is why essentiallyall Illuminati Mind-controlled slaves have 5 major castles in their system ofprogramming. One approach by therapists has been to cast out/remove the castles.However, the castle imagery is based upon the apple seeds which is based on the apple. The real thing to deal with for therapists isthe apple. If the castle is returned to its original image of being an appleseed, and the rest of the apple-and its tree imagery dealt with, then someprogress can be made. Unfortunately, not being aware of the original imagery,the therapists have been frustrating themselves with the superficial imageryrather than the foundational imagery.

Another script for teaching the young 2 to 4 year old slaves simplevisualization is to have the child close his or her eyes and imagine that theyare looking at a white wall or blank screen. Then they practice visualizingsimple geometric shapes, and then visualize the screen in different colors, andthen finally visualize the objects changing colors.

MAGICAL TRAINING ON THE STARLIGHT LEVEL

The Illuminati begin training the child victim to work at the starlightlevel. This is called magical training. The child’s abilities to relax,visualize, concentrate and project are then harnessed in the alpha state by”MAGICKAL TRAINING” which opens up the STARLIGHT CONSCIOUSNESS.Starlight consciousness is the other way of knowing that which belongs to theright hemisphere, and it allows the victim to make contact with the “DIVINEWITHIN”. The Divine within the victim is actually the generational spirits,which are placed in during the Moon Child ceremonies described in detail in Vol.2.

The generational spirits are laid in to help build the programming and toguard it. However, as in so much spiritual work, the victim’s (technicallyspeaking, the alter’s) will & thoughts work hand in hand with the spirits.The child must learn to visualize and participate in the mental building of theinternal worlds, structures, etc. However, the demons will be strategicallyplaced to protect the structures once the programming is built into the mind.(For more understanding of this see Cisco’ s section on “Programming,foundational, destruction of’.)

FINETUNING

The child victim’s mind is FINETUNED. This means that the child canfunction excellently at visualization, relaxation, concentration, projection,while in the alpha state and can work with their subconscious mind. The mentalwork done in the subconscious can not be retrieved easily. Only through outsideassistance or special training can most people access what is done at thestarlight level of the mind. The programmers are using the child’s abilitieswith its 5 acute senses to develop the 6th sense (which is its ability to workin the Starlight consciousness, which includes such mental activity such aspsychic abilities–which will be discussed in other locations in this book.)Enhancing the mind so that it can work in the subconscious area called thestarlight consciousness is referred to by many insiders as astral.

THE MONARCH PROGRAMMING SCRIPT FOR OVER THE RAINBOW

One of the most important concepts of the programmers is having slaves”go over the rainbow.” Although in recent years other methods havebeen substituted for this, there are many hundreds of thousands of slaves forwhom “going over the rainbow” is part of their programming. What isthe script for programming this?

The PROGRAMMING SCRIPT FOR GOING OVER THE RAINBOW

(Three dots in this script do not indicate missing parts, but rather pauses.In other words, pauses are indicated by three dots.)

INDUCTION TRAINING SCRIPT

“BREATHE DEEP — YOU ARE FLOATING DOWN … DOWN … ON A BEAUTIFUL REDCLOUD, AND YOUR WHOLE BODY IS RED — AS YOU GO DRIFTING AND FLOATING ….ROCKING GENTLY … DEEPER … AND DEEPER … DOWN … [this repeated, one time, for each color of cloud-orange,yellow, green, blue, and violet clouds.] “LAND VERY GENTLY … VERY SOFTLY… IN THE CENTER OF A ROUND, BLACK PEARL. SEE IT GLOWING, SOFTLY, GENTLY …NOW TURN AND FACE THE EAST … AND THEN THE SOUTH … AND THEN THE WEST … ANDTHEN THE NORTH OPEN ALL OF YOUR INNER SENSES.” [The rainbow gives the muchabused victim of mind-control and trauma, a safe mental place to travel to; andthis serves as a “home base” for the mind to return to when things getdifficult. If the programming begins to be destroyed and a deeper alterexperiences real life–its coping mechanism to face the harsher realities oflife will be a knee-jerk reaction to go to safety over the rainbow.]

BRINGING THE SLAVE OUT OF TRANCE (Switching to the FRONT PERSONALITIES after programming)

After the slave has been switched to deeper personalities who are in trancein order to have the slave a. be programmed b. be programmed & carry out amission, c. go to a ritual, then it is important that the programmer takes timeto get the slave to emerge slowly and gently from their altered state. Theinduction process is reversed. The repetition of trances will reinforce thedepth of the trance state, and keep the undetectable slavery operating smoothly:

“IN THE PEARL, PREPARE TO AWAKEN. WHEN YOU AWAKE, YOU WILL FEELREFRESHED, ALERT, RENEWED, AND FILLED WITH ENERGY. YOU WILL REMEMBER ALL THATYOU HAVE EXPERIENCED. NOW TURN AND FACE THE EAST … THEN THE SOUTH … THEN THEWEST … THEN THE NORTH. [this helps the slave orient themselves internally]

TAKE A DEEP BREATH … INHALE … EXHALE …

“YOU ARE FLOATING UP … UP … ON A BEAUTIFUL VIOLET CLOUD, AND YOURWHOLE BODY IS VIOLET AS YOU DRIFT GENTLY UPWARD … “ON A BEAUTIFUL BLUE

CLOUD … UP … UP … AND YOUR WHOLE BODY IS BLUE AND YOU ARE BEGINNING TOAWAKEN GENTLY AND YOU DRIFT GENTLY UP … ON A BEAUTIFUL GREEN CLOUD … ANDYOUR WHOLE BODY IS GREEN … AS YOU DRIFT GENTLY … UP … UP … “ON ABEAUTIFUL YELLOW CLOUD … GETTING MORE AND MORE AWAKE … AND YOUR WHOLE BODYIS YELLOW … AS YOU DRIFT GENTLY … UP … UP …

“ON A BEAUTIFUL ORANGE CLOUD … FILLED WITH ENERGY AND VITALITY …YOUR WHOLE BODY IS ORANGE … AS YOU FLOAT UP GENTLY … “ON A BEAUTIFULRED

CLOUD … ALMOST FULLY AWAKE NOW … AND YOUR WHOLE BODY IS RED AS YOU FLOATGENTLY …

“STAY ON THE RAINBOW … [at this point the script for the slave’sprogramming or mission or ritual will be placed into the mind].

After the programming session, the mission, or the ritual the handler/orprogrammer finishes…

“LEAVING THE MEMORY IN THE BLACK PEARL AND CLOSING AND SEALING THE BLACKPEARL. YOU WILL REMEMBER ONLY THOSE DETAILS THAT I TELL YOU TO REMEMBER. AND INA MOMENT YOU WILL COUNT TO TEN AND GO BACK INTO YOUR SPACE, AND RED 2001-A [whatever the code is for the alter] WILL RETURN.”

DEEP TRANCE PROGRAMMING

If we rate trance depths on a scale of 1 to 13, then the deep trance that isbeing described here is 7-10. At this 7-10 depth, the person must be constantlywatched. The victim is turned on his side so that the victim will continue tobreathe. If the person monitoring has doubts whether the slave is alive, theprogramming staff will poke the lungs and neck. The person’s breathing will beencouraged by the programmer breathing along with the person being programmed ashe says “BREATHE … BREATHE … BREATHE”. This is important becauseat this level the slave is so tranced their body can forget to breathe.

COLOR PROGRAMMING

While we are still on the subject of the rainbow and its colors, and beforewe continue onto other parts of the hypnotic programming process, let’s dealwith color programming.

When Illuminati slaves are being programmed as littlechildren, they usually will get music and color programming. Most readers arelike this author, in that they are not interested in learning magic. However,because this author (Fritz Springmeier) was interested in helping victimsunderstand what’s been done to them, it was important to dive into trying tounderstand the thinking of the occult world in regards to colors.

If I writethat the occult world views yellow as a healing color, and blue as a relaxingcolor, and purple (violet) as a spiritually enlightened color, that is notbecause I want to teach that as a doctrine, but so that therapists can begin tounderstand the hidden mannerisms & thought patterns of these powerfulgenerational occult families, who believe in such odd practices as childsacrifice.

In the 1940’s, as the Illuminati were applying scientificinvestigation to their ancient skills in mind-control, a number of researchersinvestigated color psychology. Cecil Stokes’ color research on the influenceof colors on the mind led to the Auratone films, which were used to treat the”mentally ill”.

Walt Disney Studios produced one of the best occultattempts to free associate color, light and music in their movie Fantasia,especially Fantasia’s opening selection of Stokowski’s adaption of Bach’s”Toccata and Fugue in D minor”. Walt Disney also used selections ofmusic from the Satanist composer Igor Stravinsky in Fantasia. Igor Stravinsky isan anarchy-espousing Satanist. Fantasia was a long labor of occult devotion forWalt Disney and his studios. It took many years to create the film, and when itwas finished, it was used as a programming foundation for alter systems.(Chapter 5 will have more on Disney. Chapter 5 will also give a very detailedscript for HOW Fantasia has been used as the primary foundation programmingtool.) Disney’s Dick Tracy movie is also a classic example of how color isemployed in a movie which is used covertly for mind-control programming.

The five primary areas of occult thinking that were investigated by thisauthor in terms of color programming were:
1. witchcraft books such as RaymondBuckland’s Practical Color Magick,
2. an extensive study of several New AgeGroups such as the I AM Movement, and Church Universal & Triumphant (CUT)using hundreds of documents that ex-insiders of these groups provided,
3.masonic & rosicrucian sources, such as Manly P. Hall’s book The SecretTeachings of All Ages, and
4. Metaphysical books in general such as theexcellent The Rainbow Book being a collection of essays & illustrationsdevoted to Rainbows in particular & Spectral Sequences in general focusingon the meaning of color (physical & metaphysically) from Ancient to ModemTimes. The Rainbow Book was done by the Fine Arts Museums of San Francisco inassoc. with Shambhala of Berkeley & London, 1975.

And finally, the last primary source -but notleast- was interviews with an ex-programmer. What did I find out? After lots ofweeding, I have some siftings from these sources to share. In Buckland’sPractical Color Magick, we learn about a type of Voodoo called Poppet dolls.These dolls are made according to the color that is appropriate for theperson’s problem. For instance, they make a green poppet doll if the personneeds help with finances. The name of the person is written on the dollaccording to the color that corresponds to their astrological birthdate. Forinstance, Leo is orange, and Pisces is Indigo. Those who need success areadvised by Buckland to make a “Color Treasure Map” which is simply acollage of the things they want, making sure that the pictures are brightcolors.

This is another example of color magic. Buckland provides a Color-NumberCode as follows:

1 = Red; 2 = Orange; 3= Yellow; 4 = Green; 5=Blue; 6=Indigo; 7=Violet;8=Rose; 9 = Gold

The letters of the alphabet then are corresponded to these 9 numbers and byadding up the numbers in someone’s name (numerology), Buckland tells us we canget the name’s Color from such a process.

What did I learn of value from Buckland? some tips on how occultists assigncolors to numbers and objects. For the average person these witchcraft teachingsare simply trite imaginations. Even so, the fact remains for those of usconfronting Occult mind-control, colors are important to total-mind-controlprogrammers of the Illuminati. Colors are important to their world-view. Aprogrammer who knew color magic would likely use color magic in theirprogramming, programming scripts and codes. Now, both you and I know some moreabout how to second guess the programmer’s mind. (By the way, Colorprogramming was dealt with in a major way in Vol. 2, but the tips in thischapter may also be useful.)

THE ASSOCIATION OF COLORFUL SIGHTS, SOUNDS, RHYTHM & DANCE

Dance has been associated with color from ancient times, to greek andmedieval courts up to modern times with the use of colored floodlights. Keys inmusic have been associated with colors by many famous musicians. Beethovenreferred to B minor as the black key. Schubert compared E minor to a “girlrobed in white with a rose-red bow on her breast”. Rimsley-Korsakovinterpreted the keys of C, D, A, F, & F# major as white, yellow, rosy,green, and grayish-green. Handel had his own idea of how the keys related to thecolors. The brighter hues of a color have been associated by some with the majorscale, and the more subdued hues of a color with the minor. Goethe stated that apainting of powerful effect was like a piece of music with a sharp key, while apainting with a muted effect was like music in a flat key.

Certain colors have been associated with violin music. In WassilyKandinsky’s book The Art of Spiritual Harmony, we learn a great deal aboutcolor and music. The following comes from Kandinsky’s observations, and mayrelate to Mengele’s programming. The ringing notes of a violin have beenassociated with a cool red. The largo of an old violin is associated withorange. The placid middle tones of the violin are associated with absolutegreen. A dark blue is like a cello. White is like the pauses in music thattemporarily break the melody. Black represents “the final pauses, afterwhich any continuation of melody see the dawn of another world.”

The Rainbow Book is definitely the most comprehensive book this author hasseen on the significance of color both physically and metaphysically. Aninteresting chart is given on page 125, which examines the relationship of thefrequencies of electromagnetic waves in the visible light spectrum with anoctave of music just above middle C. In order to make the comparison (which is charted below) the light frequencies which are 1012 arewritten without the powers of ten and taken down 40 to match the note octaves.This gives us a chart which we will arrange by:

COLOR/ORIG. FREK – 40 // OCTAVE FREK/NOTE

Using this arrangement we get:

Very dark red/391 .3 = 392/G NOTE darkish red/418 = 415/G# note

Orangish red/445 440/A note light orange/464 = 466/A # note yellow green/495= 494/B note green/ 523 = 523/ C note

Bluish green/555 = 553/ C# note Indigo/573-600 = 587/D note

Indigo violet-light violet/618-627 = D# note

Dark violet/655-673 = 659/E note

Very dark violet/682 = 698/F note

Although there is no single one-to-one correspondence between music andcolor, because there are different patterns to consider and the role ofassociation is such a complex issue, there are several things that naturallysuggest themselves: an increase in pitch does seem to suggest an increase inbrightness. An increase in brightness also is suggested by an increase in tempo.Colors also fit the mood of a piece of music. A mass of color can suggest themusical ground.

Musical intervals have also been related by the ancients to theorbits of the planets. This began with the spherical theory of the cosmos byPythagoras, where the different astrological bodies made different sounds.Another correspondence with merit is to associate colors with”properties”, & then associate with music intervals, then assoc.with related cords, and related planets, and then associate with other things.

For instance, Orange would be associated with the Sun, Energy, Glory, and Power.In turn, it would be associated with Re (pronounced “Ray” in music,the whole tone, D). Its related cord would be minor, and its related planetwould be the Sun “Apollo.” Violet would be death, separation, advancedspirituality. It would be associated with Ti (“Tee”) in music, theMaj. 7th, B, and its related planet would be the moon “Diana”. Thereis no way all the different associations can be reviewed here. The chinese havehad a number of music-color association schemes, as well as the Hindis, theTibetans, and others. Is this section on color going somewhere with theseassociations? Yes, Joseph Mengele, the original Dr. Green (the name Green gotpassed on to a least one of his proteges), played the violin and piano whiledoing the color programming to slaves. He was the original master at associatingboth a tone or chord with a particular color or color scheme. He loved usingFantasia for programming.

LIGHT & COLOR

According to Hilton Hotema’s book Ancient Sun God (Mokelumne Hill, CA:Health Research, 1956), light & fire are associated with Sun worship. “Pyra”is Greek for fire, and “Midos” means measure. Pyramid is a combinationof the greek words pyra and midos, which together meant”light-measures”. In other words, the pyramid was the eternalascending flame, the spark returning to its maker. The eternal flame ofPrometheus is a recurrent theme within all the modern revolutions (which by theway were all created secretly by the occult hierarchy).

The Tower of Babel mostlikely followed the pattern which the ancient babylonian cylinders say was usedby the Babylonians in building their temples. Each level was dedicated to one ofthe 7 planets, and was built in that color. In other words the Tower of Babellooked like a rainbow. The lowest was to Saturn and was black. The next was toJupiter and was orange. The next was to Mars and was red. The fourth was the sunand was yellow. The fifth was Venus and was green. The sixth was Mercury and wasblue, and the top or seventh level would be white.

A good example of color programming and a New Age group which is involvedwith Illuminati/government mind-control is Church Universal & Triumphant. Inthe Covert Action Information Bulletin, No. 30, Summer, 1988, Church Universal& Triumphant was exposed as a conduit of CIA funds. Another clue as to howCUT connects in is that Elizabeth Clare Prophet, CUT’s prophetess, speaks inMasonic emples.

E.C. Prophet claims she is Marie Antoinette. (One of the firstIlluminati programs that this author ran into when working with programmedmultiples was Marie Antoinette programming.) Another obvious CIA asset (who isnot part of CUT) has been directing implant victims to go to CUT and solve theirimplant problem by seeking the “I AM force” within them. (The I AM isa system programmed into slaves.) Initiates into CUT have received a letter,”Keeper of the Flame: the need for harmony and love between all themaster’s servants united in a common effort cannot be overemphasized. Workingand serving together, we form a mandala of light through which the masters ofthe Great White Brotherhood will awaken humanity.” (Quote from a letter byCUT Chairman of the Outreach Committee Michael Veys to CUT’s Fraternity of theKeepers of the Flame, c. 1980.) Elizabeth Claire Prophet’s “Fraternity ofKeepers of the Flame” as she calls her initiates learn such things asastrology, crystals, white magic, color magic, Hinduism (reincarnation, karma,meditation, chakra points), how to decree, how to dress (for instance what colorto where at what time), and how to become divine at Summit University.

Elizabeth Clare Prophet (that’s the name she wanted) established SummitUniversity, and CUT’s headquarters in Colorado Springs, a house in SantaBarbara, and an underground fortress for the end times in a valley in Montana.Details about Elizabeth Clare Prophet and her organization are hard to come by.If a person gets serious about being part of her organization, they are expectedto make a once in a life-time gift of everything they have to the CUT and itshead Elizabeth Clare Prophet. (Sources: Notes, Summit University Student andConfidential Interview.) After that they are expected to tithe (one-tenth).Church Universal and Triumphant Tenets, Colorado Springs, CO: 1975, p.12 underArt. XII Law of the Tithe. In return, they are initiated into what I call”the supreme Grand Flattery”, “You shall become an enlightenedGod.”

One of the programming tricks by the Mind-control programmers is tohave some of the alters, incl. front alters believe that they are divine gods.Although members are told they are divine, when people on E.C. Prophet’s staffgot revelations from the Ascended Masters that she channels, she threatened toexpel them if they talked about their revelations. E.C. Prophet does not wantany one else to prophecy in her organization. CUT makes their mind-controlledslaves think that they are too smart and intuitive to ever be deceived. In thisway, they use New Age ideas and the person’s pride to blind them to the factthe person is a mind-controlled slave who is fooled much of the time. Whenstudents are invited onto staff it is a commitment. They are told, “Yourlife will never be your own again, but was it ever your own?” They havealready been taught “Ascension Keys”.

Elizabeth Clare Prophet tellsher students that to Ascend to Godhead is their birthright, the divine right ofevery person. (see Pearls of Wisdom, Vol. X, No. 23, June 4, 1967, The SummitLighthouse, p. 41 -“…has robbed men of the birthright of theirAscension…”) This matches what the Illuminati teach their people. Seealso Pearls of Wisdom, Vol. X, No. 19, (May 7, 1967), The Summit Lighthouse, p.24 – “The Divine Right is the Immortal Plan…Inherent pattern of uniqueChrist manifestation…” In the Ascension Dossier of Serapis Bey initiates are told “The capacity of the externalized self must be givenin toto.” Also-“You must abandon your past to God.” InLanello’s Message(a channeled message), 4/20/73 the students are told,”You do not have to wait for the carnal mind to evolve, for the carnal mindwill never evolve. It must be put off and cast into the Flame.” (SeeLanello 4/20/73 in the Pearls of Wisdom, Vol. 16, #32, 8/12/1973.)

After emptying themselves of all their past and of what they knew, theinitiates are then restructured by CUT. In Serapis, Ascension Class they aretold, “The Ascension Flame is the Flame of Mother.”

SPECIAL COLORS

It can’t be overemphasized that Green is the highest color in Satanism–itis Satan’s color. It is not by accident that green has been used in uniforms,although the decision also was dictated by its advantage in camouflage. In theOmega computer programming a CODE GREEN for many victims means”self-destruct”, the ultimate sacrifice for one’s satanicprogramming.

Interviews with witches, as well as a person in witchcraft who theMasons tried to recruit, and an ex-member of CUT, and an ex-member of similarNew Age group called the I AM movement reveals that they all wear special colorsof clothes on certain days. Due to the large influx of new converts, it has beendifficult for CUT to keep up the teachings on wearing different colored clothingduring different times of the day, and for different days. Newer converts may beunaware of this teaching. The colors of purple and white are especiallyesteemed. The magical properties that Masons & New Agers believe areintrinsic to purple is why the 33rd degree has written books using purple, andseveral New Agers have published books on purple paper. The programmers alsomanipulate such things so that child alters believe that color “magic”has accomplished things.

HEALING BY CORRECT VIBRATIONS & RAYS

Masonic Sources match CUT teachings-

· “The second method of healing was by vibration. The inharmonies ofthe bodies were neutralized by chanting spells and intoning the sacred names orby playing upon musical instruments and singing. Sometimes articles of variouscolors were exposed to the sight of the sick, for the ancients recognized, atleast in part, the principle of color therapeutics, now in the process ofrediscovery.” Masonic Hermetic Qabbalistic & Rosicrucian SymbolicalPhilosophy, p. CXI

· “50. “The force of the obligation is therefore in the obligationand not in the reason. As a matter of fact, the real reason is scientific to thelast analysis; scientific to a degree beyond the penetration, up to the presenttime, of the ‘radiant matter’ of the Roentgen Ray of Modern Science. TheWord concerns the science of rhythmic vibrations, and is the key to theequilibrium of all forces and to the harmony of Eternal Nature.” AncientMystic Oriental Masonry, p.48.

USING HYPNOSIS TO HEAL THE SLAVE AFTER ABUSE.

Sometimes the handlers “TRADE DOWN” the symptoms that result fromabuse so that the slave will heal quicker, others attempt to remove the symptomsimmediately. For burns, the hypnotist can suggest cooling. For other injuries,suggestions for warmth are applied. For bleeding suggestions for stopping bloodflow are used.

REINFORCING THE PROGRAMMING WITH A DECOGNITION PROCESS

The programmer has gotten the results that he wants via drugs, torture,hypnosis, and deception. Now he must build in back-ups to insure the programmingholds up.

The decognition process has 3 steps.

Step 1 is to program the slave to get inadequate sleep, eat poorly, and workhard. It is called REDUCTION OF ALERTNESS.

Step 2 is to create confusion in the mind via programmed confusion using aseries of alters. The person may go into revolving from one alter to another, ormay have alters coming and going with conflicting messages so that the personremains in a PROGRAMMED CONFUSED STATE. In military “training”conflicting orders would be rapidly issued to confuse the mind.

Step 3 is to cause the mind to have something simple to focus on so that itgoes into a FLAT STATE. In the military, this author became aware that the beatof the drum and marching would shift the mind to a flat state. For centuries themilitary have known that they could shut off the critical thinking of the mindand put their soldiers into a flat, non-thinking state by training them to thebeat of the drum and the sound of marching feet. Now you know why those BritishRed-coats marched so non-thinking into the barrels of American guns in battlessuch as New Orleans and Bunker Hill. The mind feels good to shift into thissimple flat state. The brain quits thinking and withdraws into a state that itquits thinking except for what the controllers want it to think. This is whymarching has been so important in military training. Chanting and singing willalso move the mind into this flat state, which is why the French Foreign Legionrequires its men -to sing sing sing. When this author lived in the Indiansubcontinent, I saw Hindu holy men who had meditated in a flat alpha state solong their brains no longer functioned in anything but a flat state. Thisnon-thinking flat state is believed by Hindus to be nirvana, but God didn’tgive us minds to throw away and waste, but to use. He gave us independentthoughts so that we could show our love for Him by choosing to love Him. Goddidn’t want brainwashed followers, which is what some of the churches thinkGod is calling for. The programmers can induce a mood or state of mindhypnotically which will make retrieval of something learned dependent upon goinginto that particular mood or state.

And THE BEAT GOES ON…

It is clear that some of the psychologists have NOT got wind that themind-control is being exposed. The American Journal of Clinical Hypnosis had arecent article (10/1996, p. 105-114) promoting the use of the Wizard of Ozmetaphor in hypnosis with “treatment-resistant” children. For atherapist/hypnotist to hypnotically use Wizard of Oz material on child victimsof mind-control will get a response from them! The authors of the article saythat they use the authoritarian approach to hypnosis (p. 107) for”treatment-resistant” children. The Wizard of Oz metaphor is given onpage 108 of the article, which boils down to: the Straw Man, Tin Man, Lion,Dorothy and Toto were surprised at their success- and that they already hadbrains, a heart, & courage.

HYPNOTIC CODES, CUES AND TRIGGERS

This chapter will provide some more of the hypnotic codes, cues, triggers orwhatever one wants to call these words, noises, and sensory inputs thatmanipulate these poor victims turned into Monarch robots. The reader isencouraged to refer to Vol. 2 for the principle list of codes. Other chapterswill explain about the structures these codes go to, and also the spiritualdimensions of these codes and structures.

Another way to see things is torecognize that the programmers have created “power words” to whichthey have attached memory and programming. If a de-programmer observes closelythe word usage of the victim, you will begin to spot power words of the abuser,for instance, “follow the yellow brick road”.

Unfortunately, peoplewho are not initiated into the arcane world of handshakes, grips, codes, signals and cues allow the appearance of these things to beinterpreted from their own frame of reference. Usually, because these events arenot perceived as being significant, outsiders forget them immediately andtherefore remain oblivious to some of the most overt clues.

Once the reader isaware of the types of programming themes used: the Wizard of Oz, Alice InWonderland, and Star Wars and Star Trek, etc., he will begin to realize ourentire American culture has been transformed into one big mind-controlprogramming center during the second half of the twentieth century!

Unfortunately for the victim, apparently harmless little things, for instance,the arrival of flowers to their hospital bedside, a dead bird on their doorstep,or the words “NEW BEGINNINGS” and “NEW LIFE” may signifyprogramming commands. One Illuminati slave in this area has started a largechurch called NEW BEGINNINGS. The name was not by accident.

A cipher is whensymbols are used to represent letters. One can use letter frequencies to breakciphers. There are charts for letter frequencies for the chief languages.Likewise, there are frequencies to codewords. The Illuminati’s intelligenceagencies have programmed thousands upon thousands of slaves. There are only somany code words to pick from and some of these code words are favorites. In theprevious book many of their favorite code words were listed, but words startingwith A’s, B’s, T’s, U’s, V’s, ‘W’s, X’s, and Y’s, were notgiven and will be now. (A plus sign indicates other words are attached to theroot word.) From the co-author Fritz Springmeier’s experience, the followingis a continuation of favorite code words that have been used to program slaveswith:

AARON, ABBY, ABIGAIL, ABLE, ABNER, ABRAHAM, ACACIA. ACE, ADAM, ADELPHI,AGATE, AIR +, ALABASTER, ALADIN, ALBERT, ALFA or ALPHA. ALICE, ALLEY CAT,ALLIGATOR, AMOS, AMY, ANGEL, ANNA, ANTHONY, APACHE, APOLLO, APOSTLE, APPLE +,ARCHER, ARGUS, ARK, ARROW, ASK +, ASTER, ATHANTIS, ATLAS, AUDREY, AURORA. AUTUMN+, AZTEC, B +, BABE, BABY, BACK ROOM, BACK BONE, BAD, BAKER, BALD, BAMBI,BANANA, BANJO, BANKNOTE, BARBARA. BARK, BARON, BEACH +, BEAST, BECKY, BEE HIVE,BEETHOVEN, BELSHAZZER, BERMUDA, BERTHA, BETA, BETSY, BETTY, BEULAH, BEWITCH,BICYCLE, BIG BROTHER, BINGO, BIRD DOG, BIRTHDAY, BLACK, BLACK +, BLACK

SHEEP, BLACK WIDOW, BLANCA, BLONDIE, BLOODHOUND, BLOODY +, BLUE +, BOA. BOBCAT, BOMBAY, BONANZA. BOODLE, BORAX, BOXCAR, BRASS +, BRIDGET, BROOMSTICK,BUCCANEER, BUICK, BULL, BULLDOG, BULLFROG, BUMBLEBEE, BUNNY, BUTTERCUP, BUZZARD,BYRON, T-BIRD, TADPOLE, TALISMAN, TAN, TANGO, TANYA, TARA, TARZAN, TEACUP,TEARDROP, TEEPEE, TERRIER, TERRY, TESTAMENT, THOR, THREE SISTERS, THUNDER,THUNDERBOLT, THUNDERCLAP, THUNDERFLASH, THUNDERSTORM, TIAMET, TIGER, TILLIE,TITAN, TOM CAT, TONI or TONY, TOPAZE, TOPSOIL, TORNADO, TOTENKOPF, TRINITY,TURTLE, UGLY, ULYSSES, UMBRELLA, UNCLE +, UNDERDOG, UNICORN, UNIFORM, URSULA,VAGABOND, VAMPIRE, VANCOUVER, VARSITY, VELVET, VENUS, VERONICA, VICKY, VICTOR,VIKING, VIOLA, VIOLET, VIPER, VIRGINIA VOODOO, VULCAN, VULTURE, WAGON WHEEL,WALDORF,

WALLFLOWER, WANDA. WARRIOR, WASP, WATCHDOG, WEASEL, WHISKEY, WHITE +, WIDOW,WILD CAT, WILLOW, WINNIE, WINTER +, WIZARD, WOLF,

WOLF +, WYOMING, X-FORCE, X-RAY, XYZ, YANKEE, YANKEE DOODLE, YELLOW, YOGI,& YO YO.

The intelligence organizations prefer to code a single project with a singleword, and an ongoing operation with two words. A nickname of something willconsist of two words. The reader needs to bear several things in mind. First,the programmers generally have intelligent, well sounding codes, that do formpatterns. For instance, a woman’s name from the Bible will be used as a code,with subparts or subcodes having other female names from the Bible. DeeperIlluminati parts will have goddess & god names, and king & queen namesfor cult alters. These are the names the handler or cult uses–NOT their accesscodes.

The codes for slaves follow patterns. There are standard and uniquecodes. During the 1940’s through the 1960’s there were only perhaps a dozenAmerican master programmers travelling around. (After that the number ofprogrammers appears to get quite large.) The master programmers would lay in thefoundational programs and codes. They developed the scripts. The codes andsystems used from system to system do follow patterns. The child’s creativity& their purpose in life would contribute to the uniqueness of theprogramming. Each child visualizes differently and the programmer works with thechild’s mind.

The master Illuminati programmer would allow the handler–the”Daddy” figure in life to have the day-to-day ownership. The Daddyfigure, often the actual pedophile father of the child victim, would be allowedto put in his own codes in the sexual part of the system. Some Daddy figuresused their own songs, their own poetry and their own interests in this area ofthe coding. In other words, most of the system’s codes will reflect the masterprogrammer (such as Dr. Mengele), and the sexual part of the system will reflectthe “Daddy” figure’s programming.

The standard method for many ofthe memory and alter codes is to use a combination of the date of the child’sbirth along with the date of the trauma for part of the code. A color will thenbe attached to this, to produce a color-alpha-numeric code combination. Theseare placed into the internal computers. The standard computer codes were givenin Vol. 2. They can be used to temporarily stop programming to give a victimsome respite and a chance to regroup. The programmers did not especially care ifthe front part of a system is discovered and although they hide the anarchy(coven level) witchcraft alters, they don’t hide them like they do thehierarchy alters. The coven alters have simplistic codes. The hierarchy alterswhich are placed in another area of the system and much deeper, receive a greatdeal of cabalistic codes and mathematical codes. You will not find themathematical codes in the front part of a system. The internal programmingalters have the power to change codes if they need to protect the programming.They will have to hypnotically work with alters when they trance out at night.

In other words, most of their programming of front alters will be done when asystem lies down for “sleep”–more accurately described as lies down”for trance.” If the internal alters change many codes, in theirefforts to protect the system, they will even make it difficult for thehandler/programmer to get into the system. The science of Ciphers developedrotors that require lines to line up. Some simple schemes using this principleappear in some Monarch systems. This is part of the science of structuring.Intelligence codes often come from the Bible or popular fiction books. Thedeeper codes are occult words, often in foreign languages such as Arabic, whichis an important language in the upper occult world. Slaves will be given COVERNAMES for ops, and often males receive female names and vice versa.

The patternsused in programming slaves will represent the world view of the programmer. Ifthe interests of the programmer are known, that will be a major clue to the codes they like toinstall. For this reason, it would be worthwhile to review the access clearancecodes that are used for external security of some agencies, because these sametypes of clearance codes may be found in mind-controlled slaves.

A BIGOT list isa list of names of those who have clearance to a particular set of information.Within a slave there would be numerous BIGOT lists, because persons(personalities) are compartmentalized somewhat like the CIA and the PuzzlePalace (NSA). Agency Codes for clearances include B, C3, K, L, M, N, 0, T,COSMIC, MAJIC (MJ), SI, SCI, and Staff D. (As this author has only examinedthese secret societies from the outside, some insiders may know of otherclearances. In other words, it would be foolish to think that this clearancecode list is comprehensive, but it has hit upon the major clearances.)

Theexercise in judging whether a person can have access to compartmentalizedinformation is called ADJUDICATION. A group of persons (agents) working underone handler is called a NET. The FBI which also uses mind-controlled slaveslikes to call its groups NETS.

FUNNY NAME is intelligence slang for a pseudonym.GRANNY is a CIA asset used in the US which is not under their direct funding.The American military-intelligence groups publish a periodical called JANAP 299which lists the cover names (code names) for many of the ongoing projects,groups, or installations.

There are other code books too. C can stand forController or Control, which means the person(s) handling a mind-controlledslave. A person, who is neither a controller, nor a slave, nor asset, but whoconsciously advances the desires of the controller is called a TRUSTED CONTACT.Sexual slaves would not be expected to respond to such a term, but a middlelevel slave/agent of an intelligence agency might be familiar with this type ofintelligence jargon.

The BIRD was a name for Fort Holabird, MD whereintelligence operatives were trained as well as subjected to mind-control. DIAused the code name EMERALD for drug-trafficking. Boy, does this code word have adouble meaning. Since the DIA, which is playing both sides, also is involvedwith drug smuggling & using Monarch slaves heavily coded with EMERALD typecoding. Very shortly, we will provide more of the Monarch hypnotic cues (codes)for the multitude of functions that a Monarch’s mind must carry out. Thesecues are reinforced as a conditioned response by the programmer. In other wordsthe response becomes so well trained that it becomes automatic.

The type ofprogramming which is placed in a slave varies. Remember, for intelligenceoperations the slave will have to have BONA FIDES, which are codes to allow twopeople to meet. All slaves are given CONTROL SIGNS which allow them to indicatevia a code that they are in trouble. A RECOGNITION signal allows two people tomake contact. For instance, the handler might fly his distinctive sounding planeover a slave’s house in a pre-arranged signal. It might also be a particularcolored scarf, and a particular set of phrases. A GO-AWAY code is a prearrangedsignal that means it is unwise to make contact. The go-away signal may be simplyplacing one’s hands in one’s pocket or turning the porch lights off. A”GO TO GROUND” signal means to go into hiding. A BLACK ENVELOPE, whichis in actuality a black-colored envelope, has been used by intelligence to holdthe real name of an agent being used. In the case of multiples, a chief of astation might have a BLACK ENVELOPE with the actual name of a mind-controlledagent being used in his field of operations. A MAYDAY BOOK exists for Illuminatiand Intelligence slaves which allows them to call if they are about to bearrested. A telephone number is left open for just this purpose.

Also common universal Illuminati codes can be used by the slave toget set free from police and judges. BACKSTOPPING is an intelligence term forsetting up proof to support the cover stories the intelligence agencies givetheir agents and assets. Some of the programmed multiples they use, needBACKSTOPPING.

Within the Jehovah’s Witnesses, especially their headquarters,the Illuminati uses Enochian language to program with. With Druidic branchesDruidic symbols are used. With the Jewish groups, Hebrew is used. Otherlanguages are also used. An Illuminati System can easily have 6 differentlanguages used as programming codes. The foreign language codes will be forsmall parts of a system only. Special artificial languages are also employed, aswell as sign language. The Illuminati employs signs which they teach some oftheir slaves with pick-up sticks. This system of secret symbols is a series ofcrosses and horizontal & vertical marks. These marks can be drawn onanything, and consist of up to 7 lines. They are believed to be used in regardsto ritual dates/ceremonies. These secret signs resemble similar secret symbolsused by the Romany tribe of Gypsies. T

he masters of mind-controlled slaves alsouse a technique where one signal or code will carry several messagessimultaneously. This is called MULTIPLEXING. We are all aware of the phenomenaof how the brain can selectively hear. The brain can select certain sounds topay attention to, such as when a person is in a noisy room listening to someone,or a football player is trying to hear the quarterback’s calls, likewisecertain alters hear certain codes/cues/triggers while others don’t. Theinternal programmers and reporting alters may internally hypnotically maketelephone noises that are fake, so that host alters loose the ability to discernwhat is real and not real, so that they don’t pay close attention to accesscalls. This ability of the brain is manipulated in MULTIPLEXING.

MONARCH MIND-CONTROL CODES

A. ALPHA (basic)

Basic Commands. (These basic commands are also found used in many slaves,although there will be exceptions to everything.) Many of the basicstructures/codes will be put in using a sensory deprivation tank and LSD. Forthe most foundational levels of a system, the programmers may use the Hebrewletters associated with the attributes of God and the angel names. This can alsobe worked into English, as there is a cabalistic equivalent in the letters Bthrough K for the Hebrew letters associated with God’s names used in magic toconjure angels. In the basic Alpha structuring, Illuminati slaves will havestars as power sources, and the ditty Twinkle, Twinkle Little Star will pertainto this programming. The Hansel & Gretal story is used for obedienceprogramming.

Another story line that is used in programming is the Cassandra and Apollomyth. Common access triggers are “HELLO PRINCESS’, 3 knocks, flashes oflight, tones, and sequences of blank phone calls.

If the slave leaves their answering machine on, a recording may be left”IF YOU WOULD LIKE TO MAKE A PHONE CALL PLEASE HANG UP & TRY YOUR911” accompanied by a beep-beep-beep. This activates a program within theslave to call a prearranged phone number for further instructions.

B. BETA (sexual)

SEXUAL ALTERS—most of the following codes are for deep sexual alters. InIlluminati Systems these are called Beta alters, in CIA systems they create Betamodels whose primary function is to provide sex, usually perverted sex andS&M for the perverts who run our secret government and visible government.BETA models are those who are primary job is sexual, such as service as aPresidential Model (sex slave for a President). These System models may benumbered BETA 1, BETA 2…BETA 601, etc. Sexual programming for espionage andseduction, such as is done at Disneyland, may well involve the use of hundredsof dolls, such as Wonderwoman, Genie, Barbie type dolls. The names/codes wouldtie in with these dolls.

TIME CLOCK programming is placed in to cover the time that the sexual alterswere on a mission, so that they can switch back to the – front and nothing beremembered.

Colors attached to sequences of numbers have been used for some of the Betaprogramming. For other sexual operatives, the intelligence agencies trigger themvia specific sequences of chess moves.

Betty Boop programming is used sexually. Betty Boop was a 1930’s cartooncharacter who was an attractive “vivacious vamp”. She was described inone cartoon as the “kitty from Kansas City.” She had cartoons aboutGigolos, Bimbos, Little Red Riding Hood, Mother Goose rhymes which were used asprogramming themes. Plays on words such as “CHESS-NUT” were used inthe cartoons.

C. CHI (return to cult)

Chi programming uses a lot of idiosyncratic phrases, and little ditties. Someof the nursery rhymes listed in the song section will be Chi programming. Someof the Chi programming has been listed in the Alpha programming section of Vol.2.

p_solemetric.jpg
<input height=”274″ name=”I26″ src=”http://www.whale.to/b/sp/deepera/p_solemetric.jpg” type=”image” width=”276″ />

The number of hang-up calls may serve as a code, incl. when the hang-up callshappen.

D. DELTA (assassination)

· Delta alters –are activated to kill by the following three things: seeingspecific clothing, items held in a persons hand, and particular words. Sincethese items would specific for a particular murder there is no particularspecifics that can be given.

It is thought by some people that the following TV ad may have been used totrigger Hinkley when it was time for Hinkley to attack President Ronald Reagan.

p_hero.jpg<input height=”600″ name=”I27″ src=”http://www.whale.to/b/sp/deepera/p_hero.jpg” type=”image” width=”231″ align=”left” />

One man who was programmed as an Delta-type assassin by the NSA in the NJregion, was programmed to be activated for assassination mission via the DavidLetterman program, Clinton’s speeches such as his speech touching on thebaseball strike with “little kid” wording, and by several movie stars(Arnold Schwartzenegger, Slyvester Stallone, etc.). I Dream of Jeannieprogramming is used for assassination, as well as at the CIA’s Farm the songOld McDonald’s Farm is used with programming done to CIA assassins.Distinctive jewelry & clothes. Emerald ear rings used as a signal to othersthat a message was being carried. Emeralds mean drugs, rubies mean prostitution,diamonds (rhinestones) presidential model work. Red, White & Blue wornsometimes by presidential models.

E. EPSILON (animal alters)

F. OMEGA (internal computers)

The Omega programming works along with an Executive Control Board (or GrandDruid Council) and Internal programmers. The Executive Control Board isassociated with both numbers of the clock, and precious gems and metals such as”9 O’CLOCK GOLD”.

For G. Gamma programming see Cisco’s section on “Programming,Foundations’s

H. HYPNOTIC INDUCTIONS

NICRO NECTRUM NECTO–take one back to one’s “true time period”.When the child victim is hypnotically inducted by counting numbers duringprogramming by a Doctor and a Mother-of-Darkness, these two will reassuring theychild that things are O.K. and sweet talking to the child as it is inducted.

I. JANUS-ALEX CALL BACKS (end-times)

END-TIME ACTIVATION CODES

Most slaves have end-time programming. The programming to activate aslave’s end-time programming often runs pages upon pages of coded messages. Anumber of Monarch slaves have been de-programmed enough that they beganaccessing and spewing out pages and pages of these activation codes. In the endtimes, there appears to be a great deal of color coding for operations. Many ofthe people who are taking part in the end times events are not American. Forinstance, the different lists of people to round up are categorized by color.The Red list in America are anti-NWO opposition leaders to be executed approx. 2weeks before martial law. The blue list are anti-NWO order people who will beprogrammed or killed in the process. The yellow list is people to be rounded upfor reeducation camps after martial law. Other countries apparently havedifferent color codes. The red & blue lists have been distributed, & areperiodically updated. The blue routes have already been marked by blue patchesof color to guide those transporting prisoners when martial law is declared inthe U.S. Within Monarch slaves, some of them apparently have an internalcrystal/and or rocks that are programmed to explode at a certain point intime–thus releasing the victim’s end time programming. The internal crystal(mental image) contains at least the four basic colors, red, green, blue,purple. One sample of part of end time programming was given in the previousVol. 2 book. Still another example is as follows:

BB 243-ABCD-XXZ² (blue ray)

CC-458 ABCD-42T (red ray)

CD-379 ABCD-H1² (yellow ray)

CE-211 -ABCD-JKL (green ray)

CF-531-ABCD-ZZU (purple ray)

TMFT.47 ZONES 7-12

17876747270 OCEAN SIDE

PORT 18,22,34,41 CONTACT

YELLOW RAY SHOVE 79230 A2

TO RIGHT SIDE DAGGER HANGS

LOW ON PART SIDE FISH

SCHOOL CLOSED ROOM 37-56

RAILS EXIT END

17876747270 COL. BLACK PATCH

TO MALL 76747270 THIEF

AZT FMT BZT CET

11,4,6,9,32,101, 70

YELLOW FLAGS AT HALF MAST

YELLOW DOG ON RUN

BLUE FISH AT HOME

[This program is related to a slave contacting other slaves in some end time operation.]

A team leader will have a down line of around 4 people–which are coded redray, yellow ray, green ray, blue ray. When the activation code hits a slave teamleader during the end times, they will in turn activate their people, who inturn will have people who are team leaders and have a down line. At least twofalse callback alarms will be sounded (tested) before the real one.

J. Omicron programming

relates to programming of slaves for theCombination (between Intelligence- the Mafia and Government.)

K. TWINNING (teams)

L. THETA (Psychic warfare)

The following is only speculatory, but worth taking note of. This authorbelieves that some of the Theta models got chess programming. Within the systemof Enochian magic is the magical system of Enochian Chess. The Golden Dawn hasbeen identified as one of the groups carrying out mind-control. Some Golden Dawn leaders have recently put out a reference bookEnochian Chess of the Golden Dawn by Chris Zalewski (St. Paul: Llewellyn Pub,1994). Enochian chess is played with four players, on a chess board that isdivided up into four squares, one for each of the magical watchtowers of air,water, earth, and fire. It has only been since 1992 that researchers within theGolden Dawn (specifically the New Zealand branch which is called the Emerald ofthe Sea) reinvented a set of rules to play enochian chess. The moves forEnochian chess may have been used in recent years as a programming script. Sinceonly a few people have mastered the game, and since the game is more than agame, it is magic, it would stand to reason that the temptation would be thereto use it as a programming script if the programmer knew the game.

M. SONGS & NURSERY RHYMES

What follow is a list of Nursery Rhymes Used As Triggers, & Songswhich have Monarch programming meanings &, such as access parts, orsoliciting a behavior or thinking.

a. NURSERY RHYMES

The Illuminati create imaginary worlds for many of the deeper alters to livein. They keep these alters living in such unreality and nonsense that deeperalters have a difficult time separating their subjective programmed reality fromthe objective reality of the outside world, which doesn’t understand them.Nursery rhymes function well for programming in messages. Often these nurseryrhymes are distorted slightly to serve their programming purpose. Some of theprogramming distortions and uses of these nursery rhymes are provided below.Major corporations and advertising groups working for the Network place nurseryrhymes into their television ads. These nursery rhymes are constructed in the adto activate on certain slaves which usually are sleepers. Some were given inVol. 2, here are some additional nursery rhymes beyond those listed in Vol. 2:

A Tisket A Tasket
Baa, Baa, Black Sheep (used for money laundering scripts, and drug money,drug carrying scripts)
Bye, Baby Bunting (used with actual rituals where the slave child is placedwithin a skin, cocoon programming with a butterfly coming forth etc.)
Diddle, Diddle Dumpling
Ding, Dong Bell (Dr. Mengele liked to use this–message: don’t disturb themouse that runs the internal system clock.)
Fa Fe Fi Fo Fum (Movement within the system’s bean sprouts in the system,and also a death threat.)
Farmer in the Dell, The (Used by the CIA for a serious program)
Georgy Porgy
Gingerbread Man
Hey! Diddle Diddle! (used for astral projection programming)
Hot-Cross Buns!
Humpty Dumpty (used for shattering the mind programming)
I’m a Gold Lock (used to instill cover programming to hide the truth)
I Love Little Pussy (kitten programming)
Jack, Be Nimble
Jack and Jill
Jack Sprat (possibly cannibalism programming)
Little 80-Beep (come home to Papa programming)
London Bridge (This was used at the Presideo and other sites for learning thechants, and the spells. At the Presideo it was used with barber poleprogramming. They all fall into a stupor at the end.)
North Wind, The
Queen of Hearts, The (swearing an obedience oath programming)
Rub-a-Dub-Dub (refers to the 3 internal programmers)
There was an Owl
Three Blind Mice
Three Little Kittens

It should be pointed out that the mind-control programmers have long agodiscovered the power of a rhyme in the mind. Rhymes have a hypnotic quality tothem. An example of how rhyming was used by internal programming alters toreprogram an alter wanting free is given in Daniel M. Traver’s book (Phddissertation) Dissociative Disorders and Mind Control. Wichita, KS: DanielTraver, 1996, p. 52,

“What the hell man/ you can’t stand! a winter worse yet/ you’ll cryand you’ll die/ as we place the mind-set/ you won’t know what to do now/you’ll hear every rhyme/ and you’re cravings will be as an addict incrime….” This rhymed program would accomplish its goal of wearing downthe alter and bringing that alter into line.

b. SONGS

Yankee Doodle (used for sexual obedience programming “mind thestep” and the word “girls” was changed to “boys” tomake “and with the boys be handy”. “Yankee Doodle keep itup” was ref ramed to mean “slave yank yankee doodle (the penis)sexually up.” MTV is blatantly using programming rock-and-roll songs.Aleister Crowley is featured in some of these. Maiden (a satanic rock and rollband) blatantly places the words “POWER SLAVE” on one of their CDcovers along with snakes and an enlightening pyramid. Anton LaVey has had an MTVsong video shown, where he sings in detail how he is going to make the listenerinto a sex-slave, etc. etc. Some of this is blatantly mind-control in the open,it is so open it is dismissed by many of the public.

c. TONES & CORDS

In the Vol. 2 book, it was written about how telephone tones are used forcodes. These type of codes tie in with the computer and the lower levels, suchas the dungeon. You will find that access to items has been encoded by using thetelephone tones to spell them backwards. For instance, if we were to takecastle, find the numbers that correspond to C=1, A=1, S=8, etc. on thetelephone, and then put those tones out backward. But to make this codeunbreakable the programmers will add something like some piano cords–somethingthat can still be played out via the tones. To make it further unbreakable theprogrammers will have a code (such as a combination of cards) assigned to thatlevel which also must be toned in. An example of this in its totality would be14 tones + 3 cords to open up a person’s dungeon (hell pit the lowest level).In other words, such an access would take the programmer from a distance about11/2 mm. to open up the dungeon, whatever time he needed to work in it and 1 1/2mm. to close it down. A 5 mm. phone call might be sufficient. This gives theprogrammers the ability to internationally use telephone tones to access deeperitems within the victim’s mind. And as standard practice the reversal of thecode closes down that part of the mind, and gets the programmer out.

d. RINGS, CREDIT CARDS, TOKENS etc.

A ring with a snake swallowing its tail called Ouraboros signifies rank inthe Illuminati. Rings, credit cards, business cards, tokens and keys are allused as codes, triggers and signals. For instance, one slave had an olddistinctive skeleton key. In another instance, a slave was given a token from aparticular business as a BONA FIDE. In another instance, the BONA FIDE was aprogrammer’s business card from his notional job. In another instance, aparticular credit card would get the user into particular parts of the slave’ssystem.

Zeta is the sixth letter, and it’s ancient meaning was a sacrifice. (Thesecodes are not known by the author.)

O. SAMPLE CODES FOR ALTERS

As an example of the type of code names (called operational cryptonyms) usedfor an intelligence asset one intelligence asset had the following cryptonyms:AECHALK, ARINIKA, CHICKADEE, HERO, IRONBARK, RUPEE, & YOGA.

Monarch I.D. code reviewed

These codes are purely a representative model-not any particular real system.The overall system code at times consists of [birthdate + programming site codes+ birth order + number of generations family was in the Illuminati.]

For ourhypothetical system Mary we have the hypothetical overall system code of: 6-13-51- 14 – 02 – 12. In order to give the codes for a hypothetical alter system wewill have to explain some things as we go. The Programmers have for each slaveboth medical programming files, and a grey or black binder with the programmedaccess, trigger, codes & cues, & structure.

A typical Illuminati systemwill be a cube (although spheres and pyramids are also used). The principlealters will be the “a” alters. A typical section of alters willconsist of a 13 x 13 grid of alters. These are alters who live in a worldtogether and must function together. A 13 x 13 section will have 13 families of”a” through “in” alters. The “a” alters will bethe primary alters that the Programmers will interact with. The Programmer maycall up an “a” alter and ask it to go get the “c” alter inits family, rather than directly asking for it. This initial page of alter codeswill be the primary or “a” alters.

If we are dealing with a 13 x 13 x13 cube of alters, then the initial page has 13 “a” alters of eachsection. Each of these alters will have an access code which will often includethe following components: AN ASSIGNED COLOR + AN ALPHA NUMERIC CODE + APERSONALIZED MAGICAL NAME.

This will equal 1/3 their access code. These codewords must be repeated three times to pull the alter up. However, if an alter istrained well, and hears his master’s voice, an alpha-numeric code can pull thealter up. For many of the alters, the reversal of their access code puts themback to sleep. This is an important point, because some alters would bedangerous to leave in control of the body.

The “a” alters are regularalters. Many of them have been hypnotically age advanced to see themselves asteenagers or adults. Sometimes “b” and “c” alters are alsoaged. The “d” through “in” alters are generally left as theywere split and most of them are infantile, with little concept of how old theyare. The little ones will be the ones who often remember the programming verywell, and know things about the system. The top alters will also sometimesreceive personal names from their handler. This is in addition to all theircodes. If the alter is responsive to its master, the personal name might pullthe alter up too. Do all of the alters get charted? There are several groups ofalters which get charted separate from the rest or don’t get charted at all.Because of the competition and distrust between the different programmers, theyoften place in secret back doors into the person’s mind that only they knowabout. Worlds of secret alters loyal and devoted to the programmer may be builtinto the system and not appear on the regular charts. The core, and some of theprimal splits from the core will not appear on the regular grids. They will beplaced on a separate sheet, and their codes will be in some magical language.

The Illuminati commonly employs 20 magical languages, and Hebrew, Latin and Greek are alsooften used for charting the core and its primal splits. Enochian is a goodexample of a magical language used by the Illuminati. Some alters will becreated solely by the slave in order to cope with life. Hour glass alters haveentire sentence access codes. Deaf & blind alters need their access codesigned on their hands by moving their fingers up and down, etc. End time altersmay have access codes that may entail reading an entire page. Reporting altersare often small children, that are hidden in each section, and may require slapsto the face or jabs with a needle to pull them up. Spinner kittens will beaccessed via their mama cat, who acts like a Madam in a “cat house”.The codes for this was given in the Beta section codes of Vol.2.

Telephone tones are frequently used to be able to key in (that is access ortrigger) parts of the computer program matrix. Dominoes also are used for thecomputer programming. The dominoes are put in so that the programmers can get adomino effect, if they want to set off a series of programs. Dominoes andflashing sequences of lights were used to train the child to automaticallyrespond to a certain pattern of dots.

P. Catholic Programming (by Jesuits etc.)

KEYS TO THE KINGDOM = world domination by mind control

In the 1940’s, the Jesuit branch of the Illuminati placed tatoos onto theirmind-controlled slaves. These tatoos consisted of the sacred heart with a rose& a dagger, & were generally placed upon the left hand. The Jesuits havediscontinued the practice of tattooing their slaves. Now all types of people areusing this sacred heart tatoo.

The Rite to Remain Silent is a programming trauma which is a satanic reversalof the Catholic Mass. The VOW OF SILENCE is a keep quiet program activated by”THE WALLS HAVE EARS & THE PLANTS HAVE EYES SO YOUR SILENCE ISTANTAMOUNT TO SUCCESS.” It is explained to the victim that the sea shells& the plants have the ability to hear, and that a sensitive occultist(programmer) can psychically pick up what the plants and sea shells hear.”MAINTAIN IT” –is a command to maintain the Vow of Silence.”MAINTAIN IT & LISTEN.”– a command to keep silent & listen toa command.

“ENTER INTER INNER DIMENSION TWO” is a standard Jesuit infinityprogram (2 is a sacred voodoo no.) Pontifax is a demon &/or alter placed inJesuit systems.

BABY BREATH, BLACK ROSE, and WHITE ROSE are codes/triggers that are all usedin Jesuit mind control. The Baby Breath and the black rose relate to programminghaving to do with death. The WHITE ROSE is a trigger to cue a person to releaseprogramming. The black rose is also used by the Mafia. The black rose was alsoused by George Bush, drug kingpin for the Illuminati, on his no. 1 helicopterfor the upholstery pattern.

When the Catholic Priests do the handsignal genuflection across their chest,this has the second meaning which is a programming meaning of north, south, eastand west.

Q. Mensa Programming (by MENSA)

The MENSA codes are sequences of numbers.

R. HAND SIGNALS

Masons and monastic orders who program are very keen on hand signals. A veryskilled handler can do morse code with winks and eye rolls.

Rotating the hands around each other and then gesturing with the hands towardthe person with both hands means–“did you get the signal?”

Sign of distress. Arms raised over the head with palms forward. Then lowingthe arms to a bent position with the hands at head level, and then lowing thehand to chin level, and then dropping them to the side.

Drawing the right hand across the throat with the thumb of the hand pointingto the throat. (used in connection with oaths, such as fidelity to death.)

• Sign of faith. Hand on the heart.

• Sign of plucking out the heart.

• Sign of Reverence.

• Sign of Satan made over solar plexus.

• Sign of touching the crown of the head.

• Sign of two hands pointing to the solar plexus.

• Sign of Preservation. Consists of placing one hand over the heart, andraising the other to form a right angle at the elbow, with the hand pointing toheaven.

The movie “Dune” showed male & female Ilium, hierarchy handgreetings, as well as showing signet rings, which are indeed often worn on pinkyfingers. (The movie also shows the Karat goddess, how a man becomes a GrandMaster by learning control of the demons, astral projection through the sphereswhich are conquered by the Grand Master, & control of the int. weather,etc.)

S. SCRIPTURES USED IN PROGRAMMING (cont. from Vol. 2. chap. 10)

• 1 KGS 7:21 –talks about 2 pillars on the outside of the Temple. Thepillars of Joachin and Boaz are important to Freemasonry and are built in theslaves mind at an intermediate level. Joachin is a white pillar of light associated with fire. It is easy to see how this association couldbe built by certain traumas. Boaz is the shadowy pillar of darkness and is alsoassociated with water. A dark water torture would make this association. The two pillars represent the two sides of theIlluminati’s “the Force”. Between them is the door to theIlluminati’s House of God.

• 1 KGS 10:18–description of Solomon’s Temple used to build the imageryand the lion guards to the internal Temple programmed into victims.

• 23rd Psalm–used as a cue to signal a ritual time.

• Song of Solomon–Used in the ritual of the Great Rite, a ritual pertainingto the Middle Earth, where the High Priest & Priestess join in sexual unionas the God & Goddess creating fertility for the land.

• Ezekiel chap. 1 and chapter 12 are being used for endtime callback codes.

T. ALIEN PROGRAMMING

• Blue beams of light are used as a hypnotic induction for slaves who aregiven the cover story of being abducted by aliens.

• The All-Seeing Eye is used to represent the planet Sirius. Sirius isimportant to the Hermetic magicians, and some of the programmers are deeply intohermetic magic. Satan is said to come from Draco or Sirius, esp. the dog starCanis major. Masonic programming may well have the “blazing star”portrayed in the programming as a pentagram, with the name Sirius. Sirius mayrepresent the Master, the creator of the system in some systems where theprogrammer is steeped in Masonic philosophy. A sickle may be involved with theGarden of Eden story for some victims of this type of programming, becausesupposedly the Golden Age ended with a sickle splitting heaven from earth. Theability of the handlers signals to the slave in so many mediums makes itdifficult to communication and accessing, to send different preventcommunication and accessing.

Program Codes During 1972-1976 for Dr. Green

One mind-controlled slave, using her photographic memory, managed to sneakinto the programming files of her programmer, who went by the code name Dr.Green. Her information was included in the book U.S. Government Mind ControlExperiments On Children which was compiled by Jon Rappoport and presented beforea congressional committee & put on public record. The co-authors recognizesome of the programs.

In the late 60’s and early 70’s, all the programmingwas revamped. The best programs were identified and then used. The continualrevamping, editing and modernizing of programs has continued to strengthen themind-control. The recovering victim’s name is Chris De Nicola, b. 7/62. Sheworked full-time at Disneyland for 7 years (from ’83-’90). Her father DonaldRichard Ebner worked with her major programmer who was Dr. Green. She receivedstandard Illuminati trauma-based mind-control.

In 1970, she received RadiationExperiments on her neck, throat, & chest. In 1972, the experimentsconcentrated on her chest, and in 1975 the radiation tests concentrated on heruterus. She was programmed in Kansas City Univ., Tucson, AZ, & in the desertin AZ. During her programming, the assistants were careless and she was able tosneak into the Programmer’s office and look at the files with her photographicmemory. She was caught twice in the files, and tortured, but simply used herability to nest memories to their disadvantage.

Chris was such a poorprogramming subject, so much so that finally the programmer tried to trigger hersuicide programs to activate, but they failed and she managed to survive.Suicide alters repeatedly tried to kill her body, and they came very close tokilling her. On 3 occasions she had to have her stomach pumped, and one occasionwhen the paramedics found her she’d stopped breathing. She has survived hersuicide programming countless times, praise the Lord, and provided what she sawwith her photographic memory. The following codes were remembered by Chriswithout the aid of hypnosis. Cisco and this author recognize some of theseprograms. What Chris saw were the files. Each program (script) is given a nameand then its file has a standard access code assigned to it. Chris saw thestandard access codes.

The standard method for coding a program is to use theDAY OF BIRTH CODE, THEN THE DAY OF THE TRAUMA that puts in the program into theslave’s mind, and then the STANDARD ACCESS CODE. Evidently, Chris got into thefile with level D programs, which means she was looking at programs 4 levelsdeep. Comments about the programs are this author’s and reflect hisunderstanding, and may be subject to correction. [Spellings are exactly asprogram names were spelled.]

Program Name Standard Code

Relevance D-1000

Kick-It-Back D-1010

Cross Fire D-1011

Sophis. Electromagnetic Fields D-1012

(D-1012 makes the slave think they have an electrical field on them. In orderto cover their electrical field tests, that they actually do place on slaves,they have the ability to confuse the slave, and prevent detection by activatinga programmed abreaction that makes the field seem real, when it doesn’t exist.This prevents detection.)

Gorilla Warfare D-1013

Retreat D-1 014

Nautical Science D-1015

River Runs Deep D-1016 (D-1016 is a powerful program which tells the slavethat there is no escape, because the programming runs deep through every fiberof the person.)

Educated Mentality D-1017 (D-1017 is a program to allow the slave to lookintelligent when needed.)

Glass House D-1018

Corporate Extrapulation D-1019

Closing In D-1 020

Frog Man D-2000

Catastrophic Indifferences D-2020

Quality Control D-2030

Protocol Virus D-2040

Operation 2000 D-2050 (This relates to Project 2000, which is end timeprogramming.)

Pro-Life-Go D-2060

Conspiracy Action D-2070

Verified Suggestion D-2080

Finish Line Protocol D-2080

Fraternity Leads D-2090

Rotten Egg D-3000

Kaiser Confrontation D-3010

Co-Op Protocol D-4701

Forensic Criterion D-4702

Mediator Response D-4703

Mentor Divisible D-4704

Biopsy Synchroization D-4705 [This is a very harsh program.]

OSH-AMP-RIE D-5000

D.O.A. D-6000

Laser Documentation D-7000

Freak Out [just what it sounds like] D-7010

-[From here on I will select specific programs, and will not review the entire list of programs that she saw the files for.]

Foolish Games D-7060

Periodic Mind Lapse [a forget code] D-7080

Creepy Crawlers D-8040

Shock Permanence [to shock oneself] D-9000

One-For-All D-95452

[punish all for 1 alter’s misbehavior]

Counter-Transference DIA-5001

Border-Line-Schizophrenic DIA-5009

[If the slave misbehaves, they can be triggered to act schizophrenic & get themselves incarcerated into a mental hospital for prgrmmg.]

Lens-Reverse-Angle DIA-5011

Canary-Sings DIA-5015

[reporting alters tattle-tale or an alter sings a script.]

Suicidal Mission [just as it sounds] DIA-5017

Mission Completed [go to “sleep” prgm] DIA-5018

Train-Wreck-Perception DIA-5021

Starvation Tactics [starvation prgm] DIA-5022

Bare-Metric Pressure Process DIA-5023

Fundamental Theology [rel. cover prgm] DIA-5025

Project 2000 412-2000

This is end-time programming. The word project followed by a number usuallyrefers to the date the project must be completed. Standard methodology forcoding then would be that on 4/12/2000 this end-time programming must be completed. -codes not remembered for theseprograms which she saw in files-

Candy [candyland programming]

False Memory Syndrome [even in c. 1973 they were setting up the False MemorySyndrome campaign to take down their opposition.]

Forced Brain Wave Activity

Frenzied State [just as it sounds]

Call-Of-Wild [survival techniques]

Hocus Pocus [magic programming]

Mass [cath. mass programming]

Phoe-net-ical Difficulties [obvious]

Self Mutilation [obvious]

Van-der-built [related to Vanderbilts III. family]

Warped-Speed-9 [Star Trek programming]

-(Her med. file no.s of radiation lab experiments are given chptr. 8)-

p_levels.jpg
<input height=”488″ name=”I28″ src=”http://www.whale.to/b/sp/deepera/p_levels.jpg” type=”image” width=”400″ />

A programmed multiple can work at several different levels of participation.

The Illuminati.

This is the secret hierarchy level. It is secret by virtue of almost all (ifnot all) its members being programmed multiples from elite powerful bloodlines-This is hardcore generational Satanism that believes in a Gnostic Lucifer/andoctrine, hence, they may be called your elite Luciferians.

The Network.

This level of activity is secret by virtue of its secret ties. It includesthe anarchy level of the Illuminati, the various criminal syndicates, the musicindustry, the various fraternities, new age institutions and people in power allover the globe. It is held together by fear, blackmail, and common bonds of lustand greed. The network includes atheists, self-made satanists, opportunists, andmany mind-control slaves. It is far more cohesive and controlled than meets theeye. It is very eclectic. It doesn’t matter at this level what you believe,what matters is whose control are you under. This is the hidden seamy power sideof the World System.

The establishment, the System.

This level is open for the common people to participate in. This levelremains stably operating in their control because of secret election fraudacross the board in U.S. elections, extensive blackmail, extensive control ofthe masses through the establishment media (TV, radio, newspapers), interlockingcorporations and government agencies that control the economic life, and manymass mind-control techniques that these groups use. Most people are unaware ofhow powerful the establishment is. As long as they drift in its current, theywill never see the control. It is only when one tries to swim upstream againstthe current that you find out how powerful the establishment is. The Illuminatisets up controlled opposition to the System, such as the Hip pie movement,militant environmentalists, Hell’s Mgels, Neo-nazis, John Birch Society, theCommunist Party, etc. Controlled opposition gives people a chance to vent theiranger without threatening their control. It also gives them dialectic conflictswhich they can control to their advantage.

CHAPTER 5: SCIENCE NO. 5 – THE SKILL OF LYING, THE ART OF DECEIT

The Illuminati have refined the art of deception far beyond what the commonman has imagined. The very life & liberty of humanity requires the unmaskingof their deceptions. That is what this book is about. Honesty is a necessaryingredient for any society to function successfully. Deception has become anational pastime, starting with our business and political leaders and cascadingdown to the grass roots.

The deceptions of the Illuminati’s mind-control may behidden, but in their wake they are leaving tidal waves of distrust that aredestroying America. While the CIA pretend to have our nations best interest atheart, anyone who has seriously studied the consequences of deception on asociety will tell you that deception will seriously damage any society until itcollapses.

Lies seriously damage a community, because trust and honesty areessential to communication and productivity. Trust in some form is a foundationupon which humans build relationships. When trust is shattered humaninstitutions collapse. If a person distrusts the words of another person, hewill have difficulty also trusting that the person will treat him fairly, havehis best interests at heart, and refrain from harming him. With such fears, anatmosphere of death is created that will eventually work to destroy or wear downthe cooperation that people need. The millions of victims of total mind-controlare stripped of all trust, and they quietly spread their fears and distrust on asubconscious level throughout society.

One problem about lies is that one liewill call for another and then another. It’s hard to keep lies single. They seemto want to breed more of their kind to protect themselves. Soon the liar becomesa victim of his own lies, trapped in a dishonest web that demands lots of energyto protect his false fronts. This is the sad fate that the intelligence agencieshave painted themselves into. They must maintain groups that oversee theirdouble-agents’ lies to insure that the lies that they have disseminated don’tcontradict themselves. Finally, they have put out so much disinformation, theylose track of reality themselves.

Far from saving this nation, the intelligenceagencies have spread the cancer of deception into all walks of life, so thatthis cancer is contaminating and killing anything of value in the United States.The soon-to-come death of this nation’s sovereignty, as well as the destructionof this nation’s morals are the results of this cancer. People who have attendedhigh level Illuminati meetings were instructed in how the Illuminati plan tobring in the NWO AntiChrist reign by making everything appear as if it hashappened naturally. The Illuminati have decided to camouflage their actions withthe creation of normalcy to avert any suspicions.

An example of something whichappears to have happened naturally is the O.J. Simpson case, which was plannedbased on previous murder scenarios which had been successfully covered up. O.J.Simpson was a CIA mind-controlled slave, and the entire Simpson case wasconcocted as an elaborate effort to cause racial tensions. The Mishpucka, theCIA, the Mob and the Illuminati have all had their dirty hands involved in theentire affair. The entire affair reeks of manipulation and planning. It is notthe goal of this paragraph to go into the case, but just to drop a coupledetails. Joey Ippolito, Jr. is both CIA & Mob. Ippolito at one time lived inHallendale, FL, a mob housing subdivision which was protected by a police forcerun by the mob. He has helped run drugs and wet ops for “theCombination” which interconnects with the Illuminati. O.J. Simpson’s friend Cowlings worked for Joey Ippolito, aswell as O.J. Simpson. Simpson distributed cocaine for Joey Ippolito & theCombination. Simpson’s lawyer also is tied to the Illuminati, the CIA, and themob. One of his lawyers on TV said the trial reeked of government corruption.Nicole Simpson lived next door to Carl Colby (former CIA director Bill Colbysson). Colby’s wife and kids have been subjected to mind-control. Colby’s wifetestified in O.J. Simpson’s trial, but was addressed as “Miss Boe”rather than by her name. O.J. Simpson’s mother worked for a California StateMental Hospital in San Francisco for 30 years. Many State Mental Hospitalworkers have children who have been programmed. When one of the jurors inSimpson’s case, Tracy Hampton, had her mind-control programming go haywire, shebegan staring for long periods at a blank TV and hearing voices. She had to bedismissed.

During the Simpson trial, Judge Ito gave Joe McGinniss the bestfront-row seat that a journalist could have. Joe McGinniss was the coverupauthor who wrote a book covering up about the McDonald-Fort Bragg Drug SmugglingCase. The McDonald-Fort Bragg Drug Smuggling Case involved the Illuminati drugsmuggling operation within the U.S. military during the Vietnam War. On and onthe stink goes.

The manipulation of history by those in power has beenwell-covered over. An example of how mind-control and its role in manipulationof events has been covered up by the perpetrators is an article written in theJournal of the American Medical Association (JAMA) in the Sept. 11, 1967, Vol.201, No. 11 issue. The article, which was submitted to the magazine from threeCIA doctors (Mark, Sweet, and Ervin), claims that riots are caused by braindisease. While the article is correct in the subpoint that only a smallpercentage of underprivileged urban dwellers participate in many of the riots,the article’s thesis is obviously a slide to prevent people from catching onthat the small number of deviants who create riots might be under mind-controlor might have some other motivation beyond simply being brain-diseased. Anydeception, whether it is an exaggeration or an understatement of the NWO’scapabilities is considered a useful deception for the Illuminati’s double-agentsto spread. The german battleship the Bismarck was sunk due to a little lie sentto Germany by a double-agent which underestimated the range of British radar.The Germans, thinking they were out of British radar range, made some baddecisions that cost them the battleship.

DECEPTION DIMINISHES POWER

Knowledge is power, and lies diminish the knowledge of deceived dupes, andtherefore diminishes the power of the deceived. Deception obscures thealternatives that people have. It also clouds up various objectives people wouldwork toward. Some people give up certain objectives due to their mis-perceptionsthat the objective is undesirable or unattainable.

PROGRAMMING DECEPTIONS

In the programming, colors and directions are used. Be prepared to find outthat sometime programmers use their creative imaginations such as using the color “octarine,” or the direction “TURNWISE” or perhaps”WIDDERSHINS”. During the most fundament programming which is done viaLSD trips in sensory deprivation tank to lay in foundations of the Alpha, Beta,Delta, Ome and Theta programs, each programming memory will be given a code.Where one popular programming deception takes place that the programmer knowsahead of time h to sequence his memory codes so that instance, the fifth memoryis coded as trip, and strenuous methods are used to cover up the memories of thefirst four trips. The victim’s s mind will be told to forget the firstfour trips. The memory codes are deceptively designed to fool thedeprogrammer and the victim alike. Part of the reason the programmer does this,is that they know that IF a therapist should stumble onto these first memories,the backup programming to protect these memories is so severe that the therapistwill shatter the victim’s mind. Backup programs such as Atom bombs andvegetable programming are locked into place to protect the fundamental programs.

BE WISE AS SERPENTS

The Holy Spirit moved an apostle to write, “We are not ignorant ofSatan’s devices.” Christ warned his disciples to “be wise asserpents and harmless as doves.” The Israelites sent out spies beforeentering the promised land. Within the text of The Art of War by Sun-Tzu (a bookstudied today by men in intelligence), he discusses “hidden provocationagents” in Book 13.

Sun-Tzu was born in 534 B.C. and lived most likelyuntil after the year 453 B.C. In 500 B.C., some men were farmers, and some wereagent provocateurs. Today, both occupations still exist. The modern Americanfarmer is vastly superior to the ancient farmer of 500 B.C., so how does themodern agent provocateur compare? He is vastly superior also. It appears theWord of God is accurate, for it warns that God’s people will be destroyed forlack of knowledge.

The difficulty in obtaining honest information in today’sBig Brother world is aptly described by an intelligence asset over the Internet,”If you are lucky and work hard, you will find some of the truth. If youare lucky and work REALLY hard, you might find the WHOLE truth…as someonewants you to know it. If you are PHENOMENALLY lucky and really work your tailoff, you might even go on to find the REAL truth. But no outsiders…and infact, very few insiders ever … EVER … learn the WHOLE REAL truth.”

Thisbook & our two previous books on mind-control) are the result of extremelyhard work and numerous miracles of God, and what non-Christians would call lotsof luck”. The story behind the books is amazing. This book’s two authorshave had to “swim upstream” for years in search for the real truth. Onething is very clear to this author, during the last seven years of exposing the NWO almost every person who is believed to be a leader against the NWO has triedto impede the work this author has been doing. People need to be aware that theNew World Order created their own opposition long before some of us begansincerely trying to expose it. This author’s informed opinion is thatessentially all (about 98% of the people leading the opposition to the NWO aredouble agents), and no less than 50% of the therapists are double-agents. Inthis state, this author knows as a fact that 50% of the licensed therapistsworking with programmed DID patients are programmed DID (MPD) slaves themselves.Recently, one of the therapists in this area, who the False Memory”Spin”-drome & the Illuminati took down, was a therapist who hadalso been on a local T.V. talk show revealing that she was a multiple & aSRA victim.

DISINFORMATION TO MAKE THEIR DOUBLE-AGENTS LOOK GOOD

“A Force” was MI-6’s group that carried out deception. They wouldhave their double agents pass out CHICKEN FEED (which is what they callclassified information that can be thrown out to the public) to establish theirdouble-agents’ credentials (BONA FIDES) as agents against the British. Today,there are numerous anti-NWO people who are actually double agents. They aredistributing chicken feed to make people think they are legitimate. By the way,it is interesting to note for those who realize how important carousels are toprogramming that MI-6 (HO in Vauxhall Cross, Eng., with a training ctr. at Ft.Monckton, near Gosport, so. Eng.) is nicknamed (actually its cryptonym)”Carousel” by its daughter organization Mossad (officially aka CentralIntelligence Collection Agency). An example of a double-agent who is popularamong Christians is an Illuminati witch named Gretchen Passantino, who toursaround to Christian conferences belittling the idea of mind-control. Dr. LoredaFox reports in The Spiritual and Clinical Dimensions of MPD that 74% of womenabused by SRA come from “Christian homes.” The Christian churches are heavily infiltrated.

SLEEPER AGENTS

In the Vol. 2 book a number of references were made to sleeper agents. Theidea of placing someone somewhere in society and letting them lead a normal lifefor years without ever being used is designed to provide a legitimatesmokescreen about what they are all about. Mind-controlled slaves make excellentsleepers. The concept of making sleeper agents in not a secret. The CIA haspublicly admitted that they tried to discover long-range sleeper agents in theLos Niñios children of Republican Spain who were the descendants of communistSpaniards who returned to Spain in the 1950’s. They also have admitted tohaving tried to weed out long range sleepers in the Trebizond Greeks who livednear the USSR in Turkey and returned in the 1950’s to Greece. As the CIA andKGB mirror-imaged each other in their manufactured Hegelian Dialectic mock dual(which was very real for the “little” person) you can well imaginethat the CIA sent sleeper agents against the KGB.

NAMES of TYPES of DISINFORMATION AGENTS

The intelligence agencies have their own lingo for the types ofdisinformation agents they send against everyone else. So far, we have namedonly double & sleeper agents. Here are some of their disinformation agents:

AGENT OF INFLUENCE

These agents can be unwitting, under mind-control, orideologically motivated to use their positions of influence to sway the minds ofothers. Examples of Agents of Influence are anchor men on T.V., journalists,labor leaders, TV commentators, academics quoted by the media, & somepoliticians.

CONFUSION AGENT

An agent whose job is to produce confusion by disseminatingconfounding information.

CONTRACT AGENT

These are the rogue agents, such as the mob, who the CIA getto do particular jobs on contract. Their connections can be denied.

DEEP COVER AGENT

A sleeper agent (often a programmed multiple or person withmind-control programming) who has been a long term sleeper agent.

DISINFORMATION AGENT

This is a highly placed agent who passes disinformationto other governments.

NOTIONAL AGENT

A fictitious non-existent “agent” which is createdwith a real-looking identity to mislead.

PROVOCATION AGENT

An agent sent in to provoke & destabilize the targetgroup to do foolish things.

SPOON-FEEDER AGENT

Someone who dribbles out legitimate information, this isoften done to build up a person’s credentials (bona fides). Lots of the peoplewho are pretending to expose the NWO are spoon-feeder agents who provide alittle new information, tons of already known secrets, and sprinkle in a measureof disinformation for added fun. Generally spoon-feeders increase theirpercentage of disinformation once they gain respectability. There are very fewpeople really exposing anything of consequence about the NWO. This author hasendured the loss of several of the really legitimate whistle blowers who werefriends being assassinated since he began writing exposes.

What this means is that agents for groups that do mind-control may: have beensleepers for many years and look very legitimately innocent, they may give goodcorrect information to our side, they may say all the right things and try toget us motivated to do more than we would want, they may talk about otherfriends who are giving them information who do not even exist. It takesdiscernment to spot people who are not on our side. Unfortunately, suchdiscernment seems to be fundamentally lacking within the public at large. Forinstance, I have seen people choose obvious NWO agents over this author as asource of “information” (which is in reality disinformation). Mostpeople have bought so much disinformation during their lifetime, perhaps it’sunrealistic to expect them to purge out all the junk they’ve accepted. Just aspeople in the world need to toss out their worldly thinking, people in thechurch need to toss out all the indoctrination they’ve gotten from the numerous kinds ofharlot churches.

At the moment, the system is set up so that the perpetrators ofthe mind-control are in control of the credentialing process, so that they canprovide their stooges/and agents with the best credentials. As the reader cansee, the roots of power behind the mind-control go deep.

TRICKING SUSPECTS

One trick (or variations of it) that has been used with suspects is to arrestthem, place the suspect in a situation where the police are in two groups–onegroup looks like police, the other group looks like the group the suspect hascome from. After the suspect arrives, the group pretending to be arrested groupmembers, overpowers the police contingent and escapes to another setting whereanother police group pretending to be even more of the suspect’s group ask himwho he is and to explain his credentials. Letting his guard down, the originalsuspect explains what he is all about, thereby giving them the information theyneeded in the first place. Variations of this script can be run. Englishintelligence calls this basic script CACKLEBLADDER because chicken blood is usedon the police actors that are overpowered to make them look injured.

THE NAMES OF DECEPTION TRICKS

FOUR FACES refers to pretexts used by agents to get interviews. DANGLE is thecraft word for luring a victim into a provocation. A dangle operation would bean operation to provoke a group or individual into a particular action. This wasdone with Elohim City and many other groups that the NWO is trying to set up aspatsies.

STANDARD DECEPTION DEVICES

Agents use BLEEP-BOXES to tap telephones and in other instances to makefree-of-cost telephone calls. A CABMAN is a device to remotely activate atelephone with a radio beam. It can be used without entering the building wherethe telephone is located.

MASKS

The use of masks in the occult world is ancient. For centuries, the gypsieshave used them for their hypnotic powers. Special healing masks for their peopleare kept secret and never shown to the public. Masks have a shock value &fascination value. Gypsy and other occult groups have special rituals to createthe masks, including using hair clippings from the person who will wear themask. Gypsy healing masks are destroyed after the patient gets well. Illuminatiprogramming masks may or may not be destroyed after their use. TheIlluminati’s mask-making abilities (according to deprogrammed victims of theirmind-control) are very high quality. Sometimes the programmers simply wearhalloween cartoon character masks that anyone can obtain, to fulfill their rolein the programming script that they are involved in during the time.

COVERS

Some beginners who have just started into studying the World Order questionwhy the Illuminati would use legitimate religious covers. Why would theIlluminati want to create a slave who is an evangelist? Why? Because those newconverts will go to some establishment church where other programmed multiplesin leadership positions will demand obedience (and then support those demands byquoting scriptures that make them seem like they are God’s authority overthat new convert. Because the evangelist or missionary and the bishop or pastorare controlled puppets, the convert will never get the full truth, just enoughtruth to keep him working hard for their organization. Even though the convert”got God in my life”, the Illuminati never lose control over him.

TheChristians have as much vested interest in preventing the exposure of theIlluminati programmed multiples who are big name Christian ministers runningChristendom, as the Illuminati has. Imagine what would happen if the worldfound out that most of Christianity was run by the human-sacrificing,slave-making Illuminati? This is one of the sad effects of the infiltration.

Perhaps the subject of covers can be explained from another angle. The readerknows that the elite like monopolies. They play monopoly for real–for us it’s only a board game! To establish a monopoly, you find a good product thateveryone wants or needs, and then you eliminate all the competition by eitherdestroying them, or owning the competition yourself.

In the U.S., the Illuminatican’t have a one-religion monopoly. In Russia, they had communism with Marx,and Lenin as the Father God and Gon the son figure. Communism had a monopoly onworship. In the U.S., they have established a monopoly by controlling all thevarious religious groups. (This author wrote an 800 page heavily documented bookBe Wise As Serpents to show the details of how this is done.)

It’s not amatter of what they teach, it’s a matter of control, so that the elite have amonopoly. And when you, as a mover & shaker in the world, control all thesevarious religions via money, blackmail, & programmed multiples under yourleadership, etc. which religion would you pick to emphasize the most? You willpick the one that sells the best, i.e. the best product. And which brand ofChristianity will sell the best? The televised charismatic brand will sell thebest.

Covers that slaves use to explain what they do in life are almost always”legitimate”. A missionary, a military officer, a salesperson, etc.will usually actually do their cover job most of the time. Their cover is theiroccupation, their service as a mind-controlled slave is almost an unwittingavocation. Organizations are used as covers. The Illuminati use military,social, intelligence, education, banking and other organizations as covers. (Seemy Be Wise As Serpents book for many of these.) Moriah’s front organizations,such as the CIA, in turn use other organizations. Here is just a sampling of CIAfronts, to show the variety of fronts used:

• Asia Foundation was an academic organization created by the CIA.

• Castle Bank & Trust Co. has been a bank in the Caribbean that is a CIAfront.

• Forum World Features has been a front created for CIA propaganda purposesand based in London, UK.

• Geschicter Foundation for Medical Research (as well as the Josiah MacyFoundation) was used as an intelligence front to launder money used formind-control.

• Air-Sea Forwarders, Inc. was the legal corporation name of a CIA front inNorth Hollywood, CA. The company was involved in moving freight. In the last fewyears, this corporation sued E-Systems, the company which builds the CIA and theNWO’s electronic systems such as their communications satellites. In court,the company proved that it was a CIA front, in spite of CIA denials.

As thischapter provides information about some of the Illuminati/ intelligenceconnections to Hollywood, bear in mind that this CIA front was proven in courtto be a CIA front in Hollywood. A feat that rarely occurs

ONE OF THE GREATEST DECEPTIONS OF ALL TIME: DISNEY

INTRODUCTION

For years, I have heard many Americans say that something is terribly wrongin this country & that things are “going to pot”, and yetAmericans can’t put their finger on what exactly is wrong. When I first beganto receive reports from victims of Illuminati mind-control about Disney’sinvolvement in their mind-control, I kept an open ear, but I wanted sometangible proof. After investigating for myself, there is now no doubt in my mindthat Disney (the man, the movies & the entertainment parks)has been a major contributor to the demise of America, while maintaining avery well constructed front of wholesomeness.

In this chapter, you will learnwhy Disney is one of the best deceptions of the Illuminati. This author has reada good portion of what is available to the public concerning Disney. This exposéis undoubtedly the deepest on Disney that has ever been done. Perhaps part of mymotivation is that I’ve tired of Christians talking and acting like Disneystands for sainthood.

Christians, who should have known better, are some of theones who have swallowed “hook, line and sinker” the enormous deceptionthat entails Disney. They feed their children a steady diet of occultism andwitchcraft because they have been programmed to think of Disney as wholesomenessand everything that is good about America. Many writers over the years havetried to expose Disney, most have been stopped before they could get their bookspublished. The few authors who have managed have faced vicious attacks on theircharacter & integrity, and have faced enormous struggles against publicrelations campaigns paid for by the Disneys. The Disney’s power, and the powerbehind them, has frightened most people away from challenging them. But someoneneeds to speak on behalf of the victims. Whether anyone listens or not, thevictims will know that somebody cared enough to stand up & write the truth.Disney has not only left mind-control victims in its wake, but they haveharassed land-owners, stolen employee idea’s and left all kinds of hurtingvictims in their path. Disney has risen to become the unquestionable largestmedia-entertainment conglomerate in the world, & was ranked company no. 48in the top 500 companies by Forbes 500.

Observations about HOW THE ILLUMINATI LIKE TO HIDE BEHIND PERFECT FRONTS

There are numerous Illuminati homes, restaurants, wineries and otherinstitutions that are today carrying out the same type of strict standards upontheir employees that Walt Disney Studios maintained. While Hollywood wasimmersed in moral filth from the start, Walt Disney Studios had strictstandards. In the 1930’s, Disney had a dress code that required men in ties,and women in sober-colored skirts. If a man looked lecherously at a woman atWalt Disney Studios he risked being instantly fired. Walt was a shining exampleof the strictest legalism. Even during the ’50’s, if an employee were caughtsaying anything considered a cussword such as “hell” they wereinstantly fired no matter who they were. Walt would not allow his male employeesto have any facial hair, even though he himself sported a moustache.

He neverallowed employees to have alcohol at the studios, (which might not be anoteworthy standard except that Walt himself drank heavy amounts of alcohol inhis private office at work for decades). Initially, Walt was very reluctant tohave his young artists, who were being trained by Don Graham, draw live nudemodels, but reluctantly gave approval. Again the motive was not to serve God,but to make sure the Disney reputation remained untarnished. With the power ofthe establishment media behind Disney, Walt had nothing to worry about, newsabout the nude drawing classes and their detailed drawings never reached thelight of day. Behind such strict fronts of legalistic morals, cleanliness &soberness, you will often find lots of guilt and high level satanic ritual.

Forinstance, Hitler (who was by the way also a failed artist & who likedmechanical things more than people) obsessively washed his hands many times aday (out of guilt), and so did Walt Disney. Walt obsessively washed his handsseveral times an hour, every hour. Walt liked animals & his trains more thanpeople. This author has seen some alters who were forced to take anotherhuman’s life, and when they relived the memory, the alters then triedto physically wash the blood guilt off of their hands.

Another example isthat over the years this author has discovered that many of the exclusiverestaurants that are meticulous in every detail are tied in with themind-control and criminal activities of the elite. Dirty money is keeping theplaces looking sparkling clean. Walt Disney worked very hard at maintaining agreat image for himself and his company.

An example of this, is how he explodedin rage and wrote an angry memo when a Disney character was placed in a beer ad.(Memo mentioned in Thomas, Bob. Walt Disney An American Original. Hyperion,1994, p. 7.) He had a personal image builder, Joe Reddy, who worked full time tobuild Walt’s image. Joe Reddy was a cigar-smoking Irishman who loved thecatholic college Notre Dame’s football team. He also was a publicity agent forShirley Temple. But the Disney deception entails far more than Joe Reddy’sdecades of image making, and Walt’s own abilities to create good images ofhimself. Just as with Billy Graham (see Vol. 2 about Billy Graham), the entireIlluminati threw their weight behind promoting Walt Disney.

Ronald Reagan andWalt Disney were good friends and both cut from the same die in many ways. Bothmen were high ranking Freemasons, both came from socialist backgrounds(Ronald’s mother was Eleanor Roosevelt’s best friend, & Walt’s Dad wasa socialist leader), both were paid FBI informants, and both were involvedheavily in the abuse of mind-controlled slaves. Walt always generously supportedReagan’s political campaigns, and in turn Reagan did political favors for Waltas Gov. of California.

For instance, Disney’s Mineral King mountain resortneeded an access route through the Sequoia Nat. Park at a time when there waslots of congressional pressure to preserve the last stands of redwoods. Gov.Reagan got his friend Disney his road through the park. Reagan served as theemcee for the opening day of Disneyland on July 17, 1990. He returned withIlluminati TV host Art Linkletter for the 35th anniversary. Ronald Reagan &Art Linkletter both pumped Disney publicly.

Another slave abuser that spent timewith Disney was Bob Hope, who would spend time on the golf course with Walt. Onthe opening day’s telecast, cameras showed Sammy Davis, Jr. (a member of theChurch of Satan) and Frank Sinatra (a mind-control slave handler) driving thepint-sized Disney ears at the Autopia ride. When Disney celebrated its fiftyyr-anniversary with a two hour special on May 20, 1991, the program includedpeople like occultist Bill Campbell and was named “Best of Disney, 50 Yearsof Magic.” For the silver anniversary of Disney World in Oct. ’96, theClinton’s were invited to help open 15 months of celebrations. The theme ofthe anniversary celebrations was “Remember the Magic”. A Boy’s &Girl’s Club sang ‘When you wish upon a star’ (a popular programming song).Hillary Rodham Clinton (herself an Illuminati Grand Dame and a mind-controlprogrammer) shared with the audience that she and Bill “first broughtdaughter Chelsea to the Magic Kingdom when she was four.” Roy E. Disney,nephew of Walt, told the public that Disney World “is the story of men andwomen who took hold of a dream and never let go.” There is a double meaningto that. Many victims of trauma-based mind-control have taken hold of theillusions that were programmed into their mind secretly at Disney, and never letgo.

Among the visitors to Disneyland have been all the American Presidents fromEisenhower to Clinton, over a dozen kings & queens, as well as Emperor Akihito of Japan, Anwar Sadat, and Robert Kennedy (who rode the Matterhorn withastronaut John Glenn.) Both Denmark’s & Belgium’s kings who are in theIlluminati visited, as well as the dictators of Indonesia, the Shah of Iran andCeausescu of Romania. (As a side-note Roy E. Disney was forewarned by Arableader that the Shah was to be deposed.)

Organizations that have been actively working for a New World Order for many years gave big awards to Walt in hisearly years such as the B’nai B’rith (Man of the Year Award to Walt) and theChamber of Commerce. In 1936, Walt was given the Chamber of Commerce’s annual“Outstanding Young Man” award. The establishment’s Yale & HarvardUniversities gave him honorary degrees.

Walt Disney biographer Leonard Mosley,who researched Walt Disney for years (as well as writing books on the duPonts,the Dulles brothers, and Hirohito) wrote in his book on Walt Disney, “Thestudio publicity machines in the film colony had, as usual, gone out of theirway to try to persuade me, as a writer for a powerfully influential Britishnewspaper, that this was a city of lawless gods and goddesses, full ofclean-living, sanitized stars. “It was even more of a deodorized world atthe Walt Disney Studio where the publicity men insisted their boss wasfaultless–never drank too much, never used a swearword, never lost his temper,never quarrelled with his wife or family, never let down a friend. And woe betideanyone who tried to suggest otherwise. Members of the resident foreign and localpress risked their jobs if they dared to write stories inferring that WaltDisney could be domineering, implacable, and unforgiving (as was the case, forinstance, before, during, and after the 1941 studio strike). The Disney flackswere capable of exerting heavy pressure on editors and proprietors or, throughthe advertising pages, against anyone who inferred Walt Disney was not theepitome of well-scrubbed and benevolent perfection.” (Mosley, Leonard.Disney’s World. New York: Stein & Day, p. 10.)

Disney is perhaps theepitome of Illuminati abilities to create images. They have created great imagesfor things Disney, incl. Walt Disney, Disney movies, and Disney’s Amusementparks. In some cases these things have been overrated, in other instances thesinister side to them has been carefully hidden. In order to make movies thatcontain the typical smut of Hollywood, sex and violence, Disney did a slight ofhand and created subsidiaries which Disney runs, which has allowed them to keeptheir good image. They also never showed the public the hard core porn that wasmade for years in secrecy for the elite.

Behind Disney’s good front lies hardporn, snuff films, white slavery, Illuminati mind-control, and the seduction ofseveral generations into witchcraft. Disney’s involvement in these kind ofthings will be explained in this chapter. Nobody has sold America witchcraft aswell as the Disney brothers. Movie after movie has cleverly brought the occultinto the warp & woof of American thought, all under the disguise ofentertainment. For instance, it was Disney that brought us cannibalism and toldus that it was a “triumph of the human spirit” (a direct quote fromDisney’s Touchtone Producer Robert Watts concerning Disney’s movie”Alive” featuring survivors of an airplane crash who turned tocannibalism).

Under the disguise of entertainment & showing us how”triumphant” the human spirit was, they subtly promoted cannibalism.Mickey Mouse plays a leading role in “The Sorcerer’s Apprentice.”And yet when this author has suggested that Disney movies aren’t wholesome,many Christian parents come unglued and have gotten angry with this author. Thedeceptive image that Disney movies are wholesome is a triumph in Illuminatideception. Parents would be surprised what is slipped into cartoons. InDisney’s “The Little Mermaid” the castles are male sexual organs. Inone cartoon Mighty Mouse is shown without comment clearly snorting cocaine. WaltDisney Studios Chairman Joe Roth is in charge of Walt Disney as well assubsidiaries Touchtone, Miramax, and Hollywood Pictures, which were all createdto camouflage the Disney production of adult films. Disney operates in aclandestine manner regarding the promotion, distribution and

p_mermaid.gif DISNEY MAKES MALE PHALLUSES INTO CASTLES.

rating of the films produced by their subsidiaries. Roth oversaw Disney’ssubsidiary Hollywood Pictures’ Evita film. Evita has as its main start”Material Girl” Madonna. Madonna is in reality a mind-controlled slavewho has appeared in numerous underground porn/& ritual porn movies. (Thisauthor has an underground catalog from a porn business, that has recentlychanged its location of business. The catalog offered a film of Madonnaperforming an actual blood sacrifice.) She also was the main actress inDisney’s Dick Tracy film which is reported to be used for mind-control. Duringan Arsenio Hall show, Madonna, who as a guest acted dissociative, was picked upby the cameras during the show kissing her Baphomet ring.

Disney controls theproducts that are associated with the movies of their subsidiaries. In Evita’scase they are marketing hats and other items, as just one more of Disney’scountless artificially generated consumerism campaigns. In Ruth Stein’sinterview of Madonna, Madonna appeared bored with plugging Disney’s consumerproducts. When asked about the tango dresses and hats inspired by Evita thatpopped up in stores after the film, Madonna said, “Believe me, I havenothing to do with it. Disney is pushing the whole thing.” (San FranciscoChronicle, 12/29/96, Datebook section). In one interview Madonna states shewants her daughter to grow up knowing Catholicism, but she doesn’t believethat it would be good for her daughter if Madonna married the father of herchild from Lourdes, Carlos Leon.

In another interview, Madonna says,”Actually, I’m a very good role model, because I say, ‘Look, these aremy standards’…” She then goes on to plug homosexuality, same sexmarriage, and single families in the interview. Walt Disney stated that it plansto release an album by DANZIG, a heavy metal band whose songs contain “darkthemes”. The Disney press release announces on its by-line “MickeyMouse is going heavy metal.” Disney’s album ,,BLACK ACID DEVIL” wasdue to hit the music stores Oct. 30, 1996 during Halloween time. According toDisney this music has no satanic references, but does have “dark, Gothicand sexual” overtones. Glenn Danzig denies that he is a satanist.

B. AN OVERVIEW

Disneyland and Disneyworld are world famous and the pride of America. Theyare also extremely important programming centers for the Illuminati to createtotal mind-controlled slaves. Disneyland is also involved with providing a placefor rituals, porn and other satanic activities. In terms of deception, Disneymovies and Disney Amusement Parks rate as one of the best deceptions. Accordingto deprogrammed ex-Illuminati slaves, the Illuminati in the 1960’s needed toshift their programming away from the military bases, because too much publicity(heat) was shined on the military bases. Their goal was to have someplace thatpeople from all over the world could come to without raising any suspicions, anda place which would be the perfect cover for many of their criminal activities.

According to a witness, the Illuminati Programmers got a big laugh out of usingDisneyland as a major Illuminati base for criminal activity. Under the disguiseof entertaining the world, they carried out money laundering, child slaverylaundering, and mind-control. They nick-named Disneyland “the littlesyndicate of mind-control.” When a child of 3 or 4 was kidnapped, theycould torture the child and then put him on a ride such as a ferris wheel orcarousel that: a. created dissociation from the pain, while alsob. going alongwith some fairy tale programming script.

An abducted child while waiting to bepicked up from one Illuminati non-parent caretaker by another, could be kepthappy and distracted while waiting for the pickup. For years, Disneyland was anIlluminati center for many of their world-wide activities. Now Disney hascreated other sites around the world such as EuroDisneyland 20 miles east ofParis and Tokyo Disneyland.

Tokyo Disneyland in 1991 had 16 million peopleattend. With such huge crowds, it doesn’t take much imagination how theIlluminati have been able to do sneaky criminal activities right in front ofpeople, and the public never sees it, in the middle of all the activity.EuroDisney has been a money losing affair, but the Saudis who benefit from itsmind-control, gave Disney the money to keep it financially in business. WaltDisney Records is the largest children’s record label in the world. Disneythrough their movies, books, toys, records, etc. has made a tremendous impact onthe children of the world. Their movie Return from Witches Mountain was one ofthe most powerful witchcraft promotions ever made. Ducktails, which hasdeliberate Monarch mind-control triggers written into the script, is alsobroadcast in Poland and the former USSR. From the time of the Roman Empire (atleast, if not before) the oligarchical leadership, who have been in control ofboth the Mystery Religions and European aristocracy, have known about BREAD& CIRCUS.

Bread and Circus refers to the concept that IF the masses ofpeople are given entertainment and food staples, THEN they are easy to control.Walt Disney movies have played a key role in providing entertainment for themasses to insure Illuminati control. Walt Disney’s friend the Masonic prophet H.G. Wells in his book A Modem Utopia that there would be lots of shows in theNew World Order. The World Future Society in a book review in their publicationFuture Survey Annual, 1993, (ed. Michael Marien, Bethesda, MD: World FutureSoc., p. 91) describes Disney: “Control of commodities [such asentertainment] and access to commodities translates into control over people.‘The postmodern US is a massive rush of disconnected commodities, each seekinga moment of our attention.” The world of commodities is our soma, andentertainment is the current form of public discourse. Walt Disney World, spreadover 27,400 acres of central Florida swamp and scrub forest, ‘is the mostideologically important piece of land in the U.S.’ What goes on here is thequintessence of the American way. It is visited by over 30 million people ayear–not only the major middle-class pilgrimage center in the US, but by farthe most important entertainment center in the world. It is clearly Oz, utopiaas a marketing device.”

Two Disney brothers Walt (Walter Elias) and Roy O.Disney have been at the center of the creation of amusement parks and popularDisney films. In more recent times, two other men, Eisner and Katzenberg havebeen notable at Disney. Eisner & Katzenberg, as well as others will bediscussed later. One of Disney’s directors, Victor Salva, was convicted ofmolesting a boy and filming one of the sexual molestations. Recently DisneyDirector Salva produced the Disney movie “Powder”. (Victor Salva’ssexual molestation conviction was covered by newspaper articles such as RobertW. Welkos of the LA Times, in newspapers such as The Oregonian, Weds. Oct. 25,1995, A sect.)

The impact of the Disney brothers is monumental. Mickey Mouse teeshirts can be seen being worn by natives all over the world. Disney World andDisneyland are the quest for a large segment of humanity, who often esteem theseamusement parks as the highlight of their life. What is highly esteemed amongmen, is an abomination to God according to the Word of God. The Biblearbitrarily makes this claim, but sadly, research by this author over the yearsproves that a close examination of Disney & mankind’s esteem for”Disney” things does vindicate the Biblical expectation. In otherwords, as readers of this article will find out, behind the appearance ofwholesomeness of the Disney brothers and their creations lays abominations–some of the most grotesque aspects of generational occultism the world has everseen. Disney’s Magic Kingdom has become an American Institution that impactspeople all over the world from the cradle to the grave.

C. WHO WAS WALT DISNEY?

In the large book The Art of Walt Disney from Mickey Mouse to the MagicKingdom by Christopher Finch (N.Y.: Harry N. Abrams, 1975) on page 11 aninteresting and revealing statement is made: “By definition, public figuresare known to everyone; yet, even after talking with some of Disney’s closestassociates, it is impossible to escape the conclusion that nobody really knewhim. Always there was some aspect of his personality that was just out ofreach.” Those who got to know Walt too closely make complaints such as hewas “self-satisfied, intractable, and arrogant.” He could bring hisartists to tears or anger in a matter of seconds. Finch is not the only authorwho has tried to warn his readers that the public’s image of Walt Disney wasjust that–only a false image. Mosley also writes in his biography of WaltDisney, “Since Disney is regarded by millions of people, particularly inthe United States, as perhaps this century’s most brilliantly successfulcreator of screen animation, I think I should make one thing clear right away. Ishare the general admiration of a man whose cinematic achievements were alwaysso happily inspired and inspiriting. But–and this is where I differ fromuncritical idolaters–I have to know all the facts, no matter how unpalatable,as well as the romantic myths about any great man or woman I admire. Many of themyths that have been created by his publicists about Walt Disney areunpalatable, unbelievable, and unsatisfactory because so much of the real WaltDisney has been deliberately concealed.. .Walt Disney…had grave flaws in hischaracter.” (Mosley. Disney’s World, pg. 9)

Years ago, an IlluminatiGrand Master and programmer stated, “If the world only had the eyes to seethe fibers which lay under the surface of Walt Disney’s image, they’d tarand feather him, and drag him through the streets. If only they knew whatDisney’s primary goals.”

PERSONAL DETAILS

Walt had black hair with a black mustache, and bright quick eyes and wasabout 6’ tall. He used his own facial features to clue artists on how to drawMickey Mouse’s features. He liked specially rolled brown cigarettes which hesmoked up to 70 a day. He picked up the smoking habit in the army. He lovedexpensive Scotch Whiskey, red sunsets, and horses. He had a vacation home inPalm Springs, CA called the Smoke Tree Ranch. He often wore the Ranch’s letterSTR emblazoned on his necktie. He played lots of golf with Bob Hope and EdSullivan at the ST Ranch. His main home was an estate in Holmby Hills. TheHolmby Hills estate was located in a plush area where lots of rich show-businessfamilies lived. It was located between Bel-Air (an occult word for Satan) &Beverly Hills.

Walt spent many of his nights at the Disney Studios and later he had his ownprivate quarters at the center of Disneyland. He had reoccurring bouts ofinsomnia. (For his nerves and insomnia he’d take alcohol and tranquilizers.)He’d go weeks on end without stepping foot on the Holmby Hills estate andseeing his family. The main topic at the studio by the staff during differenttime periods was Walt’s bizarre behavior– he would not be available untillate afternoon, when he would emerge from the studio’s subterranean maze oftunnels, where supposedly he was “chatting with the maintenanceengineers” everyday. The value of his estate when he died was 35 milliondollars of which Lillian his wife inherited half.

In his later years, whenDisney took a vacation he went to Paris for 3 weeks, and 3 weeks at the Hotel duCap, in Antibes, and then cruised on Fritz Loew’s yacht with Ron and DianeDisney. In England, Walt spent time with the British Royal family and metprivately with masonic prophet H.G. Wells. In Rome, Walt visited privately withthe Pope and the dictator Mussolini. In 1966, Walt Disney died. Prior to hisdeath he had investigated cryogenesis–being frozen, and it is believed by somethat his body is frozen somewhere in California, while others claim he wascremated.

MICKEY MOUSE

According to one source, the inspiration for Walt to create Mickey Mouse camewhen he was unemployed and saw a mouse in the gutter. There are quite a fewstories in circulation as to where the idea came from. Ub Iwerks claimed hethought Mickey up at an animator’s meeting in Hollywood. Walt once said,”There is a lot of the Mouse in me.” (biographical article written byElting E. Morison, p. 131) In fact, Ub Iwerks told Walt that Mickey Mouse”looks exactly like you–same nose, same face, same whiskers, same gesturesand expressions. All he needs now is your voice.” Walt often did serve asMickey’s voice. A book put out by Walt Disney Co. in 1988 reveals that WaltDisney told Ward Kimball “Quite frankly, I prefer animals to people.”

Walt usually was the voice behind Mickey Mouse, (even though he wasn’t theartist.) His mother was chilly for years about the work Walt did. Around 1940,after much pleading, he finally got her to watch Mickey Mouse. His unsupportivemother (which he would within a few years learn was not actually his biologicalmother) told him she didn’t like Mickey Mouse’s voice, to which he told herit was his, and then she responded by saying he had a horrible voice. The”cold towel” she threw on Mickey Mouse helped convince Walt to quitmaking Mickey Mouse cartoons. Very few came out of Disney after that, and thevery next Mickey Mouse full-length feature cartoon, Fantasia, had Mickey mostlysilent. Walt’s idea for The Sorcerer’s Apprentice was based on some of hisown ideas. Walt had had the dream which was used for Mickey Mouse in TheSorcerer’s Apprentice of having “complete control of the earth and theelements.” Disneyland and Disneyworld were partial fulfilments of thatdream for control.

Walt’s final pet project just prior to his death was the meticulously restored version of the witchcraft film “Bedknobs andBroomsticks.” (Disney Magazine, Winter 96-97, pub. by Disney, p. 96mentions this.) As a programming device, Mickey Mouse works well because itplays on the subconscious genetically transmitted fear of mice that women have.Mickey’s image can help create a love-hate relationship, which is so valuedduring the traumatization & programming of mind-controlled slaves. Somesources state that Walt’s love for animals came from the time his family had afarm near Marceline, Missouri. Walt began his schooling at Marceline, butcontinued it after the age of eight at Benton School in Kansas City, MO.Walt’s Dad had a serious gambling problem and passed the spirit of gambling tohis son Walt. Walt never graduated from high school. He had a natural love and aflair for art work, although (contrary to his public image) he never becameproficient at it. He joined the army in W.W. I as an ambulance driver by lyingabout his age. During the war, he also chauffeured dignitaries.

He also did someother things that are very revealing. He enjoyed drinking & gambling whilein the service, and he ran a scam where he doctored German artifacts picked upon the battlefield to sell to people. War relics were tampered with to get themin shape to get the most money from them possible. Walt took the battlesouvenirs – and dressed them up, for instance, coating the insides of helmetswith grease, hair & blood and putting holes in them to make them intoexpensive souvenirs. This shows that Walt was willing to build illusions if itpaid. He could be deceptive if he saw an advantage to it.

From gleanings fromthings Walt said to people, it appears that as a child, he’d seen the darkerside of life (for instance, his father had a habit of beating him in thebasement) and had had some interest or exposure to magic as a child. Bob Thomaswrites, “Walt took a boyish delight in playing tricks on his parents. Hewas fascinated with magic tricks…” (Walt Disney, An American Original, p.35.)

After the military, Walt hoped to have a career as an artist. He applied tothe advertising agency of Pesman-Rubin. Roy, his brother, claimed that Pesman-Rubinhired Walt as a personal favor to Roy who handled the agency’s account at thebank Roy worked at. Walter lasted a month until the advertising agency let himgo due to Walt’s “singular lack of drawing ability.” According toCurrent Biography 1952, in 1923, Walt and Roy had together $290. They borrowed$500 from another Disney, one of their uncles named Robert Disney and began totry to make cartoons. Robert Disney had retired in the L.A. area in Edendale, CAafter a successful mining career. Robert had always been close to Walt’sfather Elias, and helped Walt and Roy out when they came to California. Waltloved to study Charlie Chaplin (a member of the Collins family). He scrawlednotes about his body language, facial features, and his gag methods. He alsoread everything he could about animation and cartooning. They worked out oftheir uncle’s garage in Hollywood, CA. They were finally able to make a goodcartoon Steamboat Willie in 1928, which became an instant hit. As with manythings in life, the cartoon was not only good, but Walt finally had the right“connections.” On Nov. 18, ’28, Steamboat Willie was shown in a small,independent theater without any advance promotion or advertising. Butamazingly(!) the New York Times, Variety, and Exhibitor’s Herald all ran ravereviews of the cartoon the next day. Was this an accident? did journalists fromall these prestigious periodicals just happen to go to this tiny independenttheater? no it was connections.

The reason the elite decided to promote WaltDisney after Steamboat Willie came out as Hollywood’s newest “boy wonder” was to deflectenormous bitterness that had been generated by the Stock Market collapse towardJewish financiers. Hollywood, even in its first two decades, was known as”Babylon” and “Sin City”. The movie industry was well-knownto be run by Jews, and many people blamed the Stock Market Crash on the moraldegradation that Hollywood had introduced to this nation. There were calls forgovernment regulatory groups to stop the smutty Hollywood films. Edgar Magnin,the spiritual leader of the major movie makers who were part of the Los AngelesB’nai B’rith reportedly encouraged those in the Mishpucka and others whowere B’nai B’rith movie makers that Hollywood needed to protect itself byputting Walt Disney in the limelight as a Christian “white knight withfamily values”. (By the way, Edgar Magnin was nicknamed “Rabbi to theStars”, because he was “the Hollywood rabbi”.) E. Magnin’sgrandfather’s department store chain was one of the first major accounts ofthe Bank of Italy, and Edgar Magnin had continued his family’s closeassociation with the Bank of Italy. The closeness also came from the Bank ofItaly’s close ties to the B’nai B’rith and ADL.

In 1930, the movieindustry made a production code which stated that the industry must make aspecial effort to make movies appropriate for children. Hollywood directlypraised Disney in that code as an exemplary model of what the movie industrywanted to do. With the power of the B’nai B’rith and ADL behind him, Waltbegan sailing to fame. Movie studios that had been turning out smut, with lotsof sex and violence all jumped on the bandwagon to show Walt’s clean wholesomecartoons. Walt was the facelift Hollywood needed after the Depression causedAmericans to think about America’s morals. Many of the regular movie makerswere so corrupt they were out of touch with moral issues, but Walt Disney knewblack from white. The Jewish movie makers “pushed the man [Walt] theyconsidered their best hope to the front of the pack” who was billed as afundamentalist Christian (albeit a masonic “Christian” who rarelystepped foot in a church). (quote from Walt Disney Hollywood’s Prince ofDarkness, p. 50.)

Strangely, the biographies indicate that Walt quit doing theactual drawing in 1927, and Walt devoted himself entirely to the development ofthe cartoon business, such as raising money. In other words, the image of WaltDisney being the artist who has created the Disney cartoon’s is inaccurate.The Disney brothers actually hired many other artists to do the art work. IfWalt quit drawing in 1927, and their first marketable cartoon was in 1928, thatclearly shows that Walt did not do the actual cartooning. He continued tooversee the work, walking in and rigidly inspecting what was being done to suithis own intuitive tastes. Actually the genius cartoon artist (animator) who madeWalt Disney a success was Ub Iwerks, about whom Walt on a number of occasionssaid was “the best animator in the world”. Without Ub Iwerks to takeWalt’s ideas and turn them into reality, Walt would never have become famous.Ub was an incredible genius who had a sense of line, a sense of humor, patience,organization and a great sense of what Walt wanted. Walt treated him cruelly attimes, interrupting him, playing tricks on him, and not being totally honestwith paying him, but he stayed with Walt over the years and made Walt thesuccess Walt became. (The books Disney’s World and Disney Animation: TheIllusion of Life have information on the unheralded genius Ub Iwerks.)

Anotherunknown great artist was Floyd Gottfredson. Floyd Gottfredson drew all theMickey Mouse cartoons from 1932 until October, 1975–which is a period of 45 1/2years. Floyd Gottfredson was a Mormon born in a railway station in 1905, andraised in a tiny Mormon town, Siggurd, 180 miles so. of Salt Lake City. In 1931,before Floyd totally took over the Mickey Mouse drawings, he would take suggestions from Walt onwhat to draw. For instance, Walt puzzled him by insisting he do a cartoon seriesof Mickey Mouse committing suicide. Floyd had said, “Walt, You’rekidding!” But Walt thought that a series on suicide would be funny. Overthe years the Walt Disney products never mentioned Floyd’s name. The bulk ofthe fans were led to believe Walt did the cartooning of Mickey Mouse himself.(See the book Walt Disney’s Mickey Mouse in Color. Ed. Bruce Hamilton, pub.The Walt Disney Co., 1988.)

Fred Moore was involved in the creation of Pluto andsome other cartoon characters. The idea for Pluto was Walt’s and it was NormFerguson’s genius at drawing that took the idea and created the actual images.Walt Disney was awarded 32 personal academy awards for the work that was done byhis studios. Walt Disney’s famous signature was actually designed by someoneelse, and was taught to Walt. (Schickel, Richard. The Disney Version: The Life,Time, Art and Commerce of Walt Disney. NY, 1968, p. 34.) Walt could only make acrude Disney signature, so he delegated the writing of the signature to severalartists including Bob Moore, Disney’s publicity artist. Later, after muchpractice he learned to make it well enough to do for publicity. Many people whowrote letters asking for his actual signature, and who actually did hissignature, thought that they had received forgeries by his staff, because thefamous Disney signature was so crude. The nicer looking ones were the forgeries.One cartoon animator who joined Disney in 1940 recalled that Walt told him thefirst day, “You’re new here, and I want you to understand just one thing.What we’re selling here is the name Walt Disney. If you can swallow that andalways remember it, you’ll be happy here. But if you’ve got any ideas aboutseeing the name Ken Anderson [his name] up there, its best for you to leaveright away.”

OCCULT PORN KING

Walt grew up fascinated with the occult and in an abusive home situation. Hewas fascinated with cartoons, nature and children. He had an intuitive sense forquality cartoons that would appeal to children. At some point, the syndicate gothim indebted to them. At that point he was their man. He owed them a debt thatthey held over him. In secret, Walt became a porn king. A victim remembers thathe was sadistic and enjoyed snuff porn films. His interest in children was farfrom altruistic.

The Hapsburgs of the 13th Illuminati bloodline had a sex salonin Vienna, where a porn photographer named Felix Salten worked. Felix Saltenwrote a book Bambi, which was then translated into English by the infamouscommunist Whittaker Chambers. The elite were just beginning to form the rootsfor today’s environmental movement. The book appealed to Disney, becauseDisney liked animals better than people. In the book, tame animals view humansas gods, while the wild and free animals see humans as demons who they simplycalled “Him.” The book begins with both free and tame animal viewinghumans as rightly having dominion over them. In the end, the animals view allhumans as simply being on the same level as animals, a vicious animal only fitto be killed. Disney instructed his animators to make the animals “to behuman. I want people to forget they are watching animals.” Bambi was toreceive a Christ-like manger birth, with the animals hailing him as a”prince.” Due to his sexual problems, Walt at one point permittedhimself to be subjected to the packing of his genitals in ice for hours at atime. (Elliot, Walt Disney Hollywood’s Dark Prince, p. 83.)

Children wereinstructed to call Walt “Uncle Walt.” An example of this were the Mouseketeers. For those who know how mind-control programmers have traditionallyliked to be called “uncle” by their child victims, the insistence byWalt to be known as “uncle” is distasteful. From what this author has learned from some sources aboutWalt’s non-public life as a hidden sadistic porn king, it raises questionsabout other parts of his life. For instance, Kenneth Anger in his book HollywoodBabylon II, p. 192, “Some animators stated that the boss [Walt Disney]seemed to have fallen in love with the boy. There may be some truth inthis…” The boy, who Walt fell in love with, was a small young attractiveboy actor named Bobby Driscoll who signed up in 1946 with Disney. He acted inSong of the South, Treasure Island and Bobby’s voice was used in Peter Pan.Bobby Driscoll was very intelligent and attractive. Did Disney help or abusehim? If Disney was such an upbuilding wholesome atmosphere, & this childactor had everything going for him, why did Bobby become a methamphetamineaddict at 17 & die within just a few years? Why didn’t his talent &early career lead to something positive in his life?

From those who knew Waltpersonally one learns that he had an obsession with the buttock part of anatomy.He enjoyed jokes about this part of the anatomy, which he told to his staffquite frequently. The staff edited out many of his crude posterior jokes fromcartoon scripts. Two examples that got by the editors are a Christmas specialwhere a little boy is unable to button the drop seat of his pajamas. The littleboy’s problem in maintaining his modesty is the running gag of the cartoon. Inthe end, Santa gives him a champer pot. The 2nd example is the paddling machineused on the wolf in The Three Little Pigs. Numerous Disney cartoons featurebuttocks of characters provocatively twitching.

AS A WITNESS BEFORE CONGRESS

After W.W. II, Walt Disney was called upon by Hollywood to testify in theirdefense at the Un-American hearings which were being carried out by congressmenwho were concerned about the heavy communist influence within Hollywood. Waltdownplayed any communist influence in Hollywood to Congress. Interestingly,Walt’s father was an outspoken Socialist Party leader in the United States whoadvocated a socialist New World Order. He regularly voted for socialistpresidential candidate Eugene Debs. One of the first drawings Walt did as a boywas to duplicate the socialist political cartoons he found in a socialistperiodical Appeal to Reason that his father subscribed to. When Walt asked inthe 1930’s how his father felt about socialism’s successes, his father Eliassaid, “Today, everything I fought for in those early days has been absorbedinto the platforms of both the major parties. Now I feel pretty good aboutthat.” (Thomas, Bob. Walt Disney, An American Original, pg. 147-148)

Walt’s movie Alice’s Egg Plant (1925) was pure communist doctrine where thered hen (communist) leads the working chickens on a strike against Julius thefarm manager (representing capitalists.) The strike at Disney and unionizationof Disney in 1940, soured Walt toward communism. The workers at Disney publiclymade personal verbal attacks on Walt & he never forgave the humiliation. Inspite of his public distaste for communism, his Magic Empire (his castle wherehe was king) was run like a socialist dictatorship, similar to what the NWOplans. Employees at Disney did not have titles; it was faceless egalitarianismwith an all powerful dictator Disney at the top. It was racially elitist too.The only full-time African-American during Walt’s lifetime at Disney was ablack shoe shine man.

Was Walt a socialist of the National Socialist (Nazi)variety? Arthur Babbitt claims, “On more than one occasion I observed WaltDisney and Gunther Lessing there [at Nazi meetings], along with a lot of otherprominent Nazi-afflicted Hollywood personalities. Disney was going to meetingsall the time.” Lessing was mobster Willie Bioff’s crony. Bioff had spenthis earlier days running a whorehouse, before coming to Hollywood for the mob.

In the final panel of the Mickey Mouse comic strip of 6/19/40 a swastika appeared. Some people have wonderedwhat this & other “secret signals” in Disney’s work meant.Disney was not Illuminati. The powerful elite are very skilled at controllingpeople that rub shoulders with them, those who are beginning to becomeindependently wealthy. For instance, they destroyed Robert Morris, the greatfinancier of the American Revolution. They simply used Hegelian Dialectics onWalt Disney. Their Unions and the Mob made Disney’s studio one of their primetargets. In order for Walt to protect himself from the unions, which heperceived as communist, Walt got help from the FBI and the mob. Walt wasvulnerable to the unions, because he treated his workers terrible, with longhours, low pay, in addition to repeated abuses to their dignity. Walt’s largenumber of employees essentially never received any credit or recognition fortheir years of creativity and hard work, which was all essentially stolen andcredited to Walt by the establishment to build his image. (I write”essentially”, because someone might find some obscure exception, butacross the board, Walt got all the credit for what his creative workersproduced.)

Perhaps Walt needed the ego boost from all the purloined publicpraise which he stole from his staff to be seen as a great animator, because hehad wanted to be an artist/cartoonist and failed. The praise helped sooth thewounds. One worker recalls that Walt “had no knowledge of draftsmanship, noknowledge of music, no knowledge of literature, no knowledge of anything really,except he was a great editor.” This may not be much of an exaggeration,because Walt was a high school drop-out, who grew up in poverty on a Missourifarm. Walt’s first official attempt to direct a film (and last) was the filmThe Golden Touch in 1935. The film was an embarrassment. Walt had to pull itfrom distribution. If Walt lacked abilities to animate, and direct, what wasWalt’s talent? Walt was the driving force, the spirit so-to-speak behindDisney. He was the dictator who was feared enough to demand more from hisworkers than they knew they could give–and he could get it. He was the drivingforce that took a mob of artists, and gag creators, etc. and shaped them into apowerful force to make cartoons and later movies. He was the hard-driving geniuswho knew what he wanted and got others to create it for him. He was the drivingforce that kept an army of costumed sanitation men meticulously cleaningDisneyland. In normal year, Walt would have 800,000 plants replaced atDisneyland, & Walt refused to put up signs asking the “guests”(visitors) not to trample them. How powerful was Walt? Here is a man who duringhis lifetime and even up into the 1990’s had a rule in the studio &Disneyland that no male employees could have any facial hair, yet he himselfwore a mustache for most of his life.

A possible CHRONOLOGY OF EVENTS surrounding WALT DISNEY’S ILLEGITIMATE BIRTH

It is beyond doubt that Walt Disney was an illegitimate child, but that factresulted in a long list of mysterious happenings. It also gave power hungry men,something to blackmail Walt Disney with. Because this chapter 5 on Deception isfocusing on Disney, and the big boys used blackmail to keep Disney in line, thisinformation is pertinent. The following chronology of events is what thisauthor’s believes most likely happened. Without any genetic tests, it isdifficult to determine beyond a shadow of a doubt who Walt’s biologicalparents were, and what the actual history of Walt Disney was. Several peoplehave spent many years investigating the real facts surrounding his birth. Manyinteresting and tantalizing clues have been found. This author believes that thefollowing chronology issuggested by the evidence. (This author’s chronology is offered withouthundreds of pages of evidence, because the mysteries around Walt Disney’sbirth are here to stay, no matter what excuses people come up with, and thisauthor doesn’t want to stray from the intended purpose of the chapter. This isto show that Walt Disney had a secret bastard birth which gave J. Edgar Hoover–and his superiors– blackmail leverage over Walt Disney. Walt may also havehad gambling debts and an abnormal sexual appetite which also helped entrap him.For those who want more evidence and facts, the following are recommended: Almendros, Mojacar, Corner of Enchantment, p. 83; Interview magazine, no. 242,””Walt Disney Was from Almeria””, and last but not leastEliot, Marc. Walt Disney, Hollywood’s Dark Prince, chapter 11.)

1890–An attractive spanish woman Isabelle Zamora Ascenslo of Mojacar leavesSpain and travels to California to a Franciscan monastery. In the same year, butlater on In 1890-Walt’s future father Elias, who fancies himself a ladies man,leaves his family to seek his fortune in the gold fields. In California, hemeets another newcomer to the state, Isabella Ascensio, and the two newcomers inCalifornia have much in common, have a sexual affair and fall in love.

1891–Elias fails to make a fortune and returns to Chicago, but he doesn’tforget Isabelle.

1893–Isabelle and Elias have a son, and Elias convinces his wife to acceptthe baby as theirs rather than have the family’s reputation, their marriage, andtheir family ruined. The son doesn’t look like the first two boys at all.

1901–Isabelle and Elias have another bastard son, who Elias brings home andnames Walter after the minister of the church he attends. The two bastard sonsdo not look like the older sons of Elias, and they never have much to do withthem, but cling to each other as brothers.

1903–The minister of the church Elias attends finds out about the bastardchildren and Elias quickly moves out of state so that the scandal will remainsecret. Elias has also run up gambling debts.

1905–After moving to Marceline, Missouri, Isabelle is hired as the Disney’smaid, so that she has an excuse to move in with them without creatingsuspicions. She probably does much of the raising and care of the two boys.

1918–J. Edgar Hoover is busy involved with the prosecution of draft dodgersin WW I, and it crosses his desk about the case of Walt Disney committing thecrime of forging his parents signature to join the army. Cases like Walt’s werewatched because people who could be blackmailed could be resources in the futurefor Hoover. That year, Walt discovered that he had no birth certificate. Waftobserves his parents strange reactions concerning his birth certificate &other questions, & begins to deeply distrust his father.

1938, Nov. –Walt’s mother dies by gas, and the Disney’s maid pulls Elias tosafety from the fumes, but Walt’s mother dies.

1939-40–Hoover offers Walt Disney to help Walt locate his real parents ifWalt will work for the FBI. Either Hoover already knows that he is a bastardchild, or he soon learns the truth from an investigation. This gives Hooverblackmail power over Walt Disney, and assures Hoover that Waft will be loyal.Hoover informs Walt Disney of the truth, and then moves to generously protectDisney & his father’s reputation. Two FBI men plant baptismal information ofa child born to Isabelle in 1890 named Jose Guirao in Mojacar, Spain. This dateis 10 years off of Walt’s birthdate, and is intended to throw people off track.They can’t plant a fake birth certificate for Waft in the records for 1901,because everyone knows from WW I that none exists. Therefore, they plant a fakebirth certificate for Walt in the Illinois State records in the year 1890. Theyhope people will think that somehow a filing error occurred. This way ifanything leaks, and worst came to worst, Waft could at least pretend he wasadopted and is not an illegitimate bastard. They pay off townspeople in Mojacarto tell a particular story. Townspeople probably receive ongoing payments.

1941–Walt confronts his father with the truth, and his father commitssuicide, and his real mother comes to live with him as his maid.

1954–In order to reinforce the myth that Walt was born in Spain, a group ofFranciscan monks goes to Mojacar and visibly inquires about the birth records ofJose Guirao and/or Walt Disney. They spend time with the mayor and make surethat everyone connects Waft Disney with Jose, who is a fictitious (nominal)character that the FBI has created records of.

1967–A year after Walt’s death, a large group of Americans (a large groupwas needed because they are not skilled like the 2 FBI men in 1940) pretend tobe on “official” business for the American government. They go toMajacar Spain to destroy all the records of Jose Guirao to insure that therewill be no spanish claimants to Walt Disney’s fortune.

Later to insure that the fictitious story is solidly in place to mislead thefew who might get by the cloud of secrecy over Walt Disney, the Spanishgovernment does a favor to certain powerful people and pays an investigator toinvestigate the spanish origins of Walt Disney. People of the village willinglytell people without any fear or without any fanfare that Walt Disney was born attheir village. Unless they have recently done so, the village has never doneanything–no monuments, no markers, or anything about the birth site of Disney.They probably didn’t do this for years, because some of the village probablyknew it was a lie. With the older people gone, the lie has probably become wellentrenched as truth and there is most likely some type of memorial to WaltDisney.

WALT DISNEY’S CHARACTER

Because the Disney deception is such a major Illuminati deception worldwide,and because Walt Disney was the major catalyst behind all the Disney themeparks, movies, trinkets etc. it is of importance to examine his character. Instudying historical figures, this author has tried to get to the rock bottomtruth. One may ask, how can this be done? -especially since there have beendecades of myths spread by the establishment and their media? The followingprocedure which has worked with other historical figures was also done by thisauthor with Walt Disney.

The first part of this author’s own procedure is tostudy everything that one can find on the man, paying special attention to whatbias and vantage point another author comes from. Special attention is also paidto biographers who try to give the whole truth as they have found it, ratherthan approved biographies that repeat myths, platitudes, and flattery. Theinvestigator has to be careful because there are authors who deceptively say intheir introductions that they are “detached investigators” who are”going to be painfully honest in their reporting” when they actuallyare skillful coverup artists for the person they write about.

When your author,Fritz Springmeier, finished investigating written material about Walt Disney,then I mentally placed what I knew on the shelf temporarily, and did ahandwriting analysis based on the scientific principles of Graphoanalysis aswell as the broader field of Graphology. This author is a CertifiedGraphoanalyst who has done handwriting analysis professionally. UsingGraphoanalysis/graphology is an excellent way to get an unbiased very deep lookat a historical figure. It is a way to by-pass all the propaganda and myths.However, a close historical look and the handwriting analysis (of varioushistorical figures) have always matched each other, as they did in this casetoo.

Here is what was found. The following paragraphs are how Walt was in the1920’s. The personality profile you will read did not endure. Under thepressure of micromanaging Disney Productions as well as living with financialstresses, by the 1940’s, Walt could be found in rages giving rough treatmentto his wife, and rough spankings to his two children. He went to psychiatric counselling to cope with the stress. And unfortunately with the progression oftime, by the 1960’s Walt had become a sadistic egotistical alcoholic. Onebiographer described him as “…a bully and a know-it-all” (Disney’sWorld, p. 220) Even then Walt had men working for him, such as Bill Walsh (whohad been a orphan as a child) who worshipped Walt.

But here is how he was in the1920’s: Walt was a self-motivated individual with lots of energy which wasconstantly seeking some outlet. (People have written much about this trait ofhis.) He was more the giver than the taker in relationships. (In the first fewyears, when he was responsible for making business contracts he often gave awayhis work without setting prices for profits. He even wrote letters to his bossto the effect that his first priority was good cartoons not profits, and thathe’d work without profits, but he did want some appreciation for his work.That was his sensitive nature showing.) Walt wouldn’t wait for others to comeup with an idea or someone else to make a move–he was there first.

He couldcommunicate his ideas with clarity and ease and move easily from idea to another. (He would storm intoDisney Productions and spew one idea after another into his workers’ ears.) Heenjoyed competition. He had a quick mind and keen perception. He frequentlyacted on intuition and impulse, taking chances and endangering his own security.(He frequently gambled all his life savings and everything he could scrapetogether on a project.) Long projects bored him. (Fortunately the real tediouswork of cartooning was done by a large staff of artists.) House chores andrepetitive chores bored him and he avoided them. (He was absolutely a total slobaround the house as a bachelor.) He was impatient with vague philosophies, heliked concrete realities.

He was difficult to get along with because he had botha playful side (even to the point of cruel practical jokes) to his personalityand an aggressive intolerant impatient side that wanted to achieve. Naturally,people around him were disconcerted because on a subconscious level they neverknew which side of him they would deal with. (The reference series CurrentBiography “Disney” article p. 248 gives the following Walt Disneyquote, “We don’t even let the word ‘art’ be used around the studio.If anyone begins to get arty, we knock them down.”)

He was geared foraction. He was always inventing ways to get what he needed. He could beexplosive when provoked. (The old time associates of Walt remember his explosivetemper.) He was a person of dynamic energy, sensuality and keen thinking, and adisciple of the pleasure principle. Because his father was so abusive andmisused his position of authority, Walt came to be deeply ingrained withdefiance toward authority. (The themes of his films repeatedly sympathize withthose who rebel against authority, and the police and other authority figuresare consistently shown as absurd. One way he expressed irresponsibility was withlively dance scenes, which has been a hall-mark of teenage rebellion during the20th century. “Comic anarchy reaches its fullest expression in AliceRattled by Rats, which shows what the rats do when the cats goes away!) He feltthat rules were for others to follow. (That is one reason he would step outsideof the law and commit illegal acts. This is one trait that may be responsiblefor some of the criminal activities Walt ended up participating in.)

Walt alsodidn’t like to be closely supervised. (He wanted to manage his Disney MagicKingdom as if it were his own kingdom. He wanted to be an authority figure, andindeed became the dictator of his Magic Kingdom. When his workers differed withhis own views he felt that they were infringing upon his own inalienable rightsas an individual.) He was somewhat of a melancholic temperament, that type ofperfectionist who still enjoys life. He felt a need to protect himself againstintimacy with others. He was most home in a setting which he made for himself.Walt had the traits of an executive. He was slow to reveal his innermostfeelings, and definitely set his own goals. Walt was one of those persons thatwhen the going got tough, he hung in there. Likewise he would cling to hisideas, plans, and possessions. (His stubborn refusal to allow his brother Roy tostop the creation of Disneyland led to events that split the brothers. Hisdetermination to succeed was taken advantage of by the crime syndicates toblackmail him with some debt. In order to get his dreams, he was willing to givethem what they wanted.)

A clue to Walt’s macabre sense of humor, at timesalmost a graveyard sense of humor, and his high tolerance of seeing pain inothers, is that Walt was seriously thinking of volunteering again as a medicafter the W.W. I fighting in France was over, when volunteers were needed forthe Balkan fighting. Walt loved animals more than people. The only human beingthat he had rapport with while growing up on the farm was his Uncle Ed (who hecalled Uncle Elf), who looked like a cross between a leprechaun and a prune.Uncle Elf could make animals sounds and bird whistles to Walts delight. Walt loved the charm of the farm andnature and he loved royalty, pageantry and a strict social hierarchy such asFreemasonry provides. He often wove a combination of the barnyard in with royalparades and other trappings of royalty.

For instance, in Alice the Piper, theKing Hamlin is a farmer who sleeps in a farmhouse. In Puss in Boots the localking lives in an authentic palace incongruously placed in a village. His earlyfilm Alice’s Day at Sea includes both the features of a royal court and anAmerican circus. In typical Disney disdain for authority, he pokes fun atcriminal fraternal groups with their rituals and passwords in Alice & theDog Catcher, Alice Foils the Pirates, and Alice’s Mysterious Mystery. Andwhile he was a secret FBI agent, he went against Hoover’s wishes and poked funat the FBI’s authority. Walt was loyal to what he believed and could be loyalto those individuals who he deemed worthy of his loyalty, but he didn’t wantanyone to have authority over him. (Walt was a 320 Freemason & an occultist,he was loyal to that philosophy and loyal in his early years to his olderbrother Roy O. Disney, who was a father figure to him.) If anyone at the studiosagreed with him when he was angry at his brother Roy, he or she risked losingtheir job. Both brothers were protective of each other, and felt they were theonly ones who could criticize the other one.

D. WHO WAS ROY O. DISNEY?

Roy O. Disney was born in 1893, and his brother Walt in 1901. They had threeother brothers, but Roy and Walt (1901-1966) were only close to each other andnot to their other brothers, who didn’t resemble them. Walt was named WalterElias, his middle name derived from his father’s first name. The Disney familyhad immigrated from Ireland to Canada and then to the U.S. The father of thebrothers as stated was Elias, and their mother of scottish descent, who may nothave been the biological mother, had the maiden name Flora Call. Roy died in1971, shortly after the opening ceremonies for Walt Disney World. He kept hispromises to his brother to build Walt Disney World. He reneged on his promisesconcerning the city of Epcot (which was derailed into becoming EPCOT).

Roy O.during the 1930’s lived in North Hollywood. Roy’s family later located inNapa Valley, CA, and was associated with the Illuminati kingpins in the area.Napa Valley has been nicknamed the Valley of Kings. This “Valley ofKings” plays a major role in the dirty activities revealed in this chapter.Roy 0. Disney played a bigger role at Disney Studios than people realize. Forexample, it was Roy O. who made the decision to cut 45 min. out of Fantasia, sothat Walt’s pet project could be distributed to movie theaters. Roy O.,considered by some insiders as the more evil of the two brothers, kept thefinancial books for the Disney’s down through the years. It is known thatDisney kept two books during the 1950’s, so it is hard to believe anythingexcept that Roy 0. was fully aware of how Disney brought in their money. The bigboys always kept the financial screws to Walt and Roy. The big boys oftenfigured out scams to take their money. When the Disney brothers had anarrangement with Columbia Studio (run by Harry Cohn) they were advanced $7,500for each cartoon which cost them an unprofitable $13,500 to make. Further, Cohnliked to cheat them by not sending them their money, and taking a ridiculousamount of time to pay them what he owed them. The cash flow problems of theDisney brothers also came from Walt’s desire to keep improving and upgradingthe technology they used. When Walt went to color over Roy’s objections,Disney’s profit margin was damaged and the studio was left with shortages ofcash. In 1937, Walt’s repeated gambles with cartoon production ideas causedRoy O. to say, “We’ve bought the whole damned sweepstakes.”

From1940 through 1946, Disney lost money every year. In ’46, he lost $23,000. Finally in 1947,things turned around and the Disney studio made a profit of $265,000. Cartoonsand movies were not really big money-makers for the Disney brothers, until it wasrealized that old films could be replayed on television. Overall, from the20’s through the 50’s, the Disneys may have broke even with animation. Thisis why Disney Studios at Christmas, 1931 was unable to pay its payroll.

Pinocchio cost $2.6 million to make in the late ’30’s, an amount hard toretrieve at that time from the box office, and Fantasia’s original release inthe ’40’s was a dismal financial failure. When Sleeping Beauty was releasedin 1960, it was a loser, movie goers were apathetic towards it. The real moneymade by the Disney brothers in the 1930-1950’s came from the merchandising ofDisney products, the production of underground hard porn, and the kickbacks fromvarious groups which used Disney for mind-control programming, and moneylaundering.

When Walt died, his shares in Disney were worth $18 million. Hisfamily all in all held 34% of the stock in Walt Disney Productions. Roy O.Disney’s daughter Dorothy Disney Puder & husband Episcopalian Rev. GlenPuder purchased property at 1677 Sage Canyon Rd., Napa Valley east ofRutherford. (This is close to the Rothschild’s Opus One Temple mentioned inVoL 1.) O.J. Simpson’s lawyer Johnnie Cochran Jr. was in the Rothschild’shard-to-enter Opus 1 when the jury arrived at a decision in O.J. Simpson’scase.)

It is very typical for Mafia families in south Boston to have one familymember in the clergy & one full time in organized crime. (See author’s BeWise As Serpents for an expose on the Episcopalian Church, which is simply abranch of Freemasonry.) All kinds of interesting Mafia figures, Illuminati, andBohemian Grovers live up the Sage Canyon Rd. This is an area that has a largewell-kept cemetery for pets. Frank Well’s sister and Rich Frank, who will allbe discussed later in this chapter, also live on Sage Canyon Rd.

E. WHO WAS ROY B. DISNEY?

Roy Edward Disney (nephew of Walt) is the son of Roy Oliver Disney (brotherof Walt). Sometimes he has been called Junior. The 9/5/94 Newsweek story onDisney’s Magic Kingdom called him “Keeper of the Flame.” Roy is anexecutive with Walt Disney Co. at 500 5. Buena Vista St., Burbank, CA 91521. Hehas worked as an asst. producer at Walt Disney Co. from 1954 to 1977. He hasalso been the vice-pres. of Walt Disney Co. He is president of Roy E. DisneyProdns. in Burbank. He is chairman of the board for Shamrock Broadcasting Co. Asif that weren’t enough, he is on the board of directors for St. Joseph Med.Ctr., fellow U. Ky. Recipient of the Academy award nomination for Mysteries ofthe Deep. He is a director of the Guild American West, the Writers Guild, whichis important. He belongs to the 100 Club, the Confrerie des Chevaliers duTastevin, and St. Francis Yacht Club. He likes speed boat racing.

Roy E. Disneywas the cocky son of Roy O. He married a gal named Patricia. He was merelytolerated by his uncle Walt, especially after Roy E. made some snide remarksabout Walt’s plans for Disneyland, which he and his father opposed until WaltDisney personally got the project going. Walt’s son-in-law Ronald Miller isone of the Disney clan who can’t stand Roy E. The two never liked each other,and in the power struggle between them after Walt’s death, Roy E. won andended up with Disney. Although people called Roy E. “Walt’s idiotnephew”, he eventually (with the help of his father & outsiders) wonthe various power struggles at Disney after Walt died, and is now a powerfulfigure. Roy E. Disney and Stanley P. Gold work together in various ways, and areboth on the present Disney Bd. of Dir. They are friends and worked to prevent hostile takeovers of Disney in 1984. Gold is incharge of Shamrock Holdings, Inc.

The battle between the two Disney factions

In 1953, the two brothers and their respective sides of the family split whenWalt created RETHAW corporation. The two sides have fought ever since. When WaltDisney created RETLAW (his name Walter spelled backwards), this alienated hisbrother Roy O. & Roy’s side of the family. Without going into all thedetails, what RETLAW did was cut Roy O.’s side out of the money that was to bemade. But Roy’s side didn’t stand by and idly let their share of the pie belost, they fought back and held their own.

Their big break came when Michael Milken and his band of junk bond artists carried out a “greenmail” onthe Disney Corp. Only a few insiders know how greenmail works. It is a legalform of blackmail. Milken would work with his friends Saul Steinberg, Sir JamesGoldsmith, and Carl Icahn. Milken would provide them the financial clout, tomake them look financially capable of financially purchasing a corporation thatthey had selected as a target. According to insiders, Milken got 40% of theupside of any “greenmail” that went right. The targeted corporationwould learn that someone like Saul Steinberg was going to buy them out. In orderto prevent the buyout, and to keep their jobs, the officers of the targetedcorporation would get frantic, and either do suicidal refinancings, or buy thestock of the potential acquirer for much greater prices than the Milken grouppaid for them. The “greenmail” artists would then take their loot andgo on their way. The stockholders of the targeted company are the real losers of”greenmail”, because the management of the corporation in order tofinance their protection spends the stockholder’s money, takes on new debts,and deprives the stockholders of some profit-making potential of their shares.

Michael Milken’s group made feints to take over a large number ofcorporations, including Walt Disney, Phillips Petroleum and Avco. Saul Steinbergmade what looked like the beginnings of a sincere hostile takeover of WaltDisney through Reliance. At one point Reliance became Disney’s largeststockholder. Steinberg filed an amended 13D saying he intended to acquire 25% ofthe corporation. The CEO of Walt Disney, was Walt Disney’s son-in-law RonMiller. Saul Steinberg is a dear business partner with London’s Jacob deRothschild. Originally, Ron Miller (Stanford Univ. grad.) and Ray Watson (aBohemian Grove member from Stanford Unive.) of Walt Disney’s management broughtin the Bass brothers to help them deal with Saul Steinberg’s takeover and tobuy and develop land (esp. in Florida). Ray Watson was Ron Miller’s key righthand man to run things. The Bass brothers are mafia. Disney acquired the BassBrother’s Arvida, and brought the Bass brothers into Disney’s management.The Basses sold their stake in Texaco back to the oil co. & then used thismoney to bolster Disney. Sid Bass & Chuck Cobb (chief exec. Arvida) workedout a deal with Disney. Arvida (sold to Disney for $200 mil.) would profit fromdeveloping Disney land in FL & Disney would profit from the new financialstrength that getting Arvida would provide. Arvida owned oil fields, themeparks, and had helped create planned communities.

For Ron Miller, on the oneside was the Illuminati and the other side of things was the mafia. He didn’ttrust either, but Steinberg’s takeover could eliminate Disney’s managementand both he (and Roy E. Disney) wanted to save Disney from a takeover bySteinberg. At first, Roy E. wrote a letter to Ron Miller & the other boardmembers stating his concerns about the acquisition of Arvida For Disneymanagement, at least the Bass brothers would let Walt Disney continue to maketheir family movies. After the Bass brothers joined the Disney management (andbecame one of Disney’s major stockholders), they soon joined sides with Roy E.in a management fallout over whether Disney should buy Gibson Greeting CardCompany. With enough votes on the board, they sent Ron Miller packing. With RonMiller, and those management men aligned with Walt’s side of the family gone,then CEO Michael Eisner, Frank Wells, Rich Frank, and Jeffrey Katzenberg andsome others made the modern Walt Disney Corporation.

Disney’s Touchtone studiowhich was mentioned above in connection to the movie Alive was created in 1984by Walt Disney’s son-in-law Ronald L. Miller. Ron Miller’s management stylewas lackluster. The new management has really gone gang busters. AlthoughWalt’s side of the family is out of the management end of Disney, they stillreceive financial rewards from various Disney enterprises. The Bass brothersacquired more land for Disney in Florida. But under their tutelage, Disney nowhas a management team that is skilled in land grabbing techniques. The Bassfortune began with Perry Bass, who created a company called Bass Enterprises. In1969, Perry retired and turned things over to his eldest son, Sid RichardsonBass. Sid has three younger brothers Ed, Robert and Lee. The Basses owned 27% inPrime Computer, as well as sizable real estate and oil holdings. The Bassbrothers founded a local prep school in Ft. Worth, TX. Their HQs in Ft. Worth isfull of modern art.

The Bass brothers were very clever in their deal withDisney. In exchange for their $14 investment in Arvida, they had gotten (over aperiod of time) $950 million dollars worth of Disney stock. In 1985, theyliquidated Bass Brothers Enterprises and divided the assets between the fourbrothers. Sid Bass was able to shift his interests from finances to culture andhigh society.

One of the Bass brothers is involved with wineries in Napa Valley.The Bass Brother’s financial strategist was Alfred Checchi, now of BeverlyHills, who has been a supporter of Mishpucka member Sen. Dianne Feinstein (D-Calif.).Roy is involved in criminal activities, and several people investigating himhave been bluntly warned that if they continue, they will see their childrenmurdered. Napa Valley’s Illuminati activity also connects in with CIAactivities as well. The Napa Valley Illuminati families all have CIAconnections. For instance, British millionaire Kenneth Armitage, who had to fleefrom England to avoid arrest on numerous charges of theft, deception and falseaccounting, had some of his good friends in the Napa Valley, such as Dr. JohnDuff, Johnny Beck, & others. Armitage has since mysteriously died in prisonin England. Armitage had intelligence connections which tie in with twilightworld of the criminal activities of the numerous intelligence acronym monsters.Also his company was authorized to provide people with Central Americangovernment documents.

There is more– much more to sordid affairs which swirlaround Roy Disney. Napa Valley, where many members of the Disney family live,has the Illuminati’s Opus One temple owned by Rothschilds, as well as tworoads lined with meticulously kept wineries owned by Illuminati kingpins andconnected via secret underground tunnels. To top off this incredible collectionof Illuminati wineries (Rothschild’s, Mondavi’s, Rutherford’s, ChristianBrother’s, Sattui’s etc), on the north end of a series of wineries onhighway 29 lays the CIA’s medieval-looking Culinary Institute of AmericaGreystone (at 2555 Main St., St. Helena, CA 94574), where numerous people havesuffered torture. The Greystone Culinary Institute of America recently had theperson who runs their campus store mentioned in House & Garden, Sept. ‘96.

F. WHAT DO WE KNOW ABOUT THE DISNEY FAMILY IN GENERAL?

Several members of the Disney family came to England with William theConqueror. They were not known as Disney then, but because they came from theFrench Norman town of Isigny, they took the name d ‘Isigny,and anglicized it into Disney. Walt had two daughters, Diane Marie (bn.12/18/33) and Sharon Mae. Diane made some revealing comments when she said, hedidn’t spoil us. Like a lot of adolescent girls, I was crazy about horses, andI got quite good at riding. I yearned for my own horse, but Dad wouldn’t buyone. And we didn’t have a lot of clothes and other things.” For being oneof the richest men in the nation, Walt can’t be accused of having spoiled hischildren. He was also famous for his ten cent tips at restaurants, which becamethe talk of the town.

Sharon Mae was adopted and arrived at the Disney home12/31/36. (She died in ’93.) The adoption was kept very secret. The newspapersaround the country announced that Lillian had given birth to Sharon, and theDisney family kept up this lie for years. The reason given for Sharon’sadoption was that Diane needed a playmate. For years, Walt Disney didn’t caremuch for Sharon and seldom acted like he even knew her name. Walt had wanted ason, but his wife wanted to adopt a girl, so it was a beautiful girl thatLillian picked out to be a companion for her first daughter. When Sharon waskindergarten age, Walt would take her to the carousels in Griffith Park onSunday afternoons. Sharon was sent to private schools. She went to WestlakeSchool for Girls, and later was shipped off to Switzerland to a girls’boarding school. She had soft blond locks and was attractive. In June of 1948,Walt took Sharon, who was then an attractive 12 yr. old to Alaska with him forabout 2 months. For most of this trip Walt and Sharon were alone together.

For afather, who had ignored Sharon for years, now Walt was totally obsessed withSharon. He bathed Sharon every night, combed her hair, washed her underwear, andcarefully dressed her each night from head to toe before taking her to nicerestaurants. He even followed her when she sleep walked. Why was Sharon a dissociative person? That summer in Alaska, Walt and his personal pilot took atrip in August to Mt. McKinley, AK. Both were drinking scotch whiskey and theybarely missed hitting a mountain, and almost ran out of fuel before finding arunway. Sharon first married a presbyterian Robert Borgfeldt Brown. Later,Sharon went on to marry William Lund. Years later, Walt’s wife Lilly evenprevented a biographer from revealing that Sharon was adopted. Sharon diedrelatively young.

It is important to look at the Disney family rather than justWalt Disney in trying to understand the Disney phenomena. For instance in 1958,the Wall Street Journal mentioned that Lillian B. Disney was beneficial owner ofover 10% of common Disney stock. Lillian, Walt’s widow, quietly purchasedproperty in Napa Valley and moved there in the late 60’s. She bought theproperty through Walt’s Retlaw Enterprises and the Lillian Disney Trust.Lillian and her 2 daughters ran Retlaw for years. Diane Miller, her daughter,also bought land and moved to the Napa area. The Lillian Disney Trust bought theSilverado Vineyards, which Diane & her husband manage as “gentlemengrowers” as they call it.

This side of the Disney family is shunned by theIlluminati insiders in the Napa Valley, as well as by the Roy O. side of thefamily. Although very private, there are occasional moments of publicity fromDiane Disney Miller, when she donated wine for a fund raiser for the PlannedParenthood Shasta Diablo held at the estate Niebaum-Coppola, owned bydirector/producer Francis Ford Coppola. Francis F. Coppola comes from an oldmafia family. He owns a big winery & directed Disney’s Caption EO film.Locals in the Napa area do not trust any of the Disneys, especially the Roy O.side of the family. There are other Disney’s who tie in with the occult world.Wesley Ernest Disney, a 32° Mason & Shriner, who was a U.S. Congressman, a state official& lawyer in Kansas who had a brother Richard Lester Disney– who is a RhodesScholar and a Mason too. Wesley Ernest Disney, by the way began as a lawyer inMuskogee County (a Satanic controlled county), and was a Christian Scientist. Helived in Tulsa, a powerful city of the Illuminati hierarchy. Doris Miles Disneyhas been a writer of occult fiction, such as The Magic Grandfather the ChandlerPolicy (1972) and Trick or Treat (1972) as well as many other occult novels.

G. A HISTORY OF DISNEY

“The story of Disney’s silent film career is not so much a strugglefor artistic expression as it is a fight for commercial stability.” Duringthe 1920’s, Walt stayed safely within the confines of comic animation asdefined by others, such as the producers of Felix the Cat, Koko the Clown, andKrazy Kat. In other words, when many of the ideas were coming from just himself,Disney’s movies were not any better than others. In the 1930’s, Disney gotsome of the best talent available and he began to settle for only the bestresults from that talent. With the mob, and the Illuminati behind him, anddriven by an indebtedness to them, Disney began to achieve outstanding resultsin animation. Between 1924 and 1927, Walt Disney made a series of 56 silentAlice Comedies which used three different girls (6-year-old Virginia Davis,Margie Gay and Lois Hardwick) to act as Alice who romps around in a make-believecartoon world. These cartoons combined live action and animation. By the timethe series was done, Walt Disney wanted to try working solely with animation.

Margaret Winkler in NY (who married Charles Mintz) distributed Walt Disney’sAlice Comedies. From the beginning, children were the center of everything Waltdid. The occult world that backed Walt, as well as Walt himself, believed thatif they could bring out “the child” (that part of a person called”the child” by various psychologists), then they could appeal to thecuriosity and feelings of the “child” part of adults. If it workedwith adults, they could do the same with the child part in children. They kneweven in the 20’s & ’30’s what had to be accomplished in the secretGreat Plan for a New World Order. The Illuminati Great Plan called for familylife to be destroyed, for children to rebel against their parents, and for theworld to become more violent. Children needed to immerse in images of violenceso that a violent society could be created.

For instance, the 1925 film AliceStage Struck shows little girl Alice strapped to a log leading to a buzz saw.They also wanted to make occultism–witchcraft the common belief of the Americanpeople. The Illuminati felt they could bring in witchcraft if they appealed tothe curiosity of the child in every adult. For instance, the Donald Duck cartoonCorn Chips (1951) shows Donald harassing Chip and Dale who then get back at himby stealing a box of popcorn and spreading it all over the front yard. Now whatdoes a cartoon like this teach kids? It teaches that stealing to repay a grudgeis O.K. and that doing pranks is funny.

In Disney’s 1920 films, he shows kidscutting school, shoplifting and playing hookey. He shows Alice running away fromresponsibility to have adventure. He shows prisoners escaping and hobos escapingwork. His films are expression of misbehaviour being successful. What does thisteach children? In the 1951 cartoon, Get Rich Quick Goofy wins money at pokerand his initially angry wife who doesn’t like gambling forgives him when shesees how much he’s won. Goofy indicates that they can have a spending spree bytelling his wife, “Easy come, easy go!” The gambling spirit is a verypowerful spirit that the Illuminati want to instill in this nation. How can acartoon that promotes gambling be wholesome for children?

Lt. Col. Dave Grossmanis a military expert on how to condition people so that theywill kill. He writes in his superb book On Killing (Boston, MS: Little Brown& Co., 1996) that the same process that the government has used to conditionsoldiers to kill, is being used by the entertainment industry. The only majordifference is that in the military, men are taught to kill only on command,while our children are being taught to kill whenever they want to via TV’s”entertainment.” Grossman states on page 308, that the conditioning tokill begins with cartoons. “It begins innocently with cartoons and thengoes on to the countless acts of violence depicted on TV as the child growsup… .Then the parents, through neglect or conscious decision, begin to permitthe child to watch movies rated R due to vivid depictions of knives penetratingand protruding from bodies, long shots of blood spurting from severed limbs, andbullets ripping into bodies and exploding out the back in showers of blood andbrains.” While children see horrible deaths on T.V., they learn toassociate this suffering with entertainment, pleasure and their favorite softdrink, their favorite candybar, and close intimate contact with their date. (SeeOn Killing, p. 302)

Disney has the appearance of Wholesomeness; this appearanceis quite deceptive. A close study of Disney cartoons will reveal lots ofviolence that could not be depicted if the violence was actually real life &not animation. It’s the wholesome front which is one of the deceptions thatmakes Disney cartoons & films so dangerous. Yes, the image of Disney hasbeen that its cartoons are wholesome. No wonder Illuminati mind-controlprogrammers have laughed at how naive the American public is toward Disney. TheDisney Gargoyles cartoons are a television series that is pure demonology. Thestory line is that a race of demons protects New York City. One of the Gargoylesis even named Demona. The Illuminati programmers are amazed at how stupid themasses of people are, and how easily deceived.

How the Disney movies are used asprogramming scripts is very involved so only one detailed example is given atthe end of this chapter. The Illuminati and Mafia knew that Walt had the abilityto get the job done that the Great Plans called for. (Source: confidentialinterview.) They knew they had the “carrots and the sticks” to get himto cooperate. There is no doubt that Walt was a hard worker who in turn expectedhigh standards from his employees. One co-worker of Walt wrote, “Walt madea simple statement, that you can lick them with ‘product’ if you make yourproduct good enough, they cannot deny it.. . .In Walt’s estimation, everythingthat was done had to be executed with a great deal of thought and finesse.” Neelands, Barbara, compiler. About Ben Sharpsteen, article by David R. Smith(2nd Impress.) Calistoga, CA: A Sharpsteen Museum Reprint, pg. 2-3.

One big turnin Walt’s outlook toward quality came in April, 1927 when the head ofUniversal Studios wrote a scathing report on the quality of Disney studio work.It forced Walt to realize that up to then he had been slipshod and sloppy. Heresolved to never take the easy way, but to work with dedication toward makinghis drawings come to life with character and interesting situations. In 1922,Walt made a film Cinderella. This is not to be confused with the later animatedfilm also of the same title released in 1950. The 1950 feature was re-releasednumerous times. The Alice cartoons were made with a 6- year-old girl playingAlice. The first six Alice comedies had extensive live-action beginnings, andthen went into cartoon. A few of the 1920’s Alice silent cartoon titlesinclude:

Alice’s Wonderland (1923)
Alice Hunting in Africa (1924)
Alice’s Spooky Adventure (1924)
Alice Plays Cupid (1925)
Alice Cans the Cannibals (1925)
Alice Rattled by Rats (1925)
Alice Chops the Suey (1925)
Alice Charms the Fish (1926)
Alice the Whaler (1927)
Alice the Beach Nut (1927)

After the Alice Series, Disney began a fully animated series called Oswaldthe Lucky Rabbit. Here we see the occult concept of luck (who hasn’t heard ofa lucky Rabbit’s foot?) being subtly promoted. Disney cartoon may entertain,but they also indoctrinate while they entertain. In 1926, Walt Disney signed anagreement with Mintz and Film Booking Offices (EBO).

Film Booking Offices wereIlluminati kingpin/mob boss Joseph Kennedy’s company. For at least the nextyears, Disney worked under the control (auspices) of Illuminati kingpin Kennedy.All of the Disney pictures were registered by R-C Pictures Corp., one of theparent companies of Kennedy’s FBO. Joseph Kennedy also controlled the RKOstudio which worked together with the other big studios to insure that no smallstudio would develop as a competitor. By 1937, all the big studios–20th Cent.,Paramount, MGM, Warner Bros., Cohn’s Columbia Pictures and Kennedy’s RKOwere allowing the mob to skim money from them.

Kennedy’s RKO gave Walt aguarantee in 1937 that they’d distribute Snow White sight unseen. Walt Disneyhad their films distributed by Kennedy’s RKO from 1936 to 1956. Another littleknown detail is that in 1926, Leon Schlesinger (future producer at Warner Bros.)subcontracted animation jobs to Disney. One of these was Universal’s TheSilent Flyer. In 1928, Steamboat Willie debuted. This was an animated cartoonwith a soundtrack starring a mouse later named Mickey Mouse. It had taken lotsof hard work and determination on Walt’s part, but it was the first cartoonwith a sound track and it was successful.

In 1929, the cartoon The Haunted Housecame out. The story is, Mickey Mouse is forced by a storm into a house full ofghosts who force him to contribute to their spooky musicale. In 1930, HarryCohn, one of the most ruthless and unsavory characters controlling a studiobailed Walt Disney out of Walt’s trouble with con-artist Pat Powers who wasstealing Disney’s money. Harry Cohn was a former NY pool hustler and gamblerwho was brought in by Chicago investors to front their investments in ColumbiaPictures, and run their studio. He wore a sapphire ring that the Chicagomafia man Johnny Roselli gave him. Roselli later became a rogue asset of the CIA,and testified before Congress (the Church Committee on Assassinations in ‘74)about a CIA contract which was handed him. Roselli worked for the Mafia Councilof 9, which incl. Anthony Accardo and Sam Giancana. Harry Cohn was said by someto be the most hated man in Hollywood. His money gave him “the power of anemperor”. His money got him the best female flesh available which he usedfor his pleasure. He always seemed to arrive from Las Vegas with rolls of newgreenbacks, which had close associates wondering where all the money came fromthat he always got when he made trips to Las Vegas.

In 1931, Walt went into along suicidal depression that lasted into 1932. In the summer of 1932, he took avacation to try and recover from his nervous breakdown. By 1932, Ingersoll hadmarketed its first edition of Mickey Mouse watches. Disney products have servedas a model of consumerism for the world. Disney watches have been madecontinuously since 1932 or ’33. In 1932, eighty major U.S. corporations (suchas General Foods, RCA & National Dairy) began to market Disney products. EdSullivan began regularly running stories that bragged about Disney’s work.Freemason Dr. Rufus B. von Kleinsmid, pres. of the Univ. of So. Cal., gaveDisney an award from Parents magazine for Walt’s “work withchildren”. In 1932, several artists who had worked for William RandolphHearst came to work for Disney.

In 1932, Roy switched Disney from Columbia toUnited Artists. United Artists agreed to front Disney $15,000 for eachcartoon. In the 1930’s, the Illuminati’ Bank of America financed WaltDisney. Years before, the Bank of America had been quietly created from Bank ofItaly which was controlled by the same oligarchy that has run the Knights ofMalta and renaissance Venice. The Bank of Italy was a powerful bank inHollywood’s first years. It’s representatives A.P. and Atillo Gianninifinanced Walt during the 1920’s with petty cash to keep him going, but notenough to get him out of financial bondage. Joe Rosenberg of Bank of America wassympathetic to Walt. Joe Rosenberg, a Jewish banker, came to all of Disney’sboard meetings, sat beside Walt, and would advise Walt on what direction DisneyStudios should take. Joe wasn’t a board member, but his advice got highpriority.

Bank of America also bankrolled other Illuminati projects andorganizations. Bank of America had one of their branch offices on Disneyland’sMain St. from ’55 until ‘93. They were open on holidays and Sundays forDisneyland. Bank of America is slated to be perhaps the only bank to survive theeconomic crash, when the Illuminati kingpins will allow their own banks tocrash. Bank of America executive S. Clark Beise (who is a Scottish RiteFreemason) has been a member of Disney’s board of directors from ‘65 to’75.

One of the biggest depositors in Bank of America is Roy E. Disney. OtherDisney execs like Rich Frank have also used Bank of America as their bank ofchoice. The Bank of America bankrolled the Disney animation Snow White. Waltmanaged to sell Joseph Rosenberg on the idea, at a time when old time Hollywoodpeople were advising Rosenberg that Snow White could only be a failure. WhenSnow White was successful, Walt announced a monster party for all Disney workersat Lake Norconian, near Palm Springs, southeast of San Bernandino, CA where thecost of everything the Disney workers wanted to order–food or drink orwhatever, would be taken care of by the Disney’s.

Under the full moon, theDisney male and female workers, finally free of the tight rules at the studios,had what amounted to a Roman orgy and a large nude skinny-dip at the lake.Almost all of the Disney workers participated in the orgy and Disney had onlytwo options, 1. fire them all or 2. ignore that the party took place. Waltchoose the later option, and after that no-one ever dared mention the party inhis presence.

In 1937, Walt and Roy took a trip to Europe where Walt dined withthe British Royal family, & met privately with H.G. Wells, the masonicprophet! planner of what Wells & other masons called “the New WorldOrder”. In Paris, the League of Nations (the forerunner to the U.N.) gavehim an award.

After the success of Snow White, Disney chose Pinocchio to followit. Many have asked why Pinocchio was chosen by Walt. If you look at the script,the puppet maker’s wife is taken out of the original script, and there is anemphasis on the little wooden puppet visualizing becoming a flesh & bloodson to the man who had created him. Here we have a boy with no soul, who is toldif he works hard he will be given one. (Does this sound familiar to readers ofVoL 2?) The script was definitely changed to have a storyline far more useful tomind-control programming.

For those who think Walt simply recreated fairy taleson the screen, if one examines the changes that are made from the originalstorylines, they are changed to make them more useful for mind-control. BothSnow White and Pinocchio have occult type “deaths and resurrections”.

After W.W. II, Joseph Rosenberg persuaded A.P. Giannini, his boss, to bankrollDisney again. Although Walt was financed by the Mishpucka (Jewish Mafia), hedidn’t like the idea. Richard Rosenberg, a later Pres. of Bank of America, isalso Mishpucka. Richard Rosenberg (his mother was a Cohen) was also in charge ofNorthrop Corp. and Marin Ecumenical Housing Assn. (Other examples of Mishpuckaexecutives are R. Goldstein, v.p. of Procter & Gamble, and Marvin Koslow, v.p. of Bristol Meyers Co.)

In the1930’s, the elite promoted Disney’s new cartoons. In 1935, Walt Disneyreceived the French Legion of Honor for his Mickey Mouse cartoons. Also in 1935,the Queen of England (who readers of my previous articles will realize isIlluminati, involved in drug trade, and is involved with the leadership ofFreemasonry) and the Duchess of York (also Illuminati) selected Mickey Mousechinaware as gifts for 600 children. This was after Walt spent time with her in1934.

The League of Nations (the pre-W.W. II equivalent of the U.N.) took thetime to vote its approval of Mickey Mouse. (Finch, Christopher. The Art of WaltDisney from Mickey Mouse to the Magic Kingdom . NY: Harry N. Abrams, Inc., 1975,p. 53.) There is no doubt that Walt Disney had talent. There is also no doubtfrom the record that powerful people wanted to promote him. No doubt his 320Masonic membership and his DeMolay activities helped boost his support, and alsohelped Walt’s bent toward the occult.

Let’s digress just to let people in onFreemasonry’s involvement with acting and motion pictures. The famous 233 Clubwas a Masonic chapter for actors who were Freemasons. Examples of actors whowere Freemasons include John Aasen, Gene Autry, Monte Blue and Humphrey Bogart,Douglas McClean, John Wayne.

Then there is T.V. DJ Dick Clark. Examples ofMotion picture executives who were Freemasons incl. Ellis G. Arnall (Pres. ofthe Soc. of Ind. Motion Picture Producers), Will H. Hays (Czar of motionpictures 1922-45, and Pres. Motion Picture Produces & Distributors of Amer.Inc.), Benj. B. Kahane (v.p. & dir. Assoc. of Motion Picture Producers,Inc.), Carl Laemmle (Pres. Univ. Pictures Corp til ’36), Frank E. Mullen (man. dept of info. RCA, VP NBC ‘39-’46, exec. VP NBC ‘46-’48), DavidSarnoff (Chrm. of Bd. Radio Corp. of Amer. & ,,father” of Americantelevision), Jack M. Warner (v.p. of Warner Bros.) and the President & dir.of Universal Pictures since 1952. The Freemasons have made much of WaltDisney’s membership in their membership sales pitches. Because the 2 Disneybrothers’ chief contributions to the production of Disney films were thefinances and occasionally the ideas used in a film, it is rathermisrepresentative of things that Walt Disney got all the credit for the successand quality of the Disney cartoons.

He was showered with 700 awards and honorsfrom important people, including 30 oscars, and the Presidential Medal ofFreedom (in ’64). Walt Disney’s great animators never got the credit theydeserved, but no one should forget that Walt was the driving force that inspiredand guided his workers.

In 1934, Walt Disney made a cartoon about a goddess ofthe Mystery Religions named Persephone. In the cartoon entitled The Goddess ofSpring, the goddess Persephone is captured by Satan as his bride and sent to theunderworld, with the agreement she could return to earth six months of eachyear. The Illuminati have rituals around Persephone. On Dec. 21, 1937, Disneypremiered the first full-length color cartoon movie “Snow White and theSeven Dwarfs.” This cartoon had taken $1.4 in depression-time money andthree years to make. Over 750 artists worked on the film. Walt Disney had gottenthe idea from a silent movie of Snow White which he saw as a boy in 1917. Themovie has an important occult theme to it, and has been used for occultmind-control programming.

When the 1940’s got started, Disney was in financialdifficulties. At this point, Nelson Rockefeller hired his cartoon capabilitiesto make cartoons for South America, with the idea that South Americans wouldremain loyal to the American capitalist hegemony, rather than shift to risingideologies of fascism/nazism, if they saw Walt Disney cartoons.

In Rio deJaneiro, Brazil on 8/24/42, Disney did its world premiere of Saludo Amigos, a 42minute feature about Latin America. Goofy becomes a gaucho, a parrotteaches Donald Duck to dance the samba, as well as Disney art showing variouslandscapes of Brazil in the film.

However, the film The Three Caballeros, if itwas meant to encourage South American loyalty to American capitalism, completelyfailed. The Three Caballeros showed a sexually lecherous Donald Duck who in badtaste tries to make it with Latin women. The mysticism was also seen as bogus.Although the Latin Americans hated the film, the establishment media’s Lookmagazine praised it. Another reason that Rockefeller sent Walt to South Americawas to get him out of the way so that the government could settle the strike byDisney workers. Nelson Rockefeller was the government’s Coordinator ofInter-American Affairs, a good position considering how much of South Americathe Rockefeller’s controlled. Rockefeller told Disney that Disney couldn’tbeat the strikers, but that while Walt was in South America, FDR would see to itthat the strike got settled.

When Disney returned he submitted to the powersthat were, and accepted the unions and the mafia’s control. Another change forWalt Disney was that in 1940, he and Roy turned Disney into a “publiccorporation” and initially sold 755,000 shares of common stock. TheIlluminati Boston firm of Kidder, Peabody & Co. were the underwriters of thestudio’s public stock-offerings.

By 1940, the Disney Studio at Burbank hadbecome a miniature city with 1,000 men & women employees and 20 buildings ona 51 acre tract of land. After the U.S. joined W.W. II, Disney Productions weremade a part of the American military establishment. The very next day afterPearl Harbor, the military moved onto the Disney Studio, which leads this authorto suspect that Disney was already part of the power establishment prior to thewar breaking out. Disney made military movies/cartoons that taught the differentbranches of the military many things. They made propaganda movies for theallies.

One series of films was “Why we fight.” Disney made movies forthe IRS to get people to pay their taxes. Some of the Disney films were top,secret, and concerned secret military weapons or secret psychological tactics ofthe Americans. For instance, one military film was “Army PsychoTherapy” which taught army men how to instill fear, and about the basics offear. Another army film was “Prostitution & the War”. Anothershowed a carrier pigeon evading the Germans. In 1940, Disney came out with 2full length animated cartoons, Pinocchio and Fantasia, both of which were soonused for Illuminati mind-control programming. Fantasia contains Schubert’ssacred Catholic music Ave Maria, which was used in a concluding segment side toside with the profane Night on Bald Mountain song, as well as six otherclassical pieces of orchestra music.

As a feature cartoon it was a flop, but asa programming tool it was fantastic. Fantasia receives a comprehensiveexplanation of how it is used for mind-control programming at the end of thischapter. Because an explanation of the use of a Disney film for mind-control iscomplex, this explanation is placed at the end of the chapter so that it won’tinterrupt the flow of this chapter’s information. The Pinocchio film has beenredone and released 9 times over the years. Some of the next full lengthanimated films to come out were: The Three Caballeros (1945) The Adventures of Ichabod & Mr. Toad (‘49) Cinderella (1950) Treasure Island (1950) Alice InWonderland (1951) The Story of Robin Hood & His Merrie Men (1952) Peter Pan(1953) 20,000 Leagues Under the Sea (1954) Sleeping Beauty (1959) Very soonafter the production of all of these movies, the Illuminati and theirintelligence agencies used them for Illuminati total mind-control programming.

To see their misuse as programming scriptsone has to understand how the fantasy worlds of a programmed multiple arecreated and how the movie scripts are adapted to be programming scripts. Vol. 2gave quite a few examples of how Alice In Wonderland and the Wizard of Ozscripts were used for programming scripts. When Disney had his animal-naturedocumentaries, he edited and used narration to give the animals human likecharacteristics–something he’d already been doing with animation. Disneyplayed an important part in the Illuminati’s plan to elevate animals anddehumanize humans.

One of the biggest Illuminati kingpins, and leader (GrandMaster) of the Prieure de Sion was Frenchman Claude Debussy (bn.1862). ClaudeDebussy, a Merovingian, was Nautonnier (Navigator-helmsman) of the Prieure deSion from 1885-1918. (See the document Dossiers secrets, planche no. 4, Ordre deSion, written about in Holy Blood, Holy Grail.) In 1891, when some secret codedparchments (Merovingian documents) were found by a French clergyman Sauniere, hewas directed by church officials to visit with Emile Hoffet, an occultacquaintance of Debussy.

Debussy was close friends with many of the top Frenchoccultists of his time. He is known to have been a close friend to both thenotorious Satanists Jules Bois and MacGregor Mathers. Mathers started the Orderof the Golden Dawn. Debussy was also a friend of the infamous Papus (aka Dr.Gerard Encausse) and W.B. Yeats.

Papus was one of the men who during hislifetime was part of the interlocking occult directorate of occult groups.Claude Debussy put some works of the previous P.d.S. Grand Master Victor Hugo tomusic. Debussy and his other powerful occult friends were influential withMonsieur Philippe, whose Russian occult circle influenced the Russian Czars andCzarinas before Rasputin came around. Debussy travelled to Russia and Rome. Someof Debussy’s works became operas. Interestingly, Walt Disney was extremelyanxious to make a cartoon using Debussy’s Clair de Lane. The work was done,but it was never shown to the public. Disney never found a place to use it. Itwas originally done with animation with flying cranes for the occultextravaganza Fantasia, but when the Fantasia ended up too long, Clair de Lanewas cut and shelved. It was again planned for the film Make Mine Music, but thenBlue Bayou was substituted in. Walt used the Le Sacre du Printemps (the Rite ofSpring) music for Fantasia. This piece of music was written AS a pagan ritualwhere a virgin sacrifices herself by dancing to death. Disney’s mobsterGunther Lessing had threatened Stravinsky if permission weren’t given forDisney to use the piece of music, it would be used anyway.

Dr. Julian Huxley gotinvolved in the production of Fantasia. Aldous and Julian Huxley are well knownby conspiracy researchers for their roles in the World Order. In the 1940’sand 1950’s, the Illuminati began using Disney’s Alice In Wonderland and theWizard of Oz films as programming bases for their total mind-controlled slaves.Alice in Wonderland had been done many years earlier by the Britisher WilliamCameron Menzies (who also did Freemason H.G. Wells’ Masonic forecast of theNew World Order entitled “Things to Come” in 1936, and the filmInvaders From Mars.). In 1944, Illuminati Kingpin William Randolph Hearst (withsome minor help from others) funded the Motion Picture Alliance, and Walt Disneybecame a co-founder and its first Vice-President. In the early 1950’s, Waltturned his attention from animated cartoons to other projects, such asTrue-Life-Adventures, television shows, and the creation of Disneyland. SealIsland was his first true life adventure which was released to the generalpublic on May 4, 1949, and soon won Walt Disney an Oscar. Alfred and ElmaMilotte had shot the film on some Alaskan Islands namedPribilof Islands. James Algar had put the movie together.

In 1952, Walter spelled his named backwards to create the name of another corporation “Retlaw”.Roy and his family saw the move as an attempt to cut them out of the financialpicture. In 1954, Walt Disney and ABC made a agreement. ABC would directlyinvest half a million US dollars as well as guarantee $4.5 million in loans forthe construction of Disneyland. This made ABC 1/3 owner of Disneyland. Inreturn, Walt Disney agreed to produce a regular television series for ABC.Remember too that ABC’s president Leonard Goldenstein was a good friend ofRonald Reagan. On July 13, 1955, Walt and Lillian were attempting to celebratetheir 30th wedding anniversary at a park and restaurant. Walt got too drunk tospeak into the microphone, so he blew noisemakers into it, while Lillian rushedto pull him out of view. In 1961, Disney bought out the ABC investment (alsolabelled Paramount) for $7.5 million with cash and notes, and to bring this allup to date, later on July 31, 1995, Disney merged with Capital Cities/ABC, withDisney in nominal control. Actually Capital Cities has long been a CIA frontcompany, so the merger placed Disney squarely within the CIA ranks, although ithad been in bed with them for the CIA’s entire history.

TheIlluminati-controlled corporations of Coca-Cola and the drug firm Johnson andJohnson became sponsors for Disney’s early TV shows. On 7/3/57, the Wall St.Journal announced that Atlas Corp. got 26% interest in Walt Disney Productions.Walt Disney worked quietly with some consultants on the concepts behindDisneyland. His brother and nephew tried to prevent the project from happening.Later they requested that Walt sign over Disneyland, Inc. to Walt DisneyProductions, which Walt did. Walt kept 17.25 % of Disneyland holdings and WaltDisney Productions got the rest. Walt Disney Productions then shared theirportion with others. The man who helped Walt finance Disneyland was theexecutive vice-pres. of ABC Kintner.

Walt Disney got the Illuminati’s StanfordResearch Institute to determine what would be the best site for Disneyland. Aretired Navy admiral Joe Fowler was in charge of constructing both Disneylandand Walt Disney World. How do admirals fit into the power structure? Admiralsare briefed each day, and are given information concerning the secret powerstructure. Most men who are at that military level are Illuminati or at leastwell controlled by the system. Within the last few years there has been anintense effort to weed out any admirals who are not loyal to the Illuminati.Morgan-Evans, who lives in Malibu, and who may be of the famous Morgan clan, wasthe one who created the spectacular landscapes for Disneyland, Walt DisneyWorld, and EPCOT in FL. According to CIA informants opposed to the NWO, CIAcontractors were brought in to build the underground tunnels under Disneyworldin 1977. These contractors were sworn to secrecy, but were only informed on aneed to know basis why the CIA was involved with an amusement park. To work onthe secret tunnel project took an “Above Top Secret” clearance. Amajor programming center was constructed under Lake Holden. (Many of the lakesin Florida are named Lake So-and-so, rather than So-and-so Lake.) The tunnelsystem was built for programming trauma-based total mind-controlled slaves. Itwas built of concrete with steel reinforcement. Lake Holden lies just to thenorthwest side of the Orlando International Airport and just south of Interstate4. (It is close to Range 29E on quad maps.) It is only (as the crow flies) about12 miles from Disneyworld.

In spite of Draconian measures of secrecy, numerouslawsuits (Fed. & State) were filed over the years by victims trying to expose the Disneyworld programming tunnels, sothat finally the programming center was dismantled, cleaned up and a“maintenance” tunnel level and a “casting” tunnel level were openedto the public. During its heyday, the programmers (military & intelligencemen) had exotic offices underground with unusual programming equipment. Itdoesn’t take any imagination to realize that if Disney carried mind-controlprogramming above and below ground, that they would need tight security forcesto protect their secrets. Indeed, such is the case. Disney amusement parks havebeen granted draconian powers wherever they have been built! The Disney parkshave also employed armies of spies dressed like tourists to spy on Disney’semployees! If amusement park workers did anything slightly out of place, theywere (and still are) reported by the spies in the camp, and they often have losttheir jobs.

For instance, one ex-worker, who had 10 years with Disney, wascaught discussing his divorce with another worker. Since divorce doesn’t fitthe wholesome image that Disney wants, when the spy dressed as a touristreported his conversation, he lost his job. Many workers have tried to telltheir personal horror stories of Disney’s draconian rules and their draconianprivate police force, but most of the time Disney has had the power to suppressand intimidate away any bad publicity. An exception to that is the recent Nov.4, ‘96 Napa Valley Register article on page 2D entitled, “Critics ofDisneyland Say Security Abusive Inside Magic Kingdom.” UCLA law professorDavid Sklansky commented about Disney’s police, “One of the majorproblems we have is nobody really knows what they are doing- how often theystop, interrogate or search people. They are not subject to the same sort ofregulatory controls.”

It’s almost superfluous to tell readers thatDisney’s amusement park with it’s theme areas such as Fantasyland, Tomorrowland and Adventureland were a great success. Everyone worldwide wascurious to visit this entertainment mecca to participate in something that had aclean, wholesome image to it. The entire world system pulled together to insurethat Disneyland got the image and publicity that the top 13 Illuminati familiesand the various syndicates wanted it to have. For 40 years they’ve done this.When something that everyone thinks is clean and wholesome is not attacked bythe world system, that should raise eyebrows among thinking people. Homeschooling, learning to read phonetically and other wholesome activities forchildren have been viciously attacked and ridiculed by the established media.Why has Disney gone untouched?

Disney Studios for years strove to have a veryclean image. Workers had dress codes, and any activity on the part of employeesthat wasn’t morally conservative was grounds for instant dismissal. Of course,the exceptions were well covered up, such as an employee who used hypnosis toget quite a few of the females employees to undress until nude. John L. Hulteng,author of The Messenger’s Motives (Englewood Cliff, NJ: Prentice-Hall, 1976,p. 213) informs us, “As communication researchers have emphasized, thegreatest impact the media have on the formation or change of public opinion isin terms of impressions built up over a long period.” [bold added] Thewholesomeness of Disney is an image that has been built over a long period oftime. Disney’s occult themes of world citizenship, witchcraft, humanism andidolatry have also been long running impressions that have been craftivelyperpetrated upon this nation, so long that they began prior to this author’s–& probably the reader’s– birth. People don’t associate movie’s likeConsenting Adults with Disney, or The Corpse Had a Familiar Face with Disney. Infact as previously mentioned, when Disney wanted to put out more”adult” films, they did a slight of hand and created the labelTouchstone films so that people wouldn’t associate movies like Splash (which showed whatlooked like bared breasts) with Disney Productions.

Another label, HollywoodPictures, was created by Disney to help distribute Touchstone films. At firstthe personnel of these companies was simply Disney’s staff, but as time wenton, they got their own production personnel. On Oct. 27, 1954, Walt Disney’sWonderful World of Color debuted on television. The TV show celebratedDisney’s movie triumphs. The words Wonderful World of Color are not illchosen. According to an Illuminati mind-control programmer, when Disney workedon his cartoons, and amusement parks, colors –special colors and colorcombinations–were specifically chosen for mind-control programming purposes.Wonderful World of Color under various names such as Disneyland aired for 22years over the television networks.

In 1955, Walt Disney made his cartooncharacter Mickey Mouse real by creating a fan club–the Mickey Mouse Club, whichaired five days a week usually just as children came home from school.Twenty-four children called mouseketeers would help Mickey, and they would danceand sing and do skits. The Mickey Mouse Club adored the unique, cute littlebeanie Mickey Mouse caps with their big ears mounted to each side of the beanie.In the 1950’s, most kid viewers of the show wanted their own “MouseEars” and to become a Mouseketeer, especially children who were receivingMickey Mouse scripts in their total mind-control programming. Disney used hisMouseketeers to play all the roles in an Oz movie Rainbow Road to Oz, which wasnever shown to the public.

Adults today (both men & women) who receivedMickey Mouse programming during the 50’s through 70’s can still be seen withMickey Mouse clocks, watches, lampshades, knick-knacks, tee shirts, etc. Yearslater the kids who watched can still remember “Spin and Marty” and theMickey Mouse theme song. The image that everything was perfect including Mickeywas portrayed by the Club’s T.V. program. Still somehow the American peoplebegan to use the word “Mickey Mouse” as a synonym for a silly, pretendway of doing things. It became common for people to say, “He mickey-mousedit together.” to mean he did a poor job putting it together.

On Jan. 30,1957, Walt Disney had a television show aired entitled “All AboutMagic” where a Magic Mirror explains about magic. The Magic Mirror alsocontains a “Bibbidi-bibbidi-Boo” sequence. In 1959, Disney bought 8small submarines from Todd Shipyards for $2,150.000. When ABC wouldn’t letWalt make a TV series out of a storyline where a magic ring changes a boy into adog (a mind-control programming theme)–because ABC didn’t think the publiccould swallow the story line–Walt quit ABC for NBC. Walt then made a scaleddown version of this occult storyline entitled The Shaggy Dog.

Early in the1960’s, Walt and his brother Roy went secretly looking for an area on the eastcoast to build another Disney Park. Walt the younger of the two, died in 1966,and Roy finished the project. Beginning in 1964, 30,000 acres were secretlypurchased at $200 an acre in the Orlando, FL area just west of NASA’s CapeKennedy. Using phoney names and paying cash, Disney buyers bought the land andswore the sellers to secrecy. The Magic Kingdom has been multiplying. In 1971,Walt Disney World was opened to the public. Bob Hope and others participated ina Disney special on Oct. 29, 1971 “Grand opening of Walt DisneyWorld”. From the time of its opening until Oct. 12, 1995, Disney Worldcalculated 1/2 billion people visited DisneyWorld. This amusement park is inOrlando, FL on over 27,400 acres and includes the EPCOT Center (now also calledsimply Epcot). The EPCOT center was another dream of Walt Disney’s (albeitmore than slightly modified from Walt’s original EPCOT ideas.)

EPCOT originally stood for Experimental Prototype Community of Tomorrow. Itwas to be an extension of the massive mind-control being carried out at DisneyWorld. The original EPCOT city designed by Walt was to carry on its commerce(traffic) via underground roads and tunnels like the Disney Theme parks. AfterWalt Disney died, his successors changed the proposed experimental city intoanother theme park simply called Epcot. It is not unusual to see crowds of over48,000 people descend on Walt Disney World and the EPCOT center in a single day.Some visitors arrive via a monorail. Visitors can buy 5-Day World Hopper passeswhich allow them to bounce around with admission to all the sites for a sevenday period. In other words, some families stay for a week at Disneyworld.Hardcore visitors can get Annual Passports which provide unlimited use of WaltDisneyworld for an entire year.

In reality, many visitors to Disneyworld beginthe day enthusiastic and after a day of hot sun and waiting in long lines withlarge crowds for imitations of reality, the tourists are zombie-like and lookingforward to getting back to their hotels. Many people have felt the rides werenot nearly what they expected. Some of the rides are better than others, andsome typically get comments like, “It was stupid.” Some of the spookyevents like Snow White’s Adventures, or the oversized heads of the Disneycharacters walking around can leave the little preschool children terrified anddazed for the rest of the day. In contrast, older children, who normally rarelyshow patience at home may show how much they want to go on a particular Disneyride, by waiting an hour and a half in the hot sun for a ride. Alien Encounteris a Walt Disneyland feature that invites tourists in for a “demonstrationof interplanetary teleportation.” When the “demonstration” asplanned “breaks down” an “alien” with asocial traits appearsamong the audience and terrorizes the audience. A cute creature is hideouslyfried, deformed, and then vomited into space screaming. Here are some commentsfrom visitors to this Walt Disneyland attraction:

· “Alien Encounter …is one of those rides I can say I’ve seen andthat I have no intention of ever doing again. In fact, parents who take childrenunder the age of six should be brought up on child abuse.” Woman, from MI

· “Alien Encounter was the WORST experience for my 10-year-old (andalmost every child in there). It starts out cute enough during the preshow, butthe actual show is a disaster for children. My daughter screamed and cried interror throughout it. I thought the Disney warnings were vague and inaccurate.When we left, there wasn’t one child with dry eyes (even sturdy looking12-year-old boys were crying.). I think an age requirement of 13 or 14 is moreappropriate. I talked to a few adults and we even agreed that the specialeffects were extremely unpleasant even for us. This show is not a Disney familyexperience–its ATROCIOUS!!” A mother from Phillipsburg, NJ.

· “We did go to Alien Encounter…The preshow is deceiving. It kind oflulls you into thinking “this isn’t so bad.” When the main part cameup, I admit the experience gave me the absolute heebie-jeebies. . .I am neverdoing that presentation again–it was way too intense for me, and I’m now 27years of age!–from a family in Laurel, MD

Michael Eisner, the President of WaltDisney Co., initially rejected Alien Encounter for not being scary enough whenit was being considered as an addition to Disneyworld. One wonders what he wouldhave liked! Snow White’s Adventures, which was an attraction at Disneyland,was one of what the Disney people called “dark rides”. After a while asign appeared with a witch warning people that the attraction was scary. Laterin 1983, they renamed it Snow White’s Scary Adventures. It might beinteresting to point out that when the original Snow White and Seven Dwaffs filmcame out, that England forbid the film to be seen by any child under 16 unless accompanied by anadult because of the scary content of the movie. How far we have come sincethen.

Schools in the Florida and California areas also make field trips to theMagic Kingdom that are arranged with Disney. EPCOT receives tens of thousands ofchildren this way during March, September and October. High schools use theMagic Kingdom for proms or senior nights, and some couples use the facilities ofthe Magic Kingdom for weddings. Modem Bride ranked Orlando as the number-onehoneymoon destination in the world. Group discussions of people who tookhoneymoons to DisneyWorld have had a consensus that the hype is not as great asthe reality. Some weddings are done with cartoon characters. Disney offers”fairy-tale” wedding packages. A great deal for two mind-controlledslaves. They can reinforce their programming while getting married. The Disneyfairy-tale wedding typically has its ceremony on a pavilion on an island in theSeven Seas Lagoon with the Cinderella Castle as a backdrop. The fairy-talewedding can then be followed with a Fantasy reception with a choice of themessuch as Beauty & the Beast or Aladdin. The fantasy programming can continueas the bride is delivered to a “Cinderella’s Ball” by an actualglass carriage drawn by six white Disney ponies. A costumed fairy-godmother& stepsisters are also at the ball. Desert is served in a white chocolateslipper.

One of the after-dark shows is IllumiNations which consists of music,fireworks, erupting fountains, special lighting, and laser technology done atthe World Showcase Lagoon. EPCOT has a show Cranium Command at the Wonders ofLife in the Future World section where guests sit in a theater that functions asa command control room for a boy’s brain. In 1980, Disney came out with thebox office flop The Devil & Max Devlin. In 1984, Roy E. Disney brought inMichael Milken, of junk bond fame to help Disney out financially. In 1985,Disney bought MGM’s rights to Leo the Lion logo and began using the MGM Wizardof Oz material. Later a remake of Alice In Wonderland came out in the modernmotif of Honey I Shrank the Kids. In the 1990’s, Illuminati controlledcompanies continued their promotion of Disney. For instance, the Nestlefamily’s Nestle company promotes Disney movies on their chocolate bars. TheNestle family is exposed in this author’s booklet Illuminati Control OverFoods and Grains, p. 4 as one of the elite Black Nobility families. In 1996,Walt Disney World created an actual residential town named Celebration on itsproperty. This self-contained community has 20,000 and a school, a theater, afiber optic information network linking business, as well as other features.

SOME DISNEY people of interest

Over the years, the close associates of the Disneys’ is very revealing. Thepublic can get a feel for Disney’s attitude toward Illuminati bloodlines inthe Disney movie The Happiest Millionaire which is about Anthony J. DrexelBiddle and Angie Duke. Readers of this author’s previous writings willrecognize the Biddle and Duke names. In fact, the movie was based loosely on abook written by Cordelia Drexel Biddle about the Biddles.

X Atensio. His first name was Xavier, but was nicknamed and called X. Heworked on the haunted mansion of Disneyland with WED enterprises. He joinedDisney in 1938, and was an assistant animator of Fantasia.

Warren Beatty. (b. 1937 in VA) This actor is from the Illuminati Beattyfamily and starred in Disney’s Dick Tracy. The Dick Tracy film uses color in aspecial way, and this ties in with the color programming of the mind-control. Some total mind-controlled slaves have programming based onDisney’s Dick Tracy movie for them to track down and kill “targets”(people). Warren’s sister is the famous (or infamous) Shirley Maclaine.Shirley “MacClaine” is not what she appears.

Her father was aprofessor who was a CIA asset. She was used by the CIA as a sex slave. Shebecame popular with the studios because she went to bed with the correct people.Her talents were used to get her as an intelligence slave into places that anobvious intelligence agent couldn’t go. She was married to a man in the NSAfor nearly 20 years. Her adopted name Maclaine (reportedly her mother’s maidenname) is a pun on McLain, VA where the CIA programmed her. She was used by theCIA in an operation in Australia, where the CIA used her as a sex slave tocompromise Andrew Peacock, an Australian MP, so that they could establish the Nugen-Hand bank for their dirty money laundering etc.

She is friends with Satanist Stephen Nance who has provided her with some of her teachings. LowellMcGovern writes her material. The CIA has programmed many of their New Ageslaves to adore Shirley MacLaine. An example of this is Christa Tilton, one oftheir mind-controlled slaves, who revealed in an interview how she consideredherself a born-again Christian who had spent most of her life in Oklahoma, buthad mysteriously been drawn to Shirley MacLaine. During her life she has gottenrepeated “psychic urgings”–that is strong urges to do things and goplaces, which she doesn’t understand where these urgings came from. Afterhypnosis, Christa drew pictures of the doctor who programmed her. Christa hashad a federal agent monitor her constantly. Her husband has seen this agent, whohas shown up on her door step and made calls to her. She names the agent JohnWallis (most likely a cover name). This agent has a complete knowledge of herlife, and government agents have taken photos of her during her supposedly”alien abduction” experiences. Christa is just one of hundreds ofvictims who have been programmed to adore Shirley MacLaine. (Christa ismentioned here because she is one case that this author is familiar with.)Warren Beatty, who peppers his speech with four-letter words was a student atthe Stella Adler Theater Studio in NYC.

Black, Shirley Temple. Shirley Temple Black sat on the Disney board ofdirectors (74-75). Her films were used for some of the early 40’s and‘50’s programming and teaching slaves body movements/dance. She marriedsomeone in an elite Network family from San Francisco named Charles A. Black.Charles A. Black was a Lt. Col. in the Pentagon who lived at Bethesda, MD. WasShirley an early example of brain-stem scarring to get geniuses? Shirley’sbrother appears to have developed “Multiple Sclerosis” from brainstem-scarring. It was Shirley Temple who co-founded the International Federationof Multiple Sclerosis Societies, and was a member of its exec. committee.Shirley represented the U.S. at the UN General Assembly in 1969, belongs to theSierra Club, and has been decorated with the Cross of Malta. Shirley has shownclues that she may be an Illuminati mind-controlled child protege.

Stephen Bollenbach. Bollenbach was part of Walt Disney management, and was akey figure who helped engineer Disney’s $19 billion buyout of the CIA’sCapital Cities/ABC, as well as sell the idea to Eisner. He is the CEO of theNetwork’s Hilton Hotels Corp. He recently has been involved with trying to buyITT, in order to put together the world’s largest hotel-casino combination.Bollenbach has an extensive background with the gaming-gambling industry. Whenthe Justice Dept. began looking into the merger of Disney with Cap. Cities/ABC,Bollenbach resigned his Disney position. Some people feel his resignation wasneeded for Disney to get the Justice Dept. to approve the merger, because hispast was vulnerable to be exposed.

Warren Buffett. A major stockholder in Walt Disney. He also owns 40% ofBerkshire Hathaway Inc. which also owns lots of shares of Disney stock.According to S.F. Examiner, Buffett himself owns 24 million shares of Disney.Warren Buffett is part of the Ak-Sar-Ben fraternity and Monarch slave abuserswho were exposed in the Nebraska Saving & Loan scandal. He is perhaps thesecond richest man in the nation, and too powerful for anyone to touch. In thekingpin vs. kingpin battles, some people close to the inside see Buffett as agood guy. Readers need to study the Lincoln Savings & Loan scandal and thescandals connection to programmed child slaves at Boy’s Town to get moreinformation on this Disney stockholder. Robert G. Hagstrom, Jr., who is theportfolio manager of the mutual fund Focus Trust, which has shares in WaltDisney, wrote the book The Warren Buffett Way. Hagstrom has a chapter on Disneyin his The Warren Buffett Way. He quotes Buffett as extremely enthusiastic aboutDisney’s merger with Capital Cities/ABC. Because of his enthusiasm Buffettsays, “The odds are extremely high that we will have a very large amount ofDisney stock.”

Salvador Dali–This strange surrealist Spanish artist was a friend of WaltDisney. After Salvador was kicked out of Spain for Franco’s belief that he wasa communist, he came to America, and worked with Disney Studios in 1946.Salvador, an eccentric who had no particular work habits, described himself,”The only difference between me and a madman is that I’m not amadman.”

The Tommy Dorsey Band–This band has had a number of men in it who areMind-control slave abusers associated with the Network. Frank Sinatra, a sexualslave user, got his big break with this band. This band performed at Disneylandin 1984 at the Plaza Gardens. Tommy Dorsey was part of the Network’s in-crowd.When he was on a USO Tour with Bob Hope, he stabbed actor Joe Hall and threw himout of a window. Joe had to have 32 stitches. But Joe didn’t get justice, thejudge dismissed his case against Tommy.

Michael Dammann Eisner, Chairman at Disney is a CIA asset and connected tothe mob. Some insiders believe he is connected to elements of the CIA & mobthat are anti-NWO. Even so, these anti-NWO factions also employ mind-control.Eisner ignored a threat by Red China to boycott Disney products if he made amovie about the nation Tibet that China controls with draconian force. The U.N.,the Commerce Dept. and the State Dept. all tried unsuccessfully to get him toback down on the film. A paper trail connecting Michael Eisner and Walt DisneyCo. to mind control is their support of the Boys & Girls Club of NapaValley, which is used for a supply of children for pedophilia and mind-control.The Boy’s & Girls Club is used to supply caddies for the Silverado CountryClub, where these children are also used as mind-controlled slaves for thesexual perversions of the elite. Notice that Napa’s Silverado Country Clubinvites in celebrities (such as CIA asset Pat Boone, Joe DiMaggio, ex-husband ofsex slave Marilyn Monroe, Engelbert Humberdinck a slave handler, Digger Phelps,Notre Dame’s coach who uses slaves, and Jack Vale nti CEO of Motion PictureAssoc. & Bohemian Grover) for a golf tournament which is billed as a“benefit for the Boys & Girls Club”. The benefit for child slaves isthey get to caddie & sexually service elite perverts.

Michael (bn. March 7,‘42 in NY) came from old American money of a family that has been richmerchants and lawyers. Michael grew up in luxurious Park Ave. as well as hisfamily’s “country place” in Bedford Hills near Mt. Kisco, NY. Hewent to an elite private school Allen-Stevenson, which is famous for itschildren’s orchestra. At the age of 14, he then went to Lawrenceville School,which is a prep-school for Princeton, whose tuition in ’56 was $3,000.Eisner’s class incl. NY’s governor’s son, and other sons of powerful men,such as the son of Saudi Prince Turqi al-Faisal. The school is a prep school for theestablishment’s entertainment industry. Students are only allowed to see theirparents on major holidays. Eisner was in the Periweg Club, the school’s dramasociety. His poor scholastic performance meant that he had to go to a smallliberal arts college, rather than Princeton or Harvard such as was familytradition. For instance, his grandfather had attended Phillips Exerter Academyand Harvard. His grandfather has serve in many govt. commissions and belonged tothe Harvard Club, the American Club in London as well as some yacht clubs.Between his junior & senior year in high school, Eisner was a page atNBC’s HQ in the Rockefeller Center.

In 1966, he landed a job in theprogramming department of ABC. He had an influential position. Eisner had onegood break for deciding TV programming. He was 21 when the target audience was21 years old, and when he was 35, the target age of the film industry was then35. He has been described as having “supernatural enthusiasm” coupledto a lifetime quest for untested ideas.

Rich H. Frank, was Executive Vice-President with Walt Disney until his suddenresignation about a year before this was written. He worked side by side withKatzenberg and left after Katzenberg resigned in a dispute with Disney’schairman Eisner. Rich Frank was President of Walt Disney’s TV-Media Division.He acquired the estate of VanHoffenwiggen, when VanHoffenwiggen fled the countryand vanished when Lendvest began to be exposed. VanHoffenwiggen was a majorfigure involved with Lendvest Mortgage Inc., a drug-laundering operation anddrug smuggling operation operating out of Napa Valley. It was also the fastestgrowing real estate mortgage company in northern California until its drugsmuggling began to be exposed. Lendvest did some tricks ala Nugen Hand Bank.Millions of dollars of investors and creditors have disappeared leaving lots ofhurting people, and the mortgage company filed for protection from creditors inU.S. Bankruptcy court, and is still in operation.

International financier Edmond Safra’s private bank, the Republic National Bank of NY, launders money fromthe Medellin drug cartel. Safra’s bank sent Lendvest lots of crisp new $100bills. The Safras are tied in with the Rothschilds. (The Safras are reportedlyrecent property owners in St. Helena near Napa (through Good Wine Co. which isthe Spring Mountain Wineries), near where Lendvest was HQed. Edmond’s nephew,Jacob Safra, has a partnership in Napa Valley’s Good Wine Co.

TheRothschild’s Citicorp gave Republic National Bank the transaction ability toissue international (world) bearer bonds (“bank notes”) TheLuxembourg/Belgium branch of Bank Nacional de Paris issued a bearer bond thatwas connected the Lendvest drug running operation. In Britain, a U.S. citizenMike Spire ran the British operation of Lendvest and InVest. LandVest’s parentwas InVest which has operated in the U.K., Switz., Saudi Arabia & Paraguay.Long story made short, Lendvest has been an international CIA-Mafia drug runningoperation, with Illuminati overtones and connections to it.

With all this inmind, it is strange, that Walt Disney’s President of its TV-Media Division,Rich Frank, bought the palatial mansion of John O. Van Hoffenwiggen after VanHoffenwiggen disappeared from the country when indictments and arrests began tobe made of people connected to Lendvest. According to insiders, Rich Frank isalso one of a number of Napa Valley people involved in illegal labelling ofwines. Rich Frank was a key figure in Disney’s programming venture with threeregional Bell Telephone companies (Ameritech, Bell South, & SBC Commun.)coming together. Bell Telephone wanted to get into cable TV. Michael Ovitzformed a rival group of 3 other Bell Telephone co.s. Calvin Robinson, who tiedin with Land Vest, worked with Boyce, who in turn worked for TRW Co., in RedondoBeach, CA. Boyce was sentenced to 40 years for selling US surveillance secrets to the soviets.

Daniel Hillis, the co-founder of a supercomputer producer Thinking Machinesfrom MIT, is in charge of the Walt Disney Imagineering unit. Hillis helpedDisney develop a virtual-reality ride at Disneyland based on the Aladdincartoon.

Jeffrey Katzenberg, has been the chairman of Disney’s movie studio, is anaggressive worker, a model Type A person. “Ask 50 people to describe JeffreyKatzenberg, and most will say tenacious. ‘If Jeffrey were any more aggressive,he’d be in jail.” says the producer Dan Melnick.” ( Harmetz, Aljean,”Who Makes Disney Run?”, NY Times. Feb. 7, ‘88, p. 29.) Katzenbergis the father of twins, which people joke was typical of his efficiency.Katzenberg supervised the production of Star Trek. Most of his movies have beenbox office successes. In the ‘70’s, Katzenberg worked for NY Mayor JohnLindsay.

Sanford Martin Litvack. Sanford is the Executive Vice Pres. of Disney and incharge of “Human Resources” for the corporation. He is a Jewish lawyerwho was educated at the Jesuits’ Georgetown Univer. He is on the bd of dir, ofBet Tzedek.

Vincent Price. Price has been one of the major influential occultists who hasprovided the world with many occult horror books and scripts. He worked forDisney some, and was the voice for Ratigan in The Great Mouse Detective. VincentPrice’s good friend John Hay Whitney is an Illuminati kingpin and vice-pres.of the Pilgrim Society and was raised into the Illuminati through the YaleScroll & Key fraternity. His friend Whitney likes horror movies.

The Osmond Brothers. Merrill Osmond’s boys were “discovered” atDisneyland when they were visiting the site in 1962. The Disney people on MainSt. just “happened” to recognize the talent of the five boys andsigned them up soon for their first professional singing contract. The OsmondBoys did some television appearances for Disneyland such as Meet Me atDisneyland, and Disneyland after Dark. (Considering the mind-control programmingdone to these Osmund children, these TV shows were a cruel joke.) Of the singingOsmond kids, Donny is the next to the youngest, and his sister Marie is theyoungest. Both Donny and his sister Marie are programmed multiples who areslaves, who have been subjected to a lot of abuse. They have good front alters.Their father has made millions from drugs, porn and white slavery and is part ofthe Mormon Illuminati front. The Mormon front of the Illuminati has gotten a lotof good publicity off of the Osmonds. They sang for Andy Williams whose Frenchwife was once arraigned on murder charges. Later they sang for the satanicNetwork’s Lawrence Welk show. Swedish accented Lawrence Welk has been part ofthe Network. Marie Osmond has grown up, and she has adopted 3 of her 5 childrenin spite of her busy singing schedule which includes approx. 200 singing shows ayear at places like Mafia controlled Atlantic City. In terms of occult families,adopted children are often programmed children, so this is a clue that herchildren have been programmed too.

Michael Ovitz. Ovitz was the no. 2 man at Walt Disney for a while until nearthe end of ’96. Michael Ovitz was a high school classmate in VanNuys, CA withMichael Milken (later the junk-bond wizard), & there are many of the samepeople connected to both men. When Michael Ovitz’s National Mercantile Bancorp(a saving & loan) began getting into the quicksand of several lawsuits &scandals, attorney Robert Strauss represented him. Illuminati member RobertStrauss has been a lawyer connected with drug running & the mafia. He wasalso an FBI agent from ’41 to ’45 with Hoover. He is admitted to the Wash.D.C. bar.

Pres. Bush appointed him U.S. Ambassador to Russia. He has been onthe board of dir, of the Illuminati’s PepsiCo, Archer-Daniels-Midland (ADM),and General Instruments (which have been exposed in other writings by thisauthor.) He was also a board member of the Illuminati-mafia run MCA. Strauss isseen in Wash. D.C. as a behind the scenes power broker. Strauss representedMichael Milken associate Ronald 0. Perelman, Chrmn. of Revlon, who made a $600mil. killing off of the 1st Gibraltar S&L. Strauss represented MCA, whichthe Bronfmans took over in 1995. The book Knoedelsder, William. Stiffed-The TrueStory of MCA, The Music Business, and the Mafia. NY: HarperCollins Pub., 1993,does an good job of connecting MCA to the mob, the Network, and Iran Contra. Seeespecially page 442. Time magazine 2/24/97 carried a page long story aboutMichael Ovitz being out of a job. In the article, they reported that he wasspending time on his new yacht The Illusion, visiting Joe Silver’s estate inSo. Carolina, visiting his property in Aspen, CO, and eating lunch withinvestment adviser Richard Salomon of Spears, Benzak, Salomon & Farrell.Gordon Crawford of the Capital Group is quoted in the article praising Ovitz,and saying he would invest in an Ovitz venture.

Ovitz is believed to be mafia bypeople in a place to know. He has also been known to threaten people using mafiaterms, for instance, Vanity Fair (12/’96, p. 272) reports Ovitz threateningBernie Brillstein, a producer, with his “foot solders”. The SanFrancisco Chronicle (Fri., 1/26/’96, p. D20) quotes the latest issue ofColumbia Journalism Review about an incident where a reporter Anita Busch whowas investigating Ovitz got violently sick from the MSG in her food as sheinterviewed him. To top off it all off, Ovitz followed up her story whichquestioned his actions, by sending her a gift wrapped package of MSG with aone-word note: “Enjoy.”. Michael Ovitz has had the clout to deal withIlluminati kingpin Edgar Bronfman head to head. He requested & got Bronfmanto keep his dad employed, which was dutifully done. Edgar Bronfman Jr. hadseriously considered having Ovitz head Seagram’s MCA/Universal conglomerate.

Frank G. Wells. Frank was the President & the Chief Operating Officer ofThe Walt Disney Co. Wells was also on Disney’s board of directors. He was aRhodes Scholar, and a lawyer in 1955. Those who have read previous books (suchas Vol. 1) by this author know how the Rhodes Scholars fit into things & arepart of the Illuminati. He worked closely with Eisner & Katzenberg. Frankdied in a helicopter crash in the spring of 1994 while heli-skiing in Nevada.His surviving sister is Molly Wells Chappellet who runs around in Illuminaticircles. Molly Wells Chappellet has been featured several times in Betty KnightScripp’s magazine Appellation. Betty Knight Scripp was married to a BohemianGrove member. Betty has been good friends with: the late Pamela Harriman (whowas a recent U.S. ambassador to France & connected to the Rothschilds), aswell as good friends with Her Imperial Highness the Grand Duchess of Vladmir ofRussia, who owns the Chateau Margaux in Bordeaux. Betty Scripps personallymonitors with care what is put into her incredible magazine Appellation. She hasa column “Who’s Who in the Wine Country” where the Chappellets haveappeared in print numerous times.

Nearly all of Disney’s 1920 movies had a black cat in them. Many had occultslants to the scripts. The occult slant never departed from Disney themes.

Some of DISNEY’S blatantly OCCULT MOVIES.

Aladdin. A wisecracking allpowerful genie is shown.

Bednobs & Broomsticks (1971) A witch finds a magic formula from a lionking. The magic formula raises a ghostly army of armor in a museum which stops aband of German commandos.

Beyond Witch Mountain (1982) A pair of twins leave Witch’s Mountain andhave to use their special occult powers to outwit a character named Deranian.

The Black Cauldron (1985), A Horned King uses his magic to fight aclairvoyant pig and the pig’s keeper. This animation cost $25 million, but wasa box office failure.

Bride of Boogedy (1987) An evil spirit visits the Davis family and puts thefather under a spell. Directed by Oz Scott.

Child of Glass (1978) A glass doll must be found to set a ghost free in ahaunted house.

The Gnome-Mobi1e (1967). A multimillionaire and his grandchildren encountergnomes. In the end the multimillionaire deeds the forest to the gnomes foreternity.

Halloween Hall of Fame (1977). Jack-o-lanterns come to life.

Halloween Treat (1982). Cartoons about Halloween. This was followed the nextyear with a film Haunted Halloween which talked about the origins of Halloween.

Misadventures of Merlin Jones (1964) A genius tries to help other students.He tries to also use hypnotism & ESP which backfire on him.

Richest Cat in the World (1986) A wealthy man leaves his fortune to his cat,who the relatives later discover can talk.

H. DISNEY & its MOB connections

When this author spoke to the co-author’s deeper Illuminati alters aboutDisney, their reaction was that Disney had been described to them when they werein the Illuminati as “a syndicate within a syndicate.” They said thatwhile in the Illuminati, they were aware that Disneyland had their owngovernment, their own rules and their own police force. They were a crimesyndicate within a syndicate. What these Illuminati alters casually mentioned,was verified by this author the hard way through research. One DisneylandSecurity Supervisor said, “There is no Constitution at Disneyland. We haveour own laws.” Once, when Walt Disney got miffed at a Hollywood policeman,Walt said, “I’ll have your badge.” If Disney guards decide to, theywill get very rough physically with people, and assault them in any fashion theysee fit. The people they detain are often thrown into tiny cells at Disneylandwhere they are kept without benefit of a phone call, without benefit of a toiletor water.

The judicial system turns a blind eye to whatever Disney police do.Many people pay Disney to get their children out of a Disney cell, and never getdue process of any law. This type of treatment has gone on for decades, and isalmost a daily occurrence at Disneyland. The Anaheim Police force is very chummywith the Disney private police force. Also at one point, the Burbank Chief ofPolice was the brother-in-law to Disney’s Chief of Security. Recently, when acouple filed a wrongful death suit against the Magic Kingdom of Disney inFlorida, the state of Florida surprisingly has appeared to have backed off fromtheir traditional behavior of protecting Disney’s sovereignty. An article onthe suit said, “”there is evidence of some nervousness with Disney’srelative autonomy.”” (San Francisco Chronicle, article”Mickey’s Dark Side” Oct. 1, ’96, p. C6) An attorney in the casesaid, “Disney World’s security people aren’t just cops, they are badones. I don’t think there is any corporation that has ever had the perceivedpower that Disney has.”

Richard Foglesong, a professor of politics at Rollins College in Winter Park stated, “Because Disney Worldcontrols so much of its corporate and municipal universe, it can’t help butact in a heavy-handed manner in order to ferociously protect its self-interest.They have immunity from state and local land use law. They can build a nuclearplant, distribute alcohol. They have powers local communities don’t have. Dothey abuse it? In my opinion, yes.”

In line with Disney’s previousdictatorial policies on their properties, Disney’s new city called Celebrationwill not have any elected government. Since the city is unincorporated (a neatDisney trick) the mayor is appointed by Disney. Several Disney”quasi-government’” bodies control citizens of the city. Forinstance, the Celebration Residential Owners Association, which participates inbinding all residents to a Declaration of Covenants, a legal binder of rulesthat residents must live by. Of course the Declaration of Covenants was writtenby Disney. These rules include such nit picky things as, no more than two peoplecan sleep in the same bedroom, no pickup trucks can be parked in front of homes,and if Disney officials don’t like your cat or dog they can forcibly removethe animal from your home. Disney Corp. has perpetrated numerous deceptions onthe residents, incl. shoddy work on their homes, and operating their””public”” school with Disney cronies. Still, the residentsthat have moved into Celebration are glowing with praise for the town in spiteof the fact that the city is totally run by Big Brother Disney Corp. Of coursethose who don’t love it, soon leave. So much for the American tradition ofself-government.

Some MOB HISTORY.

Traditionally, the mob crime bosses have had a yearly summit. In 1928, theyhad their yearly conclave at Cleveland. In 1929, they had their secret yearlyconclave at Atlantic City. In 1931, they held their secret annual conclave atWappingers Falls, NY. At the Wappingers Falls meeting, attended by about 300overlords and soldiers, the heads of the family clans discussed their crimefamily agendas. They decided where the first national Mafia convention was to beheld. Once the Mafia was able to hold their yearly private national meetings,they were able to coordinate their activities, as well as decide such things as:

a. the direction of national & internal operations, and long range plans

b. the promotion of new bosses

c. decisions on turf & rank, commodities & cash

d. hashing out alliances or disputes with the Mishpucka, Triads, FBI,Illuminati, etc. and working with others in a concerted manner. The mafia clanswould then leave the annual summit meetings and follow through in their area ofoperations, until they would meet the next year, review their successes &failures, get new assignments, and decide upon new short & long term goals.In 1927, the Mishpucka worked with Mafia to highjack a bootleg shipment ofwhiskey travelling from Ireland to Boston for the Kennedy Illuminati family.Most of Kennedy’s guards were killed in the shootout, and J.P. Kennedy had thewidows of the guards besieging him for financial assistance. Billy Graham’sgood friend Mafia Chief Joseph Bonanno was one of the chiefs who attended theyearly conclaves. He also met with J.F. Kennedy in the Winter of 1959. JohnKennedy was known to have said that mobster Sam Giancana worked for his Kennedyfamily. The mob/Illuminati alliances and infighting are too complex to deal within this book, but both groups had to put plans into action to deal with therepeal of Prohibition, which would end their lucrative bootlegging. The shortterm plan for the Mafia was to control the film industry in Hollywood, and topenetrate the unions better. The long term plans called for sending their nextfew generations of children off to the top schools and getting them intolegitimate respectable corporate positions. By learning the ins andouts of honest, legal operations, they could then mix in the illegaloperations with their legal ones & look legal.

They planned to extend theirpower base into politics, the Harvard-Stanford business schools, as well as thefinest corporate board rooms. They intended (and have succeeded) in getting someof their offspring to produce/direct T.V./films. They would have an increasingpresence within the Bohemian Grove membership, as well as some of the othergreat social & business clubs. Their plan to take over the film industryhinged on their union control over unions and theaters. The Chicago mobcontrolled the International Alliance of Theatrical Stage Employees Union. Themob controlled the projectionist’s union, and if the film makers had thetheaters where their movies were shown shut down, what good would it be to makemovies? The film makers and the mafia both had power & money. Rather thanfight a protracted war, they made a deal. The major studios would give about$50,000 a year to the mafia, and the small ones $25,000, to be allowed tofunction. Other agreements were also reached. Mob henchmen Willie Bioff andGeorge E. Browne were mob lieutenants who orchestrated the mob’s”Hollywood takeover”.

Time Magazine, Nov. 1, 1943, wrote, “In the witness chair in Manhattan’s Federal Court sat bland, wilyWillie Bioft (pronounced Buy-off), blackmailer, panderer, labor leader, and nowstar witness against eight ex-pals, who are charged with shaking down $1 millionfrom the movie industry…Question: Was it true that Bioft once had a five-yearplan for taking over 20% of Hollywood’s profits-and eventually 50% interest Inthe studios themselves? Bioff (wistfully): “If we’d lasted that long, wewould have. Question: “Did you ever say you were boss of Hollywood andcould make producers do whatever you wanted?” Bioff: “Yes-and I couldmake them dance to my tune.”

Although Bioff rolled over on his pals andended up getting car bombed, that didn’t stop the mob/Mishpucka infiltration& control of Hollywood. (Bioff had tried to save his public image by helpingWalt Disney settle his labor dispute with the mob-led unions, but Walt wiselyrejected his offer of help, and made sure he didn’t offend the Chicago mobleaders who were disgruntled with Bioff.) Hundreds of millions of dollars werepoured by the Mafia & Mishpucka into real estate in southern California, byusing legitimate local businessmen to launder the money. Hollywood was declareda “free zone” where all the Mafia/Mishpucka families could operatewithout a fear of a turf war.”

Let us backtrack slightly to 1930. Columbia distributed Disney cartoons from1930 until 1932, when Disney switched to United Artists, because Columbiawasn’t bothering to pay Disney the money they owed. In 1930, Cohn, Pres. ofColumbia Pictures, got Disney off the financial hook with Powers by intimidatingPowers with some street toughs carrying a legal suit. If Disney wasn’tindebted to the mafia before, he was at that point.

Biographers have beenpuzzled why Disney went into such a traumatic depression after Henry Cohn”helped” him. Tough guy Henry Cohn made sure Walt knew who was boss.His attitude was that Walt should be happy to be paid at all by him for thecartoons Walt supplied Columbia. After this, Walt would lock himself in his roomand weep uncontrollably for hours. He was impossible for anyone to get alongwith. He was unable to focus on anything, and would stare for long periods outthe window. Biographers blame Walt’s behavior on the fact that his wife waspregnant. They also blame it on his friend Iwerks defection to another company.Frankly, Walt had treated Iwerk like a dog, and deep down must have known whyIwerk left such an abusive relationship. To claim that he wept for hours dayafter day because he realized he might become a father is too much to swallow.When Walt was asked years later about why he was so depressed he said it was thestress of the financial situation. Walt said, “I had a nervous breakdown …Costs were going up; each new picture we finished cost more to make than we hadfigured it would earn when we first began to plan it…I cracked up.”

This author submits to the reader that part of his breakdown may have indeedbeen the financial stress from having come under the heel of the mafia. They hadall the means to make or break him, and he had no choice but to surrender totheir overwhelming power to blackmail & destroy him OR to get out of thebusiness. What this did was place Walt in a position where his two strongesttraits had to clash–his overwhelming obsession to be his own boss, and hiscreative obsession to create animation which was wrapped up with his ego &his deep phobias and psychological needs. His mind couldn’t give up itsindependence nor its creativity without great mental anguish, and therefore Waltwas very saddened, knowing that he would have to admit defeat, and buckle underthe heels of the big boys. Just when he needed emotional support his wife wasgoing to have a child, and his best animator left. Walt had abandoned Iwerksyears before, and Walt’s wife had wanted a child for some time. Iwerk’sdeparture and his arriving child do not in themselves account for the longintense nervous breakdown that Walt experienced. Biographers point out that Waltwas very reluctant to have children, and that he was impotent with womenincluding his wife much of the time. His impotency to carry out normal sex mayhelp explain his secret sexual habits.

Walt’s Masonic brother Carl Laemmleoffered Walt a good deal to help him recover from Henry Cohn’s abusive controlof Walt, but Carl wanted the copyright to Mickey Mouse in return for the help,and Walt wouldn’t part with Mickey Mouse. Instead, Walt signed a contractoffered by Joseph Schenck of UA (United Artists), who was one of the Mafia’sillegal drug kingpins. In 1935, the mob’s illegal drug dealer Joseph Schenckwent on to found 20th Century, Inc. which later merged with Fox in ‘38 to formTwentieth Century-Fox, whose board of directors would include two Illuminatikingpins William Randolph Hearst and Malcolm MacIntyre. Joseph Schenck’sbrother Nicholas Schenck and Marcus Loew merged Metro Pictures and GoldwynPictures and named Louis B. Mayer as its head.

Meanwhile over the years, MCA,headed up by Illuminati Kingpin Lew Wasserman gained a monopoly over theAmerican film industry with the secret backroom deals that they made with RonaldReagan’s Screen Actor’s Guild and Petrillo’s American Fed, of Musicians.(By the way, Lew Wasserman would try to revive Reagan’s acting career in theearly ‘60’s. Frank Sinatra and Walt Disney were both friends of RonaldReagan, and all three believed in mind-control.)

Ronald Reagan and Petrillo inturn worked with the Mafia’s NCS Council of 9 (which incl. Anthony Accardo andSam Giancana), which at one point divided the U.S. into 24 mob territories.After J. Schenck went to jail (very briefly), he was replaced as Pres. of20th-Cent. Fox by Spyros Skouras. Before his arrest, while Schenck was still incharge of 20th-Cent. Fox, he made numerous offers to Disney for Disney toincorporate his studio as a subdivision of 20th-Cent. Fox. Disney worked for afew years with them distributing his films, but he would not let go of trying tobe independent. The FBI and American Intelligence turned to the mob to help themas the U.S. entered WW II. Perhaps Walt’s mob connection added impetus for hisrecruitment. Walt went to a number of American Nazi meetings prior to PearlHarbor. This author believes from knowing Walt’s personality that Walt mayhave been on assignment, rather than a Nazi sympathizer. Still, why does one ofDisney’s pre-Pearl harbor cartoons display a swastika? Disney’s EpcotResorts is close to the mob’s Atlantic City Board Walk with its nightclubs.The resort was designed by Robert A.M. Stern. (This author doesn’t know aboutRobert Stern, but there are programmed multiples and Illuminati members withinthe Stern family.)

At Walt Disney World, the nightclub there was named “Cage”, and then later ’8 TRAX”. ComedyWarehouse, which is a nightclub at Pleasure Island in Walt Disney World openedon May 1, 1989 and has used slave comedians as well having people who aremind-control abusers. On Feb. 11, 1987, Walt Disney Co. was reincorporated inDelaware. Delaware is the only state that allows total corporate secrecy. No onecan find out who really is running a Delaware corporation, and many othersecrets can be hidden under Delaware’s corporation laws. Capital Group hasconsiderable shares in Disney, as well as 29% of the shares of the RobertMondavi winery at 7801 St. Helena Hwy, Oakville, CA. Wellington Group and Mellonbank also have shares. Behind Capital Group are mob controlled groups likeDebartolo Reality Corp. and La Quinta Inns (a Bass bro. operation.) Sam Bronfmanoperates Sterling & Monterey Vineyards. There are countless people walkingaround that have felt the ruthless, impersonal, controlling, money-grabbing sideof the Disney Corp. Also, there are a number of journalists who have experiencedfirst hand the secrecy and paranoia that the Disney corporation has. Mostjournalists are not used to the secrecy that pervades Disney. Because Disney hasshaped the myths of America for several generations, the public takes moreconcern over who is running Disney, than they would other institutions. Becausemost of America believe in the image that the Illuminati have built for Disney,they are rooting for it to succeed.

How the Disney Executives have figured out how to steal land all across theU.S.

Over the years Walt Disney has developed several very sneaky reliabletechniques to acquire land. They acquire land through their executives and largestockholders and family members of the execs and stockholders. After all thedeals are made in an area, and when everything is in place over a period oftime, these people then turn their land over to Disney. Disney works withgovernment officials and local bankers to line up special deals so they cansucceed in their plans. After everything is lined up, the corporation announcestheir plans and goes forward. This methodology has been used repeatedly, forinstance the American History Theme Park in the Manassas Civil War battlefieldarea of Virginia for which Disney has acquired 1,800 acres and has access to atleast 1,200 more. In Nov. ‘94, after a new Virginia governor was elected, theVirginia “Disney’s America” project was announced, and Virginiavoted almost instantly for the money for transportation and infrastructureimprovements to the area so that Disney’s theme park would be viable. Disneyset up 3 banks in Napa, CA. Their banks made loans to old families in thevalley. The trusts and the wills for these families were made up by StanfordUniv. grads. These people set on the boards of these banks or connect with theboards of these banks. They charge large fees, and know every trick in the bookto rob people of their estates and their living trusts. The Stanford grads, whoconnect in with intelligence agencies & the mob use certain code words whenthey set up their businesses, such as RESOURCE, EVERGREEN and PACIFIC. There area number of scared landholders who are being intimidated to sell their land inthe Napa Valley region.

DISNEY and the GOVERNMENT

Just prior to W.W. II, the FBI recruited Walt Disney. His job was to spy onHollywood or anything else that looked suspicious. Documents obtained from theFreedom of Information Act, in spite of heavy censoring, clearly show that WaltDisney became a paid Special Correspondent asset of the FBI. He reported to FBIagent E.E. Conroy. In 1954, Walt was promoted to Special Agent in Charge (SAC)which means others reported to him.

After “leaving” the CIA, ex-DCI (ex-head) of the CIA WilliamHedgcock Webster became a lawyer for the Wash. D.C. based firm of Milbank,Tweed, Hadley and McCloy. In 1993, when news broke about Walt Disney’s FBImembership, ex-CIA head Webster worked with the Disney family to cover up to thepublic that Walt Disney was an FBI agent. Webster went on TV and had interviewsto spread the fabrication that Walt was not connected to the FBI. Why? One ofthe countless items that Disney was involved in was the investigation into thedisappearance/rape of a six-year old child Rose Marie Riddle on 1/12/61.

According to documents gotten from the Freedom of Information Act, W.G. Simonwas the FBI agent who met with SAC Walt Disney in L.A. about the case. W.G.Simon has been one of those people who has been publicly lying by claiming thatWalt Disney never was an FBI agent. The paper trail proves otherwise. Why is itso important to the FBI and CIA to cover up that Walt was an FBI agent? Waltalso worked for the CIA, even though documentation of that is not available.This author theorizes that the reason the FBI and CIA are so touchy aboutletting people know that Walt worked for the government is that the Networkknows how the FBI and CIA worked together to procure children for mind-controlprogramming purposes. Because Disney and Disneyland played such as enormous rolein Mind-control, Disney’s connection to them, although on the surface aseemingly minor fact, is in reality a minor fact setting on top of an enormousghastly secret.

When W.W. II started, the government incorporated the Disneystudios into the war machine. The military paid Disney $80,000 for 20 trainingcartoon, which cost Disney $72,000 to make. Disney studios also made some secretfilms for the military. Mickey Mouse and Goofy cartoons were slanted to have warthemes, for instance, the Goofy cartoon of 1941 “The Art of Self Defense” and “How to be a Sailor” in 1944. Perhaps in honor ofthe contribution Disney had made to the war effort, “Mickey Mouse” wasthe password of the Allies for millions of men on the big D-Day invasion on June6,1944.

Walt Disney produced a cartoon showing Donald Duck paying his taxesfaithfully. The film was entitled The New Spirit. It was very successful ingetting Americans to comply with the IRS. In 1946, Disney made a film for thepublic schools for sex education entitled The Story of Menstruation. For theUnited Nations, Walt Disney created “It’s a Small World” attractionfor UNICEF for the ‘64-65 World’s Fair. This attraction was moved to thetheme parks & has been a major feature for mind-control. After learning ofthe enormous amount of mind-control programming going on during after hours insecret tunnels at Disney as well as in the public facilities, it makes moresense why the Russian Premier Nikita Khrushchev would be denied a visit toDisneyland by the U.S. government “due to security considerations”when he was visiting the U.S. in Sept. 1959. Khrushchev obviously had his ownsecurity working in tandem with American security and the intelligence peoplefor whatever reason(s) didn’t want the complication of these Russians going toa major programming site.

Some powerful military men have been connected toDisney films. Two former commanding officers of the USS Alabama nuclear sub weretechnical advisors for the Disney film Crimson Tide. Walt Disney was tied to theU.S. government, and recent disclosures show that he was tied to the FBI. Waltused his FBI connection to destroy the life of Art Babbitt, who had led thestrike against Disney in 1940. Babbitt found that everything he attempted inlife after the strike was ruined by some hidden power. Was Walt part of navalintelligence attached to the FBI? Was he part of the FBIthat is involved with child procurement and mind-control?

In the 1950’s theIlluminati began organizing covens on the West coast and began solidifying theirpower. (This comes from several independent sources.) Likewise, it’s clearthat Disney didn’t have the clout in 1953 with local governments, that it doestoday. Walt Disney was unsuccessful when he tried to get permission from thecity of Los Angeles and the Burbank City Council for the construction ofDisneyland (called Disneylandia at that time), in the Burbank area. One Burbankcouncilman told Walt, “We don’t want the carny atmosphere inBurbank.”” Inconsistently, within a few years they gave permission toUniversal to build an amusement park in Burbank, which opened in 1964. Disneythen ask the Stanford Research Institute to locate a spot for Disneylandia(Disneyland), which they found at Anaheim.

In recent years, Disney decided theywanted to build another amusement park (called California Adventure) across fromDisneyland. In order to do so, the Interstate highway will have to have changes,and the Anaheim city council needed to approve the large 55 acre expansion. Incontrast to the Burbank City Council in 1953, Anaheim’s City Council wasenthusiastic about the expansion in spite of lots of local opposition. Thelocals complained at council meetings to the City Council that the city had nobusiness going hundreds of millions of dollars into debt to help a corporategiant. (Anaheim will issue $400 million in bonds.) Locals also raised concernsthat the public school system in Anaheim is stressed to the breaking point wherethey are considering going to half days, and that Disney Corporation should giveas much consideration for the school children of Anaheim as they do to theirAmusement park. Disneyland’s Pres.

Paul Pressler bragged about Disney’s newCalifornia Adventure amusement park, “Disney’s California Adventure isreally a celebration of the fun, the beauty, the people and the accomplishmentsof this magical state. We really have set out to try to capture a bit of whatthe California dream is all about.” (Sounds like the dream is to be wealthyand control people. The elite would rather give us BREAD & CIRCUS than aneducation.) The Dragnet films were done in part at the Disney studios. In anOffice Memo from the 66-new LA SAC FBI agent to Hoover (12/16/54), which wasobtained via the Freedom of Information Act, the typed memo states, “Mr. Disneyhas volunteered representatives of this office complete access to the facilitiesof Disneyland for use in connection with official matters…” Historically,we now know that Disney’s use for “official matters” includedmind-control.

J. DISNEY & MIND CONTROL

Once the reader is familiar with the programming scripts, the reader merelyneeds to watch the Disney “Adventures in Wonderland” that come on TVin the morning to see Disney mind-control at work. Within a few minutes onemorning, this author had seen a white rabbit create “a world in yourmind” (the quote is what the show said!) with a ring, watched Alice gothrough the mirrors, watched a White Rabbit [the programmer] read a book to alittle girl, and the TV listener be told by the show “The White Rabbit isour only hope!” The deeper alters of Illuminati slaves who are programmedfor espionage, for spying & blackmail, & seduction & assassination,are given programming to live in a fantasy world. They never touch base withreality.

Much of this type of programming has gone on at Disneyland. Disneylandvisitors are taken in a boat where dolls sing an around-the-world theme song”It’s a small small world”. These doll world parts of the amusementparks are used for programming assassination & espionage alters. The song& dolls play important roles in these alter’s mind-control programming.Some slaves at around age 19, have this type of programming tested to make sure it is solidly in place. Thesong “It’s a Small World” was composed by the Sherman brothers forDisney originally as a theme song for a ride at the ’63-’65 NY World’sFair.

The Sherman brothers were talent that Disney discovered. They were born in NYC, and both graduated from Beverly Hills High School. They wrote Disney songsfor at least 29 films. Mind-controlled slaves, who repeatedly bump into eachother, but don’t know why, will be found saying, “It’s a small, smallworld.” Both rituals & programming go on at Disney amusement parksduring both the day & night.

Steven Rockefeller and Walt Disney travelledand spent time together with Dr. Hadley Cantril, an establishment expert onhuman behavior. (See There Was Once A Time of Islands, Illusions &Rockefellers. NY: Harcourt Brace Jovanovich, 1975.) When Walt Disney began WaltDisney World he sent Card Walker to the Florida capital to request quid pro quo,and the governor gave it to Disney. What that meant is that Disney’s propertyin Florida was totally controlled under Disney’s jurisdiction, they had theirown laws, their own police force, their own hospitals, and their own tax rate.No outside authority would interfere with Disney’s jurisdiction.DisneyWorld’s finances would be untouchable and out of sight by the state ofFlorida. Never had so much power been given away. DisneyWorld became its owncrime syndicate within the syndicate. Disney amusement parks are like a citywithin a city. They have there own security forces, and the local police allowthe Disney security forces to take care of their turf. Disney has their ownpolicies (laws). Some of the security forces can be identified in plain clotheswith clean-cut hair styles and have communication devices. The security forceshave a headquarters room where TV monitors display-live the exit points atDisney as well as other locations.

America ‘s Most Wanted has a fairly largefile on children who have been kidnapped at Disney Amusement Parks. One mother,who got separated from her child when getting off a train, frantically told aguard her child was missing. The guard took her to the monitor room, where theysaw the kidnapper carrying the child out of the park with the boy slumped overhis shoulder. In that short of a time, the kidnapper had drugged the child, cuthis hair different, and put a different shirt on him. (This anecdote was mentionin Inside the Mouse, pg. 52)

As written before, white slavery is part of whatDisney is all about. This mother was one of the fortunate few who did manage tofind their kidnapped children. An insider states that the Disney police aredefinitely part of those moving and abusing innocent children brought in foroccult rituals. In addition, the Disney security forces spy on their ownemployees. Employees do not enter the theme parks like the visitors, nor do theymove around like the visitors. They have underground tunnels and undergroundentrances and facilities for that. One victim of total mind-control mentionedthat a tunnel entrance was at the Matterhorn mountain at Disneyland. (TheMatterhorn was opened by Walt and his good-friend Richard Nixon, who rode in thefirst car down the mountain.)

The Disney productions has given the Illuminatithe cover to bring together Illusionists, magicians, and special effects artistswithout anyone being suspicious. Some of these men were able to apply theirtalents toward programming children. As an example of their talents, Disneyspecial effects artists were able to create 16 realistic-looking cadavers forthe 1989 film Gross Anatomy. Walt Disney, Inc. has teamed up with Los Alamos and Sandia Labs, two other groups which are heavily involved in mind-control andpeople control to develop body scans, branding and access codes for the visitorsto Disney’s theme parks.

Each of the Disney Theme parks, such as Disneyland, DisneyWorld, EuroDisney etc.have vast underground facilities. These underground facilities allow many ofthe workers to get to the ride areas via underground passages. Each themefacility also has a vast infrastructure underground in order to maintain it. Theunderground areas contain wardrobe design and repair units, fitting rooms,restrooms, cafeterias, security units, computers, freight ramps, utilityencasements, and large connecting tunnels. The underground areas also haveprogramming rooms. They have their own power plants and water systems and theirown police force. Disney company employs 71,000 people at several locations,tone recent TV show used the figure 40,000 Disney employees.] People are comingand going 24 hours at the Disney theme parks. Three shifts keep up the 24 hourbusiness. The night crews maintain and repair the parks for the thousands ofpeople that will soon arrive in the morning.

Disneyland makes a natural prop forcarrying out mind-control. The items they sell are also natural props–such asthe Goofy watch ($19.95) which has hands that move backward to confuse a slaveas to what time it is. Was Walt Disney aware of how Disneyland was used forprogramming? There is no doubt. Disney lived much of nights at Disneyland, andhad an apartment at the firehouse near the train station on Main St. At night,if he was not doing anything else, he’d roam the grounds of Disneylandscribbling notes on his own distinctive blue paper, which he’d leave forworkers to follow the next day. The notes would say such things as “Replacethese flowers,” or “Move that bench”. (Prince of the MagicKingdom, p. 25) Walt Disney knew everything that went on in his Magic Kingdom.

The Epcot Center and the Disney amusement parks market all kinds of occulttriggers, including crystals, rainbows, wizards etc. that reinforce theprogramming. The Epcot Center has two glass pyramids along with its”Journey into Imagination”. Disneyworld has the Island of Atlantis onits sub tour. Fantasyland is one of the most used tours of Disneyland formind-control purposes. It has carousels, merry music, an incredible castle, boatrides, story book characters etc. Sleeping Beauty Castle with its blue turretsand gold spires is the central visual object of Disneyland. You cross adrawbridge to get into it. Inside Fantasyland are Illuminati programming sitessuch as the Mad Hatter teacups, the King Arthur carousel horses, and SnowWhite’s forest.

In the far corner of Disneyland’s New Orlean’s Square isthe Haunted Mansion. This mansion is designed to frighten and scare, it has aningenious design and many special effects and illusions. Realistic ghosts, ascreeching raven, howling voices, and other scary things welcome the visitor.Life size holograms are created at the Haunted Mansion, and dance in sync withthe music and then fade out at certain points. There is a hologram of awoman’s head in a crystal ball who chatters non-stop. A real good laugh forthe programmers of a little child. When you are toward the end, you will have achance to look into a mirror where a hologram ghost will nestle up beside you.

Star Speeder is another great programming location at Disneyland. It was thecreation of George Lucas and the Disney Imagineers. The technology is borrowedfrom Star Wars, and is similar to flight simulators used by the military totrain pilots. Disneyland Hotel offers Character Breakfasts, where children eatbreakfast with Disney characters, to people who make special arrangements. U.S.Special Forces, which carries out mind-control, owns two hotels near DisneyWorld, and the Mormons have one also. Knott’s Berry Farm with its Ghost Town,Amusement Park, & its Charlie Brown themes and characters is nearDisneyland.

One of the Disney executives began one of the most horribletrauma-based mind-control programming centers in Los Angeles called Magic Castlea comedy warehouse. This trauma center had horrible torture chambers. Children were brought in fromSouth and Central America to be programmed at the Magic Castle. A brave L.A.policeman exposed the place–for which he lost his job, and eventually was ableto get the site closed.

One of Disney’s recent ventures in their DisneyInstitute, which Newsweek labeled “the Disneyland of the Mind”.(Newsweek, Mar. 4, 1996, p. 61) A private club called Club 33 at Disneylandlocated upstairs in the New Orleans Square is believed to be involved inmind-control. Cub’s Den supervises children’s activities at the WildernessLodge Resort at Walt Disney World. At Disney-MGM studios the major attraction isthe Twilight Zone Tower of Terror. Guests take a strange scary trip through thehotel, where guests are finally sent into an elevator that drops out of control13 stories. The ride has been advertized on TV. Disneyland now has a Temple to the Forbidden Eye–which is simply a Temple to the All Seeing Eye, the Illuminati symbol. Visitors, who have the patience to wait in line, can strap themselves in for a ride that is like a jack hammer that jars the rider through a temple filled with snakes, rats, and mummies. One aerobics teacher couldn’t walk for three days after the jarring ride, which comes across as“hokey”.The experience is more traumatizing than fun, but then maybe that is what wasintended.

DISNEY VACATIONS FOR THE ELITE

Years ago this author’s newsletters exposed Hilton Head Island, SC as awatering hole of the powerful elite incl. retired generals and admirals, and thesite for the elite’s Renaissance Weekend “meat market”. Remember,that at one time Hilton Head Island was private, with imported alligators in thewater around it. A person was only allowed on the island by going throughsecurity gates with a clearance. In a later newsletter, Disney’s Hilton HeadIsland Resort was mentioned. This resort, built by Disney Vacation Development,Inc., is located on a 15-acre private island linked to Hilton Head island by anarrow bridge. Members to the Disney Vacation Club can exchange time forvacations at Disney and other resorts around the world. Memberships cost minimum$9,412.

Right smack across from the entrance to Disneyland is the Assembly of God’sMelodyland Christian Center, the birthplace of TEN (Trinity BroadcastingNetwork). The Assembly of God denomination has been heavily infiltrated by theIlluminati, and has been heavily used as a front for programmed slaves.

PaulCrouch, president of Trinity Broadcasting Systems, Inc., was affiliated with Melodyland in 1973 when TBS was getting started. At that time, Melodyland was arich heavily infiltrated charismatic church, with its share of programmedmultiples. In 1973, closet homosexual minister Jim Bakker, and his wife TammyFaye, a programmed multiple were with Paul Crouch in Anaheim at Melodyland. PaulCrouch had been the assistant pastor of Bakker’s home church in Muskegon, MI.Crouch’s right hand man was Alexander Valderrama, a charismatic RomanCatholic. TBS used an abandoned military base as their TV complex, using hangersas studios. In the early 70’s, ABC put Bakker & Crouch’s early shows ontheir affiliate stations on Sunday morning. Bakker had already gotten his careerkicked off with Illuminatus Pat Robertson and his 700 Club. Jim Bakker split andwent to the east coast. To help Bakker with his money, Bill Perkins, who hadbeen a financial analyst for the World Order’s mind-control research at SandiaNational Labs in Livermore came to help Bakker run his ministry’s finances.Later, televangelist Bakker began building Heritage USA, which was to be abig-money resort. Bakker hired people who had worked for Disney to constructHeritage USA. Bakker studied Disneyland, Disneyworld, and other Disney places asa model for Heritage USA.

After Disneyworld opened in Florida, Jim Bakker was a REGULAR visitor toit. Heritage USA’s Ft. Heritage was modelled after Disney’s Ft. Wilderness,Main St. was modelled after the Magic Kingdom’s Main St., and Disney’swrought-iron fencing was also copied. Most people are aware of Jim Bakker’s$265,000 payoff to Jessica Hahn to keep her sexual services to him a secret, hislongtime homosexual relationship with his right hand man David Taggart, and hisprison sentence.

James Orson (named after Orson Welles) Bakker was fromMuskegon, the same place that Cathy O’Brien, a freed Mind-controlled slavecame from. He was born pre-mature, and had some interesting family situationsthat make his family suspect. While Cathy O’Brien got programmed via theCatholics, Jim was part of another denomination which also was into programming,the charismatic Assemblies of God. His grandfather, who lived next door to Jim,and where Jim spent much childhood time with was popularly known in town as a”huckster”, and nicknamed Kingfish after the manipulative character onAmos & Andy. Tammy his wife grew up in International Falls, MN in poverty inthe home of her stepfather and mother. Besides having a “shoppingdemon,” she has had her share of phobias and mental problems, as can beexpected from someone who has had to suffer through programming.

It would beworth pointing out who has come to Jim Bakker’s rescue when he was underattack. For instance, on Thursday, Oct. 4, 1984 when Jim was under attack, JimBakker’s show had six people give endorsements and praise of Jim Bakker. Thosewere Ronald Reagan, Dale Evans, Robert Schuller, Oral Roberts, Billy Graham andRex Hubbard. Of those, this author knows for sure that all are masons, exceptfor Rex, who may or may not be. Robert Schuller, Billy Graham and Oral Robertsare “Christian ministers” who participate in using and handlingmind-control slaves. These three ministers all participate in secret Satanicrituals. The last few paragraphs have given only a sketchy picture of theintimate relationship between Disney Mind-control and the charismatic movementand its use of trauma-based total mind-control.

DISNEYANA FOR THE PROGRAMMED & OBSESSED

For people who have been programmed with Disney programming and who areobsessed with Mickey Mouse and everything else about Disney, and for otherpeople who just have the collecting spirit for Disney memorabilia, there is agroup called Disneyana.

Disneyana, was organized in the 1980’s, and consistsof people who are cult-like in their devotion to anything true Disney. Some ofthem to express their devotion outwardly tatoo their bodies with Disneycharacters. This group holds their annual convention at the Contemporary Resortin FL. One Disneyana at the annual convention said, “We collect to keep thegood feeling inside.” Another when interviewed said, “This is whyit’s all about love.” The author knows as a fact some of the men who areobsessed with Mickey Mouse & Disney items are programmed multiples.

One ofKenneth Anger’s occult friends has had the world’s largest Mickey Mousecollection. Who is Kenneth Anger? Kenneth Anger, a member of LaVey’s MagickCircle & later his Church of Satan, is an occultist and an underground filmmaker. Kenneth Anger (he choose the last name Anger) was raised on the Wizard ofOz books. His biographer Bill Landis writes that the Oz books “laid thegroundwork for Ken’s attraction to Crowley, the occultist who would reworkRosicrucian thought into his own magical system.” Ken was obsessed withCrowley’s life & magic. As a child, Ken had danced with Shirley Temple incompetition after she became a child star. Ken Anger loved the OTO’s solarphallic religion, and was also obsessed with Mickey Mouse. He spent part of histime studying his friend’s Mickey Mouse collection. Ken Anger did hiscasting for his film “Lucifer Rising” by telling occult friends &acquaintances that they could live out their goddess or god power-trip fantasiesby acting for him. The British government’s National Film Finance Corp.fronted 15,000£ for Lucifer Rising’s production. Famous occult musician JimmyPage did the sound track gratis. Ken Anger acted as the film’s Magus and madehis Magus role resemble Mickey Mouse in the film Fantasia. (The role Fantasiaplays in mind-control programming will follow as the last part of this chapter.)”Lucifer Rising” also starts with Fantasia-type volcanoes. Another ofhis well-known films was “Invocation of My Demon Brother.”

Mind-control features in Disney movies

The elements within Disney movies that are intentionally put in formind-control would take volumes to describe. A detailed description of how justone Disney movie is used as a programming script soon follows. Fantasia wasselected as the example. A random sampling of features in Disney movies formind-control programming could include:

• Cogworth the enchanted mantle clock in Beauty and the Beast.

• The character Door Knob, which is a doorknob portrayed as a person in theDisney cartoon Alice In Wonderland, is useful for programming door knob alters.

• The Blue Yonder is a Disney movie on time travel of a young boy. Timetravel movies are used for programming to mess up the victim’s sense of time.

• Disney film “Animated Alphabet” has letters which come alive,which is useful for programming. And what about the ‘82 Disney movie”Computers are People, Too!” ?

• All the Illuminati members this author is aware of who have receivedtrauma-based total mind-control were taught to astrally project and study on theastral plane what they needed to learn. A Disney movie that portrays this isGoofy over Dental Health. This is an educational film released by Disney in‘91 and again in ‘93, where Goofy places a magical toothbrush under achild’s pillow, so that the child astrally projects to a dentist office andwhile on the astral plane studies how to have healthy teeth.

• Illuminati alters believe that trees and flowers are alive. The 1932Disney film Flowers and Trees is a story about two trees who fall in love. Thefilm portrays the occult belief that trees can talk and sing. Internally, altersystems will be constructed with singing trees and flowers that represent peopleand which are alters. The singing trees give out internal codes to move altersinternally where they need to go.

Return to Oz. (1985) This Disney film beginsits story line about a girl who is thought to have psychological problemsbecause of her tales of Oz. She is warned not to talk about Oz by her relatives.She is taken to a psychologist who wears a big ruby ring, who tells Dorothy thatelectroshocks won’t hurt her, and that we are at the “dawn of a NewAge.” Dorothy is told that her memories are “just dreams” that stemfrom excess electrical current in the brain. She is sent to a mental institutionto receive shock treatments for talking about Oz. A lightening storm allows herto escape the shock treatments and when she sleeps, she awakes in Oz.

In Oz shegoes through many mind-control scenarios, ruby slippers, mirrors, etc., andtoward the end visits with evil Mombi, Princess of Oz who keeps Ozma(Dorothy’s twin) as a slave. Mombi eventually casts a spell and enchants Ozmainto a mirror. Sci-Fi author J.D. Vinge in her Return to Oz based on the screenplay writes on pg. 211-212, “Dorothy gazed at herself in the mirror, seeingher own reflection, and remembering the moment when she had looked at herselfand seen someone else there, someone so like her that it could have been hersister.” Parts of this film were filmed near Stonehenge, Eng. Disney hasput out several films on the Wizard of Oz theme, all of which were used forprogramming. The original series of Oz books were by Baum.

In ’39, MGM did the famous Wizard of Oz film. In the Disney movie Tron (1982),a young computer genius goes into an altered state where he ends up becoming acomputer program. After defeating the MCP, he returns to the real world. This issimply a programming script. A special effects team created a 3-D world, showinghow talented Disney special effects people can be in making something seem real.This movie should show people their mind-control capabilities.

MathematicalApplications Group, Inc. (MAGI) were one of the groups that created thegraphics. Disney came out with 3 videos of new adventures in Wonderland whichare mind-control programming. In the mornings here 9-9:30, on channel 21, Disneyhas a Wonderland Show every morning which is mind-control programming forchildren. Within a few minutes, this author had seen a girl walk through amirror, the 3 lives of Thomasina mentioned, and a little ditty “I’m alittle tea-pot” where a person becomes a tea pot. They also had an”under the umbella” scene. This was all pure programming, right on TV.Of course, they show the White Rabbit as a central figure.

ABC under theauspices of Disney produced a lengthy 140 min. film Wild Palms which depictsIlluminati mind-control and life. One reader of Vol. 2 stated that the WildPalms movie would have made no sense except that having read the Vol. 2 book,the movie made lots of sense in the light of Vol. 2’s revelations. The filmdepicts how children are kidnapped, switched at birth, programmed via TVcartoons, programmed to kill and use stun guns etc. The film depicts Illuminatibloodlines and arranged marriages. Although the name Illuminati” is notused, if viewers substitute in the name “the Fathers” for Illuminatifathers, they will get an insider’s view of life at the top. The maincontrollers are addressed by their slaves as “Papa” or”Daddy” or “Mother”. This is true to life.

A person opposedto the Fathers states, “One day we will wake up and discover we don’t ownthis country and no one will care.” The movie states that events are nothappening randomly. The movie shows an underground tunnel system which has anentrance hidden by a swimming pool. Quite a few actual programming codes weresaid during the film, for instance, “down, down, down through the pool oftears…” and “we’re going to go down the yellow brick roadnow.” The movie was created by Bruce Wagner, who obviously is an insiderconcerning trauma-based total mind-control. The fact the movie was made showsthe arrogance of the programmers’ beliefs that their criminal acts inprogramming thousands of little children will not be exposed, and that peoplewill be too stupid to realize that what is put out as fiction is actuallymirroring what is happening. It’s like they believe their own script that IFpeople did find out “no one will care.” Because so much of theIlluminati programming involves the creation and programming of 3 alters linkedinto trinities, it is not surprising that Disney has helped such triadprogramming with a series of movies about threesomes, including:

3 Blind Mouseketeers

Three Caballeros

3 little pigs

Three Little Wolves

3 Lives of Thomasina

The Three Musketeers

3 Ninjas

Three Orphan Kittens

For Mickey Mouse programming they came out with Thru the Mirror, where MickeyMouse steps through his bedroom mirror and ends up in another world (alteredstate). Not all of the Disney movies that have mind-control programming themesgot released to the public. One unreleased cartoon had Penelope fleeing from asinister looking Grandfather Clock which is carrying her to another world, andhas another scene where Penelope tries to hold onto someone who personifies theWind.

George Lucas, who directed the movie Star Wars, which was a movie planned by the Illuminati & used forIlluminati programming, also directed Disney’s movie “Captain EO”.Captain EO (who looks like a demonic entity) goes to rescue the Queen (who lookslike the harlot describes as Mystery Babylon in the Bible). The Queen is incaptivity simply because she and her people believe in black and white (whichrepresent good and evil). When they renounce such a belief, they are saved byMichael Jackson (in actual life a mind-controlled slave) playing Captain EO.It’s a New Age witchcraft film through & through.

By the way, MichaelJackson has gone to Disney amusement parks many times, sometimes in disguise. Itis public knowledge that his Jehovah’s Witness family has been very abusivementally and physically to their children.

Disney has put out several movies onhow the mind works, such as the educational film The Brain & Nervous Systemin 1990. Their film Runaway Brain is a cartoon where Dr. Frankenollietransplants Mickey’s brain into a monster’s body & vice-versa. A 1994film, Puppet Masters shows the govt.’s secret Office of ScientificIntelligence trying to save the U.S. from aliens who live in human bodies.

Inrecent years, Bette Midler has been Disney’s main actress. In the Vol. 2, itwas exposed that she is possibly a Monarch Mind-controlled slave. She is famousfor her “mood swings” (switches in personality), and she had a”mental breakdown” in 1985. Her eyes and body gestures are those of aprogrammed multiple. She has gone out on tour for Disney without making money,and she is best of friends with Jeffrey Katzenberg (second in command atDisney). Jeffrey Katzenberg by the way is extremely disliked by his counterpartSid Sheinberg. Bette Midler plays Stella in the movie Stella. Stella is anoccult name. In the movie, the script seems tailored for Bette Midler and forsomeone who is a programmed slave, rather than the actress fitting the role. Atthe movie’s end, Stella (Bette Midler) attends her own daughter’s marriageby peeking in a window and watching from the outside.

This is the script theygive so many of the parts of a slave, so that they feel unworthy and feel likethey are always on the outside looking in at life. Many parts (personalities) ofslaves find it hard to connect with real life, because they feel they are on theoutside looking in. And then in true Disney fashion, Disney had Bette Midlerplay the role of the lead witch in Hocus Pocus. The movie Hocus Pocus does somehocus pocus of its own. While pretending to make fun of witchcraft, theyactually teach witchcraft. They do make the 3 witches look comical. By the way,the 3 witches stand for the maiden, mother, crone combo that the Illuminatireverence.

Disney subtly works in deep occult things, such as the all-seeing eyeon the cover of the book, the little girl promising the cat (who is a familiarspirit) that her descendants would always care for it (true, because the cat wasa generational spirit). The cat is killed in the movie but can’t die. AndBette Midler as lead witch in her costume, which has some Mother-of-Darkness symbology on it, states as she gets ready to take the life force from aninnocent girl, “We want to live forever, so we take children’slives.” This is wholesome entertainment for children?

The Disney capacityfor deception extends to its own workers. PR men recruit young people for itsDisney College program. They tell the young people what a great stepping stoneit will be for their careers. They have been known to make it sound like thegreatest thing in your life. Kids come from all over the country due to theslick recruiting tactics to work for Disney. They are then housed in Disneyhousing, given menial jobs, and paid low wages. Most people in the CollegeProgram leave disillusioned. If the worker happens to think of a great idea,Disney officials have been known to steal the idea, and because the worker wasworking for Disney the worker will find that they are unable to get any creditor money for the idea that Disney steals and makes millions off of. One uncredited creator of a Disney sale item said, “literally, they’re usingeverybody for everything.” (Inside the Mouse, p. 239.)

>>> Next,will be the script for how the Disney film Fantasia has been used as a standardprogramming tool since the 1940’s by the Illuminati.

DETAILED SCRIPT ON HOW THE DISNEY FILM FANTASIA IS USED FOR PROGRAMMINGTRAUMA-BASED MIND-CONTROLLED SLAVES

During the 1950’s, ‘60’s, and ‘70’s at least 90% of theIlluminati’s trauma-based mind-controlled slaves were subjected to watchingDisney’s Fantasia film in order for them to build the foundational imagery ofthe mind-control. Child mind-control victims had their eyes taped open, and thensat one-on-one with their primary programmers so that the programmers could givethe scripts as the child watched Disney’s Fantasia over and over. What madeFantasia unique as a programming tool is that it had almost everything theprogrammers needed to create the foundational imagery for their trauma-basedmind-control. To build a dependable alter system means that the worlds need asolid foundation. Fantasia has provided the means to get a solid foundation forthe internal worlds that the Illuminati slaves build in their mind. It is also amasterpiece in coordinating color and music.

The Disney film Fantasia which premiered on Nov. 13, 1940 (at BroadwayTheater in NYC) was a financial disaster as a movie, but was an Illuminatiprogramming masterpiece. The film was released to theaters in ‘40, ‘46,‘56, ‘63, ‘69, ‘77, ‘82, ‘85, ‘90 in order to catch everygeneration of children. The video was released in 1991.

During programming muchof the child slave’s mind will watch the film. One particular part (alter)will be forced to memorize everything in the film. This small part (small alter)is well hidden in each victim’s mind. This small alter, who has a vivid andtotal recall of the film Fantasia, is locked carefully away so that ONLY anaccess code will pull him/her up. Watching the videotape Fantasia is not goingto pull this alter up. The programmers pull this alter up when they have a cleanslate alter. When they are taking a clean slate of the mind, they will pull theclean part up and have the alter who has memorized Fantasia throw its memoryonto an internal big screen.

The internal Outer space (aka Rubicon) is shapedlike an amphitheater, and functions as a big vast screen for replay. There is aninternal ball or sun created via the lighting effect of the movie Fantasia, sothat the movie appears projected in the mind as on a globe. And the Fantasiafilm images hit this internal globe and go circular in the mind and spin throughthe system. The programmer will then say to the new part “THIS IS WHAT IWANT YOU TO CREATE. THIS IS WHAT WE NEED.” In this fashion, Fantasia hasprovided the programmers with their primary tool for taking a dissociated cleanslate part of the mind, and manipulating it to become a new workable part withinthe system. The young part that holds the entire Fantasia memory isstrategically placed in the system so that it can be called up from anyplace inthe system. No matter where the programmer is working in the system, he canaccess this small alter whose function is to remember the movie. Most of thesystem will go into a trance sleep if shown the movie. The front (as well asmost of the system’s alters) will be totally amnesic to having ever seen themovie. Since the programming put in with Fantasia is so fundamental it shouldcome as no surprise that the programmers have done an excellent job inprotecting this programming from everyone, including the slave. Abreacting thefilm for many alters could rip the system apart, because after the film ismemorized severe trauma begins to be overlaid and attached to the film. Theremay be some small alters that still carry tiny bits and pieces of memory of themovie, but only one will really remember it.

The following script will be a running account of how Fantasia has been usedas an important preparatory film for Illuminati trauma-based mind-control totrain the mind-control victim’s mind to be able to visualize the programmingthat will be layered in.

The time clock will begin when the feature film’s action begins, and then willrun its entire 116 minutes. This will give the researcher of mind-control ablow-by-blow description of how a Disney movie is used for programming. The filmwas often shown to child victims around 3 to 4 years of age with a wide screenwhile the child was under a guided LSD trip. (Prior to the use of LSD some otherdrugs were used.)

A Grande Dame or Mother-of-Darkness often worked with theIlluminati programmer as an Assistant Programmer. The scripts & theprogramming have already been discussed prior to showing the child the film, sothe programmers know the direction they want to take the child, & willtailor some of what is said to the child victim to individualize theprogramming.

When a three or four year old is shown Fantasia on ahypnotically-prepared and controlled LSD trip, the colors & effects ofFantasia are increased about 1,000 times. The film is realer than real to thechild. The movie will not be shown just once, but over and over so that thescripts are ingrained into the mind. The imagery for the child’s internalworld will be well established, because the big screen movie enhanced by boththe drugs and the bright colors of the art work will seem more real that lifeitself. At this time, the child is a multiple, but the walls between the variousparts of the mind are not solid, but similar to the walls between ego states inan adult non-multiple. A large part of the 3 or 4 year-old child’s system willbe allowed to view the system, including the Christian parts. Then the entiresystem (with the single exception of the alter carrying the entire memory of thefilm) will be hypnotically told to forget having seen the film.

Years later, thefront alters will not remember having seen the movie, but they may have astrange dislike for the film. They may find that they can’t identify wheretheir feelings of dislike of the film stem from. The child victim will watch themovie with its programmer and assistant programmer one-on-one, with no otherchildren in the room. The child will watch the film repeatedly and be grilledabout what is in the movie. The child will see the movie so many times in such avivid form and will be tested to the point that the movie will be memorized. Butit will be hypnotically locked up in the subconscious by the programmers, sothat it forms a base for the mind to begin building programming, but will remainhidden from the conscious.

At the time the Fantasia film was made, theIlluminati had been creating trained multiples for years, but they knew theywanted to program the different personalities in accordance with the bestmind-control techniques of the day. For this reason, the Fantasia film wasplanned ahead of time, so that it could possibly serve as a programming aid. Thefilm is silent (almost no words) except for music so that it can be used forhypnotic visualization, so that the Mother of Darkness & the programmer canfill in the programming script with the child victim as they watch the movie. Asit turned out, their plans were successful.

The New Age author David Tame statesin his book The Secret Power of Music (Rochester, VT: Destiny Books, 1984, p.292), that Fantasia is. . . “A superb marriage between the visual andmusical arts. Most of the sequences.. .are what New Age cinema was intended tobe!” The power of the movie to influence the mind stands out. In order tomake the film, Disney used some strong arm tactics on a few people. The moviewas a box office flop when first released in the 1940’s, but then it was madefor the occult world anyway. By the 1960’s, the Illuminati had create a drugculture and had lots of undetectable mind-controlled slaves running around thathad been programmed with Fantasia. In the 1960’s, Fantasia became a hit withthe drug culture which had its share of Illuminati slaves deeply involved in it.One more reminder, the sentences that are “ALL CAPS” in the script arethings that the programmers are saying to the child victim as the child watchesthe film. (Bear in mind, that the child watches the film over & over, so not everything indicatedin this script by caps that the programmer says will necessarily be said in oneshowing.)

00 minutes. Curtains open. Action begins with an orchestra. The Conductorupon a step pyramid is the center of the scene, and is shown to be the center ofauthority. Master Programmer Dr. Joseph Mengele liked Fantasia because he was amusician and a violinist. Mengele (Dr. Green) liked Bach, Beethoven, andSchubert and orchestra music. He enjoyed taking what he liked & using thismusic to make slaves. He would portray himself during programming as being theconductor, & all the orchestra were his children. The film will allow for arepetition of this theme.

00.5 minutes. The instruments begin playing. The musicians are silhouetteswhich cast shadows upon the wall. Alters will often see themselves in thisfashion too, as merely a shadow or merely a silhouette.

01.5 minutes. The MC (named Taylor) begins talking. He begins grooming theviewer. He says that the film may suggest to your imagination “geometricfigures floating in space.”

02. minutes. The M.C. says there are 3 kinds of music. He says some music isto create definite stories, some to create definite pictures, and some musicexists for its own sake.

02.5 minutes. The M.C. introduces us to the “Absolute music.”

03. minutes. He states that ,,Abstract images that might pass through yourmind…music will suggest other things to your imagination…” ThePhiladelphia Orchestra begins playing “Toccata and Fuge” by Bach inthe background. As a cartoon for children (or adults) the film has already lostthe normal audience at this point. (There is no way that Disney could haveescaped realizing that the film starts out losing the normal audience.)

03.5 minutes. The conductor is standing out and everyone else is a silhouettewith shadow mirror images (like so many of the alters become). Leopald Stokowskiis now standing as the rising sun rises. This is an allusion to sun worship andthe sun rising in the east. The music is going up and down, and this music atthis point is used to train the child to go up and down the trance ladder (thatis to go deeper or lighter in trance).

04. minutes. The conductor opens his hands and waves them in an Illuminatihand signal. The music begins.

06 minutes. A row of violinists play, they are merely silhouettes withshadows.

06.5 minutes. A harp scale is played in the backgroundthat is used in the programming. Triggers are attached to this harp scale, orthe harp scale is used as a foundation identifier for a piano scale. Morechildren can be taught the piano than the harp, so this scale is usuallytransferred to a piano scale.

07 minutes. A series of 3 musicians is shown.

07.5 minutes. The conductor (the programmer) becomes invisible. The Prog.Assistant will ask the child, “WHO IS GREEN? GREEN BECOMES INVISIBLE.”

08 minutes. First lines representing bows are shown (the violinists areinvisible), then the Golden Gate Bridge. “REMEMBER THE BOW, NOT THEVIOLINIST.” The bow lines flashing on the screen represent energy. 08.5minutes. Colored disks are flashed onto the screen. The lights are representedto the child victim ‘THAT’S DR. GREEN’S ORCHESTRA.” Geometric shapesand flashes of lines explode onto the screen. Concentric rings that will patternthe concentric worlds appear. (See Vol. 2 p. 196 for an illustration of this.)

10. minutes. Asst. Prog. will say, ,,YOU ARE HIS STAR.” as stars flashon the screen. Many hidden alters (parts) are stars. Swirling lines arrive, andthen colors and then more concentric lines.

11 minutes. Worlds within worlds are shown. Water is shown. Concentriccircles that are the pattern for the worlds are presented. A varying number (5or 7) of Castle-like structures materialize and then disappear. (These will formthe pattern for some of the internal castles.) A quick flowing yellow line comesdown the center of the screen, ‘THAT’S THE YELLOW BRICK ROAD.”

11.5 min. Lots of stars emerge.

12 minutes. Various worlds are shown, and an illusionary castle. Lots ofstars are shown, which will be how the victim will model many of their alterparts after. Lots of purple stars appear, representing royal star alters.

12.5 minutes. Spiral splotches of cloud-like colors appear and disappear indissociative colors. This is the Kingdom of the Gods during programming. TheAsst. Programmer takes the opportunity to ask, “WHOSE ORCHESTRA?” Thisscene is used for the internal heaven where the kings are. Then the camera showsthe conductor finishing.

13 minutes. The programmer has finished building his basic worlds.

13.5 minutes. The MC talks about Tchaikovsky’s Nutcracker.

14 minutes. 13 circling lights come into view circling around and around.(The 13 lights are something like 4 yellow lights, 3 white lights, 4 orange, 2blue-something like this. They don’t have to be all the different programmingcolors at this point, because that programming will come in its own time.) Starsturn into fairies. A fairy with lots of fairy dust whirls around. (“Make awish” the slave will be told later on, create what you want.) Flowers growinto butterflies. Hypnotic music plays as the fairy throws fairy dust. Soon, theFairy spins a web.

15 minutes. The cabalistic tree of life is made with lights, and then themany colors of the ribbons are flashed up on the screen quickly. A compass imageis very quickly flashed on the screen.

16 minutes. Lights multiply on the screen, and a spider web appears in thebackground. There are lots of stars which shine as lights in a spider web.(Stars will serve as alters in programming, the spider web serves as a systemwithin the system, see Vol. 2.) There are several shots of multitudes of starson a spider web. 16.5 minutes. There is an explosion of light which has asplintering effect (which will fit in well with an electroshock later on tocreate alters.) Around and around go 6 big mushrooms dancing, with a little onetrying to participate. The programmer will point out that the mushrooms are”A FAMILY”. When the splintering effect is done with real electricityin the future, the mind will splinter into a family.

17.6 minutes. Concentric circles appear in water. Flashing pedals emerge asif they were dissociation spreading through the water. The flowers are the topspinners (see the pages in Deeper Insights on spin tortures to create spinnerfamilies), they dance, & then they float away in the bubbles (ofdissociation). “A FAMILY OF SPINNERS” the programmer will say.”SEE THEY SPIN YOU INTO BUBBLES INTO NOTHINGNESS.” There is lots ofdancing shown by the spinners. Everyone is dancing to the top. The childvictim’s head will be wobbling back and forth from the influence of the drugsand dissociation at this point.

19.5 minutes. When the family of fish make a star, the Asst. Programmer says,”SEE HOW SAD THEY ARE.” The fish dance in circles and they also hidebehind veils. “THE FISH MADE ITS OWN BUBBLES AND YOU CAN MAKE YOUR OWNBUBBLES TOO.”

21.5 min. The child is trained to trance at the hypnotic 8’s that appear inthe water. This type of scene will put the deeper alters to sleep of a slavestill actively being used. The movie here is being used to teach symbols, whichwill be important in the programming. Asst. Programmer, “LOOK YOU’RE JUSTFLOATING.. ..FLOAT, FLOAT, FLOAT, SLEEP…SEE SHE WENT RIGHT INTO THE CENTER OFTHE TRANCE STATE.. .YOU DANCE ROUND AND ROUND AND ROUND AND WHERE WE END UPYOU’LL NEVER KNOW.”

22 minutes. Lots of bubbles begin appearing. They will be used in theprogramming to assist the child to protect its mind from the traumas. The asst.programmer may have a bubble toy to make bubbles in her hand as a game to playwith the child. The child will be trained and programmed to put its memoriesinto bubbles and let them disappear. ,,WHY WOULD YOU WANT TO GO INTO THE BUBBLETO GET AWAY FROM THE DARKNESS? 1,2,3…NOW THERE ARE MANY BUBBLES, THIS IS WHATWE WANT YOU TO DO.” At this point the film is showing different colors ofbubbles, for instance gold bubbles. This trains the child’s mind to identifydifferent colors of bubbles. The bubble-fish-flower scene is going on. “DON’TYOU FEEL LIKE THAT FISH, ROUND AND ROUND YOU GO” (dissociation encouraged).The fish continues going in a dissociative spin. The fish swim in gracefulperfect figure 8’s which have a subconscious hypnotic induction message to thevictim. “SLEEPY LITTLE FISH” is said when the music gets hypnotic.”YOU’RE SLEEPY & YOU’RE TIRED, THIS IS NOTHING BUT A DREAM.””ALL THE DIAMONDS ARE ALL AROUND, NOT YOU” In other words, this isteaching the child that their entire internal world can be around them, but”you don’t know that it’s you.” The child begins to lose theability to realize that other parts of itself belong to itself, they are onlystars, etc. The fish changes into anot her character. flowers are appearing indifferent colors of the color coding, red, green, orange, blue, white. . .All ofa sudden it get’s still. “SHH, LISTEN CLOSELY.”

22.5 minutes. Eyes shine in the darkness. “EVERYTHING IS FINE, YOU JUSTRELAX.”

Silhouettes appear, which represent fish (alters, and people) who are therebut you don’t see them, they are behind the veil like the silhouettes. ‘THEYAREN’T THERE, IF YOU SEE THEM THEY AREN’T REAL THEY LOOK LIKE A FLOWER, WHENYOU SEE THEM, YOU WON’T SEE A CHILD- YOU WILL SEE A FLOWER.” Thesilhouette veil gives the sense to the child that he can sense something butit’s not there. 23 min. Different plants appear and dance. (This part of movieis very important in structuring.) The plants separate into many plants andflowers, and they multiply on the screen, but at the end they solidity into asolid plant. This is teaching the ,,you-are-one-but-you-are-many” concept.”FAMILIES ALWAYS WORK TOGETHER. WHETHER YOU ARE BLUE OR YELLOW OR GREEN,FAMILIES ALWAYS WORK TOGETHER IN HARMONY.”

24 minutes. “BUBBLES ALL HAVE A LIFE SOURCE…THERE, LOOK, WHAT’S INTHAT BUBBLE?” 24.5 minutes. ,,YOU CAN HAVE YOUR OWN ORCHESTRA”. Fruitthat hangs on the tree is shown, which will be the basis for how they hang theprograms (the fruit) in the internal world. Note the colors, orange, white,yellow, purple, blue, green,…

24.5 minutes. Fairyland appears on the screen. The Fairies awake and flythrough leaves. ‘THERE’S YOUR FAIRIES. SHE IS VERY MAGICAL. SHE CAN CREATE ANYTHING AND SO CAN YOU.””THE FAIRIES ARE SO MAGICAL.”

When the core is being first split, the parts of the mind that are creativeare taken and used to create the fairies. The programmers will only take theseoriginal creative splits, they will not try to get fairies from any moretorture. The fairies are the creative parts of the child, how ever many creativeparts that the child has splintered will be the number of fairies created. Theseparts of the mind receive very heavy programming. They are core splits. (Ifreaders remember on page 87 of Vol. 2, it refers to a Core Protector coded”Creation”. That alter was a fairy, a core split. Not only does thiscreative part make things “magically” for the system, it protects thecore. Does that help people to understand how the Core can be so creativelyprotected?! (For more understanding about the Core see Cisco’s very deeparticle on the Core.) Fairies are assigned to every part of an alter system. Thechild of 3 or 4, who watches Fantasia has had their core locked away at 2 1/2.The core’s stars have not been locked away yet, & have access to herenergy. When the system is built, the stars are locked away & become thecore’s guardians. They will act like the core to protect her. The real valueof the fairies comes when the core’s stars are locked away & theProgrammers have to depend upon the creative power of the fairies.

24 minutes. A vine (which represents a system’s double helix) lights up oneleaf after another. The leaves are staggered (alternated) and they light up insequence, which teaches the child the foundation of how they will create the DNAhelix and its staggered exit permissions.

25.5 min. The leaves are now floating up and down, like the alters will learnto do. “SOME FALL TO THE GROUND AND DIE.” This is the point where thestory of the Oak Tree will be added in for programming. When the Illuminatiprogrammers want “to destroy” an alter they can use the chandelier-MT6:22-23 torture mentioned on page 310 of the Vol. 2 Formula book, and then havethe splintered alters become leaves that fall to the ground and die. After this,these disobedient and now “dead” alters can be taken & bedissociated from their memories. The memories are locked up someplace permanentwithin the mind.

26. min. Out of a leaf like “box” come a series of fairies. Thechild is taught to put things (such as alters) in boxes of various shapes.

26.5 min. Leaves blow in the wind. Fairies cover things and keep them safe.

27. min. Fairies continue flying around. The seasons are passing in sequence.An internal green-skirted fairy will be connected to the internal hourglassduring the programming.

27.5 min. The fairies quit flying and skate on ice. The season has turned towinter.

28 min. A winter scene. The four seasons have come to an end.

28.5 min. A sorcerer is introduced by the MC (emcee). The sorcerer is shownand then his assistant or trainee who is Mickey Mouse. Mickey Mouse wants to becreative and magical like the great wizard. Mickey Mouse sees the power that thesorcerer has, and wants that power. What is really being subtly portrayed hereis the programmer (the wizard) and the core & the core’s creative splits(Mickey Mouse). Showing the programmer as a great wizard is actually right onthe money. The top programmers are all Grand Masters in the Illuminati and arevery much into witchcraft.

29 min. The sorcerer (wizard) is shown again. This time the wizard,, with hisskull beside him, creates from his witch’s cauldron a big colorful butterflywhich is forever changing. (Is this big yellow, purple, white, and bluebutterfly meant to be a Monarch butterfly? The programmers will use it that wayfor this Monarch programming.) The great wizard magically creates the bigcolorful butterfly and then he shatters it into countless splinters!

Disney often portrays Mickey Mouse as a Sorcerer.

30 min. Mickey sneaks around and grabs the magic hat. (The magic hat is oneof the few things in the film that doesn’t mean anything for the programming.It merely has witchcraft symbols.) Then a magic broom appears.

30.5 min. The broomstick comes alive. The broomstick imagery will be used tohelp create the pancake people (ribbon alters who will haul the internalcomputer messages). The broomstick person in the film hauls buckets of water.The child is having story after story layered in over a period of time, whichare being skillfully constructed toward a programming end. Parts of thechild’s mind that see the movie Fantasia will be dissociated clean slates.They will need to have some imagery given to them so that they have something tobuild mentally upon. In Cisco’s section of the book, in the Truth article itis discussed how the mind looks at sensory inputs and tries to make sense of a pattern bycomparing it to previous patterns that it has identified. Learning is astep-by-step building process, and so is programming.

31. min. Mickey as the apprentice sorcerer (in a sense the victim who theprogrammer is training) manipulates the broomstick person. “THE CHILD(Mickey) CAN DO WHAT THE GREAT MAGICIAN DID. YOU CAN TELL YOUR MIND WHAT TO DO.YOU GET POWER BY LEARNING TO BE CREATIVE.” Mickey (and the victim) becomemirror images of the Wizard over them.

32 min. Then the sorcerer sits on his throne, and while on the throne actslike the conductor. Here is a subtle mental tie-in that Mickey is playing therole of programmer (conductor) and is sitting on an Illuminati throne (like somany of the Illuminati Grand Master programmers have actually done.) MichaelAquino is just one of several mind-control programmers who have gone by the nameof Mickey. Because Mickey Mouse is substituted for being the programmer atdifferent points in programming, this scene will tie in well with other standardprogramming sessions.

32.5 min. Mickey in the film clearly is shown leaving his physical body andastrally projecting himself. This is such a vivid portrayal of occult astralprojection, that it is mind-boggling that many Christians consider Walt Disneymovies to be christian. (See Vol. 2, p. 319, for a discussion of the scientificmethods to understand and induce astral projection.) This again is laying themental foundation for the child to leave its body mentally and either hover overits body in dissociation or to travel somewhere via astral projection. MickeyMouse then begins conducting lights.

p_starry-sky.gif

These lights represent the alters that the victim will make for theconductor. The lights (aka stars) are the conductor’s orchestra. Lightning(such as flashes that come from electroshock) and stormy weather are beingcontrolled by Mickey. Notice that the things Mickey is controlling arefear-based. After the child has viewed the film many times and memorized it,when the electro-shock is applied during this time of the film, the child willcontrol it like Mickey by ‘magically’ creating splits.

33.5 min. Mickey begins conducting waves. Then, for those who understand theveiled scenes, Mickey begins going through the different magic spheresconquering the different spirits. This is Enochian Magic. 34 min. Mickey wakesup back in his body, and he is in trouble with rising water i.e. a water trauma.Mickey is thrown into the water. The child victim will identify this with thedrowning tortures that are given to instill “no talk-no tell”messages. After Mickey (or in child himself) has done something, and returns tohis body, then the “‘no-talk”’ message will kick in. Victims ofmind-control often get the feeling of drowning when they trigger a no-talkmessage.

34.5 min. More water continues to flow.

35 min. All of a sudden without any continuity of action, Mickey gets an axand kills the broom by splitting it. The broom dies and then multiplies when itcomes back to life. This is such a clear picture of what the programmers wantthe child’s mind to do. They will traumatize the child essentially unto death,and then they want the tortured alter to multiply itself into many moreduplicate alters. Armies of brooms are formed from the broom. This scene here isa clear red flag that the Illuminati asked Walt Disney to produce this film.This scene with the trauma death of the broom, with it splitting in half, andthen coming back to life in a multiplied form, is evidence that this film wasmeant to be used for training children in multiplicity. The assistant programmerwill say “IT’S O.K. TO SPLINTER.” “YOU ARE TIRED, YOU CANESCAPE THAT BY RESTING AND LET A PART OF YOURSELF COME OUT.” At this point,it is necessary to explain what is going to be done when they begin to splinterthe child’s mind. After the splitting trauma, the programmer needs to be ableto see what the child has created, so he wants the child to look at what’sbeen made. “‘CAN YOU LOOK AT WHAT YOU’VE CREATED?” However, thepart of the child that looks back at the trauma will then see that thedissociated trauma was real and that will make the child angry. The programmerswant the child to dissociate what he built, and when the child looks back atwhat he has created he goes into a vortex of dissociation. The child is told ifhe ever looks back at the memory he will go into the vortex.

35.5 min. Water is being thrown in by the brooms, while Mickey throws waterout.

36 min. All of a sudden a hypnotic vortex sucks things in during the film.

36.5 min. The brooms all march in an army, while Mickey reads his magic book.Mickey then uses his magic book as a lifeboat when he gets whirled into avortex. A vortex is often created from that part of the mind that is holding thehigh energy that accumulates in the mind just before the mind splits. It holdsthe highest energy of the mind. One way a vortex is created is to place thechild on a traumatic Disney ride–like a rollar coaster. Special electricalboxes or electrical shoes are outfitted onto the child so that during the ride,at a particular timed moment when fear is increasing, that fear has pain of theelectrical shock added to it. A cattle prod of course would be too dangerous totake up on some type of ride like that with all the motion. Also bear in mind, asmall child doesn,,t take need the electrical power that an adult needs to takeit down.

37 min. At the bottom of vortices in the Illuminati programming, theprogrammers place Guardian demons. In Fantasia, when Mickey gets to the bottomof the vortex, sure enough, there is a Guardian there to meet him. The Guardianspirit parts the water as if he were Moses with the Red Sea.

38. min. The Conductor and Mickey Mouse shake hands. The conductor doessomething very significant. Mickey congratulates the conductor and then theconductor (programmer) in turn says, “Mickey, you’ve done a goodjob.” (Yes, the core/core splits have done a good job at this point, theyhave just created their inner world!) The MC tells us about the next song theoccult Rite of Spring. Spring rituals are creation rituals and so this music isritually connected to what the programmers are going to do in this segment. TheMC states that instead of the viewer seeing tribal dances (which are by the waywitchcraft dances), that instead Disney has decided to show us scenes of whatwent on billions of years ago. (This next part is also a subtle push forDarwin’s theory of evolution. But because it is child’s entertainment,people don’t have their guard up. The theory of evolution is important,because it allows people including the victim to not take moral responsibilityfor their actions, and it is also the basis of some of the Hinduism andwitchcraft teachings that will be given the deeper alters. This is a backdoorapproach to destroy godliness that is carried out on children in general.)

39.5 min. The MC says, “Imagine a lonely tormented little planetspinning in a sea of nothingness.” This is exactly what the programmer willsay to the child as they work together at building an internal world. The”sea of nothingness” is what the reader will see described in ourbooks as “Outer Space” or ,,the Rubicon.” Also that “sea ofnothingness” is used much later to reinforce the secrecy of theprogrammers. Much later as the programmer and torture has progressed theprogrammers will say to alters, “LOOK DOWN ON THE EMPTY SEA OF NOTHINGNESS.THERE IS NO DR. GREEN. THERE IS NO DADDY THERE.”

40 minutes. A swirl of stars in a galaxy appears. Swirls of comet-like lightsflash by. “MANY WORLDS THERE.” This will set the base for the child tobuild galaxies and worlds within their mind. “BE LIKE GOD, CREATE YOURWORLD. BE YOUR OWN GOD AND CREATE YOUR OWN WORLD” the child is told at thispoint.

42 minutes. The face of the planet emerges.

42.5 min. Lots of volcanoes erupt on the screen, setting the foundation tobuild realistic internal volcanoes.

45 min. Oceans, and water and fire are coming into being. The child victimneeds to know how a world is created in order to create their own internalworld. Lava begins flowing as the flute plays the background music. Lighteningflashes. The violence of the fierce weather portrayed will be enhanced by thechild on drugs to a thousand times its magnitude. This is important because itwill take a great deal of mental energy and external torture to create theinternal worlds. Having such super-vivid pictures will help when the victim goesto build their internal worlds. There will be special purpose fragments thatwill be made into the elements of fire and water. That’s all these specialpurpose fragments will know. Breaking through the layers in the alter systemswill trigger internal earthquakes. This and a later earthquake scene are used tobuild the foundation for the internal violent weather. If an internal earthquakeshakes a slave’s mind, it has the same effect as if a real earthquake weregoing off. Everything internally shakes and shifts. An alter system will alsohave fire children, who start internal fires, and will give internal alters theabreaction or sense that they are burning. The mind gets very survival mindedwhen it thinks it is burning, and goes right back into the programming that islinked with the victim’s compliance for survival during programming. 46minutes. The oceans continue to form.

47 min. A calm occurs in the action.

47.5 min. The screen gets dark except for an amoeba, which becomes twoamoebas. As the little amoebas multiply, the asst. programmer encourages thechild, “IT’S O.K. TO MULTIPLY. GOD WANTED YOU TO MULTIPLY” Remember,the programmers are working with a pre-schooler with clean slate alters. Theprogrammers must show images that the child can relate to. The concept of thebroom being split in half and then multiplying and now the concept of theamoebas splitting are portrayed in a way that the child’s mind can grasp the concept.

48.5 min. “IF GOD CAN MAKE A FISH, YOU CAN MAKE A FISH. YOU CAN DOANYTHING, YOU CAN BE ANYTHING.”

49 minutes. Dinosaurs appear. The programmers will reframe the concept ofdinosaurs into monsters and demons. The sea-going dinosaurs will be refrained asguardian demons which guard the internal rivers. These guardian demons tie inwith Armageddon end-time programming. They also guard the various worlds.

50 min. Dinosaur-birds swoop down and grab prey. This imagery will berefrained to lay the basis for the winged-monkey watchers of the Oz stories. Thewinged-monkey watchers are the child alters who are assigned to watch and guardthe system.

51.5 min. Fierce dinosaurs (later ref rained as Dragons) protect the swamps.Swamps are built into the internal worlds, so this is very helpful. Demons andalters like Dameon are set up as guards.

52 minutes- More swamps appear. The swamp scenes will form the base in thechild’s mind for the internal river Styx. (See more about this in thisbook’s article “Programming, foundations, destruction of”). Somedinosaurs that have long necks that look like snakes begin appearing. The asst.programmer will reframe these to the child, “LOOK, THE SEED OF SATAN.””THAT IS A DEMON.” While the child watches, they reframe the hughdinosaurs as being demons. Pictures of reptilian looking demons will be shown tothe child too. At that age, the child is not going to see the difference. (Anote for therapists: Some “”demons’” may actually be importantparts to an alter system, and are being used to protect unauthorized users fromentering important areas of the system.)

54 min.- Fierce Tyrannosaurus Rex chases dinosaurs. This chase scene isespecially frightening to a young child on a LSD trip. Long-necked snake-likedinosaurs appear. They may be refrained as a python snake. T Rex is also knownas Leviathan, a demon that inhabits the kundalini spinal column and causes painin the victim, he is written about on page 302 in our Vol. 2 book. In the film along fierce struggle between T Rex and other dinosaurs ensues.

55 min. The dinosaurs begin dying and soon dies. “THE LORD DOESN’T LIKETHEM.”’ This will later be refrained that if parts integrate they are todie. If someone tries to get into the system, the alters are to bury themselvesdeep like these dinosaurs do on the film.

56 min. Dead bones appear

59 min. Mountains soar out of the ground into eminence.

59.5 min. It gets stormy on the screen, winds & floods appear.

60. min. Stillness comes as the sun rises.

61 min. The sun sets. (During the programming, this may be refrained as themoon setting. It can be both or either or. Remember, the programmer is workingwith the child’s creativity.) Various scenes during the film show the moon indifferent phases which is important for bringing in programming concepts likeMr. Moon.

61.3 min. The orchestra is now playing. Music is an important part ofmind-control programming. The affect of music on the mind and body has beenstudied. Music can double the heart beat, accelerate the respiratory rate, makethat rate irregular, enhance perception, lower the threshold for various sensorystimuli, change blood pressure & circulation, and alter the muscles in thebody. Dance music and “march” music done by orchestras change muscleresponse. Music is also a great way to cause dissociation.

62.5 min. The MC introduces the “‘Sound Track’ who he says is animportant person for Fantasia who can be seen around the Disney studio. When Mr.Sound Track appears, he is simply a vertical line. The MC says he is “animportant screen personality.” The ground work is being laid for a personbeing anything, even a line. The MC states that each sound creates a picture.

63 minutes. The MC encourages the personified Sound Track “”don’tbe nervous.”” Then a sound is made like an electrical shock and theline develops a splotch of color in it. During the programming at this point anelectrical shock would be applied to the child.

63.5 minutes. The harp is ask to sound. The harp begins playing a scale andthe line becomes double 8’s and snake-like spirals. The child will be taughtto dissociate when seeing such double 8’s.

64 min. The violin begins going up and down. Each of these instruments isgoing up and down the scale, like do-ray-me-fa-so-la-tee-do. The music is usedto teach the alters to go up and down the helix, which is figured in this partof the film. As the music goes down, an alter is taught to go down in trance,and as it climbs higher, the alter will trance higher. All these instruments(violin, flute, bass, bassoon) are being used to teach alters how to work in thesystem. The MC describes the flute as “very pretty”.

64.3 min. A trumpet begins playing and the colors, yellow, orange, etc. beginshowing.

64.5 min. When the bassoon plays, the MC says, “Go on. Drop the othershoe”– “Go to the shoe” which translates “‘go to theground”” –the deepest trance level. The following is thedouble-pyramid, with a helix up the middle that appears when the bassoon plays:-(This configuration is very important to all these Illuminati alters systems.)-

p_rugbyball.gif

65 min. The drum plays and some other percussion instruments play. These aretaught to the child as the cult’s “HEARTBEAT”. They will hear thissound internally for many years to come. Then some sounds that have a shatteringeffect (cymbals) like broken mirrors are made in the film.

65.5 min. As the sounds take place a line is made with a pyramid at the top.This is laying the groundwork for the system’s structuring.

66 min. The MC laughs and talks about Beethoven’s Pastoral Symphony(Beethoven’s 6th) which is next.

66.5 minutes. The screen comes alive with magical Unicorns of differentcolors. Then Pan (a satan-like figure) appears playing his pipes, and soon lotsof little Pans (little demons) are playing their pipes. The little Pans (demons)play and dance with the unicorns. The orchestra plays again. (This author,Fritz, remembers when I said that Pan was an evil demon, I was rebuked by aChristian minister. He then said Pan a benevolent cheery creature”. Anumber of books which may be obtained from Satanic bookstores document that Panis indeed considered a powerful demon by occultists.)

67 min. Pegasus (the mythical greek winged horse) flies in. As a Mother horseshe takes care of little ones on the screen. She is a protector in theprogramming.

68 min. “FANTASY IS FUN. FANTASY IS A GAME YOU PLAY. MOTHER TEACHES YOU.SEE HOW MOTHER IS A TEACHER. SEE THE BLACK AND WHITE HORSE. THEY ALWAYS FLYTOGETHER, BUT ARE SEPARATE. THEY ARE FLYING OVER THE CLOUDS.” “OVERTHE CLOUDS, INTO THE BLUE YONDER.” The child is rewarded for what it has todo with the game of fantasy. “THAT’S YOUR REWARD FOR DOING WHAT YOU ARETO DO. YOU CAN LEARN TO FLY OVER THE CLOUDS.” The child feels rewarded bythe game of fantasy. The fantasy scenes in Walt Disney’s Fantasia are like theWizard of Oz scenes in Oz, fantasy-land is more colorful and fun than real life.Vivid colors will be splashed about during the fantasy-land scenes.

68.5 min. A castle appears as Pegasus flies around. This and other castlescenes will help the child develop the imagery for the spiritual castles thatthe child will build internally. Then they swim in the water. “SEE THEMIRROR IMAGES, WATER CAN BE GLASS.” During the programming mirrors are putinto the internal system. A mirror can be a piece of glass, the surface of apond, or an asphalt runway. When the programming is complete, underneath thewater &/or the runway lurk demons.

70 min. Waterfalls emerge and issue forth. The waterfalls are used by theprogrammers to erase all the slave’s memory of what was done to them. Thechild will be told at the end of watching Fantasia (and this will be said atother programming events too), “JUST REMEMBER THE GOOD, JUST REMEMBER THEFANTASY”. The fantasy is given so that the subconscious can rest in peaceafter the programming. The child is told “WASH YOURSELF CLEAN.”

70.5 min. The little girls appear as girl centaurs (half girl-half horse).”SEE THE LITTLE GIRLS ARE HORSES.”

71 minutes. Then a scene appears where one girl centaur braids another girlcentaur’s long hair. The Illuminati teach their slaves to braid theirmemories. They braid their memories up and then lock them in. All the Daddymemories will be locked up & braided and then locked for good.

72 min. Male centaurs appear. They are near water and make mirror images inthe water.

72.5 min. A crown is placed on a female centaur and 2 doves. During theIlluminati death, burial and resurrection ceremonies lilies are used for crowns,and doves are used. These are significant programming/ritual symbols. The femalecentaurs look at the male centaurs. This will be refrained as a system can haveboth male and female parts.

73 min. Starting with one female centaur, the females act seductive to themales, who then respond. For bras the females have bras of daisies. The Vol. 2book explained how the daisy programming is a life-or-death type program. Vividcolors are used for each centaur. For instance, one may be purple and anotherone another color, which sets the groundwork for alters to have different accesscolor codes. Alters do not usually see themselves as being in different colors,although it does happen on occasion.

73.8 min. A marriage takes place between the centaurs. The programmers catchthese nuances of the film and use them. The marriage here teaches the child tobe acquainted with the arm-and-arm marriage ceremonies. Remember, theprogrammers are dealing with clean slates that must be taught from the groundup. In the next few minutes, the cherub children will watch sexual bodylanguage, and the child victim is also picking up on enticing sexual bodymotions.

74.2 min. The centaurs go swimming. “I FEEL LIKE A LITTLE GIRL WITH AHORSE’S BODY.”

75 min. Little cherubs are dancing and flying around. When pictured theartists at times single out 3 cherubs who blow flutes together. The femalecentaur appears, who is fair haired (blond) and blue-eyed, which is what the Illuminati like.When she hears the tone (of the flutes) she goes into a trance state and walkswith her eyes closed. This imagery is used to teach alters that when they hearcertain tones, they are to go into a trance state and do certain things. Thelittle cherub turns into a heart, and when no one is watching goes into thetree. In programming, this part is the Keeper of the Tree. Notice how everythingis veiled. The assistant programmer will point the cherub out to the childvictim, “LOOK AT WHAT HE DID.”

76.5 min. A curtain then shrouds the scene. The curtain appears to betree-like. More bubbles appear, and more water. All the mythical creatures onthe screen begin to dance and be merry and have a feast.

77 min. “SEE THE FEASTS, SEE THE BANQUETS, THE FEASTS ARE O.K. THEBANQUETS ARE O.K.”

78 min. “THE LEAVES ARE FALLING.” Blood-like wine is drank at thefeast. “SEE THE BLOOD.”

“SEE THE LITTLE DEVILS POP UP.” The only human in this Disney sceneis honored. This is done to teach the alters that humans and animals can mix.That they can be accepted for what they are, even if they think they are ananimal or something else they will be accepted at the cult’s feasts. Thesescenes are all for internal programming. By the way, one of the pretty femalecentaurs makes a sexual pass at the fat human, who then chases her. “MUSTPLEASE THE MASTER.”

80 min. A scary storm comes up, and Zeus, and the greek gods appear. ,,BETTERFEAR IT. HE’S A GOD YOU’D BETTER FEAR HIM. HE THROWS LIGHTNING.” Thisdemon who throws lightening is named Furfur. He also makes thunder & strongwinds in the system (alter system’s worlds). Readers can learn more about thisdemon, named Furfur, in Cisco’s second part of Deeper Insights in the articleon “Programming, foundations, destruction of”.

81 minutes. Lightening bolts are thrown from heaven.

81.5 min. All the little cherubs run for cover in fear.

82 min. Pegasus the protector flies in to protect everyone, especially a newborn Pegasus. The wind is personified as a two-headed blowing person. Thistwo-headed Janus wind comes storming through the heavens. The programmer willoften place his own voice “IN THE WIND.” The greek god (internaldemon) throws a lightening bolt.

83 min. “SEE THE GODS”. The child is learning what to makeinternally. Zeus then relaxes & goes to sleep.

84 min. More vivid colors form. “FAMILIARIZE YOURSELF WITH ALL THECOLORS.” The film at this point is teaching the child to stay in theframework of the programming for safety. To go outside of the programming isterror. The child is learning to fear the godlike demonic guardians.

84.5 min. The fantasy world is coming alive. It is a happy fantasy world. Agoddess in the sky makes a rainbow emerge. This is the rainbow goddess of theprogramming.

85 min. All the happy unicorns and cherubs fly ‘”over therainbow.” (Refer back to the Vol. 2 book p.94 to understand thesignificance of going over the rainbow.) The unicorn is derived from old Britishpaganism where the lion represented sun worship, and the unicorn representedmoon worship. This is why the Royal Arms of the British Royal Family have aunicorn on one side, & a lion on the other. Sexually the unicorn representsandrogeny. During programming, the horses, pegasi, unicorns and centaurs shownin the Fantasia movie become the foundation upon which the Illuminatiprogrammers build the Night Mare alters who are beasts of burden who carry analter system’s memories. These are logical no-emotion alters who are earlysplits & who are programmed after the child is verbal. See Cisco’s articleon Dream Work for more understanding about the horse alters, as well as chapter7 on Structuring.

86 minutes. More rainbows and lots of bubbles come into view. The film hasdone an excellent lob of showing how the Furfur God of thunder protects theRainbow. Once an alter has gone over the rainbow, they can not come back becausea demon protects the Rainbow. The rainbow is also protected by alters who fearthe gods. After seeing Fantasia, the therapist can understand why the littlechild protector alters have fear about these gods. The master (who representsFurfur) in the movie swallows the rainbow. If an alter looks internally for therainbow, he or she will only find stars, because the protector will come up andsay, “I swallowed the rainbow.” The rainbow is kept well hiddeninternally. This scene is used to teach alters how to go over the rainbow.””BEFORE YOU GO OVER THE RAINBOW, YOU HAVE TO PUT ALL YOUR MEMORIES INTHE BUBBLE. YOU CAN’T TAKE ANYTHING OVER THE RAINBOW INTO FANTASY LAND.”

86.5 minutes. Apollo, the sun god comes out.

87 min. A big mother spirit who fills the whole sky is now shown by Disney.She hangs over the rainbow. When a system is built this is indeed what they putin. All go to sleep in the film.

87.5 minutes. Arrows shoot the stars into the heavens. This is moreprogramming imagery. When you look for the rainbow, you see stars.

88 min. The conductor finishes again.

88.5 min. The next setting is a Venetian nobleman’s (a duke’s) palace.Curtains open. The use of curtains is spoken about in our previous books.

89 min. Curtains open. An Ostrich begins dancing, and gets others to balletdance.

90 min. The Ostriches begin dancing in a circle, this islaying the groundwork for what the cult family does. The Assistant programmermay tell the child, “SEE IT’S O.K. TO DANCE TOGETHER. DANCING ISACCEPTABLE.” The programmers will not directly tell the child that thisrepresents the cult family.

91.5 min. The Ostriches are eating grapes. They are playing, looking in thepool & they are seeing bubbles.

92 min. Hippos emerge out of the pool. “IT’S O.K. TO BE DIFFERENT.IT’S O.K. TO BE STRANGE. USE YOUR CREATIVITY.” The hippos begin to danceand dance.

94 min. Elephants appear and are having fun and blowing bubbles out of theirtrunks. The programmers may be having fun blowing bubbles with the child. Theprogrammers like to mix love and hate, kindness and sadistic behavior. That waythe victim has a hard time separating love from hate. If you ask many slavesabout “Daddy” they will tell you that they had fun with Daddy. Theyare right–they had fun intermixed with sadistic torture. Bubbles continue tolift off. One of the bubbles has a fish in it. This is imagery for the bubbleprogramming. The child victim is trained to dump their bad memories into bubblesand let them float away. The therapist will notice that many victims feel likethey are floating. They have an unreal feeling. The bubbles are floating theirbad memories away.

98.5 minutes. A new setting and the hippos are hypnotically sleeping. 3sinister alligators that remind one of the 3 primary programmers appear. The 3alligators have robes that hide them, and shadow images of themselves lurkingbehind them. The alligators are trying to get the hippos. The 3 alligators areportrayed like the programmer is, he is someone to fear, love, & respect allat once. The hippo is running away and dancing. The alligator dances with thehippo, but makes menacing attempts to eat him. A flying hippo lands on analligator. Elephants, hippos, alligators are shown. The elephants, ostriches,hippos and alligators all dance in fantasyland.

100 min. The orchestra is dancing. ‘”DO WHAT YOU’RE TOLD AND WE WILLHAVE FUN.”

101 min. The MC announces the next part as “”the struggle betweenthe profane and the sacred.”’ The conductor stands in a silhouette thatsuggests the same pose that the upcoming Satan takes.

102 min. A high dark mountain with a castle looms in front of the viewer. Awinged fiercesome Satan figure raises his wings. His wings are sectioned likefingers with claws, and will form the imagery of the demon Malebrinche, whosesatanic claws hang over the alters and terrorize them. In the IllustratedGuidebook, the reader will find lots of these claws in the pictures lurking inthe background. A child victim will be taught to fear the hands of theprogrammer, Satan and Malebrinche. The wings (hands with claws) open. And Satanis portrayed as an awe-inspiring figure. (By the way,, the word maleficia meansevil misfortune caused by witches. The witch in Disney’s Sleeping Beauty hasthe demonic name of Maleficent.)

102.5 min. Satan begins raising the dead skeletons. This provides afoundation to layer in the Valley of the Dry bones coming alive with armies ofskeletons.

104 min. The film also has some images at this point that will help with thefoundation for the Armageddon programming. Satan calls everything to himself.

p_satan.gif

104.5 min. The hell pit is shown. This is laying a foundation for the hellpit with all its demons. All kinds of vivid colors are shown in hell, to makethe scene more real than real for the child victim. Satan smiles as demons burnin hell. “NO MATTER WHAT COLOR YOU ARE, IF YOU ARE NOT GOOD YOU’LL END UPTHERE.’”

Fantasia portrays Satan as a terrible powerful being.

105 min. “THAT’S WHAT HAPPENS IF YOU’RE BAD. YOUR THROWN INTO THEHELL PIT.”

105.5 min. Three beautiful lady demons begin to dance in a circle, all of asudden these demons take on their luciferian form, one becomes a goat.

106 min. The demons continue to dance with powerful Satan watching over them.The hell pit and the demons are portrayed in vivid scary graphic depictions. Thehellish fire and the ghoulish dancing of its occupants continues for what seemsa long time. “WHEN GOD FINDS OUT HOW BAD YOU ARE, LOOKAT WHAT HE’LL DO TO YOU.”

107 min. Satan is portrayed by Disney in all his evil dark majesty.

107.5 min. Bells begin to ring, and the demons slink away, & the deadreturn to the earth to their graveyards.

108 min. Ghosts return to the graves. Soft music begins to play. Ave Maria bySchubert, which was written for the Catholic church, begins playing.

109 min. Satan folds himself into a mountain. ‘”DO YOU SEE LUCIFERANYWHERE? NO. YOU ONLY SEE A MOUNTAIN.”

110 min. Lights shine as if they are a column of moving people who arewalking with lights, and then some walls appear.

110.5 min. An arched bridge appears with its mirror image. The column ofsilhouetted people who continue walking have mirror images in the river. Theasst. programmer will be telling the system (which the front parts will hear)”TIME FOR ALL THE GOOD CHILDREN TO GO TO CHURCH. IT’S O.K. TO GO TOCHURCH. GO SERVE GOD.”

113. min. An opening, a vertical sliver of light comes from what appears tobe doors opening up. There is a mirror effect in the way the doors open, whichwill facilitate making mirror image front worlds. A whole new world opens up,which will be the front system’s world. Both the front alters and the deeperones will be told to forget the movie. Later when a system is better programmed,the programmers will pull up the front alters and have them walk through thesedoors into the light. When they are hypnotically taken through these doors intothe light and away from the fear and darkness of the Kingdom of Satan, they arehypnotically told to close those doors and never look back. The Kingdom of Satanhas been shown in detail and in great length. The Kingdom of Satan has beenshown as powerful and fearful. Satan is shown as a mighty power that is to befeared. The Kingdom of Light is only shown as a peace, as a refuge from evil. Itis not shown to be good. It is not shown to have power or intelligence. It issimply a place to go to escape the fear of Satan’s power. This is all theprogrammers really want the church to be. It will be a stabilizing balance tolet the mind recuperate from the hell of the programming, but it is not intendedto be seen as greater than Satan and his Kingdom.

115 min. The film ends with a peaceful gaze at heaven. The child is beingtold in the last few minutes “THAT WORLD BELONGS TO YOU. IT’S A BEAUTIFULWORLD. IT’S THE WORLD WE WANT YOU TO LIVE IN. IT’S BEAUTIFUL.” Afterall the hell that is eventually dumped on the child, and the scare that Satangives them in this Fantasia film, the child is only too happy to create abeautiful world to live in.

The effectiveness of Disney’s Fantasia is that it is used to communicate to& build the unconscious structures within the child’s mind. Theunconscious mind is the seat of our creative abilities. Then the conscious mindmakes adaptations upon this unconscious thinking.

SUMMARY

Now that the reader has covered so much, the following quotes (with boldemphasis’s added) take on even deeper meaning: Joe Flower in Prince of theMagic Kingdom, Walt Disney was obsessed with creation, driven to buildmagical worlds not, as many artists are, out of paint and canvas, or words, oreven film, but physically, out of concrete, wires, smoke, electricity, andhighly programmed employees.” (p. 23) Julian Halevy in Nation decriesDisney taking this nation into a “drift to fantasy.” He adds,”…one feels our whole culture heading up the dark river to thesource–that heart of darkness where Mr. Disney traffics in pastel trinketedevil for gold and ivory.” For those who understand programming Aubrey Menencomments about Disney’s success are profoundly appropriate, “thestrongest desire an artist knows…to create a world of his own where everythingis just as he imagines it.” John Ciardi was not so nice, he termed WaltDisney as “the shyster in the backroom of illusion.” Eliot said,”While his filmed fairy tales may have appeared at first glance to be lightand dreamlike, upon closer examination they seemed more nightmares ofdeconstructed reality in league with the era’s leading neo-FreudianModernists.”

• You have now finished reading a never-before-heard, unprecedented Warningabout the Dark Reality of the Disney’s Magic Kingdom, and how it fits in withMind-Control. Most Americans when surveyed say they believe in God, most go tochurch, and many believe they are born-again.

Because of the Illuminati’s deceptioncampaign over several generations, the American public, and the world in generalhas been led to believe that Disney was good, and that Walt Disney was a goodman. Because of his image, people suspended judgement about Disney and Disneymovies. They entrusted their children to him. People had been manipulated into aframe of mind, a predisposition that whatever comes out of Disney is good. Theyentrusted their children to take in what Disney fed their children’s littleminds week after week. The public’s predisposition of trust was used tointroduce Illuminati beliefs and their political agenda, and to carry out a vastprogram of trauma-based mind-control on hundreds of thousands of tiny littlechildren, whose minds and souls were stolen from them. Because many of the childslaves, who are programmed with Disney-themes, are programmed with roles inbringing in the Anti-Christ, Walt Disney and his family have played a major rolefor the Anti-Christ. And now you can see how accurate the Word of God is when itsays, What is highly esteemed among men, is an abomination to God. First, therewill be an Overview of the types of sources used, and then will follow a partialBibliography on this Disney Section.

TYPES OF SOURCES

People who have worked for Disney and who are getting pensions and medicalinsurance have talked about Disney under the condition of anonymity. This isbecause the Disney hierarchy will not permit exposure without retaliation.Several non-Disney people who helped with discovering facts for this sectionwere threatened that their children lives would be taken if they continued toinvestigate Disney. What I (Fritz Springmeier) finally have put in this, issolely my responsibility.

• One type of source for this was books on the Hollywood Film Industry andbooks on Disney Films. There were about 20 books of this category which wereperused for a better understanding of who the Disney brothers were and whatDisney Co. was about. One of the best in this type of source was The Art of WaltDisney from Mickey Mouse to the Magic Kingdom by Christopher Finch (NY: Harry N.Abrams, Inc., 1975.)

• Another type of source were the standard biographical reference books,,such as Who’s Who, Who’s Who in the West (1951), World Biography, Who WasWho,, Current Biography 1952, etc.

• Another type of source was critics of Disney’s movies such as severalarticles exposing the Lion King, Media Spotlight’s article Fantasia, RushLimbaugh’s comments and statements concerning how Disney had betrayed itsviewers’ trust, the Spotlight’s Feb. 26, ‘96 p. 31 article “DisneyTurns Back on Family Values.”’

• Another type of source was magazine and newspaper articles about Disneysuch as the Oregonian’s art. on a Disney director being a convicted childmolester. NY Times, Newsweek and other magazine and newspaper sources. Animportant series of extremely good investigative reports which were written byHarry V. Martin for the Napa Sentinel in 1989 were very important in learning ofsome of the Illuminati/CIA/Contra/Drug Running activities in Napa Valley, CAthat Roy Disney is associated with. Harry V. Martin went into all kinds ofrecords and did an excellent job of investigative reporting. The magazine Monde2000, no.12, had an article on non-lethal weapons that the NWO is developing.This article was reprinted in Encounter Chronicles Journal of ScientificIntelligence, and discussed how Disney has been working with Sandia Labs and LosAlamos.

• Another type of source were victims of Illuminati mind-control, who haverecovered memories of being programmed at Disneyland and Disneyworld.

• Another type of source has been to watch Disney movies as an investigativetool to understand how Disney is programming, how they are skillfullyindoctrinating the American people into witchcraft, etc. This author has alsopersonally been to both Disneyland, near Anaheim, CA and Disneyworld, nearOrlando, FL.

• Another source was the Walt Disney Co.’s Annual Reports, and also thereference book Directory of Corporate Affiliations (1986) published by theNational Register Pub. Co.

• Another type of source were books which specialized in covering detailsabout Disneyland such as Disneyland And Beyond the Ultimate Family Guidebook(edited by Ray Riegert, and printed by Ulysses Press of Berkeley, CA); and WaltDisney’s Disneyland (by Martin A. Sklar and introduced by Walt Disney.) AAAhad a 27 page booklet “Disneyland Park and Southern California”, whichcame out in 1996, which provides information on what is being offered atDisneyland and vicinity. The book refers repeatedly to “Disney Magic”. One has to wonder how Christians and non-occulticpersons can’t see how occult Disney is.

Partial BIBLIOGRAPHY

BOOKS

AAA. Disneyland Park and Southern California. 1996.

The Walt Disney Co.’s Annual Reports. pub. by the Walt Disney Co. annually.

Auletta, Ken. Three Blind Mice. NY: Random House, 1991.

Cluran, Richard M. To the End of Time. Rockefeller Ctr, NY, NY: Simon &Schuster.

Commander M. The Controllers: A New Hypothesis of Alien Abductions. (subtitleAlien Abductions, or Government Secret Mind Control Black R&D Programs). 88pages long. 1990.

Current Biography 1952

Directory of Corporate Affiliations (1986) published by the National RegisterPub. Co.

Eliot, Marc. Walt Disney Hollywood’s Dark Prince. NY, NY: HarperPaperbacks, 1993.

Finch, Christopher. The Art of Walt Disney from Mickey Mouse to the MagicKingdom. NY: Harry N. Abrams, Inc., 1975.

Hagstrom, Robert G. Jr. The Warren Buffett Way. NY: John Wiley & Sons.

Hulteng, John L. The Messenger’s Motives, Ethical Problems of the NewsMedia. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall, Inc., 1976.

Jackson, Kathy Merlock. Walt Disney, A Bio-Bibliography. Westport, CN:Greenwood Press.

Landis, Bill. Anger, The Unauthorized Biography of Kenneth Anger. NY:HarperCollins Pub., 1995.

Moldea, Dan E. Dark Victory, Ronald Reagon, MCA and the Mob. NY, NY: Viking,1986.

Mosley, Leonard. Disney’s World. Stein & Day: NY, 1985.

Neelands, Barbara. About Ben Sharpsteen. Second Impressions, No. 1 ASharpsteen Museum Reprints Project, Calistoga, CA: Sharpsteen Museum, July,1990.

Riegert, Ray, ed. Disneyland And Beyond the Ultimate Family Guidebook.Berkeley, CA: Ulysses Press of Berkeley, CA.

Schickel, Richard. The Disney Version. NY: Simon & Schuster, 1968.

Siu, R.G.H. The Craft of Power. NY, NY: Quill, William Morrow & Co.

Sklar, Martin A. (with intro by Walt Disney) Walt Disney’s Disneyland. WaltDisney Prod., 1969.

Smoodin, Eric. Disney Discourse Producing the Magic Kingdom. Routledge: NY,1994.

Stein, Jeff, ed. The Basic Everyday Encyclopedia. NY, NY: Random House, 1954.

Sterling, Claire. Thieves World -The Threat of the New Global Network ofOrganized Crime. NY: Simon & Schuster, 1994.

Taylor, John. Storming the Magic Kingdom. NY: Alfred A. Knopf, 1987.

Thomas, Bob. Walt Disney An American Original. Hyperion (Disney): CA, 1994.

Wallechinsky, David and Irving Wallace and Amy Wallace. The Book of Lists.666 5th Ave., NY, NY: Bantam Books, 1978.

Wallechinsky, David and Irving Wallace. The People’s Almanac. Garden City,NY: Doubleday and Co., 1975.

Who’s Who, Who’s Who in the West (1951), Who Was Who World Biography

PERIODICAL SOURCES

Carson, L. Pierce, Who’s Who in the Napa Valley, Appellation, Oct/Nov.‘95

George Magazine, “”Here Comes the Son’”, Dec. Vol. 1, No.10.

House & Garden, “Sticks and Stones, Mickey for Mayor?”, Oct. 1,1996, pp. 61 -68ff.

Martin, Harry V. Napa Sentinel. A series of articles in 1989 were veryimportant in learning of some of the Illuminati/CIA/Contra/Drug Runningactivities in Napa Valley, CA that Roy Disney is associated with. Harry V.Martin went into all kinds of records and did an excellent job of investigativereporting.

Monde 2000, no.12, had an article on non-lethal weapons that the NWO isdeveloping. This article was reprinted in Encounter Chronicles Journal ofScientific Intelligence, and discussed how Disney has been working with SandiaLabs and Los Alamos.

Media Spotlight’s article Fantasia,

Mother Jones, May-Ju’, 97, p. 61.

NAPA VALLEY REGISTER, the following articles are samples of what was used:

“ABC Will Mount An Anti-Drug Campaign’” Friday, Jan. 10, 1997,p.1D

“Children’s Books Get Red Carpet Treatment In Hollywood Films”May 16, 1996, p. SC

“Disney and McDonalds’” May 24, 1996

“Disney Buys ABC”, Saturday, Aug. 19, 1995, D.

“Disney Earnings Up 28 Percent In Third Quarter”, Friday, July 26,1996, p. 8C

,,Disneyland Expansion Given OK” Wednesday, Oct. 9, 1996, p.D

‘”Disney Links to McDonald’s May Be Back. Thursday, Apr. 11, 1996,7A

“Disney World Makes Sure World, Remember the Magic”” (by L.Pierce Carson), Sun., Oct. 20, ‘96

“Federal Employees Get Disney Tour” Saturday, Dec. 9,1995, p. 5A

“It’s Lights-Out For Main Street” May 14, 1996.

“An Overlooked, Different World Inside Theme Park” Sunday, Sept.29, 1996, p. SC

“Mickey Going On The Road”, Friday, 7/26/96, p. 8C ‘”Pastand Future In Disney Community’”, Friday, Oct. 4, 1996, p. iD

“Planned Parenthood Benefit On Sunday”–Events of Interest sect. onp. A2, Sept. 13, ‘96

“Pentagon Still Wastes Money”, Mon., 4/15/96, p. 4BNewsweek

“Power Failure” 12/23/96, p. 34-36; ‘”Sending an SOS atABC”, 5/12/97, p. 54-55

NY TIMES (the following are samples of what was used: Articles during the”50’s & ‘60’s were looked at. ,,Disney Offers Faux Memories ofAtlantic City Boardwalk” by Joe Sharkey, Tuesday, Dec. 10, 1996″Baptists Censure Disney On Gay-Spouse Benefits” Thurs. June 13, 1996,p. A10 ,,Disney to acquire 2 radio stations”, 4/15/97, p. C4.

The PRESS DEMOCRAT (the following are example of what was used:)

“Baptists, Disney Paths Diverge” Saturday, June 29, 1996, p. D4

“Disney To Buy Stake In Web Company” 2/15/97, p. E6

“Heavy Disney” Sunday, Oct. 20, 1996

“The Ins and Outs of Allen” by Frederic M. Biddle and Renee Graham,On Q,, Sept. 29, 1996, p. 27

SAN FRANCISCO CHRONICLE (the following are examples of what was used:)

“Disney, Miramax Bond”, May 10, 1996

“Disney Signs Asian Animator”

“Miramax Plans To Make ‘Thoughtful” Films”, 4/11/96

SAN FRANCISCO EXAMINER (the following are examples of what was used:)

“Disney Institute Is A Short Course In Creativity” by CatherineWatson, Sunday, May 26, 1996, p. T9

“Mouse Matriculation Is A Great Experience” by Catherine Watson,Sunday, May 26, 1996, p. T9

“Tomorrowland Jumps Into The Future”, Sunday, July 14, 1996, p. T3

The Spotlight’s Feb. 26, ‘96 p. 31 article “Disney Turns Back onFamily Values.”

Time Magazine, “Job Hunting With Mike [Ovitz]” 2/24/97, p. 50;‘”Hilton Has Room For ITT’” 2/10/97,

Wall St. Journal (many issues from several decades.)

SOME OF OTHER SOURCES (used & not used).

· Various Disney brochures.//· Rush Limbaugh’s comments concerning howDisney had betrayed its viewers’ trust.//· Interviews w/ Napa Valleyresidents.

· Interviews with disgruntled insiders to the NWO.

· Interviews with various types of Disney victims.

[Disney has used mafia-type tactics, i.e. death threats, to intimidatenumerous people into selling their property. Roy E. Disney has been reportedinvolved in these land thefts. Victims of this type of intimidation are in manystates, but several prominent regions are Napa Valley, CA; Shenandoah Valley;Virginia, & FL Disney’s land-grabbing operations could be a book initself. This author has lots more research which I HAVE NO PLANS to reveal,which has been left w/ key others, such as the connections of VaVin, nearLeon,VA, who produce Prince Michel de Virginia, whose chef & others connectto Belgium. The background of several key people, like Robert Podesta. Financialrecords, such as Fed. Judge Fern M. Smith (Burrows). ETC. This para. is notindexed.]

CHAPTER 6: SCIENCE NO. 6-THE USE OF ELECTRONICS & ELECTRICITY

Developments in fiber optics, computers, electronic communications, nano-technology,bio-chips & neuro-electrical research have combined to bring mankind to thepoint where mankind can be controlled by one centralized monolithic Beastcomputer. The ultimate mind-controlled slavery is now possible. We are in thefirst stages of its implementation.

The chapter will be organized in the following sections & subsections:

Section A.An Overview of the subject.

A1. Where thisarticle is headed

This chapter is designed to cover the complexities of hi-tech mind-control insimple-to-understand language. To accommodate those who are more technicallyliterate and who want more, some clues to more technical sources are given, buttime & space limitations mean that much has gone unsaid. My deep thanks tothe many victims, who placed their trust in me to get their stories out to theworld. I hope that I have vindicated their trust. There are a number ofdisinformation agents that appear to be putting out good information onimplants, but are actually disinformation agents. We can error by undershootingor overshooting the truth. The principle topics that these pretend “whistleblowers” have been discussing are the tracking implants and remote viewing.(For RV info, see Theta Programming material in Vol. 2.) Neither topic is anyrevelation, nor are they the most dangerous items in the elite’s electronicmind-control arsenal. If the reader has not skipped chapter 5 on disinformation,then he will be aware how factual information can be used in deception, such asin chicken feed & building bona fides. Why is it that the TV program”The Real X-Files” shown on channel 4 was created by a CIA operative,Jim Schnabel? And why are all the “private” Remote Viewingorganizations run by what appear to be entirely all intelligence operatives(such as Ed Dames, et. al.)? And why do we see mind-control specialists, like”ex”-Intelligence officer C.B. Scott Jones who gets involved withseveral UFO research organizations & disseminating disinformation? One”researcher”, who is publicly exposing” the NWO, tried toconvince this author, “The government has no secrets.” (Aword-for-word quote by the way.) He needs to read a supplement to the NationalIndustry Security Pro grain manual (Mar. 92 release) where the Air Force teachestheir DoD contractors how to construct cover stories to lie about the nature oftheir work for the government. I will not take cheap shots at the World Order,& I will not intentionally mislead the reader. You will get the whole truthand nothing but the truth, as well a single chapter can present it. Vol. 2’schapter 6 which was on this same subject was not the final word and neither isthis chapter. Before I start passing on lots of information, I should clarifyone point. Human brain cells communicate by superconductivity, not electricity.Electricity travels near the speed of light, while superconductivity is in therange of the speed of sound. Government researchers have a device called a SQUID(Superconducting Quantum Interference Device) which actually monitors the lightflowing from brain cell to brain cell. This is why over 5% of the brain’s drymatter weight is iridium and rhodium. However, this does not subtract from thefact that electromagnetic waves have the ability to change what the brainexperiences and thinks. I must also provide a small glossary for electronicmind-control terms that most people are not familiar with.

GLOSSARY OF TERMS FOR UNDERSTANDING ELECTRONIC MIND CONTROL

Bio-medical telemetry–Transmitter-receiversthat are often located at the base of the skull which record body functions& brain wave activity. Their data is sent to remote computers formonitoring. A bio-medical telemetry implant may also function as the primarycontrol implant on body suits of implants. Early versions were used onastronauts.

EMF weapons–Electromagnetic Frequency weapons.These basically are machines that can modulate and beam electromagnetic waves insuch a fashion that they control biological/mental functions within the victim.Portals to the central nervous system can be manipulated to create visualimages, project voices into the mind, and create pain, moods and emotions.

Psychotronics–This word was originated fromSoviet research. The American public have mistakingly thought that the word isequivalent to psychic activity. A more precise translation of the Russian termwould have been “applied psychoenergetics”. American psychotronicsresearch was initially done at Stanford Research Institute. This is the ThetaProgramming that Vol. 2 described.

Remote Viewing (RV for short)–Thismeans psychic viewing of something.

Syntel–This is short for synthetic telepathy, which isthe remote sending of voices and thoughts into a victim of electronicmind-control. The military and intelligence agencies have successfully achievedthis capability and have carried out countless meetings over their possible usesof syntel.

A2. Where the NWO isheaded

Since 1991, this author has been in contact with various victims of implants.The natural first reaction of many initial listeners would be skepticism to thesubject. The psychological profession has had articles in their professionaljournals ridiculing these poor victims. If a fair-minded person will match theexperiences of what one can witness happening to these implant victims (as wellas their evidence) to the cutting edge of what science is researching andcapable of doing, then there is no doubt that implants are being used on an everincreasing mass scale. The World Order is using amplifiers, generators,electronics, listening devices, non-ionizing electromagnetic radiation, asnapping type sound energy that hits and burns the body, closed-circuit videosto monitor implant victims, nanotechnology, and tracking devices that scanners(incl. mobile hand-held scanners) can pick up– JUST to name a few. This chapterwill provide an indepth overview of many of these electronic mind-controlgadgets. Unfortunately, the twilight zone of Big Brother is upon us. People(such as limousine drivers) that have been around the movers and shakers reportthat they brag about these technological controls. The technology described inthis chapter, such as nanobots, and holographic implants are in the”R&D stage” of use. What is meant by “R&D stage”means that the World Order is using a large variety of experimental items, butthe reader should be forewarned that this does not mean that these items are anyindication of where the World Order’s actual secret R&D is at. This authorhas worked with enough mind-control victims to have established several facts:

• Society is getting only the crumbs of what is known by the World Order’shierarchy.

The World Order is releasing technology at a control rate, much of itthrough mind-controlled slaves who are programmed to “discover” aparticular “discovery”. They are in reality only disclosing what hasbeen known in secret, and their discoveries are actually helping cover up wherethe World Order’s secret research is at. However, it’s not difficult to seethe direction the World Order is headed. They are working at making virtualreality (aka cyperspace) the “in” thing. They are fusing the humanmind to computers. Computers/robots are taking over human jobs, and humans arebecoming more like computers/robots. Sci-fi gurus, cyberpunks, and establishmentscientists are selling and advertising this technological direction as”freedom”, and the crowds of sheep are accepting things like brainimplants as “survival equipment” and “freedom”. Thecool” technological pied pipers of our time are teaching our children thatgadgets that remove their minds from reality are giving them new freedoms. Butthis chapter is written because there are still a few people with theneural-receptors and the computing capacity left in their craniums to comprehendthe dangers that these mind-controlling devices have for humanity. Witnesseshave told me that the creation of “robocop” type cybergs (the fusionof man & other equipment) has already been experimented on in secret.Indeed, the government gave out research contracts for cyberg research back inthe 1960’s. And the use of electro-magnetic waves (esp. Tesla waves),implants, and other electronic devices by the Illuminati for mind-control is onthe increase. How much of a genuine threat do these things pose humanity?[I’ll spell it out for the reader, but we must remain calm, a fear-basedresponse only makes things worse.] Yes, it is true that the NSA can remotelytrack people if they know the specific EMF waves (evoked potentials from EEGs inthe 30-50 Hz, 5 milliwatt range) of a person’s bioelectric field. Eachperson’s emissions are unique, just like their fingerprint, palmprint, andtheir voiceprint. This means that the NSA can remotely track anyone in public.And yes, it is true that the NSA’s RNM system can remotely send EMF Brainstimulation signals which create visual images, subliminal audios, what appearto be audible sounds, and thoughts into people’s minds. Yes, it is true thatbody suits of implants are used to control people’s minds and bodies, as wellas track them. Yes, it is true they have voice prints of hundreds of thousandsof Americans and can identify & track via their computers all electroniccommunications in this nation. Most phone calls go through about 30 computersbefore they reach their destination. The phone companies computers, according tosomeone who worked for AT&T and witnessed it, record ALL phone calls usingcomputers. However, to weed out the worthless from the worthwhile, theIlluminati’s fronts use a list of key words, such as names or phrases calledTHE WATCH LIST which the computer uses to identify conversations worthwhile tolisten to. Even though the NSA uses supercomputers, it is monitoring mostcommunication on the entire planet so they have to squeeze the WATCH LIST astight as possible. According to Bamford, James. The Puzzle Palace. NY: ThePuzzle Palace, 1983, p. 459, “…according to Raven, programmers wouldsimply reduce Malcolm X to the last two letters in his first name (lm) followedby a space and then the letter X. Then any time an intercepted datacommunications containing that particular combination of letters and spacing (lmX) streamed past the computer’s reading head, it would automatically be kickedOut for further analysis. Part of the reason that the computers are swamped withWatch list submissions is that many items require numerous entries. Whensearching for derogatory references to President Richard M. Nixon, for example,technicians would have to program a variety of possible key words, such as”Tricky Dicky”. This, according to the former G Group Chief would beconverted to The new technology which is being implemented in stages includescomputer imaging of a person which makes a “whole body map” of theperson’s body which is stored in the computer. Something that has been onlydeveloped for a narrow use by the NWO is the downloading of the holographicimage of a person’s thoughts so they can be transmitted to another. (SeeAppendix 3 on cloning for more on this.) The majority of the few people who knowthis is going on wouldn’t waste time reporting it, because the publicwouldn’t believe it anyway. However, some prominent scientists are predictingthat it is just around the corner. The three top research institutes in thisfield, Stanford Research Institute, MIT, and the Carnegie-Mellon Univ. all havepeople saying that this capability is “almost here”. Austrian bornHans Moravec, dir, of the Robotics Inst. at Carnegie Mellon Univ., is quoted inThe Indianapolis Star, 6/14/1987, in an article entitled”Immortality”, “In an astonishingly short amount of time,scientists will be able to transfer the contents of a person’s mind into apowerful computer, and in the process, make him–or at least his livingessence–virtually immortal.” MIT artificial intelligence researcher GeraldJ. Sussman states, “I’m afraid, unfortunately that I’m the lastgeneration to die. Some of my students may manage to survive a littlelonger.’’ But as fantastic as all these powerful capabilities sound, thereare gliches in their electronic control of humans.

As an outsider looking inside for a number of years, this author has beenable to take note of some of the success and failures of the New World Order’selectronic mind-control. First, the NSA picks up so much intelligenceinformation, they are drowning in their own information. Only so many people canmake decisions, and they can only digest so much information. They may try tomanipulate people and events, but Christians (who are free of the mind-control)can step through those manipulations by having the mind of Christ. Next, if aperson understands who they are & believes in following Christ, outsidevisions & outside or strange voices or thoughts do not alter the course thata person will take. Most of the people this author has met who have beensubjected to remote electronic control over their mind–HAVE REJECTED theinstructions & harassment of their electronic handlers. Not only is it clearthat the voices are being transmitted from an external source to the victim,others can also detect that something is amiss. The element of secrecy ismissing. One man spent an afternoon talking to this author about the World Orderhad tried to electronically control his mind, and turn him into a drug pusher.He had successfully foiled them for several years. Although he has had to flee& try to go into hiding to keep his own mind. The most powerful mind-controlis still trauma-based mind control built on a foundation of multiplepersonalities (dissociated personalities and dissociated parts of the mind). Itappears that electronic mind-control is being overlaid on top the mind-controlbased on dissociation. When this is done, the electronic mind-control isfrightening, because the victim’s consciousness is not able to think passedthe electronic mind-control which catches their undivided attention. They aretoo distracted to deal with the deeper issues of trauma-based mind-control.

Imagine being a programmed multiple, and your handler doesn’t have to evenbe near you to relay complicated codes and instructions. He can use yourimplant. But again, how serious is electronic mind-control? Let me relate to youabout a guided tour that a civilian friend of mine took through a NWO’s majorbeast computer center in Alaska back in the 1970’s. The engineer, who was incharge of building and getting the center operational, gave him a tour of thesite’s capabilities. At that point, the NWO had built a massive computercenter in Alaska, one in So. Africa (believed to be located at the U.S. embassyin Johannesburg), and one in Pine Gap, Australia. These three sites were veryspecific, because they formed a triangle on the globe, and couldn’t be locatedanywhere else, due to the naturally occuring lines of force of the planet. TheseBeast Computer Centers consist of aisles and aisles of big state of the artcomputers. They each have several dozen people to run them. Even in the’70’s, an operator could speak into the computer and it would answer. Forinstance, if you asked the computer about anyone on the planet, it could usuallypull up all kinds of information about that person. If you asked the computerhow could you get that person to kill someone? or how can I isolate this person?The computer would spill out a plan almost instantly, telling you all the peoplearound that subject who could be manipulated and in what fashion those peopleneed to be manipulated to cause the end result. This is the end result of yearsof “BLACK PSYCHIATRY–which means applying psychiatric techniques tomanipulate people and nations. These computers electronically connect to some ofthose people who are electronically controlled, so that the controllers canactually control the world from a computer. These computers also store vastamounts of personal information about people’s thought processes and thinking.It is possible that electronic surveillance is being done to read the thoughtsof people and that the computers are actually able to store this information insome usable fashion. Because this is so secret, they can’t give any hints oftheir vast ability to monitor thoughts, as well as organize and store thosethoughts. This sounds like science fiction, but from people who invent &work at state of the art technology, this is actually said to be old technology.They are limited in how they use this technology because they want it to remainsecret.

Meanwhile on the surface, the public system has automated fingerprintidentification with the AFIS system, and has automated birth certificateselectronically too. This all ties in with the intense desire of the World Systemto use the potential of their computers’ memories. Large Neural computers thathave artificial intelligence using neural processing which is a type of learningsimilar to learning done by the human brain are being used. Recently, the worldchampion chess player was beat by a computer. This author’s friend, who touredthe Alaskan computer center, was shown how a war could be created between anytwo nations. The operator merely asked the computer what it knew about a certaincountry and then ask it how could a war be created with a neighboring country.This is the end result of countless studies such as the U.S. military referencebook Basic Psychological Operations Study (BPS) which outlines country bycountry, specifying where each country is vulnerable for PSYOP operations(psychological warfare).

This kind of thing has a long history. For instance in W.W. II, the Office ofWar Information and the 0SS cooperated in psychological warfare projects. Whatthis author’s friend saw was a network of Cray-type computers, perhaps similarto the EMASS system of Cray computers that E-Systems developed. Such a systemcan store 5 trillion pages of text and work with that data base with lighteningspeed.

The reason this author’s friend was allowed to see this technology, wasthat he happened to be at the right place at the right time, and the Engineeroperator of the Beast Computer said that this system was obsolete. Which istrue, today’s 9 Beast computers are much better at speech than the computersat these three control sites were in ’73. The Beast computers can (accordingto another eye witness who used it) hear human voices and determine whatlanguage is being spoken and then can listen and answer in that language. Thesecomputers link directly to thousands of mind-controlled slaves and can– viavarious methods– almost instantly control the behavior of numerous people.This, along with good old fashioned phone calls, allows the elite to manipulateevents very fast.

Anchorage is the site of a National Security Agency NSAlistening post(LP). The Beast computer was located northeast of Anchorage, andso is the HAARP project. The HAARP facility is near Gakona, a hamlet about 140miles north of Prince William Sound and its signals travel on a field line toAustralia. The Beast Computer is also linked to Australia as well as satellitesystems. The HAARP site took a 4-wheeled truck to reach, and the Beast Computersite in 1973 was even more remote. The University of Alaska Fairbanks (which hasits own super computer) and the Alaskan Poker Flat Rocket Range also wereinvolved with the HAARP project. 30% of the U of A’s supercomputer’s use wasfor DoD projects.

HAARP uses 3 powerful transmitter sites in Alaska. Somewhat onthe flip side, the human brain which they control can, IF it has a memeximplant, interface with the Beast computer which acts as a vast repository ofhuman knowledge as well as answering questions to essentially all previouslyanswered questions instantaneously. If the human brain has some type of virtualreality holodeck attachment, the computer can even walk the slave through arealistic setting indistinguishable from the real world. Robocop or robo-soldierhas an incredible advantage with such extended memex/remote viewingcapabilities.

The World Order has experimented in memex/remote viewing alongseveral divergent paths. One method has been psychic (demonic) method, where the”natural” mental facilities of the human are trained. The other routehas been high-tech. According to eye-witnesses both methods have yieldedpositive results, although it sounds like they are still refining theircapabilities. The word telematics has come into use to denote theinterconnection between computers and telecommunications. France has a NationalTelecommunications Research Center, which works with groups such as CII-HoneywellBull (Jean-Pierre Brule, Pres., & Emmanuel de Robien, Sec.-Gen.). CII-HoneywellBull did telematics and implant research, and so has IBM France. IBM’ssubsidiary SBS developed satellite-based communications. In Britain, theirNational Physical Laboratory NPL has been active in telecommunications research.Professional computer groups have umbrella groups such as the British ComputerSociety, which help determine policies.

In the U.S. the National Center forSupercomputer applications works on virtual reality interface with humans.Meanwhile SCAN (Swinburne Centre for Applied Neurosciences, Hawthorn, Australia3122) has been working on how to monitor human thoughts. These are just a few ofa vast network of research groups applying their efforts to the types of thingsyou will read about in this chapter.

Around 1973, TRW began designing asatellite that would allow the CIA to communicate with its assets/agents in”denied areas”. This was code-named Pyramider, and used frequencyhopping. The signals can be hidden among random urban radio transmissions. (SeeRobert Lindsey, The Falcon and the Snowman. NY: Simon & Schuster, 1979, p.218)

Some people who are related (in some fashion) to the CIA have beenreceiving Syntel implants that are communicating to them using signals thatfrequency-hop. So the proof is in the pudding, the CIA used Pyramider to contactimplant victims. The World Order does not use every technological gadget theyhave in every situation. Use of secret weaponry is restricted so that theweaponry remains secret. This is one reason why victims of mind-control displaysuch a wide variety of symptoms and control mechanisms. But what is scary isthat any bozo can already purchase on the public market a frightening array ofelectronic mind-control devices.

Information Unlimited puts Out a catalog thatany bozo on the street can order from which advertises 200,000 volt stun guns,laser ray gun, compressed air guns (Air Tasers) that knock people down withprobes that attach instantly to the human target and jam their nervous systemwith T-waves, laser listening devices to listen at long range via their windows,implants along with the tracking system to keep track of people, animals orobjects. They also sell other novel devices. While this author has that catalogthat advertises for sale computer chips to implant people with, the psychiatricprofession is helping cover-up Big Brother’s implant technology.

For instancethe Journal of Nervous and Mental Disease, Sept. 1995, Vol. 183 (9), pp.603-604, has a story about two males (aged 33 and 53 years old) who were labeleddelusional because they complained of implants hidden in their fillings in theirteeth. The article is entitled, “Delusional electronic dental inplants:Case reports and literature review.” The shrinks concluded the two men wereobviously mentally ill and needed treatment with drugs because they are claimingthat they have electronic dental implants. The psychiatrists wrote,”neither had any insight into the implausibility of the delusion.” Thedoctors gave antipsychotic drugs, and physically intervened to “prevent aninappropriate dental extraction.” According to the article, for someunknown reason, the two men “responded poorly” to anti-psychoticdrugs. It never occurs to the psychiatrists that the reason the anti-psychoticdrugs didn’t work is possibly because the men’s complaints were legitimate.The two shrinks were E. Sherwood Brown and Michael T. Lambert.

There are othercases too, where people complaining of implants have been labelled”delusional” by psychiatrists. The Amer. Psychiatric Assoc. is guiltyof refusing to seriously review evidence that harassment & mind-control maybe impacting people mentally. DSM-IV reflects this continuing refusal to accordvictims of electronic mind-control any official recognition by the therapeuticcommunity. Based on research by Drs. W. Fry & R. Meyers, the Network haslearned how to make brain lesions of a minute controlled size with ultrasonics,rather than doing a lobotomy. In 1963, Dr. Peter Lindstrom at the Univ. ofPittsburgh was able to use a single unfocused sonic beam to destroy fiber tractsin the brain without damaging the nerve cells near them. Sonic beams (soundwaves) can be used to control human thought. (We’ll discuss sonic beams somemore later, now let’s delve into a key part of their electroniccontrol–implants.)

SECTION B. AN INTRO TOIMPLANTS

B1. Three typical implant victims

Let’s look at three victims who suffer from of mind-control implants &body-control implants, who are known by this author. We can refer to them as”Amy”, Victim No. 1001…, “Betty”, Victim No. 1002…, and”Cathy”, Victim No. 1003… –“Amy” determined by using aspectrum analyzer that she had waves of 750 mhz targeted on her.”Betty” determined that she had the entire spectrum ofradio-microwaves hitting her in a Morse code pattern. The transceiver(transmitter/receiver) for the signals was a fiber optic receiver made to looklike a pubic hair that repeatedly burned holes in her underwear. Apparently,this side effect is a “bug” they haven’t gotten out of thetechnology. “Cathy” has ELF & VLF waves of 435 & 1080 Mhzsignals targeted on her. When she’s active both types of waves come, and whenshe remains still the 1080 signal fades. (435 is in the 400-450 Mhz band whichis the window to the human consciousness, and 1080 is in the 1000 to 1200 Mhzband.) They are also using a Nitrogen particle beam, which produces”nitrogen narcosis” (like the bends) in targeted victims. Xenon lampscan affect the mind and body, too. 435 Mhz is converted to 1080 by interactionwith the high-atmosphere HAARP project. The 1100 (1000-1200) Mhz frequency canaffect genetics. Implant RF frequencies have been damaging the eyes of implantvictims. Although this gives us a starting point in our discussion, these arenot the only frequencies that threaten mind-control victims. (See Section Dl fordirect monitoring /manipulating frequencies.) Author W.H. Bowart in his Vol.1,No. 1, pg. 1 Freedom of Thought newsletter quotes Brian Bard of Glendale, CA whowrote, “I failed to discuss the utilization of power in modern mind controlimplants. Like Delgrado’s stimoceiver, no internal power source is necessary.The same electro-magnetic energy which is collected through induction by suchrelays produces an internal electrical charge of equal energy. Utilizing acapacitance circuitry design, the charge is stored as a mechanical distortion ofthe crystalline lattice and discharged as a focused pulse of electro-magneticenergy at a lower frequency. Higher frequency E-M has a higher energy state thanlower frequency. Thus, the effective output of photons may be twice or thricethe potential of the relays. “A more advanced design in use utilizes 50 ormore distinct channels for various functions. Not only the encrypted primaryinput signal utilized for signal output, but several channels are reserved forsupplementary energy induction. With integrated switching, both passive andactive surveillance of brainwave activity may be enhanced. Contrawise, signaloutput may be boosted and focused on specific neural pathways. The devicesremain active, programmable signal relays with multiple selectable channels solong as electro-magnetic induction continues to occur.”

Modern microchip implants will have 250,000 components. Certain electricalfreks will trigger certain neurochemicals. The frek 7.83, which is the elec.field resonating between the planet & its ionosphere, makes the subject feelin one with all creation. But it isn’t quite that simple, because a 7.83 frekcan be sent in numerous different wave shapes, such as the rolling sinusoidalpattern, jagged sawtooth waves, rectangular (flat on top, flat on bottom) waves,and they all have a different effect on the brain. (Mega brain, pp. 108-109) Onecan imagine the potential power an implant that could create the properfrequencies could have over an individual.

B2. Documentation of implants

On the following pages, are the startling anechoic chamber results when twovictims of syntel implants were examined. (Synthetic telepathy implants givethoughts & voices.) These two pages document that they were receivingsignals, in fact, the anechoic chamber results helped to pin point what buildingthose signals were coming from!

REFERENCEPAGE FOR UNDERSTANDING ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVES & MIND-CONTROL

The best way for people to understand electromagnetic waves is to think ofthe ocean’s waves. Some waves in the ocean are big, and some are small, sizeis amplitude.

Some beaches have waves that come quickly and some have waves thatcome slowly, this is called the frequency that the waves comes.

Researcherfigured out how they could change the amplitude or the frequency ofelectromagnetic waves in a controlled way, and this is called amplitude modulation or frequency modulation.

Because all electromagnetic energy beamstravel the same speed 3 x 10¹º cm/sec, an energy beam with a short wave musthave many more of those short waves pass in a given time such as a day than along wave. The shorter the wave the greater the frequency that a wave willarrive. While our image of an ocean is that it moves up and down in relation tothe surface.

In other words, the ocean wave moves (vibrates) up and down inrelation to the surface (a mathematical plane). Electromagnetic waves vibrate in3 dimensions (relative to 3 planes), generally they are only drawn asone-dimensional waves. Our brains operate on waves that are very low frequency(from one cycle per second) to about 50 cycles per second. A cycle per second iscalled a Hertz (Hz). Due to the wide range of different amplitudes andfrequencies it has been more practical to induce various measuring units. Itwould be nice if all the measuring units could be done in feet or meters orwhatever, but the range in size from the very tiny to the very large means thatthey use different measuring units. Just like you use different measuring unitsto get a quart of milk and 3 gallons of gas. The milk could be called aquarter-gallon but it isn’t. In measuring frequency they use the followingmeasuring terms:

1,000,000 cycles per second = Megahertz (MHz)
1,000 cycles per second = Kilohertz (KHz)
1 cycle per second = Hertz (Hz)

In measuring amplitude they measure the length of the waves with kilometers,meters, and centimeters. The very small waves are measured in angstroms,microns, and nanometers. What is an angstrom. A nanometer is one billionth of ameter. That is a very tiny fraction written as 1/1,000,000,000 of a meter or forshort an nanometer. A micron is one millionth (1/1,000,000) of a meter. Tennanometers are said to make up an angstrom. (In other words an angstrom is 1ten-billionth of a meter.)

After they measure radio frequencies, the waves of different lengths aregiven other names. They could just say ‘waves from 30,000 to 300,000MHz”, but instead they shorten things by having a special name for thesewaves EHF (Extremely High Frequency waves.)

This names are as follows:

Extremely High Frequency EHF: 30,000 to 300,000 MHz
Superhigh Frequency SHF: 3,000 to 30,000 MHz
Ultrahigh Frequency UHF: 300 to 3,000 MHz
High Frequency VHF: 30 to 300 MHz
Medium Frequency MF: 300 to 3,000 KI-Iz
Low Frequency LF: 30 to 300 KHz
Very Low Frequency VLF: 3 to30KHz
Extremely Low Frequency ELF: Below 3 KHz to 1 Hz or less

BRAIN FREQUENCIES (FREKS) RELATE TO STATES OF ACTIVITY

The lower brain frequencies pertain to sleep and dream states. The middlebrain frequencies pertain to normal wakeful activity. The higher brainfrequencies pertain to aroused, or concerned or states of anxiety. No brainwaves means a person is “brain dead”, even though some body functionsmay continue. Naturally occurring phenomena, such as lightning in athunderstorms, sunny days that soak a person with extra positive ions, can allaffect the thinking of brain.

CHART GOING UP THE FREQUENCY SCALE

These frequency no’s are in Hertz which is cycles per sec. (However the firstpart of the scale are non-linear, asymmetrical waves, which are mistakenlycalled Hertzian by many people.)

1 Approx. beginning of brain waves

6.66 Theta brain waves
7.85 Alpha brain waves
15.7 Beta brain waves
30-30.56 Government VLF stations
32-33 Government VLF stations
34-42 Government VLF stations
50 Approx. Upper limit of brain wave frequencies
60 Produces an audible sound

62-254.1 CTCSS (Continuous Tone Coded Squelch Systems). These tones CTCSStones are broadcast continually interspersed on a frequency, which allowsseveral different users to broadcast separately on the same frequency and onlypick up the message that has their CTCSS tone.

Post Office Tones are 82.5, 91.5,97.4. & 100.9. U.S.
Customs & border patrol is 100 Hz. U.S.
Secretservice is 103.5 Hz. EPA is 114.8. IRS & BATF is 123.0.
Veterans Affairs,GSA, & Dept. of Energy is 127.3.
Fed. Aviation Admin. & U.S. Marshallservice is 136.5.
Coast Guard Intell. is 141.3 Hz.
Dept. of State & BorderPatrol is 151.4 Hz.
Drug Enforcement Agency, Fed. Aviation Admin., & Nat.Marine Fisheries is 156.7.
Justice Dept., FBI is 167.9.

10² (10 x 10) Ultrasonic

10³ Lower range of true Hertzian waves, waves in cycles per sec lower thanthis such as the human heart beat or Brain alpha waves are not Hertzian.

104 (10,000)

16,000-32,000 Range of Frequencies used in European implants to signal theimplant.

54,900,000 Hz (54.9 MHz) Cellular phones (Also 435 MHz, 750 MHz, & 1080MHz have been discovered being targeted on victims of implant mind-control.)

10¹¹ to 10¹² Far infra-red

10¹³ “Raman” I.R.

10¹4 Near Infra-red

10¹4 to 10¹5 Visible light spectrum

For picture #15 p_6-15.jpg

<input height=”600″ name=”I35″ src=”http://www.whale.to/b/sp/deepera/p_6-15.jpg” type=”image” width=”450″ />

B3. GWEN Towers

The GWEN towers can be used for several purposes, including ELF waves used for direct mind control which will be covered toward the back of this chapter. Because they also are part of the implants system the are included before the chapter discusses implants. Unfortunately for us humans, ELF waves can penetrate almost anything. The U.S. Military has built a Ground-Wave Emergency Network (GWEN) all over the U.S. with several hundred 300-500′ GWEN towers that broadcast a very-low-frequency wave (VLF) for mind-control of the American public. A single GWEN tower can broadcast up to 300 miles in a 3600 circle. Plus 8 secret powerful ELF transmitters have been established and 3 of them operate on the west coast. It also needs to be pointed out that many items that are receivers can also function in the role of transmitters. Televisions, cellular phones, even air conditioners can be used to bounce signals to somewhere. Many strange towers and transmitting devices have been installed all over the U.S. in recent years.

B4. Body suits

Victims of mind-control who receive implants often are given a body suit of implants. The location of these implant sites used on the human body have been mapped 10.00 out on the following charts. The mapped sites on these charts are verified by a. an insider, who learned from the inside what is going on, EM (H) & b. this author’s experience in working with a sizable number of implant victims. Implants can be placed anywhere, but there are certain key sites that tend to be used. The location used also depends upon the type of implant. Implants over the body create the ability to trigger moods, pain, and other phenomena. Implants for auditory sounds are in the ear. Nasal implants are used for mind-control. Tracking implants are also placed into people.

Section C. Specific Implants

Cl. Audio implants (a. public. b. secret)
C2. Body manipulation implants
C3. Visual holographic implants
C4. Memex/Brain Link implants
C5. Torture/Nerve & Muscle Stimulation Implants
C6. Tracking & I.D. Implants.

C1. AUDIO IMPLANTS

BACKGROUND INFORMATION

The concepts used in audio implants had been discovered in the first half ofthe 20th century, but the refinement of technology to take advantage of what hadbeen discovered waited until the second half of the century. The development ofaudio implants ran on two tracks, one was the public medical research and theother was the secret Illuminati/Intelligence Agencies’ research. Audioimplants began to be publicly placed into people in the 1960s. The Illuminatiwas experimenting on some victims at this stage, and the military in the Vietnamwar used auditory implant devices to aid communicating to their men who weresent into tunnels and who were placed into forest situations where audible noisewould compromise their locations to the enemy. The Illuminati/Intelligence/&Military consortium was keeping the experimentation secret. It appears fromlooking at the worldwide research on audio implants that the Illuminati realizedthat the field was so ambiguous, and open to so many different approaches, thatrather than straightjacket the research community by a specific strategy, theyencouraged a wide variety of approaches in the research. Consequently, researchby one group would overlap or duplicate research by another. Much to theircredit, a few researchers rejected offers to get involved because they saw thesinister ramifications. By the 1970s, the intelligence agencies were willing tostart using hundreds of people to experiment operationally with the implants.People in every state of the U.S. were selected as victims. Many of theseimplant victims had programmed multiple personalities already. The controllerswere very heavy handed with the people they implanted, and they used the fullforce of the Illuminati/Intelligence agencies power to keep these people undertheir control at all times. These innocent victims have had their lives totallydestroyed. Some tried to fight back, spending thousands of dollars to get outfrom underneath the incessant audio messages that the implants sent, but thesystem was too big and too powerful to fight. Police, congressmen, psychologistsand many other people turned their backs on these victims. Some victims whoinitially fought back gave up resisting, some committed suicide, and somecontinued to fight. Meanwhile, on the public track during the 1970s & 1980s,medical researchers kept putting more and more audio implants into deaf andhard-to-hear persons. Hundreds of people in the U.S. and many hundreds in othernations such as the U.K., Germany, Austria, Israel, Australia, France and othercountries began to receive the cochlear implants. Australia was so proud oftheir audio implant research/development they issued a postage stamp showing animplant device (“bionic ear”) developed in Australia. The questionbegs asking, if thousands of people have publicly received audio implants,isn’t obvious that the secret societies and secret intelligence agencies havedone at least as much if not far more?

BRIEF CHRONOLOGY OF AUDIO IMPLANTS

1790–first known attempt by Volta to electrically stimulate the ears. Heshot approximately 50 volts of electricity into his auditory system, andexperienced the sensation of a blow to the head followed by a sound like theboiling of viscous liquid.

1850–Electro-otiatrics was begun by otologists who hoped electricity couldhelp ear diseases in various ways.

1925–Sounds were created in people by radio engineers by placing electrodesnear the ear with a modulated alternating current.

1930–Weaver & Bray discovered the principles used later in the cochlearmicrophonic implants.

1937–By passing an alternating electrical current in the audible frequencyrange from an electrode to the skin, Steven, Jones, Lurie and Flottorp foundthey could have people hear sounds. For a number of years these men studied thisphenomena.

1957–Djourno and Eyries in France woke the world up concerning the abilityto electrical stimulate the auditory nerves and produce sound with theirreports. A patient from France reportedly gets William F. House, MD interestedin developing an implant device.

1961–William House implants two patients with short-term audio implants. Onepatient receives a multiple electrode implant.

1960s–intense research for audio implants is conducted in California inplaces like Sanford, the Univ. of Calif., in L.A. etc. The military uses audioimplants operationally to be able to talk to soldiers in situations whereexternal noise would compromise the location of the American soldiers, such asexploring tunnel system.

1970s–Various researchers around the world begin publicly implanting audioimplants into people. The Illuminati and intelligence agencies begin to secretlyimplant people, this is known because many of the early victims can pin point attime in the 1970s when they got their audio implants.

1980–The FDA establishes Federal regulations regarding cochlear audioimplants.

1984–By this year, 369 people have publicly received the House CochlearAudio Implants, which have been implanted by 36 different clinics. The 3MCochlear Implant System! House Design for use in adults, which is already inhundreds of adults, receives FDA approval in Nov.

1990s–Audio implants along with other implants begin to be used moreaggressively by the mind-control programmers. Successful intelligence operationsare carried out with the aid of audio implants.

BASICS OF HOW THE IMPLANTS CAN FUNCTION

Thousands have publicly received audio implants, and thousands have receivedaudio implants without their permission by the New World Order. The implants(whether secret or public) basically have to contain A. a receiver(s), B. aprocessor, C. a transmitter, D. electrodes or electrical stimulating device.When sound waves arrive to the human ear, the sound causes biological reactionsall along the auditory pathway–from the cochlea, the auditory nerve, the brainstem nuclei and the primary cortical projection areas. Each of these areas arefair game for machinations of the mind-control researchers. There are brain stempotentials which originate in the auditory brain stem nuclei–primarily in theinferior colliculi. The public auditory implants produce a small electricalstimulus that bypasses damaged hair cells and directly stimulates the remainingauditory neural elements. This means that for the secret implants, theelectrical impulse that is generated to stimulate the person to hear a sound orsentence is totally unnoticed by everyone but the victim. As mentioned before,psychologists are being used to shut victims up, by declaring that they arecrazy for claiming to hear voices. How do these psychologists know that theperson isn’t hearing voices from an implant? Some psychologists are declaringthe implant victims are “crazy”, “delusional”, &”insane”, because audio implants supposedly don’t exist–thereforeit is useless to give any credence to the complaints of victims. In other words,psychologists are being used as the establishment’s witch doctors to cover upthe mind-control activities of the New World Order. What’s new? Establishmentshrinks helped cover up the programmed multiplicity for decades by labelling theprogrammed-multiple slaves “paranoid schizophrenics”. Duringexperiments, it was discovered that the skin of a person can pick up auditoryvibrations, so tests were run to see if implants in other parts of the humanbody could be used for auditory implants. The vibrotacticle system of the skinhas an upper limit of sensitivity to 400 to 500 Hz. In contrast the auditorysystem had a frequency range between 20 to 20,000 Hz and an optimum range of 300to 3,000 Hz. The auditory system had a dynamic range of 130 dB (decibels) whichthe vibrotactile had only a 30-35 dB range. In other words, using the skin likeon the chest to send auditory vibrations to the brain was a very limited way tocreate sound. For most purposes it isn’t a viable approach, even though someexperimental auditory implants were placed in places like the chest. The onesthat were tested only reconfirmed the suspicions that the best results are byusing the inner cochlea and the auditory canal area. Dr. Begich’s and laterothers showed that a nonlinear function will translate one frequency to anotherfrequency, but although it does jump, this method is inadequate for the currentmind control signals, and a linear function is used which operates simply on theenergy that the implants have.

Originally single channel devises were used, but then multichannel deviceswere soon found superior. The processing units of a device, had to have anextraction method to determine the pitch of the signal and then would present asquare wave at the rate of that frequency. Soon the miniature computers thatmade up part of the audio implant were made so that they were programmable. Someof the publicly implanted people (for instance some who got a 4 mm. cochlearauditory implant), who thought they were getting medical help, were laterfollowed up a decade later by the intelligence agencies for their own agenda,and instead of just hearing the world, they got to hear mind-control drivel fromsome handler communicating via the implant. As sound waves come into the publicimplants, they are fast Fourier transformed into many channels lying between say100 and 4000 Hz. Each channel may be assigned to a specific electrode located onan array of electrodes. The electrodes are stimulated for instance at 300 pulsesper minute. The transmissions go to receiver/stimulators that then stimulate thesubject to hear something. (Fourier transforms have also been identified beingused by human brains to encode memory.)

In order to keep their signals to their implanted victims secret, the Networkemploys a tactic called piggybacking where they piggyback their own audiotransmission onto standard FM frequencies.

CANAL is the acronym for an system that is used simultaneously fortransmission and reception via the use of a double-frequency shift keying (DFS).Radio transmitters that send quick signals are variously called BURST, SQUIRT,SQUASH, or high-speed transmitters.

USES OF THE IMPLANTS

a. by themselves, b. with other implants, and c. in conjunction with othermind-control devices.

TYPES OF AUDIO IMPLANTS

Part A. Publicly admitted audio implants

The entire world has gotteninvolved in audio implant research. The British Cochlear Implant Group has beensetting up “implanting centres” for the UK. Not all the publicly knownimplants will be listed here, for instance, some of those I chose not to listinclude some developed in Spain by Bosch & Colomina, the ones created inThailand by upgrading american made implants, and several made in East and WestGermany before the wall went down, and the Swiss implant which was simply theAustrian audio implant used with their own processor.

3M COCHLEAR IMPLANT SYSTEM/HOUSE DESIGN–MODEL 7700 (AKA ALPHA)

BANFAI, EMG –Several models developed by Banfai in Cologne-Dueren, WestGermany. It is digital, with a pulsatile signal and a programmable memory. Theimplant can be communicated with using an interface device hooked to a computer.The patient has a keyboard. It was first implanted in 1977 and has 8/14 and 16channels. It has been implanted into hundreds of people.

BRITISH, for instance UCH– Developed by Douek, Fourcin and Moore in Londonand implanted with a single electrode in 1978 and multiple electrodes in 1990.The implant has bioglass, and promontory grooves for the electrode, and neuralnetwork programming in its computer memory.

CHEN AUDIO IMPLANT–developed in Guangzhoi, mainland China and firstimplanted in 1984. It was said by the chinese that 20 people received thisimplant.

CZECHOSLOVAKIAN–Implants were created by Volvoda and Tichy in Prague andimplanted in the 1980s into a few people.

FRASER–Developed in London, and first implanted in 1983. It was notablebecause it had a round window in the implant. In the first few years it wasimplanted into 56 people. The encapsulated the implant in a high-grade Silasticrather than an epoxy, as some other European researchers had done

FRAYASE–Developed in Toulouse, France, this audio implant was implanted withits receiver in the chest. It was first implanted in

1981, and 22 people were said to have received it.

GOA–developed in Shanghai, China by Lee and Lin.

INERAID- (fka Symbion) produced by the Richards Company, USA. In the Journalof the Acoustical Society of America, Mar. 1994, vol. 95, pp. 1677-1678, theyhave an article about a woman who had an implant in one ear and not the other.She was asked to compare the pitch signals from natural sources versus the rightear audio implant. The most apical implanted electrode was not as accurate asthe more basal located electrodes using an Ineraid implant.

IMPLEX COM 12–Comes with an interfacing computer and a Syncom patientself-tester

LAURA--Developed at Antwerp, Belgium. These were first implanted in1986, and had an internal canal antenna, a microphone entirely internal in theauditory canal, a pre-amp, an antenna, and a data control circuit. Only a fewsubjects got this implant. It comes with a computer, and an interface unit. Itdoes have a programmable memory.

MED-EL –Developed in Austria at Vienna and Innsbruck by Hochmair, and firstimplanted in 1977. Hundreds of people were implanted with this audio implant.Some were implanted externally with it and some internally inside the ear canal.It has one channel and a multitude of electrodes stimulating the audio channel.It is analogue, and sends an analogue signal. It does not have a programmablememory.

MXM- -Developed by Chouard in Paris and first implanted in 1974. It hadbeen implanted by 1990 into 179 people.
NUCLEUS 22, NUCLEUS MINISYSTEM 22, and other NUCLEUS AUDIO IMPLANTS (aka CLARK’s Implants)--At least twomodels developed in Australia at Melbourne. This audio implant was firstimplanted in 1978. The implant is programmable from the outside. It has beenimplanted into many hundreds of people. It has a multitude of electrodes thatstimulate the audio system. It is digital, sends a pulsatile signal, and has aprogrammable memory. The implant comes with a diagnostic and programminginterface computer. The Australian government heavily subsidized with millionsof dollars research into audio implants and got the Cochlear Corporation(Nucleus) going. Nucleus uses what is called MULTIPEAK which provideshigh-frequency information from 2000 to 7000 Hz. With this 4 electrodes arestimulated in rapid succession, and special algorithms are used which change therelationship between the pulse amplitude and the pulse duration in order toallow 4 pulses to occur within a single frame. The Nucleus Minisystem 22 wasapproved by the FDA for implantation in both adults and children.

Storz Instrument Co.’s Implant–developed at Univ. of Calif, San Francisco.

Part. B. Secretly implanted audio implants

There were several profiles ofpeople that were used in the World Order’s selection of secret victims toimplant. The following were criteria that they liked in the selection process,a. vulnerable, such as single women, b. people who were already programmed withtrauma-based mind-control, c. psychics, who had already told people they heardor saw things ordinary people don’t, d. people, not highly regarded by societysuch as minorities, criminals, street people, mentally insane, who would not beable to find a support system to help them fight the experimentation. They alsodid the audio implants into some of their own intelligence agents, apparently tosome who were getting somewhat difficult to their superiors. Because of thistype of profile, and some other things this author learned, it appears that theinitial two decades were used more for experimentation and development than theywere for actual operations. However, with more than 2 decades of experience,they are now fully operational. From watching their interaction (messages) withvictims of audio implants, it is clear that they are not in the testing stage,but are fully operational, and have a full cadre of trained operatives (men& women) to staff the secret bases from which the monitor and broadcastsignals to their slaves. The staff their bases with 3 shifts and the graveyardshift leaves approx. 6 a.m. In other words, from what we can tell they are usingstandard shift times for the audio implant control staffs.

COCHLEAR IMPLANTS

There are Cochlear implants for auditory control secretlyimplanted without permission. A rubber molding skin color covers the outerlining of the ear canal. There are tiny slits in this lining, which when pushedto the side would show the presence of coils and a plastic rod/wire embedded inthe area. Sometimes burn marks occur on sides of face due to intense heatgenerated by implants, which is painful.

DENTAL AUDITORY IMPLANTS

At least a dozen victims have complained that aftertheir teeth were capped they began hearing voices. Other sources indicate thatduring the filing process implants are being put into people. This is the typeof implant placed into J. Z. Knight and left dormant for many years until theydecided to activate her as New Age guru.

RIDGE IMPLANTS

These implants can produce Theta waves and even voices. Theyare designed to suppress a particular type of thinking. The body may be sentinto paralysis or given various stimulus-response stimuli in order to suppresscertain thought patterns. If the slave begins to have certain thought patternsthat threaten the programming and programming structures, these implants kick into divert the person’s mental activity to something else.

C2. BODY MANIPULATING IMPLANTS

The subject of body manipulating implants could have been placed in chapter8, however the desire was to keep all the information on implants together.Mankind has placed objects into the human body for thousands of years in thehope that it would produce some type of change. So the history of this type ofimplants is volumous. Reader’s Digest had an article about how to give toparaplegics the use of their arms and legs with implants. Implants are beingplaced into the human body to effect growth changes, to change hormone levels(such as to stop estrogen), to change DNA growth, to carry out behaviormodification, etc. Several papers have recommended that sex offenders getimplants. The Rambo chips that have been put into many men have been linked tosome big crimes. In recent times, the following body manipulating implants havebeen written about:

CRYSTALLINE CORTICOSTERONE IMPLANTS

These implants affect thehypothalamic-pituitary-adrenal (HPA) activity when there is stress or basalactivity. It was placed into the medial prefrontal cortex (MpFC) to regulate theresponse to certain types of stress. Journal of Neuroscience, Sept. 1993, Vol.13, pp. 3839-3847.

NORPLANT

a contraceptive implant placed into hispanic and black teenagersusing the Mantel-Haenszel procedure. Written about in Journal of AdolescentHealth, May 1995, Vol. 16(5), pp 389-395 by Nancy Campbell-Heider, John Glantz,Sandra Glantz, Eric Schaff, et al.

POLYMERIC BRAIN IMPLANT

These implants are ethylene-vinyl acetate copolymermatrix disks and are used to release into the brain dopamine for a period of anumber of weeks. The testing of this has been done at Yale Univ. School ofMedicine. Written about in the Annals of Neurology, Apr. 1989, Vol. 25, pp. 351-356. Written by Matthew During, Andrew Freese, and Bernhard Sabel, and MarkSaltzman, et. al.

PROTO-32 IMPLANT

Designed by Dr. McDaniels and a Dr. Paul Hod. This implantwith a 32-bit microchip memory affects DNA growth within a person. The twodoctors who developed the device are claimed to have died after they created thechip. The FDA has approved the use of the implant in the brain. It’s believedthat there is a patent on the chip.

SILASTICMELATONIN-FILLED IMPLANT

Used to alter the speed ofresynchronization of the circadian rhythm in birds, and implanted by theMax-Plank Institute fur Verhaltensphysiologie, Andechs, Germany. Although thiswas for birds, mention of it is done here to point out the type of research doneat the Max-Plank Institute. It was written about in the Physiology and Behaviormagazine, July 1995, Vol. 58, p. 89-90 by Michaela Hau and Eberhard Gwinner.

TESTOSTERONE IMPLANT

used to release testosterone into the subject.

C3. VISUAL/HOLOGRAPHIC IMPLANTS

BACKGROUND

Hollywood has given us movies where visual and holographic implants areshown, but what about the real world? Yes, it does happen in more than themovies. Publicly, the establishment has only experimentally placed visualimplants into a few volunteers. On the real life side of the NWO, there havebeen a number of victims who have been subjected to visual implants withouttheir consent. One victim in Massachusetts labels her visual implants”visual prosthetics’, but mentions “I use this term loosely becausethey are more so attachments than replacements of my own vision.

Every now andthen the public is made aware of where the World Order wants people to thinkresearch is at. In the Jan. 13, 1997 issue of U.S. News & World Report (p.52), the unveiling by researchers of the retinal chip that could potentiallygive sight to the blind was reported. It was interesting the article’s choiceof words “retinal chip unveiled” (bold added).

After it was realizedthat sounds could be artificially made via electromagnetic waves in deaf people,researchers naturally thought of giving sight to the blind. In the 1960’s and1970’s researchers struggled to produce implants that could restore sight tothe blind. This research was hijacked by the NWO types and has been developedinto another component for their mind-control.

In the 60’s Giles Brindley andothers at Cambridge Univ. and in the 70’s William Dobelle and others at theUniv. of Utah, both were able to show that individual phosphenes could be evokedby electrical currents, thus showing the feasibility of visual implants. (See GSBrindley’s paper “The sensations produced by electrical stimulation ofthe visual cortex” in J. Physiology, Vol. 196, 1968, pp. 479-493. and W.H.Dobelle’s article in 1974 “Phosphenes produced by electrical stimulationof human occipital cortex, and their application to the development of aprosthesis for the blind.” in J. Physiol, 243: 553-576.) The publicdevelopment went forward with the blind. Since most blind people still have theneurons (which are like a natural computer) in the higher visual regions of thebrain fully intact, the implants are designed to take advantage of this unusedpotential.

The body has sensory pathways, that were discovered to be maps. Increating a visual image, the brain actually takes an image through several mapsbefore getting the final image. There is a map for motion, along with at least 5others maps such as one for form. The photoreceptors of the retina react to thethree primary colors and have 3 primary color maps created by the electricalimage made from the photoreceptors of the retina. (One’s genetics contributeto how each person perceives a primary color, we don’t all see colorsuniformly.) The retina’s output (called optic nerves or retinal output) mapthe electrical image again onto the retinal ganglion cells. Then the opticnerves project the electrical image to a relay image (the lateral geniculatenucleus) where the brain begins combining the maps of the two eyes. Anothernetwork of neurons (called the optic radiations) then transfers the image backto the rear of the brain to the primary visual cortex. Then the brain takes theimage through several higher level maps to its final finished product–theviewer’s perceived picture. The microelectrode array that creates a map forthe blind person may be hooked up to the primary visual cortex, or other pointsin the process. The microelectrode arrays that were initially tested were muchcruder than the human eye. They pixelized (turned into pixels, that is points)what the video camera saw. The implant compared to the human eye’s naturalabilities something like what the old dot matrix printers created in comparisonto a computer laser printer. The blind person’s perception via the implants issomewhat cruder than actual sight. Experiments have found that the brain has agreat deal of power in choosing how it interprets images, so that it is hopedthat the plasticity of the visual system will allow blind people’s brain toadapt to what they are being shown over a period of time to get the maximumvisual advantage. This also implies that victims of visual implants–which areof a more sophisticated technology will also have a natural tendency to rewiretheir brains to accommodate the new sensory inputs.

One of several groups of public researchers into Visual Neuroprosthetics(visual implants) is Richard A. Normann, with the Dept. of Bioengineering, JohnMoran Lab for Applied Vision and Neural Sciences, at the Univ. of Utah. In 1990,he spoke to people at the IEEE International Conference on Systems, Man, andCybernetics about visual implants. At that conference on cybernetics, there werealready well thought out methods for creating silicon based electrode arrays.The John Hopkins University in Massachusetts is another research center intovisual implants. MIT and Harvard have also been researching in the subject ofvisual implants. Advances in material available and micro-fabrication techniqueshas permitted the semiconductor manufacturer to create electrode arrays with 3-Darchitectures, which can then be implanted into the visual parts of a person.

HOW THEY WORK

In a true visual prosthetic, a video encoder (camera) transforms the visualworld in front of a blind individual into electrical signals that are used toexcite neurons at some point of the visual pathway. The video camera encoderwill be a silicon retina that replaces some of the functions that the humanretina performs, and then it makes what it sees into signal compatible with theneurons the encoder must stimulate. The signals from the encoder excite neuronseither via a hard-wired percutaneous connection, or a telemetry link. “Thestimulating electrodes must be implanted into visual pathway such that eachelectrode is able to excite only a small population of neurons in the vicinityof the electrode.” (Normann, Richard. “Visual NeuroprostheticsFunctional Vision for the Blind”, in IEEE Engineering in Medicine andBiology, Jan-Feb. ’95, pg. 77) To improve the picture sent by the implants tothe brain, electrodes the size of the neurons they intend to stimulate in theeye were developed. Kensall Wise at the University of Michigan created smallhigh density electrode arrays out of silicon. In one model, the electrodes are.08 mm at their base, and taper to a sharpened tip. An array of hundreds of suchelectrodes can be implanted into cortical tissue about 1.5-2.0 mm below thecortical surface. This is not all of the design considerations involved, but itgives an idea of the direction that public research has gone in. A specialpneumatic inserter that can shoot the arrays at high velocities to insert theminto the cortical tissue was created by Patrick Rousche. This method providedlimited cortical-based-map images. To further improve the picture, implants arebeing created that create a retinal map, rather than a cortical map. This cantake advantage of the image forming properties of the human eye, and may givesatisfactory images. At the current pace of public development, visual implantsthat restore sight are only a few years away from mass production. Meanwhile,the Network continues to create and use visual implants that are moresophisticated than what the public sector has been allowed to create. Bear inmind that these researchers use either foundation grant money or governmentgrant money to operate. The Network is very careful about what technology isdeveloped. Some excessively ambitious implant researchers (not visual, butother) have seen their work have a national security gag order thrown over them,and the research ends up muzzled from getting out to the public.

TYPES

FIBER OPTICS

Fiber optics permits theNetwork to use a fiber optic that looks like a hair as a television camera. In abody suit, several fiber optic cameras that look like hairs will be installed inkey places to provide the handlers remote viewing. Fiber optics can also bemounted in the victim, to provide a means to receive remote pictures. Fiberoptic implants can be placed by needle into any site on the body. One victim ofelectronic mind-control, who has repeatedly pulled out Fiber Optic hairs, had atiny fiber optic hair shot into her chest above her tank top while she was in arestaurant. Some other implants that carry out the same function look likewarts, moles, or blisters.

ARTIFICIAL LENSES

One victimdescribes his eye implants: “They are oblong objects with a square openingin the middle of them. They appear to be located on my corneas or rapped aroundthem to be more accurate. They are connected to rods or wires that are spreadout over my facial area and under the skin like a mask. The implants also appearto be connected to cochlear implants which are the cause of the repeated voicetransmissions that I hear.” Via a camera, she was able to pick up thepresence of a reddish orange smear or stain covering my eye lens. The colorblends with her own eye coloring so it is extremely difficult to see anything inher eyes. The lenses of the implants are not lined up evenly with her cornea.The victim with the visual implants states, “Whenever I close my eyes, Isee the presence of constant red orange haze centered with a tint of whitishblue. I also see a small area of fluorescent green color. When I sleep, I amsubjected to virtual reality type pictures like programs being run through acomputer with a 3-D effect. There is a constant whirring and clicking effectthat comes from other implants such as the ears.” In review. Visualimplants are at time called visual prosthetus, but are actually attachmentsrather than replacements. They are oblong with a square opening in the middle ofthem. They are located on the cornea (rapped around them) and are connected torods/wires that are spread out over the facial area and under the skin like amask. The coloring of the implant is blended with natural eye colors tocamouflage it. When the victim closes his or her eyes there is a constantpresence of a red-orange haze centered around a small screen. There are also twoorbs with a tint of whitish blue, and a small area of fluorescent green. Visualreality pictures are run like programs from a computer, that have a three-Deffect. The left forehead scalp area has a whirring noise.

BIO-CHIPS

That “talk” to nervecells. Some of the readers will have already heard of the bio-chips that talk tonerve cells. Stanford Research Inst. has been working on such bio-chips. Bear inmind, public research is generally a cover for what has already been discovered.

HOLOGRAPHIC OR H-INSERT

Thereis one type which has been called a Holographic Insert or H-Implant. Aholographic memory is created by this implant. This may or may not be theNanobots which are capable of creating holographic images in the mind. Let’sdiscuss the nanobots.

HOLOGRAPHICIMPLANTS VIA NANOTECHNOLOGY & NANOBOTS

Nanotechnology is technology pertaining to very tiny robots and tinycomputers that are in the range of nanometer-size (10 to 1,000 billionth of ameter). Nano means “one-billioneth”. In other words, extremelymicroscopic, we are talking about robots & machines one-billionth of a meterlarge. The Scanning Tunneling Microscope (STM) makes it possible to seesomething the size of a single atom. The STM will also pick up atoms and movethem. People who are interested in nano-technology have regular meetings in theSilicon Valley. A Johannesburg, South African company Nanoteq (recently takenover by the Amer. company Microchip Technology) was the company that creatednanotechnology encoders (based on a non-linear logarithm that mixes transmissionlines and changes codes frequently). Microchip Technology is putting theseencoders into their series of microcontrollers which are EEPROM-based.

The encoders are called Keeloq hopping-code technology. They are good inprotecting micro-wave, ELF, infrared and radio-wave transmissions. MicrochipCorp. is creating a sub-company group called Secure Data Products to work withthis type of technology. In other words, the ALEX system reported on in Vol. 2is being miniaturized. Another Nanotechnology company is Nanosystems, which isworking with the Jansen Pharmaceutica N.y. unit of Illuminati-controlled Johnsonand Johnson. We know numerous companies like the two mentioned above, who areworking on Nanotechnology. We also know that they are not going to tell us theirtrade secrets and what they have really developed. For instance, this author hada hearty laugh when he read The New York Times (11/19/96 pg. Cl) article”Feat of the minuscule: scientists make abacus with carbon molecules:invention at Swiss research laboratory may be a step toward building fastercomputers”, because the article is patently disinformation! According tothe article a Dr. James M. Gimzewski and colleagues discovered how to make tinyballs of 60 carbon-atoms each. They call these balls “Buckyballs”.They can move these balls via what they call a “scanning tunnelingdevice”. A picture of the teeny-tiny 60-atom balls was shown in thearticle. So what did they do with this ability? They built an abacus (yeah sure!Come on guys!). If the reader understands computers–a computer at the mostbasic level is simply a base 2 number system. Anything that can consistentlymove or switch can be the basis for a computer. A computer is simply an enormousamount of on-off switches, where 0 can stand for off and 1 for on, etc. Thearticle states, “Scientists at Switzerland have invented an ultraminiatureabacus in which spherical carbon molecules sliding along the microscopic coppergroves act as the counting beads for performing arithmetic calculations.”(So they are using it for arithmetic, yeah sure!) IBM reported that itsscientists used the STM to move individual atoms so that they spelled”I-B-M” in atoms. If you believe that the ability to arrangeindividual atoms and tailor-build molecules was so that IBM scientists couldspell IBM, then this book isn’t for you. A more recent NY Times article(2/2/97, p. E6) discusses how Xerox Corporation has created sensors thethickness of peach fuzz. These are called MEMS (micro-electomechanical systems).The article states, “MEMS are all about doing more with less, about beinglean, mean, and next to invisible.” The article is lean on facts. It doesgive a hint of the incredible power these little gadgets have when the writerlaunches into his propaganda tirade at the end of the article,”Paradoxically the fear that accompanies the fantasy of nanotechnology isnot that the culture will be as stratified and fragmented as Victorian England,but that the new culture will be one that is unrecognizable to everyone alivetoday.” That is true, this nano technology is taking us to the place thatsociety will not be recognizable. The age of the future is planned to be the ageof robots–humans if they are to survive are to be robotic slaves for theilluminated elite. However, this is not paranoid fear as the NY Times writerimplies, but it is the unfortunate reality humanity faces. Some peopleapparently are already experiencing it. One victim of mind-control, whose fatheris Military Intelligence and whose family is part of the Illuminati, claims thathe has been subjected to tiny robots called nanobots. These nanobots have beenfeatured on TV, where they have been billed as an asset for surgeons.Reportedly, these tiny robots can work off of 10-100 kilohertz of beamed power.They have coil-shaped antennas, 2 little six-pointed “wings” to attachand move themselves with. These tiny boron-carbon nanobots have all kinds ofpurposes. One use is for multitudes of these Nanobots to be placed into a singlevictim’s head, where they are programmed to migrate to certain programmedpositions where they can suppress the optical signals to the brain and replacethese signals with their own holographic images that can be externallytransmitted to the nanobots or preprogrammed in. They are trying or havesucceeded, depending upon who is talking about nanobots, in makingself-replicating assemblers. In other words, they have built miniature robotsthat build other robots. (Sounds like something the Japanese would do.)

Nanobot researchers talk about how great it will be to have tiny robots thatare smaller than a red blood cell circulating in our blood removing fat,bacteria, and viruses.

SOME SOURCES. Recent articles on nanotechnolgy include: Electronic Times(12/7/95), Electronics Weekly (11/29/95), Electronic Engineering Times(11/27/95), the L.A. Times (11/11/94, 12/21/94, 2/7/96, 2/20/96), the NY Times(4/30/94, 11/19/96, 2/2/97), the Wall St. Journal (5/12/94, 1/9/96, 2/26/96).Eric Drexler wrote Engines of Creation (Anchor Press/Doubleday, 1986), a bookabout nanotechnology.

Books that will provide more information on nanotechnology:

Drexler, K. Eric and Peterson, Chris and Pergamit, Gayle. Unbounding theFuture: The Nanotechnology Revolution. Morrow, 1991.

Hameroff, Stuart R. Ultimate Computing: Biomolecular Consciousness andNanotechnology. Elsevier Science Pub., 1987.

Whitehouse, D.J. and Kawata, K., eds. Nanotechnology: Proceedings of theJoint Forum/ERATO Symposium held at Warwick Univ., 21-22 August 1990. AdamHilger, 1991.

C4. MEMEX/BRAIN LINK IMPLANTS=

The public doesn’t understand that programs showing research are typicallyrmation to hide what’s already in use. On “Cyberlife,” 12/17/96, aTV story was done on Dr. Ted Berger, a biological engineer, at U.S.CA, who isworking on a microchip that will be a substitute for the hippocampus’ memory.The story stated that in two years a brain chip can be made that mimics thepattern of brain neurons so that it can be plugged in. The New World Order’scomputer-satellite system allows

a. communication devices to be embedded withina victim, as well as b. memex devices that are linked to the natural brain toboast the brain’s memory

In the Vol. 2 book, the ALEX (Amalgamated Logrythmic Encrypted Transmissions) system was described which allows the NWO to pulsecodes on different frequencies in an erratic fashion that makes thetransmissions hard to even spot. The ALEX system is one component of theirability to secretly transmit orders and information to their slaves. When aslave receives a body-suit of implants, one implant will be a central controlimplant that controls the body suit of implants and receives information from anexternal transmitting source. Some of the slaves have had their centralcontrolling implant at the base of their skull. The concepts that Hollywoodportrayed in the sci-fi movie “Johnny Mnemonic” where an oligarchy (inleague with big business and the crime syndicates) controls the world, and usesa human who has an implant that stores tremendous amounts of information is–sad to say– not so far removed from what is already happening in secret.

INTERFACE DEVICES

The biocybernetic researchers for the New World Order have working on anumber of interface devices to interface (link) the human brain with computers.A number of devices have been created. There is even a biochip the size of alarge organic molecule that works as a memex implant. The idea of implants isdifficult for some people to accept. I am in the possession of x-rays showingimplants, of anechoic chamber readings showing that victims were receivingconstant synthetic telemetry signals from outside transmitting sites, and avariety of other items showing evidence that this activity is going on. Forinstance, Professor Ingmar Wickbom, M.D. of the University Hospital, Universityof Calif. Medical Ctr., San Diego on 10/6/’83 wrote a letter “To Whom ItMay Concern” that skull x-rays of Robert Naslund indicated implants at thebase of the skull that are “possibly some form of brain transmitters”.Some of the victims I personally know have managed to extract fiber optic fibersfrom their bodies.

ORGANIC BIOPROCESSORSLINKED TO VIRUSES

One direction that the New World Order took was todevelop biochips and bioprocessors, that is three-dimensional organic circuitrythat functions as computers. The conductive velocities of these miniatureorganic computers (protein lattices) are at least one million times faster thannerve cells. The circuit power of a given size of miniature organic computers isat least a million times greater than the same size of brain matter. Molecularcomputers made of living matter can be grown from DNA templates of geneticallyengineered bacteria. Synthetic proteins have been developed which match whatthey want to make into mini-computers. The end product is a bioprocessor (tinycomputer) within a cell. These mini-computers are specifically linked withviruses which migrate to specific parts of the body. Viruses are primarilynucleoproteins, some of the small ones are not even alive, and they don’t evenhave metabolism. They do not have a metabolism to kill with an antibiotic. TheNeurotropic viruses migrate to the central nervous system (nerves), theDermotropic viruses migrate to the skin, the Pneumotropic viruses go to thelungs, the Viscerotropic go to the abdomen, and other viruses go to other sitesin the body. Because many viruses will select what area of the body they willreside in, the New World Order can tailor (in tissue-culture) their bio-implants(which consist of a virus plus a bioprocessor) so they can target where theywill end up in the mind-controlled slave. Such an virus implant is also called asymbiote, because it lives off of the host, the mind-controlled slave’s ownbody. These virus implants have life-expectancies that are a number of yearslong. A number of these implants within the victim serve as spies-in-the-camp,reporting detailed records of what the host’s body is doing. Research into howto splice and dice genetic material and then recombine it has been going on fora number of decades, and is very sophisticated. There are a number of verytechnical books on how to do it, but only a reader familiar with the language ofgenetic research could decipher their techniques & abilities with miniatureRNA and DNA pieces. Several genetic books/papers describe how viruses can gethost genetic material or other genetic material, thus giving us a window on howthey transfer the miniature computers made from DNA templates to the viruses. Inthe book Mechanics of DNA Replication & Recombination, Proceedings of a UCLASymposium held in Keystone, CO April 3-9, 1983,(edited by Nicholas R. Cozzarelli,of the Dept. of Molecular Biology Univ. of CA, Berkeley, published in NY by AlanK. Liss, Inc.) one of the leaders in this field said on page 12, “I remainfaithful to the conviction that anything a cell can do, a biochemist should beable to do.” And yes they have been replicating strands of RNA & DNA,creating whatever they want. The Illuminati have been using thesecomputers-in-viruses implants at least since the 1990s. The implants are easy toinsert into the victim’s body, and the specific virus transport themselves andattach themselves where they are to go. The Illuminati then build body suits ofthese implants. The size of these tiny implants vary from tens of millicrons tohundreds of millimicrons. Just their tiny size makes them difficult to destroy.From research on victims, it appears that a central computer is implantedto control or interact with the body suit of implants.

PSYCHICS

One of the Illuminati’s researchprojects was to discover the psi gene–the genetic gene that would permit themto breed a master race with psychic abilities. One of the groups that theIlluminati has controlled which did research in this area was Nazi Germany.Mengele, in fact, was interested in the co-relation of blood types to psychicabilities. Blood type B apparently has more psychics than other blood types.People who have true psychic abilities have a more complex molecular latticestructure than those who don’t. They also have energy fields of 500 cps orhigher. This is in contrast with most brain activity which lies in the 0 cps to100 cps range. The heart operates at up to about 250 cps, and the resonantfrequency for a nerve is 360 cps. In other words, the high cps. energy field isa tip off that the person is psychic. A secret program has been carried out bythe Illuminati to identify every person on the planet who is capable of beingpsychic. They are identified and then assigned to people (a male and female) tomonitor the person. Psychics are often recruited into intelligence agencies tobring them under the power of the Illuminati’s establishment. In other cases,they are simply watched and monitored, some who are threats to them are killed,and others receive mind-control. They have been identifying people with psychicabilities and then trying to track and/or control them. They also will try torecruit or place these people under mind-control or both.

C5.TORTURE/NERVE & MUSCLE STIMULATION IMPLANTS

When a body suit is placed into a slave, implants are strategically placed intheir body so that if they do not comply or if the Network wants to make theperson dissociative they can direct the control implant to trigger theseimplants to activate. For instance two implants will be place on opposite sidenear the uterus and one in the lower back in order to give the handlers theability to cause lots of lower back pain. Prior to electronically puttingsomeone into an altered & controlled dissociative state, they will wear aperson down with pain to make them dissociative. For instance, if an implant inthe middle (square in the heel) of the foot goes off, a ball of electricity likea sparkler is activated causing pain, anxiety and discomfort. Some describe itas a hot pin prick in the foot. One victim and her mother both received thesetorture implants, and she was able to locate and remove some of them from hermother. I would like to paraphrase her description of finding these tortureimplants, “I discovered fiberoptic type implants on the lower back and alsoon the line where the leg and buttock join. The fiberoptic sites on the lowerback was 1″ to the left of the spine, and consisted of two holes where theimplants had been inserted which were one above the other, and at a distance of5/8’ from each other. I was able to partially remove both of these fiberimplants, but knots remained under the holes where tiny parts of the implantstenaciously remained. These two back implants seemed to connect signal-wise tothe implant at the junction of the buttock and leg. This latter implant couldcreate pain in the left leg and foot.” Sometimes a crackling sound likecrickets accompanies the signal to create pain. A vibrating electrical field isoften used on victims of electronic control. (Unconfirmed but possible:) Onevictim described a device that could have a dial rotated to allow the sender tochose different types of signals to be sent. This would be pointed at a victim.As this sounds like a good possibility, it has been included here, althoughthere is nothing to confirm such a piece of equipment which is probably if itexists

BELLDAME TORTURE IMPLANT

Nothing available to report.

SUICIDE IMPLANT

Some claim that an implanted chip has been created that willrelease a poison upon a signal which will kill its host. This author has seenabsolutely no evidence that such an implant exists. It’s use is likelydisinformation.

C6. TRACKING & I.D.IMPLANTS

This type of implant has gotten most of the public’s attention. For severalyears now the public has been aware that animals, military personnel as well ascivilians have been given tracking implants. Objects also have received trackingimplants. DCI of the CIA Bob Gates is reported to have said, “If youcan’t identify people, you can’t control them.” The Wall St. Journal,3/30/1992 reported that the FDA proposed that tracking devices onto 35 classesof medical devices such as heart valves and breast implants. The excuse was thatthey needed to track life-sustaining medical devices better. The list of devicesto be tracked includes cardiovascular filters, defibrillators, pacemakerelectrodes, heart valves, tracheal protheses, breathing monitors, portableoxygen generators, ventilators, infusion oxygen generators, ventilators,infusion pumps and various silicone gel-filled devices such as testicularimplants and breast implants, and spinal implants. The Hughs IdentificationDevice has been placed onto such objects as breast implants. These trackingimplants are reported to have a life of 250 years. Their tracking I.D. numberconsists of #, letter, #, letter, # etc. The U.S. Navy has employed RF/ID”waterproof bracelets” for tracking individuals underwater. The U.S.military has required its personnel to take tracking implants under the pretenseof being able to find them if they get lost, and millions of men and women inthe military have already gotten these tracking implants. A book published bythe U.S. Army War College in 1994 (entitled The Revolution in Military Affairsand Conflict Short of War) shows the Army’s interest in tracking implants.Many tracking implants were placed into military personnel during DesertShield/Desert Storm operations. Some tracking implants are programmable and canrecord vital data about a person. They could also be used as a debit card forfinancial transactions, which is why they have gotten so much attention as themuch feared Mark of the Beast. Texe Marr’s popular book Project L.U.C.I.D.exposed the L.U.C.I.D. System which will be a central clearing house for keepingtrack of everyone. He reproduced a diagram from an issue of Narc Officermagazine showing how the system would connect an individual’s universalbiometrics card with the justice, data communications, and telecommunicationssystems of the World Order. Texe Marrs and others are fascinated at the choiceof words & acronyms that the establishment keeps picking. Dr. Creusat, amedical doctor with Interpol is the official designer of L.U.C.I.D. He and hisco-designer initially refused to reveal what the acronym L.U.C.I.D. stands for.Some speculate that it stands for the obvious: “Lucifer’s I.D.”system. It’s also strange that AT&T called their new company derived fromBell Labs (which has been involved in mind-control for the Illuminati)”Lucent Technologies”. Again some people speculate that Lucent meansLucifer’s Enterprises. And what did Lucent come out with? They came out with anew computer network called “Inferno” (another name for Hell), writtenin a language called “Limbo” (a place in Hell) with computer protocolscalled “Styx” (a river in Hell). And then on the other side of theAtlantic, a world-wide net called Demon Internet is being offered to people inEurope. (To have Demon Internet installed for you by Demon Internet, Ltd. at 322Regents Park Rd., Finchley, London N3 2QQ costs initially £1,762.50 for thefirst month according to recent company literature.) Again the obvious ques tion,why are these companies using occult–even satanic terms for their products?Illuminati member and chairman of IBM Thomas Watson, Jr. set up a cryptologyresearch group at IBM’s research lab in Yorktown Heights in NY. This group wasled by Horst Feistel, and it developed a cipher code called “Lucifer”.Lucifer was then sold to Lloyd’s of London. Lucifer was created under theauspices of the NSA. Lucifer worked off of an algorithm. The NSA had set thingsup via IBM so that it has had a back door to anything encrypted with Lucifer.(By the way NSA’s partner in the U.K. is the brit’s GCHQ.) The paper trailindicates that L.U.C.I.D. intends to keep track of people by using biometrics(iris scan, fingerprint, voiceprint, photos, and other bio identificationfeatures) that will be encoded on cards (or implants.) DNA databanks are alreadygiving computers an enormous ability to identify millions of americans via theirDNA. Texe Marrs also calls our attention in his book about L.U.C.I.D. to theimportant mandatory ISO 9000 program, which makes it mandatory for all productsto have an ISO 9000 I.D. number and their approval and certification. Over 100countries have adopted the ISO 9000 standards. In 1999, use of the system, whichwas voluntary, will become mandatory. The government is also setting up TPN(Trading Partner Numbers). While obtaining all these numbers to do business isnot directly mind-control; if a person can’t buy or sell without the approvednumbers, it does tend to place a person or company under the World Order’scontrol. The NACCB in England and the ASQC and the ANSI have been given power toaccredit people with the ISO 9000 numbers. IOS is also in some type ofoverseeing role in the accreditation process. Here we go, more acronym monstersto control our lives! But while attention has been focused on this, many otherimplants have been implanted for mind-control. It all works together. Thetracking implants certainly are an external means of controlling people thatwill work along side of the mind-control to lock people into their EstablishedSystem. The tracking implants have broader application than just to keep trackof an individual’s location, or his financial records. Tracking implants canbe used to send bio information on the heart beat, the BEG, EKG and other biotracking methods. Researchers who are following the field of tracking implantswill remember the article “An Eight Channel Micropowered PAM/FM BiomedicalTelemetry System” in the NTC ’71 Record, p. 309. The Air Force Office ofScientific Research, NASA financed that study which involved an 8-channelmicropowered telemetry system designed to sense and transmit physiological data.The system was actually successfully used. They will also remember an earlierarticle in the IEEE Transactions on Bio-medical Engineering, Vol. BME-14, Oct.1967 entitled, “The Design and Use of an FM/AM Radiotelemetry System forMultichannel Recording of Biological Data.” And then they will remember aneven earlier report from the Biophysics Lab, of the Aerospace Medical Labs ofthe Aerospace Medical Div. at Wright Patterson AFB, Ohio dated 1965 entitled,”Personal telemetry transmitter system.” The point is that trackingimplant research has been with us for several decades, and is being utilized tocontrol slaves who have body suits of implants. They have been publiclymonitoring animals with bio-telemetry for several decades, it doesn’t take anystretch of the imagination to comprehend that they are also doing it with theirslaves. While these articles were from the ’60s, soon afterwards a bookappeared Mackay, R.S.

Biomedical Telemetry, Sensing and Transmitting Biological Information fromAnimals and Man. John Wiley & Sons, Inc.: NY, 1970. Faceprints are a newmethod which uses a math algorithm that establishes distances between eyepupils, nasal base, lip center and other facial points. The algorithm produces a50-bit number that is person-specific. The plans are to code this along withother unique I.D. features onto the magnetic strips of I.D. cards. The AmericanCIA developed in conjunction with the Thai police a smart identity card for usein Thailand. The Computerworld Smithsonian Award was given to the Thai Ministryof Interior for this “innovative technology” in 1990. In other words,one part of Big Brother patted another on the back. Was the CIA protecting us,Mr. & Mrs. Citizens by doing this so-called “intelligence” work,or was it working on another agenda by developing this high tech ID card? Laterthe military adopted the MARC ID card based on similar ideas.

Bell Communications (in NJ) developed voice activated credit cards. Reportsare that colds can throw one’s voice off so that it’s rejected by the flatmicrochip in the voice card. When this author calls the World Order’smind-control “total”, he means just that–it is designed to controlthe body, mind and spirit of a person. By taking bio information via implants,DNA codes, blood types, retina scans, hand geometry and face prints, without ourreal consent the World Order has effectively stolen our Fifth Amendment rights.John Adams wrote, “Property must be secured or liberty cannot exist.”(The Works of John Adams, Vol. 6:9, p. 280.) The purpose of the Americangovernment was to protect property. But they have stolen our privacy. They haveput into law (contrary to the Constitution & Bill of -Rights) several lawsthat will force us to provide information to computer data banks that will beused to determine if we can buy or sell, if we can get employment or not, &if we are deemed politically correct or not. And those on the wrong side of theNWO may be incarcerated and programmed. While tracking implants are notmind-control per se, they will work hand in glove with actual mind-control tomake sure no one under mind-control can effectively get away. Therefore alltracking devices must be seen in the broader context as being devices to assistin the implementation of total mind-control. One genius scientist who worked onthe bio-chip and who still works as a civilian for the government personallytold this author that he is excused for his help on the project becausetechnology is neutral. Technology is neither good nor bad, so he claims. Idisagree, and so did another scientist who did repent of helping with thisinfernal project, and apologized to this author. These bio-chips are going to beused for the enslavement of mankind, and for total mind-control. There is nojustification, no excuse great enough to allow people to side-step theirresponsibility in the creation of such technology intended for evil. We have aresponsibility to know how our inventions will be used before we create them. Itdoesn’t take a rocket scientist to know what these inventions are going to beused for. Unfortunately, this man who assisted with the bio-chip is a rocketscientist.

Section D. Direct monitoring & manipulation of the brain/mind

D1. Direct monitoring ofthought waves

For many years, the basic waves have told us basic things about the mind.Rapid Beta waves come from normal mental activity like you are doing now, alphawaves indicate relaxation, theta waves mean meditation & memories, &ultraslow deltas mean deep sleep. Cognitive demands cause the gamma waves tosynchronize. Alpha (as well as Theta) oscillations both encode and accesscortical codes–what we describe as K-lines in this Deeper Insights book. Thethalamus & the cortex are involved in memory. People with good memories havehigher alpha freks than persons with poor memories. EEGs are used to watch thesewaves & their oscillations. PET scans are even more revealing. Thoughts canbe analyzed in terms of the various parts of the mind that they require toproduce them. In word-reading the mind activates specific posterior visualareas, and when the mind must identify a noun specific frontal & temporo-parietalareas are active. (See Posner, “Seeing the Mind”, Science magazine,10/29/93, p. 673). PET scans & BEGs are interesting, but evoked potentialstell it all. The National Security Agency has a monopoly on monitoring theevoked potentials emitted by people’s brain’s electrical flux which areelectromagnetic emissions in the 30-50 Hz, 5 milliwatt range. When a personthinks, or moves their body, or sees something, the brain creates an evokedpotential or set of evoked potentials. These emissions can be decoded to seewhat the person is thinking or doing. This is called RNM (Remote NeuralMonitoring). It is reported that the Kinnecome group at the NSA is involved withthis type of monitoring round-the-clock of victims of electronic mind-controlusing EMF equipment that is scattered across the nation. A Signals IntelligenceEMF scanning network allows the NSA’s computers to pinpoint and track anyindividual in the United States by watching for their specific bioelectricalfield. In many ways, the tracking implants and the national I.D. cards areredundant, but the World Order wants to increase their control, while keepingtheir best technology secret. The NSA information is not randomly passed on toany individual, but they do have their ways to filter down information tomind-control handlers if they need to. They have exhibited an amazing ability totrack the two co-authors, but that doesn’t mean that they are all powerful,just because their computers can remotely detect and keep track of people. Thisbook is evidence that there is still some elbow room for independent thought inthis world. What’s more frightening is the apathy in the world to stand up tothe control. But the question may arise, how can they get any good reading onthe brain’s evoked potentials from a distance? The equipment is a combined useof ELF-modulated masers along with Doppler-shifted interrogative RMCT masers.This technique allows them to send syntel directly through walls. A Maser is amicrowave equivalent to a laser.

TESLA WAVESUSED TO READ MINDS & IMPLANT VOICES

According to reports, the Soviets were the first to discover in the 1960’sthat the human brain had 23 BEG band wave lengths, of which 11 of these weretotally independent. By knowing those 11 band wave lengths, and then sendingsignals based upon those wave lengths, the human mind could be manipulated. Theperson’s PRIME FREK, that is their biological frequency needs to beidentified, and then it is possible to remotely implant thoughts and voices intotheir minds.

In the early 1970’s, the U.S. Documentation Center as well as theWhite House’s spokesman had both reported that electromagnetic waves could beused to communicate with “a target biosystem.” (This was brought outin the U.S. District Court of the State of Utah where inmates who had beensubjected to mind-control in prison tried unsuccessfully to fight back incourt.)

The University of Utah was just one of several dirty research facilitieswhich researched on human guinea pigs how Tesla waves could be used tomanipulate the mind into hearing voices. They discovered how simple it is to usethese waves to override and implant thoughts into the mind, and to read thethoughts of the mind. Then they subjected hundreds of inmates at the GunnisonFacility of the Utah State Prison, the State Hospital and perhaps other UtahState Prison facilities to this brand of mind-control in order to test it.

Itcertainly works. Numerous inmates tried to fight the system, and the obviousmind-control that so many of them were being subjected to. Hundreds of theinmates were subjected to heavy drugs and other severe punishment when theyprotested. Still they continued to protest. This was in the 1970’s, now thetechnology is being used over the entire United States.

The Tesla waves are sentto a victim in the following sequence of events.

Computers programmed withartificial intelligence handle most electronic controlled slaves. When the slavedoes something the computer can’t handle then human handlers step in to help.Men and women staff consoles attached to CRAY computers where they monitor thevictims that need special attention. The full fledged electronic monitoringinvolves an entire body suit of various implant devices in the victim’s body.From the body suit, the controllers are able to track the victim, hear what thevictim hears, and see via tiny fiberoptics some of what is going on around andwith the victim. The staff have pre-recorded sound bites that they usually liketo select, as well as occasion actual live messages. They transmit thesemessages, which are picked up by satellite and relayed to whatever large TVbroadcasting antenna or GWEN tower or other antenna is near the victim. Thesignal is then relayed to some object near the victim, which serves as a relayantenna to pass the signal on to the victim. It’s believed that some type ofimplant picks up the signal and broadcasts the correct Tesla wave pattern tocreate voices within the victim. Meanwhile, the tracking implant keeps the staffand the satellite system informed every few minutes as to exactly where to sendthe voice signals. The Master computer and central HQ for electronic mindcontrol is reported to be Boulder, CO. Several places have been identified bythis author as key points. One report came in that transponders are being madein Boulder, CO. The central cellular computer is in the Boulder, CO NationalBureau of Standards building. AT & T is cooperating with electronicmind-control also. NORAD tracks both space and earthbound objects. They have aCheyenne Mtn. Air Station. Although it is clear from reports from mind-controlvictims that NORAD is actively involved in mind-control, exactly how thedifferent tracking responsibilities are delegated is not known to this author atthis time. It appears that there is duplication of efforts, and several NWObranches maintain the same capability.

D2.VOICES / OR THOUGHTS SENT ELECTRONICALLY DIRECTLY INTO THE MIND

Brain waves are connected to thought. When thought occurs there is a greatdeal of brain wave activity. The brain carries out what some people call”parallel processors”–that is it breaks a thinking process down intocomponents and works on all simultaneously. When the World Order’s researchershave attempted to tamper with the mind they can place thoughts into the mind bytampering with the processes that create thoughts, without actually having toreplicate the thought they want. In other words, they are deflecting the naturalprocess into the synthetic process they want to get their desired result.

For group mind control, or isolated individuals, ELF waves can be sent thatinteract with the brain’s natural waves. The human brain synchronizes with theincoming waves and the end result can be panic, sleep, or a hypnotic trance. Thewrong kinds of ELF waves can even damage the brain. In 1961, Allen Frey, afree-lance biophysicist and engineering psychologist reported that humans canhear microwaves. This had been known by the military since W.W.II. To formcomplex words and sentences, Frey realized he’d have to approach the level of10 -mW/(cm)², but the bottom line is microwave-created movement of cochlearhair cells can be done. In the late 1950’s, Dr. Patrick Flanagan developed anelectronic telepathy machine which was called the Neurophone. He writes aboutthe Neurophone and its capabilities to transmit acoustic (sounds, voices)directly into the brain of an individual using the electromagnetic fields in hisforward to the book Angels Don’t Play This HAARP by Jeane Manning and Dr. NickBegich. The patent office held up his patent on the machine for 12 years. Dr.Flanagan writes, “Certain types of electromagnetic signals can inducevisual and auditory effects when the field around the head or body is at theright frequency, intensity and modulation levels. We are not accusing thedevelopers of HAARP of amoral intentions for the use of this technology but thepotential for abuse is there.” (Angels Don’t Play This HAARP, p. 6)First, this author highly recommends the book Angels Don’t Play This HAARP;and second, this author is going to flat outright say that the developers ofHAARP do not deserve the benefit of the doubt anymore–because some of them havea clear track record of developing and using mind-control techniques. HAARP isnothing less than a mind-control project. One of the persons that people tryingto investigate HAARP kept running into was Col. John Alexander. Col. JohnAlexander was involved with the development of -HAARP. (Angels Don’t Play ThisHAARP, p. 19) Trauma-based mind-control victims have identified Col. JohnAlexander as being one of the primary mind-control programmers. He has been akey player in a number of mind-control projects for the government.Wright-Patterson AFB, Dayton, OH also play-ed a role in research for HAARP. Anumber of trauma-based mind-control victims have identified Wright-Patterson asa mind-control programming center. Apparently, the Air Force used some of thebrain-stem scarred whiz kids at the base to try and develop Tesla technology.ARCO (via their ARCO Power Technologies, Inc. subsidiary) was the Air Force’sprime contractor on the first phase of HAARP’s development. ARCO has companydoctors who are helping program mind-control victims. One of ARCO’s boardmembers was Dr. Simon Ramo, who is a big player with the military and the secretgovernment. The awarding of ARCO’s subsidiary APTI for the contract smelledlike a rat, because other companies were obviously better suited than this tinysubsidiary with a staff of 25 in Washington, D.C. Besides the mind-controlaspect of things, the World Order set things up so that APTI has the patent(#4,686,605, Method & Apparatus for Altering a Region in the -Earth’sAtmosphere, Ionosphere, and/or Magnetosphere) for the HAARP project, so they area natural shoe-in for the project. There were other patents involved too, andabout dozen of these patents assigned to APTI have now ended up with the largeRaytheon Corp. (APTI was bought by B-Systems, and B-Systems was bought byRaytheon. All 3 are working fast and furiously developing technology for the NWO.)The NWO’s Stanford Research Institute developed many of HAARP’s high-fre-quencytransmitting programs with money from the Defense Nuclear Agency. (This was fromAngels Don’t Play This HAARP, p.47, which cites an NTIA memo, “NTIAPreliminary Assessment of Air Force Ionospheric Research Instrument”,10/1/1993.) Mitre Corp. was also involved with HAARP. This author has exposedthe Mitre Corp. in the past as being both Illuminati-run, & a co-partnerwith the NSA.

When a HAARP researcher pestered the Air Force for info, he was referred toKirk-land AFB, NM another site deeply involved in mind-control and blackprojects. (Angels Don’t Play This HAARP, p.63) Los Alamos Nat. Labs also isinvolved with both mind-control & I-IAARP. Their Blackbeard Team isconnected to the Alexis Satellite, which may or may not be connected to the ALEXsystem which this author has been warning about. Supposedly this is a gamma rayre-search satellite, but this author doesn’t know if this is the truth or acover story. The Air Command & Staff College’s Airpower Journal lets the”cat out of the bag” so to speak when they reveal that weapons likeHAARP will be used against civilians. The military wants to use weapons likeHAARP to disorient people’s mental facilities. Newt Gingerich wrote theforward to an official US Air Force book entitled Low-Intensity Conflict andModern Technology which described how electromagnetic weapons could be used tosubjugate U.S. citizens who opposed their government. Cpt. Paul Tyler wrote thechapter on electromagnetic and psychotronic weapons. A paper trail does exist ofthe intentions to use HAARP for mind-control by our government. For the sake ofcompleteness, and to provide the readers with a paper trail, I’ll quotedirectly from this official Air Force book from the part written by Cpt. Tyler,‘The potential applications of artificial electromagnetic fields arewide-ranging and can be used in many military or quasi-military situations…Some of these potential uses include dealing with terrorist groups…crowdcontrol,…and anti-personnel techniques in tactical warfare. In all cases, theelectro-magnetic systems would be used to produce mild to severe physiologicaldisruption or perceptual distortion or disorientation. In addition, the abilityof individuals to function could be degraded to such a point that they would becombat ineffective. Another advantage of electromagnetic systems is that theyprovide coverage over large areas with a single system [this is an obviousreference to HAARP] . . . . Recently, pulsed electromagnetic fields have beenreported to induce cellular transcription related to reproduction of DNA….Knowledge of mechanisms of actions of Radio-Frequency Radiation (RFR) withliving systems and the assessment of pulsed RFR effects, will demonstrate thevulnerability of humans to complex pulsed electromagnetic radiation fields…Experiments with elec-troshock, RFR experiments and the increasing understandingof the brain as an electrically-mediated-organ, suggest the serious probabilitythat impressed electromagnetic fields can be disruptive of purposeful behaviorand may be capable of directing and/or interrogating such behavior.” THEREYOU HAVE IT, a PAPER TRAIL that the MILITARY WANTS HAARP’S MIND-CONTROLcapabilities. Dr. Abraham Liboff of Oakland Univ. has demonstrated howlow-energy circularly polarized electromagnetic waves can change the brain’sability to keep out certain ions, minerals, and chemicals. HAARP can also beused with genetic manipulating ionized radiation and chemicals to specificallycontrol the mind. (See Chapter 8, section 2 for a complete discussion of this.)

SUMMARY OF ELFWAVE MIND CONTROL CAPABILITIES

Naval Intelligence and other groups have conducted research into ELF wavesupon the human body and mind. Some of the many things that can be done to thehuman body and mind with ELF waves include:

a. put a person to sleep
b. make a person tired or depressed c. create a feeling of fear in a person d.create a zombie state
e. create a violent state
f. create a state of being sexually aggressive g. change cellular chemistry
h. change hormone levels
i. inhibit or enhance M(RNA) synthe-sis/processes
j. control the DNA transaction process
k. control biological spin and proton coupling constants in DNA, RNA & RNAtransferases.

But electronic control of the brain comes in many forms. Perhaps thecontrollers only want to carry out mood shifts. ELF waves which will penetratewalls, and even go through the earth will create mood shifts according to howmany cycles per minute they are sent at. Studies have proven that the time forELF waves to cause a shift in mood is between 6 to 10 seconds (not a long time).

ELF waves below 6 cycles per second cause subjects to become emotionallyupset and this rate may also disrupt bodily functions. At 8.2 cycles/sec. theperson gets an elevated high such as would be accomplished by a master ofmeditation. 11 to 11.3 cycles per second cause the brain to become agitated andto begin riotous behavior. ELF waves could be directed at a population to helpincite riots. Research has been carried out to determine how the brain’ssensory inputs are coded. It has been determined that visual input is relayedand built into a series of changing maps. The olfactory sense has thousands ofspecific codes to determine smells, and combinations of these are triggered byan object. One clue that gave researchers initially the idea that differentindividual human brains have a common internal electronic type coding forspecific thoughts is that drugs will have such common effects on the humanrace–even -though one obtains individuals from widely different genetic pools.The best research is of course kept secret. We primarily have to report on whatis released. E.R. John in Mecha-nisms of Memory (NY: Academic Press, 1967, pp.348-349) announced his discovery that central neuro-electrical codes are indeedused by the human brain. Information transfers in the brain have been shown tobe related to neuro-electrical frequency codes, and that a brain can bemanipulated by beaming those codes from an external sources. For instance,Hippocampal neurons will have burst-firing frequencies between 100-200 Hz. Hereare some of the resonance frequencies for manipulating these senses:

Visual centers of mind–25 Hz
Sense of touch center–9 Hz
Auditory (hearing) ctr– 15 Hz
Motor control– 10 Hz
Subconscious thoughts–20 Hz.

If the World Order wants to cause a person to make a gesture, they useELF-modulated microwaves that are “KEYED” to distinctive brainwavepatterns that are called “PREPARATION SETS.” If the controllers wantto create an emotion they use specific “EXCITATION POTENTIALS” bycreating the correct resonance frek which in turn creates a specific emotionalstate. Victims of electronic mind-control often complain of electronic fieldsplaced -around their bodies. Recently, when an electrical storm blew a majormetro power grid, one victim of electronic mind-control lost the force fieldthat had been encircling her body. The brain is also attenuated to the earthmagnetic field. By manipulating the magnetic field around a person, themagnitude of the beamed codes needed to elicit a change in the brain can bereduced. For example J.I. Jacobson changed melatonin levels in subjects bymanipulating the magnetic field in conjunction with beamed “signals”.See Jacobson, J.I. “Pineal-hypothalamic tract meditation of pico Teslamagnetic fields in the treatment of neurological disorders.” FASEB Journal,1994, 8, p. A656. Sandyk also successfully used manipulation of the magneticfields and reported this in Sandyk, R. Successful treatment of mul-tiplesclerosis with magnetic fields. International Journal of Neuroscience, 1992, pp.237-250. It was discovered that if an alternating magnetic field at a distance(resonance) frequency is superimposed upon a steady-state magnetic field,calcium and other ions within the brain can be moved with little energy. Whenthis was discovered, researchers began to watch to see if variations in the-earth’s magnetic field during geomagnetic storms and in other situations,would affect the thinking of masses of people. They discovered that there wereindeed changes to the human brain as a result of magnetic fluctuations.Cognitive thinking and conscious -thought occurs between the temperatures of 308º- 312º K (or 35º – 39º C) and the fundamental wave length associated withthese thoughts are approximately 10 micrometers (which is an infraredwavelength.) Signals that blend with Background Radiation can be manipulated tocontrol the brain. The temperature of the brain directly relates to how certainsignals will affect it. It is believed that structures within the thalamus areinvolved with modulating the temperature sensitivity of biochemical oscillators.Heterodyne Principle Used. This principle is that multiple frequencies whenapplied to a nonlinear device produce new frequencies which are the sums anddifferences of the applied frequencies and their harmonics. In other words alocal oscillator (also called a strong sinusoidal carrier wave) can multiply aweak signal. A microwave signal at a frequency A is mixed with a microwave localoscillator at frequency B in a nonlinear mixer. The mixer output signal which isA minus B is a faithful amplitude and phase reproduction of the originalmicrowave signal but at a low, fixed frequency so that it can be measured simplywith low-frek measuring devices. Heterodyne signals cost more to produce butcost is no problem for the government. Multiport network analysers, which useseveral simple power detectors and a computer analysis approach provide a lessexpensive way to measure both the relative voltage amplitude & the phase.Cell phone freks used. The controllers use the UHF cellular telephonefrequencies, which are installed everywhere because the human cranium operateson the same frequencies that cellular phones operate on. This was not byaccident.

PULSED AUDIOGRAMS

Pulsed audiograms use extremely low average powerdensities of electromagnetic energy acoustic amplifier driven by the rftransmitter’s modulator, the peak power density is a critical factor which isapprox. 275 mw/rf for carrier frequencies 125 mc and 1,310 mc. Acoustic noise isapprox. 80 decibels. Another source, the electrical sine wave analogs of eachword is processed so that each time a sine wave crosses zero reference in thenegative direction, & a brief pulse of microwave energy is triggered. Thesevoice modulated microwaves transmit words to the brain. Sounds are generatedwhen pulsed microwaves are aimed at absorbers made of carbon-impregnatedpolyurethane. An Acoustical Energy Wavefront (AEW) is created by modifiedtransducement of sound waves, which are in the ultrasound spec-trum (USS). Inother words scalar energy is being employed. When people are asleep they are themost vulnerable. TV antenna can serve both as transmitters and well asreceivers. It can be made to oscillate a suitable resonant frequency. Bytransmitting signals in the TV/FM range and then modulating them in the ELF/ULFrange, they can send signals. The Nexus magazine of Oct.-Nov. ’96 p. 16reported on Dr. Ross Adley’s research. Dr. Adley did some work for the CIA ontheir Pandora project (an electronic mind-control project). He recently workedat the Loma Linda Univ. Med. School, CA. His research showed that the brain willreact to EM radiation. To get a reaction the frequency, amplitude, and dose ofthe microwave radiation has to meet certain criteria. In the 1980’s, hisexperiments showed that microwave carrier-waves modulated with ELF waves willmodify brain tissue. Weak EM fields will affect the binding of calcium ions toneuronal sites. This type of information is the type of information thatpertains to the genetic mind-control covered in Chapter 8. Dr. Adley was able toprove that a 147 MHz (megahertz) field, which at a tissue level had an intensityof 0.8 milliwatts per square centimeters, caused an efflux or release of calciumions from the irradiated brain tissue. “This response only occurred whenthe ELF modulation of the microwave carrier-wave had an amplitude modulated at6-20 hertz (Hz). The maximum stimulation of the neurones took place at 16 Hz,but to either side of this frequency-range parameter there was no effect.”(Nexus, 10-11/’96, p. 16 citing Adey, Ross W. “Neurophysiologic Effectsof Radiofrequency and Microwave Radiation” Bulletin of the New York Academyof Medicine, vol. 55, no. 11, Dec., ’79) Also microwaves as they enter thebrain tissue, cause thermal expansion as -things heat up at the microscopiclevel, which produces strains in tissue. The strains produce acoustic stresswaves that are conducted through the bone to the cochle-a, and the cochlea’sstimulation by the wave gives the brain its perception of hearing a sound justas the cochlea’s stimulation produces the normal sensation of hearing. Formicrowaves to do this they must be at 1310 MHz and 2982 MHz at the average powerdensities of .4 to 2 mW/cm². The peak power densities can be 200 to 300 mW/cm2and the pulse repetition frequency was from 200 to 400 Hz. This makes an RFauditory sound. The sound appears to the victim as coming from within or nearthe back of the head. 2 criteria needed to hear microwaves are the ability tohear above 5 kHz, and good bone conduction.

Section E. Auxiliary uses of electronics & electromagnetic waves

El. ELECTRONICS TO AID HYPNOSIS

In a normal resting state the alpha waves of a person are between 6 -12 persecond, and their breathing rate is about 20-40 breaths per mm. and their heartbeat about 70 to 90 per minute. External stimuli will affect these rates. If aperson fixes their attention on flashes and tones, such as what happens at someconcerts, the body functions will tend to synchronize around the external tonesand pulsing lights. It takes about ten minutes for the human mind/body toreconfigure itself in line with the external stimuli, then that rate of theflashing lights and tones and be lowered with a resulting lowering of thebody’s alpha wave rate, their breathing, and their heart beat. Electronics canbe an aid to hypnotizing people. If vibrations that vibrate at the rate of sixto seven cycles per second are created in a room of people, the vibrations willinduce alpha waves in the minds of the people. The increased alpha wave activitymakes the listening subjects more susceptible to suggestion. This is similar tothe effect Vibrato has on the mind. Vibrato is a tremulous pulsating effectproduced by a minute and rapid variation in pitch either by a cappella orinstrumental music. Years ago, public performances of vibrato music was outlawedin England because so many listeners went into altered states. A 6- to7-cycle/sec vibration can be mask behind other sounds. Hypnosis with headphonesrepeating “You do not know this” are used simultaneously along withsonics as well as electrical patterns that scramble the brain.

E2.POLYGRAPHS FOR MONITORING PROGRAMMING AND MISSION ACCOMPLISHMENTS

Tyson II Corporate Offices, McLean, VA furnishes polygraph operators for theintelligence agencies, esp. Office of Security which is responsible for CIApolygraph examinations.

E3. ATTACKS onINDIVIDUALS and objects

A victim of electronic mind-control in VA in a letter describing her tormentwrites, “I no longer have the stabbing pain in my back when I go in my backyard, as I did in Richmond; however, the pain from some type of directed energyweapon(s) is just as severe here as it was in Richmond. These electrical rayscoming through the airways of my home cause me all kinds of physical pain andillnesses. They kill my house-plants; they kill my shrubs; they kill myvegetables and flowers in my garden; and most of all, they cause me tremendousamount of discomfort, as well as harassment. “Can you imagine havingelectrical rays directed at your bottom day and night, 365 days of the year. Canyou imagine what it must be like to live around oversexed SCUM?…Thistechnology is based on Scalar Technology and the Schumann Resonances orFrequencies. It is my understanding that the Schu-mann Frequencies from 0 to 30hertz can affect every nerve, every gland, every muscle and every emotion of ahuman being. In other words, a person in my neighborhood can beam these raysinto my home and control my body and I am having to suffer from their stupidappetites…” (letter in author’s files) Oscilloscopes have confirmedthat some Direct ELF/VLF attacks have come from only a few feet. Electromagneticattacks sometimes hit the victims entire body, like defibrillator paddles.Masers (microwave equivalents to a laser are used for electromagnetic attacksthat cause burns that look like “cigarette burns”, favorite targetareas are genitals, face and nose. The average power density can be at an rfsuch as 400_u_w/cm². Let’s quote another victim, whose letter is also in myfiles. At first years ago, they began using waves that were in the infraredspectrum that were barely discernable. The waves would target her and then latchon. Over the years they have gotten more sophisticated and more sadistic. Shewrites, “From time to time the field broadcast from my own head was in a‘field’ about me, but, with the added feature of ‘harrassment’ voicesalso being broad-cast. These ‘harassment’ voices had taken a downrightfilthy tone, being blasphemous words, and venally oriented…. Before I was hitwith the full-blown sadistic torture program I was awakened one night by afeeling of my head being raped. A light went on in my brain and I heard voicesdiscussing me and cruelly laughing saying, “There, got her.”.. .Thefirst added torture (accompanied by filty langauge, the language is all filth,obscenities, threats and intimidation) was a genital-urinary prod, pulsing abouttwice per second, and causing nearly incessant urination…, new added features… are body bangs and head bangs.. .The arrogance with which they announce whattorture will be next is unbelievable… .Other sleep deprivation techniques areloud noises, and the interposing of visual phenomena. They seem to have deviseda computer imaging which taps the visual nerves–these are like bad dreams. Ihave had almost no normal dreaming since this system was locked onto me. Overthe years she got to understand her harassers better. They have calledthemselves “social workers” and referred to her as “thepackage.” They have enjoyed talking about her in front of her, andharassing her by talking to each other in public about the things she thoughtabout the previous night. Finally, one more account of a victim who isconstantly harassed. “I am being tortured with synthetic telepathy ofemotive and voice bytes played over and over again in my brain to positively ornegatively reinforce and ultimately con-trol my behavior. I get the sound on myleft temporal lobe and in the right and left ear canals. I also get microwavedwhen I sleep and have vibratory pulsating fields on my lower spine, genitals,stomach, brain, feet or wherever. It is always in combination with the lowerspine and something else. This seems to create an amnesiacal deep sleep with nofeeling of pain. If I wake up suddenly (and this is the only chance I have offinding out what they are doing to me) I sometimes feel pain when the vibrationsstop.”

Other attacks/problems:

• Infra-sound attack

• magnets repelled from the cranium

• They use a “Gun” which sends an electromagnetic field whichstops a car.

The Russians have been noted to have created a “wood-pecker”signal, the American version of this is the American Buzzsaw. These signals aredesigned to interface with the mind. And systems are designed to be carried inhelicopters, or to be placed on the ground. These signals are broadcast bymultiple carriers which hop from frequency to frequency anywhere from 4 MHz to30 MHz. With the switching of these frequencies, they are creating what is knowas a Levinson Transform, named after Norman Levinson. VLF (Very low frequencywaves) will cause bizarre behavior in people. (They use 0 to 400 Khz formind-control operations. The signals are apparently broken up into pieces andtriangulated upon a target. Morse codes are used on some slaves to trigger them,which is sent via a number of methods. Victims often have the myelin sheathingof the brain disappearing, which is diagnosed as Multiple Sclerosis. MS hasincreased 100 fold over the past few years. Pre-conditioning is done bychemicals to the neuro-receptors in the brain and spine. When moving in a car orinside a store it is harder for a victim to be targeted. Also, as readers canimagine, signals being beamed from some tower or satellite will be blocked bylarge thicknesses of concrete, lead and -steel. In other words, there are somesituations that provide limited shelter to the victims of implant body suits andsyntel.

UNWANTED CHANGES

There is a complex symbiosis between mankind and the attributes of thisplanet. We are a life-form whose life is attuned to our environment. The humanbody at the cellular level has its physiological rhythms which are very attunedto the earth’s electric and magnetic fields. When cosmic radiation cyclesundergo unusual modifications, including cycle inversions, the metabolism incrabs and the oxygen consumption cycles in carrots, potatoes -shellfish and ratschanges. The geomagnetic field helps protect us from cosmic rays. It has beenshown that solar flares influence human behavior, and psych wards have anincrease in problem behavior during solar flares. The human body is a complexset of rhythms. Permit me to recall some of these rhythms for the reader: Alpharhythms, Blood Hormone rhythms, Body temperature rhythms (which fluctuate 3º on24 hour cycle), Cell mitosis rhythms, Cellular DNA & RNA synthesizingrhythms, Cerebral-spinal fluid rhythms, Circadian rhythms, Enzyme rhythms, Foodutilization rhythms, Menstrual & Sexual -rhythms, Pulse rates, Seasonalrhythms, and Urine Electrolyte Disposal rhythms. The 60-pulse-per-second powergrids (of AC) that are spread over the earth, as well as numerous other man-madeactivities are disrupting the 7-8 hertz frequency of the earth. There are someside-effects to our tampering with the magnetic and electrical fields of thisplanet, and some of these side effects may be the disruption or change of thecircadian -rhythms (as well as some of the other rhythms of the human body andmind.) In fact, two researchers have research that shows how human nerve cellsare affected by ELF fields. (See Becker, Dr. Robert O. Cross-Currents: ThePerils of Electropollution, The Promise of Electromedicene. LA: Jeremy Tarcher,1990, p. 233.) It was discovered by CIT researchers that the human brain hasmagnetite. Salmon, homing pigeons, whales, and honeybees also have magnetite, atype crystalline iron, which allows them to sense the earth’s magnetic fieldfor finding their way around. The CIT researchers published their finding aboutmag-netite in human brains in the journal Proceedings of the National Academy ofSciences.

LIQUID CRYSTALS

For about 6 years this author has heard about liquid crystal implants. Onemilitary magazine should its use, and one person who was in militaryintelligence claims liquid crystals are used. Others claim that liquid crystalswere tried and failed. It has also been reported that radio transmittingcrystals, that fasten themselves to the brain have been the object of research.

Some ODDS & ENDS

SERPENTINE SKIN

Another topic that for sure was tried by the NWO was serpentine skin. This isa type of specialized fungus that coats the skin and is used for some of itsspecialized features. Whether this concept actually flies outside of the lab,this author doesn’t know.

“ALIEN” implants

This author’s take on the alien phenomena is that it is the Illuminati’sGrand Deception for introducing the AntiChrist. The aliens are materializeddemons, and manufactured “soul less” bodies. It’s not the purposehere to put forth evidence concerning this Grand Deception, that would takeanother book, if not several books. (In fact, this author started to write it in1993, but never got finished.) But no book discussing implants &mind-control could be complete without -touching on alien implants. There is agreat overlap between “alien abductions” and mind-control. WhitleyStrieber (UFO abductee and famous author) gave two workshops at the UFO ExpoWest LA. He was very interested in finding out about the implants that Dr. Learand Derrell Sims had extracted and turned over to traditional medicalinstitutions for study. While Whitley was talking about implants and ourgovernment’s connection to them, his own implant in his ear turned on and theside of his face turned red like a bad sunburn. Other UFO buffs in attendancealso had their implants burn them at this point, causing great excitement at theWyndham Hotel that day. (This information came from the internet [email protected])

There are an increasing number of “alien abductees” who areremembering seeing U.S. military personnel during their so-called alienabductions. The abductees are being taken to U.S. Military bases. (An unusualplace for aliens to work, but within the realm of possibility.) The reason thatthe number of people who are connecting the government with the aliens isincreasing is a. more people are receiving mind-control programming, thereforethere are more people for which the cover stories and electroshock fail tototally hide what has happened, b. better therapeutic methods are helpingmind-control victims recover their memories better, c. there have been a risingnumber of people like this author exposing it. Karla Turner, who was a victim ofmind-control and abductions, began catching on that the abductions were beingdone by our government. Vol. 2 quoted her on page 184. When she began topublicly expose what the government was doing, the government murdered her. (Shejoins a growing num-ber of people this author has seen die pre-maturely becausethey were publicly exposing the truth.) Alien abduction victims have beenreporting human black-or dark helicopter activity and black-or dark helicopterharassment since the 1970’s. (Perhaps as the Vietnam War wound down &ended, the U.S. government had a surplus of helicopters and delegated some totask forces that picked up mind-control victims in remote sites.) An examplefrom this time period of an alien abduction also involving helicopters is theBetty Andreasson/Luca abduction. A number of victims have remembered thehelicopters coming -around the time of their abduction. When bright lights areshined into their houses or into their cars these victims of trauma-basedmind-control are programmed to see the helicopter’s spotlight as a UFO.(Helicopters also carry spoofer transmitters.) Beth Collins of Oregon reports inher book Connections – Solving our Alien Abduction Mystery. Newberg, OR: WildFlower Press, 1966, about how helicopters were involved with her abductionexperiences. She lives in an area that is a hot-bed for covert CIA activities.In her book, she provides a transcript of memories of military personnel beingthe guilty party in an abduction. Some victims of these abduction experiencesare implanted during their abduction. Researcher Helmut Lammer reports that”alien” abductees Debby Jordan and Leah Haley had implants removedfrom their ears. What is significant about this, is that the bio-chip implantdesigned for humans which is credited to Dr. Man, best works behind the ears.(Sources: The Kansas City Star, 7/19/87 carried an article about how Dr. Man’simplants work best behind the ear. On Oct., ’87, an article by Kathy Hart wasrun in several papers promoting Dr. Man’s implants for protecting children. H.Lammer reported on implants & military involvement in abductions in hisarticle “Preliminary Findings of Project MILAB: Evidence for militarykidnappings of alleged UFO abductees.” The Unopened Files, No. 2, ’97, pp64-67.) From this author’s interviews with “alien abductees” it wasclear that 100% of them were victims of U.S. government trauma-basedmind-control and that many of them had been taken to underground pro-grammingfacilities and made to believe they were at another planet. This is happening inforeign countries too. However, this doesn’t mean that flying saucers craft donot exist, they do. And according to eye-witnesses some of the undergroundfacilities in NM, AZ, and CO have personnel from all over the -world, Germans,Russians, British & Americans as well as aliens working side by side. (TheAmerican government denies this. Supposedly NORAD only has Canadians.) Some ofthese witnesses come across as credible. If their reports are true, then someimplants may also have a true alien connection. Alien abductees are actuallyextracting implants from their noses and their feet. It is strange that-“alien” implants have gotten more technologically sophisticated overthe years.

=BED COILSSTANDARDIZED FOR MIND-CONTROL POTENTIAL

Metal coil springs were standardized in size, are made of steel and areplaced in a grid pattern in a common mattress. Standards were introduced thatspecify how many coils, and what tension were to be used in their manufacture.Their shape is an open ended hyperbolic which is the best suited to create asimilar induced magnetic field. When one lays down the springs are compressedand have between 5 to 7 coils compressed. This makes a field of influence aroundthe human body which is enfolded within the field of coils, which are naturalantennas to incoming electromagnetic waves. Evidence suggests that the standardizingof bed springs was a carefully planned event designed to assist electronicmind-control.

E4. VIRTUAL REALITY

Since 1989, Virtual Reality conferences-exhibitions have been held. On May11-13, 1994, the largest conference-exhibition to date on virtual reality washeld at the San Jose Civic Center and the Fairmont Hotel, San Jose, CA. Notesome of the mind-control aspects of the different sessions:

Session C7–“Tactile Feedback” given by Paul Cutt. Xtensory SessionC8–“The Immersion Probe” given by Louis Rosenberg, Pres. of ImmersionCorporation.

Session D2–“Biomedical Technology and Biomedical Education” givenby John Flynn

Session D9–“Biocybernetics and VR” given by Dave Warner, MedicalScientist at Loma Linda Univ. Med. Center During lunch Kenny Meyer discussed howsimulated being in a virtual world are called various names incl. syntheticactors, situated agents, creatures and denizens. At another meal break Lt. Col.Martin Stytz, USAF, spoke on how the military was developing Virtual Reality totrain men.

Session C17–AFIT Projects, that is Alr Force Institute of Technology atWright Patterson AFB given by Elizabeth Block. (Wright Patterson happens to be amajor hub for the mind-control and criminal activities of the secretgovernment.)

Session C19–“ARPA/ASTO” given by Lt. Col. David Neyland.

The military is not the only group interested in virtual reality. A plethoraof virtual reality companies has -sprung up, for instance Sense8 (which sellingready-to-use virtual reality systems), the Vivid Group which creates Mandala(which are virtual reality authoring systems), and Xtensory Inc., which createsvirtual reality tactile feedback systems. The government also works through labslocated on American universities working with government grant money, such asthe state of the art Virtual Reality lab at the Univer. of Illinois Circlecampus, which calls its virtual reality machine “the Cave.” Virtualtouch has been created. This means that with a special machine for theperson’s hand (for shape perception) & special glove (for texture sensing)the computer users can feel the shape and texture of an object on the screen.

Hollywood has given us movies showing the mind-control potential of virtualreality in Lawnmower man & Brainstorm. For more information on virtualreality the reader might try consulting:

• Aukastakalnis, Steve and Blatner, David. Silicon Mirage: The Art andScience of Virtual Reality. Peachpit Press, 1992.
• Laurel, Brenda. The Art of Human-Computer Interface Design.Addison-Wesley, 1990.

This author has a catalog advertizing the EMCS-X-3000-Plus Electronic MindCon-trol System, which was invented by Cabalistic Hermetic magician Karl Welz.The ad states, “If your intentions are to take control of others and toincrease your own mental powers of direct action, then the EMCS-X-3000-Plus isyour system of choice!” The article has an endorsement for the BMCS systemon page 19 by a charismatic minister, “…I am a preacher of a charismaticchurch. for reasons you may understand, I was extremely skeptical initially [ofthe EMCS system]. However, I gave the new tech-nology a chance to help me servethe Lord better, and I do not regret that decision! The membership of my churchhas more than doubled within one year … Thank you very much.” —We livein some perilous times! Maranatha!

List of other Books on this chpt’s Subject

Bamford’s The Puzzle Palace
Becker’s The Body Electric
Becker’s Cross Currents
Brodeur’s Currents of Death
Brodeur’s The Zapping of America
Burdock, Dorothy’s Such Things Are Known (victim)
Calder’s The Mind of Man
Chokroverty’s Magnetic Stimulation in Clinical Neurophysiology
Clark’s July 20, 2019
Dawes’ Advances in…Quantum Neurodynamics
Eccles, Sir John C.’s Evolution of the Complexity of the Brain with Emergenceof Consciousness
Galton’s MedTech
Green’s Beyond Biofeedback
Halacy’s Cyborg
Halperin’s Crimes of the Intell. Community
Heller’s Of Mice, Men & Molecules
Hooper’s The Three-Pound Universe
Hougan’s Secret Agenda
Hutchison’s Megabrain
Johnsons’s In the Palaces of Memory
McKinnell’s Cloning: A Biologist Reports
Mark’s The Search for the Manchurian Candidate
McRae’s Mind Wars
Pine’s The Brain Changers
Stanford Research Inst., Journal of Scientific Exploration, vol. 10, no. 1, PP.1-111
Regan’s Evoked Potentials
Rein, Glen’s Modulation of Neurotransmitter Function by Quantum Fields
Restak’s The Mind
Rucker’s Mind Tools
Valenstein’s Brain Control

Weinstein’s Psychiatry & the CIA: Victims of Mind Cntl The Americanmilitary establishment lumped syntel and a number of other outrageous”weapons of torture and control” under the official heading of”non-lethal”. Then the establishment media (TV & newspapers) suchas the Wall St. Journal, Aug. 2, ‘94, had an article about non-lethal weaponswhere they wrote about the sticky-goo gun”, which uses goo to stop people.Do you see how they create a cover? When the public hears of non-lethal weaponsthey think sticky-goo guns, not implants that are torturing and controllingpeople.

Herman Kahn of the Hudson Institute stated that total mind-control would bein place by 2000 and could be “imposed under the rubic of mentalhygiene.”

CHAPTER 7: THE SCIENCE OF STRUCTURING

The programmers are experts in knowing how to mold the “clay” ofblank dissociated parts of the mind into whatever piece they need. The followingis a true account. The Chinese arrested a foreigner skilled in martial arts.They abused the man, but instead of becoming apathetic, he kept himself mentally& physically fit in spite of the horrible conditions of his solitary cell.The superstitious guards believed he was a magician. When the identity of theman was discovered, and the Chinese realized that he was one of the world’sgreatest martial arts experts, they decided to try everything possible todestroy him. He was tortured, starved, and humiliated. The man simply went intodissociative states of trance and endured the tortures without sign of pain oremotion. The hardened guards were awed. The Chinese decided to kill the man.They figured that they could place him in a cage with a starved tiger, he’d gointo trance and the starved tiger would eat him, and then they could claim thatthe man had been a coward. They not only wanted the man’s life but hisreputation. When they threw the much-tortured prisoner into the hungry tiger’scage, the martial arts expert took on the appearance of a demonized man. With ademonic roar, he attacked the tiger, and instantly kicked the tiger’s nose.The animal was stunned and disoriented. The man leaped upon the animal frombehind, let out a terrifying scream and strangled the animal. In 20 seconds thewhole affair was over.

The man looked like an incarnation of a tiger himself. Infact, the tiger had instantly feared the man the split second the master hadlanded in the cage. When the programmers ARE SUCCESSFUL with theirSTRUCTURING–they are able to create alters that match what you have just readabout. Our Chinese prison story illustrates the type of end results theIlluminati want from hours of torture & training given to slaves, but HOW dothey achieve such fantastic results? That is what this chapter is about.

Some ofthe programmed skills of the ninjitsu people (the ninja) are now beingstructured into Illuminati mind-controlled slaves. A disciple of the aboveprisoner in China wrote, [the Ninja]…”were the original practitioners ofthe ‘art of [mind-control] programming’. They were taught from the cradlethat nothing was impossible. Not knowing that a thing could not be done, theyproceeded to do it.” (The Karate Dojo, p. 101)

A. STRUCTURING OF MPD WORLDS

The purpose of the mind-control is to build a System within the mind that isa human robot. It would do no good to torture the slave and get thousands ofpieces (fragments of the mind, alter personalities) if these were notstructured. Very few Multiples have ever really gotten to see the deeper partsof their Systems.

WORKING WITH PARTS OF THE MIND

For many people who are unfamiliar with MPD, it can be expected that theywould find it strange to watch how the programmers or the therapists work withparts of the mind. Most people mis-perceive the mind as a monolithic entity. Inreality the normal mind is made up of hundreds of independent parts working incooperation and competition with each other.

The top brain researchers (at leastmany of them) have come to realize that the brain is composed of manyindependent parts that at times work against each other. For the normal person,some of these parts can be called ego states and some small processes are calledby Minsky “agents” of the mind. For the multiple personality they are called alters, splits, and purpose fragments. Anormal person has a society of agents and ego states which are entities or partsof the mind which combine to make the whole thinking mind. A multiplepersonality does not have a society, but rather a system of parts. Whether aperson has a society of agents or a system of alters, everyone experiences hisor her mind as a combination of processes, conflicting motives, and internaltensions.

In order to bring some cohesion and unity to one’s actions, so thata person didn’t spend their life going in fifty different directions at once,the mind creates the illusion of self, the self image. The self-image bynecessity must not change rapidly. One of the main reasons the mind creates aself-image is so it can have a single purpose to its actions. One of thefunctions of a self-image (of anyone) IS TO PREVENT RAPID CHANGES. Long rangeplans could not be pulled off if my personality were like Jane today and Tarzantomorrow and Cheetah the next day. The mind refuses to change its self-image,even in the face of conflicting data, because self-preservation of a directedlife demands continuity from day to day in our personality. Our self-image is amental construct that stabilizes the mind’s numerous processes. It is a globalattitude registered in the mind that globally affects thinking in many of themind’s spheres. This is just one reason why the self-images constructed by theprogrammer for alters are so tenacious, and so difficult to change. Self-imagesdo not want change, they are the restraints (the ball and chain) wesubconsciously create so that we can’t wreck all of our plans by skipping fromone idealistic goal to another without continuity. (How convenient it is to beable to construct a single brain with many different alter personalities eachhaving its own unchanging self-image!)

Pain and Pleasure are two agents whichcause the mind to simplify its focus upon either the pleasure or the pain. Thebrain does not want to focus on anything that is not an immediate issue. Thisfocus on the immediate pain or pleasure by the victim of mind-control diminishesthe victim from focusing on more complex mental issues.

An example of one ofworld’s top experts who realizes how the mind is naturally made up of parts isMarvin Minsky, co-founder of the Artificial Intelligence Lab at MIT, author ofThe Society of Mind, and who has been an advisor to NASA & the L-5 Society.Minsky’s research was financed by the government (the Office of the AdvancedResearch Projects Agency). And he and other researchers in his field got theircontracts by the Office of Naval Research. (See Society of the Mind, p. 324.)His incredible book The Society of Mind has an interesting format where thenumerous parts (agents) of the mind are each given their own page in the book.Minsky shows in the book that the mind is a “society” that arises outof ever-smaller agents that are themselves mindless. He does an incredibly goodjob of explaining how the mind works. Minsky states, “In general, we’releast aware of what our minds do best.”

The Illuminati structuring of the MPD’s fragmented mind is to create flawlessly working systems that canfunction without the conscious mind getting involved. In fact, Minsky describeshow our conscious minds only get involved in simple mental processes thatdon’t work well, the complex ones that work well usually work without theconscious mind being aware of them. “Some readers may be horrified atpicturing a baby’s mind as made up of nearly separate agencies. But we’llnever understand how human natures grow without some theories of how they start.

One evidence for separateness is how suddenly infants switch from smiles ofcontentment to shrieks of hunger-rage. In contrast to the complex mixtures ofexpressions that adults show, young children seem usually to be in one oranother well-defined state of activity…” (Society of the Mind, p. 171)

TheIlluminati has long realized that they need to split the mind of the childbefore its various agencies connect and the ego-states form and develop theirsense of self-hood and personal identity. Although adults can be programmed, thereal Illuminati multiple systems are developed from the womb up.

How does themind make decisions? The various parts of the mind compete with each other. Allthe parts are in a sense equal, none sits at the top of some hierarchy. The minddoes not allow any natural part, such as ANGER, or SLOTH to be permanentlyenthroned and to direct the other parts. Too many chiefs and no Indianswouldn’t work out. Natural parts can not order another part around. They mustinfluence that part indirectly. That is why the following examples happen.

Ayoung married man decides that he and his wife can not successfully work outtheir problems, because she is a programmed multiple in denial, who wants tomanipulate his life and destroy it, while he on the other hand wants to besuccessful in life. One part of him is the LOYAL TO VOWS part, which refuses toquit the marriage because of the marriage vows. Another part is the GOAL SETTINGpart, which sees the marriage as an abusive dead end. How does the GOAL SETTINGpart convince the LOYAL TO VOWS part to give up (throw in the towel) and move onwith life? It must indirectly trick LOYAL TO VOWS into feeling that its job hasbeen done as well as possible, and that further concern over the vows areexcused.

Another young man, a student, has his STUDY part of the mind reallywanting to focus on some problems, but the BORED and SLEEPY part of him want togo to sleep. His STUDY part of the mind tricks his BORED part into allowingSTUDY to go to work. He mentally creates a fictitious scare that another studentwill do better than he, and BORED and SLEEPY are tricked into thinking theproblem is much more weighty than it really is.

A young woman bribes her eatingprocesses of her mind, that if she follows through with her diet, she’llreward herself with a nice meal, and that other parts of her will be rewardedwith other benefits. Rather than simply diet, she must bribe different parts ofherself. Of course if parts of us, lie to other parts when they try to bribeourselves into doing something, if we are not honest with ourselves in givingthe reward, then it is harder next time to bribe the part that was lied to.

Inorder for the non-multiple’s parts to trust each other, they subscribe to asingle agreed upon character-an imaginary ideal self-image. Other wise wecouldn’t trust ourselves to carry out plans. If an ordinary person hasamnesia, they could create a different self-image, which again would be anenduring character. By introducing MPD, the programmers create a hidden elementof distrust within a person’s mind. They no longer can trust themselves, nowthey must depend upon the stability of the programmer or owner. Now imagine thateach of the “agents” or parts has been manipulated to think that it isa person with a personality and a history in its own little world. Because themind is such a tremendous computer it can easily handle such mental processes.

The programmer and the de-programmer/therapist must work at “tricking”these parts into allowing the mind to do constructive things. I use the wordtricking, because what is actually happening is that the therapist or programmeris using language that relates to the language of that part, but it is notlanguage that has much external reality beyond that part. Structuring is the artof using special “languages” combined with other programming sciencesto manipulate these internal worlds of the various parts. Our minds areinstruments to solve practical problems. If an alter sees no practical use for aparticular knowledge they will not want to learn it. This natural selectingprocess by the mind, helps isolate an MPD’s system of alters, because many alters do not see a need to learn anything outside oftheir programming.

CONTROL ALTERS called PROCESSORS

Within the system of alters, certain altersare selected to be PROCESSORS. As a system is used certain alters are destroyed,disconnected, or regulated. Certain codes are used or changed. A SYSTEM PARAGUARD is what is used to decipher codes and to distinguish what is currentlyhappening in a system.

BASIC DESIGNS of an ALTER SYSTEM

Most Illuminati systems are configured with a Universe or Star base system.In other words, the model for all that is put in uses clusters of stars,galaxies, etc. This is used in conjunction with grids that are shaped in variousconfigurations. The ultimate master of the slave, some Illuminati kingpin who isa programmer or working closely with programmers, will design the system so thatthe entire structure of the system points to himself and Satan. The alters willbe geographically set up in their internal world to worship the master to whomthey must give their body, soul and spirit.

A cube or double-cube system is aclosed system. The programmers who use cubes love to build boxes within boxes.The smallest middle box of the system may contain the Life force of the system.Those who love paper trails, will see the occult basis for the standardIlluminati cube shape of a system portrayed on page 83 of Clausen Commentarieson Morals & Dogma, which was put out by the Supreme Council of the World of33º of Freemasonry in 1974. This Masonic book explains that the cube representman and the pyramid is divinity. Divinity within a man would be constructed byplacing a pyramid within a cube, which is shown in a picture on page 83. Youwill also notice in this Masonic book that the 2 Grand Masters on page 83 arewearing crowns that have 13 jewels. The crowns serve the same purpose thatrings patterned on a similar pattern represent. Crowns and rings representauthority, and it is common within the mystery religions to place 12 or 13 gemswithin crowns and rings. The reason that this is important, is that someimportant Masonic/Illuminati secrets are here, and these secrets also pertain tohow the Mystery Religions (the Illum. & Freemasonry) construct an altersystem.

RINGS

Within the Illuminati (which is the continuation of the mystery religions ofBabylon) the ring has for many centuries represented divinity. The mysteryreligions’ higher understanding was that God had a ring with his name on itthat showed His authority and exercised power over the earth, and that Satanimitated this many-fold in all the mystery religions that he created. Forthousands of years, within the various mystery religions, hierophants have beenwearing rings with particular secret symbols. The zodiac signs were assigneddifferent stones, gems. For instance, the 12 gems of Rev. 21:18-20, which arethe usual gems placed within an Illuminati alter system would correspond to theastrological signs as follows:

Jasper «»Pisces Sapphire «»Aquarius Chalcedony «» Cancer Emerald «» TaurusSardonyx «» Scorpio Chrysolyte Saggittarius Beryl «» LeoTopaz «» Gemini Chrysoprasus «» Capricorn Jacinth «»Amethyst «» Aries

The creation of a Monarch system’s gems is in imitation of the rings ofLucifer and God (as the Illuminati understand it). This ring of gems is able tocontrol the fruit of the trees (programs) and change the internal weather. It isbased upon the story that is told the alter system that is being made about howGod had a ring. Until His hand swept the heaven of air (1st heaven) fruitcould not fall and die, because nothing could die.

Satan and his followers likerings because they want to be godlike. (That doesn’t mean all Satanistsunderstand their own history.) When an alter is concerned about “Don’tlose the ring”, the alter may be referring to the ring of the gems thatsurrounds the pyramid at the base of the mind. This ring of gem alters may bereferred to as the ETERNAL RING, and the RING OF FIRE. The achievement ofdivinity by a human was what constituted the hermetic marriage of the mysteries.This was the ultimate achievement by mankind. This was symbolized by a goldring.

Within the Illuminati (which is a continuation of the Mystery Religions)rings are used for bonding (marriage commitments) and a sign of majesty or rank(such as your Masonic rings, and the ring Pharaoh gave Joseph, & KingSaul’s ring, & special papal rings allowed cardinals & abbots.) ThePope has 3 significant rings, one of which is for ceremonies, and another theimportant Fisherman’s Ring, which is still used as the Pope’s seal.

Withinthe Illuminati alter systems the 7 seals of Babylon are placed into a system.The cube with a pyramid was portrayed at the 14th Masonic Degree (the Perfect Elu degree). The 4 horsemen & the seals of Babylon are talked about at the17th Masonic degree (Knight of the East & West). Also deep within a systemmay be the Ring of Fire.

Within the pyramid, which is within the ring of those12 gems mentioned in Rev. 21, is the ETERNAL LIFE FORCE, a green light comingfrom Lucifer. In other words, the secret heart of the system is based upon theoriginal lie, that man could become an eternal god. The Illuminati alterstructure has at its heart the original lie. An example of how rings anddemonology and authority intersect, can be seen in the Grimoire of the Testamentof Solomon where a ring is said to have been given to Solomon which enabled himto learn the names of demons.

Rings and chains around the neck are also worn forthe extremely secret reason that the wearer is identifying himself with Luciferwho was bound by God by a ring of fire and was chained in the abyss. This iswhat is really behind high ranking Illuminati Freemason & clergyman RobertSchuler’s chain around his neck. The highest levels of the Illuminati have theunderstanding that Lucifer lost his power when Christ bound him, and that inidentification with him, they wear gold chains around their neck, etc. Don’texpect to read this in the material that occult world is permitted to read,these are high level secrets. Remember, there are many different levels ofoccultism, and Satanism. (In the early middle ages, Christians borrowed the ideaof having marriage rings from the pagan Germans & Romans. The determinationof what finger to wear it on (what has become known as the ring finger), waschosen by the ancient witches because that was considered the only healingfinger. Christians of course, by and large, know nothing of the pagan originsand symbology of the rings they wear.) This author has noted that many of thehandlers, programmers, & Illuminati adepts wear rings. Some of the rings arequite big.

The Ferris-wheel subsystem. A ferris-wheel configuration whichcreates compartments shaped like a piece of pie is often a small part of alarger system, and is used to house alters, or it may have some other internalpurpose with its rotation. As was brought out in Vol. 2, the Illuminati like touse configurations that appear endless such as circles within circles, boxeswithin boxes, triangles within triangles. Star configurations are popularIlluminati power sources within their alter systems. The position of a star, thenumber of points it has, and the relationship it has to other objects in the skysuch as a rainbow will be significant. Some stars are placed into the system torepresent a point in time when the system is programmed to do something.

When a slave is programmed with multiple functioning sub-systems (aka”systems”), the Illuminati call it MULTIPLEX. In such as case, typesand names of alters may be duplicated in systems that are mirror images of eachother or of a similar design. Traver reports that one MULTIPLEX system had 55Daves per sub-system with 7 subsystems, making a total of 385 Dave alters forthe 7 subsystems in just one particular slave. (see Traver, Dan. DissociativeDisorders & Mind Control, p. 84)

The construction of an Illuminati systemcan not be divorced from the demonology and rituals that are performedthroughout the life of the system. The Illuminati use mystical terms whenprogramming, which reframes psychological processes in the language of magic.Programming and hypnosis are referred during programming as “SPELLS”.The programmers will use fictional magical names for items, for instance, thesubconscious mind may be referred to as the “HYPNOGOURD, A VINE THAT GROWSGOURDS.” Creativity and imagination will be termed “MAGIC”, andthe programmer “A MAGICIAN”. The programmer would instruct hisassistant in language like this, “WOULD YOU PUT THIS GAP FORGET SPELLIN?”

The Generational Spirit (or Spirits from each occult bloodline) islaid into the child in the womb. It stays hidden deeply in the system, and playsa fundamental role in the system’s creation empowering other demonic forces.In order to construct the trees that provide the structure for the internalworlds-programming, the Illuminati programmer will tell the victim the followinghypnotic ritual:

“AS YOU BREATHE, REMEMBER TO SIT ERECT, AND AS YOUR SPINE STRAIGHTENS,FEEL THE ENERGY RISING [PAUSE] NOW IMAGINE YOUR SPINE IS THE TRUNK OF A TREE,AND FROM ITS BASE ROOTS REACH DOWN DEEP INTO THE EARTH. [PAUSE] INTO THE CENTEROF THE EARTH HERSELF [PAUSE] AND YOU CAN DRAW UP POWER FROM THE EARTH, WITH EACH BREATH [SHORT PAUSE] FEEL THE ENERGY RISING,LIKE SAP RISING THROUGH A TREE TRUNK, AND FEEL THE POWER RISE UP YOUR SPINE,FEEL YOURSELF BECOMING MORE ALIVE, WITH EACH BREATH, AND FROM THE CROWN OF YOURHEAD, YOU HAVE BRANCHES, THAT SWEEP UP AND BACK DOWN TO TOUCH THE EARTH [PAUSE]AND FEEL THE POWER BURST FROM THE CROWN OF YOUR HEAD, AND FEEL IT SWEEP THROUGHTHE BRANCHES UNTIL IT TOUCHES THE EARTH AGAIN, MAKING A CIRCLE, MAKING ACIRCUIT, RETURNING TO ITS SOURCE.”

The part of the system that will function within the Illuminati hierarchywill all be intimately part of either the SPIRIT TREE (that is the CaballisticTree of Life) or the TREE OF EVIL (which is the evil mirrorimage of the Tree of Life). Both trees were discussed in the Vol. 2 Formulabook. These trees are both totally connected to the Spirit of the AntiChrist androoted in Lilith and Tubal-cain. The Moon child ritual is not only performedwhen the child is still a foetus, but also at age 3, 4, 5, 6, and 16.

When theIlluminati child is in their teens they do the Caballistic Tree of Lifepathworking. The pathworking rituals are severe, and many splits of the mindwill occur due to these rituals. All the alters created during this work will bearranged at the GATEWAYS that pertain to that particular ritual. Therapists whodo not realize how the pathworking of the 22 paths develops entire sections ofdeeper alters, may incorrectly think they can simply toss out the caballisticTree of Life from the victim. Countless deeper alters are part of this tree. Ithas been said in the Illuminati that in general an Illuminati system consists of”the father (core), the son (the programming), the holy spirit (the spiritTree also called the Tree of Life).”

DATA ENTRY POINTS

The programmers have designed their systems so that one can only get into theSystems via a SEQUENCE. However, sometimes they themselves want to quickly download information into the computer-like mind of their slaves, and they don’twant to have to go through a sequencing procedure. For quick and sloppydownloading of information to their slave or quick deletions to the programming(there is only limited access to quick deletions), programmers put DATA ENTRYPOINTS into most systems. This allows for an emergency entry and/or downloading.General codes most often open these points, rather than long specific codes. Thetrick is being able to know where those DATA ENTRY POINTS are on the person’salter grid or as the programmers say the slave’s SCREEN. (With the advent oflap-top computers, what the master of the slave sees if he has to refer to hisown reference notes is just that a screen with the system’s layout. (Vol.2 pg.88 gave a sample of how a page on the lap top computer or in a master’s blackor grey 3-ring binder would look like.) An example of a data-entry point wouldbe a gatekeeper which has learned the entire system via trained LSD trips andthen has been programmed to keep this understanding on a subconscious level.

TESTING ALTERS TO SEE IF THEY CAN BE USED

When a trauma is carried out upon a child, the child is then debriefed andall the splits from the trauma identified. Generally only the first 10 splitswill be used to create alters, and the rest of the splits will become specialpurpose fragments. The programmers begin with the first split and identify howstrong the split is. The programmers test for four things:

a. how well can this split take a hypnotic suggestion?

b. how creative is this split?

c. Can this split hold memory?

d. Can this split hold the structuring that will given it?

If the split passes positive on these four criteria, then it will be used tomake a full blown alter. The programmers move down the line, testing the splitsin the sequence that they were created. If no. 4 split is unable to pass the 4criteria, then they know that the rest of the top splits will also have to be”thrown away” and used as special purpose fragments. If they need 12splits from an alter, and they only get 5 usable splits from the first torture,they will retorture the alter to get more first splits. They will continue theprocess until they get the splits they need. Usually they can use the first 10splits. Seldom do they use anything beyond the first 10 splits for alters, theyare just to weak mentally. If an alter shows extra promise the programmer maysay, “This part was going to be a bit part, but we’ll make her into areal character.” If a special purpose fragment leans in a needed directionmentally, they may take what was to be a minor part, and develop it into aninteresting alter. Alters that are waiting to be used are stored as gems thatthe dwarfs mine, and then the programmers program them. An Illuminati system hasthousands of these clean slates. Diamonds are pre-programmed alters that arestored to be used in the end-times during the reign of the Anti-Christ.

THE SCRIPTS

Each master programmer is responsible for the scripts that he uses. He willinvoke the leading geographic spirits, and even Lucifer to gain up-to-datewisdom on what is best for that time at that location. A master programmer willget assistance from his Mother of Darkness or Grande Dame. The master programmermay use a written script of his own such as Michael Aquino uses his own versionof Star Wars, or he may borrow from established sources, for instance, Dr. Starof Corpus Christi, TX, who uses the The Goetia The Lesser Key of Solomon theKing (Clavicula Salomonis Regis). Dr. Star especially uses the Shemhamphorash,which is the first part of that ancient magical book.

Recently Avon books (which has been owned byHearst Illuminati family, and which has published over 30 editions of theSatanic Bible) published a book by Piers Anthony entitled Visual Guide to Xanth.This amazing book Visual Guide to Xanth is based on Anthony’s Xanth series. Itcontains so many programming scripts, that it is hard to imagine that Anthony isnot a programmer. The scripts are too intact for it to be coincidence. The titlepage has a hoofed tailed Satan on his throne. It is popular among satanists touse X words, like Michael Aquino signs off his personal letters “Xeper”,rather than “sincerely”.

Anthony was born in Britian but now lives inFlorida. He has had over 60 fiction books published, many of the early ones werevery well promoted by the Illuminati, and became top best sellers. The backcover advertises this Visual Guide to Xanth this way, “Learn about theastonishing hierarchy–and lowerarchy–of sorcerers and shape-changers, ofgoblins, harpies and half-humans who inhabit this extraordinary universe![[[Internal Worlds|internal worlds]]] Explore the perilous Ogre-fen-ogre-Fen and the inner chambersof the mysterious Castle Roogna! Revel in the history and culture of the mostremarkable civilization this side of Ozz!”

The co-authors would have to agree that Piers Anthony’s story tellingability rivals, if not surpasses Baum’s Oz series. In fact Anthony has put outnumerous series of books, not just one series like Baum. The Xanth series is theone that contains more of the programming scripts. For instance, a script wouldbe used to get suicide alters to want to take drugs & champagne on an emptystomach, or to get into a bathtub of water & throw in an electric blow drierwhich is on.

Assassination Models (Delta Models)

A great deal was explained in the Vol. 2 book about Delta alters, Deltamodels, Delta teams, and Delta Forces. All of these are involved with killinghumans. It is not the purpose of this section to cover what has already beenwritten in the Vol. 2 Formula book on these various Deltas. Mind-controlledAmphibious men, (genetically altered Navy Seals–see Vol. 2 p. 26 1-262, thelatter no. is a significant no. for these programmed men) are the Navy’sattempt to get something similar to what is depicted on the film UniversalSolders. These Navy Seals are not allowed to be touched by other sailors whenthey are on a ship.

There is still a number of deeper insights that can beprovided to understand how assassin personalities are conditioned to be able tokill. Researchers in how the brain functions have found that our forebrains (thethinking part that makes us humans) shut down when we are angry or frightenedand the midbrain (which resembles the brain of animals) takes over. The onlyprogramming that works for the midbrain is the same type of training that worksfor dogs, which is classical and operant conditioning. This type of conditioningis simply stimulus-response, such as IF fire bell–THEN walk the fire escapeexit plan.

When it comes to killing, the forebrain will listen to manysuggestions such as orders from a gang leaders, an officer, or the pressures oflife when they demand that a person kill, but the midbrain has the instinct thatis born into 98% of the population NOT to kill another human. This innate humanresistance to killing is far stronger than has popularly been realized, and hashistorically stopped most people from killing. This may surprise most readers,because Hollywood movies would lead us to think otherwise. A number of topresearchers, including Lt. Col. Dave Grossman, author of the excellent book OnKilling, have uncovered irrefutable (albeit still controversial) proof thathistorically most soldiers have secretly refused to kill in battle.

Grossman wasa Military Psychology professor at West Point, as well ashaving a long list of other military credentials. His superb book On Killinggives numerous reasons (proofs and evidences) that numerous soldiers havetypically only pretended to try to kill the enemy. Many fired over the heads oronly pretended to fire their weapons, if even that. During W.W. II, Brig. Gen.S.L.A. Marshall discovered that only 15 to 20 % of men on the front line wouldactually use their weapons against the Germans even during action over severaldays. 75% of the American soldiers would not even fire at the enemy to savetheir own lives. He made some suggestions on how to improve this dismal firingrate. By operant conditioning the U.S. military took those dismal firing ratesto 55% in the Korean War and to a 95% firing rate in the Vietnam War.

What are behaviour modification techniques that turn teenagers into reliable killingmachines? These conditioning and psychological tricks are the same methods thatare used on the Delta alters and the Delta systems of Total Mind-controlledslaves, and we will discuss those next. The factors that are weighed as anequation in the human mind to determine whether a human will kill another humanare as follows:

• What is the benefit of the kill?

• How do recent experiences relate to the victim?

• How much physical, cultural, moral, social and mechanical DISTANCE isbetween the killer and the target.? The more distance the easier it gets.

• How intense is the demand from some authority to kill, and legitimate isthis authority? If the killer respects the authority that is asking for him tokill, and is in close proximity of that authority he will likely obey thatauthority.

• Are there a group dynamic working, and if so what is the power andlegitimacy of this group to absolve the killer from guilt?

• Are there any stumbling blocks from unresolved guilt from previouskillings?

• What is the temperament of the potential killer?

AUTHORITY FACTORS ARE MAXIMIZED

In the programming, the programmer can set himself up as God, or a god. Theprogrammer may also be a satanic cult leader which further increases thevictim’s regard for his power and authority. The programmers of totalmind-controlled slaves have tremendous potential to cause their assassin altersto overcome any resistance to kill.

ACCOUNTABILITY & ANONYMITY

A Delta Model with many multiple alters incorporates a built in ability toremove personal accountability. If need be, the person can split off a newpersonality to perform a particularly odious job. The alters form a peer groupwhich works just like a military unit to inhibit the natural reluctance to kill.This is because the closer a group of persons is, and the closer bonded, themore powerful the enabling. When military units lose 50% or more, the men oftenlose the will to continue killing, because the group dynamic fizzles out.

Theprogrammers who program in the programming, and then later the programmers whoprogram in specific killing missions, have worked long hours insuring that theassassin alters feel morally distant (superior), and socially distant. Thevictim is made out to be an inferior being who deserves to be punished andkilled. The killer will be doing a great service to his fellow man and countryto kill the “target”. It may be refrained as if it is a holy mission,almost a crusade. Often times the “target” is not even spoken about inhuman terms. Perhaps the target is hypnotically portrayed as an ant, a bug, orsome wild beast, or simply a target.

Hitler helped his military to kill bylabelling non-Germans as Untermensch (subhumans). The Americans called thecommunist Vietnamese “gooks”, and they in turn called Americans”monkeys”. Because the mind-controlled assassin will not see the faceof their victim due to hypnotic programming, they are also limited in seeingthe humanness of their victims. Most of the missions for Delta slaves allow themto kill without the threat of being killed. But the Programmer may put the fearof being killed into the slave. They may hypnotically see some object of victimas a threat. One killer (due to programming) saw the men she killed as having abig penis that would hurt her, so her instinct to survive would kick in to helpher assassinate these men.

Practice is given to assassins with situationssimilar to actual hand-to-hand killings to desensitize them to close rangekilling. With mind-controlled slaves usually actual live victims are used to getthe slaves totally desensitized to killing. Because assassin parts are strippedof conscious thinking and empathy they are handicapped to really think aboutwhat they are doing to another human when they kill.

Still the intelligenceagencies and the Illuminati know that somehow the brain still can latch ontoguilt–somehow the brain still can perceive in some dim way that it is guilty ofkilling another human, so they cover their tracks by warrior cleansing rituals.Warriors and soldiers have traditionally done cleansing rituals when they finisha war. An example of a cleansing ritual would be a parade at the end of the war,where the country turns out to tell the soldiers what a great job they did. Aprogrammed assassin in many cases can not receive a parade, but he can be givenlots of praise for having done a great job for humanity, or his country, orwhatever ideal the Programmer uses as a rationale.

Clock-Time Programming. The victim may see their head as a clock and may betortured in such a fashion. Twelve o’clock is straight up between the eyes.Six o’clock is straight below the chin.

Monkey Alters

The creation of animal alters has been covered in previous locations in thisbook and Vol. 2. However, I felt Lynne Moss-Sharmon’s description of Monkeyprogramming was worth including here. Lynne is a victim of mind control livingat Halifax, Nova Scotia. In her description of the memory that goes to herdrawing no. 29 she quotes what was said during the cages, “You stupidmonkey. Into your cage. Hit her and put her back in her cage. Lights on. Monkeytime. Monkey business.”

Plant alters

In the older models, they used plants and fruit, but in some of the newermodels it appears that they are using samphires (combination beast-plantcreatures) and hamadryads (man-plant creatures). Magic from underground springsis the cover story for how these plant-animal hybreds are made.

Presidential Models

Include both children and adults. They carry NWO messages to world leaders.They often have passports with accordion additions stapled in, because they doso much travelling overseas. Presidential models are kept in numerous locations.If high level individuals need to slip away for nefarious use of slaves, theyemploy look-alikes to stand in for them, while they do their dirty activities.This is why Presidents such as Clinton and Bush got away with sexually using farmore slaves than their schedule seems to indicate. Bush was a pedophile, whilehis double (who has recently lived in France) was a womanizer.

Prostitute Models

Slaves designed to function as prostitutes must receive training to protectthemselves. One possible problem might be a female prostitute who is accosted byan aggressive male, when she is not to allow herself to be used by him. She canbe trained to jump up slap the man on the face, warn him that she kick histesticles next time, and then kiss the man in a submissive makeup fashion to smooth his bruised ego. Aprostitute slave will also receive code words to let people, say people in acasino, know who she is. Deeper prostitute parts which need to perform sex forlong periods of time accomplish this for their masters by switching alters andby ingesting speed. The mechanical nature that sexual alters have is illustratedby the “I CAN WALK, I CAN TALK” phrases of alters with dollprogramming.

Psychic models

Both men and women slaves were created to carry out various psychicfunctions. For instance, the AntiChrist needs to be able to look at people andtotally understand them psychologically and their systems of mind-control (altersystems, programming etc.). The abilities to successfully perform psychicfunctions have been tested for years before they were created within theAntiChrist.

Reporting Alters

The construction of reporting alters is very straightforward behaviormodification. For programming reporting alters, they use purpose fragmentsplits. In other words, these reporting alters are not given the full range andexposure to life, but they experience life from the vantage of their singlepurpose. Some therapists are reporting that they are converting reporting altersover by giving them ice cream. They are most likely only dealing with fronts.Since most therapists only deal with front alters, and front systems, thesefront reporting alters may even be set up so that these therapists think theyhave converted the reporting alters. The truth is that most of these reportingalters are fragments that don’t know what hunger is. All the ice cream in theworld is going to mean anything to them. (Cisco will deal with these issues inher part of this book.) The point is simply, these are special purpose fragmentswho only see life from the vantage point of their little job.

Now we willexplain what first and second stage reporting alters are, and then how they arecreated. Some of the first stage reporting alters are trained to respond to3-taps, some to telephone calls, lights, and some to codes. The first stagealters are children from 6 to 10. In an Illuminati system there will be familiesof reporting alters. Every level (“section”) will have at least onegroup (family) of reporting alters. The second stage reporting alters are alsochildren from 6 to 10, and they are taught to want Daddy’s or Mommy’s love.Girl systems seek “Daddy” (the Master) and boy systems often seek”Mommy” (the Master). They are taught to talk about therapy issues,programming issues, and movements by the system. They are linked to thecomputers, and the eye of the computer. Just to hear “Daddy’s voice”is gratification to them.

At stage 1 of the creation of reporting alters, theyare the result of the sensory deprivation tank, and are taken from thedissociated part of the mind that feels like it doesn’t have a body, or thatit is nothing. Stage 1 Reporting-special-purpose fragments of the mind arepainfully shocked in some sensory deprivation environment when the hear 3 taps.The pain ceases when they open the door. They continue to be locked in place inthe mind and painfully shocked until they learn the lesson, which is that thepain stops when the door is opened. Over and over they are taught, THE PAINSTOPS WHEN THE DOOR IS OPENED. When they hear tapping they want the pain to stop(probably they abreact their previous tortures) and they open the door to stopthe pain. They have only one job, stop the pain by opening the door when threetaps (or whatever other trigger/code/signal they are programmed for.)

Stage 2Reporting-special-purpose alters are given a fuller view of life. They are thewatchers in the system. They were created under such horrible torture that theyleft the body and hover over the body. These are Out-of-Body alters. They are also placed in a fogged room, where they are taughtto become one with the fog. They are also told ghost stories like Casper theGhost. Through the combination of all these programming tactics and techniques,they learn to be invisible. They hover over their assigned position in thesystem, invisible to all the other alters of that section. These alters haveexcellent rapid recall. They have none of the Straw Man programming thatGatekeeper receive to make them think they are stupid.

To reinforce theprogramming, the reporting alters are always treated kindly when they obey. (Ifyou get one that hasn’t been, suspect a plant, a setup.) Internal protectoralters are given the job to insure that reporting alters never miss a call, ornever miss responding to a cue. They will go to work and punish lax Stage 1alters. Again, several therapists claim to have gotten reporting alters todefect from their jobs, but haven’t dealt with their protector alters who aretaskmasters. If the taskmasters haven’t been dealt with, then suspect a ruseto get the therapist to think all is well. The reason this subject is dealt withhere, is that some of the top well known therapists have spread informationcontrary to what is actually happening. That doesn’t mean that there may notbe an exception to the rule, but the Illuminati is not so stupid as to makereporting alters that defect because someone offered them an ice-cream cone.

Reporting alters are very hard to convert, because during their lifetime theyare treated nicely. They experience a nice life if they behave (its the otheralters that suffer.) The Stage 1 reporting alter merely saysHELLO and waits for the response HELLO PRINCESS. This is a standard format.If the HELLO PRINCESS occurs, the mind automatically in a flash switches to theStage 2 reporting alter.

To reinforce the original programming, which would loseits effect over time, the programmer hypnotically command the reporting altersto think of their programming when they see certain objects, for instance,certain types of men’s clothing, animals, certain cigarettes or lighters,certain trees etc. Everyday life is used then to reinforce their programming.The Stage 1 alters are also trained to have back-up amnesia, where they forgetwhat they have done after they have responded to the cue. Once the job is done,the job is forgotten. Like the Vol. 2 book reported, reporting alters canperceive themselves in various shapes and figures, and they can be locked up ineggs or other containers also. The Stage 2 alters look forward to Daddy or Mommycoming.

Cisco’s system, which helped at the programming level, verifies thatduring the 50’s, 60’s, 70’s and 80’s none of the slaves got free. TheIlluminati was not the least bit concerned about losing a slave. They had notlost a mind-controlled slave in centuries, so the recent victories in a fewslaves getting their freedom in recent years are a historical first. Manytherapist who make great therapeutic claims are not freeing their slaves at all,but these slaves continue to be used by their masters. The masters just laugh atthe deceptions they have pulled over legitimate but naive therapists. Theirreporting alters are a key to their control and they have numerous reportingalters in families spread throughout a standard reporting system. If onerealizes that the same mentality that created Stalin’s USSR, or that createdBig Brother is at work here, you will realize that they need a spy-in-the-campon every block so to speak. Everybody watches everyone. They make many spieswithin a system of alters. The reporting alters are given some script such as”You can diffuse from supersolidity to insubstance, you can grow big orsmall, and can change shape to any for you wish.” This makes it easier forthem to go through the internal system.

Repunzel alter

In the internal Mother’s of Darkness castle there is often a Repunzel altercreated by the Repunzel story, who has magical hair and can change her size atwill. She is not an Illuminati alter, even though she resides at their castle.

Transformation alters

In Chapter 5, in the section on how Fantasia was used as a programmingscript, the fairy alters (creative parts of the child’s mind) were discussed.The Illuminati also create magical alters that can transform other alters intoobjects. The script for this is Alice In Wonderland, although some newer scriptsare also being used (like Xanth’s sorceress Vadne). When an alter is changedinto an object, it does so without losing its character. This is where cartoonshave been helpful to lay the foundation for visualizing this. When one entersparticular internal rooms one needs to pick up certain objects in the room toget through portals to the next world. What makes the internal world difficultis that it is set up to change its appearance. An alter may think they see onething internally and then the scene totally shifts. An alter may look into amirror and turn into a leaf.

Internal Wall alters

Some alters will be made into walls. This is why is can be difficult to goaround internal walls. These alters shift so that no one can get around them.

Structuring Internal Programmer Alters

The procedure for the creation of Internal Programmer Alters is severalsteps. After the child victim has been traumatized they are sorely in need oflove. Using a drug that gives a sense of peace and ectasy, along with hypnosis,certain parts of the system are bonded to the programmer. The child alters aretold to forget the trauma and merge with the programmer. It’s instinct to wantto be loved, touched and comforted. This is repeated so that they feel the”peace of God” with their three primary abusers. Scriptures about thepeace of God are used to reinforce this programming. These alters who feel onewith the master programmer will form a cover group which will pacify any frontalters who think negatively about the external programmer. These alters are inturn used to build the actual programmers. The actual programmers will beprogrammed to take on the characteristics of the master programmers and theGrand Dame working with them. These alters will be formed via split brainprogramming so they have only logic, no emotion. They can interact for yearswith the rest of the system and will feel no emotion for the hell and abuse thatthey put hundreds of other alters through. These controllers will stand behindthe Grand Druid Council to insure that they carry out their function correctly.

STRUCTURING WITH THE GRAND DRUID COUNCIL

In Illuminati mind-controlled slaves it is typical to place at the bottom ofthe system a pyramid shaped table with a crystal prism life force within thepyramid’s center. Around this pyramid table are the Grand Druid Council andSatan hovers over the entire thing. Mirrors on both sides surround the pyramid.The Grand Druid Council can astrally project and attend rituals. There are coverCouncils to throw the unapproved seeker off. In fact, every section within theslave may have a Grand Druid Council. These are not the computers, but functionclosely with the computers. When the life force dies it becomes black. The slavewill told that the life force of the system is within the pyramid which isinside the Grand Druid Council’s table. The pyramid will spin constantly fromthe energy of Lucifer, and the Grand Druid Council may well spin on their tablein the opposite direction. Each position on the Grand Druid Council (GDC) issignificant, because if determines what that Council person is allowed to do.(This is a mirror of real life.)

The type of programming and commands that a particular council person cancarry out are determined by their position around the table. The no. 3 positionhas access to the center pyramid. Within the spinning pyramid are 3 programmerpositions, one for each corner of the triangle. If only one programmer occupiesall three positions you are dealing with a master programmer. Very often asystem is programmed by lesser programmers, and the inner pyramid has more thanone programmer inside the pyramid. If a group/ series of cult programmers isused, one may see them represented somewhere in the system by their cult names.

Growing through the Grand Druid Council’s table will be the generationaldemonic roots of a tree. Tied up at the base of the tree entwined in the rootsis the life force of a foetus that has been sacrificed to empower the slave’smind-control system, as well as connect the slave to people that he or she isteamed with. During occult ritual the foetus is eaten as a seed. The dead childis connected to the roots. Another child, the child who is connected to thememory of these rituals will also be connected to the root of the tree. Thischild alter will not be able to talk or scream because it is locked in thehorrible memories of some humiliating ritual. This child alter may have thingsin its penis or rectum, it may be covered with filth, it’s skin is bruised andtender. This may be the “core”–the birth child.

In male slaves,sometimes the birth child or a first core split called “the core” isplaced in the tree roots rather than the carousel. Egg shaped demonic powerbases will also be set in at the root of the tree. The core of some slaves willbe removed to the astral plane. The Grand Druid Council will astral project todifferent spheres and different ceremonies. This gets into black magic such asthe 777 book of Aleister Crowley touches on, where there are colors for eachplanet for astral projection.

While we are discussing the deeper parts to asystem, let’s discuss the compass. Each system has a compass built into it,that is incredibly important. The 4-demons (goddesses) which control the 4directions are called Quarter-Regents. The Eastern one controls Wind & Air.The Northern one controls the elemental Earth. The Western one controls waterrealms. And the Southern one controls fire.

STRUCTURING THE SHADOW ALTERS

Alters which are created in the sensory deprivation tanks which have no senseof being attached to a body are used in clusters on each level (section orworld) of an Illuminati system of alters. These alters are the ones who no oneelse can see because they have no body, and yet they are the shadows that knowwhat’s going on in the outside world. Every level has access to what is goingon in the outside world through the eyes of these shadow alters, but many altersdo not care. Nor will the shadow alters tell everyone on the level. Theseclusters of shadows are also chained together, so that a link exists betweenthem. They have no sense of self. They sometimes serve as directors to guide thechild slave. They may protect the child by telling it to get home, to call home,or to not be frightened it will be OK. They are also willing to mislead therapists.

STRUCTURING IN THE MIRRORS

One of the movies which was developed to help program in the internal mirrorswas the movie “The Hungry Glass” made in the early ’50s. Let’sreview The Hungry Glass movie so that those who aren’t familiar with it, cansee the programming elements of the movie. The movie is about a fictitioushaunted mansion that was built near the sea by a rich man named Bellman. Themansion lays dormant for decades until a couple buy the mansion. The mansion andits window is described as “a jewel box to pull the silver off thesea.”

When they move in they experience many strange things connected withmirrors and glass. In the Monarch programming, glass and mirrors are similar. Many ofthe mirrors in a system are really one-way windows. The following are somequotes from the movie:

• “mirrors bring a house to life”

• “I’m great at turning nightmares into daydreams.”

• “don’t know if I saw it.. .it’s imagination playingtricks…never get it out of your system.”

• “we’re both suggestible to suggestion…

• “…saw something and imagined the rest.. .just plain fear. ..did Isee something supernatural?”

• “If you want anything just scream.”

• “Miracles can be done with concentration.”

• I got the house in order with “spell, book and candle” which isa phrase referring to witchcraft.

• you “never grow old in the mirrors”. When alters of a slave lookin a mirror it happens just like in the movie, they see themselves as young,which is a strong hypnotic image they have been programmed to see.

What the movie shows is that it is lethal to break mirrors. And if you gothrough mirrors you fall to your death. The one woman as well as a little girlare curious about the mirrors and they are pulled into the mirrors and die. Inother words, the programming message is don’t be curious about the mirrors norgo into the mirrors. There are demons in the mirrors.

In the movie they use theword “bogeyman”. The room of mirrors is locked, and the message of themovie is, don’t open locked doors in your internal system. In the movie, whenGil looks in the mirror, he sees a protector of the mirrors. This in theprogramming is called the KEEPER OF THE MIRROR, and is a demonic entity ordemons placed to protect the mirror. Things are layered and hidden in a systembehind mirrors. It also gives the idea that if you look into a mirror, even ifyou are physically old, the mirror can lie and give you a youthful appearance.

Young actor William Shatner, of later Star Trek fame plays the leading role inthe movie. He tries to rationally explain things but gives up, when explanationsfail. This is encouraging the small slave who would see the movie to think, ifan adult can’t figure these things out rationally, then the explanations forwhat I am seeing during programming are supernatural. William Shatner was raisedin Catholic Montreal, Quebec and went to McGill Univ. when Dr. White (EwenCameroon) was carrying out programming there. He graduated in 1952 and marriedGloria Rand. He has acted in a number of strange movies designed forprogramming, and it appears they have used him repeatedly over the years as atie in to familiarize the slave to him. He also acted in The World of Suzie Wong(1958), The Brothers Karamazov (1958), The Devil’s Rain (1978), Teklords(1991). The Hungry Glass was produced by William Freye, who also did some othermovies for the Network. In some areas of a system, the script is that only the”dead”–alters who are so disconnected to their bodies they seethemselves as spirits are allowed to cross between different internal worlds byusing passwords such as “ELIADE”. At other times, alters are givenwords to return to their “own time period” such as NICRO NECTRUM NECTO.

STRUCTURING THE TAPESTRY

A script is given for all standard Illuminati systems for an internalSorceress to be assigned the making of tapestries. The tapestries enable altersto go into other worlds, in other words they are mirror gateways. For instancethe sorceress may weave a door into the tapestry. Going into the mirror, goingover the rainbow, going through walls or picture tapestries are ways that altersgo from one world into another state.

STRUCTURING THE ALTER FAMILIES BY SPINNING

Spinning is used in a variety of programming purposes. We will review thesetogether, so that a comparison can be made of the different purposes. Spinning tortures (which the victim endures while indrugged hypnotic states) are used extensively by the programmers as theyconstruct alter systems. Programmed multiples will frequently complain of”spinning”. All at once, whole sections of alters will begin spinningand getting dizzy. During such an abreaction, you will notice that the eyeschange, the victim will appear disoriented and stare, or even grimace as ifbeing rotated at a high speed. The head and/or body will rotate slightly duringthe abreaction.

During the programming of such a spin program, the programmerwill lay in the experience for an entire section of alters, and attach thevisual image of falling into an abyss, a cyclone, a tornado, a vortex, or awhirlwind to the memory of being spun. When a system goes into spinning thepower of numerous memories, and the power of the dizzy spinning makes itdifficult for much of anything. Certain alters trigger the spinning and certainalters maintain the spinning. In fact some spinning alters take pride in theirspinning abilities. Obviously, their programmers commended them when they didtheir job correctly.

Another use of spin tortures is to create spin families.The spin torture creates spin alters which have been spun off a”parent” alter. The parent alter may later be age progressedhypnotically and given care over her children alters who she or he spun offduring the torture. Spinning is a way of creating dissociation, and the spinmemory dissociates the spin children alters from their original source alter.This creates alters which are close together internally, but dissociated. Thespin training and memories are then used to teach these alters to spin away thepain. Spin alters are used for some of the worst abuse and the spinningsensation is used internally by these alters to dissociate the severe abuse theyreceive.

The actual mechanisms to do the spinning torture vary. Some arerotating tables, some are more upright like a Wheel of Fortune type wheel, or”Space trainer” type machine where the victim is inside the rotatingmechanism. Flashing lights are used along with the spinning, so that flashinglights can be used in the future to cause the alter(s) to abreact the spinningsensation. Verbal triggers are also placed in. The spin kittens will actuallyphysically go around when commanded. Certain alters will be trained to re-creatementally the sensations of spinning via enhance imagery and memory training.This is so that the system will be self-governing and self-propelled. The spintraumas may be used to help create the ring within ring, circle within a circleeffect that is structured into so many systems.

Programs that are put in viaSpin-based traumas or attached to spin-based traumas often affect wide areas ofa system, rather than individual alters. For instance, if an area of the systemis mis-behaving, a tornado program, or a tumbleweed program may be set off bythe internal governing mechanisms and an entire world of alters will feel theprogram. Victims of mind-control often speak about walls full of differentfaces. The walls of faces are people who are in need of help. They are shownrepeatedly to the victim, to solicit the emotion of wanting to run & rescue.This then is used as the cover program for alters for them to want to run backto the cult to “rescue” their “friends”. Generally, all thatwill be experienced is the memory of walls of faces and the urge to run. Anotherelement of programming, often seen in military programming, is where the victimis left in a totally dark room, and then for men, a hypnotic motherly voice isplayed repeatedly to them in the dark. For women, they may get their primaryhandler’s hypnotic voice.

More structures used to build a system

p_7-2.jpg
<input height=”172″ name=”I29″ src=”http://www.whale.to/b/sp/deepera/p_7-2.jpg” type=”image” width=”495″ />

CHAPTER 8: THE SCIENCE OF BODY MANIPULATION & PROGRAMMING

Implants that manipulate the body and its functions have been discussed inChapter 6. The body manipulating implants were placed there to keep all of theimplant information intact in one chapter, even though some body manipulatingimplants are not electrically activated. When our previous book The IlluminatiFormula Used to Create an Undetectable Total Mind Controlled Slave (1996)covered the 12 Sciences of mind-control, its chapter 8 on the manipulation ofthe human body did not cover the ancient secrets of cranial manipulation, northe modern secrets of genetic mind manipulation via applications of radiationwith chemicals.

CRANIAL MANIPULATION–Important Top Secrets of Illuminati Mind-controldisguised as Muggings & other events

INTRODUCTION

The information in this section exposes a previously unknown type ofmind-control.

• The woman ran tripping through the woods, slipping on the wet leavesattacked by an unknown assailant for an unknown reason. The report of hermugging the next day never gets beyond the policeman who hears her story.

• A wife cries softly to herself as her husband beats her. The crime goesunnoticed in a busy world.

What do these acts of violence have in common with orthodontics, orthopedics,rolfing and other structural treatments? The shocking fact is that some of thesekind of events happen for purposes of mind control. Any trauma to the head, beit an accidental fall, a fight, a bullet wound, or a motorcycle or car accidentcan cause permanent structural brain injury. But what passes for accidents areat times carefully designed & brilliantly executed cranial manipulationsdesigned by the Illuminati to create specific mental and personality changes.

Inorder to get closer to the bottom of this type of mind-control, the author,Fritz, obtained the same books that cranial osteopaths study, and the same booksthat disclose the modern scientific studies of head shape/facial features inrelation to personality, and then studied them. This author has tried to get asclose as an outsider can get to understanding what a cranial-manipulatingprogrammer has going on in his head. Until this chapter was published, the Illuminati’s ability to perpetrate this mind control has been a completesecret. This is the first time that this secret has ever reached the publiclight of day. It is a secret known only to a handful of people in the world. Itis a secret that various parts of Satan’s realm have carefully guarded forcenturies. How I got this secret is a long story. It is the confluence of manystreams of research coming together. The people, who carry out this type ofprogramming hate the God of the Holy Bible.

This art’s academy’s ownliterature speaks about “the Force”. “The Mysterious Vital Forceis a Universal Power of Intelligence present in all things.” (Direct quotefrom the Cranial Academy’s official newsletter). This is a Force similar toJung’s “Collective unconsciousness” and Star War’s The Force. TheGod of the Universe, who loves each and every person in spite of theirhatefulness & rejection, has also warned that all things will be revealed.

If I didn’t write this, God would simply seek some other avenue to expose these hideous secrets. Who would have imagined thatthe Illuminati and a particular aspect of their mind control would end up to beconnected to Transcendental Meditation, Kung Fu, modern Osteopathy, Theosophyand the Rosicrucians? None of us who research these groups are surprised thatthey are all tied together in the occult via the SPIN principle. However, youmay be surprised by how they are also all affiliated to this form of mindcontrol, which can be disguised as a typical mugging!

Even the Mafia are able toproduce heartless criminal alters using cranial manipulation, and they don’thave the best skills at doing it either. How do victims of cranial mind-controlrespond? Most victims follow the subtle guidance of their mind, completelyignorant of why their mind wants to go a particular direction. Some evenattribute their mental drives to the metaphysical world. This author’s hope isthat the truth of this chapter will help restore free will to numerous victimsof this secret mind-control technique. In spite of the extreme lack ofinformation on this type of mind-control, it appears to have been more widelyused than one might have guessed.

The benefit of this type of mind-control tothe programmers is that a change in the body and head structure of a victim ispermanent and undetectable, in contrast to hypnotic or drug induced states. Afurther benefit, is that a skilled person could be tampered with without theirrealization. Some of the procedures reduce the alertness of the subject,separate him from his memories and make the person more receptive to other formsof mind-control even if the subject has had no prior programming.

One example ofa technique that causes a rapid adaption of the cranial bones with anaccompanying neurological effect would be to flick the occiput posteriorly andinferiorly on exhalation (extension), then lift the vault (parietal) bones upfrom the temporal area on inhalation (flexion), then rapidly draw the vaultposteriorly and inferiorly, then dislocate the sphenoid into a vertical orlateral strain position. These procedures will also speed up the appearance ofaging. This is just one example of a quick procedure to control the mind ofanother. And as Cisco’s section will bring out, power (including power overother humans) is the goal of the occult underworld.

A lot of research has goneinto producing this finished report. At first glance, the polished nature ofthis chapter’s report, which is replete with so many sources, may tend tomislead some people into thinking that this type of mind-control hasn’t beensecret. Quite to the contrary, the pieces of the puzzle were well hidden. Thistype of mind-control has been very secret and it is only the result of long hardresearch that the many divergent pieces of the puzzle have been assembled andplaced into a coherent picture for the reader. Although the possibility existsthat some may misapply the intent of this chapter and use this for evil, like somuch of this book’s material the really bad guys already have it. On the flipside, the potential for good, if medical science will use this secret knowledgefor good is tremendous.

For instance, compare the improved appearance of IvanaTrump after her cranial work was done. This chapter has the potential positiveby-product that others will be inspired to explore how cranial manipulation canbe used to benefit humankind. God is in the business of turning evil into good.But perhaps in our fallen corrupted world, this secret knowledge which is beingexposed in this chapter will no longer find good men worthy of this informationwho are also capable enough to put it to good practice. If so, then so be it. Atthe very least, some people will gain strength of heart to realize once againthat when one know’s how God’s creation operates–it is easy to see how aparadise without problems could be created. Man’s worst enemy is man. TheIlluminati are sitting on technology and knowledge that could bring about almosta virtual paradise, but they are hoarding this technology and knowledge, and suppressing it. Further, rather than helpingmankind, they are using this cranial knowledge to reward those who are friendlyto their Luciferian hierarchy, and to abuse those who dare to seriously impedetheir agenda. After you read this chapter and are aware that the secrets ofcranial manipulation could rescue children with cerebral palsy, and some of thechildren with Down syndrome, you too will cry with this author at the needlesssuffering that the Illuminati have perpetrated upon mankind in their quest fortotal domination of this globe.

CRANIAL BLOOD PRESSURE has been kept a SECRET

Recently, a Dr. Yoshiaki Omura in New York, discovered that the bloodpressure in the brain is vastly different than the rest of the body. The bloodpressure in the brain has major consequences on one’s thinking (such asirritability, & insomnia) and also affects other things in the body, such asmuscle tightness in the neck. High brain blood pressure is called cephalichypotension syndrome. Yet, when this doctor went to see what the medicalbooks/research institutions said about brain blood pressure, he found nothing.He has been making his discoveries known in speaking engagements. He recentlyaddressed a large audience of Chinese doctors. When this author met YoshiakiOmura, I unsuccessfully attempted to tell Yoshiaki the reason that thisknowledge was suppressed was in the interest of mind-control; Dr. Omura has beentreating various illnesses by working with patients’ brain blood-pressure. Thediagnosis of other problems, such as the early stages of cancer, has been doneearlier by Omura by monitoring brain blood pressure levels than MRI testsresults.

CEREBRAL SPINAL FLUID kept SECRET

Another important fluid in the brain, discovered by others is Cerebral spinalfluid. There are many technical details about this CS fluid that are extremelyimportant to the way the mind-body functions. In this chapter, we will discuss anumber of areas of medical science, acupuncture, personology etc. concerning thebrain, which when known and used by skilled practitioners can give thepractitioner control over another person.

The Mystery Schools and particularbloodlines have kept much of this knowledge to themselves and continue to keepthe best secrets. Daniel Whiteside, a pioneer in behavior genetics andunderstanding the relationship of the shape of the skull to personality,provides some important confirmations of how the Mystery Schools transmittedthis secret cranial knowledge.

In his important work “The Background ofStructure/Function” (pp.2-3) he outlines that Structure/Function wasstudied and taught by the Greek Mystery Schools, and was the basis of the RomanEmpire’s psychology. The Catholic church suppressed this knowledge. Thisknowledge was kept alive by the Cabalistic philosophers and the Arabs, until theKnights Templars brought it back. If we build upon the information that Danielhas provided we discover that from the Knights Templars, this knowledge went tothe leadership of the Prieure de Sion, who in turn disseminated low forms of itto the occult groups that they controlled. For instance, the Rosicrucian Orderfor North & South America in their Vol. 8 of their Rosicrucian Manual (SanJose, CA: Supreme Grand Lodge AMORC) pp. 91-108 deals with the spinal column,nerves, & the influence of color & music on the nervous system, etc.Grand Master Lewis writes on pg. 103, “The Rosicrucians were the first tohave a complete outline of this system [nervous system] and to know exactly whatpart of the human body was connected with every other part.”

One witnessreported to this author that he watched an acupuncture specialist repeatedlywork on clients’ brains by inserting 3 long skinny needles through the skull. The acupuncture specialist braggedto this man that he could completely control a human via his skill with theneedles. He showed this witness how he could kill pain, and how he could killself-will by touching minute areas within the brain. He was also skilled inmanipulating the mind of the client in other ways too with the needles.

Therehas been a great deal of research into determining what the different purposesof the different areas of the brain are. Several researchers have independentlyidentified that the ability to make choices, that is what we call “freewill”, is located near the Broadman Area 24 in the Anterior CingulateSulcus. Tampering with this area can disturb a person’s ability to have freewill. (For more information on this one could begin with Crick, Francis. TheAstonishing Hypothesis The Scientific Search for the Soul.)

Acupuncture wasvirtually unknown to mainstream Americans until a NY Times journalist in Chinareported that he was successfully treated with acupuncture in 1971. Pressurepoints can also be manipulated by Acupressure, which is similar to acupunctureexcept fingers rather than needles are used. This is just one example of arelated technique which went unnoticed for decades (actually centuries by theWestern World.)

The mugging-mind control information in this article has goneunnoticed by mainstream America too. Time Magazine, Nov. 4, 1991, reported thatthere are four types of alternative medicine, which they classified asLife-Style (such as Macrobiotics, Ayurvedic medicine, and holistic medicine),Botanical (such as Homeopathy, Herbalism, and Aromatherapy), Mental healings(such as with Crystals, Guided imagery, biofeedback and Hypnotherapy) andManipulative/Hands-on (such as Reflexology, Rolfing, Shiatsu, Alexander tech.,Chiropractic, and Acupressure & Acupuncture).

Reflexology dates back to atleast 2330 B.C. in Egypt. Shiatsu is a Japanese finger pressure deep massage ofpressure points is over 1,000 years old. The skull & head bone manipulationsthat are being exposed for the first time in this report, were used in ancientEgypt and other parts of the ancient world. That Nov., 91 Time Magazine articledid not mention that acupressure/acupuncture has been knowledge that the secretsocieties in China studied and often kept hidden for centuries, as a part ofWushu (martial arts) in China.

For instance, in a recent Chinese book 72Consummate Arts Secrets of the Shaolin Temple, (pub. by Fujian Science &Technology Pub. Co. Ltd., Fujian, China, 1990) by Wu Jiaming and translated byRou Gang, diagrams and explanations are given of the important head/body points(for acupressure/ acupuncture/& kung fu.) What is important for ourdiscussion on mind control are the Kung Fu (Wushu) points in the head. This bookgives 4 points on the front of the head, seven on the side of the head, and fouron the back side of the head. The Shaolin Buddhist monks have kept their martialarts (which is called “Kung-fu” in the U.S. and “Wushu” inChina) a secret hidden within their temple on Song Mountain, Henan Province.This Buddhist monastery has a long history of teaching kung-fu and is exerting abig influence in the world as its type of kung fu spreads. The Japanese tookkung-fu from the Chinese many years ago and then developed from it specializedforms of kung-fu, such as Karate, Judo, etc.

THE CHINESE SECRET OCCULT SOCIETY CONNECTION

The important item that this paragraph will emphasize is that the Chinesesecret societies studied the pressure points on the skull completely. Theylearned how the skull could be manipulated and what it would do to a person. Ofcourse this information was only revealed to the best Chinese kung-fu experts.It is sometimes referred to as the skill of bone setting. In China, bone-settersare a type of Chinese doctor which are popular to some Chinese. These bone-setters havekept their secrets within many generations of families who specialize inbone-setting and also within the secret Triad societies.

The Communistgovernment admitted that it has failed to pry family bone-setting secrets fromthe families that have passed these secrets down generationally. This is due inpart to the strong Chinese belief in ancestor worship and strong families. Afamily’s secrets are considered one source of its strength. One communistChinese tactic to pry the secrets loose was their “folkart barefootdoctor” system which they hoped the bone-setters would join.

Junxie Liwrote in 1990 that a Chinese Kung Fu document shows that bone manipulation waspracticed as early as 2700 B.C. The secrets have been passed down for manyyears. An American writer stated in 1983, “Traditional Chinese medicine andchiropractic are remarkably alike in their underlying theories…Through deepmassage at the occiput [head bone], for example, (contemporary) Chinesepractitioners find that they can bring down high blood pressure, a practiceanalogous to that of chiropractors.”

A Buddhist monk Bodhidharma iscredited to having brought the martial arts and healing arts associated withmartial arts to China. He must have been a very strong individual to have madethe 2,500 miles journey which back before there were paths or maps must havebeen more like an 8,000 miles of perilous journey on foot from India over theHimalayas to the Chinese interior. Bodhidharma had studied big cats, dogs,bears, insects and other animals to learn how they defend and attack. Hisphysical, mental and spiritual teachings became known later as Zen Buddhism. Hismonastery became the famous Shaolin Monastery. A master of the Shaolin Monasterywould have two dragons deeply branded into his flesh. It is said that the RedDragon represented knowledge in ancient China.

In the Tang Dynasty (6 18-907A.D.) some of the Kung Fu experts at that time were Li Bai and Twelfth Sister Liof the Li family. Madame Gong Sun and Twelfth Sister Li composed a famous XiheSword Dance combining martial arts and choreographic arts. The Li family keptsome of their secret martial arts skills (including bone setting) secret forhundreds of years, and as a top Illuminati family are secretly proud of theiroccult knowledge and history.

To illustrate how the head has been studied are some quotes from 72Consummate Arts Secrets of the Shaolin Temple,

TAJYANG ACUPOINT (Sun Acupoint)

Located on both sides of the forehead, the left being Tai Yang and the rightTai Yin. Nowadays it is generally called Taiyang Acupoint being a vital part ofthe head. It is ‘Dead Acupoint’ among the twenty-four Acupoints. One will befaint or even die if it is slightly seized.

TAINRONG ACUPOINT

Located on the back of ears and is in parallel with the ear. It lies on theouter-side of Fen Yi Acupoint, and is above the Tian Chuang acupoint. It is avital acupoint of the back of one’s head. It is also a ‘Dead Acupoint’among the twenty-four acupoints.

FENGFU ACUPOINT

Located in the centre of the low part of one’s back head and is below theNaohu Acupoint but above the Yamen Acupoint. It’s in parallel with the leftand right FenYi Acupoint. It is a single Acupoint. It is a vital part of one’sback brain. It is a ‘Dead Acupoint’, too. If this acupoint is seized, onemay faint or die immediately.”

Washu (Chinese Martial Arts) went underground into the Chinese occult secretsocieties, because the rulers feared that it would make the common people toopowerful, so they frequently banned the teaching of martial arts. The teachers of Kungfu teach their pupils that Kung-Fu has both an external work with the hands,feet and body and an internal work which refers to the occult spiritual workthat provides the energy and spirit to do the martial arts that Kung fu mastersdo.

The Shaolin Temple masters have studied the human skeleton very closely forcenturies. The books Shaolin Long Fist Kung-Fu by Yang Jwing-Ming & JeffBolt and The Way of the Sun Dragon Chinese Martial Art of Tai-Yang Lung Tao areother examples of books in English which also show points to hit on the head.The art of manipulating the skull and other bones has travelled from the secretsocieties to about 20% of China’s doctors. As mentioned, this skill is called”bone setting.”

Some Kung Fu experts and Chinese doctors learn bonesetting, including how to work with the skull bones. In 1974, the U.S. Dept. ofHealth, Education and Welfare (which has been full of New Agers) along with theFogarty International Center of the National Institutes of Health which workswith WHO of the U.N. set up a conference in Seattle, WA which focused on HealthCare in China. The U.S. Government Printing Office then printed up in 1975edited versions of the papers presented at the conference. The resulting book onMedicine in Chinese Cultures has some very pertinent information to the ancientsecret Chinese art of manipulating skull bones. After W.W. II, Chinese bonesetters began to use X-rays. (p. 261)

• The Chinese bone setters had their own professional associations. (p.261-262)

• Bone-setters’ societies have been interwoven with secret societies, thelink being Chinese kung-fu (martial arts) which the secret societies control.”Bone-setters get their knowledge of anatomy from practicing kung-fu, forpart of the instruction is in how the bones and muscles work.” (p. 262.)

• Bone-setters, in order to practice in Hong Kong, generally find itadvantageous to get (buy) protection from the Triads (Chinese Secret Societiescontrolled by the Li Illuminati family, as well as other powerful Chinesefamilies.) Doctors are licensed in Hong Kong according to British standards andbone-setters have not received much recognition from the British government. Butsomeone connected with the CIA verbally let out that they have been veryinterested in studying Chinese bone setting.

T’ai Chi, is the philosophy associated in China with the yin-yang. It isincorporated into the name T’ai Chi Chuan (Great Origin Fist) which are thecalisthenics which many chinese practice on a daily basis. The advanced studentlearns 128 movements. Practitioners of the exercises can be seen exercising atdusk, especially in Kuala Lumpur. “Instruction in Chinese medicine isconsidered a normal part of the training to become a T’ai Chi instructor, andmany instructors are said to be skilled in bone setting and the treatment ofsprains and strains.

One of the most famous T’ai Chi instructors in KualaLumpur, an elderly man who received his training in China many years ago, isindeed famous locally as a bone-setter. It is clear that it is difficult to drawa line between T’ai Chi Chuan and preventive or even curative medicine.”(Medicine In Chinese Cultures…, p.310 Bruce Lee, who came from a very wealthybranch of the Li family, was half Chinese and half American by blood. He grew upin Hong Kong, and was taught Chinese martial arts beginning at the age of 14.Bruce Lee came to America, and was very American in his thinking. Due to hisAmerican thinking, he thought radically different from the traditional Chinesemartial arts mentality, and there is strong evidence to suggest it cost him hislife. He not only exposed to the western world secrets of Chinese martial arts,but he mixed various types of moves from the various oriental schools of martialarts. For doing this, he made many of the Zen martial arts mastersfurious.

When Bruce Lee died at 32 in 1972, his body was like a teenager’sand it was in great shape. Bruce Lee had no equal in the martial arts. TheChinese/Hong Kong press felt that he was killed by the Zen martial arts mastersof China. In fact, his student Abdul described Bruce Lee as a “renegadeTaoist Priest.” Whether or not Bruce and his son Brandon were killed by theTriads and/or the Secret Martial Arts Societies of China, doesn’t change thefact that Bruce Lee angered them for exposing their martial arts to the westernworld.

From research in this area, it is clear that there are still secrets keptby Chinese martial arts which only a few carefully chosen members of secretsocieties know. Bruce Lee did not make it to this inner circle. The inner groupsof the secret societies trade favors. This is a standard method of payoff. Welltrained martial arts cults that know some of the secrets of cranial manipulationcan be asked to assault a human target. What happens if the head injury is notfine-tuned?

Laurence Miller Ph.d. in the article “Unusual Head Injury Syndromes…“ (The Journal of Cognitive Rehabilitation 11-12/’94, p. 13)states, “Memory disorders are virtually universal in head injury andtypically top the list of symptoms reported by patients. The ‘standard’pattern of posttraumatic memory disorder – and indeed, for organic memorydisorders generally – consists of well-preserved old memories, patchy orimpaired memory for events immediately preceding the injury (retrograde amnesia)and following the injury (anterograde amnesia), and subsequent difficultylearning and retaining new information.”

This is exactly opposite of whatthe handlers want. They want the victim to forget the past abuse, but be able toremember a series of new commands for a new operation precisely. Thisunderscores the reason WHY the person doing the assault needs to be skilled.There is no doubt that Chinese martial arts are being used to mug people inorder to alter their thinking. The secret potential of Chinese Martial Arts toalter a person’s skull bones and thinking has been one secret worth killing topreserve. Miller also points out that frontal lobe injuries can weaken thesubject’s hold over reality. Although Miller writes about accidental injuries,his article is extremely well researched about the wide variety of mentalproblems that develop from different injuries. The medical world have named manyof these specific problems such as the Ganser Syndrome, the Capgras Syndrome,& Cotard’s Syndrome. While this kind of research is helpful to establishthat different specific injuries to the head can create specific symptoms, thewritten material is not specific about how to intentionally create a symptom.

The ancient EGYPTIAN CONNECTION

Skull manipulation was used by the ancient Egyptian priesthood, as well astrauma-based mind-control, astral projection, and hypnosis. At least some ofthese secrets got passed on to later secret societies.

THE TIBETAN CONNECTION

One religious black magic group are the Tibetan monks. Their man-god DalaiLama, is coveted as a guest of many of the top Illuminati, Mishpucka, and otheroccult figures around the world. In 1966, the Dalai Lama wrote the book Openingof the Wisdom-Eye, which is typically referred to as the third-eye area which isslated by the NWO to be the initiation site for the mark of the Beast. Manyleading European occultists have gone to Tibet to learn from the black magiciansof Tibet. Hitler imported hundreds of Tibetan monks for his Third Reich. Naziexpeditions were sent to Tibet; and in 1942, Hitler, because of his occult ideasabout Asia & Tibet, was excited to plant a Nazi flag on the highest peak ofthe Caucasian mountains, Mt. Elbrus, at the specific time of 11 a.m.

For thosewho didn’t realize how dark were the secrets of the Tibetan monks, just asmall sampling of books on their black magic secrets include: David-Neels’ Magic & Mystery in Tibet (1958),Bromage’s Tibetan Yoga, Beyer’s The Cult of Tara- -Magic & Ritual inTibet (1978), the Tibetan Book of the Dead (and commentaries about it),Suzuki’s The Zen Doctrine of No Mind (1973), and Thomas’ Out of This Worldto Forbidden Tibet (1954).

Qigong is the Chinese word for the healing artstaught within the secret schools of Martial Arts. Tibetans go to the S.W.National University in China to learn Qigong. Dapang Qigong is a derivative ofQigong where both martial arts and healing are taught together. One of thesecrets of the Tibetan monks, is the physical manipulation of the third eye. T.Lobsang Rampa, a Tibetan from one of the 10 elite families of Tibet, at the ageof seven entered the Chakpori Lamasery, the Temple of Tibetan Medicine, wherethe Tibetan masters taught healing arts including astral projection,clairvoyance and levitation.

Their mystic arts are similar to what theIlluminati believe in and practice. For instance, they learn about the silvercord that connects people. Upper-class boys such as Lobsang received extremelysevere treatment from the time they were born to insure that they were toughenough to survive the harsh Tibetan life. Lobsang described the traumas of earlyboyhood as “brutal”, but then adds on page 18 of his book The ThirdEye, “Under this system weaklings did not survive, but those who did couldsurvive almost anything.” Children were kept awake eighteen hours a day,and worked hard during that time. Even very small babies are kept awake, so thataccording to Tibetan belief “they shall not become demon invested.”

On Lobsang’s eighteenth birthday, the Lama of his monastery opened his third eye.Lobsang records the brutal ceremony in his book The Third Eye (Ballantine Books,1956). Ballantine Books advertises on the cover of this book, “Learn thesecrets of the most controversial power of the new age…The ThirdEye”.” Before this author relates what Lobsang “reveals”about this great secret of new age power, let me interject an informedopinion–this story may be a cover memory to hide what this author has found outis the REAL THIRD EYE manipulation. But first, let’s see what Lobsangdescribes, and then we’ll discuss it.

On the evening of his 18th birthday, Lobsang went to a little room in the monastery. Three lamas of high degrees cameand bound his head tightly with an herbal compress to produce some kind of drugeffect upon him. They came back and removed the herbal compress, and wiped hisforehead clean. Then Lobsang describes, ‘A strong-looking lama sat behind meand took my head between his knees. The second lama opened a box and removed aninstrument made of shining steel. It resembled a bradawi except that instead ofhaving a round shaft this one was U-shaped, and in place of a point there werelittle teeth around the edge of the “U.” For some moments the lamalooked at the instrument, and then passed it through the flame of the lamp tosterilize it.

The Lama…took my hands and said, ‘This is quite painful, Lobsang, and it can only be done while you are fully conscious. It will not takevery long, so try to keep as still as you can.” I could see variousinstruments laid out, and a collection of herbal lotions, and I thought tomyself: “Well, Lobsang, my boy, they will finish you one way or the otherand there is nothing you can do about it–except keep quiet!” The lama withthe instrument looked around to the others, and said, “All ready? Let usstart now, the sun has just set.”

He pressed the instrument to the centreof my forehead and rotated the handle. For a moment there was a sensation as ifsomeone was pricking me with thorns. To me it seemed that time stood still.There was no particular pain as it penetrated the skin and flesh, but there wasa little jolt as the end hit the bone. The pain was not sharp at all, just apressure and a dull ache. I did not move with the Lama Mingyar Dondup lookingon; I would rather have died than make a move or outcry. He had faith in me, asI in him, and I knew that what he did or said was right. He was watching mostclosely, with a little pucker of muscles in tension at the corners of his mouth.Suddenly there was a little scrunch and the instrument penetrated the bone.Instantly its motion was arrested by the very alert operator. He held the handleof the instrument firmly while the Lama …passed him a very hard, very cleansliver of wood which had been treated by tire and herbs to make it as hard as steel. This sliver wasinserted in the “U’ of the instrument and slid down so that it justentered the hole in my head. The lama operating moved slightly to one side sothat the Lama Mingyar Dondup could also stand in front of me. Then, at a nodfrom the latter, the operator, with infinite caution, slid the sliver fartherand farther. Suddenly I felt a stinging, tickling sensation apparently in thebridge of my nose. It subsided, and I became apparently aware of subtle scentswhich I could not identify. That, too, passed away and was replaced by a feelingas if I was pushing, or being pushed, against a resilient veil.

Suddenly therewas a blinding flash, and at that instant the Lama Mingyar Dondup said”Stop!”. For a moment the pain was intense, like a searing whiteflame. It diminished, died and was replaced by spirals of colour, and globulesof incandescent smoke. The metal instrument was carefully removed. The sliver ofwood remained, it would stay in place for two or three weeks and until it wasremoved I would have to stay in this little room almost in darkness. No onewould see me except these three lamas, who would continue my instruction day byday. Until the sliver was removed I would have only the barest necessities toeat and drink.” As the projecting sliver was being bound in place so thatit could not move, the Lama Mingyar Dondup turned to me and said, “You arenow one of us, Lobsang. For the rest of your life you will see people as theyare and not as they pretend to be.”

ANOTHER EXAMPLE

Bill Schnoebelen, who has publicly been exposing Satanism, writes about hisexperiences as a vampire and Satanist in several books. In his book, LuciferDethroned, he describes a third eye experience that he had during an”astral projection.” “It seemed my eyeballs were turning tomolten steel. My forehead was about to explode. I felt a claw tear into my brow,right between but slightly above my eyebrows and insert itself into my brainlike a white-hot poker. I tried to scream, but could not. My entire body feltlike it was going to burst from being filled with roaring, flaming hotlight….I felt like a fish on the end of a hook being hauled out of the waterby my very brain. I screamed in pain, but it came out: ‘Glory and Love forLucifer! Hatred! Hatred! Hatred! to God be accursed!…’

In order to interprethis third eye experience, it needs to be asked where is Bill Schnoebolen comingfrom? This author’s best evidence to answer that comes from personaltestimony. People familiar with this author (Fritz) have contacted Schnoebolenabout Fritz for years. Why has Bill Schnoebelen taken a very cold attitude tothis chapter’s author (Fritz) and his work? Why has he opposed and slanderedthis author, and this author’s work like the Vol. 2 book, and otherinformation that this author has been putting out to expose Illuminatimind-control since 1991. One would expect a genuine ex-Satanist to be supportiveof someone who risks his life to rescue Satanists from bondage. The reason Iintroduce personal testimony is that I know what side of things I am on, whichis God’s side, and when people like Bill Schnoebolen oppose me from theget-go, without even meeting me, it is solid evidence to me where they arecoming from. From what Schnoebolen writes about his third eye experience, andfrom what this author has learned of third eye cranial manipulation, it appearsthat Bill is still under some cult deception and is very likely still under themind-control that placed his cover memory of his third-eye experience into him.

It is very likely that both Lobsang and Bill were in a trance state induced bydrugs, hypnosis and dissociation from pain, and that a screen memory was laid inon top of their sensory experience to hide the manipulation of certain midlinebones such as the ethmoid, vomer, sphenoid, etc. The sensation produced by the”third eye” cranial manipulation is unforgettable, it feels likesomething is moving straight into your skull through the frontal bone of theforehead, and then penetrating deeply into the center of the head. In order topreserve their cranial secrets, the occult world has cleverly fabricated thesekind of dramatic cover stories. What they are doing is improving the alignmentof the ethmoid bone, which makes a person more sensitive to the environment,which will be perceived by some as improving one’s psychic abilities. (As afinal note, when this author met with Bill, Bill’s view towards helping MPDwas that it was demons that needed to be delivered. One of his supposeddeliverance success stories, an Illuminati victim of mind-control, is still amultiple and still a double agent, and also actively working against thisauthor’s work. Bill personally told this author, that while he was a Satanist& vampire he was offered to have a mind-controlled slave, but that he turnedthe opportunity down. Bill is not the only person publicly exposing the occult/NWOwho has over the years tried to prevent this author’s information from gettingto you.)

The third eye area, called the ethmoid, is physically manipulated bythe monks for mind-control purposes. In the occult world, the third eye areaactually extends to include the entire midline area, not just the ethmoid, butalso the midline bones, and the related brain structures, especially the pinealgland. Midline bones are interesting to occultists, because the main endocrineand neurologic structures in the brain are placed around the central 3rd and 4thventricular areas. (The first two ventricles, known as the lateral ventricles, repose on either side of thethird.) The bones are one way to access these midline structures. the ethmoid isthe front-most midline bone (behind the frontal, which is considered to be twobones; since in many people the metopic suture does not close). The ethmoidinterfaces with other midline bones.

In the course of this book, the reader isintroduced to the concept that the human brain is actually 7 brains. The 4th ormid brain that lies between the upper 3 brains and the lower three and functionsas a crossroads, joins with the optic thalamus, which forms the floor of the 3rdventricle. The ceiling of the 4th brain is the floor of the 3rd ventricle. The3rd ventricle and the Cave of Brahma make up the 5th brain. The 5th brain isconnected to the cerebral hemispheres of the Cerebrum and is critical tocreating concepts and storing abstract concepts. It feeds on ideas, andreflects. (Marijuana activates this brain, and it is common knowledge amongmind-control handlers that marijuana is forbidden to slaves.)

The roof the 5thbrain is formed by the choroid plexus. At the front is the pituitary and at therear the pineal gland, both exceptionally important to perception. The peptides(called enkephalins) that trigger intuitive awareness of what the 6th brain isperceiving, come from the pituitary into the Cave of Brahma. Can the reader nowsee why cranial manipulation that influences this area will affect our intuitiveawareness?

Cranial Osteopath Ronald R. McCatty’s book Craniosacral Osteopathydiscusses the pineal body and pituitary gland from pp. 78 to 86. A discussion ofthe techniques to influence these bodies is beyond the scope of this chapter,but there are procedures. McCatty is very skilled, but he still has a ways to goto match the skills of the inner group that does mind-control. His page 25 alsodiscusses a direct adjustment on the Pineal body via arm rotations andbreathing. The occult world’s physical manipulation of this third eye area canenhance a person’s sensitivity. (It works off of straightforward body/brainmechanics, not the spirit world). It makes the subject feel that he is moretelepathic. This is one of their big secrets. This secret was passed on theGurdjieff, who went to Tibet to learn their secrets. Gurdjieffs communities,which this author has been investigating have a very good appearance to them,but there are lots of dark secrets within these communities, which indicate thatdrug use and mind-control are going on amongst them.

One of the mind-controltechniques used is physical manipulation of the third-eye area of the skull. Infact, a number of cranial osteopaths (such as Cranial Osteopath and RosicrucianRobert Fulford) have thanked Gurdjieff for enlightening them about how to docranial manipulation. Some of what the occult says about the third eye is simplycover stories to hide some of the bigger secrets. It is not known to this authorif Fulford can do a third eye manipulation. (In this exposure of cranialmanipulation, R.C. Fulford is of interest to us due to his impact upon thecourse Cranial Osteopathy took, rather than his skill. W.G. Sutherland, theleader in Cranial Osteopathy had several Rosicrucians and other occultists asearly students. After his death, three of these took Cranial Osteopathy in amore occult direction than Sutherland was going. Anne Wales, as Sutherland’seditor & compiler, the person who took over his papers, also reviewed thepapers of other cranial doctors, making sure she gave them all as much of amystical twist as she could add to them. Olive Stretch was the second of thethree and she and her husband ran the Cranial Academy from their living room.Upon Olive’s death, her husband married Fulford’s secretary of sixteenyears, who in turn continued to run things when he died. Fulford, who is now inhis ’90s, did occult philosophizing, and some believe programming, butdidn’t develop the skill needed for entrance into the inner core of high levelcranial knowledge.)

Rosicrucian Cranial Osteopath Robert Fulford also met Tibetans to learn whathe could from the Tibetans. He became the President of the Osteopathy CranialAssociation. He gives interesting talks, and writes about the Odic Force and theVril (the light that the Nazis believed in), but it is not clear that Fulford,who is retired in Ohio, learned any deep secrets of manipulation.

However, Gurdjieff is not the only one who learned from the Orient. Cranial OsteopathRonald Kurylowicz, of 754 Washington Blvd, Marina Del Rey, CA who is single andlives with his mother who serves as his secretary, made a special effort tolearn what he could from the Chinese over a period of years, with what appearsas a clear intent to use it for mind-control and malevolent purposes. Thecranial group has long had an international effort to teach and proselytizeworldwide. Much of this seems to be a sincere effort to spread the benefits ofcranial knowledge allowed to the public. (This knowledge is often released onlyfor substantial fees.)

When the inner core of cranial manipulation has travelledto learn from other cultures, China has been the primary focus. While in China,the inner core of cranial manipulation, who use it for mind-control, have metwith their Chinese counterparts to negotiate occult relationships. Top levelTheosophists have accompanied the inner core on their trips to China. In 1950,Gurdjieff came out with Beelzebub’s Tales to His Grandson Vol. 1-3. IDHHB Inc.published in 1978 some of the secret talks that Gurdjieff had with a specialgroup of disciples. The point is simply that Gurdjieff was willing to go to theoccult world of black magicians to get some of his enlightenment, and one of thetechniques he learned was the manipulation of the mind via physical manipulationof the “third eye area”. One of Gurdjieff’s big disciples in NewEngland passed on to the cranial osteopaths manipulation secrets that Gurdjiefflearned in Tibet. Gurdjieff is even more mysterious, when one realizes that hean asset of Russian and British intelligence.

This raises the obvious question,what were the Nazi’s able to learn about skull manipulation from the Tibetans,the Japanese secret societies, and European occultism? It is known that theNazi’s carried out experimentation on skull manipulation. (Some of the recordspertaining to Nazi human experiments are stored in the U.S. National Archives,incl. National Archives Record Group 238, the Collection of W.W.II War CrimesRecords, the OSS’s reports in Record Group 226, the Dept. of State records inNational Archives Record Group 59, and Group 242. But it must be borne in mindthat much of the records of Nazi experiments were confiscated and remainedsecret so that our government could continue the research. We see only glimpsesof this research in such things as the SS skeleton collection, written about inSS letters used as Nuernberg Trial Doc. No.s 87, 88, 91. Prof. Hirt at theStrassburg Anatomical Institute received 150 Jewish skeletons for researchaccording to a secret SS document, marked Exhibit no. 086. One thing is clear,there was no limitation for Nazi researchers as to what they could experiment onwith human beings. Could the idea/chance to research in skull manipulation forpurposes of mind-control have escaped those Nazi researchers who were steeped inphrenology and horse breeding?)

What did the Nazi’s learn, and what did theirmind-control experts such as Joseph Mengele pass on to American mind-controlprogrammers, or is it possible the subtleties of cranial bone manipulationsomehow escaped them? The practice of bone-setting in Germany had been known as Knochenartz, Knocheneinrichter, and Wundart. In recent history, Germany has alarge number of cranial osteopaths who purchase lots of American books on thecranial osteopathy. It’s this author’s opinion, that the total mind-controlof NWO slaves being implemented in the Black Forest castles, Strasburg,Frankfurt, Berlin, and hundreds of other German sites includes cranial manipulation.However, in terms of Germany, this remains to be proven. In America, there is nodoubt, for we have the victims (and photographic proof) to prove it.

Osteopathyis not “politically correct” within Germany’s medical establishment.Most Germans, who purchase cranial books, are occultists (usually variations onTheosophy) and not people with medical or manipulative training. Europeans tendto be much more specialists in their professions than Americans. They don’ttend to have as many people/per population practice a particular skill asAmerica, but the ones who do are often very skilled. (This is an observationthis author has heard frequently during his world-wide travels, and has alsoobserved for himself.) For instance, in visiting Switzerland, this authorlearned that if a person wants to build a house he will have no option but tobring in specialists for the different tasks, while in America, it’s notunusual for people to attempt building their own. This European approach ofencouraging only very skilled specialists would also apply to cranialmanipulation. We would expect a few very highly technical, skilled skullmanipulators, and many curious entry-level folks.

THE JAPANESE CONNECTION

The ninjitsu people (popularly known as “the ninja” in America)were historically black magicians who hired out as assassins, and were fearedand hated by all the Japanese people. They are now being held out as role modelsfor our American children. The ninja learned how to dissociate pain. Theylearned martial arts and the art of stealth. According to the book The KarateDojo by Peter Urban, “They were the original practitioners of the ‘art of[mind-control] programming.’ They were taught from the cradle that nothing wasimpossible. Not knowing that a thing could not be done, they proceeded to doit.” It is possible that the Green Dragon Society of Japan passed on someof this mind-control training techniques to the German secret societies thatwere in cooperation with them prior to and during W.W. II. In other words, Dr.Mengele, the Nazi Angel of Death who carried out mind-control experiments forthe Nazi’s (& the Illuminati) during W.W. II may have attempted toincorporate Chinese, Tibetan, Japanese, Ancient Egyptian and Hindu mind-controltechniques into their mind-control programming/research.

THE EARLY EUROPEAN OCCULT CONNECTION

Information pertaining to this has been floating around Europe in certaincircles for years. We will touch on some of the various times and places that weknow parts of cranial manipulation to alter the mind was being done. Over thecenturies skilled horsemen learned that they could tell the temperament of ahorse from the shape of its head. The best books on horse training would havesections on determining what your horse’s temperament was based on skullshape.

The Celts were big on bone-setting. Wales has continued to preserve someof this Celtic enthusiasm. A rare book The Art of The Bone-Setter by GeorgeMatthews Bennett (London, Tho Murby publ., 1884) gives an excellent history ofbone-setters in England, Wales and Scotland. It is likely that some of these menunderstood some things about how personality could be affected via bonemanipulation in the skull.

George Matthews Bennett was a Freemason and a Druid.He was also a leading bone-setter in London, Stratford and other places. He wasa descendent of the famous occult Matthews family, which had practicedbone-setting for two hundred years. His son, who also did bone-setting, was thelast of that line to practice bone-setting. The skill (professional art) ofbone-setting passed down in families for generations was not the equivalent ofmodern osteopathy.

Osteopathy had many different ideas and approaches, even though the two aresimilar. One of the early English books on bone-setting was The CompleatBone-setter by Friar Moulton. In 1665, the book was enlarged by Robert Turner(an occultist/astrologer) and printed in England. In 1871, Dr. Wharton Hoodwrote another publication on bone-setting in England entitled A Treatise on BoneSetting. But most of the skill of bone-setting in England was passed down asfamily secrets within a few bloodlines that practiced it for generations, suchas the Thomases, the Taylors of Lancashire, the Maltby’s of Nottingham, theMasons of Lincolnshire, the Huttons of Westmorland (& later of London), theCrowthers of Yorkshire, and the Matthews of the Midlands. (This list occurs inthe book Medical Fringe & Medical Orthodoxy 1750-1850 edited by Bynum andPorter, pub. London: Croom Helm Ltd., 1987, p. 170, note 10.) Much aboutbone-setting in Europe, will remain secret, because so much was taught orallyand shrouded in mystery. About a dozen British bloodlines passed their tradesecrets down, a number of them were Welch. However, there were also manyitinerant quacks who travelled around billing themselves as bone-setters.

NINETEENTH CENTURY OCCULT CONNECTION

Bone-setter Richard Hutton gained notoriety in London in the 1800’s when herelieved the long-standing suffering of the Hon. Spencer Ponsonby. Hugh OwenThomas, (1848-?) who was a qualified doctor, used what he knew from coming froma long traditional line of bone-setters to create modern fracture theory. Hisnephew, Sir Robert Jones (1857-1933) who was his apprentice, was the majorambassador for modern orthopaedic medical practices. In other words, some of theknowledge of the bone-setters contributed to modern established medicalknowledge.

Charles Waterton, an English naturalist in old England, wrote in hisWanderings and Essays on Natural History that every nation in Europe hadbone-setters, who were independent of the surgeons. Throughout Europe, the menand women who practiced bone-setting learned the skill from others and as aresult of experience. The skill was not a text-book-learned skill, but an artthat was taught via hands-on training. Many of the bone-setters never formallystudied anatomy, pathology, or surgery. (See The Art of the Bone-Setter, p. 96.)Hand-in-hand with bone setting came ideas on the importance of the shape of theskull. In 1695, Balthazar Bekkar of London wrote, “Physiognomy, thatis…the Observation of a Man’s Shape, must be comprehended under this sort[occult arts], for this Art foretells things by the Looks, the Features andLineaments of the Face, by which the Genius and Humour of Men are to bediscovered.” (This comes from book one of a four book series The WorldBewitched; An Examination of the Common Opinions Concerning Spirits. London: R.Baldwin, 1695, vol. 1, p.30.)

THE WITCHCRAFT CONNECTION

Throughout the world, people have practiced bone manipulation. The names forfolk bone-setting throughout the world of course vary from language to language.In Tahiti it was called “romy” or “rumi”. In South America,it was called “abrazo del ranchero”. In Bohemia it was called “napravit.”In Mexico, it’s been called “arreglador de huesos”, and in France”reboutage.” The Amish call it “Brauche”, and some of theirbone-setters practice folk witchcraft. (This is known from the author’s ownexperience as an Amishman.) Bone-setting has often been associated with folkhealing and the occult.

Contrary to what is politically correct today,witchcraft was not a group of poor innocent women chased by a maliciousChristian society, but was a well-organized body which was a repository for theoccult knowledge of Babylon, Egypt and Rome. Ex-Illuminati members have described (to this author) the ancient manuscripts ofknowledge preserved in secrecy by the Illuminati down through the ages. Thepermission of the Grand Druid Council is needed for some Illuminati books.Illuminati members are only allowed to see certain manuscripts, if they areachieving a mastery in that field of secret knowledge.

In the middle ages,knowledge was dispensed through secret trade guilds, fraternities andbloodlines. The ancient healing/and harming secrets of the human body weresecrets of the fraternal secret societies, i.e. what is known today as theIlluminati. Witches could accomplish either a healing or a harmful manipulationof the body without anyone knowing what had happened, because their arts weresecret techniques that outsiders couldn’t recognize.

Secret medical andpsychological knowledge was hidden by lots of cover mystical claptrap, whichmade the real secrets elusive to outsiders. Witches were accused of witchcraftwhen the harmful results of what they did were noticed, but the people hadlittle idea of the mechanics of what hit them. Some of the trials of witchesduring the late middle ages were legitimate grievances, even though the ancienttrial records (by today’s standards) contain no legitimate evidence of modusoperandi. We are not in a position to judge their trials by our standards ofevidence.

Throughout most history, the doctor-priest or the medicine man-shamankept his health secrets to himself as occult/arcane /esoteric knowledge to passto his chosen successors. Even today, our modern day equivalents for themedicine man & shaman –our doctors & priests are still popular careersfor transgenerational pagans. And as this chapter is pointing out, there arestill secrets.

The Mystery Religions of Europe studied the human head and body.One of Jacob Boehme’s disciples portrayed the Hindu chakra points back in 1736in his Theosophia Practica. The results of tortures during ancient and medievaltimes upon the bodies & skulls of people was also known to a few. Arelationship appears to exist between bone-setting and witchcraft, in thatwherever witchcraft was strongest in England, one also discovers an abundance ofbonesetters. An advance knowledge of anatomy was needed to devise the torturesused in Europe by those who were in power. It was not uncommon historically fordoctors & bonesetters to provide advice for torture devices. For instance,Dr. Guillotin, a French doctor & Freemason, invented the guillotine.

Thereare plenty of evidences of occult involvement in the torture of people over thecenturies, (even though it is politically correct to blame it on Christians). Atthis point it is safe to say that there was some overlap between bone-setting,witchcraft, and those who made an occupation as torturers for the state, but thecomplete details are not available. Some families have traditionally beeninvolved in torture, perhaps at some point those family secrets will surface.Hands of Glory of hanged men were used as health charms. Corpses & moss fromskulls, were also thought to have healing powers.

Freemason/Druid/ Bone-setterGeorge Matthews Bennett writes, “In the North of England, the origin ofnearly all the men who are fairly good at Bone-setting can be traced to theWhitworth surgery, and while, so far as I know, the Taylors, in their varioussettlements at Whitworth, Todmorden, Stockwood, and Oldfield-lane, were the onlyqualified surgeons who practiced Bone-setting; amongst the hills and dales ofLancashire, Yorkshire, and the Lake district, there were many who did so withoutbeing qualified.” (The Art of the Bone-setter, p. 106) Whether theseTaylors were any relation to those Taylors today within the Illuminati, is notknown.

Phrenology was very respected during the 19th century. Queen Victoriaconsulted the top phrenologist. Interest in Phrenology led Europeans to researchwhat the functions of the brain are, & how the brain functions.Phrenologists Johann Gaspar Spurzheim and Scotsman George Combe “realizedthe potentiality to manipulate and control human behaviour” via theirknowledge of the skull and brain. (Cooter, Cultural Meaning of Popular Science,p. 6) The writings of these men resulted in phrenological societies andpublications springing up all over the U.S. and Great Britain.

Franz JosephGall, was an expert on the anatomy of the brain, having spent his life studyingit. Encyclopedia Britannica says F.J. Gall was a “brain anatomist ofconsiderable ability”. (Ency. Brit., 15th ed., vol.26, p. 327) In 1800,Franz Joseph Gall, advocated to medical science that the shape of the skull wasa guide to an individual’s mental faculties and character traits. Based uponthis, other researchers such as Pierre Flourens undertook experiments on animalsto determine more exactly the functions of the various parts of the brain.Various men contributed ideas.

Leopold Auenbrugger discovered percussion todetermine a fluid level. He applied his discovery of tapping his father’scasks to gauge the level of fluid content to the body.

Fire In The Minds of Men,by James H. Billington a leading historian, is an excellent survey of how theFrench Revolution and subsequent revolutions were created by a small group ofleading occultists. Utopian socialists, who embraced the occult ideal of a”revolving back to the Golden Age” helped promote the idea ofphrenology at the important Paris Athenee, where debates were organizedconcerning the psychology of personality, physiognomy, and phrenology. (Forthose readers who haven’t kept up with other written works of this author, theIlluminati when America was discovered believed that they historically had camefrom Atlantis, and that a new Atlantis could be constructed in the new world.The revolution of the United States was the first war in history called a”revolution”, and it was called a revolution because it and subsequentrevolutions were to revolve us back to the Golden Age of Atlantis. They namedthe ocean to reach their new Atlantis, the Atlantic Ocean.)

Charleston, S.C. wasa major hub for the Scottish Rite and for Reformed Judaism, both which wereinterlocked and used the Cabala. The main goal of the Cabala is to create amind-controlled slave called a golem. The main principle behind Freemasonryaccording to Albert Pike, who was the Supreme Commander of Freemasonry inCharleston, S.C. has been the cabala. This makes it easier to understand whyFreemasonry has been involved in the creation of mind-controlled slaves.

It alsomakes it more understandable why hypnotism (called mesmerism) along withphrenology was introduced into Charleston, SC about 1830. After the occult worldintroduced phrenology coupled with hypnotism to Charleston, it was alsointroduced by the Frenchman Charles Poyen to Rhode Is. Brown University. Theentire faculty was so astonished at the power of hypnotism, that they concludedthat mesmerism was a more important science than phrenology.

Initially, theelite in Charleston were interested in hypnotism (called mesmerism) combinedwith phrenology. The craze spread to the common people, and hypnotism was thesubject of a famous intellectual debate in Charleston in 1843. Phrenology, whichwas a science tied to Rosicrucianism, lost favor in the south, due to the largeparticipation of phrenologists (Rosicrucians) in the abolition movement. TheAbolitionist movement was created in the U.S. by the Illuminati via theRosicrucian groups, as well as Unitarians and Socialists who were also tied tothem. For instance, Rosicrucian/ Phrenologist William Lloyd Garrison started theAnti-slavery Society in 1832. Three other notable Rosicrucian abolitionists areJohn Brown, George Lippard, and Abraham Lincoln. John Brown, besides being aRosicrucian, revolutionist and abolitionist, was a practicing phrenologist. Hehad been trained by Fowler and Wells, who promoted the Vegetarian City that A.Still visited.

Many of the Illuminati and leading European occultists, incl. men such asCharles Taze Russell (founder of the WT Society) and Joseph Smith, Jr. (founderof the LDS Mormon church) were students of phrenology. Interestingly, JosephSmith, Jr. on Jan. 5, 1841 had a revelation that phrenology was an occultscience from “the Devil”. (Smith’s words are recorded in The Wordsof Joseph Smith: The Contemporary Accounts of the Nauvoo discourses of theProphet Joseph. Provo, UT: Brigham Young Univ. Religious Studies Center, 1980,p. 61.) And yet he continued studying phrenology, and endorsing phrenology tothe “Latter-day Saints” (Mormons).

Quite a number of the Mormonprophets (the top leader) such as Brigham Young, Wilford Woodruff, and George A.Smith got phrenological readings done of their skulls. The Mormon church soldphrenology books and even printed a phrenology magazine in Salt Lake City for awhile, which was entitled The Character Builder from the 1870’s until into the1940’s. George Reynolds, First Presidency secretary and later President of theLDS Seventies (a group of men like the catholic cardinals) consideredphrenological readings as valid as the patriarchal blessings that the LDS churchgives to its members.

Since the Mormon church is one of the Illuminati frontscarrying out mind-control, it should come as no surprise that attempts tocontrol the human mind by manipulation of the shape of the skull have beenattempted. Interestingly, official church interest in phrenology by the Mormonhierarchy died out during the time period (1940’s) that mind-control began tobe scientifically carried out by the Illuminati in cooperation with differentgovernment front. Could it be that there was a grain of powerful truth inphrenology that these people wanted quietly buried?

Swendenborg, the founder ofa mystical Masonic Rite, spent a great deal of time and some of his writingdiscussing the skull bones. This author has encountered victims of trauma-basedtotal mind-control within the modern Swendenborg Church of New Jerusalem. Occultstudents of Swendenborg, including some of the Illuminati, such as some in theDuPont family, studied his ideas with fervour. (The DuPonts appear to beconnected to at least one cranial osteopath.) (Because the Church of NewJerusalem does not tell the public nor its members about Swedenborg being aFreemason, etc. it would be advantageous to briefly identify to the reader whohe was. Swedenborg wrote, “I live, besides, on terms of familiarity andfriendship with all the bishops of my country, who are ten in number; as alsowith the sixteen senators, and the rest of nobility. The king and queen also,and the three princes, their sons, show me much favor.” Swedenborg, born toa well-connected elite Swedish family, was a genius who wrote an incredibleamount of spiritual writings that he believed came from alien encounters. His”alien” material in his Earths in the Universe is blatantly baloney,but at that time, people had no concept of what they’d find in outer space.The “aliens” even gave him the wrong number of planets in our solarsystem, 9. Swedenborg wrote that Saturn is “the farthest [planet] from thesun”. He was certain of this and other ideas because of what the aliens hadtold him.

He also communicated with spirits. Masonic encyclopedias state thatmany of his ideas were Masonic. In Masonry Defined (publ. by National MasonicPress, a book based on 33º Freemason / Masonic historian Mackey’s notes),their article on Emanuel Swedenborg states, “enlightened Masons will findmany Masonic ideas in Swedenborg’s writings.” In the Be Wise As Serpentsbook, this author documents the interlocking directorates that control the toplevel secret societies. The Masonic Rite of Swedenborg with its 8 degrees andtwo “temples”-which means “sub-rites”- has had some of theworst Satanists as its leadership.)

In spite of the ridicule of the variousideas about determining personality from the shape of the body and head, Ency. Brit. 15th ed. Vol. 25, p. 497 admits,”Nevertheless, structural differences in the body do seem to have somesignificance in pointing to such aspects of personality as intelligence andemotion.” The 18th and 19th century researchers were onto something, theydidn’t manage to finish the job. The Nazi government, and other governmentshave secretly tried to finish that job. Unfortunately, it may be a long timebefore we learn exactly how they finished this line of research. So far, theonly recipients of the 20th century research findings have been a few selectpeople within the occult world.

An interesting story involving personalitychange due to changes in the skull and brain was the landmark patient PhineasGage, who died in 1861, after an accident caused him to damage the brain’sability to make rational decisions and to process emotions. Recently, newresearch was performed on Phineas Gage’s skull to understand better how hisbrain had been affected by an accident. (See Science, May 20, 1994, p. 1102)

Another example of how the shape of the skull and the movement of skull bonesdetermines how the brain functions are the craniectomies that are now beingcarried out to relieve infants from mental imbecility due to premature skullsutural closure and microcephalus. (See The Journal of the American MedicalAssociation JAMA, Jan. 8, 1992, p. 226.) Further, researchers into how the braincreates thoughts, who desire to remain confidential, have come to believe thatthe ionic crystalline structure within the cranium’s 5 cranial bone plates:the occipital bone, the two Parietal bones and the two frontal skull bones whichconnect at fontanellas (fissures) called sutures play an important role in thecreation of thoughts. They believe that the ionic crystalline structures of theskull bones interact with incoming theta waves from the brain, and a resonanceis created that causes electrons to be generated, which are then translated viaa Fourier-type translation into a thought.

You are probably aware that it is thegrey matter that lies next to the skull that carries out the higher levelthinking that distinguishes humans from animals. These researchers have statedthat they believe that the fontanellas (connections between the skull plates)allow subtle lateral motions and non-linear complex vibrations to occur. Thesevibrations are part of the higher thinking process. If this is true, it couldhave far ranging ramifications.

These researchers believe the natural resonant vibrational frequency of the skull bones (the cranium) ranges from 840 to 890MHz in non-herzian waves. This range was reserved for VHF television, but hasnow been reserved for the national cellular telephone network. When the 840 to890 range was used for television, various neurologists noted that certainsignals related to particular pitches and sounds would trigger reactions inpeople. For instance, the NY Times 7/11/91 reported that according to aneurologist an epileptic seizure was triggered via certain television signals.Cellular phones are now being used to transmit faxes, computer information suchas modems transmit, and other signals. Illuminati connected companies of IBM,Motorola, and GE are some of the companies working with cellular phonetechnology. The creation of vibrations via cellular phone signals in the 840 to890 MHz non-herzian wave range could conceivably implant thoughts into a victimnear the cellular phone. This raises two questions. First, IS theestablishment’s big push to popularize cellular phone use, even to the pointof giving out free cellular phones, part of Big Brother’s mind-control?Second, since it appears the brains ability to creatively think is related tothe vibrations that are subtly made in the skull, the question naturally posesitself–can cranial osteopathy disrupt or alter the natural abilities of thecranium’s plates to vibrate?

THE MODERN AMERICAN OCCULT CONNECTION

In the United States, as in England, there were certain families who passedtheir bone-setting skills down as family trade secrets. The most famousbone-setting families were the Reece family (in west. Penn., and east. Ohio),the Sweet family (in Rhode Is., Mass., Conn., & NY), and the Tieszen andOrton families in South Dakota. The Sweets became orthopedists, the Tieszen andOrton families went into Chiropractic. The Irish Quain family were famousanatomists, surgeons, and physicians.

Osteopathy and chiropractic stemmed fromthe same occult philosophical roots, but went in different directions. Bothshared the idea that the body has the ability to maintain good health if allowedto do so, and both emphasized the manipulation of bones and joints. Both werestarted about the same time period in America in about the same geographic area,by men who had Scottish ancestry.

A.T. Still (the founder of osteopathy) and D.D.Palmer both studied magic and metaphysics. Both attended many of the samespiritist meetings, for instance both attended the spiritualist meetings atClinton, Iowa on a number of occasions. (Gibbons, 1980, p. 13)

The osteopath’sgoal was to move bones to improve circulation. The chiropractor’s primary goalwas to move bones to reduce pressure or the irritation of nerves, with thefurther goal of positively helping organs and tissue. A.T. Still & otherosteopaths claimed Daniel D. Palmer visited Still at his house, but Palmer’sdescendants say it’s not true.

Early on Still’s two best assistants were twodoctors from Scotland, William Smith & James Littlejohn. Daniel David Palmer(1845-1913), founder of chiropractic, was a Freemason & an occultist. Hisoriginal practice was to heal people with what he called “magnetichealing” which was a combination of laying on of hands, hypnotism and whitemagic. Of course it was not called white magic, it was called “magnetichealing” by Palmer.

Part of the magnetism was his own magnetic (hypnotic)personality. Palmer also knew phrenology and had a keen sense of touchconcerning a person’s head. D.D. Palmer taught phrenology. D.D. Palmer was amixture of good and bad traits. He was an excellent scholar and had goodorganizational skills for what he learned. One of his difficult traits was hismegalomania. In 1905, at a coroner’s inquiry, Palmer refused to take an oathto swear the truth “so help me God”, because he said that “Idon’t want any help from God.” It must have been hard on his pride, whenhis own son B.J. Palmer, who had been cruelly raised by cruel step-mothers,turned Judas and stole from his father both the honor & money that was duehis father.

His son Bartlett Joshua Palmer (1882-1961) worked in a circus as anassistant to professional circus hypnotists known as Professor Hunt, and laterProfessor Herbert L. Flint. Later, with mysterious connections to the rightpeople, B.J. Palmer, got the money and the political clout to get started inbuilding a school for chiropractic. His powerful Davenport radio station, WOC,said to be the second largest in the U.S., had Ronald Reagan (our futurepresident) as one of its sports announcers.

B.J. Palmer was connected to theoccult world. He liked to encourage the idea that he was a Christ figure. NewAger Napoleon Hill, author of Think and Grow Rich (1937) considered Palmer hismentor. B.J. had prominent Masons and other elite as his personal guests. ElbertHubbard, a friend of B.J.’s, was the person who persuaded John D.Rockefeller’s personal physician, to get Rockefeller to use chiropractic care.Later in 1963, Nelson Rockefeller would be the important person to getchiropractic accepted as legal in NY, and then appointed chiropractor AlbertCera to his Medical Advisory Committee.

Illuminati kingpin California Gov.Edmund Brown appointed 12 chiropractors to regional committeesassociated with the California Board of Medical Assurance. Hollywood got intothe promotion of chiropractic, with the 1990 film Jacob’s Ladder which was afilm exposing the U.S. military’s use of BZ (a derivative of LSD) in Vietnamto experimentally try to create aggression via drugs in American soldiers.

Itappears that chiropractic occult ties have been beneficial in its fight foracceptance. The occult world has worked hard to keep chiropractic within itsdomain. This is why you will find Christians exposing the occult connections tochiropractic such as T.M. Clement’s book A Warning to Christians About theOrigins of Chiropractic. (Moses Lake:WA, date of printing not known).

As thereader will discover other sciences involving the relationship of the mind,brain, the body and personality have also been kept in the domain of the secretsocieties. Like Palmer, Dr. Andrew Taylor Still, who founded osteopathy, wasinterested in phrenology, hypnotism, spiritism, magic. The reference book 10,000Famous Freemasons (Vol. 4) outlines his Masonic career in Freemasonry. Hiswritings include such Masonic phrases as “Great architect of theUniverse.” His grandfather had been Scotch-Irish. His father was aMethodist Episcopal minister, who was an abolitionist who fought with John Brownand the free-state forces in Kansas.

Andrew Taylor Still ran for the legislatureof Kansas Territory as a free-state candidate and won in the Oct. 1857elections. Later, he married Mary Elvira Turner, who was from the”burned-over” district in New York. She had been exposed toabolitionist ideas, phrenology, and hypnotism (called mesmerism) which were allpopular in the area she grew. Her area of NY was where Spiritism began in 1848.Horace Greeley of the NY Tribune then made these seances with spirits famous. In1867, after his children died, Andrew Taylor Still embraced spiritistism.Still’s beliefs in spiritism included ideas from Freemason Swendenborg’swritings. (For details of Andrew Taylor Still’s life refer to the bookTrowbridge, Carol. Andrew Taylor Still. Kirksville, MO: The Thomas JeffersonPress, 1990.)

A.T. Still built osteopathy on the foundation of teachings of mensuch as phrenologist/hypnotists such as Joseph Rodes Buchanan. Buchanan usedhypnosis and manipulation of the head to radiate the cerebral fluid from thebrain to the body, which was coming close to the basics of cranial osteopathy.How did A.T. Still come up with these new ideas? A.T. Still was able to studyand conduct experiments on bodies by raiding Indian graves for bodies, which hesays in his “Circumstances and Personal Experiences” he did thousandsof experiments on.

Certainly, he was unusual in having had a boyhood interest indigging up skeletons. He also read every book on anatomy he could find. In spiteof his preoccupation with digging up skulls of people, Still seems to have beena decent person. Today, the occult world dislikes him. Why? In view of thehistorical facts, and the historical occult campaign to denigrate who Still was,it appears Still revealed secrets. Still was interested in scientificinvestigation. He proved things as he went along. He was a true researcher, andcontrary to many researchers he was willing to openly share his knowledge withmankind.

Andrew’s two brothers, Ed and James, were M.D.s. They may well havebeen loyal to the occult world, and it is speculated that this may account forpart of their attempts to destroy the work of Andrew Still. It appears that inspite of Andrew’s own occult connections, Andrew Still wanted to give theworld cranial osteopathic knowledge that the occult world deemed to be secrets.

Andrew Still joined Freemasonry in Baldwin, KS’s Palmyra Lodge No. 23. (10,000Famous Freemasons, Vol. 4, p. 194). He came from a transgeneration occultbackground. He did speak and write with the type of terminology that the occultworld uses, although today some of his “occult” writingsonly appear so because they are taken out of context. Recently, the Internethas a website with the “Sage Sayings of Still” with excerpts from a”spiritual diary” he kept. On the other side of the coin, the supposedsage occult sayings of Still were renounced by Still himself after he wrotethem. He not only exposed occult secrets that the bonesetters had kept in theoccult families for centuries, he made a point of tossing occultists out of hisschool.

I believe Andrew Still was one of those people that the generationaloccultists could say, “He grew up and dwellt among us, but he wasn’t oneof us.” No wonder the occult world has had a campaign against him after hedied. After Andrew died, his son Charles an excellent compassionate skillfuldoctor was to have taken over A.T. Still’s Kirksville Osteopathic College.Instead, a rich financial backer, Warren Hamilton, who owned pivotal shares ofstock placed James Still’s grandson into the Osteopathic College’spresident’s chair. The knowledge that Still tried to get to the world was nowstifled. As an example of where things have progressed the Cranial Academy (theAmerican Academy of Osteopathy) is now situated in three buildings inIndianapolis that are identical copies of the Great Pyramid, & use pyramidsfor their logo. (By the way one of Dr. A.T. Still’s great-grandnephews isWilliam Still who wrote the book New World Order. William Still is descendedfrom the doctor’s brother Thomas, who was an M.D. William’s father was aU.S. general who was part of World Order, and although William’s book wasgreat, when one considers how the NWO order creates their own opposition and howdouble-agents are created, this author has some personal reservations on what ishappening with William. For those who haven’t obtained a copy of the book,this author recommends it.)

Back to discussing Still’s ideas. Eventually, A.T.Still developed his own ideas for healing the body without using drugs, or thedangerous medical practices of his day. In 1874, Dr. Andrew Taylor Still,devised osteopathy, a medical practice that seeks to help the body viamanipulated of the bones. 16 Osteopathic Schools have successfully sprung up inthe U.S. over the years to serve the need for osteopath doctors. A few othersfailed. A small specialty within the Osteopathic medicine is Cranial Osteopathywhich has the Cranial Academy (formed in 1946), which is a component of theAmerican Academy of Osteopathy. The Cranial Academy is headquartered at 1020Market Tower, Ten West Market St., Indianapolis, IN 46204 in a building thatlooks like 3 Egyptian pyramids.

Osteopathic students who have taken a BasicCranial Course approved by the Academy are eligible to apply to the CranialAcademy to learn about osteopathy as it applies to the skull. Just recently, inJune 20-23, 1996, they had their annual conference at Walt Disney World Village,Lake Buena Vista, FL. Walt Disney World happens to be a major mind-controlprogramming center and the significance of this was brought out in Chapter 5.

The Cranial Academy, founded by occultist Sutherland in 1946, is affiliated withthe Applied Academy of Osteopathy (this AAO is a group that is concerned withmanipulative work, & also based in IN). WG Sutherland developed CranialOsteopathic concepts. It appears that the occult world were upset enough withAndrew Still’s revelations, that they planted WG Sutherland into the newscience to bring the science back into the realm of the occult world. Sutherland(and those that followed him) was not above spewing out disinformation. Anotherleader following Sutherland in the field was another occultist Fulford, whohelped insure that the Theosophists and Rosicrucians took over the science thatA.T. Still had tried to give the world in a scientific form. Fulford, almost agod to some of the doctors interested in cranial osteopathy, functions as abulwark to prevent most doctors from learning the deeper arts of manipulation.

Only a small inner group are taught the most advanced manipulative methods and anatomical details. Thecrucial cranial research work is being done privately by doctors affiliated withthe Rosicrucians and this research is reported only in their literature forRosicrucians only. The American Osteopathy Association helps to keep things lowkey by making no reference to the Cranial Academy in their materials, and onlyreferring to the AAO once.

In 1953, one of the leading Cranial Osteopaths,William G. Sutherland, an American of Scottish descent, formed a foundationcalled the Sutherland Cranial Teaching Foundation in Denver, CO to promote theteaching of Cranial (head or skull) Osteopathy as developed by Sutherland. Thecranial osteopathic work is taught by the Cranial Academy, but the innerknowledge, the inner secrets that are needed to successfully use cranialmanipulation for mind-control are not taught by the Cranial Academy. This istaught privately by doctors who keep their relationships to each other secret.The inner core leaders (the top 3) of this small highly proficient group wereall based in the south, and have all died since 1990. They have been replaced bycarefully recruited handpicked successors.

There are occasion groups in otherplaces that do cranial work. Some research on bioenergy and bone motion was doneat the Univ. of Michigan School of Osteopathy and the Upledger Institute basedin Florida has taught a very mechanical and rudimentary version of cranial work.These are just side activities. The U.S. Air Force and Navy provide scholarshipswhich cover full tuition, books and living expenses for certain applicants to goto osteopathic college for four years. This has been carried out via theDirector, Washington Office, American Osteopathic Association, Cafritz BuildingSuite 1009, 1625 Eye Street, N.W., Washington, DC 20006.

One of the militaryCranial Osteopaths is a Maj. Beverly I. Maliner, and another is David R. Lemmeat the Naples, It. Naval Hospital. There are reports that this hospital alongwith other American military sites in Europe are being used for mind-control.However, that does not necessarily connect Lemme or Maj. Maliner with governmentmind-control. This author knows of no evidence that would connect them. Themilitary has used civilians to carry out some of the mind-control on their basesfor decades, so they wouldn’t have to use their own people if they didn’twant to. The military has conducted secret research into the effects of skullbone movement, and traumatic skull injuries which are still classified.

Oneexample of many of the type of modern research done is Susan Ann Bloomfield’s Ph.d. dissertation “Site-specific changes in bone mass and Alterations inCalciotrophic Hormones with Electrical Stimulation Exercise in Individuals withChronic Spinal Cord Injury.” Her research showed that electricalstimulation of the muscles around spinal injuries helped the bones grow.

Thecasual researcher will soon find out that Cranial Osteopathy is a hiddensubject. One of the better books discussing the potential of Cranial Osteopathyand how it works is a hard-to-get out-of-print book Craniosacral Osteopathy byRonald R. McCatty. As this subject is so important to mind-control, this authoravailed himself to find a copy of the book and to study it. Some of thetechniques described in the book will be hard for regular doctors to verify. Ifthe curious were to use standard medical tests such as X-rays or MRI (which aretoo big), they will not get anywhere in discovering the details of how tomanipulate the skull. The science is much more minute than these tests. An M.D.who asked the Cranial Academy about cranial literature was told that theirliterature is copyrighted to the writers and not available to other professions.This is an example of how protective the Cranial Academy is of their knowledge and they aren’t even teaching the hard coreinner secrets!

The secret cults continue their iron grip over the deep secretsof cranial manipulation. They continue their monopoly over who gets benefitedby cranial work, as well as who is destroyed by cranial work.

In review, anumber of sincere men have tried to develop Cranial Osteopathy including Dr.Andrew Still in 1874. Interestingly, as soon as each one of these men begandiscovering new techniques informed members of the occult world would take overtheir work, and insure that the work was kept within the confines of the occultworld. For instance, Dr. Sutherland’s experiments revealed to him that CranialOsteopathy could influence the way a person thought and their personality. Inthe book, With Thinking Fingers The Story of William Gamer Sutherland by hiswife Adah Strand Sutherland, she writes, “It was Dr. Sutherland’scherished dream that a day would come when the benefits to the mentally illthrough the cranial component in osteopathy would be investigated to thesatisfaction of scientific insistence; that it would be approved and madeavailable institutionally, in the curriculum’s of osteopathic colleges as well asin the majority of private practices.” (Sutherland, Adah S. With ThinkingFingers. The Cranial Academy: Indianapolis, IN., p. 62).

However, clever peoplein the occult world saw that Cranial Osteopathy could not only be used to helpthe mentally ill, but to control the minds of people. They realized that thisvaluable information could not be shared with the world but should confined tothe occult world where its full evil potential could be exploited.

Part of whyit was so easy to hi-jack Sutherland’s research is that he wrote very little.He wrote only two short articles. He didn’t like to write, he liked to doresearch and work with people. Strangely, his wife divorced him, and aRosicrucian lady married him. The details of it all have the feel of the occultworld moving in and micromanaging Sutherland’s life in order to control hisresearch. Two years after Sutherland died in ‘54, his Osteopathy CranialAssociation was already starting to praise a new age type of “Christ”in its literature. Anne L. Wales, a Rosicrucian, archived his work, and it isthrough her that we have received some of his work. She makes sure that whenSutherland’s ideas see the light of day, they are steeped in occultRosicrucian ideas. This helps insure that sincere non-occult scientistsdisregard what appears to be Rosicrucianism, rather than the research of adoctor.

Anne L. Wales has been more than a Rosicrucian. She was a member of theChurch of Scientology, which is practicing trauma-based mind-control and whichis a recruiting organization for the OTO and the Process Church which are alsoboth practicing total mind-control in coordination with the Illuminati. Thisauthor is aware of two separate victims of trauma-based total mind-control whocame out of different Rosicrucian groups. As their are several groups claimingRosicrucian philosophy, this author hasn’t sorted out if there are anyRosicrucian groups which AREN’T being used as repositories for mind-controlledslaves. In other words, it appears that all Rosicrucian groups containmind-controlled slaves.

Rosicrucianism (its various forms) has long attractedmembership from the medical community, and there is evidence that it evenrecruits in the medical, chiropractic and osteopathic schools. The Rosicrucians,who like to track their history back to the alchemists, brag about their largenumbers of medical members. AMORC indicates that at least 11% of its members aredoctors. The Rosicrucians also hint about their secret medical experiments andsecret medical knowledge. One Rosicrucian claim to fame is their mysticaltheories about the connections between the mind and the body (particularly theskull & nervous system).

The luxurious Clymer Health Clinic near Philadelphia offers cranial treatments at very modest prices by theirstaff of Rosicrucian chiropractors. Rosicrucian (& high ranking Mason)Swinbourne Clymer, MD, donated the land and funds for that clinic early thiscentury. Clymer was a millionaire with eccentric health ideas. He financed theentire Rosicrucian Philadelphia-based group, too. His writings have tidbits thatshow he was an insider. Their headquarters has pyramids with capstones. Theirbooks mention the Illuminati with great frequency. It is beyond the scope ofthis chapter, but there are connections between theosophy and Rosicrucianism andthe Illuminati.

Theosophical groups tie in to the Nazi’s religious beliefs,and today theosophical-minded young people are showing an interest in cranialmanipulation. In other words, the interconnections between the occult worldbegin popping up when one investigates cranial work. One outspoken Doctor ofCranial Osteopathy (DO) Donald E. Woods, recently spoke out in the journal ofCranial Osteopathy entitled The Cranial Letter against the occultism thatclearly controlled his specialty. He wrote in protest, “Yet, in the past we[cranial osteopaths] have bordered both on being a cult and on being occult. Wemust be neither to be effectively acceptable in health care, and it can be donesince osteopathy, including Cranial Osteopathy, is based on valid humanphysiological and anatomical truths. Where do cult and occult fitin?”….Occultism says you do not have to pay attention to any of the oldrules. Everything goes. Kick the walls out. Be tolerant of everyone’s behaviour….Both the cult and the occult have the tendency to think that thingsoutside their sphere of influence are unreasonable. They might say, “It isnecessary that you belong to our group.” (The Cranial Letter, Aug., ‘94,Vol. 47, No. 3, p.9)

While this letter printed in The Cranial Letter helpsestablish to the reader the occult world’s influence in cranial osteopathy,the Cranial Academy may have printed this because the doctor in question is amultiple and they are possibly helping him separate himself publicly from theoccult. And while the secrecy of cranial manipulation has been well kept, theCranial Academy is considering disbanding itself, and letting the 16 osteopathicschools teach a more basic form or cranial work, which would further isolate thesecrets for occult’s elect.

Osteopathy itself has been accepted intomainstream medicine and one medical reference book states, “It is importantto note that the osteopathic system of diagnosis and therapy is used inconjunction with the standard medical procedures of drug and surgicaltherapy.” The curriculum at an osteopathic college or school is almostidentical with that offered at the standard schools. The most popular school isthe Chicago College of Osteopathic Medicine. There are approx. 150 osteopathichospitals in the U.S. Most osteopaths are general practitioners and only 20% ofthe osteopaths specialize. Of these only a tiny percentage do Cranial Osteopathyfull time. Of the small clique of DOs (Dr.s of Osteopathy) who do CranialOsteopathy full time (Note: there are about 150 DOs nationwide that spendapprox. 100% of their time doing Cranial Osteopathy–which no. was determined bythis author using info provided in the Member Information Directory of theCranial Academy.), and then based upon observations at programming sites andother criteria there is an inner circle of about 9 doctors who understandCranial Osteopathy well enough to use their skills for the Illuminati in mindcontrol.

Recently, there have been a number of magazine articles, for instance,American Medical News, June 26, 1995, p. 3 which discusses how osteopathicmedical techniques of manipulation are becoming more acceptable to mainstreamphysicians and to the public. The article mentions that the American OsteopathicAssn. is getting $6 million for research. Obviously, the American OsteopathicAssn. is politically correct and moving with the stream of today’s generaltrend toward new age ideas, and a global government.

Many osteopath doctorsspecialize. A Canadian government survey of chiropractors, osteopaths, andnaturopaths in Canada revealed that 66% of the Canadian osteopaths specialized(See Royal Commission on Health Services Study of Chiropractors, Osteopaths andNaturopaths in Canada. Ottawa, Can: The Queen’s Printer, 1966, p. 166), afigure much higher than revealed in a study of American Osteopaths in AStatistical Study of the Osteopathic Profession, Dec. 31, 1960, Dept. ofInformation and Statistics, American Osteopathic Association, May 1961, p. 2Table 7.

In the Canadian study, osteopaths reported specializing in headaches,neurology, cranial work and cranial osteopathy. Their naturopaths reportedspecializing in fields including psycho-therapy, radio wave, electrotherapy, andcranial correction in mongoloids, spastics and body reconstruction. In exploringmind-control, it must be born in mind, that the American CIA was quick torecruit Canadians to help. Some of the cranial osteopaths themselves appear tobe in controlled trance states, so they may well be under total mind-controlthemselves. These people are obviously of Celtic (probably Illuminati)bloodlines.

BONE & SKULL STRUCTURE

Bones are alive and changing. It might be helpful to review what bones aremade of, and how they change and grow, just in case the reader had somemisconceptions such as that bones are fixed solids that don’t change. Boneswithin the human body, esp. the skull give support and protection. Bone iscomprised of “an organic matrix synthesized and deposited by osteoblasticactivity, calcium-phosphate precipitates, and a mineralized phase ofhydroxyapatite, which is primarily composed of calcium and inorganic phosphate (Robey,1989). The primary ingredient of the organic matrix is a collagen in the form offibers that are extensively cross-linked. applies to 90% of the matrix. Thereseveral types of collagen, Type 1 predominant. This are is Numerousnoncollagenous proteins have also been discovered in bone, including some whichhave been identified as growth factors. Bone development and turnover isregulated by various bone cells (see Teltelbaum, 1990)

The exact method thebody uses to recreate new bone is too complex to describe here, but let itsuffice that researchers are studying all the minute complexities of theabilities of the body to produce bone. Old bone is constantly being absorbed andreproduced new. BMUs are important to development of new bone. (see studies likeFrost, 1965, & Parfit, 1987). According to the Wall Street Journal, Feb. 23,1996, p. Al (in both Eastern & Western editions) some physicians areremolding lopsided skulls of infants with unnecessary surgery when the onlyproblem is the child’s sleep position, and the lopsided skull can be correctedwith a head band rather than surgery.

In terms of head shapes, which can becreated by skilled manipulation of the skull bones, a Vertical Strain Superioris associated with passiveness and dissociation. This is why some of the cultsare either manipulating people’s heads or recruiting people that have longfaces in their cults. The vertical Strain Inferior is said to be connected tocriminals. The programmers for the NWO have been intentionally manipulatingpeople’s skull to get passiveness and dissociativeness.

Daniel Whiteside andJohn Wesley Grossman did extremely valuable work in statistically validating theclear connections between 60 behavior traits and physical structures. Thephysical shape of the brain is related to how the brain’s cells areproportioned. This science is called Structure/ Function.

Daniel’s fatherRobert L. Whiteside was one of the founders of 3-In-One. Robert wrotean amazing book Face Language. The Air Force academy used it in three oftheir courses. Prior to encountering Robert’s book, this author has noticedthat the Japanese and Chinese have done a great deal of research and writing inthis area. Our own language has come to reflect some of our intuitive ideasabout Structure/ Function such as: “He is level-headed.” “She isnosey.” “He’s a real high-brow.” and “He leads with hischin.” (cf. Face Language, p. xi-xii)

Whiteside takes 40 pages to identifytraits that are shown by the eyes. Then he explains traits that are shown by themouth area. Then he deals with overall facial traits and finally profile traits.For instance, a large difference between one side of the face and the otherindicates how much the individual changes with their mood change. If the headsteadily gets wider as it runs from the mouth to the ears, then the person hasthe trait of acquisitiveness. A person who loves to be precise with words willdevelop little lines that fan out from the inner corner of the eye toward thecheekbone. The 3-In-1 college doesn’t teach that the face reveals all behavior, but they teach their students what to expect from people, so that theycan communicate better.

Another 3-In-1 publication Advanced ONE BRAIN by GordonStokes and Daniel Whiteside reveals eye modes. NLP has also been teaching someof these eye modes to detect what a person is thinking. Another publicationprovides charts (designed by William Mariboe) which explain different traits andhow they exhibit themselves physically. For instance if the eyes are extremelywide apart, the person will either see an open viewpoint as valuable or feelinadequate. The chart then charts out how the trait (of emotional tolerance)will exhibit itself under different circumstances. For instance, in doing a jobthey tend to loose track of time. Perhaps the value of all this in not clear inthe reader’s mind. In terms of mind-control, if you know what physicalstructures will give you a particular trait, you can enhance what you want byskilful manipulation of the skull bones.

The key to manipulating the skull liesin the fact that the skull bones actually float on the Cerebrospinal fluid,while the brain floats in the fluid. In the booklet The Cranial Bowl by WilliamG. Sutherland (1984), he writes about what he calls “the moulding technic”.The moulding technic is the reshaping of the skull. He writes on page 28,”The moulding technic is especially adaptable to children, and even to theadult well along in the later period of life.” In the booklet, he goes intodetails about the cerebrospinal fluid.

CEREBROSPINAL FLUID

The Cerebrum (brain) and the spine float in a fluid that surrounds them. Thisfluid is called cerebrospinal fluid and is referred to on page 1050 of themassive anatomical reference book Gray’s Anatomy 36th Brit. ed. (edited byWilliams & Warwick, printed by W.B. Saunder Co., for Churchill Livingstone).In 1920 and 1938, Weed published research on the circulation of thecerebrospinal fluid. As just one example of many of the roles that the CS Fluidplays within the brain, that has been discovered is that the carotid artery hasa branch that passes upward through a water bed of cerebro-spinal fluid. The CSFluid follows that internal carotid artery to the choroid plexus, so that it canperform the function of interchange with the arterial blood. The CS Fluid is”in command” of this exchange. (I mention this because see how thisties in with the 5th brain?)

In fact, a Fourth Ventricle Compression is the mostvaluable and powerful CSF technique for helping people. (It is mentioned simplyto show people the effect that CSF has on some very important brain areas.) Because the brain and spinal cord floatin a fluid, a brain weighing 1,500 grams in the air, only weighs 50 gr. incerebrospinal fluid which distributes the brain weight more evenly. The fluiditself is clear, slightly alkaline with a specific gravity of 1007. About l00mls of CS Fluid will exist to float the brain and spinal cord. The spine restsin this cerebrospinal fluid, which has waves that approximate the breathingrhythm of the body. 50% of the cerebrospinal fluid is manufactured in one partof the head (choroid plexuses), and spends its time fluxuating. It is absorbedand replenished, as other body elements are. The plexuses which are located inthe lateral recesses of the fourth ventricle also put cerebrospinal fluid intothe subarachnoid space, and this supplies the cerebello-medullary cistern andthe pontine cistern with fluid. The cerebrospinal fluid makes up a singlefluxuating system of fluid within which the central nervous system/brainoperate. As the brain coils and uncoils, waves of motion (energy) fluctuate in aspiral pattern through the cerebrospinal fluid in the skull, down the spinalcolumn and up again, so that there is motion from front to back in the head andalso laterally.

As the human brain develops the CSF seems to appear at theearliest stages. The brain goes through stages of development as thebrain-spinal cord divide. The forebrain develops into several items, themidbrain into two parts, and the hindbrain into the first three brains. Thecerebrospinal fluid is manufactured by the body, fluctuates in a singleHead-spinal cord system and then is absorbed and replenished by the body. Thefluid does not circulate like blood. The fluid and the skull bones continue tofluctuate even if a person holds his breath. As long as the CSF oscillates likeit should, things are fine, but if something occurs to pervert the rhythms, thehealth of the person goes down. Loss of sleep can influence the rhythmsadversely. If the occipital motion is restricted schizophrenia can result. Whensevere spheno-basilar symphysis locking occurs, there is frequentlymanic-depression. Most people are totally unaware that these mental problems maybe resulting from a CSF problem.

Very little information is let out about thecerebrospinal fluid. Very little is released to the public about how over aperiod of time Cranial Osteopaths can develop the manipulative skill to controland change the fluctuations of these fluids. Only a few top people are allowedin on the secrets, and those people are handpicked members of the occult world.Some of the top Cranial Doctors are under Monarch-type mind control themselves.The osteopathic libraries are staffed with people loyal to keeping cranialosteopathic secrets within the occult world. Could other doctors teachthemselves? The ability to manipulate the cerebral-spinal fluid is an art thathas taken years to develop, and for practitioners to learn. As stated, the teststhat doctors rely on such as x-rays and MRIs are too big and clumsy to be of anyvalue in this area. The doctors would have to ‘‘reinvent the wheel and thenthe automobile’’ if they wanted to self-teach themselves. It often takes twoto three years of study in this area, before a doctor is able to feel themovement of the fluid.

The cranial bones have sutures between them, that allow askilled person to move them. The sutures have been proven to move as much as1/20 of an inch. The trained finger can perceive the natural motion of thesesutures even if the natural motions are only 1/40 of an inch. In McCatty’sexcellent book Essentials of Cranio-Sacral Osteopathy, (Bath, Eng.: AshgrovePress) p. 3 he states, “Contrary to some schools of thought, allcircumstances being normal, the cranial sutures (or joints of the head) do notfuse–regardless of age, race, sex, or geographic location. They are perpetuallymotile, influencing the dynamics of fluid exchange and mebraneous tension withinthe cramo-sacral mechanism.”

When early cranial osteopaths like Sutherland looked at the skull and itsmembranes and cartilage they realized that the 18 human bones that make up thehead were actually designed to articulate (move slightly). In fact, researchershave discovered the cranium has 3 distinct oscillations. (Magoun, Harold Ives,D.O. Osteopathy in the Cranial Field, p.322).

Maud Nerman, D.O. presented theoutline of an interesting lecture and lab class that she gave in 1992, entitled”Visualizing the brain under our hands” in which she taught thetechniques for feeling the bones of the brain move with CS Fluid fluxuations, aswell as sensing what it was doing internally. Coordinating the movement of theskull bones with the movement of the CS Fluid was called “directing thetide” by W.G. Sutherland. His Journal of the Osteopathic Cranial Assoc.reported successes doing this. Ronald McCatty teaches that “some heads areless pliant than other”. The practitioner will rest his trained hands onthe head, wait, and allow the cranial motion to teach the cranial osteopath whatis happening or needs to happen. The client will usually be laying down, and thedoctor will be relaxed and focused. The motion of the CS Fluid is called theCranial Rhythmic Impulse (CR1). It will pulse about 10-14 times/mm. in normaladults and 12-16 times/mm. in children. When a person is frightened the CR1 canstop for up to 20 seconds. (The mind is literally frozen.) Tranquilizers willslow the CR1 rate down, as well as poor health.

For someone who has beentraumatized, such as with electroshock, the very mention of the traumatic event,will cause the CR1 to temporarily stop. The cranial osteopath does not reallyforce any bones, but rather gently encourages a skull bone in the direction itshould go. Lightness of touch is a necessity. An example of the health benefitsof the trained osteopath is given by McCatty, “That kink in the straightsinus can be, and often is, one of the primary causes of epilepsy and internalhydrocephalus…” By treating the kink the osteopath takes care of theproblem, where the standard method is often to give the subject strong drugs.

Togive an example of how the CS Fluid (CSF) can relate to our state of mind,consider the following by McCatty, “And again, change of direction of C.S.F.from anterior-posterior to lateral is of paramount importance in the sleep-wakephenomenon. When you are standing there is parallel action of C.S.F. flow. Whenyou lie down with your head on a pillow this alters, you impinge on one or othertemporal bone, you decelerate C.S.F. activity. You, as it were, slow down thependulum. You inhibit parallel action. By inhibiting this pendulum youautomatically produce an anteroposterior swing which is parasympathetic; that isto say, the parts of the automatic nervous system that slow down the action ofthe heart when the body is not under stress, in order to conserve bodilyenergy.” This author thought it was exciting to understand better how themind/body relaxes and slows down when we lay our heads down.

TRANSCENDENTAL MEDITATION (TM) & the HINDU CONNECTION

Years ago, back in 1974, this author was a West Point cadet who was watchingthe U.S. Army introduce TM into the academy. It was presented as a scientifictechnique, and many officers, some friends and other cadets availed themselvesof the chance to train themselves in TM’s mystical method of training. Afellow cadet who was already trained in martial arts quickly learned thetechniques. After initially maintaining a safe distance, this author decided toinvestigate TM after I got out of the military. The U.S. government gavesubstantial grants to get TM introduced into this country. Fortunately,Christians didn’t sleep long, and exposed that TM is Hinduism. Everyone thatis taught TM is initiated into it by the TM instructor singing a puja (worship)song in Sanskrit which is a Hindu devotional song while incense and candles burn.

Until the Christians exposed this, ournational government went blithely along in promoting Hinduism into our publicschools. For instance, the Dept. of Health, Education, & Welfare gave a$21,540 grant for 150 high school teachers to learn TM. TM has grown to be apowerful organization, with many organizations set up attached to it. It has itsinternational headquarters at Hotel Sonnenberg in the Swiss village ofSeelisberg.

When I investigated TM back in 1975, this TM instructor who wasfriends of mine, talked about her experience at Seelisberg. From theconversation with her it was obvious that people had had to surrender their willto the organization to go to Seelisberg, and some mind altering experiences hadtaken place there. She participated in the Siddhi program to be able todematerialize, walk through walls and levitate. But the program clearly hademotionally disturbed her and others who had been in it. Once a person isinvolved in the higher levels of TM, you don’t just walk away from this cult.From my personal observations, I discovered that TM is involved in some types ofmind-manipulation, and that the organization is not above using deceit onunsuspecting people.

What then becomes doubly interesting is that afterobserving these things, I learned that TM have a large interest in the cranialosteopathic techniques which can alter the mind and personality of a person. Forinstance, this author has obtained a list of TM instructors in Santa Monica, CAarea who are also Doctors of Cranial Osteopathy. (But bear in mind, this wholething is bigger than labels, when people are interested in the occult they studyeclectically.) These TM Cranial Osteopaths are concentrated where TM has asecret MUM Mountain, CA training site. There are cranial doctors in the nearbytowns of Aptos, Capitola, Cupertino, Hollister, Los Gatos, Salinas, Santa Cruz,Saratoga and Watsonville. It’s boggles the mind that 12 cranial doctors areneeded for the rural area near MUM Mountain, while L.A. only has 10.Concentrations of cranial doctors occur in close proximity to TM centers,particularly around the Maharishi University in Fairfield, 10 as well as thesecret MUM Mountain training center. Other cranial DOs who are part of TM arescattered about the United States.

Another observation which I made, was that some of the people that got reallybig into TM are still searching for something to fill the voids and needs oftheir life. TM didn’t turn out to be as big of an answer as they expected. TMis not the final answer. However, the Maharishi who brought TM to America has acollege in Fairfield, Iowa (the Maharishi International University) and 20 NorthAmerican “heavenly communities” operating in the quest to create aheaven on earth. The Maharishi International University has been used formedical experimentation on people. The close connections between the leadershipof TM and the Illuminati leadership suggests that TM is being used as anotherhaven for the NWO’s mind-control to be perpetrated on unsuspecting victims.There are bone-setters in India also. Perhaps the Maharishi got his originalinterest in the potential for mind-control via skull manipulation in India.Wherever the interest came from, it is evident that TM in America is involved inskull manipulation for its mind-control results.

The 3-in-One school Connection

If one wants to surrender oneself to a cult, and allow one’s mind to becontrol, in order to learn, the 3-in-1 school will be happy to teach you aboutwhat others would call phrenology and manipulation of the skull to controlthinking. The school has a number of courses. They do not call their principlesphrenology. Nor do they call their instruction mind-control. They identify tothe student areas of the head and what type of thinkingthat area of the head is involved with. They also provide information so thattheir students can evaluate how people will act based on the shape of theirheads and how that shape will interact with other shapes. The school is locatedat 2001 West Magnolia Blvd., Burbank, CA 91506, ph. no. 818-841-4786. They teachEricksonian Hypnosis (good for programmers to know), Bodywork (incl. cranialosteopathy, which is good for programmers to know), and they teach NLP,Mind-controlled relationships (along with scripts), Mind-controlled adolescentproblems, and a pantheistic religious philosophy/religion.

When the 3-in-1school got started they were teaching muscle-testing and other important skillsto their students (who can become “facilitators” in teaching others).The muscle-manipulation they have taught is extremely gentle and way beyond whatthe chiropractors knew. The school in California began about 10 years ago andthen a few years later they began to tighten their hold on all their graduatesand their students. The school has been drawing students from Europe, Japan,China, Russia, and South America (incl. Brazil). They have moved more and moretoward being an occult cult or perhaps an Illuminati front.

When giveninformation that their muscle techniques could be used to help multiples, theyhave made it clear (according to one school administrator) that they are notinterested in helping multiple personalities. One school administrator namedGordon Stokes said, “We’re off in another direction.” In fact,Gordon Stokes is the founder of 3-In-1. (Technically, a co-founder, DanielWhiteside and Candace Callaway helped. Some speculate that the Three-in-One namerefers to this triumvirate, and perhaps to their relationship together.)

GordonStokes has been reported to be a member of the BOTA which is an internationalMystery School of the Hierarchy. BOTA stands for Builders of the Adytum. It is aQabalistic-Hermetic Order of adepts founded in the 1920s by Dr. Paul Foster Casereportedly on direction by the hierarchy. The BOTA teaches higher states ofconsciousness to its adepts. It is located at 5105 No. Figueroa St., LosAngeles, CA 90042. Daniel Whiteside’s parents are deeply involved inpersonology. And Candace Calloway’s mother, their book keeper, has also been amajor figure at the 3-in-1 school. This 3-in-1 school in Burbank seems to be afinishing school for Illuminati programmers. The school ridicules people whowant to examine their life or have a conscience. Christianity is considered tobe an obnoxious tyrannical religion by the school. The information that theyteach would be very helpful for mind-control programmers, and their occultphilosophy would scare off moral people from participating.

The 3-In-1 researchhas been geared into how the brain works. Their research shows that if a personhas more brain cells in a particular region of the brain, they are moredeveloped in that intellectual area. For instance, if theAction-based-on-feeling area (the parietal lobe) has lots of cells, the personwill be more active than thoughtful. If the person has more cells in thebrain’s Conscious-associational thinking area (frontal lobes) they will thinkmore than act. They call their system based upon this research comparative cellproportion. There were many ancient works that noticed personality traits inrelationship to head shapes.

Three-In-One article “The Background ofStructure/Function” states, “You can read about the basis ofStructure/Function in the Hebrew CABALA’S book of ZOHAR (which is literallyAristotle’s PHYSIOGNOMONICA) as well as in the writings of Maimonides andthose of almost every famous Arabian philosopher during Medieval times.”(Stokes, Daniel. The Background of Structure/Function, 1991, p. 2) The CranialAcademy’s The Cranial Letter also picked up on the connection between theCabala and cranial manipulation.

A class on the “Cabala and Osteopathy” is advertized in the May’95 issue, p. 9. Until Freud captured the interest of students of the mind,phrenology was psychology. Phrenology studied what could be measured, Freud gotpeople looking for the hidden. In 1938, Dr. Edward Vincent Jones improved uponPhrenology and classic Physiognomy and developed Personology. His system was aninstant hit and he was given the go ahead and conduct research on inmates at SanQuentin Prison, and what is now LA’s giant USC County Hospital.

Interestingly,it was not long after Jones’ research there, that Cisco Wheeler’s father(trained as a programmer) was assigned by the Illuminati to organize covens inthe San Quentin Prison. The Whitesides became disciples of Jones research andwent on to statistically validate his system. One of their best students thenwas Gordon Stokes of Sacramento, who then moved to San Francisco to be bettertrained by the Whitesides. As mentioned, sixty traits have been validatedstatistically. By looking at the skull and head, the skin, the body tone, theeyes, and other areas, the practitioners of Structure/Function can accuratelytell a person’s personality. Because this type of information has been in thepossession of caballists, it is not surprising that the average person isignorant of all this. However, the potential for good or evil with thisknowledge is tremendous.

They also used Applied Kinesiology to defuse emotionalstress. For this work they divide the brain into the dominant side (the left),and the alternate side (the right). Then each of these hemispheres is againdivided between the fore and back brains for defusion. Applied Kinesiology isused to gain information about a trauma, and the defusion is used to release anynegative emotional stress around an incident. (This also possibly could be usedto dilute the emotional impact of some assignment done by a slave.)

In the first3-In-1 newsletter of 1995, pg. 1, they write, “Self-image is the key togood learning performance. What ‘magic’ do we use to help slow learners andpeople labeled as ‘learning disabled’ change for the better sodramatically.” This is just one minor example, of how these groups like toreframe what they do in occult terms. The mind-control programmers need onlyhave someone skilled in the manipulation of the cranial bones and the skullbones and they can with repeated delicate precision reshape a person’s skulland also his brain’s shape, thus manipulating the personality & looks.Photos of Marilyn Monroe (Erma Jean) during her life strongly suggest that typeof cranial manipulation was done to her for mind-control purposes.

The occultworld has maintained a dogged resolve to keep the deeper cranial knowledge andskills secret. Dr. Sutherland’s wife wrote his story With Thinking Fingers.She states on pg. 62, “It was Dr. Sutherland’s cherished dream that a daywould come when the benefits to the mentally ill through the cranial componentin osteopathy would be investigated…” If that was his dream, it is beinghijacked today by those who see it as a tool for power over their fellow men.

GENETIC ENGINEERING

A great deal of secret experimentation has gone on in undergroundinstallations with genetics. This author has had the privilege of debriefingsomeone who worked at the Area 51 underground installation. He was murderedafter having had several long interviews with this author. Truth is strangerthan fiction. It goes without saying that the Illuminati has gathered up everyhair-brained idea for controlling and manipulating the human race. Thatdoesn’t mean everyone of them has been attempted, but they have the means tocarry out very bizarre experiments in their underground facilities, such as theones at Area 51.

There is no question that they have tried to augmentnatural human features and replace natural human parts. Who knows what weirdtransgenetic or cybernetic beings have been created? This author knows that theyhave been successful in some of their work at reshaping humans. This author hasaccumulated a great deal of information on the underground installations fromeyewitnesses, but there is no way of knowing what is accurate and what isdisinformation. However, a few details are definite. These undergroundinstallations are massive and they involve genetic manipulation to create newspecies or breed special types of people. In the Vol. 2 book, we discussed theAquaman subspecies that the NWO has created with gills and special skin. Thesepeople look like normal people unless observed closely. They had extra geneticmaterial inserted in the genetic material that created them. They are calledTransgenic humans because they still closely resemble other people.

In order for transgenetic humans to pass their new added features to the next generation theyneed to mate with other similar transgenetic humans. However, the NWO has beensecretly creating Chimeras. Chimeras is the widely used name for beast-men. Thisresearch is generally not for the public to see but is done in some of theunderground facilities listed in Appendix 2. An example would be a creature thatwas half human and half some other beast.

On a BBC TV show on Oct. and Nov.1988, the British showed the result of a gorilla being artificially inseminatedwith a human sperm. The experiment was done by British researchers working forthe government and the result ended in a child looking remarkably like a normalperson. However, the common people who viewed it were outraged. Most people arenot really excited about scientists playing God and destroying the human race bygenetic tampering. Of course the scientists who do these genetic games have lotsof excuses and rationales, many of which have been put into print, to justifytheir research.

People are being bred for specific purposes by the Illuminati,just like this author bred dairy cows. Parents with certain desired features areobtained. (In fact, the Nazi’s secret superdog Lowenhertz Dogo Argentino -which looks like a race of weight-lifting dogs, and the secret 100 yr. oldParaguayan Nueva Germania colony of special bred Aryans are still in existence.)

The NY Times had an article on 9/17/92 where a Washington psychiatrist Dr. PeterBreggin accused the federal government of a genetic “violenceinitiative” in which the government was involved with genetic research asit relates to crime and violence. Dr. Susan Solomon, is one of thegovernment’s leaders involved in researching violence. However, from what thisauthor can gather, the government’s research is far more reaching that the NYTimes’ article even begins to imply. By genetic breeding and manipulation, theIlluminati are trying to strengthen certain mental features. Considering thatthis has already been done for centuries by mankind to other species, forinstance, when mankind domesticated the horse, the dog, the cat, the lama, thechicken, then it is no secret that a docile servile slave class of humans can becreated. The primary goal of this Illuminati breeding is to create a class ofpeople who can work together with others (herd instinct), and who will takeorders willingly. Independent thinking and intelligence are not wanted.Educational goals and a world-wide educational system that can accommodate thesetypes of workers is being created world-wide to deal with the eventualworking-class- drones that the Illuminati want to create. The creation of thiseducational system at this present time has four goals, 1. to develop a groupmindset, 2. to have education carried out by the multinational corporations, 3.to have students educated on the premise that truth is relative, 4. to teachcompliance.

Already the public schools in America are gearing up for the government to dictate what occupations young students canstudy for. In other words, our educational system is being set up formind-control, and this is to eventually work hand-in-hand with worker slavesthat have the genetics needed to be good compliant stupid slaves.

There havealso been studies of intelligence such as the five volume Genetic Studies ofGenius started by L.M. Terman in 1925, (pub. by Univ. of Stanford Press). TheWorld Order has specific and successful methods to create a class of technicalpeople. At this point, people whose thinking abilities have been created by themonitoring/ manipulating of their genetics is a small but increasing number.Genetic control of breeding is unfortunately where the programmers are headed.This is not happening for the genetic betterment of the human species, this isfor the perverted lusts of these demon-possessed megalomaniacs who think theydeserve to rule with a sadistic iron fist. Those who mistakenly think the mind-control programmers are trying to improve the human race, need to get to knowthe programmers better. (See Appendix A for biographical information on some ofthe programmers.) Those poor gullible naive people who think that when theglobal masters visibly introduce the New World Order that the NWO will betolerable if they can simply keep their noses clean, not fight back, and dotheir jobs, are sadly mistaken. They do not know the dark – sinister side tothese global masters. As one man very close to the center of power said to acommon man about the men who rule the world, “If you stepped on an ant, youwould have more conscience than the global elite have in manufacturing wars andkilling millions of people. They want power and they intend to amass total powerno matter what the cost.”

Another area of ILLUMINATI DECEPTION & CONTROL

Ionizing radiation used in conjunction with chemicals to manipulate thegenetics of the mind; or say this another way: USING RADIATION & CHEMICALSTO CHANGE GENETICS associated WITH THINKING.

When a retired high-ranking military man first told this author thatradiation research had to do with mind-control, my reaction was probably likemost people’s, puzzlement. I thought that radiation was quite lethal and thatgenetic research with radiation was to protect us from some kind of atomicattack. Wrong. That is a nice cover story.

Since that retired colonel (who may not have long to live) talked to me,others have said similar things. Like many things that the World Order does, ifwe don’t have a frame of reference of what is going on, we can live aroundwhat they are doing day in and day out and never see all the clues as to what isgoing on under our noses.

One trauma-based mind-controlled slave (Chris DeNicola) spied on the files ofthe doctor who did radiation experiments on her. She saw the following radiationfile headings, & their codes: Canker Sore (D-7040), Laser Documentation(D-7000), Nautical Science (D-1015), Pediatric Radionthology (L-6542) [One ideais that this file might pertain to child alters.], Penetrating Wave Activity,Radiation Experimentation (L-6540), Radioactive Distortions, RadioactiveMaterial Contamination, Radioactive verification, Radioactive Waves,Radionthology, Electrolite Prodigies Experiments (654-011), Laser LightDistortions experiments (654-012), & Laserlight Technology experiments(101-015). One reason, that this author is providing the code numbers of thesefiles, is that memories of slaves who are involved in these experiments orprojects often are internally coded with these file codes. The date theexperiment was done will also be added as part of the code.

When this author researched their genetic research, I was utterly amazed athow many institutions world-wide are carrying out deep research intogenetics–much of which will contribute to the enslavement and mind-control ofthe human race.

Just a sampling of countless labs working hard on this mind- control related genetic researchinclude Brookhaven National Labs. Upton, NY; John Hopkins Univ., Baltimore, MD;Institut fur Genetik, the Free University of Berlin, Germany; Institute ofHygiene & Epidemiology, Czech.; Radiation Genetic Lab & ChemicalMutagenesis, State Univ. Of Leiden, Sylvius Labs, Leiden, The Netherlands; MIT,Cambridge, MA; Gesellschaft für Strahlen und Umweltforschung, Munich, Germany;National Inst. of Environmental Health Sciences Research Triangle Park, NC;Sandoz Labs in Basle, Switzerland; Biology Division, Oak Ridge National Lab, OakRidge, TN; Roswell Underground Labs, NM; Stanford Research Institute, MenloPark, CA; Shell Labs, Kent, England; University of Michigan, Ann Arbor, MI; theZentrallabor für Mutagenitätsprüfung der Deutschen Forschungsgemeinshaft,Freiburg, Germany.

This is just a tiny sampling of the enormous world wideresearch devoted to genetics that pertain to mind-control. While there arenumerous surnames among the genetic researchers, because this author knows as afact that some of these researchers are Illuminati, it doesn’t quiet one’scuriosity to see the better known Illuminati surnames such as Dupont, Hersey,Fox, Frey, Jung, Li, Paterson, Stuart, Sinclair, Sutherland, and Russellappearing among the genetic researchers doing research that pertains tomind-control.

Obviously, this author can’t give all the ways they havefigured out to use radiation, along with chemicals and genetics to control thehuman race. I will try to give you a peek in the window. The real deep &dangerous information is of course highly classified material and protected bytheir mind-control of those scientists who work for them.

When I saymind-control, that includes such methods as blackmail and threats ofassassination.

There is a type of radiation called ionizing radiation-that meansit is radiation that gives off electrons (thus producing ions). There are manydifferent types of ionizing radiation. Some go right through the body, somedamage the cells, but the body repairs itself, some causes genetic changes, andsome simply hits your cells like a sledge hammer & kills them.

The ionizingradiation that changes genetics has been the focus of an incredibly enormousamount of (mostly secret) research. Genes are instructions that tell non-lifematerial how to organize itself into something living. A gene consists ofgenetic material called DNA and RNA. Genes also provide instructions for howsomething is to develop. As a person or animal develops, the genes interact withthe environment to create what the person or animal is like. For instance,different breeds of dogs when born are more similar, than after they grow up.Different breeds of dogs have been bred for different genetic traits, and asdifferent breeds grow up, their genes continually interact with the environmentto create the adult dog.

So full genetic expression can take a life-time. Thelink between genetics and behaviour can be seen in this quote from the QuarterlyReview of Biology (art. by T.C. Schneirla, 1966, p. 283), “Behaviouralontogenesis is the backbone of comparative psychology. Shortcomings in its studyinevitably handicap other lines of investigation from behavioural evolution andpsychogenetics to the study of individual and group behavior.”

Geneticpsychology has revealed that the genes program in methods for an organism toadjust to their environment. So genetic instruction is, for instance, more thanjust the instruction “be smart, be aggressive, be tall” but it istailoring the way a person’s develops to deal with its environment. In otherwords, behaviours are programmed into a person via their genes (geneticinstructions) to provide mechanisms for quick, dynamic adaptions to changingcircumstances. These mechanisms (created by genetic codes) may even have theperson (or animal) reverse their behaviour for purposes of survival.

p_<input height=”388″ name=”I34″ src=”http://www.whale.to/b/sp/deepera/p_8-1.jpg” type=”image” width=”299″ />

8-1

Within the human brain (also all mammal brains) all the neurons are believedto be generated before birth with the exception of the following cells: granulecells of the olfactory bulb, fascia dentala granule cells in the hippocampus,the granule cells of the cerebellar cortex, and the granule cells of rhombic lipin the brainstem.

Its the brainstem cells that the Illuminati manipulate throughbrain stem scarring to produce photographic memories for their scientists andcomputer programmers. The germinal cells create neurons in the germinal zone.Brain cells with a common function develop from a common lineage although fromdifferent sites. After a new neuron develops in the germinal zone, they migrateto whatever location they are to live in. The complicated process of how aneuron discovers where to go (migrate to in the brain) has been not beendiscovered according to what this author has read. When neurons establishthemselves they deal with certain neurotransmitters, that establishcommunication between them and other neurons.

Researchers have discovered thatneurons can change their own make up to take different neurotransmitters if theydecide their “environment” in the brain needs it. They also grow their dentrite connections depending on what type of connections are needed for thatparticular brain to function. For instance, a piano player will develop dentriteconnections to be able to play well.

These discoveries show once again that evenon the cellular level, genetic instructions are complex and designed to giveflexibility and adaptability of the cell to the situation for the cell. Geneticprogramming begins at the cellular level. There is a cellular consciousnessbesides the consciousness that we think about. DNA structures which areinherited affect the cellular consciousness. Body memories are contained withinthe physiological structure. The first brain and the body work off astimulus-response recording mechanism. Body memory and programming are stored atthis level. This is an area of the brain that is always on. However, its view orperception of events is not an exact copy of what other higher brains arethinking. Your conscious mind doesn’t remember how the stairs and the room arearranged, but in the dark, you primal part of your mind helps guide your steps.

Various drugs and chemicals have been identified that influence particularlearning sequences in the mind, such as imprinting. For instance, hexamethoniumchloride antagomzes the nicotinic actions of acetylcholine on the ganglia, or inother words, acetylcholine will depolarize the ganglia but is prevented by thehexamethonium. The overall result is that impulses that the sympathetic gangliawould transmit are blocked. This is just one example of countless examples ofhow a specific chemical can affect a specific brain action.

There is a branch ofgenetic research called “developmental social behaviour genetics” whichdeals with how genetics program in social behaviours of animals and people. Forinstance, these geneticists study how genes create aggression, courtship,territorial behaviours, behaviours involving mothers andfathers, dominance (peeking order) behaviors, sexual behaviors, attractionbehaviors, recognition behaviors, etc.

Men are very much controlled by thesexual lusts, power lusts, and aggressive behaviors. Can the reader see howgenetic manipulation of these genetic based behaviors could radically change thepotential behavior of a person. A fox’s genes cause him to react differentlythan a rabbit’s genes. Having a rabbit grow up in a fox home is not going tochange the genetic instructions. (The Bible even says, Can a leopard changeit’s spots?) But the World Order has figured out how to change thoseinstructions.

Genetic researchers had to begin sorting out behaviours, andsorting out genes that affected them. For instance, genes create a person’s(or animal) reproductive “instincts”. These instructions includeinstructions on fighting, nest building, mating, and care of their offspring.These genetic instructions are different for different people and differentanimals. Researchers into imprinting have discovered that IF a set of animals(or people) is prevented from learning a particular imprint, and IF that set ofanimals breed, THEN they pass on a lack of ability to receive that imprint. Inother words, genetically we learn from generation to generation.

Let’s saythat we prevent men from naturally imprinting a sexual desire for women as theygrow up. If we mate those men to women, the offspring will show a reducedability to be heterosexual. Males seem to develop their sexuality, but femalesseem to react more on the basis of genetically present “releasers”.Genetic researchers have gone in and identified what people’s behaviouralinstructions specifically are, and how to change them. The instructions arewritten in DNA, and manipulation of DNA can change those instructions.

When Iresearched their genetic research, I found that they have developed maps for howto change genetic material to change those instructions concerning behaviour. Themaps for changing human genes related to behaviour are classified, but an exampleof one that isn’t is found in the book The Genetics of Behaviour (ed. Ehrman& Parsons. Sinauer Assoc., Inc. publ.: Sunderland, Mass, 1976, chapter 8figure 4.). This map shows 3 sites in a HK gene that are intentionally mutatedby the scientists in order to change the way a particular fly sings its matingcall. The specific changes in how the fly sings its new mating call (after thegenetic code is changed by geneticists) are even graphed out in a recordinggraph in another book Developmental Behavior Genetics: Neural, Biometrical, andEvolutionary Approaches (ed. by Hahn et. al., Oxford, Eng.: Oxford Univ. Press,1990, Fig. 6-1.)

Again bear in mind that we only get the crumbs of what theyknow. We get a map of how they can change the way a fly sings a song–while theysecretly keep the genetic maps to change human behaviour! An easy example of howgenetics play a role in human behaviour can be seen in how infants behave towardtheir mothers and toward strangers. By using twins and adopted children, etc. itcould be clearly demonstrated that the behaviour of a child in how it touches itsmother was genetically inherited. But remember that the genetic instructions asa child grow older are designed to give it flexibility in relationship to itsenvironment, so the environment is going to interact with the genetics to formthe final behaviours. The study of these reactions of genes to the environment iscalled the study of epigenesis.

Another easy example of the genetic role inhuman behaviour is that intelligence has been linked to brain to body size. Genesultimately determine that ratio of brain to body size. The factors involved arelargely prenatal maternal influences. A great deal has been learned in thisarea. Brain size relates less to body size than it is a function of bodymetabolism. (See Research by Lande & Martin) To give a tiny sample of thetypes of genetic studies done in this area:

• Hahn, M.E., & Haber, S.B. “Dominance for large brains inlaboratory mice…” Behavior Genetics, 1979, 9, pp. 243-244.

• Fuller, J.L. & Geils, H. “Brain growth in mice selected for highand low brain weight.” Developmental Psychobiology, 1972, 5, pp. 307-318.

• Riska, B., & Atchley, W.R. “Genetics of growth predict patternsof brain-size evolution.” Science, 1985, 229, pp. 668-671.

Research into how to control humans genetically proceeded in severaldirections. First, scientists realized that radiation was the key to changinggenetics. Radiation causes breaks and changes in the DNA instructions. If onlyone little bit of genetic DNA instruction is changed in 1 million bits ofinformation, that change could radically change the life of the person oranimal. We see that everyday cleft lips… But how does radiation affectgenetics? DNA has been studied from every angle. DNA has been looked at, probed,tested with all kinds of chemicals and countless other manipulations. Thescientists figured exactly how the different DNA is constructed, what makes ittick, how it joins, holds together, reproduces, etc. They can disassemble andrebuild DNA however they want. DNA is the genetic instructions.

Since radiationwill affect DNA they tested a long list of ionizing radiation substances on DNA.Different radiations will break the DNA in different ways. Chemicals will jointo DNA in certain ways. Long story short, there are millions of ways tomanipulate genetic material, and the World Order set out to discover how toprecisely manipulate certain kinds of genetic material in certain ways.

Anexample of how skilled they are in understanding most everything about toconstruct and take apart the molecules of genetic material, at Cold Spring Harbor Labs one of the 1997 courses offered students is Molecular Cloning ofNeural Genes. They understand what makes a nerve cell and how to create one.This science is called molecular neurobiology. (This course at Cold Springs H.L.happens to be taught by instructors from Rockefeller Univ., Harvard, JohnHopkins, and UC of Berkeley.)

One area of intense study for many years was along-term scramble to find chemicals that would cause different types ofmutations in DNA. This research was called Comparative Chemical Mutagenesis. Infact one of the books this author studied was entitled just that ComparativeChemical Mutagenesis (ed. by DeSerres & Shelby). This book’s Chapters16-18, 22-25 are about chemical-genetic research concerning how to creategenetic changes in mammals using chemicals!

When it comes to genetics, much ofwhat is learned from studying one mammal will apply to humans. The chemicalprinciples are the same, the DNA is written in the same code, only the geneticinstructions written in that code is different. To make an analogy, this book iswritten in English. Once someone understands how English works, they can takeapart a sentence and rewrite it. Top level Genetic scientists know how to takeapart genetic instructions and rewrite them. Radiation used in conjunction withchemicals presents them a tool for the mass editing of human geneticinstructions. No wonder the Chernobyl nuclear accident happened. (Insiders inthe know say that it was caused on purpose.) What a great way to carry out moremind-control research.

According to public research, genetic mutations werecreated by scientists in mammal cells first in 1968. It is likely that this hadalready been accomplished in secrecy before this. Labs all over the world wentabout testing genetic material with specialized chemicals to see what wouldhappen to various genetic material when it came in contact with specificchemicals. Some of the commonly- tested mutagent chemicals that were widelytested to discover their “mutagenicity” (mutagenicity is the wordgeneticists use to describe the power of a chemical to cause a mutation)include:

Aflatoxin B1 (AFT)(This is a mold metabolite and is not always effectivewithout another agent.)
Cadmium chloride
Cadmium salts
Cyclophosphamide (CP)
Dimethylnitrosamine (DMN)
Epichlorohydrin
Ethylenimine
Ethyl Methanesulfonate (EMS)
Methyl methanesulfonate (MMS)
Mitomycin C (a strong mutagenic at low doses)
Myleran (aka Busulfan)
N.Methyl-N,-Nitro – N – Nitrosoguanidine (MNNG)

Natulan (aka procarbazine, this chemical was strongly mutagenic in the labwith the presence of S-9, but weak without the presence of S-9)

Tepa
Theo-Tepa
Trenimon
Triethylenemelamine
Vinyl chloride

When these chemicals (and others) were tested on genetic material, themutations they caused in the genetic material were observed, and then thespecific type of mutation each caused was charted. Some caused chromosome-typechanges, others caused chromatid-type changes, and some caused sub- or half-chromatid changes (these sub-changes usually were in the mitotic portion of thecell cycle.) When the chemicals broke chromosomes they were called clastogens.Others cause chromosomes to lose genetic material by damaging the mitoticapparatus. Many of the chemicals that were first tested only produced chemicalchanges in the chromatid-type of change. They discovered that the protectivemechanisms of animals, plants and humans were protecting against many of theirinduced mutations, but they also learned what mutations they could create thatthe body would not fix or recover from.

Along with finding out what certainchemicals would do, the World Order wanted to find out what would happen at themolecular level of DNA when subjected to different types of radiation. The keyto using radiative material is that there are many different types of radiativesubstances, not just uranium. For instance, cadmium is radioactive and can beused in genetic manipulation. In researching radiation, the first stage is whenfree radicals are created. This takes only a very small fraction of a second.The next is the chemical transformation of those radicals into stable radiationsubstances, and finally the last stage are the effects of these substances whenthe body incorporates them. The effects of the radiation substances on a personmay last several years. The effects of radiation take place on the molecularlevel of DNA.

When you and I went to school we were taught that DNA occurs as adouble-helix around an invisible common axis. The core of the helix is a seriesof purine and pyrimidine bases stacked in a parallel array and are arrangedalmost perpendicular to the invisible axis of the helix. However, the reality isthat DNA can also exist in three (triple) double-stranded helix structures whichare called the A-DNA, the B-DNA, and the C-DNA. At high humidities the A-DNAwill transform into a B- DNA if excess salt is in the area. In A-DNA the normalof the base pairs is tilted by 200 to the helix axis. In contrast, in the B-DNAthe base pairs are perpendicular. In some viruses and bacteria single strandedDNA is found. DNA also comes in supercoiled in some situations.

The point issimply that DNA occurs in ways other than we learned in school. They discoveredthat the energy of the sugar-phosphate backbone of the DNA allows for the DNAbases to be stacked, and is the key to the stability of the DNA. The verticlestacking of the bases gives stability of the DNA helix. They discovered that thehelical structure of DNA is strongly influenced by its base composition andmolecular weight. I mention these only to point out, that they know all aboutwhat DNA is and how it is built and holds itself together.

The genetic-radiation researchers had to learn how the bases of the DNA heldtogether electronically. They needed to learn how well these molecules of thesedifferent bases would accept electrons or donate electrons, because ionizedradiation is substances that give off electrons or otherionizing particles. Directly ionizing particles are atomic particles that arecharged such as electrons, protons, alpha (a) particles, “heavy” ions,etc.).

An example of something the researchers found is that the cytosine basewas the best acceptor of all the DNA bases. They began the process of testingdifferent radioactive substances on DNA to see how they would cause mutations.To study this type of research, this author read several books such as Effectsof Ionizing Radiation on DNA (Springer-Verlag Publ.: Berlin, Germany, 1978). Anexample of a chapter in this book is “Radiation-Induced Degradation of theBase Component in DNA and Related Substances”. This chapter shows charts ofwhat happens to DNA components (such as thymine, cytosine, & uracil) whenthey are exposed to radiation. This author wants to cover some details of thetype of discoveries these researchers made to make a point that specificchemicals and specific types of ionizing radiation will produce differenteffects upon DNA. Although these are very specific minute details, the reasonthey are mentioned here, is that the bottom line is that SOME CHEMICALS WORKWITH SOME TYPES OF RADIATION TO PRODUCE SPECIFIC MUTATIONS.

They discovered thatif a mutagenic such as aminoacridine dye is absorbed by cells, this dye whichbinds to the nucleic acids, absorbs light to such a degree that the cells aredestroyed. Different variations of dyes bind to the DNA in different strong andweak binding processes. Lambda radiation was tested on DNA. They observed thatpositive and negative ions were randomly produced throughout the DNA and thatthese are chemically unstable and undergo free radical reactions to form stableradiation products. They discovered that there was a consistent “oxygeneffect” which was made into a radiobiological law which described how thepresence of oxygen enhances radiation damage in all forms of cell life.

Anotherinteresting discovery was that 5-bromouracil (BU) enhanced the rate ofradiation-induced free radicals forming within gamma-irradiated DNA. Researchersdiscovered that an naturally occurring substance in cells, the sulthydryls,would bind with iodoacetic acid and N-ethylmaleimide, which made themradiosensitive, and would result in certain mutations. Still one more example ofa compound that works with radiation to cause changes in the DNA istriacetoneamine-N-oxyl (or TAN for short). This is a stable free radical thatcombines with DNA. TAN comes from a group of nitroxide free radicals which allhave the same influence on DNA. Metronidazole (aka Flagyl) was also found to beanother of the nitroimidazoles and nitrofuranes that are oxygen mimics thatworked in the lab as radiosensitizers of DNA.

Chemical-Biological Weapons arereferred to as CB Weapons. In a transcript attached to the Dept. of Defenseappropriations for 1970 (part 6) that I have of CB Weapons researchers talking,they indicate that the United States has BZ which “brings about completemental disorientation as well as sedation which induces sleep. First of all theindividual is completely confused as to what he is doing or what he is supposedto do and in addition he has hallucinations. He cannot carry out his assignedduties nor can he remember what his assigned duties were.” The affect of BZlasts for about 3 days and then the person will begin to recover. It can begiven via the air or the water. If it is drank or inhaled it will work. It takesaffect about 1 to 1 ½ hours after it is ingested. There are a number ofcorporations that can produce BZ in the U.S. At the time of the transcript, itwas stated that BZ is $20/lb. and a lead time of six months for production.

Chemical incapacitants have been developed that affect the mental functions ofthe mind in various ways. Today, research and deployment continues of chemicaland radioactive substances that can control people. One of the methods thatchemical and radioactive materials work is to change genetic structures. Some ofthe genetic changes that can be created chemically, are chemical changes thataffect the way the mind thinks. In a nutshell, we are looking at a situationwhere the thinking of an entire race could be altered via chemicals dropped intotheir air and water. How long would these genetic changes last? It isconceivable that some of the changes might have long range consequences. Again,the bottom line is that the World Order has at its disposal radioactivesubstances that can distributed in conjunction with chemicals to mind-controllarge geographic regions by genetic manipulation. These radioactive substancesand chemicals can be distributed over vast areas by the air and water of ageographic region. It is conceivable that within a short time, the United Stateswill experience chemicals administered via the air, or the drinking water usedin conjunction with specific external stimuli to reinforce certain types ofmind-control programming on a mass of people. A chemical that makes peoplesusceptible to suggestion could be used over a geographic area while hypnotictelevision messages and ELF waves, etc. contribute to the mind-controloperation.

Therapists are going to begin encountering victims of mind-controlborn in the 1960’s or later that have been subjected to chemical-radiationchanges to the genetics that control human behaviour. There are already dozens ofvery vocal victims of both radiation experiments & mind-control that arespeaking up. Unfortunately, the ones that this author knows do not have a longlife-expectancy, and speaking up usually has the effect of shortening awhistle-blower’s life.

In this Deeper Insights book, the movie Jacob’sLadder was mentioned. This movie shows a unit in Vietnam which was given a drugto make them aggressive, but the drug backfired because they killed each other.However, the reason the movie was allowed to be produced is that it was a goodcover for the fact that the military did not give up, but that they actuallysucceeded in producing their “magic chemical potion” to turn soldiersinto killing machines. The biology of aggression has been figured out. Militarystudies on the relationship between drugs and the ability to kill have beennumerous, one example is Gabriel, R.A. Military Psychiatry: A ComparativePerspective. NY: Greenport Press, 1986. The World Order has the ability tocreate the warrior spirit, actually its worse than that, they have the abilityto turn men into killing machines.

WHAT WE’VE COVERED

As horrible as the physical manipulation of the brain and its fluids is, andas monstrous as the genetic manipulation of the growth of the brain as outlinedin this chapter are, they are only a few methods of mind-control of many thatthe Illuminati have at their disposal. These techniques seriously raise thequestion how much longer will humanity as we know it survive? The nextgeneration of children will have to face mind-control in the form of genetictampering and the use of chemicals already stockpiled by the NWO.

p_8-2.jpg
<input height=”500″ name=”I30″ src=”http://www.whale.to/b/sp/deepera/p_8-2.jpg” type=”image” width=”380″ />

<input height=”442″ name=”I31″ src=”http://www.whale.to/b/sp/deepera/p_9-1.jpg” type=”image” width=”489″ />

CHAPTER 9: THE SCIENCE OF MIND MANIPULATION BY PSYCHOLOGICALPROGRAMMING METHODS: BEHAVIOR MODIFICATION, PSYCHOLOGICAL MOTIVATION & NLP

A person’s “selfhood” is hard to define, but one could view it asthe central important center of consciousness to which the person has placedboth trust and purpose. A professor of Pastoral Counselling defined the self as”the purposive core I have learned to trust in myself and others.”Although this author prefers his own wording as written above, the definition of”selfhood” by this professor of pastors is in agreement with thisauthor’s. A mature person is a person who has developed a”selfhood”, a sense of self, that is able to make creative choices inline with values and plans for his or her life. By the destruction of the”selfhood” of many of the alters, the programmers derail the abilityof the slave to make creative choices in line with values and plans. Not only dothey destroy the sense of identity but they also destroy the development ofvalues.

When a normal person grows up, the values, that an individual adopts,will enable that person to integrate his or her many actions into a cohesiveunified agenda for living their life. What happens when a person is not able toadopt their own values, but is force fed values? What happens when the persondoes not even adopt any values, except to acquiesce to the brutal demands of amind-control handler? The natural process for developing a unified agenda forlife is cut short. The thinking of mankind is predicated on socialization withother humans. It is natural for people to want to work and be around otherhumans. The family, neighbourhood, city and nation all give an individualnurturing that fosters a sense of identity and values. What happens if anindividual is cut off from society and most of humanity, in fact is even cut offfrom most of their own mind and will?

What typically happens in this situationis that the individual becomes demoralized, feels dehumanized, and as a personis enfeebled to deal with life. What happens when a person is not allowed tochose values freely, and allowed to give consideration to various alternativesand the consequences for these choices? It means that the person is not going tobe happy with the choices they make, but will go through the motions of life ina rather dissociated manner. What happens when a person feels powerless?Feelings of powerlessness, can lead to feelings of meaningless. And meaninglessmakes an individual feel trapped by life. The meaninglessness imprisons aperson. The person no longer has the freedom to make choices, and withoutchoices has no real values, and without values life becomes meaningless.

Theabove situations are standard results of the total mind-control programmingagenda. The person’s natural built-in abilities to plan their life is shortcircuited. The person is demoralized and feels incomplete as a human because ofhis or her’s lack of connectedness to their fellow humans, and as a resultallows his or herself to be dependent upon the master. Because they are forcedto do actions without any values, they dissociate their actions from feelings.Finally, they feel trapped because they have no values to give life meaning. Asexual slave will be forced to have sex. They are not allowed to have a valuesystem, or else they would pick and choose who they wanted to have sex with.The result is that they feel dehumanized and they dissociate feelings from theiractions. Without values, life feels like one big trap, with no purpose and nogoals. The only purpose the slave has is to survive the brutality of its master,that is to stay alive.

Some slaves give up along the way, and are discarded asunsuccessful attempts by the Illuminati. The programming agenda prevents thenatural God-given gift for mankind to make their own choices. As explainedabove, this in itself reinforces several items that the programmers have beenintentionally creating such as dehumanization, isolation, dependence, anddissociation. It is built into human thinking to enjoy a sense ofaccomplishment. This happens when a person perceives his or her life asmeaningful. The perception that his or her life is meaningful results in theperson feeling power. Powerlessness and meaninglessness are two items that arerelated to each other when we understand human thinking. A normal child in anormal environment will naturally learn when to trust itself and when to trustothers. This is important to the development of values. This is important for aperson to become mature. The programmers short circuit this natural learningprocess.

The front alters continue learning who to trust and who not to trust,and when to trust oneself, because they hold the body from day to day. However,a special purpose child alter doesn’t experience this. Without learning how totrust, it becomes hard to make decisions by one’s self, and so the victim ofmind-control transfers the right to make his or her choices to the programmer.By arresting the natural process of learning trust, the programmers detour themind, so that it travels right where they want the mind to be.

Normally, a childwould grow up, and as it grew up would realize that not everyone can be trusted.He would also come to realize that even his own self at times can not betrusted. Yet, the child would also learn that there are times that people can betrusted. This maturation of awareness moves a person from being dependent towardbeing independent. The programmed slave is afraid of seeking true love, and tofind authentic relationships with people. Without these things, they remainincomplete and more pliable to the control of the master, who then attempts toprovide in some substitute manner some of the things the slave should havedeveloped for himself.

Many of the slave’s deeper alters do not have thecapacity to creatively look forward to the future, with the understanding thatthey can create their own life, their own future. The process of maturation thatwould have given that ability to them has been prevented from taking place. Ifthese deeper alters do not experience life outside of their programmed trancestates, they will have no chance to mature and to realize that they are capableto design and create their own future. Rather, the slave endures life withanxiety and dissociation, and limits his mental horizons to the present. The bigreference point the slave has is to their master and his commands.

Many of theslave’s alters are limited in their freedom to really have consciousness.Their thinking is below the definitions of conscious behavior–it is simplyprogrammed behavior. Our consciousness has a big role in how we perceive theworld. How we perceive the world in turn determines our values. The programmerscan disrupt the process of a slave obtaining values in life, by disrupting theconsciousness. Values in life are important in determining how we build ourworld-view, our frames of reference. The programmer constructs various worldsfor most of the alters (except for the front alters). These alters are nevergiven the chance for what psychologists would label “conscious behavior”. Reality is not part of the package. Choice is not part of thepackage.

In normal life, conscious behavior is developed by interaction betweena person and his environment and the freedom to make realchoices. The bare necessities are grudgingly provided in a haphazard way tothe alters of a total mind-controlled slave, so that IF they are aware of theirneeds, it is at a very basic level, such as survival, and security and warmth. Afully conscious individual has gone way beyond that to realizing his or her’sneeds for creativity, intimacy, community, justice, integrity, and spiritualfulfilment.

The challenge for the slave master will be to balance the freedomof activity and maturity of the front part of the slave’s alters, with thecontrol that the slave master needs to accomplish his nefarious goals. It issafer to bring a slave up to have a world view dependent on others that lendsitself to the owner’s agenda such as witchcraft values & a witchcraftworld-view, or a Mormon/ or Jehovah’s Witness/or Catholic world-view ofobedience to the church, THAN to have the slave’s front alters becomingindependent self-directed mature thinkers.

It doesn’t matter whether theperson’s front alters are Jehovah’s Witnesses, Mormon or Catholic, they havesurrendered their personal sense of power and control to institutional control.The victim ceases to do things because of personal choice, but acceptsinstitutional values as a cog in a machine; and the person, whether they realizeit or not, loses meaning in their life. Personal choice, value and meaning inlife are all related. Because man is made in the image of God, he has aninherent desire to have meaning to his life. Mankind also has a desire to be inunity with his environment. This is also a God-given desire. To make himselffeel at home in this world, man spends much of his activity taming anddomesticating the wild world to conform to what feels comfortable. What happenswhen this is stripped from a person?

In order to provide substitute answers tothese desires of the slave, the Illuminati’s covens provide rituals. Ritualsmake the slave feel that some order is being brought out of the chaos andnonsense of life. But true meaning in life can only come from realizing thegoals of our actual Creator, Almighty God. Substitutes for this, leave peopleunfulfilled and weak. Of course, the unfulfilled weak sense of meaning in lifeof the Illuminati members, can weaken some in their ability to realize theirtrue spiritual potential. It becomes a vicious cycle of low base evil goals. Whowill provide the safety for the deeper alters to move out independently in life?and then further, who will teach the deeper alters the social skills, and theother skills to step out and grow? Even if the complex programming should breakits death-grip on an alter, (which seldom happens) an alter can not find freedomwithout some outside support system providing safety and instruction. Thebondage that most deeper alters remain fixed in, is a very complex bondage ofbody, mind, and spirit. This complex bondage calls for group package answers,that address the type of issues that have been raised on these last two pages.The lack of this type of answer insures that few slaves will find full freedom.Partial freedom is still slavery.

On the flip side, because deeper alters have not had a chance to developtheir own values, make their own choices, and experience reality, the power ofthe programs will be diluted simply by real life. This occurs even in theabsence of intense deprogramming. One of the weaknesses of the programming isthat the handlers often fail to allow alters to ever establish real personalvalues. Hand-me-down values that are accepted under duress or torture, arequickly discarded if the alters ever do get free.

Illuminati slaves who acceptthe values of the Illuminati, and progress to positions of power can be resistant to freedom, because they have internalized for themselves a valuesystem, have some feelings of self-worth and self-competence. The Illuminatihave long understood the value in having their members progress through thelevels of initiation, and to pass through tests that bestow a sense ofachievement upon the slave. When the Illuminati in Bavaria had their safehouses raided, their paperwork showed extensive disciple and training programs.At first glance, raising an initiate through an initiate degree system oftraining may not smack of mind-control, but it is like an anchor that ties inthe mind-control. It is important for the Illuminati to attach an occult valuesystem to the mind-control so that the slave is more resistant to wantingfreedom, because their self-worth and identity are tied up with the Illuminati.

“STRIPPED” OF FEELINGS

Another side-effect of the total mind-control is that the deeper alters of avictim, and indeed often even the front alters are unsuccessful in morallymeaningful relationships such as love and friendship. The reader may bewondering, what does Fritz mean by “morally meaningful”? Allow me totake several paragraphs to explain … Has the reader ever tried to recall aname which you knew, but your mind seems blocked? And yet, when someone offersthis name or that name, you realize that it doesn’t have the correct feel, thecorrect rhythm, the correct beginning. Your mind can recognize what it islooking for on a subconscious level, but you are not pulling the name up to theconscious. Your mind can look for things on a subconscious level and identifywhat it is looking for, without consciously telling you.

Has the reader ever loved someone for many years? If you have, you know thatyou didn’t consciously think of them and your love for them every second ofthe day. Grief or love or another strong emotion can lay in our subconsciousmind and yet still influence our thinking. It is not a matter of us turning thislove on. It simply is there quietly in the background exerting its influence onour mind.

Grief, love, anger, and other strong emotions are similar to when ourmind is seeking for a name subconsciously. These emotions seek out theappropriate scenes, and items in the surrounding area, and colors and soundsthat go with the emotion that the subconscious mind feels. A blue person willnotice “blue, sad” type things around them. Other things just don’tfit the subconscious fill in the blank. In other words, our emotions determineour perspective on what we see in life. Our emotional perspective guides whatitems our mind focuses on. This is why it is absolutely imperative for balancedhuman growth that a person feel compassion, love and sympathy directed towardoneself.

Feeling loved in turn opens the mind to focus itsemotional-perception-guidance system on compassion, love and sympathy. Incontrast with most people, many parts of total mind-controlled slaves are nevermeant to have feelings, or if the parts do, they repressed, suppress, anddissociate their feelings. Our emotions play a fundamental role in a person’smoral life. They transform values into actions. This is what is called strengthof will, courage of convictions, etc. Emotions play a critical role in strengthof will and courage of convictions.

To be stripped of feeling emotions, stripsthe victim of one of the ingredients to make and carry out moral choices. Thishelps explain why emotions are harnessed so completely by the programmers. Whenresearchers have studied unemotional people, they find that their dealings withothers are shallow, lifeless, and mechanical. The programmers want theirprogrammed assassins, espionage agents, prostitutes, etc. to be mechanical.People rarely want to form friendships with unemotional persons. Of course, theparts that are created to interface with the public are programmed to be effacious, gracious, and to sparkle. But the deeper parts which influence thevictim’s own internal thoughts, which the victim wisely keeps to himself, failto connect with the outside world emotionally.

Having been stripped of emotions,the slave is consequently stripped of one of the most important ingredients involved in morality. An unemotional or emotionallydeficient person or alter may suffer from a particular kind of a”morally-weak will”. This is because failure to do what a personbelieves is good and failure to restrain from doing what one believes is bad isa natural consequence of lacking emotions such as care, concern, compassion,courage, love and sympathy. Certain emotions are critical for doing and beingmoved to do what is right and in not doing what one knows is bad.

Friendshipsare one of the most valuable commodities a person can have. The victim isstripped of external friendships. They may substitute interactions within theirown internal world as a way to substitute for this loss. In normal humanactivity, two people in love intertwine the activities of their lives into thecomplex whole of their love relationship. A walk together is not seen as a walk,but as a joint expression of their relationship.

Humans emotionally value whatis good for their friends and lovers. Without emotional attachments, therelationship is only a facade. The victims of mind-control are taught how tocreate great facades. Unfortunately, they fool many of their therapists, andtherefore don’t step out of the make-believe roles they play out.

Human loveand friendship is one of the most vital, powerful, fundamentally good items ofhuman behaviour. They provide the foundation for many other things. Without loveand friendship, the victim’s alters live in isolation, alienation,abandonment, discontinuity, and purposelessness. Cisco’s half of the bookwill discuss some specific programming tactics that are used to hide the”shadow” alters that are used to take any emotions that theprincipally used alters might develop. What we have been covering is that one ofthe side effects of “stripping” the victims from feeling emotions isto cripple them from taking moral stands, from seeing love & concern in theworld around them, and from reaching out & forming ties to the outsideworld.

PROGRAMMING TO HIDE REVEALING DREAMS

The programmers realize that the mind is able to reveal secrets via dreams.During the programming a Mother-of-darkness will be assigned to a child and shewill have to wake that child up when it is in its deepest sleep to ask the childwhat’s happening and if the child is dreaming. If dreams are surfacing, theprogrammers know their programming is not holding.

When the child’s mind whichis being programmed no longer releases revealing dreams, the programmers knowthat their programming is holding. The front alters receive repeated programming(hypnotic commands, etc.) not to dream or to know their dreams. When theprogramming begins to collapse, the deeper alters will begin to dream and floodwith memories. The slave must have their dream sealing programs reinstatedapprox. every three years. If this is not done, dreams (which are actuallymemories) will begin to surface. A therapist can also help the victim traintheir mind to remember their dreams (dream state of mind).

PROGRAMMING LANGUAGE

A skilful programmer can use language to communicate at several levels. Theprogrammer can use derogatory tones, big words that the child doesn’tunderstand and obscure language that confuses the child in order to humiliate,dominate and confuse the child. He can also pronounce the words with a twist inorder to protect the programming. Have you ever met someone in the occult worldwho pronounces many of his words strange? The programmers are also big on playon words which are done intentionally to protect the programming. The victims ofthe occult programming must deal with symbology. Those who attempt to understandprogramming must also deal with the world of symbology.

The programmer must learn to think like a child and to step into thechild’s world. Likewise, the deprogrammer must learn to step into thevictim’s world. Certainly, the deprogrammer wants to stay grounded in reality,but he also wants to be able to understand the world that the victim must livein. The deeper parts of the victim lives in a magical world, full of demons andpowers from other dimensions. When the Illuminati carry out programming, theyoften frame what they are doing in magical and satanic terms.

Most therapists donot want to step into the victim’s world to communicate with them. Just as thepsychologists want this author to step into the psychologists’ world tocommunicate with them, the psychologist should realize that the victim wouldlike the same. It is irrelevant whether the therapist believes that objects canbe demonized or not. The deeper alters have spent their life-time learning howdemons attach themselves to objects, and how to gain power to cause demons toattach themselves to objects. A deeper alter may have the occult wisdom to placedemons into a fluid so that that fluid can be drank by a child. From theirunderstanding of demonology, these demons are so powerful that the onlynon-lethal entry for them into the child is by the child drinking a particularfluid. These images are the images that deeper alters experience during theprogramming rituals. The language & images of the programming will be verymagical, mystical and satanic.

EFFECTS OF PROGRAMMING

The mind is a holographic type of memory. The psyche of the multiplepersonality is a multiple image hologram. The body is set up to match the mind.When one alter switches to another, another hologram seems to take control overthe mind. This is like the instructions for the body are written on a card, andwhen the switch occurs, the holographic cards are shuffled like a deck of cards.In fact, the programming have used this analogy as part of their programmingcodes.

FALSE IMPLANTED MEMORIES

Once the truth about trauma-based mind-control began coming out, a massivecounterattack by the controlled establishment occurred. This counter attack wasthat you can not trust the memories of the victims. Numerous establishmentarticles call attention to memory research, especially memory research into howto implant an illusory memory.

Two examples of this massive counterattack areBruce Bower’s article in Science News, 8/24/96, pp. 126-127 entitled”Remembrance of Things False Scientists incite illusory memories andexplore their implications”.& Harvard psychologist Daniel L.Schacter’s book Searching for Memory (1996).

First, these countless articlesprove that the controlled psychiatric research community is working hard atdeveloping techniques to implant false memories. This is indeed a big part ofthe mind-control, producing cover memories and false identities and falsehistories for alters. However, these articles always ignore the enormousevidence of severe abuse and government/cult involvement in the lives ofcountless victims of mind-control. This author has seen first hand theIlluminati-satanic cult-CIA involvement in the lives of a number of thesepeople. The events of these people’s lives, which this author has oftenwitnessed, can’t be explained away by poor memory. Further, traumas that areso severe as to cause amnesia walls, are locked up by the mind and preserved.They are like a mummy in a tomb in Egypt, that is still locked up in itspreserved state. Memories that aren’t locked up can deteriate and becontaminated, just like a dead body that is left to rot, but programming traumasare not in that category of memory. Remember, the mind protect itself. Researchshows that the mind does not want to latch onto false memories that hurt it. Forinstance, when researchers try to get subjects to remember a kind parent hurtingthem, the mind will resist the false memory.

PERCEPTION CLOUDS MEMORY

The brain in order to be efficient uses its framework of knowledge–its worldview–in which to hang new incoming knowledge. This author’s Be Wise AsSerpents book considered this to be the biggest barrier to people coming to thetruth. Because education, television and society in general control howpeople’s framework of knowledge is built, and these frameworks are builtskilfully to exclude major truths that would expose how the World Order iscontrolling mankind, it is really difficult to speak to people aboutmind-control, and the control of the world in general.

The victim ofmind-control has frameworks built into his subconscious that make it difficultto drive the truth into their thinking. Memories are stored as they relate tothese frameworks. An efficient way around that is to speak and teach in way thatthe subconscious mind is spoken to, and the conscious barriers are by-passed.The mind puts up a grid to prevent non-approved information from coming in thatdoesn’t fit it’s accepted concept of truth. Much of this grid is fear based.The problem for the victim is that once their mind is bent a certain way by theprogrammers, it will naturally create a grid to protect the programmedworld-view.

This is why the external philosophies-news broadcasts-disinformation fromestablishment magazines, etc. that are layered in on top of programming, (seeChapter 12) are like a protective coat sprayed on to make sure the foundationdoesn’t weather over time. For instance, the front alters of some of the mostseverely tortured victims have latched onto the idea that Satanic Ritual Abusedoesn’t exist, and are actually some of the greatest public crusaders againstpeople believing that SRA exists. The external politically-correct view is inthis case protecting the deeper programming.

FALSE FEELINGS. Using drugs & hypnosis, and the creation story about Godbreathing things into existence, the “love” & “kindness”of the programmer is placed into Moriah the Wind. When this is done, should agatekeeper alter hear something negative about their master, they instantly gointo the melting (drug memory) where drugs made them feel one with theirprogrammer. This is refrained during programming as “the peace ofGod.”

ELDETIC IMAGERY. There is a type of visual imagery called eidetic imagery. 5to 10 % of children have it, but it is very rare in adults. Eidetic imagery issimilar to a photographic memory. People with eidetic imagery can look at anyobject or page of numbers and when they look away the image of what they haveseen is as clear as a photograph. They can focus on any detail of the image,enlarge it, make out more details than what they had originally seen, and thenthey can carry this image with them for several days, just like the rest of uscarry a photograph. This author has not seen much info on this, & believesthat further research into this topic might reveal some more methods that themind-control programmers are utilizing. Child-hood impressions & memoriescan have a far greater impact and retention than adult memories. This paragraphhas only introduced this subject of eidetic imagery & childhood vs adultmemory ability.

FINAL SUMMATION. The programming regimen destroys the victims sense of self,so that the person has only an identity within the cult. The victim can notexpress rage over their own victimization, but is encouraged by theIlluminati’s satanic beliefs to express violence & rage toward others,thereby creating a mechanism to help perpetuate the mind-control. The rage alsoseeps out as self-punishment. A deep loneliness sets into victims, & theydespair of hope. They see no place to turn to except to whatever cult iscontrolling them. This chapter has focused on the type of skills & knowledgepsychologists study, & how this knowledge can be applied to insuringcompliance by the slave.

p_9-2.jpg<input height=”500″ name=”I6″ src=”http://www.whale.to/b/sp/deepera/p_9-2.jpg” type=”image” width=”380″ />

CHAPTER 10: THE 10th SCIENCE — USING SPIRITUAL THINGS TO CONTROL A PERSON

What makes a programmed multiple tick? This chapter will provide some of themost important answers to that question. In this chapter, you will be providedwith important brand-new information.

PART A. INTRO on the IMPORTANCE of SPIRITUAL PROGRAMMING TACTICS

It is important for therapists and ministers to understand the spiritualramifications of what has been done. The witchcraft, spells, and demonology is away of life for the deeper alters. The programming and the hypnotic trances aredeeply embedded into the ritual life of the deeper alters of a mind-controlledslave. An enormous amount of suffering has transpired because therapists havedealt with obvious spiritual problems with psychological techniques thataren’t even remotely related to the real problem. Secular therapists can bequick to offer glib criticism of the subject of demonology, a subject they oftenknow nothing about. (While Christians generally acknowledge that mankind is in aspiritual war (cf. 2 COR 10:3-5), they too are generally ignorant of Satan’sdevices, and are not skilled in dealing with spiritual attacks from the world,flesh and the demons.)

An analogy for demonology is microbiology. Many peoplenever see a virus, and many people never see demons. Some people still debatewhether the germ theory of disease is correct. There will certainly bedifferences of opinion about demonology–anything said about it is bound to findsomeone who disagrees. But just like it has been useful for many sick people’shealth to deal with viruses, victims of Illuminati mind-control have found ithelpful to deal with demons. Demonology can be a useful subject forunderstanding programming from both a programmer’s point of view and adeprogrammer’s point of view. If this information is useful, then it will haveserved a purpose.

Men of God, who have found themselves in remote places (wheretrauma-based mind-control is not practiced), have found themselves confronted byobvious cases of demon possession that have been successfully handled bydeliverance prayer. This author has personally witnessed many people who havehad wonderful healings due to deliverances. I rejoice in their freedom. I praythat others who portray themselves as therapists would come to the same placethat they could appreciate healings even though they do not recognize thespiritual dimension of human life, or even better yet, that they would recognizethe spiritual side of humankind. In Asia, it was common for this author to seeflies swarm over people and food. Demons swarm around people in that type ofabundance. This is why the title Lord of the Flies (Beelzebub) is the name of achief demon, and is sometimes used as another name for Satan himself.

Part B. The History of the Programmed Golem

KABBALISTIC BLACK MAGIC

A number of the Illuminati bloodlines (and sects) that are involved intrauma-based total mind-control are Askenazi hasidic bloodlines. Legends aboundfrom the 15th century onward about how the Askenazi hasidic leaders createdgolem to serve them. These golem have been called “benevolent robots”.For those readers who are unaware of where the word golem came from, it is usedonce in the Word of God in Ps 139:16, “Your eyes [God’s eyes] saw mysubstance, being yet unformed. And in Your book they were written, the daysfashioned for me.” This is believed by the Kabballists to refer to Adamwhen he was only a body without a soul.

Golem are believed to be soullessbodies. One can almost hear the rationalization in medieval times when torture,and black magic or a trance state ended up creating an alter personality thatthis magical part was viewed as soulless, because it was only created via magic.This personality (alter) didn’t exist like real people, it was merely a golemin the magicians’ eyes–therefore it could be abused or used as a robot,because it was soulless.

The use of Cabalistic black magic in mainlineIlluminati programming in the deeper aspects has led this author to believe thatduring the torture of jews in the concentration camps–Dr. Mengele was assistedby some Askenazi hasidic black magic adepts who gave him some of the secretnames of God. The Cabalistic magic viewpoint is that there are creative powersintrinsic in God’s names. God’s names are used by the Illuminati for suchalters as the gems (jewels) from which other alters are created. For instancethe gems will be tortured while Cabalistic black magic is employed to createmore parts.

In such deeper aspects of programming, what occurs? Have theIlluminati programmers created new parts via psychologic torture techniques,have they created them with black magic or both? One thing is sure, if the”golem’s mind”–that is that if parts of the victim subjected totrauma-based mind-control remember what occurred, then it will be associatedwith a Cabalistic black magic ritual.

There are several other features ofCabalistic black magic that are important features of Illuminati programming.Many things pertaining to the mind-control have slipped out into public view atone time or another but are not recognized as having anything to do withprogramming. The European Jew Joseph Achron wrote the musical Golem Suite (1932)for an orchestra. The first piece of music introduces the golem and the lastpiece of music is the exact reverse mirror image of the first piece and itrepresents the disintegration of the golem.

In programming, the deeper altersmay have a musical cord to call them up, and the reverse of that cord will”disintegrate” them back into the mind. The following excerpts aretaken from Gershom Scholem’s book Kabbalah. (NY: Keter Pub. House Jerusalem,1974.) “General summaries of Kabbalistic doctrine rarely referred to its‘practical’ side [which Scholem go on to explain is black magic dealing withdemons and blood]…” Of course not, the practical side of the Kabbala isoccult–secret knowledge. It is the secrets of black magic. “Various ideasand practices connected with the concept of the golem [mind-controlled slave]also took their place in practical Kabbalah through a combination of featuresdrawn from the Sefer Yezirah and a number of magical traditions.” (Kabbala,p. 183) The practical side of the Kabbala which was concerned with creatinggolem employed trances, magic and visualization. Scholem writes, “In thiscircle the Sefer Yezirah was nearly always interpreted in the manner of Saadiahand Shabbetai Donnolo [who was into what is known as Satanism], with an addedtendency to see the book as a guide for both mystics and adepts of magic.

Thestudy of the book was considered successful when the mystic attained the vision of thegolem, which was connected with a specific ritual of a remarkable ecstatic[altered state] character.” (ibid., p.40) Two other points should be madeshowing the connection between medieval ashkenzim black magic practices and theprogramming going on today. The medieval jewish magicians would use the secretKabbalistic names of God in accordance with detailed sets of instructions to tryand create a golem. The golem in turn would say the combination of hebrewletters in reverse order. This has been done in modern programming.

Further, the “Seal of the Holy One” in medieval times was writtenon the forehead of the golem. This is the word “emet”. At some pointthe word’s first letter (an aleph) is erased and this leaves the word”met” which in Hebrew means “dead”. Such types of sealingshave also been done in modern times with deeper parts of slaves.

PART C. The 3 foundations: Loss of identity, Fear, and Demons

The programming has three basic foundations, fear, rejection of God (whichentails the rejection of who they are), and the entrapment by demonicpossession. If the person is paralyzed in fear, unable to seek God’s help,unable to know who they are in Christ & to see God’s plan for their life,and lives in bondage to demons, then the Illuminati programming will hold.

The Word of God states that each person is intricately designed by God and developed according to His plan (Ps. 139:14-16). A person’s self-image of who they areprofoundly affects everything else about them. The Illuminati want to insurethat the potential for good that the person is born with is destroyed orcontrolled. They want the victim to feel rejected and cheated by God. This iswhat Colossians 2:8 warns about, & then the next Bible verse states,”…for in Him dwelleth all the fullness of the Godhead bodily. And you arecomplete in Him…”

If the slave could ever be complete through theirdevotion to God, they would have no use for their Illuminati masters. TheScriptures in several Psalms teach that God made us in accordance with His plansfor our lives. Even today He is not finished with us. “We are (presentcontinuous action verb) His workmanship…” Eph. 2:10 A 124 pg. secret CIAbook Manual on Human Resources, 1983, (recently declassified via the Freedom ofInformation Act) states, “When a threat is used, it should always beimplied that the subject himself is to blame by using words such as, “Youleave me no other choice but to…” He should never be told to comply”or else!”… The threat of coercion usually weakens or destroysresistance more effectively than coercion itself. For example, the threat toinflict pain can trigger fears more damaging than the immediate sensation ofpain.”

UNDERSTANDING THE RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN FEAR & DEMONS

Dr. W. Grey Walter, of the British Burden Neurological Institute at Bristol,England did a lot of research involving drugs, electroshock and demonology.Walter would drill from 50 to 100 holes in his patients heads and then insertelectrodes into their heads. The patients would walk around with a beret-likecovering over their electrode implanted heads. The suborbital area of the brainwas determined by Walter as being the seat of demonic fears. Walter would causea small lesion in the paracingulate region to calm patients who saw demons. Thisin effect is like a miniature lobotomy. The electricity causes a selectivelesion. What his work showed was that there is a connection between the area ofthe brain that creates fear, and images of demons that people see.

The Word of God in 2 TIM 1:7 states categorically that “God hath notgiven us the spirit of fear; but of power, and of love, and ofa sound mind.” This means that the Spirit of fear comes from the Satanand his world system. The Spirit of fear is demonic, and it has the power toparalyze its victim. This Spirit of Fear is nothing less than a demonicanointing. That demonic anointing drives away positive angelic spirits. Christasked, “Why are ye so fearful? How is it that ye have no faith?” Thedemonic anointing of fear meant that faith was lacking. If we listen to the Wordof God, we get faith. (ROM 10:17). This is why it is important to theprogrammers that their deeper alters are programmed not to be able to read orhear the Word of God (Holy Bible). If the victim could hear the Word of God,they would receive faith, which would tamper with the demonic anointing of fear.

On a spiritual level, our fears are open doors for Satan to carry out an act. Itis a vicious bondage loop, because then the victim says, “I knew it wasgoing to happen, I knew from the beginning.” Little does the victim realizethat the Spirit of Fear within them, opened the door for Satan to carry out hiswill in that area. In fact, it is standard procedure within the secret societiesand intelligence agencies to identify what fears their opposition have, and thenbuild upon those fears. It does no good to spread disinformation about thingsthat the enemy is not fearful of. But if a fear is identified, they will playupon that as much as possible.

In Howard, Michael, Strategic Deception in theSecond World War. Vol. 5 of British Intelligence in the Second World War. W.W.Norton & Co.: NY, 1995, p.33-34, “One of the first rules of deceptionis to play on the real fears,…” On page 4 1-42 Howard quotes a Britishintelligence directive, “It may be taken as a principle of strategicdeception that it is neither economical in time nor productive in results toattempt to produce in the enemy anxiety over an area concerned with which theenemy himself has had no previous fear…Knowledge of the trend of enemy anxietywas therefore of very great value…On the foundation of fear, and having regardboth to inherent plausibility and to contact identifications which the enemy waslikely to have made, it was possible to build up a fictitious and misleadingstructure and to represent Allied capabilities and intentions as very differentfrom what they really were.”

In this author’s previous writings, theconnection between demonology and military tactics in general and specificallyBritish intelligence have been closely documented. Military structures are basedupon demon structures. It is no surprise then, that demons and intelligencegroups study to determine what a person’s fears are. And it is no wonder thatthey attempt to instil as many fears as possible into the victim.

DEMON POSSESSION & SPIRIT GUARDS

Christians are called upon to guard what was spiritually entrusted to them bythe using the Holy Spirit (2 TIM 1:14). The Illuminati do a mirror image ofthis, by layering in spirits (evil ones) to guard things in the system. Forinstance, in the VoL 2 book, the programming parallels to the movie Labyrinthwere discussed in chapter 5. It was mentioned how the dogs portrayed guardians.Demons named Toto are layered in to protect the spinner kittens. If one were totry to activate the spinner kittens without going through the proper chain ofcommand & codes, the guardian demons known as Totos, or after Dorothy’sToto will be activated. The spinner’s in fact are often called “Dorothys”.

Some other examples of guardians spirits that are placed into a system are Bes,the spirit that rules the dwarfs; Geb, the voice behind the earth God in asystem; Pan, who has various roles, including being a protector of the greenwood; and Shu, which is the voice “behind the wind” which controls theinternal weather within a alter system’s world. The foundations of a systemare the demons layered in at the beginning. Spirits of Confusion, Despair,Torment are called down by the programmers and laid in. Lying and PerverseSpirits are brought in too.

At first this may seem like very subjective sci-fito the reader. Hopefully, after the programming rituals are described in detail, anda basic foundation concerning what demons are is laid, the reader will havereceived a more systematic understanding of the topic. The goal is teach thereader programming as a programmer would understand it. The victim should not bemade ashamed of demonic attachments. That serves no spiritual benefit for thevictim, and only contributes more guilt and shame, and adds to the problem ofgiving them hope. The victim has been a helpless victim.

“Mystery”demons (which is not their actual name) are placed into the child when they areinnocent babies. Part of the power of the mystery demons, is that they are ableto remain anonymous within their host’s body. They remain in the host secretlygenerally for the person’s lifetime. These mystery demons have to answer totheir chain of command. Within a victim’s alter parts, are demons which havetheir own ranks and commanders. Christians who carry out deliverances will dealthose commanders.

The Catholic Church, which has been so active in trauma-basedmind-control and in placing in the Spirits of Legion into a victim, had one oftheir clergy write, “Evil is Someone, Someone who is multiple and who nameis legion…” (Mauriac, Francois. Life of St. Margaret of Cortona.) TheCatholic Church’s official public stance is that Demon possession is rare. OnAug. 15, 1972, Pope Paul VI put out a motu proprio which abolished the order ofexorcist. This office had already become rather rare, and besides included menwho were mind-control programmers. Cases of “demonic possession” ofCatholics are occasionally taken to places like Georgetown Hospital in Wash.D.C. which is run by Jesuits working in tandem with the CIA. Accounts ofexorcisms of Catholics are filled with clues that the victims of “demonicpossession” are victims also of trauma-based occult-based mindcontrol.

This writer, trying to explain a difficult subject (demonology), feelsfortunate to be able to recommend a book which does a good job of explaining it,this is Howard O. Pittman’s book Demons. (Foxworth, MS: Philadelphian Pub.House, c. 1988). I originally read the book in 1992, and have had it recommendedby those who work in the area of demonology. The book is written by a devoutChristian who worked 28 years in the field of law enforcement during his life.The book explains such things as: how man is made in the image of God (and assuch is a clone, so to speak of God;) How demon possession has come about dueto man’s sovereign will allowing it; & How demons can interact with thephysical world.

He explains how Satan despatches orders from his throne which gothrough a chain of command, and how special emphasis is placed on Christians. Heexplains the forms of demons, their expertise, how they can read minds, and howthey have no love for their master, and no love for themselves. Nor does theirmaster have any love for them. (I, Fritz Springmeier, your author havediscovered in talking to people for years, that it is essential for people tograsp that the mind of Satan is devoid of love, and that where love doesn’tseek its own, Satan’s mind always has his own interest in both mind &action. Everything in his world system is functioning for a goal of his, theyare not random events, because he is a control-freak.)

Pittman describes warringdemons–which look like giant humans and are the cream of Satan’s crop.’These warring demons are assigned to formulate wars upon the earth. WhilePittman is a spirit-led Christian, it is interesting that a non-Christianhistorian/author William Bramley, (of the Gods of Eden), who believes that the”aliens” were viewed as angels, has found traces of proof that thealiens (angels) were involved in the creation of wars down through the historyof mankind. “Now the Spirit speaketh expressly, that in the latter timessome shall depart from the faith, giving heed to seducing spirits and doctrines of devils; Speaking liesin hypocrisy; having their conscience seared with a hot iron;” 1 TIM 4:1-2.

Pittman writes about 1 TIM 4:1-2, “In this passage of scripture, we aretold that in the last days the devils would have their own doctrine. We knowthat if the Bible tells us that devils would have their own doctrines, then,most assuredly the Bible would tell us what these doctrines would be. Evidenceof what the devils will be teaching is found in the following passage ofscripture: ‘But he knowing their thoughts, said unto them, Every kingdomdivided against itself is brought to desolation; and a house divided against ahouse falleth. If Satan also be divided against himself, how shall his kingdomstand? Because ye say that I cast out devils through Beelzebub.’ (Luke11:17-18)

From this very scripture, it is clear what the devils will be teachingas doctrine. They will be teaching that THERE ARE NO SUCH BEINGS AS DEMONS!Where are these demons teaching their doctrine? They are teaching it in thechurches to the Christians! They are teaching their doctrine to the very oneswho have the potential to believe that these demons are real and can exposethese beings. If Satan did try to reveal himself and his helpers, then his housewould be divided.” Pittman warns, “From congregation to congregation,from one church to another church throughout all this land, we find preacherafter preacher playing down the existence of demons and even the existence ofSatan! Then, there are others who, when they admit that Satan and his demons arereal, deemphasize their importance and capability. Not only are local ministersdoing this, but many Christian authors are doing this through their books…Thefalse doctrines of devils are intended to enhance the anonymity of Satan and hisangels. Much of this misteaching is spread through good Christians who have beensold a lie and really believe what they say.’’ The Word of God is clear thatnot one sin entered into this world without Satan. Every sin committed bymankind is (according to the Word of God) the result and influence of Satan.However, because Satan and his demons are masters at deception and at stayingbehind the scenes, and remaining anonymous they are not discovered. They arebetter at such deception than the intelligence agencies that are Illuminatifronts, and to give credit where due, the NSA, CIA, and MI-6 are good at whatthey do.

The programmer will be looking for methods to open up a person to demons, andhe will be setting up scenarios so that the victim will reject the Spirit of Godin their life. 1 JN 5:18 teaches that a person’s identity in Christ protectsagainst the wicked one, so the victim’s identity in Christ will be stolen verysoon by the programmers. According to the Word of God, submission and humilitybefore God are also said to be protections against evil spirits.(cf. JS 4:7,& 1 PTR 5:6,8,9). Resistance to catching demons, involves a person “notgiving place” to the demons, (Eph. 4:27) and to be strengthened by Christ(Phil. 4:13). How does this happen? The Word of God teaches us that the Spiritof God in our life repels demons naturally. A close walk of fellowship with theSpirit of God is one spiritually natural immune-builder. We need to get Christdeeper and deeper into our lives. However, the programmer will deflect this, andsay that submission and humility before God means to submit to some churchauthority, and of course this church authority will be part of the mind-controlabuse system.

The Use of Giving Demonic Assistance to entrap

One of the principles (giving tactics) of the spirit world is that if you goto get help from demons, they have a spiritual opportunity to enter into yourlife in other ways. This involves spiritual laws. People, who have been healedby occult healers, have discovered that it set them up for demonic activity in their life. Of course, it is easy towrite this, but often only the victims of occult help, who have already learnedthe lesson the hard way, believe it.

The ultimate that Lucifer can pretend togive is divinity. Divinity is sometimes symbolized by the Illuminati as an 8 onits side or the infinity symbol. The divine within a hierarchy member is calledthe High Self. It also goes by the name Dian Y Glas or Blue God in thehierarchy’s parlance. The given names of Joan, Janicot, Jean, and Jonet arepopular in generational witchcraft families because they mean the High Self. Thecabalistic name for the High Self (internal divinity) is NESHAMAH. According toIlluminati hierarchy beliefs, the High Self can only be communicated to viasymbols, music and myth that go through the unconscious mind. In other words,don’t talk to it, show it. This is part of the reason Illuminati witch covensmake noise in ceremonies, dance and use objects, they believe these areessential to communicate to their High Self.

The Use of Occult Focal Points

Another principle (giving tactic) of the spirit world is that focal points(occult objects) are used to bring demonic entities into a person’s life. Ican not write a technical manual on the mechanics of how or why the presence ofevil spirits is aided by amulets, rings, occult jewelry, rock & roll albums,etc., but the fact is, that demonic entities ARE AIDED. It is common formind-controlled Illuminati slaves to keep demonized nick-nacks given by theirprogrammers, handlers or other contact people. Generally, the mind-controlledslave’s front system is unaware of the spiritual ramifications of the occultobjects.

The ancient grimoires are used in rituals & programming. Even if it isseldom that therapists work that deep in a system, it still might be useful toprovide a list (for reference sake) of the ancient grimoires which are used toinvoke demons:

Almadel, the

Arbatel of Magic, the

Black Pullet, the

Book of Albertus Magnus, the

Enchiridion of Pope Leo

Fourth Book of Cornelius Agrippa

Grand Grimoire, the

Grimoire of Pope Honorius

Grimorium Verum, the

Heptameron, the

Lesser Key of Solomon (aka Goetia)

Key of Solomon (aka Legemeton)

Pauline Art, the

Sword of Moses, the

Theosophia Pneumatica

The Use of giving occult power for SOMETHING IN RETURN. One of the tactics ofcontrolling a person is to give them occult power. Generally, people who havepsychic abilities and other occult powers, are reluctant to seek a trueChristian faith. Because they enjoy the power they have, they will not tradeleaving the occult world and their power behind for freedom.

In the case of many mind-controlled slaves, the programmer will create alegitimate spirit-filled Christian front. He knows that the spiritual principle,”A double-minded man is unstable in all his ways” will work in hisfavor. Even though he creates a religious front that is opposed to what theprogrammer wants, a thousand-minded person has no choice but to rely on theprogrammer. The programmer is the only one who can bring order out of chaos. Thevictim is so unstable with all his or her programmed and hurting parts, thatthese parts need their programmer to function. Evil spirits are like unwelcomevisitors to our home. They can even be compared to an unwelcome mouse runningand hiding in our house. That a visitor or mouse troubles us does not mean thathe possesses us. Christians have problems with unwelcome mice as well asunwelcome demons. Mice corrupt our homes, likewise demons come to corrupt theHouse of God.

The programmer knows what encourages demonic activity. This is whycertain occultic structures are built into the mind, and why the systems are setup to carry out occult rituals regularly. Some victims of mind-control areunfortunately going to witches for their therapy. A therapist who is a paganwitch, and who encourages further occult activity, is preventing the victim fromgaining freedom. This is because there is a spiritual foundation to much of thecontrol. (Readers would be surprised at how many psychologists are part of theoccult world.)

How much of our life has been turned over to Christ? ManyChristians have what could be termed “hidden rooms” and hiddencompartments in their life & their thinking which they have not given toChrist. In fact, many Christians compartmentalize their life into their secularjob and their Sunday of Christianity. In this sense, their lives are like ahouse with many rooms, many of which are not given to Christ, but are availablefor other spirits. Even the non-multiple Christian will have problems withcompartmentalization in life opening a door to demons. But Christ asked hisdisciples to go farther than just stay in fellowship, he commanded them to healand cast out demons. MT 10:7,8. He also commanded his disciples to evangelize.The strongest deliverance have been seen on the cutting edge of evangelism, as atestimony to God’s power.

DOES IT GLORIFY DEMONS TO CAST THEM OUT?

The threat of deliverance has the Satanic leaders of the Illuminati scaredenough that they have actively disseminated a doctrine among the Christianchurches that it gives power to Satan to believe in demons. There is a kernel oftruth here, but it doesn’t give glory to Satan to defeat demons and to expelthem. If you were fired from your job, would that glorify you? No. Defeatingdemons is actually showing how weak they are, not glorifying them. Healing anddeliverance are part of the ministry of freedom that Christ demonstrated to hisdisciples, and they are to accompany the preaching of freedom (evangelism).

PART D. A complete Chronology of how the victim experiences the earlyspiritual programming. (by Cisco)

Steps of Programming

It is important to understand the nature and the sequence of these standardprogramming rituals. I, Cisco, have decided to reveal them so that thetherapists will comprehend better what the programming is really all about. Wehave touched on a few of these rituals in our two previous books, but wehaven’t spelled them out. These programming rituals in real life are extremelytraumatizing, even to the hardened cult parents who often must offer theirchildren up to abuse that even they don’t want to happen to their children.When these programming rituals happen to a child, they are so severe that theysplit the child’s mind. We don’t want therapists and readers falling apartby reading about these programming rituals, so you will find the descriptions ofthese rituals are clinical, and are written without a great deal of emotional content.

a. The mother-fetus trauma

We have written about the traumas given to the mother and fetus in chapter 1of this book and chapter 1 of the Vol. 2 book. Between these two books, thereare approximately 9 pages concerning the traumas at this pre-birth stage. Itcould also be explained that the intensity and nature of the pre-birth traumasrelate to whether the mother is Illuminati or not.

During the 1940’s-’50sthe Illuminati made it a high priority to marry members of the Illuminati toChristians for the purposes of infiltrating the churches. After a 20 year periodof intense infiltration to such groups as the Southern Baptists, the Mennonites,the Pentecostal Holiness, the Four-Square, and the Assemblies of God, then theycould rely upon their members within those groups to generationally continuetheir presence within these groups. Initially, they wanted the infiltration tobe covered by marriage into these denominations. If a mother were not of theIlluminati, she was typically prepared for an overwhelming trauma to beadministered during her pregnancy. If she drank coffee or tea, she could begiven potent herbs daily to set the stage for later drugs administered duringthe torture. The herbs set the stage for drugs which would make the mind morepliable to hypnosis, because many Christians are resistent to hypnosis. When theIlluminati would finally by force grab and traumatize the mother, their goalwould be to see if they could get the mother to renounce (blaspheme) Christ.They hoped to use this to blackmail the person into future submission and shame.They also were gaining experience into what kind of resistance they would facein the final takeover. An hypnotic trigger would be attached to this torturememory, and then the mother would be hypnotically made to forget the

b. The Apple-Woodsman ritual

The powerful Tin Man Ritual is described on page 103 of the Vol. 2 Formulabook. It is where the parent(s) presents the child to Lucifer, “the god oflight”. The Tin Man appeared in the first picture (page 4) of ourillustrated Guide to Monarch Programming. It was positioned there because it isoften the first ritual memory. The child eats an apple that is poisoned anddies, and then is brought back to life because the coven has the antidote onhand. Next, the parent dedicates the child to Lucifer; if not, then the childwill have its head severed by the Tin Man’s ax. This dedication mocks thePentecostal dedication. Bear in mind, that some parents and programmers can onlyjustify what they do, because they feel they are following “Lucifer’sorders.” They will say, “We do it to please Lucifer.” They feelLucifer wants the child in its purest state, so they will do the moon childceremony in the womb to allow Lucifer to plant his spirits in the fetus (whichis a mockery of God’s spirit in the Christ-Child.)

c. The 1st Ritual Theft of Birthright

When the child victim is four, this ritual typically is done to them duringthe 10 days to 2 weeks of rituals done around Easter. The ritual is not alwaysdone at this time. If both parents are Illuminati, then their primary job is tosee their children get programmed; but if only one parent is Illuminati, thenthe group may have to work with the child whenever they can manipulate some timeto do so. Also the Illuminati have so many children to put through programming,that many simply do not start this ritual at Easter. But if they are not done atEaster, they may be told when it is done that it is the time around Easter. Theprogrammers have certain windows of time for certain programs and schedules tofollow for each child. They can be untrue to the real calendar date, and stillset the internal clock/calendars of the slave correctly later.

This first ritual is to make sure the child victim experiences a stagedrejection of God where they are found unworthy to be in “His’ Book ofLife. This ritual like all the others that we will describe in this series aresealed with rape and the implantation of demons.

d. The 2nd Ritual Theft of Birthright

This second ritual is done shortly after the first ritual, generally a fewdays after. It consists of a death, burial and resurrection ritual. To die meansdeath towards God, burial means to bury all that makes up a person’s worth,and resurrection means to be resurrected with a new name and birthed to Satan.This and the 1st theft ritual are designed to remove any bonds the deeper altersmight ever conceive of having with Almighty God.

e. The Satanic Wedding Prog. Ritual

Within days of the 2nd theft ritual, the Illuminati will follow with a mocksatanic wedding. Usually the father will marry his daughter, but there is achain of responsibility and if the father can’t sexually abuse his child, thenthe grandfather is next in line, and then the uncle, and then the programmer.They will serve as the satanic covering for the child. At this point therejection by God is still fresh on the child’s mind, and they want the childto at least remember the rejection, whether they remember the incident or notdepends. The child may already have dissociated the previous week or two, so theprogrammer may simply tell it “REMEMBER THE FEAR WHEN GOD DIDN’T LOVEYOU.”

The child may really be looking forward to this wedding. They may have beendressed up nicely, and may be excited about marrying their father, even thoughhe looks like a giant to the little infant. When their dress is pulled up andthey are abused, then the fun stops.

f. The Lockup of the Guardian Angel

The Internal Self Helper, also called the Guardian Angel of the mind, ismagically locked up by the demonic power of the programmers, and a shrewd lyingdemon substituted in its place. The evil spirits that will be laid in will bethe totems of the victim’s bloodline–the spirits of the person’s bloodlineswho are to help guide the person.

Many people in the New Age movement who areunder total mind-control speak about their guardian angel or their totem guidingthem. An example of a total mind-controlled slave doing this are the Indianspirit guides that help Loretta Lynn. Hillary Clinton consults the spiritEleanor Roosevelt. In order to familiarize the child with the proper demons theywill be dressed up in a costume that resembles the bloodline spirit they are tobecome acquainted with. They will participate in a ritual in this costume.

g. The Revelation of Demons

At this point, both the front (the light side) and the deeper occult darkside alters will be allowed to see the demons that are layered in. The frontside sees them in their Luciferian form, and are scared out of their wits. Theymay respond to this by having an ongoing fear of monsters under their bed. Thefront’s fear will keep the front away from trying to go deeper into thesystem. Later on in adult life, the Illuminati may want the front part of thesystem to go through a “deliverance”, so they will think they havedealt with everything, and they don’t need to look further. (For instance,this trick was done to a programmed multiple this author has worked with, theresult being, the victim gave up any type of therapy or helpful work, becausethey were sure they’d received the answer to their problems, which would benice if it were true, but isn’t.) On the flip side, even though the dark sidealters are also scared of the demons, who are quite terrorizing when seen byhumans, the inherent need of humans to look for supernatural help pulls themtoward the demonic. It is an inborn survival trait in most humans to look tosupernatural help. By seeing the spiritual (even though these are dark spiritual forces), it becomes anormal function for the deeper alters to commune with the dark spiritual realm.

h. Providing Satanic Toys

The deeper alters will be given candles, knives and other ritualparaphernalia to play with. The establishment department stores with all theirdemonic toys are helpful, for the parent only needs to go to the localdepartment store to buy his children occult toys.

i. The Participation Ritual

Soon after the wedding ceremony, another ceremony takes place where the childdresses up in the cult’s red and black ceremonial robes. This is meant tointegrate them into the cult family. It is an opportunity for the child to feellike it is part of the group and its rituals.

j. The layering in of witches/monster scripts

The normal American fairy tales, which are filled with stories of monstersand witches, are read to the child. The goblins, warlocks, vampires, and witchesthey hear about will help lay a mental foundation for what will happen later.

k. Cult Fairy Tales are told

Next, the people in the child’s life who are guiding the programming willtell the child programming stories, such as the Wizard of Oz stories and AliceIn Wonderland. In the 50’s and 60’s, the Tall Book of Make Believe waspopular. For instance the character Mr. Moon became a foundational part of theprogramming. Over the years the Wizard of Oz, Alice In Wonderland, and MotherGoose seem to have been overall favorites. The child will most often be in atrance state when these story lines are told. The children will have the storiesrepeated and they are expected to memorize these scripts. Because theprogrammers will build upon the child’s awareness of these stories, thestories are modified to better fit the future programming.

For instance, if aprogramming team is going to use the Goldilocks and the 3 Bears story, theymight modify the story like this: The 3 bears and Goldilocks went for a walk.Goldilocks was somewhere she shouldn’t have been, so she was eaten up by thebears. Bears will eat you up. Policemen are like bears. A Policeman found her?Do you know what happened to her? Goldilocks got locked up and put in a cage. Ormaybe they might say, Goldilocks was sitting where she wasn’t supposed to.–At that moment the chair is pulled out from underneath the child and the childis probed with a stun gun.

In the last 20 years, tens of thousands of childrenare getting “Pleiadian” programming, and it is not known what basefairy-tales are being used for this type of programming, or if they are usingsci-fi stories as the base. There are tens of thousands of children withprogramming that can be activated to make them think they were raised on Alcyonein the Pleiades. This is to part of the Grand Deception of the End Times.

l. The Ritual to Test Loyalty to Oaths

The next step is to test the loyalty of the child slave to the oaths thatwere extracted from it. To prove the child’s loyalty, the coven demands thatthe child sacrifice another child. From what we witnessed, even after all theabuse and hypnotic tampering of the child up to this point, not one single childwas “loyal” to the oath. The inborn aversion to taking a human’slife is strong, and the child will still refuse to do it. Therefore, the cultwill have a member guide the child by taking the child’s hand and forcing itto sacrifice the innocent little life before them. In spite of their reluctance,the forced act begins to rip the fabric of the child slave’s mind and to searits conscience. The cult will be sure to insure that the child is made to feelresponsible, and that they are given guilt and shame for the deed.

Once the innocent victim is sacrificed, the child slave is required to cutthe bloody heart out and eat it. The child has already been groomed for this,because the cult has been feeding blood in their milk as a pablum. The child hasbeen allowed to get very hungry and then given blood so that in the end hungeris associated with death, and blood is associated with satisfying that hunger.

m. Prog. building blocks- Nursery Rhymes

The Nursery rhymes are now layered in. There is something mentally powerfulabout rhymes. Mother Goose nursery rhymes have been popular for over a halfcentury for programming little children. The child’s mind will refuse somethings (such as it distaste for killing an innocent child in the previousritual), but the child’s mind doesn’t realize anything devious about theadorable nursery rhymes. The child’s mind will not put up any barriers tolearning them. The child has no idea that by hearing these rhymes they arehelping lay the foundation for their own mind-control.

n. The Hell Fire Ceremony

This ceremony is basically the burning up of a child to instil in the childvictim fear of disobedience and to show them what hell is all about. The reasonthis is done will be explained soon. This ceremony is done with one of fourpossibilities, a. a real baby, b. a dead miscarriage, c. a stage pretend child,d. movies.

For sure, the Illuminati will have a real bonfire, and there will bethe stench of death. They will play tapes of screaming, terrified children toamplify how bad it will be in hell. Why do the Illuminati want the children tofear hell? First, if they ever do learn about the Bible, they will “knowfor sure” that this is the punishment that the God who rejected them wantsfor them. Next, the Illuminati tell the children that IF they are bad, they willsuffer in hell, but if they are good in the cult, Satan their father willprotect them and let them rule with him in hell. They want the child to beterrified of Hellfire and Brimstone. This ceremony is often done where there isa crematorium. The Presideo in CA was popular because a underground crematoriumwas there. Bear in mind, that the child by this time has lost its true self, andis simply in terror at watching a child like themselves turned to ashes. Incertain types of hot fires, the child is turned to ashes so quick that thechild’s figure becomes a silhouette of ashes. The Illuminati will then beginteaching the child an important item, they will teach it to take on the spiritof the child through guilt manipulation. They’ll say, “Don’t you feelreally bad that this happened to her, but you can fix it by internalizing her toyourself. Take the spirit of the child into you.”

o. The Cutting the Penis Ritual

This ritual is just as it sounds. The childis forced to emasculate another male. This ritual is intended to be severe. Itagain forces the child to choose between following their oaths or following whattheir heart tells them is a right. Because they will again refuse to carry outtheir oath of obedience, and will again be helped to obey, they will be an easy preplanned target of lots of shaming and guilt. This is one of the primaryfoundations for the shame and guilt that is built into the dark side alters. Thechild will be hit with sticks by the cult, while the Illuminati coven snarl,”Shame on you, you didn’t obey as you promised.” It is at thisritual, that the Illuminati coven will first begin to double-bind the victim bythreatening them, “It’s you or them [the person the child slave is tohurt], you choose.” The little child sees two kinds of people in life,victimizers and victims. He or she will generally choose to be a victimizer.There will other times when the slave will not be given a choice and will haveto suffer pain during the rituals.

p. The Traitor’s Death Ritual

The child victim will be left relatively drug free so they canhave full awareness of the Traitor’s Death which they witness. A personwill receive the horrible traitors death during a ritual. The strong satanicalters will be built off the dissociated pieces caused by this ritual. And as isstandard practice the ritual is sealed by a rape of the child to layer in moredemons.

This ends Cisco’s very informative chronology. Let’s sort out some ofthe specific programming maneuvers.

Part E. Specific Programming maneuvers. The MANIPULATION OFNEAR-DEATH-EXPERIENCES (NDEs)

People, who undergo Illuminati programming, will be candidates for near-deathexperiences. In several of the programming scripts, the victim is brought to thepoint of clinical death and then revived. In hospital settings, resuscitation ofheart failure and other deathly events like surgery has produced tens ofthousands of cases of Near-death experiences (NDE’s). According to RaymondMoody, who worked with or experienced people experiencing NDEs, the typical NDEinvolves the person hearing himself announced dead. Then a loud ringing orbuzzing noise occurs and a long, dark tunnel appears with a light at the end.The person will meet others and a being of light, and this light-being will playback events in the person’s life, and evaluate his life, and then the personreaches a point where he must go back.

People, who experience a NDE areprofoundly changed. Any profound change that follows patterns can be manipulatedand the Illuminati have discovered this is simply just another way to manipulatepeople. The NDE experiences follow patterns. We will not go into the details ofwhy most of the NDE explanations can’t be the actual explanations, but thebottom like is that most explanations fall short and do not explain thephenomena. The frequency and consistency of a tunnel being seen with a light atthe end rules out hallucinations in terms of symbology. The mind could just aswell see a gate, or keyhole, or a door as an entrance to a new world butdoesn’t. Some researchers believe that the answer lies in the structure of thevisual cortex, and that the dying person’s center of the visual field receivesan ever increasing electrical noise while dying which produces an everincreasing circle of light being seen.

On the flip side, for those who have abiblical perspective, there are explanations that also seem to explain thephenomena. At any rate, it’s been known after Heinrich Kiuver published hisresearch in the 1930’s that the brain has four constants in its Near-Deathhallucinations: the cobweb, the grating (or lattice), the spiral and the tunnel.Drugs have been found to produce an experience similar to NDE at times too.Whatever spiritually and physically happens to cause a NDE–and there is lots ofdebate as to the mechanics of the cause–the common experiences that people haveduring NDE’s provides a pattern for the programmers to manipulate. Variouspeople, the Illuminati, some Christians, and others believe that Eccl. 12:6-7,–which is talking about when a man dies (“dust return to the earth as itwas”) and his spirit returning to God who gave it,–these various peoplebelieve that the silver cord spoken about in verse 6 is a cord that links aperson to his god. This verse makes a good verse for the Illuminati who doprogram in wheels and silver cords into their slaves linking them to theirpretending-to-be-god masters.

FINE-TUNED

One of the side “benefits” of the brain-stem scarring, the repeatedtortures, the attention that is expected if the slave is to survive, etc. isthat they may develop extremely sensitive perception. This extremely sensitiveperception may come across as ESP, but it is really subconscious understandingof things such as body language.

HIDING THE INTERNAL SELF-HELPER

Psychologists have discovered that deep in the mind is an area of thinkingthey refer to as the Internal Self-helper. Psychologists who attempt to helpprogrammed multiples have been told to find the ISH (internal self-helper) ofthe victim. Sometimes the “ISH” have surfaced as ‘‘angels’’and ‘‘spirit guides’’ in a system. They may regulate which alters comeout and hold the body. The therapist may point out to a person that angels andspirit guides are never internal, unless they are demonic. The Christian ispermitted scripturally to only be led by one internal spirit guide, and that’sis the Holy Spirit. In some systems, the slave’s “Holy Spirit” mayturn out to be a cult ISH.

The programmers were many steps ahead of thepsychologists. Even years before the psychologists began looking for the ISH tohelp them, the programmers had foreseen this and had their bases covered. Ineveryday life, for normal people, the internal self-helper serves as a type ofguardian angel over each person. The programmers during the early LSD tripswatch for the ISH. When it surfaces, they lock it up in the person’s mind, andreplace it with a demonic generational spirit, which is commanded to report anywork done in the system to the master. When psychologists find the ISH and askfor its help, the ISH does cooperate with them, but this demonic ISH is also oneof the principal reporting agents that reports back to the master inphotographic detail everything that the therapist does. This is one big reasonthe programmers have always been several steps ahead of the therapeuticcommunity.

INTERJECT DISKS

Splintered souls captured on Interject disks is a subject that is beyondverification but is mentioned here because therapists and “UFO abductees”,and SRA victims of mind-control may run into it. Readers must draw their ownconclusions as to what soul interjects are–whether merely a deception, a newtechnology, or magical demonic manifestation.

Hermetic magic is a nasty form ofmagic from ancient Egypt. There are a few of the top Illuminati Grand Masterswho believe they are capable of carrying out rituals to raise the dead andcreate interjects onto interject disks. Specialized magic is performed on thedead to raise zombies in order to splinter the zombie’s soul. The Grand Masterthen believes he can place the splinters of the soul on interject disks, andplace these interjects into live slaves.

Interestingly, humans claiming contactwith “aliens” have claimed that the aliens can separate a human soulfrom its body, keep it captured, recondition that soul, and finally implant thesoul into another body. Some researchers are claiming that they have evidence ofa holographic energy template that is associated with a physical body. Is thisthe soul? They believe that this template works with cellular geneticmechanisms. There is certainly more to learn about what humans are, perhaps someday these claims about zombie souls will have some scientific merit, but for nowthey lay in the realm of Illuminati Grand Master high magic.

I have reported upon Illuminati beliefs and practices. Likewise, ananthropologist will report on the practices & customs of a people, whetheror not the anthropologist personally practices or believes like the people heobserves. Of course, these Luciferian (or should one say satanic practices) areabhorrent and the author has never practiced them, so the author can’t speakfrom the viewpoint of a witness, but he can describe as a reporter the views ofIlluminati witnesses.

One Illuminati belief is that they have managed to designequipment that can catch the soul of a dying person. This capability will play arole in the reign of the anti-Christ. When the Anti-Christ dies, his soul willbe captured and he will be resurrected with demons animating the body. When avery high ranking Illuminati adept goes berserk, the Illuminati will insure thatthey preserve the soul of the man by killing him with equipment that isportrayed in the recent movie Lord of Illusion. This is a mask-brace that fits over theportals of the head and then is screwed into the head to capture the soul as ittries to escape the dying body. Then demons are called in to live off the soulmatter.

Normally, according to Illuminati occult knowledge, the demons can onlylive a short time within a body, but by the mask-brace capture of a body’ssoul, the demons can inhabit a body for a longer length of time and create thewalking dead. This is that “line between heaven and hell” that themovie refers to. The Illuminati believe that the highest gift they can giveLucifer are captured souls. They will place souls into jars. This is the highestmost secret magic of the Illuminati. Notice, that during the Lord of Illusionmovie, jars are smashed during the ritual where a soul is captured.

Interviewswith alien abductees reveals that some of them believe that the aliens arestealing the souls of mankind. The similarity of the Illuminati beliefs aboutdemons, and the perceived actions of the aliens by abductees are remarkablysimilar. Also the Illuminati have secretly used special tubing during millionsof abortions performed by their abortion clinics to capture the souls of theaborted children. (This is author is not making any claims that they do ordon’t succeed, but they believe they are succeeding.)

The movie Lord ofIllusion is full of Illuminati/high level Masonic symbology. The movie beginswith programming concepts, first the galaxies & stars, then the yellow brickroad, then a dust storm… An Illuminati phrase “Flesh is a trap, magicsets you free” is mentioned in the movie. In contrast with the movie, thesethings are not written to entertain the reader, but with the good-natured intentthat therapists and victims may gain something by knowing better what is goingon to these Illuminati mind-control victims.

The Illuminati believe that theycan suck the life spirit out of a person through intercourse with what they callthe Eye of Horus (the anus). This is why the leaders of this World Order (suchas George Bush, Bill Clinton, and tens of thousands of others) are into sodomy,they are trying to vampirize all the years of life out of the victim to gain alonger life. Some of the sad child victims, who have been kept exclusively forthis purpose do look like the life force has been sucked out of them. Sodomy hasits own secret chamber on the cabalistic tree of life.

A metaphysical UFO typemagazine entitled WE Walk-Ins for Evolution puts out articles on how soulswalk-into a body and how souls braid themselves to other souls. For instance,there was an article “Soul Braiding” in the April-June, ‘96 issue ofWE. This appears to be a reframing of various practices that the Illuminaticarry out to demonize and control the minds of their people. Rather than speakof a demonization or an interject, front alters of slaves who are not Christianscan use metaphysical terms like “soul braiding”. The words soul andspirit, and concepts attached to those words are important in programming.Programmed Mormon children will think they have the “Spirit of Elijah”in them, and will robotically sing their programming, “Follow the Prophet,follow the prophet.”

WHITE GOLD, other information

Since writing about powdered white gold’s ability to make a personclairvoyant, in Vol. 2, it’s come to my attention that Nexus magazine has hada recent article on this. For those who are interested in crystal travel,crystal travel is an OBE also known as astral projection and is covered in theVol. 2 book as astral projection. Besides the silver cord, some victims havementioned a supernatural dark red violet umbilical that connects them to theAntiChrist.

<input height=”610″ name=”I7″ src=”http://www.whale.to/b/sp/deepera/p_10-1.jpg” type=”image” width=”375″ /> picture 1 p_10-1.jpg information about the picture

This is a Masonic drawing called “The Second Portal”. it shows nudeboys facing a throne undergoing some type of magical ritual. The drawing appearsIn The Hidden Life in Freemasonry after pg. 198. in 1926, Charles W. Leadbeater,a 33º Freemason, printed his book The Hidden Life in Freemasonry. This book waswritten for people involved in Luciferian rituals In the higher more occultrites of Freemasonry. In the preface, Leadbeater talks of butterflies (ppviii-ix), which has the double meaning in the occult of souls (spirits). in thelast chapter, chapter 10, he gives Masonic rituals to Invoke angels (demons)through Egyptian magic. In these Masonic temples, the checkerboard square isused in a similar fashion as a magic circle for a coven. This picture is givenas a paper trail to show the sex-magic rituals that take place within variousMasonic groups.

The Illuminati Sisters of Light alters rarely appear in therapy because theyare used in horrendous Masonic rituals, and must be buried very deep in thesystem. Typically, a Sister of Light would be blindfolded and taken down manyflights of steps and through tunnels and would end up in an elaborateunderground Masonic temple. She would be used as a nymph. In one ritual, forexample, she’d be given a golden circle band for her forehead, a cloak with ared lining, and a tunic of black silk with golden rays. The hall would haveimportant masons of society who would be sitting in a semi-circle. The Sistersof Light are given to Beelzebub in an excruciating marriage ceremony. There is aveil which fails into 4 equal parts, which mean the 4 corners of the world. Thesisters take oaths around the compass, so that the victim feels locked in nomatter what corner of the world they go to.

<input height=”555″ name=”I8″ src=”http://www.whale.to/b/sp/deepera/p_10-2.jpg” type=”image” width=”418″ />

<input height=”500″ name=”I32″ src=”http://www.whale.to/b/sp/deepera/p_11-1.jpg” type=”image” width=”432″ />

This was some early art work by Cisco to convey what her mind felt as amind-controlled slave. What the picture shows is the hand of the puppet mastercontrolling his puppet. The puppet is floating–not grounded in reality, butdissociated from the external world in order to survive. All the cities andinternal worlds are grids. Everything attaches to grids. The color programmingcan be seen in the Green, Blue, Silver, Gold, Red, and Yellow colors of thegrids. The puppet is totally in the hands of the puppet master and its hands arein a submissive hold, while the puppet master has his fingers covertly wrappedaround the left side of the puppet’s head.

CHAPTER 11: SCIENCE No. 11- INTERNAL CONTROLS

A. TEACHING OCCULT PHILOSOPHIES

This is an important ongoing aspect of the mind-control. Vol. 2, introducedthis subject:

“Learning plays an important part in perception. TheProgrammers try to get their victims to subscribe to philosophies and ideas thatwill make it hard for them to rebel against their controllers. This is what istermed indoctrination. The same methods of teaching that others [any othereducator would] find useful are employed. Ways of thinking are incorporated bythe slave via handlers, programmers, and the cult they belong to. “Everyonetries in their own way to make sense of life. This is a natural brain function,so that the human mind can understand how to deal with the future. The mindtakes raw data, and then applies some type of logic, and comes to conclusions.Once accepted these conclusions can be as hard as nails, and they will defy anyattempt to change them, even in the light of new evidence. If the Programmer issmart enough, he can get an alter to logically believe anything. Once the beliefis embedded, it will remain there tenaciously.”

In the previously book, itwas discussed how indoctrination is done. I will provide more of the details onhow indoctrination is accomplished, because it is not being done via rationallogical thinking. Rather, the programmer or cult leaders want to access aperson’s non-logical imaginative right brain. In order to do that he mustdistract the left brain.

Bill Clinton, an Illuminati handler of slaves, and agood liar, has his speeches prepared in such a way that they take advantage ofthe brain’s natural functioning to manipulate it. Bill Clinton, when he givesa speech will initiate it by pushing everybody’s green buttons. He will say anumber of things that everyone wants to hear and will agree with. This is called”generating a YES SET’. There will be a number of these, the number ofthese often desired is 3. Then the second stage is to bring in TRUISMS that arefacts that after the audience has already been mentally saying yes, the audiencewill probably accept these facts without any disagreement. Finally, after theapprox. three YES SETs, the approx. three TRUISMS, Bill will plant thesuggestion, such as “support me in such and such.”

On importantpoints, Bill will move his left hand, to help imbed certain commands to hisviewers. He will also use some subtle hand signals/codes to triggermind-controlled slaves too. He will ask during his talks for people to imagineor visualize what he wants for them. Again this is manipulation directed at theright brain.

One of the most crucial things that protects the mind-control ofthe Illuminati is the frame-of-reference and world-view they build into peoplefrom the cradle to the grave. Our previous experience and the information wehave available directly influences how we assign meaning to information wereceive. The Illuminati’s control over so much of society allows them tocreate people’s frames-of-references. Fragments of information that peoplereceive which do not relate to the person’s frame-of-reference will bediscarded. A person needs a place in his frame-of-reference to hang informationon. The person may puzzle over the tidbits of incongruent fragments, but beingunable to relate them to his world view, he finds himself unable to file thefragments away in a meaningful manner.

Some of the front alters of very wellcontrolled slaves have had world views (frames-of-references) that believe, a.there is no such thing as Satanic Ritual Abuse, b. there is no such thing as aconspiracy, c. there is no such thing as absolute truth, d. there is no suchthing as sin. e. There is no connection between God, living a moral life, andfinding Truth. f. there is no such thing as Multiple Personality Disorder. g. Myreligious organization can do no wrong.

Making a fundamental change in our frameof reference is a frightening task. This is why victims of total mind-controlwho have been A. programmed not to believe that a New World Order conspiracyexists, and not to believe Satanism and SRA exist, and then they are B. placedin a culture that reinforces this programming, end up being extremely hard tobreak free of their mind-control.

Conferences where mind-control victims canbegin to see the significance of all the fragments of clues that they discardedare very valuable. This author has met a number of mind-controlled victims whodidn’t know what their problem was, but had countless clues in their life. Butthese clues were useless fragments of information until they were given aframework to use them.

For instance, one victim of Illuminati total mind-controlknew nothing about the significance of the Illuminati bloodlines, nor who thebloodlines were. She stated that her relatives were so and so, and it was thenpointed out to her that she was from Illuminati bloodlines on both sides, andthe significance of the bloodlines was gone over. Now a meaningless piece ofinformation (her genealogy) had been given a framework of meaning. But this wasjust one area of many which the establishment has carefully controlled us tohave misunderstandings about. Understanding her heritage, allowed her tounderstand why she was selected for mind-control, when it seemed to her thatothers might have been better candidates.

Occult philosophies by their verynature create frames of references that make it hard to see reality and to seethe Truth in Jesus Christ of Nazareth. The New Age, Witchcraft, and Hindu ideathat all paths lead to God, is utter nonsense. The idea that Christians arenarrow minded is nonsense, but is a common idea taught by many people. It isnarrow minded to insist that Christians must go to the same place Hindu’s endup, if Christians seek truth. The New Agers see only one track for truthseekers, since they hold all paths lead to God. The concept is even illustratedby the wheel in India’s flag. All spokes on the wheel lead to the same centerpoint of the circle.

The Biblical Christians see two tracks for truthseekers–some don’t find God and Truth, but rather find an imitation of thetruth and end up eternally lost, while some do find God and Truth. Perhaps atthis point the reader is getting slightly upset because he or she is thinking,”Fritz is preaching what he believes,” and is also thinking”there is no absolute truth.” That is exactly my point. By acceptingthe lie–the programming lie–the frame of reference–the paradigm that there isno absolute truth, then every time a fragment of absolute truth comes to you,you will reject it.

When I showed evidence to two followers of J.Z. Knight (J.Z.Knight was/is a mind-controlled slave, who has set up an Illuminati frontreligion in Washington State where converts are subjected to mind-controltechniques) that children were being sacrificed by Satanic covens and that thiswas evidence of Satanic ritual abuse, their world view could not accept theconcept of absolute wrongs and sin. They responded, “These satanists maywell be killing their babies, but that is not abuse, that is only your idea.It’s just your idea that it is abuse. It’s not abuse to these people.”

In review, one of the hardest shells protecting the programming of a totalmind-controlled slave is when the front part of their system, which holds thebody regularly, has been indoctrinated into a frame-of-reference that will notallow them to see the reality of what is being done to make and keep them inslavery. A final example of this, are the zealots of the False Memory SyndromeFoundation who are mind-controlled zealots. These zealots, who are launching acounterattack against books like this, have had their world-views carefully constructed bya combination of several techniques of persuasion, a. mass indoctrination, b.subliminal messages via the T.V. and other places in their lives, c. controllededucation, and Neuro-Linguistic Programming, in addition to all their regulartrauma-based programming. It’s like their world-view is the hard varnish thatis first seen & heard, protecting people (even themselves) from realizingthat the underlying motivation of these zealots is not their world-view, butTotal Mind Control Programming.

Within witchcraft, the cosmology that is taughtis that a person was originally swirls or vortexes of energy. This coupled witha belief in reincarnation, allows the mind-controlled victim’s witchcraftalters to believe that they began with some molecules of energy forming, andthat death is nothing, because everything continues on a vast wheel ofreincarnation. The beliefs that are inserted into people via witchcraft areconducive to locking the person into their servitude. European culture, whichhas been based on Christianity, has had a respect and value on life way beyondthe oriental view. For centuries Europeans have marvelled about how little valuehuman life has in the oriental view. This is because these Oriental views areidentical with what is now called New Age beliefs, which are also about the samething as witchcraft. Gnostism/ witchcraft philosophy justifies seeking andhaving power. Persons, who are power hungry, gravitate to this philosophy.Persons who are inculcated with the desire for power rationalize their behaviorwith the witchcraft philosophy which they are raised in, or programmed tobelieve, or “discover” to set their minds at ease.

B. INTERNAL COMPUTERS

Internal computers are elaborate arrangements of dissociated parts andmemories built into the slave’s mind to cause the victim’s mind to havemechanical computer-like responses.

For years, the internal computers escaped the detection of the therapeuticcommunity. The illustrated Guidebook introduced the subject to readers and theVol. 2 gave the first major & so far to date the only comprehensive exposeof these computers. This Deeper Insights book will provide a number of pages todeepen the readers understanding of this important subject. This is all fresh(never been exposed) material so don’t write and ask what book it came from.You may have to refer back to our previous books for a complete understanding.

Installation of the Standard Programming

The Illuminati take a screen about 6’ by 6’. On the screen is a grid witha Greek or English letter. In front of the screen are colored flashing lights.The flashing colored lights prevent the conscious mind from seeing the screen,but the subconscious mind sees the grid. An Alpha symbol or capital A with tailsat the base will be shown on the grid screen for Alpha programming. A Beta or Bwill be shown for the Beta Programming screen. The programming that is placed inusing the different programming associated with various Greek and Englishalphabets can be read about in Chapter 4 of the Volume 2 Formula book andChapter 4 in this book. The victim is strapped into a chair with their headlocked in place and their eyes forced open. They must endure the flashing lightsand the subliminal grid and letter on the screen.

There is a paper trail that they are using flashing lights for hypnoticcontrol of a subject in order to place in messages at the subconscious. One ofthe pieces of the paper trail was an article “New Device To Induce HypnosisDeveloped” in the Chicago Tribune (June 7, 1959). The article was about aDr. William Kroger, who had tested the use of flashing lights on 200 obstetricpatients at the Edgewater hospital in Chicago. Interestingly, this Dr. Krogerlived in Beverly Hills, CA and worked with a Sidney Schneider of Skokie, IL.

Schneider was skilled in electronics and Kroger was an obstetrician. Thearticle said, “The pulsing pattern in reality an electronic brain wave‘achieves control’ of the brain’s alpha rhythm, thus inducing a drowsystate, according to Dr. Kroger.” “The apparatus…operates on theprincipal of subliminal and photic stimulation of brain waves…about 30 percent of the subjects who had received no explanation or had no knowledge of whatthe brain wave synchronizer would do were hypnotized to various degrees.”Now these type of machines are available to any bozo who knows where they aresold.

Another piece of the paper trail is a government study by the DefenseIntelligence Agency of July 1972, entitled Biological Effects of ElectromagneticRadiation (Radiowaves and Microwaves) –Eurasian and Communist Countries,ST-CS-01-169-72. DIA,, July, 1972, pp. 77-86. This study, of which this authorhas a copy, in part VI is written about “Light and Color as a Means ofAltering Human Behavior.” Although the report claims the communists are theones who are using flashing light and color to alter human behavior, the realinventors were the Illuminati, and both the Americans and Russians are usingflashing colored lights for programming.

This DIA study also reports on anAmerican symposium held in the at Tulane Univ., Covington, LA in 1957 concerningthe effects of flickering light on the brain. The participants of the 1957American symposium drew up a paper with 11 conclusions, which included a.flickering light interferes with the human nervous system, b. flickering lightcan put a person to sleep or into a trance, c. flickering light can interferewith the brains s alpha waves, and d. “photo driving of the EEG by periodicflicker is a well known phenomenon although many subjects do not show theeffect…”

During the ’50’s through at least the ’70’s, theIlluminati used flickering lights to place into the subconscious the grids usedfor the various computers. Each block on the grid would have codes, programs,memory and alters attached to it. In other words, dissociated parts of the mindbecome parts which are built into computers. The mind of victim is hijacked bythe programmer.

To fully understand what the computers are, we must understand the mind-setof the programmers. The programmers are looking to Lucifer for theirinspiration. An imitation of God’s Book of Life for people, is for Lucifer toconstruct an internal computer that will contain all the history of all thealters. It might be helpful if some items that were in the illustrated Guidebookand in the Vol. 2 book were briefly touched upon again, as we discuss how theinternal computers are made. Remember, that a computer is placed one per layer(section) and that they also build in back up computers, and that the computershave coded memories stored in them, as well as coded programs.

The deepestcomputer is called the Beast computer, and it has an eye (the all-seeing-eye)that opens and shuts like a camera lens. It can go behind the veil, and this isin mockery of the rent veil of the Holy of Holies. When the internal computersare built, the Illuminati use a doll house with different colored rooms for thechild to visualize what is being done. Each room in the dollhouse has adifferent color. Each family of alters (a group of alters that are on the gridtogether) has the exact same color code. In the Vol. 2 book, we showed the colorcoding differently–we showed the color coding running diagonally across thegrid, it can be done in any fashion, but generally the color code for a singlefamily (alters a-through-in on the chart) is the same, and the cover program tohide it is that the colors run diagonally. What that means is that an entirefamily of alters, say alters Mary 1 through Mary 13 will all be connected by acolor ribbon alter (who works just for them) back to that same color of computerroom. All the family get the same programming, although they hold separatememories.

This will help therapists understand the behavior & programmingpatterns of various alters. The Beta and Delta alters, who as the readersrealizes live in entirely a deep trance imaginary life, have entirely negativeprogramming in their computer section. The Betas and Deltas have two ribbons peralter, which is an exception to the rule. This is so they can functiontogether–espionage, seduction, and assassination all go together. Another typeof alter who gets two ribbons are the 13th alters which connect two levels.These poor alters have so much programming going off, and mixed signals, thatthey are real basket cases.

When a system is seen in its entirety, the morepowerful system hierarchy and Illuminati hierarchy alters will be coded withPlatinum, Gold, White, Purple, Bronze & Silver. Front alters who will behelpful will be coded pink and yellow. Orange alters will be perceived ashelping alters, but they are actually guards, protectors, and they protectsections of the system below them, which they usually can’t see, and oftendon’t know that they guard. Alters coded brown, tan, grey, or clear will givethe therapist & support team fits, because they are full of deceptions &cover programs, and illusions. Host alters or key front alters may have a clearor white diamond as their gemstone. Alters who cover things up may have obsidianas their gemstone. Other alters who play along with the programming may havesuch gemstones as Fire Opal, Topaz, and Turquoise. (Also see Vol. 2 , p.328-29.)

Front Programs of Front Computer

The front computer that is linked to the front section will be different thanthe deeper computers. It’s big difference is that its programs (which arelinked to all the front alters) are logical. The logical programs of this levelprovide the alters with logical reasons and excuses to believe the lies, and toreason their life out. Of course they draw false conclusions from good logicusing faulty information.

Misinformation Computers

Misinformation computers are laid in on the 3, 6, 9 and 12 levels. Thousandsof demons are placed into the Misinformation computers to not only run them, butto dispense misinformation. Since the demons are not under drugs or hypnosis,they are under full awareness and are very crafty in their deceptions. Whenmemories are too clean and too complete, the therapist should suspect that theyare getting a demonic false memory. Bear in mind the child is in a drugged stateduring much of the programming and has blurry eyes and may have their eyesrolling in the back of their head. They have their short term memoriessplintered by electro-shock, and are fed lies about their memories via hypnosis.Real memories are in bad shape when retrieved. (This is why some persons apply”hypnotic correction programs” to restore the memories back closer tothe original event, such as reversing the hypnotic air-brushing/blurring offaces that was programmed into deeper alters. The mind put in the distortionprogram and seems in some cases to be able to reverse the distortion program.)

Beast Computer

End time names such as Gog, etc. are believed to be given to some of thecomputers within recent years, to represent the names of the 10 countries thatwill make up the global government of the New World Order. For years thecomputers have been called “Beast” computers with the big importantBeast computer laid in at the bottom of the mind in the hell pit. Remember thatthe core is at the bottom of the mind below the hell pit–but she is almostalways never connected to the Beast computer. This is because the core receivesvery little programming. The core is told she is sleeping beauty and that her father Lucifer, who she is married to, willsomeday return for her and wake her up. Lucifer wanted the purest virgin bridehe could get, so he marries as his top bride within the system the innocentcore. The core is told she belongs to Lucifer. The core is protected by thefalse trinity in the pyramid and the Grand Druid Council. The core is linked tothe Grand Druid Council, but not the carousel. In the VoL 2 book, we reportedthe cover program, which is that the core is in the carousel. If therapists wantto take out computers they need to take them out from the first computer thatwas laid in, the Beast computer (at the bottom of the mind), and take them outin the sequence they were put in.

Programmer Access to the Computer Areas

When the external programmer wants to put information into the computer heopens up the various “rooms” (areas or programs so to speak) and thenthe internal programmers take over. The story line used to build in access tothe computer is the King’s Chamber story in Alice In Wonderland. The kingcomes to the chamber and he has the right to make 3 wishes (the 3-part accesscode). If he doesn’t make 3 wishes, everything disappears like in the Alice InWonderland story. 3-part access codes are usually DATE, COLOR, ALPHA-NUMERICCODE. But they could be three objects within the room, or they could be a sound,a touch, and a third-sight signal. Generally, the Illuminati have used theactual date that an alter (a part) or a family of alters was created as theactual code for that chamber of the computer. That chamber will then be linkedto all the alters of that family. So lets say a family of alters was created on4-30-64. This would normally be written on the charts as 43064 or because theIlluminati often work with things backward, some programmers will write it46034. Which ever method, forward or backwards, will then be used consistentlyas the first part of the access to that family’s computer chamber.

There are 26 rooms in the dollhouse, or in other words, 13 families of alterson a grid with 13 mirror images to mirror those 13. This was very standard foryears. When the programmer places the information in it is put on a mentalimaginary “computer disk” or in the older models “spools”.The reader needs to remember back to the hypnotic surgery that we discussed inthe Illustrated Guidebook and the Vol. 2 book, to remember that the victim hastheir insides hypnotically removed and the spools or computer disks placedinside of them.

Let’s say a therapist touches one of the misinformationcomputers, which are the most assessable. These computers will then activatemirror images and lots of demonic activity. The therapist may end up integratingdemons, and working with constructs and mirror images, and the proper excitementby the real alters is even programmed in. These are what may be termed”FALSE HOPE PROGRAMS”. The system will rest and relax and thetherapist will declare everything finished. (For years, the two authors havetried to explain this, but it seems to be a hard subject for therapists tounderstand.)

Finally, a very important warning, tampering with the computers isserious business, from the co-authors experience in working with therapists, westrongly advise them not to tamper with the computers, because the self-destructprograms are so strong. The self-destruct programs will turn the person into avegetable, or into pure insanity if the victim survives the suicide programs.The skill level among the therapeutic community is not yet at the level neededto tamper with the computers, but we hope with the publication of this book andwith more experience that that will someday become a reality. This author,Fritz, is aware of therapists that have tried to tamper with the computers, butthe programming has beaten both them and this author. For instance, it took lotsof work to discover that this author’s week of work with a front computeractually was only playing with a misinformation computer and itsFALSE HOPE PROGRAMS.

C. INTERNAL HIERARCHIES

OVERVIEW

The internal structuring of alter systems are built with altersbeing arranged in hierarchies. Often the hierarchal arrangement is a mirror ofthe group carrying out the programming. The CIA and other intelligence groupsuse SECTIONS. You will find the grids of alters arranged in SECTIONS. TheIlluminati have a Grand Druid Council and other councils, which will be mirroredwithin the system. Alter families will be set up as mini-covens within thesystem, often with 13 to an alter families. HUBS will be created in reflectionof how Satanic groups are organized into hubs.

THE INTERNAL HIERARCHIES form RATIONALES

Some of the structures within the programmed alters reflect the philosophiesof the ancient occult world. The structures are buttressed by the occult beliefsthat are connected to them. Cisco, who has helped me co-author two books onmind-control, pointed out how the ancient world had a god which could only beadored by one family. Each city had its own gods, and religion was tied to thefamily and the city units. This was the Religion of the Hearth, as some havecalled it.

The Roman Gens was an extension of this, the Gens were politicalassociations of several families who collected into a religious union, as theIlluminati families have done. When we see how the ancient religious customswere, we see how the internal Illuminati structuring parallels this thinking.Each internal city or world is assigned a god (demon) during the programming.The Illuminati families have collected themselves into a Gen. This is an exampleof how the internal structuring is buttressed by some occult philosophy whichwill in turn buttress itself by its claim to antiquity, as if length of practicemakes a mistaken superstition valid. The myths of the occult world and theirsymbology are very extensive. The programmers have many items to choose from asthey construct the deeper internal worlds of an Illuminati slave. There is atwisted logic to many of the names they give.

The Magna Mater is the sybil, thesymbol of truth, a goddess who can take the form of a city in the occult world.To apply the name MAGNA MATER to a part of the mind then creates a triple orquadruple pun–we have something that can be truth, a city, a goddess, and asybil. The programmers thrive on puns. The personification of the stages ofspiritual life which are called fairies are named White Ladies, Green Ladies,and Black Ladies. Dissociated parts of the mind can be given the name GreenLadies, and then the secret meaning attached that they are fairies that connectto the system’s spiritual development. The possibilities seem endless. Sincecabalism is behind much of the Illuminati programming, and double images are soimportant–some systems may incorporate the dual being known as Metatron on top,and Samael on the bottom. This is the occult concept that all phenomena has anessential ambivalence. This is the Gemini concept.

Another Cabalistic conceptthat appears in programming is the silver palace also known as the silver threadthat connects man to his origin and to his end. The palace in the occult worldwas to have secret chambers (dissociated areas in the subconscious) which holdtreasure (programming truths). In the occult world’s beliefs, it has been saidthat the palace of glass represents the magically appearing ancestral memoriesof mankind from the Golden Age. In Druidism, the horse was linked to the solarwheel, which had more wheels within itself.

During programming: Concepts are linked in series, Concepts are mirrored, andConcepts are related to the whole. The function of occult symbols lends itselfto such applications.

Barbie Dolls are used for the mind-control programming. Interestingly in1995, while fighting over Barbie dolls a 6-yr. old girl in Modesto, CA stabbed a7-year-old playmate with a knife while telling her she was going to kill her.Police did nothing with the girl who had used the knife except to have theparents take her. One wonders what was this all about. Meanwhile Barbie Dollshave drastically changed and are now very occultic.

CHAPTER 12 SCIENCE No. 12-EXTERNAL CONTROLS

Advertizing & Trauma-based programming

The Oregonian newspaper, Sat. Mar. 9, 1996, (p. E1) ran a story about womenentitled, “She sells, She purrs, she percolates, she’s a power player:Ads reflect society’s view of women.” At the top right is an ad with aMarilyn Monroe type of model with puckered lips selling cigarettes. Below her isa picture of a girl with the caption, “You were born a daughter. You lookedup to your mother. You looked up to your father. You looked up to everyone. Youwanted to be a princess. You thought you were a princess.”

The themes inthis article match the thinking within Monarch type programming scripts. Is thiscoincidence, or just a sign of the times, that so much in our lives echoesprogramming scripts? Some of the ads in today’s magazines are obviousmanipulations of the Monarch trauma-based mind-control. For instance, Royal& Sun Alliance Insurance Group controlled by the Rothschilds had an add in arecent popular magazine which has nothing but an entire page of violet-blue hazewith an eye [an allusion to the All-seeing eye] staring out of the haze alongwith the big caption “YOU HAVE OUR ATTENTION.” This would reinforcemany of the mind-control programs. Ostensibly, the ad was for insurance.

Another ad that is an obvious manipulation of mind-control programming is anAveda ad placed in Vogue & Vanity Fair magazines, where a woman’s face isbroken up into 4 pieces and put into a glass bottle along with a white daisytype flower & a yellow flower. The caption reads ‘You, bottled.” thesubcaption reads “what would you be if you came back as a pure-fume?”Notice the play on words that the programmers love.

Another more subtle exampleis a Virginia Slims ad which is designed to hit the subconscious of the Monarchslave. This ad has three thrones across the top of the page. In front of thethree thrones is the Virginia Slims lady. The first two thrones have a chubbyqueen sitting on them & the third on the far right is vacant. The 3 queensare an allusion to the 3 hierarchy queens and the maiden-mother-hidden cronesequence in programming. The queen holds a scepter which adds some more power tothis as a subconscious trigger. The caption reads, “Virginia Slimsremembers the shortest reign of a female monarch. Queen Katrina of Valenski wascrowned at 10 past the hour, lit a cigarette at 12 past the hour and wasdethroned at 13 past the hour.”

The hidden meaning behind this is that thefront woman, remembers on a subconscious level the threat that if you don’tremember the authority & power (thrones), and the power structure (thetriad), then you shall remember the programming threat. This ad subtlyreinforces the programming threats to slaves.

Other ads that manipulateprogramming use Wizard of Oz, Alice In Wonderland and Star Wars themes. Theyuse allusions to the programming scripts and show subtle occult symbols. Thehypnotic eye is very popular in ads. Some ads simply seem to be a reflection ofhow our culture has become part of the programming, for instance a Sportsmandevice that is sold by an add with a big caption “Split personality”,or a Merit cigarette ad that sells its product with the caption “Splitpersonality.” A watch ad for Bulova has an empty chair with a banner overit “Personality of the year’ and the caption “Is your watch makingyou a missing person?”

During the programming, shifts in time certainly domake certain alters disappear, so although this ad is may not be a directattempt to manipulate programming, it certainly is a product of today’smind-controlled society.

On the next pg. is an ad appealing directlyto the thinking of a programmed multiple.

p_12_eve1.jpg
<input height=”500″ name=”I12″ src=”http://www.whale.to/b/sp/deepera/p_12_eve1.jpg” type=”image” width=”384″ /><input height=”250″ name=”I13″ src=”http://www.whale.to/b/sp/deepera/p_12_eve2.jpg” type=”image” width=”208″ />

p_12_eve2.jpg

ASSET CONTROL

SURVEILLANCE

Over the years of watching the Illuminati manage their slaves, it is clearthat they like to have their slaves under constant surveillance. Often timesthey use friends of the slave to keep tabs. For instance, the teams that theyput together are great for using to monitor other team members. If they findthat the acquaintances and friends of the slave are not contributing enough,they will send out people to keep tabs on the slave.

Surveillance of a slave isdone either to let the slave know that he or she is being watched (obviously asan intimidation device), or is done in line with common intelligence/police typetactics. Many times the Illuminati surveillance is so obvious, that this authorhas to conclude that it is intentionally so. For understanding undetectablesurveillance, Hollywood movies are not teaching manuals. To watch someone’shouse the people working for the Illuminati will often try to maintain about 2blocks distance. If they have to they can use battery operated bugs or bugsinstalled using the wiring in the house. If they want to get high-tech they canuse fiber optics or even go to satellite-ground antenna monitoring of what aperson is doing. If you are looking for a bug, get a counter that will go upinto the higher ranges, & expect them to stick bugs away from equipment likerefrigerators and air conditioners which make a lot of noise.

They also havedirectional microphones called bionic ears which can be used to pick up outsidesounds from a distance. Sophisticated filters can be placed on their listeningdevices to screen out background noise. Lasers beamed onto windows can be usedto listen to conversations within a building, but these have the drawbacks ofpicking up building noises, & noises from the street. Laser listeningdevices are going to function better at night. Telephone taps are commonly doneby the Network to control and monitor their slaves. There are low-tech andhigh-tech ways to do this. The bottom line is that all telephone conversationsin this nation (U.S.), all CB-radio traffic, all radio traffic has been totallymonitored since before the 1970’s. It is a given that anything you say on thetelephone will be fed into a large computer which has words to watch for. Unlessyou believe you are a high-profile person, who is monitored 24-hours a day, itis best to stay away from mentioning trigger words in your conversation.

Oftentimes, the people monitoring slaves team trail the slave. Teams of people cantrack a person on foot or in a car. Using a team is the best method in manysituations. Often they tag team follow a person. They also have team formationsthat are used to keep track of a person, such as one person on the opposite sideof the street, and one immediately behind and one far behind. Having a distanttracker allows the close one to avoid being caught if the slave tries to takeevasive action or to ambush the stalker.

If the person watching the slave gets really concerned they may end up usingspecial headlights called “blackout lights” to shadow the slave atnight, which are shielded to keep the beams of light from showing in front or tothe side of the car. These special lights light up the road in front of the caronly, so the car remains unseen by the stalked mind-controlled victim.

There area number of secret devices to aid the abusers in their control over environmentthat the slave must live in. The intelligence groups often use a radio devicecalled AGENT ALERT which looks like a ballpoint pen which sends out a continualbeeping when it is activated.

Besides their Global Positioning Satellites,intelligence has Pegasus, a ship that can monitor & record electronictransmissions while sailing offshore. After reading the mind-controlsignificance of Pegasi, it clearer the Navy picked an appropriate horse torecord electronic transmissions. Even though all slaves have Reporting Alters,& are tracked in other ways, the Illuminati often has redundant safetyfeatures to monitor their “human assets”.

Because the slave ismonitored from so many different unseen methods, it does begin to seem hopelessto some to ever be free of Big Brother. If you add to all this, that the slavehas been programmed repeatedly that there is no escaping their All-seeing eyes,then it is easy to see why so many slaves acquiesce & just comply.

A Vol. 2reader, who caught onto to what the book is about, pointed out how the new filmThe Juror reflects their approach to control. The movie shows a controller whois obsessed with who he is controlling. This holds true in real life for theprogrammers too. Even though Dr. Mengele programmed thousands of people in hislifetime, he had his “pets” (Lieblings), pet slaves that he wasobsessed with. In the movie, the controller says, “Do what I say.” and”If I can keep you scared, I can save your life.” These could havecome straight out of a programmer’s mouth. He picks out a juror who iscreative & intelligent to control, which are the criteria for selectingvictims in real life. The movie illustrates some of the concepts which actuallyhappen that this chapter 12 is trying to describe.

HARASSMENT

One of the things that the Network does to any slave that tries to breakfree, and the Illuminati does to any of their hierarchy slaves (like thisbook’s co-author Cisco) who tries to get free is to harass them constantly.

Stephen Knight who researched the Freemasons wrote a chapter in his book TheBrotherhood, The Secret World of the Freemasons about how they harass anyopposition. (See chapter 16, pp. 140-149). When Knight interviewedex-Masons they were in abject fear of the Masonic system. They didn’t evenwant to talk about how much power the Freemasons have to ruin careers, spy, andharass people. Since Knight’s book is available for the reader, and sincethere are a number of books (like those from Loompanics) that are very detailedon harassment techniques, this book will only briefly touch on the subject.However, just because it is only briefly mentioned please don’t mistakenlythink this is a minor topic.

The Illuminati and their co-workers the Freemasons,the Mishpucka, and CIA put outrageously great amounts of efforts intoharassment. It is not unusual for a recovering victim of mind-control to findtheir favourite pet killed, or human faeces in their oven, and other bizarreharassments that show the warped character of the controllers. The CIA, theMasonic leaders, and the Mishpucka keep extensive files on everyone for purposesof blackmail, and coercion. The Masonic leadership of Freemasonry in a givenarea will have thousands of “blackmail” files on essentially everyoneof importance in their area. Upper echelon people such as judges, lawyers, andpoliticians are generally controlled via IRS infringements, and many of thelower echelon people are controlled through weird sexual items. This is wherethe Delta and Beta Monarch slaves are so helpful to the Illuminati. TheFreemasons can have a sexual alter seduce a man, contrive a scene, and then analter that is in a death trance takes the body so that the target of blackmailthinks he has killed the woman. It works great for blackmail. (This informationcomes from several witnesses who are informed about the blackmail files &their methods for blackmailing.)

CAR COLORS

The Vol. 2 book apparently neglected to relate how the colors of cars areused to access victims. Some victims around the U.S. are programmed to red &white cars. Autos with both colors will arrive. Red & White are the greatmystical colors assoc. with the 2 headed eagle & Janus. White cars are forhigh ranking slaves. Very specific sexual slaves are picked up in red and blackcars. In N.Y. brown Volkswagens were frequently used for accessing slaves. Twotone cars will be used to trigger particular alters to come out. Another commonpractice that is occurring across the U.S. is for the draconian enforcers toborrow cars from dealerships so that they can’t be traced. The license platesof cars are also used as access triggers for some slaves.

TELEVISION

The all pervasive television, which has been so common place in the lives ofAmericans, is used a great deal to manipulate trauma-based mind-controlledslaves. Tests by researcher Herbert Krugman have shown that TV watchers usedtheir right brain twice as much as their left brain and released Beta-endorphininto their brains. In other words, TV watching trains the mind to go into analtered state. If a blank black frame is interjected every 32 frames on a show,a 45 beat/minute pulsation is created that puts a person into a hypnotic trance.In Vol. 2, it was brought out how the Lawnmower Man movie, displayed the symbolsused to program many of the slaves. The movie was advertised with the slogan”God made him simple…Science made him a god.” This is a sloganfitting for an Illuminati member who has been programmed to think he is a god,and yet he must serve his superiors.

BUILDING FAMILIES AND COMMUNITIES THAT HAVE INTERWOVEN PROGRAMMING

The Illuminati has increasingly wanted to keep their members withinIlluminati family settings. They have had more problems with placing theirmembers into families which are not part of their mind-control than they havehad with children which are raised within Illum. or cult type settings. If oneor both of the parents have programming, the Illuminati often weaves theprogramming together so that the entire family becomes one programmeddissociative mechanism.

For instance, on a ritual night the child as it is being tucked in bed will say to the mother, “MAY I HAVE A DRINK OF WATER.” This is the code trigger for the mother to give a drug in a drink. The child is tosay another trigger to the parent when they get the drink, then is programmed todrink the drug. The second trigger causes the parent to switch to a personalitythat feels compelled to get the family into the car and drive. The family allmechanically click into a series of alter switches and end up at a ritual. Theymechanically trigger and reinforce each others programming as they return fromthe ritual, and end up at home with everyone’s front alters not knowing whatthe family has been involved with. Here we have an entire family whose testimonycould reinforce each other that they did nothing but sleep at home that night!

There are some locations, for instance, two entire towns in southern Utah thatare a strict offbeat shoot of Mormonism, which are entirely programmedmultiples. There have been some television shows about entire towns being caughtup in secret satanic rituals. It is true, but they also have occult mind-controlprogramming along with those rituals. Here we see how an entire city can triggereach other’s programming and all be involved in the insanity of all thiswithout full awareness. This is in fact, where the entire world is headed veryrapidly.

ISOLATION

While control mechanisms are put into place world-wide, the Illuminati stillmust keep their children isolated from the world. To successfully raise a childslave, the mind-control’s success depends upon isolation. Children involvedin cult rituals do not talk to other children. If they are caught talking, thestandard punishment is to tie the child to a dead child. They want theirchildren to shut down, and only do what they are told. They want the child torespond only to the Programmer and its Mother of Darkness. They heap lots ofguilt upon any child that breaks the rules of no communication. Children stillmanage to learn to speak with their eyes and fingers. They become skilled atthis even though they know the punishment will be severe if caught.

BOARDING SCHOOLS & BODY PROGRAMMING

Most people would naturally think that this topic would belong to thischapter. Actually, this topic DOES NOT belong here. But it was placed here onpurpose, because its placement here will emphasize its point, while notdetracting from the Cranial Manipulation and Genetic Manipulations sections ofChpt. 8.

Boarding schools not only give the elite a chance to isolate, educate,and indoctrinate their children, but it is also a great way to layer in bodymemories that instil a subconscious ethic of elitism. It is an attitude ofelitism that allowed the Pharisees to crucify Christ, the Nazis to kill Jews,and Moslems to kill Hindus, etc.

How does this layering of body memories happen?The memories of our bodies are buried within the cells of our bodies. Therapistshave known about body memories for some time now. Cellular level body memoriesare way beyond the grasp of the consciousness. Buried into a deep unconsciousrepression are the body memories of the social values (elitism) that arecontained in how the social elite walk, hold a spoon and knife, how a personmust stand up straight with good posture, and how the person holds and usestheir facial muscles. The boarding schools teach an entire world of elitemannerisms such as “keep a stiff upper lip” to “don’t hold yourknife in your left hand.”

West Point performs the same programming of bodymemories, to insure that their West Pointers develop an elitist attitude. Theeffect of these body memories is to subconsciously encourage the mind intothinking that it is elite. The erect posture and military gait that this authorwas taught carry with them the implication of superiority. While the consciousawareness of this elitist indoctrination can be gotten in touch with anddefused, there are none-the-less buried elements of body memory that resisttampering. This author would ask his fellow West Pointers, how do they feel ifthey walk like a general around civilians?

This type of body programmingcontributes to an ethic of elitism. How it is created and how it works has notescaped the detection of the elite bloodlines. This is why the British boardingschools are so strict about “good manners.” Through a plebe year ofbracing, the mind develops body memories of how to stand in a military brace.Some cadets are so traumatized by their first year, they never return to anormal posture. A military brace has been proven to not be the healthiestposture. It’s this author’s contention that the military brace is insistedupon for mind-control, and not for health reasons.

Victims of mind-control havebeen placed in many humiliating body positions, as well as many painful bodypositions. It takes years of slow subconscious work as well as deep massage topull these up and work with these body memories. For instance, during thetortures to create cat/kitten alters, the children often crouch like cats.Kitten alters will retain their body memories of crouching (hunching theshoulders) like a cat. Sometimes when their masters begin to beat on kittenalters, they will reflexively crouch like a scared kitten. And what’s with thewoman called Queen Sheri who has been managing the two professional wrestlersMacho King and Randy Savage? Both of these professional wrestlers are part of a”family” called the New World Order. Queen Sheri walks around in a catcostume and facial makeup that makes her look like a real wild cat. Is thiswildcat a Monarch wildcat?

When controls fail, THE FINAL SOLUTION

The World Order can send out teams of professional killers. (What’s new?)These killers often emotionally distance themselves from their victims bythinking of their “targets” as inferior forms of life that they are”liquidating”, “terminating”, “cleansing from thisplanet”, etc. In 1996, a 4-member hit team took out the entire Bill Muellerfamily (Bill, Nancy, and 8 yr. old Sarah). Bill was a member of the Special OpsGroup SOG of the Navy Seals. He had become a Patriot and a big gun dealer livingin Arkansas. Someone decided he was too much of a threat and sent a team in totake not just him but his entire family out. Booz-Allen & Hamilton, Inc hasbeen hired by the NWO to infiltrate the militias. This author has known in thisarea several disobedient slaves, and one therapist who lost their lives toassassins, as well as another one who committed suicide according toprogramming. But anymore what isn’t dangerous? Crossing the street and eatingat a restaurant can kill you too. The reader knows this. This author also knowsof several who were going to be killed but escaped. One troublemaker was to havebeen sacrfficed but broke free and hid, another was ritually tortured, buriedalive, and left for dead, but managed to survive.

APPENDIX 1 – PROGRAMMERS/RESEARCHERS

The Illuminati set up the Josiah Macy, Jr. Foundation to direct some of themind-control its research, and its financial affairs. Harold Abramson became oneof its leaders. One of the Macy Foundation’s directors has been militaryintelligence chief and relative to Winston Churchill, Gen. MarlboroughChurchill. Both Winston and Marlborough are of the corrupt IlluminatiMarlborough family.

DIRTY PSYCHIATRISTS involved with MIND CONTROL

Dr. Van O. Austin, Utah
Dr. George Brock Chisholm, Tavistock
Dr. Lawrence D. Ginsberg
Dr. Robert G. Heath
Dr. Paul Hoch, Scot. Rite Mason
Dr. Robert Howell, Utah
Dr. Nathan Kline, Columbia Univ.
Dr. Nolan D.C. Lewis, dir NY State Psyc Inst. & Scottish Rite Mason
Dr. Amedeo S. Marrazzi, Missouri Inst. of Psychology
Dr. Sudha Tayi

DIRTY RESEARCHERS

Dr. Ross Adley, formerly of the Brain Research Center at Univ. of So. CA, nowat Loma Linda Univ. Med. School, CIA, worked on ELF waves and the brain, and EMradiation.

Dr. Emmanuel Donchin, head of Psyc. Dept. at Urbana-Champaign’s Univ. ofIL, worked on thought-controlled machines.

Dr. Wayne O. Evans–U.S. Mil. Stress Lab, Natick, Mass

Dr. Dave Morgan, Lockhead-Sanders, worked on the syntel

Dr. Arthur Upton, head National Cancer Inst.

DIRTY TAVISTOCK CONTROLLERS

W. R. Byon

Richard Crossman

H. V. Dicks

Ronald Lippert

Brig. Gen. Dr. John Rawlings Rees

SOME OF FREEMASONRY’S MIND-CONTROL PEOPLE

Dr. Robert Hanna Felix–33°, dir of psyc. research for Scott. Rite, oversawthe Lexington KT programming facility

Dr. Franz J. Kailman-jewish Nazi who did research at NY State Psyc. Inst.while at Columbia Univ.

Seymour Solomon Kety- exec. of Scot. Rites psychiatry experiments, & nat.dir. of American Eugenics Soc.

Winfred Overholser- overall leader of Masonic research into mind-control,sup. of St. ‘Elizabeth’s Hosp. a mental hospital in Wash. D.C.

REMOTE VIEWING MIND-RESEARCH

Private organizations doing research into RV in the U.S. are run by“retired” intelligence people.

Joe McMoneagle — “retired Intelligence officer” left govt.’sStargate to set up “private” RV research.

ODDS & ENDS

• Hillary Clinton, who is a Grand Dame in the Illuminati, started in theearly 1960s a group of mind-controlled slaves which is called Royal Project. She reportedlyexercises power in the White House via 16 staffers who have been given authorityover the different departments of government. One mind-control victim claimsthat one of Clinton’s talks gave triggers for him to kill. One of Clinton’snever mentioned cronies, who works closely with him, and travels to meet him atvarious locations is Charles Whitmore of Arkansas.

• One of the big areas where a great number of mind-controlled slavescongregate are MUFON meetings. An example of a slave handler, who is also aprogrammed slave is Dea Martin, who tells people she has worked for thegovernment and who does aura readings. She controls her sidekick Jim Courant, acommercial airline pilot. An example of a programmed multiple with”alien” programming was serial murderer Robert Moody. Film taken ofMoody in jail shows his MPD (DID).

• Kleinknecht was National Director of NASA during the Moon Flights whenlots of mind-control programming was being done by both the Masonic lodges andNASA. C. Fred Kleinknecht was not only director of NASA but the Sec. General ofthe Scottish Rite 33°.

• The Doors Singer Jim Morrison used the occult code name Lizard King andThe Exterminating Angel. He was involved with mind control.

• Col. John Alexander, (also called Doctor) who has been living in Arizona,and who has been in charge of making psychic warriors for the U.S. Army, has theinside reputation of being the Illuminati’s top mind-control programmer.

• James Monroe. It turns out that there have been two James Monroes involvedin programming. The first one was bn. perhaps in the 1920’s, was 6’ tall,and he was the CIA man who set up the Society for the Investigation of HumanEcology, a CIA front for mind-control, He had a very polite front in spite ofbeing a sadistic programmer. The second one was James Monroe Martinez, bn in1938, 6’ tall, who was busy setting up underground bases such as the one atLos Alamos under the cover of working for GE. One report said he died in 1965.His mother owned a Catholic half-way house in Albuquerque, NM.

• There are all kinds of events happening around us that show evidence ofmind-control. One example, is the case of a Catholic man quitting the monasteryand becoming a NASA physicist.

• Part of the success of the mind-control lays within their childprocurement abilities. The’ corrupt Finders group, which consisted of FBI/CIAmen who helped procure children, were led by Marion Pettie, who was called”the Stroller” and “the Game Caller” by Finder members.

• The establishment allowed CIA programmer Dr. Louis Joyon “Jolly”West to examine Jack Ruby in his jail cell. When Ruby refused to admit toinsanity, West labelled him “paranoid and mentally ill” and Ruby wasplaced on pills, which were called “happy pills”. Ruby believed he wasbeing poisoned by the establishment.

• Part of the success of the mind-control lays in the fact that there issuch a widespread network of pedophiles. On Channel 5, May 6, 1996, during ashow “Priestly Sins,” it was stated that “at least 3000 [catholic]priestsare sexual abusers of children.” The program stated that 600 priests havebeen reported to law enforcement within the last few years for complaints ofsexual abuse of children. The show stated that catholics are silenced andpunished if they speak up. Priests who speak out are penalized. For instance in1985, a senior official at the Vatican’s embassy in Wash. D.C. discovered rampantsexual abuse and wrote a report on how it should be dealt with responsibly. Thechurch promptly buried the report.

LIST of PROGRAMMERS (continuation from the list given in Vol. 2)

Stephen Aldrich

Morse Allen

Dr. Charles L. Brown

Col. Campbell

Dr. Cleghon

Hillary Clinton

Jack F. (Uncle Jack) & Jill Coogan

Sen. Alan Cranston

“Gen.” Earman

Don Ebner

Dr. Charles Evans

Dr. Tom Fox

Floyd & Mildred Frost & dau. Carol Frost Buls

Dr. George S. Glass

Dr. Goldshe

L. Wilson Greene

Dr. James Hamilton

Dr. Robert G. Heath

Richard Helms

Dr. Paul Hoch

Dr. Hyde

Dr. Korim (sp. not known)

Dr. Lowenstein

Mateland

Dr. Gary E. Miller

Dr. Moore

Dr. Martin Orne

Dr. Rosenberg

Dr. Woolsworth Russell

Cpt. George White (nickname/cover name Stormy)

Dr. Robert E. White

A FEW random CIA/INTELLIGENCE MEN involved WITH MIND-CONTROL

John Bacon
Tennant (Pete) Bagley
Col. Matt Baird
Bill Brown
Richard L. Conolly, Jr.
Burt Courage
Cong. Bud Cramer
Jerry Droller
Robert Feldman
Jim Ferguson
J. Peter Grace
Cynthia Hausman
Richard Helms
William J. Hood
Jack Kindschi
John McCone
Charles McKay
Cord Meyer
Comm. John R. Miller
Herbert Quinde
Wade Thomas

Anton LaVey–Profile of a trauma-based mind-control programmer

When someone coined the phrase “dynamite comes in small packages”the phrase was an apt description of Anton LaVey. (Released photographs of LaVeyprevent people from realizing how short his is.) In a personal letter whichAnton LaVey wrote, “With my swastika, I’m strong. My Satanic amulets giveme power. I’m not a misfit anymore, with pimples and a heart murmur and flatfeet.”

Anton LaVey is famous for having started the Church of Satan. Hechose Walpurgisnacht, April 30, 1966 to start the Church of Satan in SanFrancisco. Previously he had began holding midnight magic seminars in 1960. Heand his occult friends held Magic Circle meetings until he founded the Church.His Church of Satan is officially recognized by the U.S. government and themilitary.

He turned an old Victorian House, at 6114 California St., SanFrancisco into what has been called “the Black Castle”. It was foryears indeed black on the outside, and LaVey would drive a hearse. Anton LaVeykept a full grown 400 lb. Nubian lion named Togare from Ethiopia at his house(which was allowed both inside & outside) that scared the neighbours when itroared. He also has kept a black leopard.

LaVey loves to play his Hammond organmusic in his black castle as if his house were a stereotypical horror house.Inside the house are rooms used for rituals, occult books including books oncannibalism, coffins, a maze of secret passageways, and LaVey’s private salooncalled the Den of Iniquity. He called his satanic covens “Grottos.”

This author is aware that the Church of Satan got Grottos going in the followingcities: Amsterdam (Magistralis Grotto, Neth.), Boston, Chicago, Dayton, Denver,Detroit, Edmonton (Can), Indianapolis, Kansas City, Las Vegas, London (Eng.),Los Angeles, Louisville, New York, Paris (Fr.), Phoenix, Portland (OR), St.Petersburg, Seattle, Silverton (OR), and Vancouver (Can).

Undoubtedly, there are other groups, aswell as a scattered following of individuals. The Church of Satan has had manyPh.D.’s. The church has had a high percentage of professionals such as:doctors, lawyers, teachers, former FBI agents, IBM executives. Cult undergroundfilm maker Kenneth Anger was a member of the Church of Satan. An ex-high priestof the Church of Satan told this author how he was recruited for the position ofhigh priest. He was promised anything he wanted in life, any woman, any moneyetc.–and they made good on much of that promise. As high priest, hemicromanaged everyone’s lives in his grotto. His people came to him forpermission and advice and orders for everything. It wasn’t just mind-control,it was total control of their lives. But giving orders and micromanaging thelives of many people became a drag.

One of Cathy O’Brien’s abusers was LaVey’s High Priest Merle Kilgore, father of Steve Kilgore. LaVey (bn. April11, 1930) comes from a Rumanian bloodline from Translyvania. As he grew up helove the story of Frankenstein. As a teenager he loved the occult. He droppedout of high school to be part of the Clyde Beatty circus.

LaVey likes to workfrom dusk to dawn. Like his ex-right hand man Michael Aquino, anothermind-control programmer, both LaVey and Aquino are fascinated with the Nazis.(Michael Aquino’s wife Lillith Sinclair was formerly the head of the Church ofSatan’s NY Lillith Grotto.) LaVey sports a Van Dyke beard, and a head shavedin the same fashion of executioners during the middle ages. Most of hisfollowers never see him. Although LaVey has gotten wide press coverage, thanksto William Randolph Hearst’s newspapers and his publishing companies likeAvon, LaVey is a very secretive person and very rarely shows himself to even hishigh priests, or even talks to them.

His Church is a collection ofself-sustaining dictators. He exaggerates the numbers of his church, apparentlyby claiming people who come in contact with his church. Before we discuss moreabout his organization and their rituals, let’s touch on his role as atrauma-based mind-control programmer. Anton LaVey has openly advocated thecreation of android humans. Even more startling is a music video shown on TV inwhich Anton LaVey personally gives a graphic description of how Anton LaVeyintends to make the listener into his “mind-controlled sex slave”. Theaudacity of this is mind-boggling. But then LaVey has tended to be more frankthan other occult figures. The approach seems to be “I’ll shock you soboldly, that you will not believe what I am saying, but will think its anact.”

Taking inspiration from Orwell’s 1984 LaVey wrote, “Up isdown, pleasure is pain, darkness is light, slavery is freedom, madness issanity…” This is actually the language that is used at times in themind-control programming! Anton LaVey has been the mind-controlhandler/programmer of a number of Hollywood actors & actresses, includingJayne Mansfield and Marilyn Monroe, who both serviced him as sexual slaves.Jayne Mansfield, who was a High Priestess in the Church of Satan, shocked peoplewhen on a USO tour in Vietnam she asked for a satanic religious service. SamBrody, one of Mansfield’s handlers, had a bitter struggle over who wouldcontrol Jayne, and one of LaVey’s followers claimed to have tampered withBrody’s car. Anton LaVey has also been the programmer of his daughters such asKarla and Zeena and his son. An ex-member of a satanic cult in the Ozarks said,”If LaVey says jump, you jump.” Some of his followers call him‘‘Uncle Anton” as if they were programmed by him. LaVey’s cover isthat he is simply a showman, a buffoon. His cover has fooled many people, thetruth is the man is not to be trusted and has a lot more evil power than peoplehave realized.

LaVey has always had what some describe as a “warmrelationship” with police. In fact, he was on the police force in the 1950’s as a photographer. Thepolice were reluctant to question LaVey about the death of Jayne Mansfield(4/19/33-6/28/67) who was one of LaVey’s high priestesses and slaves in hisChurch of Satan. Her color was pink. Anton LaVey has been seen going ontomilitary programming bases, and was at the NORAD area in Colorado for a while.

Dick Russell interviewed Anton LaVey with his approval. Russell wrote up theinterview in “The Satanist Who Wants To Rule the World”, (Argosy, June1975, p. 41) that the Anton LaVey believes that he and an elite force ofSatanists will rule the world. LaVey took an obscure occult tract from the30’s and some thoughts from HG. Well’s book The Island of Dr. Moreau for aritual. From this, he came up with a ritual which includes these stanzas:

“Man is God. We are men. We are gods. God is man.”

When the reader is done reading this book, he will see how this ritual canfit in perfectly with trauma-based total mind-control. In fact, when peopleattend the Church of Satan’s secret rituals, once people enter the ritual roomtwo hooded guards prevent people from exiting prematurely through the closeddoors. The rituals have been reported as being very disgusting. It wellpublicized that LaVey uses naked human altars for rituals, after photos werepublished of his satanic baptism of his 3 year old-daughter Zeena in May 1967.Does the Church of Satan involve summoning demons and worshipping Satan. Yes,most definitively. For instance, here are the some of the words of an importantinvocation used by his satanic rituals:

In nomine Dei nostri Satanas Luciferi excelsi! In the name of Satan, theRuler of the earth, the King of the world, I command the forces of darkness tobestow their Infernal power upon me!…By all the Gods of the Pit, I commandthat these things of which I speak shall come to pass! Come forth and answeryour names by manifesting my desires! Hail Satan!”

LaVey’s book TheCompleat Witch (NY Dodd, Mead, 1971) p. 266 advocates that one achieveself-understanding and “embrace and cherish the demon within him.” InLaVey’s book The Satanic Witch (LA: Feral House, 1969) he states that a witchto be successful must make a pact with the devil. His church loves to chant”Hail Satan”. They like Crowley’s law, Do What thou Wilt. LaVey& some of his members teach that at the core of each person is a demonwaiting to be released.

LaVey loves Black Masses and desecrating anything sacredto Christians. LaVey urges people in his books and talks to bring out their”darkest” urging. He hints at human sacrifice in his Satanic Bible, byhaving a section on it, but is careful not to go too far out on a limb publicly.He always publicly denies that Satanists should do human sacrifices. One of thedoctors of the San Francisco Church of Satan is said to have brought LaVey’schurch a severed human leg from the hospital he worked at, which was basted inTriple Sec and eaten by LaVey and his group. Most of the rituals are done insecret, there are no way to confirm rumours that they eat human flesh, butknowing the mentality of some of his church members, they would do it just tocheck it out as a new experience.

Illuminatus William Randolph Hearst gave Anton LaVey some big help. His AvonPublishing published his Satanic Bible in 1969 (it was first released in Dec.‘69). Since then it has reportedly gone through over 30 printings. LaVey’snext book The Satanic Rituals also was published by Hearst Avon in 1972. Ittalks about the power that blood sacrifices give the magician. Hearst’s papersalso gave him publicity.

LaVey is always thinking of ways of promoting his theology. Years ago, he hada topless witches Sabbath on San Francisco’s North Beach. In 1990, the Churchof Satan went into the Heavy Metal music business. The Church of Satan puts outa monthly magazine The Cloven Hoof which for most members is their main indirectcommunication from Magus LaVey.

WHAT TO LOOK FOR

One of the most asked questions is, “Fritz, what does one lookfor?” One of the best covers for Illuminati kingpins is religion. Anotheris philanthropy. Philanthropy ties in with Illuminati beliefs that your gooddeeds must balance your evil deeds to gain power–it’s a Gnostic cabalisticview point. The Illuminati kingpins are great philanthropists even though muchof their philanthropy is self-serving.

Perhaps giving an example of a familythat is suspect due to their circumstances would help illustrate this point.There is such a family which has gone almost undetected for years, and althoughsome people fear them, they have not been reported on. Just because the policeplace a person on the suspect list, does not mean that the person is guilty.Everyone deserves the right to treated as innocent, until proven guilty.

One ofthe groups that concern this author are the rich ultra-secretiveultraconservative Talmudic Jewish groups. This exclusive group keep theirchildren away from contact with the outside world and send them to exclusive,semi-secret schools. An example of this would be the Reichmanns of Canada, whoare billionaires, and have had some connections to the Rothschilds of England.It’s not that this author has problems with people observing their religiousbeliefs strictly (or in the ultra-conservative Talmudic groups,”ultra-strictly” better describes their extreme strictness). It’sgreat that people have standards of belief and conduct. However, the author seesthe same patterns of legalism and secrecy that pervade Old Order Amish groups,– except in the case of families like the Reichmanns, the potential formischief is great, because they are not involved with milking cows, butinternational banking.

While most people are simply ignorant about the Amish butare not fearful of them, people who know rich billionaires like the Reichmannsscared to death of them and a heavy cloak of secrecy envelopes them. RenéeReichmann was the great matriarch of the Reichmanns of Canada who are TalmidimChakham, followers of the Talmud. They are not Hasidic. She is a descendent fromKing David, and King Solomon. She lives in Toronto. Her great-grandfather, aGestetner, was one of the wealthiest men in Hungary. Most of her family lives inMontreal, two of her sons live in Toronto. Her children are Eva, Edward, Louis,Albert, Paul & Ralph. Samuel Reichmann is the father of the dynasty inCanada.

In 1929, his egg business made him rich. He learned how to work financesand currency exchanges between different countries to make money by tricks tocircumvent legalities. Their family has also gotten Rothschild financial help,and during W.W. II they worked with Koppel, who ran the Rothschild’s City Bankin Gibraltar. Their family did a great many things during W.W. II from thetrading center Tangier in North Africa. Tangier was located in a position totrade between the Axis and the Allies. Also during W.W. II, under the directionof the Bank of Spain the Reichmanns and others kept the Spanish currencyartificially high, by creating an artificial demand for the currency. TheReichmanns made perhaps millions of dollars on currency exchanges during the waryears.

Don Eduardo Reichman was the administrator of del Real Estate &Commercial Bank of Tangier. Eva Reichmann married a British merchant banker.Albert Reichmann is President of Olympia & York Developments Ltd. Paul sitson the board of the Canadian Imperial Bank of Commerce (CIBC) & on the boardof Rockefeller Center Properties, Inc. (a real estate investment trust for someof the Rockefeller properties in Manhattan.) Albert sits on the board of theMt. Sinai Hospital in Toronto, and on the board of Landmark Lands Co., Inc.which owns some of the great golf courses in Palm Springs, CA. The OntarioMinistry of Consumer & Commercial Relations has offices in buildings ownedby them. They tried to buy banks in Israel. Their sect of Judaism has a YesodehHatorah school for ultra-orthodox boys. Their children have very little exposureto outside world. Their children do not have access to newspapers, television,or radios. Ralph and Paul were privately educated in England at Gateshead.It’s a perfect setup for trauma-based mind-control.

Samuel Reichmann is knownamong his kind of Jewish sect as a philanthropist who supports Torahinstitutions. These Talmudic families consider pedigrees and genealogies veryimportant, which is very much in line with the Illuminati’s mind-set. Thereason that this family is mentioned is that the Reichmanns haven’t beenmentioned in my previous books, and the circumstances that pervade the familyhave the earmarks for what this book is about. It may be that this family ofbillionaires consists of only wonderful people, but it is a given that most ofthe readers would be considered animals by these strict Talmudists, who wouldnever allow any of us of the wrong bloodlines to be accepted into their”in” group. Obviously the Rothschilds are of the right bloodline.

Likewise, international bankers tend to be a Machiavellian clique, (that is notthis author’s opinion, but the opinion of honest hearted person who have ranin those circles.) Why has this clique accepted a family like the Reichmann’sfrom such a narrow-minded judgemental sect into their fold? This paragraph isnot written toward anyone specifically, it simply calling our attention a familyof billionaires that no one knows about, which lives in veil of secrecy, and areligious setting that would make mind-control as easy as imaginable. (The Reichmanns would deny what’s been written here.)

There are victims ofmind-control coming in to therapists from conservative Jewish groups, and atleast some of these are Illuminati. The religious front could just as easily beChristian. Some of the readers of Vol. 2 reported back that the book helped themunveil the religious fronts that had helped derail their suspicions of puzzlingsituations that don’t add up. The next programmer to be written about uses thefront of being a leader of a Satanic Cult. I say front, because Michael Aquinohas created a public image for his satanic cult, and hides behind that publicimage. Anytime someone wants to reveal the ugly truth about him, he hollers tothe effect that he is being persecuted by a wild witch-hunt. He hollers thatpeople are just having a knee-jerk reaction to his satanic occultism, and thathe is really safe.

MICHAEL AQUINO, a military/cult mind-control programmer

An OVERVIEW. Michael Aquino has been a trauma-based total mind-control(Monarch) programmer for the DIA Psychological Warfare Division. He is also aprominent public satanist. A photo of Aquino in his military uniform is in thecenter picture section of Carl A. Raschke’s Painted Black (San Francisco:Harper & Row, 1990.) Other books contain various pictures of him in satanicgarb with ritual items. Most of the programmers have chosen to remain in thebackground, Aquino with his enormous ego, has chosen otherwise.

Senator Byrd (KKKleader & Freemason) and Aquino have done a great deal together over theyears, and have been like a team. With the legal expertise of U.S. Sen. RobertC. Byrd, Aquino established the Temple of Set, a satanic cult as a legalreligion recognized by the U.S. government and the U.S. military. This exclusivecult was designed to give these unchallenged criminals of the Network:

A. a legalorganization whose membership consists of a mixed group of slaves and handlers,B. a market outlet for their illegal drugs and porn, C. a good public, legal,openly satanic front with which to attack all media coverage of ritual abuse.

The controlled media could now excuseitself from covering ritual abuse, by saying that they had been threatened to besued by the Church of Set. Although the Church of Set has had the entire powerof the establishment protecting it from investigation and criminal prosecution,the climate of control over the United States is still not complete enough for Satanists to openly get away with their mind-control. By identifying itself sointimately with the Church of Set, U.S. military intelligence has given theworld an open trail of clues to help whistle-blowers expose the mind-controlthat has been going on throughout most of this century. Michael Aquino openlyassociated with men like President Ronald Reagan at the White House, againgiving us the leverage to expose the secret satanic philosophies of America’sleadership. Most of these men lead double lives, and due to the mind-control ithas been hard to establish (except for eye-witnesses) that they are secretSatanists.

HIS CAREER

The army has known about Michael Aquino’s Satanism from the beginning,clear back in 1968. Aquino (and some of his satanic lieutenants) received a Highsecurity clearance (reportedly level 6), and he served with the World AffairsCouncil.

A dozen leaders within the Temple of Set were Military Intelligenceofficers (for instance, Capt. Willie Browning and Intelligence Officer DennisMann). Aquino wrote “From PSYOP to Mind War: The Psychology ofVictory” published in the establishment’s prestigious Military Reviewmagazine. Aquino writes in this “From PSYOP to MindWar…” article,”…we shall create MindWar. The term is harsh and fear-inspiring, and soit should be: It is a term of attack and victory…” Aquino is a sadisticprogrammer, who loves to inflict pain on others.

Aquino has a doctorate inpolitical science. He has two masters degrees (one is in political science,Univ. of CA, Santa Barbara, where he also got his doctorate). Aquino is Airbornequalified. He studied at the U.S. National Defense University. He was inMilitary Intelligence in Vietnam & Germany, and the Presideo. He was aDefense Intelligence Agency attache, and taught political science on theuniversity level. He reported directly to the Joint Chiefs of Staff and workedone on one with the Secretary of Defense Cheney. He is a pseudo-intellectualwhose ego and astronomically-large pride gets in the way of real learning.

Hewas the former national commander of the Eagle Scouts Honor Society. (The BoysScout system is heavily influenced by Freemasons and contains unfortunately someperverts that try to take advantage of the system for their own perversions.)There was a massive coverup in the Presideo Day Care scandal in which Aquino wasinvolved in. There were hundreds of witnesses of the abuse. The military andintelligence put strong pressure on the San Francisco police to get them to backdown from doing anything to Aquino. During that time period, the Pentagontransferred Aquino from the Presideo back to the National Defense University,Wash., D.C. (And later he wound up in the St. Louis area.) During theinvestigation of the Temple of Set, the FBI claimed they had no record of suchan organization. The military at the Presideo, had a spokesperson tell the pressthat Aquino was a good soldier who did his job. Aquino hides behind hisreligion. In his Scroll of Set Aquino accuses the father of the girl who pointedhim out as her abuser as persecuting him because he is a Satanist. Aquinowrites, “Also relevant is his profession as a Christian clergyman; Icertainly doubt that he would have made such an outrageous accusation againstany Lieutenant Colonel who was not known to be a prominent Satanist.” (p. 4Oct. XXII)

The truth that everyone will realize on their own is that any loving,caring father when he discovers some pervert has severely sexually molested andtortured his daughter is going to go to the police no matter what religion the villainbelongs to. In 1985, U.S. Army major Grady McMurtry of Berkeley, CA and KennethGrant’s OTO got into a legal battle over who was the actual chartered OTOlodge in the U.S.

Col. Michael Aquino of U.S. Military Intelligence watched thelegal battle, and wrote these comments in the Scroll of Set Vol. XII no. 5, Oct.‘86, “While sitting in the courtroom watching Judge Legge preside sternlyover the slug-out, I couldn’t help wondering if he had any idea he was rulingon which group had legal claim to anal sex as the supreme religious sacrament inthe United States.” Witnesses report that one of Aquino’s favorite typesof sex is necrophilia, which of course can also be carried out with alters thatare in a death state.

PERSONAL HISTORY

Michael’s father was an Italian Catholic. A Canadian police document thatthis author has indicates that Michael’s mother was Betty Ford. Michael’swife is Lillith Sinclair. Besides being a Satanic High Priest & Ipsissimus,and an Military Intelligence Officer in Psychological warfare, Michael was astockbroker for a while. In 1970, he joined the Church of Satan, and led agrotto in Kentucky. Michael gave lectures on Satanism at the University ofLouisville, and used his house in Louisville for rituals. Aquino claimed to beanointed as the Second Beast, the one that Aleister Crowley prophesied in TheBook of the Law. (See Aquino’s The Book of Coming Forth by Night.) While LaVeyshaved his head and wore horns to look the part, Aquino cut his hair in awidow’s peak, plucked his eyebrows, and had a 666 tattooed under his scalp.

UNDERSTANDING The CHURCH OF SET

His Temple of Set was set up using ranks borrowed straight from the secretIlluminati–Priests or Priestesses, Adepts, Masters (Magus or Maga), andIpsissimus or Ipsissima. (The Order of the Golden Dawn also uses the rank ofipsissimus. His cult uses new terminology such as Setian for Satanist. It’s acommon tactic of cults to use new terms to separate the cult followers from theexternal world.

In Aquino’s bi-monthly periodical The Scroll of Set (Vol.XIII, No. 5, Oct. XXII, 1987, pg. 2 Aquino states, “Christianity isfinished as a serious contender for the minds of intelligent humans.”Aquino’s brand of Satanism attempts to pre-date Christian ideas and goes maketo Egyptian Hermetic magic and mythology for its symbolism.

Aquino also studiedthe Black Order and the SS in Germany and attempts to incorporate Nazi occultismand symbology into his satanic orders. The Temple of Set advertised in occultmagazines, computer bulletin boards, and ads in the San Francisco Yellow pages.When the Temple of Set expanded to Britain, David Austen from Kent, England,became Aquino’s High Priest in Britain.

To let the reader see just one moreexample of collaboration behinds the scenes of the Network, a Jesuit member ofthe Temple of Set continued teaching at a Catholic School after he joined theTemple. Aquino coined the word Xeper (pronounced keffer) to mean the process ofevolving a higher consciousness. Scientifically conducted research byGraphoanalysts has determined that a preoccupation with x’s means apreoccupation with death. Aquino and some other Satanists show theirpreoccupation with death by their fascination for words that begin with theletter “x”. Aquino’s girlfriend Linda Blood has supposedly left theChurch of Set and was at a conference that this author attended. She was veryantagonistic toward the victims of mind control at the conference, and acted inevery way like a cult plant. She was very disruptive of what the victims ofmind-control were trying to gain at the conference.

He has written in favour of black magic and left hand path, but since mostpeople don’t know what black magic & left hand path is, buzz words. Aquinostated on Ophray’s show that Satanists work “for the good ofhumankind.” How? By exploring the “freedom of the will.” Theundercurrents of his writings in his publication The Crystal Tablet of Set isthat he and his followers have power while the rest of us are basically wimps.Witnesses report how actual human sacrifices have been alternated with fakedsacrifices in the Temple of Set so that it is difficult for witnesses to tellthe real from the fantasy. The Temple of Set, like the Illuminati have strictrules that members are not allowed to keep incriminating items. Theirprecautions to go undetected resemble the Illuminati’s precautions.

UNDERSTANDING SOME OF AQUINO’S PROGRAMMING

Like so many programmers, Aquino flies all over the country, and hasvictimized people in numerous states and military bases. Michael Aquino’sprogramming is standard military-type programming. Aquino puts in his own spiritguide into people. He likes to use his own version of Star Wars, with himself asDarth Vader, for his programming scripts. He programs in sexual and death(suicide) programs–such as the Rivers of Blood suicide protection program, andall the rest of the various types of programs.

His Temple of Set functions as aprogramming vehicle. The rituals are designed to break the practitioners grip onreality and logic and take them into the world of visualization, and creativity.Members of Set take on a magical name, they attempt in rituals to become anotherpersona, which is a magical double of the person called “KA”. And thiska work is done on the astral plane. Aquino is friends with Paul Kantner who ispart of the mind-control scene and who put out an obvious programming songentitled White Rabbit.

In the Vol. 2 book, the significance of Leviathan wascovered. The Church of Set has an Order of Leviathan headed by James Lewis VIºof Baxley, GA. Michael Aquino is familiar with all the standard programming, theWizard of Oz and the other fairy tale themes. He is very proficient atprogramming, having many years of experience. In 1981, he used Cathy O’Briento make two HOW TO films for training military officers in the skills needed toprogram slaves. These two training films were entitled “How to Divide aPersonality” and “How to Create a Sex Slave.” (See CathyO’Brien’s monograph “Dick Cheney and Reagan’s ‘Hands-On’ MindControl Demonstrations” written/released 6/92.) President Reagan respectedAquino and encouraged the military to learn his programming techniques.

Aquino likes to work with Catholic mind-control victims. He is proficient atmanipulating the concept of hell and of doing satanic reversals like the BlackMass.

On the following pages are a little of the paper trail on Mind-controlProgrammer Michael Aquino:

· Some favorite photos of Michael Aquino in satanic garb.

· A two page letter of Aquino showing his fascination with Darth Vader. Herewrote his own version of Star Wars to use as a programming script. Programmersare given the freedom to decide what scripts they want to use.

· last page of a letter by Michael Aquino showing his preoccupation forHitler and Nazi things.

· two pages showing the trauma that therapists discovered in children thatAquino had sexually traumatized at the Presideo Day Care Center. As readers areaware the Judicial system never pursued the case against Aquino.

· A page from the police report where the girl who claimed she had beensexually molested by Aquino was interviewed.
<input height=”570″ name=”I15″ src=”http://www.whale.to/b/sp/deepera/p_aquino.jpg” type=”image” width=”448″ />

<input height=”404″ name=”I16″ src=”http://www.whale.to/b/sp/deepera/p_xeper-2.jpg” type=”image” width=”559″ />

p_aquino.jpg

p_xeper-2.jpg

……. of women, is as much an act of violence as it is a sexual violation,it is argued here that the abuse reverberates in a chain reaction ofviolence-related responses in the child victim, in his or her family, and in themental health system that is meant to serve the child. The Presidio case wasmade particularly poignant by the setting (the U.S. Army) and by the necessityfor the victims’ families to face simultaneously the abuse of their children and the failureof goodness of the government that serves them.

BACKGROUND

At the Presidio Child Development Center. in 1986-87. a single incident ofsuspected child sexual abuse led to a full-scale investigation during which allthe parents were informed that their children may have been victims of sexualabuse at the Center and were invited to come to the army’s Letterman MedicalCenter if they observed any unusual physical or emotional symptoms in theirchildren. Here the children received medical and psychological evaluations byU.S. Army representatives.

Over time, the army, the FBI, and the San FranciscoPolice Department became involved in the investigations. Accusations ofritualistic abuse were made against a teacher (G) and a lieutenant colonel(“Shamby”) and his wife (Mikey’): Shamby was also a high priest of asatanic sect. It was attested that children had reported group sexual activitieswith other children and with a doll: playing ‘games” in Mr. G’s bed:and being brought to a house with a black room, where sexual activities of anoccult nature ensued with Shamby and Mikey. Both boys and girls reported acts offondling and penetration by Mr. G. their teacher. Clearly, this was a newsworthyevent and it was quickly picked up by the media across the country.

Three yearslater, the army had made out-of-court financial settlements with the families ofthe alleged victims and the teacher was reported dead of AIDS. This case-studyanalysis is based on the author’s participation as an evaluator of andpsychotherapist for the girls (boys were assigned to male therapists) who werealleged victims. The author’s involvement began two years after theoccurrence of the alleged events when a team of lawyers was filing suits against the army on behalf of alleged victims and their families. Using process notes and evaluation records from the assessment and treatment of two of the girls (aged 3-4 when they were allegedly abused) and their families, along withanecdotal evidence from other cases, this ar-tide addresses the consequences andsequelae of institutional molestation for the child, the father, the mother, andthe family system (consultation with therapists of the male victims revealedsimilar overall findings). More specifically, it underscores the unique featuresof sex and violence in the nursery when the perpetrator of the abuse is thathistoric symbol of patriarchal protection, the military establishment.

SEQUELAE OF ABUSE

• All the victimized children who received a medical evaluation testednegative for the HIV virus at the time of their initial evaluation. Recentresearch, however, indicates a possible incubation period during which negativetest results can be found.

Finkelhor and Browne (1985) proposed that the experience of sexual abuseshould be analyzed in relation to four trauma-causing factors: traumaticsexualization. betrayal, powerlessness, and stigmatization. In addition, theyrecommended assessing both the preabuse and postabuse situations in determiningthe psychological effects on the child victims. In the case of extrafamilialabuse, this model is applicable to the victims’ families, as well as to thevictims themselves. According to Finkelhor and Browne’s model, the preschoolchild who is a victim of sexual abuse is at risk of severe levels of trauma, ofwhich, in addition to the obvious sexual traumatization. betrayal and powerlessness are particularly salientfactors.

Often, when a child enters a day care center, it is his or her firstcontact with the institutional world outside the family. At a young age, thechild is asked to trust a stranger for care, succor, and daily guidance. Thechild relies on the parents’ assurance that this unfamiliar situation is safeand healthy. Given such assurance, the child typically allows an attachment todevelop with the day care provider or teacher and literally puts him- or herselfin that person’s hands.

At the Presidio, it was that very person whovictimized the children, first by violating them sexually and then by warningthem that, if they ever told their parents great harm would come to them andtheir families, and that they would probably never see their parents again. Themajority of the children did not tell their parents, who did not find out aboutthe situation until the Center sent a letter warning them that their childrenmay have been abused.

As with incest, the preabuse situation in which the childhas trusted an adult who then accosts that child creates great emotional andcognitive confusion (“If this person is caring for me and I am totallydependent on him, he couldn’t possibly be doing anything bad”). Inaddition, it engenders strong feelings of betrayal when the child comes torecognize that this person did do something bad to him or her and that motherand father did nothing to stop it. The severity of the trauma for children atthe Presidio was immediately manifested in clear-cut symptoms. Before the abusewas exposed, parents had already noticed the following changes in theirchildren: vaginal discharge, genital soreness, rashes, fear of the dark, sleepdisturbances, nightmares, sexually provocative language (“Go down on thedoll-69.” “Get it up the butt,” “Lick the doll’stwat,” “Hump on the doll”), and sexually inappropriate behavior(a four-year-old girl grabbing her older male cousins genitals).

In addition,the children were exhibiting other radical changes in behavior. including temperoutbursts, sudden mood shifts, and poor impulse control. All these behavioralsymptoms are to be expected in preschool children who have been molested (Haugaard& Reppucci. 1988: Mac Vicar. 1987: Sink. 1988). Of particular note were the children’sresponses when they were first asked by their parents if something bad hadhappened to them at the day care center. One child screamed and ran out of theroom. Another whimpered, “They’re going to hurt you if I tell,” andstill another said, “I can’t tell, or they’ll kill you.”

Onlylater, after they were reassured that they would be protected, were the childrenable to report that “Mr. G touched my private parts,” “Mr. G hadme touch his penis,” “We passed around a doll and were told to touchthe doll in certain parts,” “Mr. G took me to his house to see hisbeds,” “I had to do something embarrassing in front of all thekids.”

These responses highlight the second salient feature of thechildren’s trauma: their sense of powerlessness. The children had feltpowerless to tell their parents because of the grave harm they believed wouldcoma to their families if they did. This was not paranoid or fabricated fear atrusted adult, a representative of the U.S. Army, had actually told them so.But, left to the devices of their own fantasy lives at the age of magicalthinking, the children elaborated on these rears, sometimes to a bizarre degree.Their only choice was to channel the anxiety and trauma into formation ofsymptoms, until their parents, on the basis of the warning letter, began toquestion them on the matter. Only later, once the children entered the mentalhealth system, did the full cycle of trauma, terror, and rage unfold. Thisphenomenon can best be understood by tracking the children and their familiesthrough the postabuse process, from discovery to treatment.

p_presidio.jpg

<input height=”936″ name=”I17″ src=”http://www.whale.to/b/sp/deepera/p_presidio.jpg” type=”image” width=”719″ />

APPENDIX B.THE PROGRAMMING SITES

Some MAJOR MIND-CONTROL PROGRAMMING SITES with explanations of theirprogramming. (Fritz Springmeier originally exposed many of these sites in 1993,so it is possible they have made some changes since they were originallyexposed. Most of these operated for years, and may still be operating. We areaware of that some of their programming bases have been moved after exposure.)Besides these major programming sites, there are countless minor ones. Forinstance, some of the programming sites for water-beach tortures have beenvisited by the co-authors, but are not listed. The massive Boeing Plant in theSeatle, WA area with its large amount underground tunnels has been used forprogramming, as well as the ARCO Beaver Valley Plant in Pennslyvannia. So hasthe chapel at the Coast Guard Academy at New London, Conn. which was built byA.W. Mellon of the Mellon Illuminati family via their Mellon Foundation. Thislist is not put forth as comprehensive. Without question, this list is only thetip of the iceberg.

29 Palms, CA-

Area 51 (Dreamland, Groom Lake), NV–Area 51 is also known as Dreamland.There are a number of extensive underground facilities in the area. This was oneof the first genetic research facilities in the U.S. and perhaps the first majorgenetic research facility. The people/workers & victims are brought in byairplane and tube shuttle. The worst cases of UFO/alien type of Monarchprogramming is coming out of Area 51. The eggs from slaves are being harvestedand weird genetic creatures are being developed from human eggs which have beengenetically mixed with other things.

Bethseda, MD–The Bethesada Naval Hospital

Bingham, UT–A red brick house, which was a closed House of Prostitution. Thebuilding was used for KKK programming. Child porn was produced in the basement,and upstairs programmed child slaves serviced KKK members. The KKK activity inthe area connects in with the Illuminati controlled Kennecott Copper Co. (akaUtah Copper Co.) Russell G. Frazer, head of Bingham’s Klavern & doctor forKennecott Copper Co. did the electro-shock to split personalities.

Black Forest, Germany–Because the U.S-U.K. and Germany do so muchprogramming, and some of the people in the U.S. were programmed in the U.K.,Germany or Russia, it is worthwhile to mention some of the German programmingsites. A number of witnesses report about castles in the Black Forest which areused for programming & ritual. Basal, Sw. on the border with Germany is aimportant Illuminati center. Frankfurt, Berlin and Zurich are all importantprogramming/ritual sites. The Jesuits and the Catholic churches are very activein programming in Germany.

Boulder, CO–The headquarters for EMC, a type of electra-magnetic mindcontrol that is being broadcast to modify the thinking of Americans, and tocontrol slaves.

Butner, N.C.–Center of Correctional Research, all types of mind control arecarried out and experimented with on the inmates.

Camp Peary, VA–The CIA’s The Farm is located on a narrow strip of landbetween the York & James Rivers near Williamsburg, VA, used for programmingCIA slaves. It has red brick buildings, and looks similar to a small college.The official crytonym was ISOLATION. People who are brought in who don’t knowwhere they are for training are called Black Trainees.

China Lake Naval Research Base (Inyokern), CA–

This facility had a country store, and hangers, and a hospital (address forthe hospital is the code- 232 Naval Air Weapons Station) which all providedsites for programming. This site has been operational since the early 1950s.Large numbers of children (batches of 1000 or 2,000 or 3,000 children were runthrough this facility at a time. This facility did much of the original traumasand mind-splitting tortures that created the MPD. Other facilities thenspecialized in further programming that was then layered in on top of theoriginal China Lake programming. A great deal of dehumanization in cages wasdone to large numbers of tiny children at China Lake Naval Facility. NimitzHospital did drug testing of the children prior to their programming.

Colorado Springs, CO–The ALEX system programming and end-times Militaryprogramming is coming out of Colorado Springs and is connected toNORAD. One of the Colorado sites is doing alien programming with mock UFOs.

Dillsboro Nike Base–Monarch programming of many kinds

Disneyland, CA–Disneyland has been an off hour site for Illuminati andsatanic rituals for years.

Programming has gone on using Disneyland as one big prop for programming.Many of the Disney movies are used for programming, and some Disney scripts areespecially tailored for Monarch slave programming. The Peter Pan programming canuse the ship. The space programming can use the space props. The satanicprogramming can use the castles. Lots of mirror programming is done atDisneyland, and Disneyworld. There is also Magic Mountain programming, andprogramming using the Around the World Dolls, and its theme song. Some of Wizardof Oz and the Cinderella programming was also done at Disneyland using costumes.Preverbal children are taken to Disneyland to get them ready for the scripts.

Disneyworld, FL–Disneyworld was created as the eastern counterpart to theDisneyland programming site. One of the rides in Disneyworld plays “It’sa small, small world” which is Disneyland developed programming theme.

Ft. Campbell, KT–Base programs are placed in here.

Ft. Detrick, MD–involved with medical/biological experimentation

Ft. Holabird, MD–This site is no longer in existence, but was the ArmyIntelligence School. CIC used the school. The place was known as “theBird.”

Ft. Hood, TX–programming involving military uses of Delta Monarch slaves wasdone here.

Ft. Huahuachua, AZ–HQ for Army Intelligence.

Ft. Knox, KT –The 1st Earth Batt. was developed here.

Ft. Lewis, WA–involved with the Psychic warfare part of the MonarchProgramming.

Ft. McClellen–Ft. Meade, MD–The National Security Agency was created on 4Nov 1952. Its headquarters were Fort Meade, VA. The National Security Agency (NSA)employs tens of thousands of employees and has a budget larger than the CIA. Ithas also been kept far more secret, while the CIA has been used as the fall guyto protect the National Security Agency’s reputation. In the late 1960’s,under Operation Minaret and Program Shamrock, the NSA and its Britishcounterpart GCHQ began monitoring much of the communication within the USA andUK. The NSA monitors all American calls via computers using trip words, specificnames, specific addresses, specific telephone numbers, etc. NSA has severalcomputer to record all the millions of conversations which the computers haveexamined and deemed worthy of recording. How the NSA can get any use out ofmillions of recorded telephone conversations is beyond me? What intelligenceagency could adequately process so much information?

These organizations now monitor all communications within both countries. Atleast one congressman got upset that his phone was bugged by the NSA. (see DavidCorn’s article, “The case of the bugged senator” in Nation, Feb. 6,‘89, p. 152.)

The NSA has developed a fiberoptics network called Internet computer network.An orange book is used to specify some of the NSA’s security levels.

An informant in the National Security Agency states that establishmentnewspapers like the Wall Street Journal and the New York Times are used tocommunicate secret messages which are placed within want ads, buzz words ineditorials, and via other methods. Because of some of what this person told me,I have given some possible examples in this newsletter of how people might beusing the papers for secret messages. For instance using Michael Jackson withhis hands making some type of sign might be a signal. Manfried Adler and the USSenate Committee investigating the CIA found that 90% of the CIA’s secretmessages are transmitted via the media, with the aid of coded texts andpictures.

A raised forefinger or two raised forefingers while a speaker is talkingmeans that the message is a masonic message coming from a masonic speaker.

The Illuminati uses code words within the large establishment papers to warntheir people what they are going to do with the economy. In this way, people inthe Illuminati can take appropriate responses.

Goddard Space Flight Center–NASA mirror-theme programming

Grissom AFB, IND–

Hollywood, CA–One of the programmers/handlers in the Hollywood area issurprisingly Anton LaVey. This is one reason Anton LaVey has followers who will carry out his very wishes.LaVey’s children of course were programmed too. His own girls have beenparticipating in the nude in satanic rituals since little children.

Homestead AFB, FL–

Kirkland AFB, NM–Lampe, MO–This has been the site of a CIA near-deathtrauma center where slaves are programmed. It is an R&R center for the CIAwhere they can have any sexual perversion or drug they want. This has been alarge cocaine supply depot also. Hal Meadows was director of this center whichis deep in the woods surrounded by cabin chalets overlooking a small deep lake.A gravel road leads to the site which is fenced and well-guarded. Hal Meadowsaddress was Box 27, Lampe, MO 65681.

Langley, VA– Slaves for the wants of intelligence.

Las Vegas (sites in and around Las Vegas), NV–MGM’s Grand Hotel and Themepark were built for programming, but there are also some sites outside of thecity used. In the general area of Las Vegas in remote sites, the elite gatherfor slave auctions once a year where Monarch slaves are sold and traded. One ofthe favorite slave auction sites was 20 miles out of Las Vegas and 10 miles offthe main road into the site. The Mob is involved with Monarch slaves in LasVegas. A blue-eyed 11 year old girl will go for $50,000. Toronto, Canada isanother regular site for Monarch slave auctions.

McClellan AFB, CA – Very bad Child and adult porn using Monarch victims isdistributed through this base as well as the other bases listed in this list. AT.W. Sanderson worked with Monarchs at this base.

MacDill AFB, FL –Near Tampa, FL

Maxwell AFB, AL —

Montreal, Que., Canada -McGill Univ., McGill Psychiatric Training Network,Allan Memorial Inst., St. Mary’s Hosp.- The Zombie Room (Sleep Room) in thebasement, the Isolation chamber and the Grid Room at St. Mary’s Hospital wereused for programming.

Mt. Shasta, CA–Underground facilities around this huge mountain in the LakeShasta area are putting out Monarch programming that makes the people think theyare in communication with aliens. This facility is for torturing &reprogramming captured runaway Monarch slaves. People are brought into the areavia helicopter, plane, or flying saucer. This site is probably the largestmind-control programming center. It is in a remote wooded area. It is heavilyguarded, has fences, and a large contingent of black helicopters. Mt. Shasta isequipped with state of the art high tech programming equipment. Mind-controlledslaves who are soldiers are programmed and trained at the Mt. Shasta facility.

Nashville, TN–These sites work with the Country Western Music Industry whichis actually a CIA front for moving drugs to finance their dirty blackactivities. Fiddler’s Inn, Nashville fits in with the MonarchProgramming.

Papillion, NE–

Patrick AFB,–Portland (Old OMSI, New OMSI, Bldg. Near Monarch Hotel at 8800SE Sunnyside Rd., Mormon Temple, etc.), OR. The Old OMSI building had a backdoor on the west side in which slaves were taken in to the bottom floor andreprogrammed. Although security guards aren’t visible, they are there withelectronic surveillance. The people running OMSI are tied in the Illuminati. TheDC-3 airplane outside of the building was used in the programming as a hypnotictrigger. The submarine docked outside of the new OMSI building is also used as aprogramming hypnotic tool. The new Mormon Temple has an extremely high techunderground tunnel facility for programming built underneath it. Witnesses havecollaborated their testimony on this high tech programming site under thePortland Mormon Temple. Although building plans are to be public information,the city of Lake Oswego makes it very difficult to view the temple’s buildingplans. The plans show that the foundation walls are far thicker than anyconceivable earthquake would ever call for. The reason is that the foundationhelps house an underground arena for the Illuminati & and their guests towatch perverse shows.

Presideo, CA (incl. Alcatraz, San Francisco)– The Illuminati and variousSatanic cults used the Presideo for their programming. Split-brain & otherprogramming was done at Letterman hospital. Fort Point was used for Illuminatiritual & programming, as well as a number of churches, underground gunemplacements and the large circular Greek column art building at the Presideo.Alcatraz, abandoned as a prison, was used for water tortures and otherprogramming. Tunnels connected buildings, and the Mule/Horse buildings andthe cemetery also were used. This is one of the older programming sites. Psychicwarfare activity also was experimented on in this area. Letterman Hospital hasbeen used for the initial drug testing of the infants before programming. Lotsof isolation programming in damp cold places was done at the Presideo. Lots ofporn and military programming have also been done here. Redstone Arsenal, AL–San Antonio, TX– Salt Lake City (Mormon Temple)–This underground facilityworks in conjunction with the Mormon hierarchy who are allowed to create slaves.The Illuminati put in base programming that still gives them ultimate controlbeyond the control that the Mormon programming has.

Scotty’s Castle, Death Valley, CA-Mengele (Dr.Green) programmed in some ofhis “internal boxes” as well as other Illuminati programming was doneat this site. Mengele had a large circular red bed in the castle which hestocked with his little girl slaves, who already had kitten sexual alters.Scotty’s Castle is a castle located in Death Valley CA. It has a veryinteresting history. To reach the castle one is required to drive through manymiles of desert. If one drives to lnyo County, CA, the same county that hasChina Lake Naval Testing Grounds, and Inyokern, and then you drive on Hwy. 190into Death Valley National Monument (it is not a park or forest, dead valleysare called monuments), next you go north on a road after Stove Pipe for 35miles.

The man who built Scotty’s Castle was Walter Perry Scott (1872-1954).Walter P. Scott was the son of an alcohol distiller and horse breeder inKentucky. Walter did not get any formal education. He left home and went westwhere he worked as a mule driver, and a water boy. From there he became a horsewrangler. Because of his talent with horses Buffalo Bill made him the featurerider along with Annie Oakley in Buffalo Bill’s family show. The showtravelled and Scotty was with it eleven years. During this time, Scotty mademany important friendships with men of power and wealth. In 1900, Walter marriedand left the show. He got a loan from Julian Gerard, a NY banker, to goprospecting for gold which he failed to pay back. Julian Gerard was repeatedlysending people to hassle Scotty to get his money back. In 1905, Walter Scott(“Scotty”) scattered gold nuggets and $100 bills from N.Y. to L.A.Where he got all this gold and $100 bills is a mystery, but it wasn’t fromprospecting. The idea of finding a secret mine was very obviously a cover forhowever Scotty managed to get his money. Scotty is well-known for his penchantto throw away $20 gold pieces as if they were candy wherever he went. Nobodybelieved he had a mine, strangely the IRS never got interested in Scotty. Why?The IRS went after Charles Caughlin who was exposing the elite, the bankers, theFreemasons, etc. in the early 1930’s on his radio show. There was no reason tosuspect Caughlin of any cheating on his Income Tax, and the audits found the IRSactually owed Caughlin money.

However the national papers printed front pagestories of the IRS investigation, and practically ignored that the man wasexonerated. Yet, the IRS left Scotty alone. Hmmm. Although Scotty was married,he became intimate friends with Albert Mussey Johnson (1872-1948), a Chicagomillionaire, who was v.p. from 1906 to 1926 of the National Life Insurance Co.Albert M. Johnson was born in Ohio, and lived in Arkansas and Missouri beforemoving to Chicago. Johnson came out and stayed in Death Valley. The stay helpedhis health, and he and Scotty remained close friends. In 1924, constructionsecretly began on a castle in Death Valley. The best of materials were used andthe materials had to be hauled clear out in the desert by truck to GrapevineCanyon where the castle sits. Hundreds of workers were hired. The castle got itskitchen tiles from Spain. Special rugs were made on the European island ofMajorca for the castle. Tiles for the incompleted pool came from theMediterranean. Many of the furnishing of the castle came from cathedrals andpalaces in Spain and Morocco. Draperies made for the castle were hand-tooled inselected sheepskin leather. Sixty hand-carved panels, each of a differentdesign, were installed in the music-room ceiling. A Welte Mignon organ reportedto have cost $160,000 –the finest of its kind in Western United States wasplaced in the music room, even though Scotty could not play the organ. Twelvebathrooms were installed. Several kitchens were installed. Tunnels and secretrooms were built under the buildings. Around $2 million (dollars of that timeperiod) were spent on building the castle, supposedly from Scotty’s “goldmine.” The castle became known as Scotty’s Castle. It is ideal as aSatanic ritual site. It can accommodate numerous people. It is remote. It hashidden rooms and areas and tunnels.

Tavistock, England–This has been theprimary programming center for England. The Rothschild programmers work out ofTavistock. A large number of slaves in America have been programmed there.

Tavistock has been doing mind-control since before W.W.ll. Under thesupervision of London’s W Board & 20 Committee MI6 and MIS’s Section BIAran double agents and mind-controlled spies/couriers during W.W. II. MI6 has hadan office at Century House, No. 100, Westminster Bridge Road. MI5 offices havebeen in part on Curzon St. MI5 has operated behind a number of fronts, incl.their fake travel agency Casuro Holidays. MI-5’s address for mail is Room 055,The War Office, London. Special Intelligence Service (SIS) dealt with all typesof mind control. Tavistock was under SIS. The British government has had theirown telephone exchange with a 222 prefix, which was later linked to anothersecret exchange YTAN. Outsiders could dial 222 8080 to get into the secret govt.exchange. Men like mind-control expert/hypnotist Eric Trist worked for Tavistock.A six-man team which wore black berets also helped w/ mind control at Tavistock.

Two people who became terrorists after their visits to Tavistock are AngelaDavis and Stockley Carmichael who went to a conference at Tavistock entitledDialectics of Liberation in 1967. It’s main building is a bland 6-storybuilding. The address is The Training Office, The Tavistock Clinic, 120 BelsizeLane, London, UK NWs SBA. Tel. no. 071-435 7111. The chief exec. is AntonObholzer. The Chair of Prof. Comm. is Nicholas Temple. Both are skilled inpsychology. The Tavistock Clinic was founded in 1920, and in 1946 the TavistockInstitute was created as an independent body to assist the Tavistock Clinic. TheInstitute does more of the research. The Royal Free Hospital at the Universityof London works with Tavistock Clinic, as well as the Science Policy ResearchUnit (SPRU) of Sussex University. A large number of Britian’s psychologist,social workers and police get their training at Tavistock. Tavistock has setthemselves up as the authority on ritual abuse and MPD (DID). In other words,the primary programming site, is pretending to be the leading institution tryingto solve the problem! That’s a good cover.

Tinker, AFB, OK–Tinkerbell programming is carried out here. This programmingmakes alters think they are like Tinkerbell in that they will never grow up orage.

Titusville, FL–At the Kennedy Space Center. Mind control testing is done,and base programming such as the Wizard of Oz programming is done here. AlsoNASA high tech programming is done here.

Tulsa, OK—Believed to have an Alice In Wonderland theme to theirprogramming. Oral Roberts University is used for programming. The programming toinfiltrate and capture the Christian church via the healing/charismatic movementhas centered around Tulsa and Oral Roberts University.

Utah State Prison–The prison has carried out mind control for over 30 yearson their inmates for the intelligence agencies with the help of the U.S.government’s power to cover it up.

Versailles, IL—Brain implants are put into Monarchs here.

Washington, D.C. area–The basement of the Pentagon and other facilitiesaround Washington D.C. such as the Jesuit Georgetown Univ. Hosp. are involvedwith Mind-Control. Presidential Models are moving in and out of Washington, D.C.carrying messages and performing their sexual acts for the lusts of politicians.There is also a NASA Mind-control Programming Center in Washington D.C. Secrettunnels connect the White House to other buildings. These tunnels are used tobring in slaves. Some secret rooms in the lower White House are set aside forrituals.

Wright-Patterson AFB–Near Dayton, OH, Virtual reality programming is carriedout here.

Youngstown, OH–The Youngstown Charm School has been run by IlluminatusProsser Seward Mellon along with a U.S. Congressman named Jim Trafficant. Theold stone building originally belonged to one of the railroad elite. This schoolis for Beta models and gives them advance sexual charm training. This schoolproduces about 6 new Monarch slaves every three days. Mafia deals are carriedout on the second floor of the charm school. A slave who is beingtrained/programmed at the Charm school will take a course that last a few days.The first day may be spent hanging in a dungeon which was once a basement wineceller. The torture dungeon has all the traditional torture devices, astretching rack, whips, hanging chains, etc. In the dungeon rooms were a blackNubian goat “Satan”, a small donkey “Nester’, and a small whitepony “Trigger”, as well as dogs and snakes. The slave is taughtsilence in the dungeon as they are subjected to bestiality.

Click here for picture 1

Click here for picture 2

Click here for picture 3

Click here for picture 4

Click here for picture 5

Click here for picture 6

Click here for picture 7

Click here for picture 8

Click here for picture 9

Click here for picture 10

Click here for picture 11

Click here for picture 12

Click here for picture 13

· We have just touched the surface of the vest network of programming sites.Two examples of an entire series of programming sites–1. the Coast to Coastcampground resorts & 2. the Jesuit-run institutions, which are oftenprogramming sites incl. Jesuit College, WV. An example of the former is the ParkCity Diamond Caverns. KT Coast to Coast resort, which has had a sensorydeprivation tank, headphones for state of the art harmonic programming. etc.These membership camp sites are used to program children. Nor have we touchedupon the large numbers of programmed Russians & Eastern Europeans that arecoming Into this nation. When this book was written more people immigrated tothe U.S. from Russia than anywhere else. Europe is teeming with prgmg sites.incl. the Vatican. Sebulun Zuflucht in Marienheide, Ger. is about the onlyeuropean attempt at deprogramming.

p_cloning.jpg
<input height=”559″ name=”I33″ src=”http://www.whale.to/b/sp/deepera/p_cloning.jpg” type=”image” width=”705″ />

APPENDIX 3. CLONES, SYNTHETICS, ORGANIC ROBOTOIDS AND DOUBLES

PUBLICLY ANNOUNCED GENETIC EVENTS

1890– A rabbit embryo was successfully transplanted to a foster motherrabbit’s uterus.

1944– A human ova was fertilized in vitro, that is in layman’s terms anegg was artificially inseminated in a test tube.

1952– Briggs & King in Indiana University clone a frog.

1970s– Rand Corporation predicts that “para-humans” will begenetically created to do menial tasks in the future. In a totally differentaffair, Lord Rothschild, who is a physiologist who has studied genetics, warnedthat self-centered fanatics might set up cloning shops privately. LordRothschild suggested to genetic scientists that a clone controlling organizationwith world wide jurisdiction to license cloning be set up to protect the worldfrom evil men who might want to clone people for evil purposes. He called hissuggestion ‘Commission for Genetical Control.”

1977– Announcement of the first successful cloning of a person, which wasdone for someone very wealthy. This whole affair came under strong attack by theestablishment. The book giving the shrouded details came out in 1978. The authorwent into hiding, and our Congress had a parade of establishment researchdoctors testify at a hearing to debunk the book and to reassure the public thatmedical researchers were too concerned about ethics to clone people. The authorwas convinced of the veracity of the cloning event, although themedia/establishment doctors claimed the author wrote the book merely as fiction.

1980– Twinning (bisection of an embryo), which is a form of cloning wassuccessfully done with horse foals, sheep and cattle had -already been cloned inthis fashion in the previous years.

1981– Mice are cloned. And embryo transfer for cattle becomes a thrivingbusiness.

1983– A water buffalo embryo was successfully transplanted to a fostermother buffalo.

1984– A human embryo was successfully transplanted and born with a humanfoster mother.

1997–A successful human clone is publicly announced.

Scientists working in secret got serious about cloning in the early 1960’s.Abortions began to be performed wholesale at this time to provide fetal tissuefor their cloning work. The young generation of Americans are asking, ‘Whenwill cloning of people take place?” The answer is that it already has longago. An article recently written by Andrew Kimbrell that was placed in manyleading daily papers across the U.S. is quite revealing. He comes right up toalmost telling people what has been going on. The article was entitle,”Science is about to Deliver.” (June 22, 1993) “…most Americansare unaware of the real-life exploits of current genetic engineers, sciencefacts which in many cases are as chilling as any science fiction….Pigs havebeen genetically designed to contain human-growth genes in the hopes of creating”super pigs” that would have more meat. “…U.S. government andprivate researchers have expended billions of taxpayer dollars in the creationof tens of thousands of genetically engineered animals never before seen….Oneprominent scientist predicts that we may soon see “five-ton cows and pigs12 feet long and 5 feet tall. “Genetic engineers.. .have cloned highermammals, including cattle….One writer notes that “genetic engineering hasthe potential to create a vast army of identical clones, each produced to somepreset specification. Canon fodder, scientists, opera singers, all could bemanufactured to order…” “The New York Times has editorialized,‘Life is special, and humans even more so, but biological machines are stillmachines that now can be altered, cloned, and patented.’ ” –(WOW!Readers do YOU REALIZE THAT BETWEEN THE LINES THEY ARE TALKING ABOUT BIONICROBOTOIDS–the robots that are now being created to take the place of people inhigh places. And the chilling idea that human-like machines will be producedthat will not be treated as anything but machines–that is a chilling idea too.

In this author’s September, 1993 newsletter there were two article by thisauthor on cloning, one entitled “Clones, Synthetics, Organic Robotoids, andDoubles” and the other article “Dulce Genetic Research/CloningFacility.” In the month following my September ‘93 newsletter’srelease, the establishment came out with stories about humans being cloned. [Ifelt that this was confirmation that God’s had directed me to publish theinformation I had on cloning 1/2 months before the secular media came out withtheir stories about the “first” laboratory duplication of a humanembryo.]

This ‘93 cloning was the first publicly revealed & publiclyaccepted human cloning, but the truth is that it had already been done for about30 years secretly. In December, 1993’s newsletter I had a followup article oncloning where I reviewed what the media was telling people about cloning after the ‘first” human cloning had beenannounced. My article also discussed the novel Multiple Man which is about howexact copies of the President are made. The book has some surprisingsimilarities with what they actually did with President Carter!

Finally inSeptember of ’96, this author’s newsletter came out with its fourth articleon cloning. This appendix is not the final word on the topic. The whole topicabout clones, synthetics, robotoids and doubles could have a great deal moresaid. This appendix is merely a review of what those four articles contained.Cloning also relates in a big way to the cranial/body manipulation that wasintroduced in this book. It also relates to the group mind/proxying that isbeing done. Perhaps at some point this author can go into the deeper intricaciesof cloning, but for now this appendix will provide its information in thefollowing format:

Section A. The “Future Shock” that this topic subjects the commonperson to

What happens when a technologically backward people are suddenly confrontedwith a technologically advanced people? What happens is that people are calledon to change, in many cases the stress is what Alvin Toffler described andcalled “Future Shock”. The overstimulation of new ideas, newdecisions, new ways of looking at things can cause great distress to the mindand body. Radical changes to adapt to the new situation are demanded. In thecase of the Navajo, one can see pickups parked beside hogans. In Nepal where Ilived, the Nepalese had never gone through a horse and buggy era, so they had noword for drive in their language. When cars suddenly appeared–the first wascarried into Katmandu on the backs of porters, they had no word for”drive”, so they used the words they had “sit and go.” Sowhere we say “Let’s drive to town.” They would say literally,”Let’s sit and go to town.”

The American people have in general been kept in the dark about the limits ofscientific developments. The known reasons people have not learned are varied.The Cold War was one reason. Capitalist corporate advantage is another reason.They call it trade secrets. Scientific pride and the ability to outstrip otherresearchers is another, and for the public just their technical jargon is enoughto prevent people from closely watching the level of research going on.

Butunderlying most of the coverup is this: that the overall satanic plan is to keeppeople ignorant of these scientific advances BECAUSE they are being used quiteoften to control and manipulate the world. What has developed is a situationwhere the American people are no longer in touch with where the elite’s secrettechnology is. It is clear that the elite know this and are aware that some ofthe “Future Shock” needs to reduced if they don’t want toself-destruct society. You need to be aware (mentally prepared) that most of thereaders of this will experience future shock when they read that cloning ofhumans is possible & has gone on for decades. The elite had a dilemma. Ifsociety isn’t moved forward to match their secret scientific advances, it willsoon be like cave-men meeting modern-day men. Society won’t be capable ofadjusting–only self-destructing. On the other hand they certainly can’t tellus what they are already doing, because they are using this technology againstus to control us. For this reason they are giving us movies that show us thingsthat they have already invented–but these are put forth as fiction in theseHollywood films. They hope to lesson the Future Shock, which their own secrecyhas greatly contributed toward creating, while maintaining control over thegeneral population.

SOME OF THE FILMS THAT SHOW EXISTING TECHNOLOGY

Clone–cloning; Jurassic Park–cloning

Genesis II–underground genetics laboratories that are connected by tubeshuttles.

Terminal Man–brain stem implants

Star Trek–various items. In addition to some of today’s secret technologybeing shown, the attitudes and beliefs shown on the two series, especially StarTrek the Next Generation are the attitudes the Satanic elite want people tohave.

READERS PREPARE FOR FUTURE SHOCK

The Scriptures give strong indications that genetic monsters, the half-breedNephalim will exist in the end times. God’s Word also forecasts that the markof beast will be needed for buying & selling.

One item conveyed by the Bible’s book of Revelation is that totally unexpected sudden change will characterize the endtimes. Christians need to be prepared for unusual big changes. So great willthese changes be that the nations will be distressed, and men’s hearts willfail them for fear (LK 21:25-27). The Bible predicted that knowledge shallincrease in the last days before Christ returns. (DN 12:4) But that knowledgewill be used for evil, because the Bible also says that the world will betotally corrupt as in Noah’s time (MT 24:37)–which was a time of the geneticmonsters, the half-bred Nephalim. It also says men and horses will be out ofwork. (ZEC 8:10) And it is believed that Nahum 2:3-4 must be describingautomobiles, and that Isaiah 31:5, and 60:8 are describing and prophesyingairships in the last day. The description of the “mark of the beast”is startlingly accurate in describing the microchip which is being inserted intopeople’s hands and foreheads.

The information that is allowed out for thepublic to access has been heavily censored. Still in spite of all the intensesecrecy, if a person takes the time to dig and to find key items written byscientists, enough of a shadow picture develops to allow a person to realizethat they already can produce several things the public is unaware of. Manytimes the articles will discuss only a tiny aspect of a larger process, or willsay we have the knowledge to do such and such but the actual doing is yearsaway. And somehow people swallow that we could have the capability to do it, butaren’t. For instance, in a book that was published in 1979, Robert Gilmore McKinnel, Professor of Genetics and Cell Biology, College of BiologicalSciences, University of Minnesota, wrote “It has been reported that miceand some large domestic animals have been cloned. Humans have not. Because thereproductive biology of humans…is similar to that of mice and other mammals,it is likely that humans could be cloned.” Some of the men who know what isactually being done, are afraid to tell what they know. However, I do not haveneither a professional reputation nor a job to guard. I have never taken anyoath of secrecy to any of these organizations of the establishment. I can simplytell you the truth without fear.

Section B. Instructions on how to clone a person

For those who want the medical description of just one way that cloning ofpeople can be done (and this capability has been around for at least adecade–and much longer secretly.) The idea that we don’t have the knowledgeto do it is simply a myth for public consumption. Any microbiologist worthanything knows that we have the knowledge and the means–they can only claimthat cloning of humans hasn’t happened because supposedly no one wants to doit.

A TECHNIQUE–INSTRUCTIONS HOW TO CLONE A HUMAN

The ovulation and ovaries of the woman can be monitored. Just before naturalovulation, there is an increase of luteinizing hormone which is called theluteinizing hormone surge. This can be detected by either blood or urinesamples. The growth of the follicle can be monitored by visualization withovarian ultrasonography. Ultrasound diagnosis will reveal on which side of thewoman’s ovaries the ripening follicle is found. This procedure will allowpeople to know when the follicle is ripe for the retrieval of the oocyte.

Whenthe time is appropriate a hollow aspiration needle is inserted into one orseveral ripe follicles under visual guidance of the laparoscope. The oocyte isremoved with some follicular fluid. Experienced laparoscopists have a successrate over 90% in recovering the oocyte. Prior to this, it is likely that thewoman will have been given Clomiphene citrate, or this drug used in combinationwith another drug so that there will be several eggs that can be retrieved atone time.

The oocytes obtained from the ripe ovarian follicles are notfertilized when retrieved, although another process would be to fertilize first,before extracting. If they don’t fertilize first, then they can take theharvested oocytes and incubate them in a culture medium for several hours to getmaturation. They need maturation because they have been taken from the ovarybefore ovulation, and are not as mature as spontaneously ovulated ova.

Thawed orfresh semen is washed and certifuged so that it will be diluted to the properconcentration to fertilize in vitro. The in vitro fertilization is carried out.After some amount of hours, (about 12) both pronuclei are identifiable forenucleation. The enucleation is accomplished with either one of twowell-established methods. One method is to surgically enucleate it with amicropipette, another is with a bleb of cytoplasm containing both the male andfemale pronuclei. Either method has worked fine. These nuclei by the way havebeen obtained from the inner-cell mass of an early human embryo. This again is awell established practice.

Let us digress slightly and explain the method toobtain the nuclei. The zona pellucida must be removed from a cultured embryo,the trophectoderm separated from the inner cell mass, and then, the cellsdissociated with an appropriate enzyme in a calcium-and magnesium-free saltsolution. Going back to the cloning process, there are several methods for doinga donor nucleus (obtained from its source using the just mentioned method) withenucleated cytoplasm (obtained from the woman’s in vitro fertilized ovum). Onemight be to surgically implant it with a micropipette, another is fusion with aninactivated Sendai virus. Whichever way is considered most viable by thoseperforming this will be used. And then the human nuclear transplant will becultured until it can be placed into a human foster mother.

When the clone has reached the 8 – to 16 cell stage it will be transferred into thefoster mother. If needed, the transfer can be done later, and the clone issimply frozen. When the transfer takes place, the clone is drawn into a fineplastic tube (a catheter) which, then in turn, would be introduced through thecervical canal into the interior of the uterus. — This is just one process forsuccessfully cloning humans. Other more refined techniques may well be in use.

Section C. The four types of ‘clones’ that are used by the Illuminati

Cl. Actual Clones

This is a person who has been grown from a test tube(called “in vitro”) or implanted womb, which has the identical geneticmakeup to another person–an identical twin so to speak in terms of geneticmakeup. The genetic coding has reproduced, and a new person who is an identicaltwin is now in existence.

C2. Synthetic People

These are “persons” who look everybit as realas a real person, but simulate human beings. Certain tissues extracted fromcattle are the starting point. (This is part of the reason for cattlemutilations.) The process is an advancement of a process discovered in the late1950’s. This 1959 experiment was reported in a book in 1968 called TheBiological Time Bomb by Gordon Rettray Taylor. Taylor describes the experimentdone in France, “They had extracted DNA from the cells of the khaki Camphells and had injected it into the white Pekins, thinking that just possiblythe offspring of the latter might show some character derived from khakiCampbells. To their astonishment the actual ducks they injected began to change.Their white feathers darkened, and their necks began to take on the peculiarcurve which is a mark of the khaki Campbell.” The scientists working underthe auspices of the Rothschilds, (who are directed by Satan himself) developedthis process by working at secret breakneck speed. They developed an advanceddevelopment of the process they discovered with the DNA chicken experiment. Bythe late 1970’s, synthetic people could be produced by the Illuminati.

C3. Organic Robotoids

This is an “artificial life” form that iscreated through processes that are totally different than cloning or synthetics.Organic robotoid technology is being made to make exact as possible copies ofimportant people such as Presidents and some of their staff. For instance, theJimmy Carter who came to Portland a few years ago who I stood two feet away fromand examined visually was not the Jimmy Carter that had run for President.

OnEaster, 1979 the first robotoid model of Jimmy Carter replaced the man JimmyCarter. By the time “Carter” was seen by me, they must have been on atleast robotoid no. 100. This is why a friend of mine who was recently inWashington D.C. almost bumped into President Clinton jogging. My friend wassurprised by the lack of security.

Kaiser Aluminum News which is put out byKaiser Aluminum & Chemical Corporation put out a series of articles to aspecialized audience in the 1960’s. This material was also published under thebook title The Dynamics of Change (Prentice-Hall: Englewood Cliffs, N.J., 1967).

Under the title heading “GENETIC MANIPULATION” we read, “Theability to control the formation of new beings may be one of the most basicdevelopments of the future. Recent discoveries about the nucleonic acids, thebasic building blocks of life, have led to the belief that man may some day beable to treat genes in such a way that desired characteristics can berealized…”

Under the heading “MAN-MACHINE SYMBIOSIS” we read,”…Computers exist which can learn, remember, see, seek goals, reason,walk, sing on key, talk, be irritable, play games, grasp, adapt to anenvironment and even design improvements in themselves.. .man-like computers mayone day contain plasma circulating through a viscera-like envelope, allowingthem to be self-healing.”

Under the heading “HUMAN ROBOTS” weread, “…An electronic circuit that imitates two neurons, the cells of thehuman brain, has been built, and has enabled a robot to deal with someunexpected situations, but the neuron structure was bulky. The brain hasbillions of neurons, meaning an incredible miniaturization job will be necessarybefore truly ‘human’ robots are developed.” As the reader knows sincethe 1960’s when this was written an incredible miniaturation job has been donein computers. What the public knows of that minituration is incredible and thatis only part of what has actually occurred. In fact, scientists are now able tomanipulate DNA to create computers.

A basic thing that is needed to create acomputer is material that will consistently change given some type of”signal”. This is because the computer works off of base two–or whatis simply an on–off switch system, or a 0 or 1 system of numbers. Livingbiological material is superior to other material for making computers becausethe heat created by the methods in conventional computers slows the speed. Forsuper-computers to work at great speeds they need to use biological materialthat will not heat up. This type of miituration has already been done. Itcreates computers far beyond what we are familiar with. Organic robotoids areamazingly humanlike, so humanlike that it is hard for the scientists who havecreated them to get used to the idea that they are not humans.

Biologicalcomputer brains for the robotiods came as a result of research into holograms. If you tear up a conventionalphotograph you ruin it, but if you tear up the film that produces a hologram,each piece still contains almost all the same image. This is why part of thebrain of people can be removed and the brain regain what it had lost. Aholographic image of a person’s brain is made, and then when the brain of arobotoid is made, the biological computer in its head is caused to formaccording to the holographic record of a person being copied. Some deviationsfrom the holographic record are needed, because the “person” is arobotoid and not a person. The brain of the robotoid has almost all of thecorrect memory of the person reproduced, but the robotoid brain is really acomputer made from biological material which is programmed, it is not a humanbrain.

First, “Clinton” has the energy to jog because it may well be a robotoid, and second thing, an assassination of a robotoid is not so serious.These robotoids have a biological computer-brain that is programmed. They canthink in the sense a computer thinks, but secret advances in understanding thehuman brain, have allowed the makers of organic robotoids to have the memory ofa person at a given point in time transferred to an organic robotoid. The keythen for making what appears to be a clone–but they are not a real clone–is tocapture the person to be copied and make a holographic copy of the brain memoryand transfer that to the robotoid.

How the memory of a person is transferred for the organic robotoids. Inorder to successfully make human organic robotoids–in a sense to make bionicrobots–the ability to simulate the personality of the person being copied wasnecessary. The only viable solution was to learn how the brain coded memory andduplicate that process. The brain is entering into its memory about 10 millionbits of information a second. The incredible storage capability of the humanbrain which weighs on the average 3.25 lbs in human males and 2.9 lbs in humanfemales is incredible. The brain can easily store 100 million billion bits ofinformation. It’s no wonder we don’t use it all.

All the computers in theworld put together do not compare with one intelligent person’s brain.Numerous tests and experiments from many different angles all showedinvestigators that the brain stored information as a hologram. The place in thebrain where a memory is stored isn’t in just one location. Memories are storedin synapses in sequence, but they are stored in a holographic method. From whatI understand, rhythmic pulses radiate from a small area of the brain like astone creates ripples in a pond. Waves go through the cerebrum, in the way thatlaser light is used to create a hologram. Different frequencies are used by thebrain and different neuron impulses are used to reference (tag) the differentdetails. These tags are the brain’s own codes or reference standards forcataloging information. The brain has to be able to access the encoder/decoder(holographic code standards) for a particular piece of information to beretrieve for the conscious.

Brain injuries can destroy one decoder, and leaveother decoders for a memory intact. When a multiple (a person with MPD/DID) iscreated layers and layers of amnesia walls (actual walls) are built into thebrain, and then specific codes are created which cause the mind to bring thesecompartments of memory to the surface. Each compartment is built into an alter(personality) or a functioning part of the System (built somewhat like a seriesof computers). Where a normal person may be aware of a conscious and a somewhatsubconscious track running simultaneously, the mind of a multiple runs severaltracks at once.

On a local level within the brain, researchers have called amemories storage unit an engram. Polypeptidenucleic acid holds a piece ofinformation, such as a trauma memory. Proteins and other substances are involvedin the memory process. How a person eats can influence their mental abilities.But it must be born in mind that a memory is retained holographically incountless locations in the memory storage area of the brain, just as the ripplesof a stone dropped into water flow throughout an entire pond. The mind will havea number of reference points from which a particular memory can be decoded. Theinformation that is stored in the brain is both dynamic and holographic. It isnot stored like a book. If the dynamic impulses of the brain cease, so do thememories. Freezing and reviving a human brain will serve to erase its memory.

Iwill try to explain things in clear terms if the reader will bear with me. Thereason that we recogmze objects so quickly is that the brain performs what issimilar to what researchers call a Fourier transfer. Messages are transmittedthrough Fourier-transform messages. What is a Fourier-transform message? AFourier transform is a mathematical method where a complex wave, or a complexpattern is broken down and converted into a basically longer, but precise signalof simpler frequencies. In other words a squiggly line is hard to communicate,but via the Fourier transform it becomes a string of numbers which is quite easyto transmit. In other words, a complex squiggly line and a straight line afterthe conversion are both just as easy to record. The brain stores information ina form similar to a Fourier transform, so that when it must look for similarpatterns, it can quickly overlook everything but another identical Fouriertransform pattern. A mental comparison is done so quick that it gives theability to the brain to “instantly” recognize people who one hasn’tseen for years. The Holograms of memory that the brain makes are transmitted through Fourier-transform messages. Holograms are hard todestroy, for each piece contains the whole. Rip a holograph in half and youstill have the same picture. Rip it in half again and the same picture remains.After a great many cuts in half the holograph begins to get a little fuzzy, asit loses some of its detail, but the entire picture is still there. That is whymemories begin to get somewhat fuzzy, because we are only puffing up a smallpiece of brain that recorded the memory. However, if we can pull up more of theholographic image of the memory we get a more distinct detailed picture.

It wassecret research into holograms that gave Illuminati scientists the ability tocopy the memory of an entire brain. A holographic image is made of the host’sbrain and that is transferred into the biological matter functioning as a brainof the robotoid. Since the body and brain of the robotoid are not identical tothe original person being copied, adjustments have to be taught and programmedinto the mind of the robotoid. The entire process is sophisticated, but then soare many manufacturing processes today.

C4. Doubles (look alikes). There is an ongoing program to find look alikesfor prominent people, as well as a program to create secret identical twins(which are separated at birth and never see each other).

George Bush’s doublewas promiscuous, while George Bush is a pedophile. His double was living inFrance after Bush was no longer President. By the use of doubles, (or one of thesynthetics or organic robotoids) the elite are able to sneak away and performsatanic rituals. On certain occasions, if Clinton or Bush only needed to do lowlevel tasks in front of the public, they could have their double substitute forthem. The Illuminati working with several organizations has had a look alikeoperation where doubles of certain key people are found and then used.

In thebook Desert Shield and The New World Order pub. by Northpoint Tactical Teams,Topton, NC, if you look on page 32 you will see a picture of the original FDRwho had a mole over his eyes and then you will a see a picture of the double ofRoosevelt who they used, who had no mole and had different ear lobes. Rooseveltmay have died prior to when it was actually announced.

Over the years I haveseen numerous photos exposing either the Robotoids or the doubles that they use.This author’s previous S’ ’93 article had some pictures about the dead PopePaul VI, who my Be Wise As Serpents book said was murdered. This recent Pope wasreplaced with a double who had had plastic surgery. As a double gets older theplastic surgery will not look as convincing, because time changes peopledifferently. One ex-Catholic said the whole thing sounded like science fiction.It does sound far out at first, but the evidence is there for people to see. Formyself, the ex-Illuminati have told me about the double’s program. From what Iunderstand the double or look-alike program has been more successful than therobotoids and synthetics. The reason is that people live longer and are moredependable in some ways. The project to find look alikes for prominent peoplehas been very successful. Plastic surgery has also been done to help touch upthe doubles.

Section D. Secret cloning sites (See also Appendix B, where D.U.M. bases arelisted.)

Ada, Oklahoma’s underground facility is being used to clone humans. Theother cloning facilities are turning out weird creatures. Due to the processesinvolved they give off lots of gamma radiation (Gamma is at the far end of theelectromagnetic wave spectrum–it is even a longer wave than ultraviolet).Because they give off Gamma radiation, these facilities must be deepunderground. The cloning is done at level 7. The average depth (according to oneof the men who built these Deep Underground Facilities – D.U.M.) is 5,600’.

The secret government has been building them no stop since W.W. II. I personallyhave only been in an underground city in Oahu, HA, but I have spoken to otherswho are wanting to save humanity and stop the NWO, and these witnesses know alot about the underground facilities.

One of the men who betrayed the human raceand helped with the cloning was Austrian born Simon Wiesenthal. Simon Wiesenthal,was a US intelligence agent with a photographic memory (perhaps a scarred brainstem). Wiesenthal seriously hunted Nazis that were not on the CIA’s payroll orCIA associated groups. Simon Wiesenthal, under the disguise of being a greatNazi hunter, actually assisted protecting the FBI’s and the CIA’s agents whowere Nazi criminals. Wiesenthal tried to stop CBS from doing a show exposing theFBI-Nazi connection.

Jewish Intelligence (the Moussad) knew all about thehundreds if not thousands of Nazi War criminals that worked for AmericanIntelligence and the FBI, but never went public about it. Instead theyoccasionally used the information as leverage against American intelligence. Oneof the code no.s for Simon Wiesenthal given by a Monarch slave was somethinglike 063 097. If someone else knows the full and correct code for him, go aheadand share it.

Unholy Trinity is a book written about how the Vatican, the USState Department, and MI-6 smuggled Nazis out of Germany at the end of WW II. Anentire book could be written about the thousands of die hard Nazis who have beenworking for American intelligence, however Simon Wiesenthal’s name ismentioned here because he helped start the cloning for the worst elements of theNWO.

OREGON’S UNDERGROUND SECRET CLONING FACILITY

In at least one of my newsletters, the secret cloning facility at Bull Runnear Mt. Hood, OR was discussed. Bull Run is a large tract of forested land withsome water reservoirs/lakes that is set up to help provide water for thePortland Metro area. My house on Lincoln St. was also near 8 reservoirs thatwere built at nearby Mt. Tabor. These reservoirs at Mt. Tabor were for Portlanddrinking water too. The Mt. Tabor reservoirs have simple single fences on theirperimeter, and people are able to throw garbage into these reservoirs if theywant to be nasty. However, the Bull Run water supply which is very isolated isextremely well protected. It is rare that people would stray up into the areaanyway. People are told that this large tract of land is simply for Portland’swater supply, and yet several years ago a Patriot military unit reconned thearea after getting info from me. They were able to identify 3 strongly guardedrings of defense at the Bull Run reservoir. The area has lots of electronicsurveillance, etc. It is either the most valuable water on God’s green earth,or there is something else in the vicinity of Larch Mountain (south of thefamous Multnomah Falls which sit on I-84)–something besides a water reservoir.Of course, those in the know, know that it’s an underground facility which theCIA use. It’s not an accident Tektronics here in the Portland area doeswork/research with holograms.

FURTHER INVESTIGATIONS AT DULCE’S UNDERGROUND CLONING FACILITY

My article about Dulce [which I investigated in person on foot] also sparkeda small group of dedicated Christians to try to retrace my steps and find theDuke facility. They reported back to me that they found nothing and that thereservation police and the local people claimed they’d never even heard of anyunderground facility. All I can say is that, doesn’t that strike you as fishythat all kinds of people have been up in that area looking for the site,interviewing the Jicarilla Apaches that live in the area for years, talkingabout Dulce over Art Bell’s Radio show, etc. and locals have never heardanything about it?? At the very least they should know that other people lookedfor the site. The reservation and town of Dulce, NM have a small population.There is little that everyone doesn’t know about what goes on in the area, andyet they are surprised by the topic of an underground facility? The whole thingsmells like the key people in the area have been convinced to keep their mouthsshut & pretend they know nothing.

My comments: sometimes when you’relooking for a rat, you’ll smell it before you see it. According to someone whohas worked in the Dulce Underground Facility the openings on the north and SWface (Aztec Cliffs) are still in use. Actually the cliff that has a face thatlooks like an Aztec on Mt. Archeleta has been cemented shut because hikers keptstraying into the area. A deep needle detector which could detect metal ormagnetism deep down could reveal the Dulce Underground Facility–but people whoget this close often disappear.

SUMMARY OF THE FOUR METHODS

This Appendix covers 4 different methods that have been used to make copiesof people, these were cloning, creating synthetic duplicates, creating organicrobotoids, and finding look alike doubles. [Programs for all four of thesemethods have had almost unlimited funding by the intelligence/Illuminati elite.]

Next, the basic principles for creating a synthetic human were covered.Synthetic humans were in some ways found to be superior to the robotoids thatwere created. The first few years of robotoids were fraught with problems.[Since my inside information is somewhat dated, I cannot give readers the statusof current robotoid abilities, however, I believe from what I’ve seen that theprogram continues.]

The synthetics were people who had their genes altered tolook more like the person they were to copy. The robotoids were the formation ofnew beings that look human but are actually bionic robots. Their memories werecreated by using living “brain tissue” which is some type ofprogrammable living biological matter, and programming this material as asophisticated computer. In order to get the memory of the person being copied, aholographic image of the person’s brain is made and transferred to therobotoid. Because the robotoid “brain” is not functioning like a human(although the end result is nearly identical so that viewers have to know whatdifferences to look for), there are of course some adjustments that have to bemade after the holographic image of the host is transferred to the livingbiological matter that will function as the brain of the robotoid. Lord Willing,this author may write some more on this topic later. The ability of theIlluminati to copy people using the 4 methods listed above, are not going to bethe deciding factor in their moves to control the world, but it does give them agreat deal of flexibility in their operations. This author frequently reflectson the words of the Illuminati Grand Master who told Cisco, who was then achild, while touring a cloning facility, “Never, never think you are seeingwho you think you are seeing.’

FINAL NOTES

As this author’s reflects back on what’s gone into thisfirst part, he can’t help thinking about how God will reveal all things thatare secret. (See Dan, 2:22 and other verses). The prophet Daniel called him the revealer of secrets.” The secrets which are revealed in this book areminuscule compared to what God Almighty will reveal in His day. And as thisauthor reflects back he realizes that there is so much more that could be said.

This author has neglected to get my information about the Clintons into this.For instance, this author interviewed a woman who went to school with Hillary,and two of Hillary’s mind-control victims. Our establishment media haveneglected to tell the American people about Bill Clinton’s roots & ties inHot Springs, Ark.

Hot Springs is a city that has forty-seven thermal springswhich have brought the jet set from all over the world. The mafia syndicate& their nightclubs made Hot Springs a hot bed of vice, gambling,prostitution. During the 1920’s the territory so popular with organized crime,that they classified the territory “neutral ground” like they didHollywood. In the early 1960’s, Hot Springs had the largest illegal gamblingoperations in the entire U.S. Billy’s uncle Roy was a politician inArkansas’s legislature connected to all this mess. And Bill Clinton’s uncleRaymond Clinton, who had a Buick dealership, was tied to all this corruption.

Bill & his brother Roger’s cocaine habits are well known by those familiarwith them, as well as their wild parties at the Coachman’s Inn, Little Rock,Ark. What are not known are Hillary & Bill’s membership in the secretIlluminati.

And for some reason some of their more intimate associates are alsonot known, such as Charles “Chip” Whitmore, a Satanist &programmer. Chip & Bill have met often on a weekly basis over the years.This continues, for instance when Bill was in England so was Chip, when Billwent to Florida so did Chip. Chip played drums with mind-control programmerJerry Lee Lewis. He was also a friend of Jack Ruby. (It’s a small world at thetop of corruption.) Chip owns Cash McCool’s Tavern. He is 5’6, glasses forhis poor eyesight, has good hearing, and has a filthy mouth. He changes the carhe owns & drives every 3-5 months. Chip had a programmed girl murder a man,and then the Network got him off of his murder charges. Chip’s family’sVilla Mare in Little Rock was pictured in the opening shots of Designing Women.

Chip Whitm ore has been in charge of assassinations in his area, and controlsthe local law enforcement in Arkansas. Jack Stevens, said to be the largestinvestment banker in Little Rock, is CIA/part of the Network. He exchangedinformation with Chip via their mutual black cleaning lady. Further, Whitmore& Stevens tie in with a string of corruption that extends into the Assemblyof God churches & other parts of Churchianity.

Over Chip is a Dr. PaulPalmer. The media just gives us glimpses of the depth of occult corruption. Forinstance, Insight magazine Feb. 26, ’96, page 48, in an article by SuzanneFields had a photo of Hillary’s backside wearing what appeared to be a goldendragon on her black coat when she went to court to talk about the Rose Law Firmbilling records. She has sometimes been called the Dragon lady for good reasons.Will today’s modern equivalents to shamans, our psychiatric community helpprotect us from murderers like Chip Whitmore? Not likely.

The BiographicalDirectory of Fellows and Members of the American Psychiatric Association revealsthat in 1957 there were 7,104 American members in the American PsychiatricAssociation. Of those 7,104, a total of 1,253 had moved to America from Germanyand Eastern Europe. This helps us understand the enormous influence Operation Paperclip had on America. Operation Paperclip was the CIA’s project to smuggleNazi criminals into our nation, some of which have now made Penn’s campusinfamous. No wonder the False Memory Spindrome got started at PennsylvaniaUniversity. We were warned by a psychiatrist in a Weekly World News story ofJan. 9, 1996 about a strange new sleeping disorder where people die after seeinga hooded robe figure chase them. This new “Deadly Dream Syndrome”sounds strongly like mind-control. Perhaps there is no way to have given thereaders anything but a drop in the bucket.

Some of the details that got left outon the way include

the Seventh-Day Adventist church’s secret cooperation withthe government to supply young men (1,500) for government experiments calledOperation Whitecoat;

how the Dept. of Energy set up hotlines for victims ofradiation experiments, in other words the fox is in control of where the victimgoes for help;

Peter A. Petito, “Mr. Intelligence” in Italy, and hisconnections to the Network;

William Randolph Hearst’s costume parties and hishalf dozen homes like San Simeon;

Torrance, CA’s Penthouses and Disney’smind-control;

the Masonic peace sign of uplifted hands with wrists crossed inthe film 1984;

the movie Army of Darkness with its mirror image programming,”London Bridges falling down” programming ditty, etc.;

how FEMA workswith the 6th Army that Aquino was part of, how Voodooism uses Waterfalls forhealing such as at Sardo, Haiti;

how Mothers of Darkness alters are trained tolove a marble, fed the marble, care for it, and then to shatter it with a hammeruntil its fine like salt and then to repeat the process and only split themarble but not crush it as part of their training to program;

how a certaintorture is done to make the victim think they have a butterfly as a head withthe head of the butterfly in their third eye area;

how scribbling is used toanchor programming in child victims;

programmed soul-ties to aliens;

Mr. Greenjean’s (of Capt. Kangaroo) talk of Mr. Moon & how it was used forprogramming;

the blood sacrifices under the Temple Mount on March 13th thisyear;

the Masonic corruption in Arcadia, FL and the G. Pierce Wood MemorialHospital;

how secret meetings of the CIA have studied how UFOs could be used as”clever hostile propaganda” trick to take advantage of thepopulace’s gullibility; how Mengele’s family never claimed his bones–theyknew they weren’t the real ones, and how the International Red Cross gave himan I.D.S. to travel with; South Africa’s occult Shu Shung Palace… maybesomeone else will pick up where this author has left off, the mind-control isall around us!